CARE sen er poly aS == 4) PJ ESS Sertryk af Botanisk Tidsskrift. 27. Bind. 2. Hefte, København 1906. 5 Arbejder fra den Botaniske Have i Kobenhavn. Nr. 30. Lieutenant Olufsen’s second Pamir-Expedition. Plants collected in Asia-Media and Persia. IV. By Ove Paulsen. LIBRARY er À NEW YORK BOTANICAL Scrophulariaceae. GARDEN. 1. Verbascum Blattaria L.; Ldb. fl. ros. III p. 196; Bois. fl. or. IV p- 308. Ferghana: N. 306, at Andidshan. May 27. 1898. 2. Verbascum pyramidatum M. Bieb.; Ldb. fl. ros. III p. 199; Bois. fl. or. IV p. 340. Persia: N. 2149. prov. Gilan, at Resht. Sept. 13. 1899. 3. Verbascum sp. (V. specioso aff.). Pamir: N. 1461, prov. Garan, at Anderab. Alt. 26002, Oct. 10. 1898. This plant is like a hybrid. The capsules are empty. 4. Linaria hepatica Bunge, Ldb. fl. alt. II p. 445., Ldb. ie. fl. ros. alt. tab. 91; L. macroura M. Bieb. var. hepatica Benth., D. C. Prodr. X p- 273; Ldb. fl. ros. III p. 207; ? L. odora (M. Bieb.) Chav., O. Fedtschenko, fl. du Pamir p. 158. Pamir: N. 723, on dry ground at Shatshan, alt 3800™. July 11. 1898; N. 957, on dry slopes near the lake Jashil Kul, alt. 4000™. July 27. 1898. It seems to me that this species is quite another than L. macroura M. Bieb., differring by less gracile flowers and shorter spurs (shorter than the flowers, the rate is about 9: 14), and the more confert leaves. My specimens are rather ramified, the shoots issue from horizontal roots. The leaves are very narrow and slightly trinerved. While living «othe flowers are yellow and orange, when dead, they have a tint of S violet. — On the whole my plants agree well with Bunge’s description © and Ledebour’s figure. The flowers (23—25™™ long) are much larger than those of L. odora (M. B.) Chav. 14* NOV 20 — 210 — 5. Scrophularia incisa Weinm.; Ldb. fl. alt. II p. 442; Ldb. fl. ros. II p. 219; O. Fedtschenko fl. du Pamir p. 158. — — var. pamirica O. Fedtsch. ].c. Pamir: N. 737, Jaman Tal near Pamirski Post. Alt. 38002. July 12. 1898. 6. Dodartia orientalis L.; Ldb. fl. ros. III p. 224; Bois. fl. or. IV p. 424. Buchara: N. 206, May 15. 1898; N. 1705, May 25. 1899; Chiwa: N. 2056, in sandy desert at Kunja Urgentsh. Aug. 1. 1899. 7. Limosella aquatica L.; Ldb. fl. ros. II p. 226; Bois. fl. or. IV p. 428. — — var. tenuifolia Wolf, in Hoffm. Deutschl. fl. I, 2, p. 29. Pamir, prov. Ishkashim, in a pond at Rang. Alt. 2700™. Oct. 1. 1898. 8. Leptorhabdos micrantha Schrenk.; Ldb. fl. ros. III p. 256; B. A. Fedtschenko: Mat. d. fl. Shugnana, in Trav. Mus bot. Acad. imp. se. St. Pt. ]. 1902, p. 46. Pamir: N. 1504, prov. Garan, at Darmaraght. Alt. 2300™. Oct. 10. 1898. 9. Euphrasia hirtella Jordan, Wettstein Monogr. p. 175 (det C. H. Ostenfeld). Pamir: N. 966, at the river Mardianai near the lake Jashil Kul. Alt. 3800™. July 26. 1898. 10. Euphrasia Regelii Wettst. Monogr. p. 81 (det. C. H. Ostenfeld) O. Fedtschenko fl. du Pamir p. 160. Alai mountains: N. 493, at the Taldyk-river, Olgm Lug. Alt. 2600™, June 22. 1898. 11. Pedicularis cheilanthifolia Schrenk.; Ldb. fl. ros. III p. 273; Maximowicz: Diagn. pl. nov. asiat. VII, Mél. biol. XII, 1888, p. 864; D. Prain: The sp. of Pedicularis of the Indian empire, Ann. roy. bot. garden Calcutta Ill, 1890, p. 171, tab. 32; O. Fedtschenko fl. du Pamir, Acta H. Petrop. XXI, 1903, p. 163. Pamir: N. 1220, in marshes in the Chargush-pass. Alt. 4300. Sept. 3. 1898. 12. Pedicularis interrupta Steph.; Ldb. fl. ros. III p. 269; Maxim. 1. c. p. 871; Prain L. c. p. 86; O. Fedtschenho fl. du Pamir L. c. p. 160. Ferghana: N. 349, at Langar near Osh. June 16. 1898. 13. Pedicularis achilleifolia Steph.; Bunge Verzeichn. Altai Pfl. 1836, p.61; Ldb. fl. ros. III p. 294; Maxim. l.c.p. 905; Prain I. c. p. 89. — 211 — Pamir: N.986, on moist slopes near Jashil Kul. Alt. 40002, July 29. 1898. The lower bracts are trifid, as Bunge describes them. 14. Pedicularis pulchra n. sp. (Sect. Bidentatae) Perennis humilis foliis 2—4-natim verticillatis circumscriptione anguste lanceolatis, petiolatis, sinuato-pinnatifidis laciniis (15—20) distantibus aculeato-serratis tenuiter ea: arachnoideo-pubescentibus vel fere glabris. Flores 2—4-natim verticillati breviter pedicellati distantia inter verticillos longiores. Bracteae longitudine calycis lineari-lanceolatae acutae superne minute denticulatae. Calyx 1— 1,4°” longus campanulato-cylin- 2 N dricus elevatim nervosus, nervi episepali magni arachnoideo-pubescentes, dentes 5—7 (1—2 ie > parvi uccessoriiy acuti cartilagineo-mucro- nati integri. MUNI Soa a a Corolla calycem ter aequans sursum ampliata recta vel inferne curvatula. Galea so à labio paullo longior erostris (rariter rostrum Je acutum fere perpendiculariter erectum adest) i superne rotundata antice truncata et infra / apicem utrinque unidentata. — Labii lobi Fig. 1. rotundati, medius parvus. Filamenta prope basin corollae inserta, longa longiuscule, brevia breviter lanata. — Capsula longiter (10—10™™) pedicellata sepalis aequi- longa vel brevior, ovata beviter acuminata. Semina elliptica ce. 2,5" longa testa cinerea reticulata vestita. Pamir: N. 988, on moist slopes near Jashil Kul. Alt. 40002, July 29. 1898; (flowering specimen) N. 1068, ibid. Aug. 8. 1898. Alt. 3800™ (fruiting specimen). This species seems to be most allied to the Platyrrhynchae Prain (1. c. p.86). The leaves are rather like those of P. alaschanica Max., as they are figured by Prain Pl. 25 AB but in the flowers this species is quite different from P. pulchra, see also Maxim. 1. c. tab. V fig. 86. 15. Pedicularis pycnantha Bois. fl. or. IVp. 484; Maxim. 1. cp. 894; Hook. fl. brit. Ind. IV p. 310; Prain I. c. p. 179, pl. 28, B. Alai mountains: N. 465, in Juniper forest at Olgin Lug. Alt. 2700™. June 21. 1898. 16. Pedicularis rhinanthoides Schrenk.; Lab. fl. ros. III p. 276 Maxim. I. c. p. 786; Prain l.c. p. 109, pl. I, A-D; O. Fedtschenko flore du Pamir 1. c. p. 162. — 212 — Pamir: N. 955, in marshes at the river Mardianai at Jashil Kul. Alt. 3800™. July 25. 1898. 17. Pedicularis uliginosa Bunge; Ldb. fl. ros. III p.290; Maxim. l. c.-p. 904 tab. VI fig. 151; Prain 1. c. p. 89; O. Fedtschenko flore du Pamir t..c. p. 162. Pamir: N. 697, in marshes at Murghab. Alt. 3800™. July 8. 1898; N. 771, Tshatir Tash. Alt. 4000™. July 14. 1898. 18. Pedicularis dubia B. Fedtschenko in Mat. fl. Shugn., Trav. Mus. Bot. Acad. Imp. St. Pétersb. I. 1902 p. 46. Like Fedtschenko’s plant this has resemblance to P. dolichorhiza Schrenk., but the rostrum is shorter, and in my specimens the calyx is long (ab. 2%), almost tubular and some villous. The flowers were whitish yellow. Alai mountains: N. 572, in the Juniper forests at Olgin Lug. Alt. 3000™. June 25. 1898. 19. Veronica aquatica Bernh., Ueb. d. Begriff d. Pflanzenart. Erfurt 1834. p. 66; Ascherson u. Graebner. fl. d. nordostdeutschen Flachl. p. 635. Ferghana: N. 325, at Osh. June 3. 1898. 20. Veronica oxycarpa Bois. fl. or. IV p. 438; V. Anagallis L. var. oxycarpa Hook. fl. brit. Ind. IV p. 239; ? V. Anagallis Fedtschenko fl. du Pamir p. 159. Pamir: N. 1063, at a hot spring near the lake Jashil Kul. Alt. 3800™, Aug. 8. 1898; N. 1180, ibid., Aug. 29. 1898; N. 1265, at a spring near Djangarlik at the river Pamir daria. Alt. 3600™. Sept. 6. 1898. 21. Veronica Hjuleri n. sp. Sect. Beccabunga. Perennis glaberrima carnosa diffusa caulibus numerosis prostratis inferne radicantibus 5—14™ longis. Internodia usque ad 1% longa. Folia breviter petiolata lata obtusa ovata vel sub- orbiculata basi abrupte attenuata vel cordiformi, margine leviter crenata. — Racemi in axillis oppositi declinati densi, foliis longiores, pedunculis foliis brevioribus suffulti ; bracteae spathulato-lineares pedicellis longiores vel aequilongae. Sepala 4 acuta subconformia capsula breviora. Corolla coerulea capsula aequilonga. Capsula a latere subcompressa suborbi- culata non emarginata, polysperma. Stylus capsula matura bis—ter brevior. Semen fere semiglobosum minute foveolata facie plana fossa punctiformi munitum. Pamir: N. 1191, at a spring close by the lake Jashil Kul. Alt. 3800™. Aug. 28. 1898. This species calls to mind small forms of Lysimachia nummularia. I have named it after Mr. A. Hjuler, member of the expedition. 22. Veronica biloba L.; Ldb. fl. ros. III p. 252; Trautv. enum pl. Song. p. 440; Bois. fl. or. IV p. 464; Hook. fl. brit. Ind. IV p. 294. O. Fedt- schenko fl. du Pamir p. 160. | Ferghana: N.1616, in cultivated land at Osh. April 10. 1899. — — var. dasycarpa Trautv. |. c. V. campylopoda Bois. |. c. Samarkand: N.80, 97. May 1898. — — var. platycarpa Trautv. I. c. Samarkand: N.81. May 1898. — — var. exilis Schott. (?) Bois. 1. c. Pamir: N. 687, on dry plains at Sary Mullah. Alt. 4100, July 5. 1898; N. 1229, on dry spots in the Chargush-pass. Alt. 4200™. Sept. 2. 1898. The Pamir-specimens are small, with few and almost entire leaves. 23. Veronica cardiocarpa Walp. Rep. Ill p. 335; Ldb. fl. ros. III p. 252; V. biloba L. var., Hook. fl. brit. Ind. IV p. 295. ©. Fedtschenko fl. du Pamir p. 160. Alai mountains: N. 503, Olgin Lug. Alt. 2600, June 22. 1898. 24. Veronica rubrifolia Bois. fl. or. IV p. 465 (ex descript.). Pamir: N. 769, on a stony plain at Kara-Su, near the Murghab- river. Alt. 3800™. July 12. 1898; N. 1097, on the top of a hill at the lake Jashil Kul. Alt. 4100m. Aug. 11. 1898. Selaginaceae. Lagotis glauca Gärtn. Maximowiez in Bull. Ac. se. St. Petersb. XXVII p. 523; Hook. fl. brit. Ind. IV p. 559; O. Fedischenko fl. du Pamir p. 164; Gymnandra borealis Pallas, Reise Ill, Anh. p. 22, tab. A, 1; DC. Prodr. XII p.25; Trautv. Enum. song. p. 445. — — var. Pallasii (Cham. et Schld.) Trautv. 1. c.; Maxim. I. c.; G. Pallasii Cham. et Shhld.; Ldb. fl. ros. Il p. 332. Pamir: N. 1238, on moist slopes in the Chargush-pass. Alt. 4200™ Sept. 3. 1898. Gentianaceae det. Prof. N. Kusnezow, Jurjew. 1. Gentiana barbata Froel.; O. Fedtschenko fl. du Pamir p. 145. Pamir: N.998, at the river Mardianai near Jashil Kul. Alt. 3800™. July 29. 1898; N. 1170, at a stream near the lake Bulung Kul. Alt. 3800™. Aug. 25. 1898; N. 1401, in a ravine at Torguz, prov. Wakhan. Alt. 2900m. Sept. 19. 1898. — 214 — 2. Gentiana falcata Turcz.; O. Fedtschenko fl. du Pamir p. 144. Pamir: N. 1233, on moist slopes in the Chargush-pass. Alt. 4200™. Sept. 3. 1898. 3. Gentiana leucomelaena Maxim.; O. Fedtschenko fl. du Pamir p. 146. Alai mountains: N. 494, at the river Taldyk, Olgin Lug. Alt. 2600™. June 22. 1898; Pamir: N. 802, at the river Alitshur. Alt. 3900", July 16. 1898. 4. Gentiana prostrata Haenke; O. Fedtschenko fl. du Pamir p. 146. — — var. a f. major Herder. Pamir: in marshes at the river Mardianai, at Jashil Kul. Alt. 3800m. July 29. 1898. 5. Gentiana Olivieri Griseb. f. typica Rgl. Samarkand: N. 113, in steppe at Balan Hur. May 6. 1898; N. 118, in steppe at Chawast. May 7. 1898; Alai mountains: N. 597, in the Juniper forests at Olgin Lug. Alt.2600™. June 24. 1898. 6. Gentiana umbellata M. B.; O. Fedtschenko fl. du Pamir p. 145. Pamir: N. 1407, at a stream near Torguz, prov. Wakhan. Alt. 2900™. Sept. 21. 1898. - 7. Pleurogyne carinthiaca Griseb.; O. Fedtschenko fl. du Pamir p. 148. Pamir: N. 1195, at the lake Bulung Kul. Alt. 3800™. Aug. 30. 1898; at a stream in the Chargush-pass. Alt. 4200. Sept. 3. 1898. 8. Swertia connata Schrenk. Pamir: N. 1272a, Djangariik at the river Pamir Daria. Alt. 3600™. Sept. 6. 1898; ?N. 1271, ibid. 9. Swertia marginata Schrenk; O. Fedtschenko fl. du Pamir p. 149. Pamir: N. 749, at the river Kara-Su. Alt. 3800™. July 12. 1898; N. 956, in marshes at the river Mardianai, at Jashil Kul. Alt. 3800™. July 25. 1898; N. 1092, on moist slopes near Jashil Kul. Alt. 4100. Aug. 11. 1898. 7 | Borraginaceae. My plants of this family were in 1900 forwarded to Prof. M. Gürke of Berlin for determination; he retained them for some years, but having no time and a scarce material for comparison, he sent them back, mostly without determinations and duplicate specimens. I give his determinations, also when I do not accept them. Where Prof. Gürke is not named, I have identified the plant myself. — 215 — 1. Tournefortia sibirica L. (det. Gürke) T. Arguzia R. et S.; Bap. fi. ros. Il p. 97% Bois. fl. or. IV p. 125. Chiwa: N. 1917, 1924, near the city of Chiwa. July 1899; N. 2055, in sandy desert at Kunja Urgentsh. Aug. 1. 1899. 2. Heliotropium dasycarpum Ldb. in Eichw. Pl. Casp. Caue. p. 11, tab. V; Ldb. fl. ros. III p. 101; Bunge relig. Lehman. p. 400; Bunge Heliotr. Mittell. Orient., Bul. soc. nat. Moscou 1869 I p. 323; Bois. fl. or. IV p. 140. Chiwa: N. 2027, between Chodsheli and Kunja Urgentsh. July 27. 1899. 3. Heliotropium europaeum L. var. tenuiflorum (Guss.) Bois. (det. Giirke); Bois. fl. or. IV p. 130. Merw: N. 1757, in the steppe at Rabnina. June 2. 1899; Chiwa: N. 2047, in cultivated land at Kunja Urgentsh; Persia: N. 2183, prov. Gilan, in forests at Imam Sadé Hashim. Sept. 16. 1899. 4. Heliotropium Radula Fisch. et Mey.; Ldb. fl. ros. III p. 101; Bunge relig. Lehman. p. 403; Bunge Heliotr. Or. 1. c. p. 329; Bois. fl. or. IV p. 144. Buchara: N. 197, in sandy desert at Chodsha Dawlet. May 14. 1898; N. 1696, in cultivated land near the city of Buchara. May 23. 1899, (these two are identified by Gürke as: H. eremobium Bunge); ?N. 1856, in sandy desert at Tashachér at the river Amu Daria between Tshardshui and Chiwa, June 22. 1899; ?N. 1968, in sandy desert near Chiwa, July 11. 1899, (these two are without flowers, identified by Giirke as: H. eremobium Bunge?) 5. Heliotropium sogdianum Bunge in reliq. Lehman. p. 403; Bunge Heliotr. Or. 1. c. p. 329; Bois. fl. or. IV p. 146. Buchara: N. 204, in sandy desert at Jakatut. May 1898 (this is after Gürke: H. chorassanicum Bunge); N. 1838, in sandy desert at Ustyk. June 19. 1899. 6. Anchusa arvensis (L.) M. B. (det. Giirke); Bois. fl. or. IV p. 160; Lycopsis arvensis L.; Ldb. fl. ros. III p. 121. Ferghana: N. 293, in cultivated land at Margelan. May 25. 1898. Pamir: N. 1292, in cultivated land at Langarkisht. Alt. 3000™. Sept. 8. 1898. 7. Anchusa hispida Forsk.; Bunge relig. Lehman. p. 405; Bois. fl. or. IV p.158. (After Gürke: Microula Benthami Clarke ?). Buchara: N. 202, in sandy desert at Jakatut. May 14. 1898. 8. Anchusa italica Retz.; Ldb. fl. ros. II p. 119; Bois. fl. or. IV p. 154. Ferghana: N. 330, in cultivated land at Osh. June 8. 1898. — 216 — 9. Nonnea picta (M. B.) Fisch. et Mey. (det. Gürke); Ldb. fl. ros. III p. 110; Bois. fl. or. IV p. 166. Alai mountains: N. 415, at Sufi Kurgan. Alt. 2000, June 18. 1898. 10. Onosma echioides L. var. hispidum Koch; Ldb. fl. ros. II p. 125. (After Gürke: O. bulbotrichum M. B.). Samarkand: N. 172, in the steppe at Balan Hur. May 12. 1898. 11. Onosma Gmelini Lab. fl. alt. I p. 184; Ldb. Ic. fl. alt. ill. tab. 280; Ldb. fl. ros. III p. 126; O. echioides L.; Bois. fl. orient. IV p. 181; Hook. fl. brit. Ind. IV p.178. (After Gürke: O. echioides L.) I think this form is different from O. echioides and O. arenarium W.K.; the corolla and the stamens are rather long. See also: Flora exsiccata Austro-Hungarica N. 1411, Remarks on the label. Alai mountains: N. 446, in the Juniper forests at Olgin Lug. Alt. 2600™. June 20. 1898. 12. Onosma sp. Persia: N. 2212, in mountains near Teheran. Sept. 28. 1899. 13. Macrotomia euchromon (Royle); Lithospermum euchromon Royle Ill. p. 305, 1839; DC. Prodr. X p. 82; Stenosolenium perenne Schrenk in Fisch. et Mey. Enum. pl. Schrenk p. 34. < aurantiacum). But commonly the mothercell of embryosac is displaced and obliterated, while an aposporical embryosac supersedes. The third, but rarer case is, that apogamical embryosacs (as in Taraxa- cum) are developed. In the two last cases the eggcells have the un- reduced number of chromosomes and are capable to form seeds without fertilisation”. Still I have got more than 70 samples of seeds, which now are growing in our Botanical Garden ; but they belong nearly all to the Archieracia and the Piloselloidea. 1 — 15* eng bilities of error which are worth considering, are 1°, that the pollen- grains might have germinated in the anthers before we castrated the head, and 2°, that the stimulus of castration might have been the exciting cause of the development of the embryo. Although both those suppositions seem improbable, they cannot be refuted until other experiments with an exclusively female species has reduced the possibility to zero. The castrated flower-heads develop like the un-wounded ones, but are easily recognizable by their shortness (see the text-figure) ; when the fruits are fully ripened, they force the bracts backwards as usual, but the aspect of such an opened castrated head with fullgrown fruits is rather curious because of the short pappus-rays. The plants used in the experi- ments have all grown in the open ground except some few which were transplanted into pots and isolated in a cold-house, but no other precautions were taken, and the castrated heads developed, un- covered, from the time of castra- tion to the harvest of the fruits. The fruits were sown as soon as possible, partly in the autumn of the same year, and partly in the next spring and always in baked soil to prevent foreign seeds. When they had germinated, most of them were thrown away, but in some case the plants have been kept for other purposes. With regard to the determination of the species it has been a very difficult business, and indeed it is practically impossible for one who is not a specialist to identify the species in this genus. I have done my best, but I fear that some names may be wrong. For some of the species Mr. Dahlstedt of Stockholm has kindly given me the names, and I wish here to express my best tanks to him for his valuable kindness. In our case a deter- mination going to the elementary species is also not necessary; when the collective species is correct, it will be sufficient. Fig. 1. Three heads of Hieracium sp., of which two grow out after castration. — 229 — Experiments carried out in 1903 (Series 1) '). Species of Hieracium growing in different places in the Bota- nical Gardens of Copenhagen were castrated in the above described manner during June and the beginning af July and the seeds collected in July— August. (1) H. aurantiacum L., growing in the Danish Quarter of the Garden. Ripe) seeds collected July 28; sown in the beginning of May 1904; germinated June 4'h; planted out August 28th; flo- wered copiously June 1905 (Nr. 58). (2) H. aurantiacum L., same clump; castrated later; ripe seeds collected in August; sown as above; germinated June 13"; discarded. (3) H. excellens Blocki*), growing in the Hieracium-plot of the Garden. Ripe seeds collected in August; sown as above, germi- nated June 4'» 1904; discarded. (4) 4H. pilosella L., growing in a lawn near a fasciated Sam- bucus nigra in the Garden. Ripe seeds collected in August; sown as above, germinated June 13th 1904; planted out August 28; flowered copiously June 1905 (Nr. 59). (5) H. glaucum All., growing in the Hieracium-plot. Ripe seeds collected July 23 1903; sown as above; germinated June 13th 1904; discarded. (6) H. Bornmiilleri Freyn. Ripe seeds collected August 1* 1903; sown as above; germinated May 26 1904; discarded. (7) H. neocerinthe Fr. (determ. Dahlstedt)*), growing in the Hieracium-plot. Ripe seeds collected July 15% 1903; sown as above; germinated Maj 25t 1904; discarded. (8) A. sp. of Cerinthoidea (determ. Dahlstedt)°), growing spon- taneously in a shrubbery in the Garden. Ripe seeds collected July 11 1903; sown as above; germinated May 25% 1904; dis- carded. (9) H. longifolium Schleich. (revis. Dahistedt), growing in a propagating-plot in the Garden. Ripe seeds collected July 25% 1903; sown as above; germinated June 13! 1904; discarded. 1) Published previously in extract in this periodical, see Ostenfeld & Raun- kiær (1903). 2) i. e. After castration. 8) Referred to by Ostenfeld & Raunkiær (1903, p. 411) as H. magyaricum Nag. & Pet. At that time I did not know that the species is a purely female one. 4) H. cerinthoides L. by Ostenfeld & Raunkiær (1903). 5) H. cesium Fr. f.? by Ostenfeld & Raunkiær (1903). — 230 — (10) H. silvaticum, subsp. marginellum Dahlst. (determ. Dahl- stedt)'), growing in the Danish Quarter of the Garden. Ripe seeds collected July 28 1903; sown as above; germinated June 4 1904; discarded. (11) H. cesium Fr., forma (determ. Dahlstedt), growing in the Danish Quarter; Ripe seeds collected July 28 1903; sown as above; germinated June 4th 1904; discarded. (12) H. hypareticum Alma. (revis. Dahlstedt), growing in a pro- pogating-plot in the Garden, brought home from East-Grenland by Mr. C. Kruuse. Ripe seeds collected July 44 1903, some of them immediately after ripening laid in wet filtering paper for germina- ting, germinated July 26% 1903; others sown as above, germi- nated May 25!" 1904; planted out and flowered for first time in September— October 1904, copiously again in June 1905. (Nr. 57). (13) H. danicum Dahlst. (syn. H. integrifolium Lange, revis. Dahlstedt), growing in a shrubbery in the Garden, planted in pot in June 1903, castrated. Ripe seeds collected July 15t 1903; sown as above; germinated May 258 1904, discarded. (14) H. dovrense Fr., subsp. groenlandicum Almq., var amitso- kense Almq. (determ. Dahlstedt)?), growing in the Danish Quarter of the Garden. Ripe seeds collected July 28th 1903; sown as above; germinated May 25th 1904; discarded. (15) H. sp., aff. H. strictum Fr. (determ. Dahlstedt)*), from a plot in the Garden; ripe seeds collected July 28t 1903; sown as above, germinated May 25th 1904; discarded. (16) H. rigidum Fr., forma (determ. Dahlstedt)*), growing in the Danish Quarter and in the Hieracium-plot of the Garden; three individuals. Ripe seeds collected July 15th, 28t and 31st of 1903; sown as above; germinated May 25th 1904; discarded. (17) H. albidum Vill., growing in a plot in the Garden. Ripe seeds collected June 11t!k— 19th 1903; sown as above; germinated May 25t 1904; discarded. (18) H. umbellatum L., growing in the Danish Quarter of the Garden. Ripe (empty?) seeds collected in August 1903; sown as above, but did not germinate. The specimens in question do not set nek pl fruits at all. ) H. silvaticum by Ostenfeld & Raunkiær. *) H. tridentatum (partly) by Ostenfeld & Raunkiær. 3) H. prenanthoides L.(?) by Ostenfeld & Raunkiær. 4) H. tridentatum Fr. (partly), H. anfractum Fr. and H. rigidum Fr. by Osten- feld & Raunkier. Experiments carried out in 1904 (Series II). In June of 1904 the castration experiments were continued in exactly the samme manner as in 1903. (1) H. pilosella L. from the same clump as Series I4. June 11th 1904; 4 heads were castrated; the seeds were ripe at July 1*; sown') immediately; germinated; planted out in September 1904; flowered and fruited copiously in June—July 1905; discarded (No. 51). (2) HA. substoloniflorum Nag. & Pet., f. longipilum (determ. Dahlstedt), growing in a lawn in the Garden (near the Observa- tory). June 11% 1904; 15 heads were castrated; the seeds were ripe at July 4b, sown immediately; germinated; planted out in September; flowered and fruited copiously in June—July 1905. (No. 53). (3) H. flagellare Willd. (revis. Dahlstedt), growing together with the foregoing. June 11tk 1904; 20 heads were castrated; some of them did not develop; the seeds of the developed heads ripe July Ath; germinated and planted out as above; flowered and fruited copiously in June—July 1905 (No. 52). (4) H. pilosella L., growing in a lawn near the Taxus-shrub- bery in the Garden; the specimens bear ripe fruits, but some of them are empty. June 11% 1904; 10 heads were castrated, but did not develop well; June 20th, all faded. New castration gave no result, as the grass of the lawn was cut. Experiments carried out in 1905 (Series VI). (1) A. venosum L. A specimen in our herbarium, collected in Sayre, U.S. A., 1903 by Mr. W. C. Barbour, had ripe seeds, which were sown in July 1904 and germinated; in May 1905 they were planted out and flowered copiously from the end of June (No. 54). — July 2rd 1905; 10 heads were castrated, but no full seeds were developed. The heads which were intact, gave ripe seeds (93 barren fruits to 91 full). Again in September a good many heads were castrated, but with the same negative result; at that time the intact heads gave more barren and fewer full fruits (855 barren to 128 full). The full fruits have germi- nated in 1906. (2) H. Gronovii Willd.; seeds obtained from the Missouri Bo- tanical Garden, sown in the spring of 1905, germinated, trans- 1) Always in baked soil. 93e. — planted into a larger pot, where they flowered in September. Sep- tember 3rd—5th; 11 heads were castrated, but did not give any developed fruit. The intact heads gave, but sparingly, ripe fruits (553 barren to 215 full); the full fruits have germinated in the spring of 1906. As the plants stand in a closed cold-house, no cross-fertilisation has happened. (3) H. auricula L. (s. 1.); specimens transplanted to the Bo- tanical Garden from the northern part of Jutland (Skagens Odde, leg. M. L. Mortensen). July 9! 1905; 7 heads were castrated, but the heads all faded; also later castrations did not succeed. The intact heads gave ripe fruits, rather copiously, except in the late autumn, when nearly all fruits were barren. (4) H. sp., labelled H. lactaris, according to Mr. Dahlstedt belonging te the group of H. umbellatum; growing in the Hieracium- plot in the Garden. August 14th—15th; 7 heads (the only remaining ones, the main flowering period being over and ripe seeds developed) were castrated, but none gave full fruits. (5) A. umbellatum L., f. filifolium, growing together with the foregoing species. Also of this form some few (10) unopened, late- developed heads were castrated in August and September, but without any positive result. (6) H. umbellatum L. f. dunense (revis. H. Dahlstedt); wild- growing specimens. The experiments were carried out in the dunes of North-Jutland near Tveersted and on specimens growing in their natural places. The plants were very common in the dunes and gave ripe and full fruits in abundance. July 25th—96th 1905; 9 heads, belonging to three individuals, were castrated; some of the heads began to develop, others faded in course of a week. As I had to leave the place about a fortnight after, the experiments were broken off August 5t; the half-developed heads were preserved in alcohol and later examined thoroughly. It then appeared, that the ovule had grown to a certain point, but no embryo was formed; we are therefore justified in saying that no fructification occurs after castration. (7) H. virosum Pall.; seeds obtained from the Missouri Botanical Gardens were sown in the spring of 1905, planted out in July, flowered very sparingly in September. September 3"4; two heads were castrated, but the one did not succeed; the other gave 36 full fruits (12 empty), which have germinated in the spring of 1906.— If we arrange the species used in experiments in 1903—05 Zi EN after the very valuable system given by A. Peter in Engler & Prantl, Natürl. Pflanzenfam., IV, 5, pp. 375—387, we get the follo- wing results of the castration: — —$— m en Apogamie!) Non-apogamic A. Subgenus H: pilosella (Ser. 14, IT1)”) H. auricula (Ser. V13) Pilosella HA. flagellare (Ser. IL3) H. substoloniflorum (Ser. IL2) H. aurantiacum (Ser. I, 1-2) H. excellens (Ser. [3) Subgenus H. glaucum (Ser. 15) H. umbellatum (Ser. 118) Archieracium | H. Bornmülleri (Ser. I6) H. umbellatum, filifolium (Ser. H. neocerinthe (Ser. 17) VI5) H. sp. (Cerinthoidea) (Ser.1s) H. umbellatum, dunense (Ser. H. longifolium (Ser. 19) VI6) H. silvaticum marginellum(S. [10)| H. sp., aff. umbellatum (H. lac- H. cesium, forma (Ser. I 11) taris ?) (VI4) H. hyparcticum (Ser. 112) H. danicum (Ser. 113) H. dovrense groenlandicum (Ser. Iı4) H. sp., aff. strictum (Ser. 115) H. rigidum, forma (Sp. [16) | H. virosum (VI7) H. albidum (117) C. Subgenus H. venosum (Ser. VI1) Stenotheca H. Gronovii (Ser. VI2) The table shows, that 1) in the subgenus Pilosella most of the species are apogamic, only A. auricula, belonging to the section Auriculini, needs fertilisation; 2) in the subgenus Archie- racium many species belonging to different groups of the head- sections Awrella and Accipitrina are apogamic, only H. wmbellatum sensu latiore is non-apogamic; 3) both the species of the subgenus Stenotheca, used in the experiments, need fertilisation, and probably the other species of this comparatively small subgenus do the same. 1) I use the term “apogamy” in the sense, that it comprehends all cases where a plant gives seeds developed from the ovules without fertilisation, whether the eggcell or other cells of the embryosac or a cell from the nucellus are the starting point. *) The result of Ser. Il, is uncertain. — 234 — In correlation with these facts the polymorphism and the power to make hybrids are not the same in the three subgenera. The most polymorphic subgenus is Archieracium, of which probably most of the species are apogamic; the only two hybrids of this subgenus, mentioned in literature as obtained artificially by G. Mendel, have both H. umbellatum — the only non-apogamic species — as father"). The cytological researchs by S. Murbeck (1904, pp. 291—294) and H. O. Juel (1905, pp. 10—13) have given the explanation af these things. Murbeck has examined three species of the head-section Aurella (sub-section Vulgata and a group intermediate between Vulgata and Tomentosa) and found them parthenogenetic in the sense, that the eggcell becomes an embryo; Juel on the other hand has found, that the development of both pollen and eggcell in H. umbellatum is quite typical, just as im an ordinary plant of the Composite. These results correspond very well with the results of my castration experiments. With regard to the cytological development in species of the other two subgenera nothing is to be found in the literature, but Dr. O. Rosenberg’s examinations (which he will publish in his paper) agree very well with my results. Worth noticing is also, that G. Mendel”) points out, that A. auricula is the best species for making hybrids artificially and that all the offsprings of his crossings after removal of the anthers have been hybrids, while from H. aurantiacum as motherplant hybrids could not be raised. The subgenus Stenotheca has not before been used for any expe- riments at all; but I should think the species of this subgenus would behave as the other genera of Cichorieæ (Taraxacum excepted). It is natural, that such an easy method of examining plants with regard to their power to develop fruits without fertilisation as that of Raunkiær has caused, that many other botanists have repeated the experiments with Taraxacum and Hieracium. As to Hieracium we find a short remark by H. Zahn (1904, p. 170), in which he mentions, that castration experiments with H. boreale Fr., ssp. obliquum Jord. have succeeded. According to E. Strasburger (1904, p. 117) I. B. Overton has also repeated the castration experiments with the positive result. Further O. Kirchner (1905, p. 87) says briefly, that he has castrated H. aurantiacum and has examined the castrated heads cytologically 1) C. Correns (1905), pp. 234—235. 2) C. Correns (1905), p. 230. — 935 — with a result, which agrees with Murbeck’s, i. e. that the egg- cell becomes an embryo. No doubt other botanists have made experiments of the same kind, but I have not found more mentioned in the literature !). The results of the castration experiments may be summed up thus: In the genus Hieracium we have apogamic and non-apogamic species, together with transitions between both kinds; the three subgenera are in this respect not quite alike, the subgenus Stenotheca representing the most primitive stage with typical fertili- sation; the subgenus Pilosella being intermediate, as it comprehends both apogamic and typically fertilisating species, nevertheless mostly apogamic; and the subgenus Archieracium representing the most developed stage with nearly all species apogamic, only excepting the H. umbellatum-group. The genus Taraxacum has gone a little farther, as all its species are apogamic — as far as we at present know. Corresponding to these results the cytological investigations, which have been made, give a graduation in the abormal develop- ment of the eggcell. The power to make hybrids in Pilosella and Archieracium agrees well with the apogamic or non-apogamic development, but still here much remains to be done in both sub- genera and more too in the subgenus Stenotheca; the following experiments with hybridisation in the subgenus Pilosella will, taken together with the earlier experiments by F. Schultz, G. Mendel, and A. Peter, throw some light upon several perplexing facts. III. Hybridisation Experiments. When I did my first crossmg experiment by bringing the pollen of H. aurantiacum to the stigmas of H. pilosella, I thought, it would be of no result at all, as I had lately discovered the power to set fruits after castration in the two species here in question. Therefore in my first note in Ber. D. bot. Ges. (1904), p. 380 I mentioned the experiment as one without any probability of success. But a few months after (1904, 2) I could annonce (pp. 538—539), that this very simple experiment had given rise to 19 individuals of which one was an unquestionable hybrid, having characters intermediate between those of the parents. 1) Perhaps I may here note, that I have tried castration with some other Composite, but with negative results, viz. Calendula- and Dimorpho- theca-species, further Aster- and Eupatorium-species from North-America. — 236 — This experiment was made in 1903 and was carried out in the following way: Some newly opened flower-heads of the same clump of H. pilosella which was used in castration experiment Ser. I4, and Ser. Ilı, were selected. Flower-heads of H. aurantiacum taken from the Danish Quarter of the Botanical Garden (Ser. I1 and 2), were passed accross the heads of H. pilosella in such a way that the aurantiacum-pollen, which was present in large quantity, could be cought by the papille of the stigmas. Afterwards the heads (with small labels) were left to ripen. The crossing was made in July and the ripe seeds were collected in August; next year (1904) they were sown in baked soil the 1st of May, germinated the 25th of May and were planted out in September; there were then 19 plants, which flowered for the first time, very sparingly, in October. It then appeared that, while the 18 specimens were true H. pilosella, the 19th was a hybrid, as will be seen from the fig. 7 on the Plate, which is a painting of the first flowering- scape. In June of 1905 the plant flowered again and continued so most of the summer. On June 7!h three heads were castrated, but they did not develop any ripe fruit; the same negative result came from a new castration of 4 heads in September. The intact heads gave mostly empty fruits, but also a few ones, which have germi- nated in September of 1905 and which (summer of 1906) are now planted out. Five specimens of this offspring have flowered now and are very remarkable being not like each other, some nearer Pilosella than the parent plant. There is the chance that the flowers of the hybrid may have been fertilisated by another plant, because the fruits have been taken from heads which not have been isolated under glass. The primary hybrid is still alive and flowers in this summer; of the pure pilosella-offspring one plant is kept back, while the others have been thrown away. The most important characters of the hybrid compared with those of the parents are to been seen from the scheme on p. 237. The explanation of this experiment is not easy to give; the fact is, that the same plants of H. aurantiacum and H. pilosella which, as proved by the castration experiments, produce apogamic seeds, are able to cross among themselves, forming a hybrid of ordinary, nearly intermediate aspect; the hybrid has a very reduced power of setting fruit and has hitherto not given any apogamic seed. — 937 — pilosella The underside of | dense covering of | stellate hairs the leaves The basis of the | large and stiff hairsofthe leaves pilosella >< aurantiacum aurantiacum uncoloured | less dense covering of stellate hairs uncoloured or very slightly red no stellate hairs red The hairiness of | hispid and with | hispid and with | hispid and with the scape black glandular | black glandular | numerous black hairs and further | hairs and further | glandular hair at the basis with | at the basis with | and further at the numerous, longer, | longer, uncoloured | basis longer, more uncoloured hairs | orslightlyred hairs | or less red hairs | = : — —- — Arrangement of | one large termi- 2—5 heads of | rathersmallheads the flower-heads | nal head | rather large size; | arranged in a co- | one terminal, the | rymb at the top | others on branches | of the scape | going out from | different places of | | the main-scape | | 2 Golour of the co- | yellow, with a | lightly orange, at | orange red, at the rollas of the outer | narroworangered | the basis yellow, | basis lightly flowers stripe on the | withabroadorange | orange underside red stripe on the | underside | Colour of the co- | rollas ofthe other | flowers | pure yellow | yellow with orange red teeth ligthly orange, at the basis yellow A great help to clearing up these things and also to the solu- tion of other problems was the discovery of a Hieracium-plant with quite empty and shrunken anthers, a purely female plant. I found this plant in a lawn and saw afterwards, that it had escaped from the Hieracium-plot, where the same form was labelled H. It is a tall species of the subgenus Pilosella; it has a very rich-flowered corymb at the top of the scape, small and rather few-flowered yellow heads; the leaves are hairy, but excellens Blocki. not densely covered with stellate hairs; it gives rise to many and long epiterrean stolons. It is allied to H. magyaricum N. & P., and under this name I have used the species for castration experiments in 1903 (Ser. Is), without knowing that castration was not at all necessary, only isolation. The Plate gives a picture of an old corymb and of a young one (Figs. 1 & 2). I could not find the species-name excellens in any botanical work, but the register of the Botanical Garden gave the evidence, that seeds with this name were received from the Botanical Garden of Lemberg in Galizia in 1889, and that since then the plant has grown in our garden. I then wrote to the Garden of Lem- berg, but did not get any answer. Later Professor Blocki of Lemberg has written to me, that the species was named by him without description, and as I asked him to give a description and sent him a dried specimen of my plant, he has been so kind to work out the following description for which I beg him to receive my best thanks. He points out that the cultivated specimens agree fully with his original ones: “Das mir zugesandte Hieracium ist in der That durchaus conform mit meinem Hier. excellens, dessen Diagnose ich Ihnen hiermit zu- kommen lasse: Hieracium excellens Blocki, n. sp. Sectio Praealtina Nag. et Pet. Rhizoma breve crassiusculum, semper stoloniferum ; stolones valde elongati, tenues, non adscendentes, interdum florentes, foliis lanceolatis numerosis instructi; caulis ad 80 cm. altus, minute striatus, haud fragilis, 3—4-phyllus, laxe paniculato-corymbosus, polycephalus, dense stellato-floccosus et prae- terea in inferiore parte pilis setulosis, in superiore elandulosis (1mm. longis) parcissime vestitus; pedunculi inflorescentiae inferiores remoti, superiores approximati, omnes densissime canofloccosi et parce glandulosi pilis longioribus basi nigricantibus intermixtis; folia haud denticulata, rosularia sat numerosa, exteriora sub anthesin sicca, reliqua persistentia, + /anceolata, acuta, ad basin sensim attenuata, ad 20 cm longa, 1:5—2-'5 lata, folia caulina sensim decres- centia, inferiore caulis parte inserta, omnia glaucescentia, pilis setu- losis 1mm longis supra spectantibus ciliata, supra praeter setulas 1mm longas rarissimas nuda, subtus + dense canofloccosa nervoque medio setulis ciliata; folia virginea in utraque pagina dense stellato- floccosa; capitula parva (5mm longa), dense stellato-floccosa et — 39 — praeterea — parce glandulosa pilis longioribus basi nigricantibus intermixtis; squamae lineari-lanceolatae, albo marginatae; ligulae luteae concolores. Floret ineunte Junio. Statio: Rasztowce pr. Skalat (Galiciae orientalis polonicae), in silvis, solo calcareo; in horto botanico Hauniensi ab anno 1889 culta.” H. Zahn (1904, p. 171, note) says, that H. excellens is a subspecies of the H. umbelliferum N. & P. (= cymosum-magyaricum), i. e. belonging to a species which is supposed to have originated from a cross between H. cymosum (sectio Cymosina) and: A. magyaricum (sectio Praealtina), but that does not agree with Blocki’s statement above, that his A. excellens belongs to the section Praealtina. H. Dahlstedt of Stockholm who has seen dried specimens of the cultivated plant, writes that it “belongs to an intermediate group between Florentina and Glomerata”; it is also cultivated in the botanical garden, Bergielund, near Stock- holm. Whatever the systematie position of the plant in question may be, it is certain, that it is near H. magyaricum N. & P. (H. Bauhini Bess.), and that it has the same long epiterrean stolons, which mostly are only leaf-bearing, but sometimes turn out to bear a terminal corymb of flower-heads. For my purpose the most interesting point in the characters of the form is its aborted pollen. I have later found another species, H. roxolanicum Rehmann; growing in the Hieracium-plot in our Garden, in which also the anthers were quite empty, but hitherto I have used only H. excellens for my experiments, and in this summer (1906) H. roxolanicum has died. The experiments with H. excellens have been carried out in the following way: Series III (H. excellens x aurantiacum). In the first days of June 1904 a specimen was planted in a pot and placed in a window facing NE. June 15%; all the opened flower-heads were cut off; of the two remaining corymbs the one (A) was shut within a cylindrical glass and the opening was closed with wadding; before that some of the unopened flower-heads moreover had been castrated (No. 45), the others were intact (No. 44). June 16th—17t; the newly-opened flower-heads of the other corymb (B) were fertilized with the pollen of H. aurantiacum growing in the Medical Quarter of the Garden (No. 46); the flower-heads of H. — 240 — aurantiacum were cautiously rubbed against the heads of H. excellens; this corymb was only isolated by being in a room where no other plant was present. June 30k; the ripe fruits were collected; in July they were sown in pots with burnt soil, germinated and were planted in pots with better soil; in September they were planted out in the Garden, where the young plants grew well during the autumn. In the beginning of June 1905 the flowering time began. The offspring of the corymb (A), both the castrated ones and the isolated ones, were all A. excellens — consequently apogamic offspring. Some of the flower-heads of this offspring were isolated again in July 1905; a few of the harvested fruits were sown, germinated very sparingly in September, and the only one which survived the winter was planted out in June 1906 (No. 100); other flower-heads, opened while under glass-isolation, were fertilized with the hybrid H. excellens X aurantiacum (No. 46) mentioned below; the fruits were sown, but these also, as all the fruits sown in July 1905, germinated very sparingly; the young plants (3) were planted out in June 1906, but are all pure H. excellens. I can not give any satisfactory explanation of the slight germination of all the fruits sown in July of 1905, but I think some mistake of an unknown kind must have been made. Of the fruits harvested from corymb (B) 26 specimens germinated, of which one (No. 46,6) only gave rise to a rosette of leaves without flowers, and consequently its character could not be deter- mined; neither until now has this specimen flowered. Among the 25 individuals 20 were pure H. excellens, which are supposed to have originated from apogamic fruits; as being of no interest they were discarded. The 5 remaining individuals were all with certainty hybrids, but were ail different from each other, some coming nearer to H. excellens, others to H. aurantiacum; still it is worth noticing that the mother, H. excellens, is the more dominant. The hybrids coming nearer to H. aurantiacum are hermaphrodite (with well developed pollen), the corolla is light orange-red, redest in the outer flowers, and the vegetative part of the plants is comparatively weak and with slighter power to develop stolons. Two of the hybrids were so precocious, that I, being away for some time, did not happen to follow their flowering; the one (No. 46,5) was near H. aurantiacum and hermaphrodite; its fruits were collected and sown, but did not germinate; only few of them appeared to be — 241 full fruits. Of the other hybrid (No. 46,1), which I did not see when flowering, the fruits were collected, but among 805 only 59 were apparently full and have given three plants, which probably will flower next year (No. 141). Another hybrid (No. 46,4) is hermaphrodite and not very far off H. aurantiacum, but still with more of 77. excellens ; it is also better in its vegetative parts; it is painted in the Plate as fig. 5. It flowered again in September, when the drawing was painted, and some of its heads were isolated, others castrated ; unfortunately it did not survive the winter. Of the fruits from castrated heads of it 82 were empty, 68 apparently full (No. 144); of them from isolated heads 318 were empty, 160 apparently full (No. 143). They were sown in the spring of 1906 and have ger- minated to some extent (38 plants). Two hybrids are nearer to H. excellens; they have copious stolons and are vigorous in all vegetative parts as well as in rich-flowered corymbs. The flowers are female as in H. excellens, from which they differ in a orange- red stripe on the under-side of the corollas of the outer flowers, and in the darker hairiness of the involucres and the stalks. The one of these two (No. 46,3) has given fruits after isolation; they were sown, and have germinated in September 1905 (No. 107), but only a single plant has come from them. The last hybrid (No. 46, 2) is very near to A. excellens and is perhaps only a pure H. excellens; not-isolated fruits germinated in 1905 and were planted out in 1906 (No. 142). — At present only the following primary hybrids are alive: 1° a hybrid certainly, but near excellens, (No. 46,3), 2° a plant which is so near excellens, that it is doubtful if any hybridisation has taken place (No. 46, 2), and 3° a plant which hitherto has not flowered (No. 46, 6). Series IV (H. excellens x aurantiacum). A specimen of H. excellens, planted in a pot, was placed in a cold-house. June 16t* 1904; after removing the opened flower- heads some buds were castrated. June 17; two heads, opened to day, were fertilized with AH. aurantiacum taken from a lawn in the Garden near the Observatory (No. 48). Harvest, sowing and planting as in the foregoing Series III. The offspring of the castrated heads was of course typical H. excellens (No. 47), of which a single plant is kept alive. Among the plants, growing from the cross, only one was not a pure H. extellens. This hybrid (No. 48 a) is a very robust plant with strong stolons, large radical leaves and tall and many-flowered corymbs. The heads are a little larger 16 — 942 — than those of AH. excellens, and they have a darker hairiness; the corollas are somewhat deeper yellow and the outer ones bear the red stripe on the underside; the flowers are purely female. Taken as a whole the hybrid origin is certain enough, but the characters are unquestionably nearer H. excellens. Ripe fruits after castration (No. 112) and after isolation (No. 145) have germinated, but sparingly; at present there are 8 young plants. Series V (H. excellens x pilosella). Another specimen of H. excellens, planted in a pot, was placed in the same cold-house as mentioned above. June 16th 1904; all the opened flower-heads were removed. June 17; six heads, now open, were fertilized with H. pilosella, taken from the lawn near the Observatory (No. 50). Harvest, sowing and planting as in the foregoing series. From fruits from the crossed heads 15 plants grew; 8 were pure H. excellens, but two of them (No. 50,9 and 50,10) first flowered in 1906. Among the other specimens one certain hybrid did not flower in 1905 and has died in the winter (No. 50,7). Only one plant (No. 50,4) is hermaphrodite, the other — hybrids are all female like their mother, perhaps with exception of one, which flowered so early in 1905 that I did not happen to examine it, and which has not flowered in 1906. The female hybrids (Nos. 50,1, 50,2, 50,3 and 50,s) are nearly alike: the vegetative parts are strong in all respects, the flower-heads are somewhat larger than those of H. excellens, but much smaller than those of H. pilosella; the heads are arranged in corymbs, usually richer than the figured one (Plate I, fig. 6), which is a rather slender specimen of No. 50,3, taken late in autumn of 1905. The undersides of the leaves bear a poor covering of stellate hairs, but do not get the whitish aspect of those of H. pilosella. Generally speaking the hybrids are nearer to H. excellens than to H. pilosella. Offspring of some of them are now in the Garden, but will first flower next year; the figured plant has given rise to two plants after castration (No. 147), and others are produced from not-isolated fruits of the same plant (No. 120) and of another, No. 50,2 (No. 117). The fruiting-power is rather small; during the second flowering in 1905 two castrated heads of the hermaphrodite specimen (No. 50, 4) gave no full fruits; five castrated heads of the female No. 50,3 gave 15 full and 142 barren fruits, while isolated heads of the same plant gave 7 full and 350 barren fruits. The experiments have at present reached this point, but when Son the next summer comes, we shall learn much more about the heredity of the second generation (the primary hybrids’s offspring). Owing to the very poor result of the sowing in July of 1905, the progress of our knowledge has been very limited. In this year the experiments are carried out on a larger scale. The perennial Hieracia are unusually well fitted for studies of heredily, as it is possible to get a new generation each year and.at the same time keep all the foregoing generations alive. If we sum up the hybridisation experiments hitherto carried out by me, we get the following results: (1) A hybrid, produced between H. pilosella as mother and H. aurantiacum as father, which is fairly intermediate between the parents. It has a very reduced fruiting-power. While both parents give fruits after castra- tion, this operation has hitherto not succeeded in the case of the hybrid. Whether the hybrid is able at all to give any fruits on self-fer- tilisation, is not yet decided. Fruits collected from not-isolated flowers have given an offspring of which the individuals are heterogeneous and mostly nearer to H. pilosella, than the primary hybrid is. It is not impossible that these fruits have come from flowers crossed with H. pilosella which grows in the neighbourhood of the hybrid. Mendel (1870, p. 51 & p. 53, and by C. Correns 1905, p. 233 etc.) points out again and again, that the offspring of Hieracium-hybrids, when arisen from “self-fertilized” flowers, always are alike and do not split as the offspring of Pisum-hybrids do. I think, he is quite right in his statement, and the cause of this constancy is the apogamy ; if so, the heterogeneous offspring of the here mentioned hybrid is due to the supposed crossing with the mother-species. In each flower-head of the hybrid only very few fruits are full, the main part being empty (barren); but unfortunately I have no figures from which to determine the percentage of the full fruits. Further investigations will clear up this question. (2) The species H. excellens, of which the pollen is aborted in all the flowers and which consequently is female, gives fruits after castration or isolation, and is of course apogamic; but not all the flowers develop full fruits. [ did not examine this phenomenon precisely in the true flowering-season (June—July), but I remember with certainty that I always found some barren fruits among the full ones. In autumn I counted the proportions between apparently full and barren fruits of some corymbs. It then appeared, that about half the fruits were barren, as will be seen from the following 16* = MN figures, but I do not think that the barren fruits are so numerous in the summer. full barren Mingividial eye a 100 83 1 — eee LOO 158 We will come back to this point again. This female species gives hybrids, when crossed with H. aurantiacum and with H. pilo- sella. The crossings are carried out in that way, that heads of the father-plant are carefully rubbed against the heads of the mother- plant, both kinds having been opened under isolation. The offspring, harvested from this procedure, consist of (1) numerous plants of H. excellens, like the mother in all parts, and (2) a few hybrids. The pure ercellens-offspring have without doubt been developed from apogamic ovules, while the hybrids may be supposed to have developed from ovules, which require fertilisation, and which, in the cases where heads of H. excellens are isolated or castrated, would not be able to give fruits. This supposition which is sup- ported by the cytological investigations of O. Rosenberg, is the most natural one, and it gives the explanation of several points in the letters from Mendel to Nägeli, published by C. Correns (1905). (3) The most prominent phenomenon with regard to the hy- brids is, that hybrids arising from the same cross are heterogeneous, just as pointed out by Mendel (1870, p.50). As hitherto I has only rather few hybrids at my disposal, my opinion may be wrong, but it seems to me, that, taken as a whole, the hybrids are nearer to the mother than to the father. Further the hybrids which are farthest from the mother, are not so strong as the others. Curiously enough most of these hybrids are purely female like the mother, a few are hermaphrodite like the father, but the pollen is for the most part barren. As the pollen-cells contain a resinous substance, it is not possible to examine them before removal of this substance. I have removed it by treating the pollen-cells with Carnoy’s fluid, of which the chloroform dissolves the substance in such a way that I was able to examine the contents. The result of my examina- tion of the pollen-cells of the hermaphrodite hybrid, H. excellens x aurantiacum (No. 46,1) was the ratio: 300 apparently good grains to 54 empty. With regard to the above-mentioned hybrid, A. pilosella >< aurantiacum, the ratio was 100 “good” to 57 empty. a) _. This examination gives only the minimum of the barren pollen- cells, as it is quite possible, that many of the apparently good ones would not be able to germinate. In my earlier papers | have pointed out, that the attempt to make the pollen-grains of Hieracia and of Cichorieæ (in general) germinate led to no posi- tive result, a fact which previously has been found both by H. Molisch and B. Lidforss, but which only shows, that we do not know the conditions proper for germination. The pollen of H. pilosella and H. auricula is apparently good and nearly without barren grains. (4) The fruiting-power of the hybrids is very slight, but also here the same heterogeneity occurs as in the other characters. The following figures will give some idea of this, but it is neces- sary to remember that the figures of the full fruits probably are too high as I have counted them according to their external appearance and only here and there opened a fruit for closer exa- mination; the very few plants obtained from my sowings give a clear proof of that fact, even if other circumstances have also to be considered. full empty H. excellens x aurantiacum (No. 46,) SF, isolated.... 59 805 — = (No. 46,) $, isolated.... 160 318 — — (No.46,) $, castrated... 68 821) = — (No 280, isolated. 7.017040) H. excellens x pilosella.... (No. 50,) Ÿ, castrated... OMKR = — (No:50:) © isolated. :.1 7 350 = — (No. 50,) 9, castrated... 15 1421) The whole question of the reduced fruiting-power is a very interesting one, but we know at present very little about this. Several things tend to show, that the outer conditions are of great importance here, and perhaps we shall succeed in finding out these conditions, so that we may be able to increase or to diminish this power. Botanists have often found, that a Hieracium-species in certain places does not give any fruits at all. Mendel says (Correns, 1905, p. 238) that H. pilosella, incanum (= H. p., velu- tinum Heer & Heg.), which Nägeli had sent him from Munich is quite sterile; later (1. c. p.246) he says as follows: “H. pilosella, incanım vermag sich dem hiesigen Klima nicht gut anzupassen. 1) This figure is too small. — 946 — Die Luft scheint dieser Pflanze hier im Sommer zu trocken, viel- leicht auch zu warm sein. Im Jahre 1870 waren die Mai- und Juni-Blüthen ganz steril, im folgenden Jahre von theilweiser Frucht- barkeit, die gegen den Herbst erschienenen einzelnen Köpfchen aber vollkommen fruchtbar. Vermuthlich lag bei den Sommerblüthen die Ursache der Sterilität in der schlechten Beschaffenheit des eigenen Pollens, da es mir auch nicht gelingen wollte, mit demselben A. auricula zu befruchten, während zu derselben Zeit die Befruchtung mit dem Pollen der übrigen pilosella-Varietälen keine Schwierigkeit hatte. Gegen Ende August jedoch gelang eine Befruchtung mit dem Pollen des H. pilosella, incanum”. I have quoted Mendel’s words in extenso, as I think that he has mentioned just the points which are of importance. The cause of the negative results of Raunkiær’s first castration experiment with Hieracium was, that he used a H. pilosella-clump which, as we found by closer examination, did not set fruits at all in the Botanical Garden. The same is the case with the H. wmbellatum-stock in the Garden and also with several other plants belonging to different genera of Cichoriew. The H. auricula mentioned above (Series VI,3) gave fruits in the summer of 1905, while the heads of the autumn-scapes were quite sterile. Some observations lead to the supposition, that it perhaps will be possible to repress the fruiting power, when culti- vating the specimens under dry conditions. (5) A phenomenon which at least in some respects is connected herewith, is the obliteration of the pollen-grains. We have seen that in A. excellens and H. roxolanicum, as they grow in the Botanical Garden of Copenhagen, this obliteration is the ordinary case. And Mendel (1870, p.52) says, that it is not rare to find a few flower-heads with empty anthers in wild-growing, quite fertile species"). Also H. Zahn (1904, p. 170) mentions, that female specimens of a great number of Hieracium-species are not unusual, and asserts, that they arise in some years rather numerously and often under cultivation in gardens. I myself have also found, that single specimens of a form of HM. pilosella which grows abundantly 1) When Mendel thinks, that cross-fertilisation has taken place here, when the purely female heads have given full fruits, he from his point of view is quite right; but now it is much more probable to suppose apogamy here. EB Er in the dunes of North-Jutland, are purely female, and these specimens always stand on very dry places and were, taken as a whole, smaller than the common hermaphrodite ones. Further a patch of H. pilosella in a dry lawn in the Botanical Garden gave only female flower-heads in the last autumn; one of thesé heads has been figured on the Plate (fig.8) and will show, that it is smaller and paler than a head of the normal H. pilosella (fig. >). It is likely from the cases here mentioned, that the sexuality of some Hieracium-species under certain external circumstances can be weakened. And perhaps it may be supposed that the apo- gamy is a provision against this accident. Were the suppression of the pollen-grains has become normal (f. i. H. excellens), the plant has been able to produce at least a great many of its fruits without fertilisation. A fact which may be of some interest is, that both H. excellens and H. roxolanicum originate from Galizia, and that I last year in Hungary (Herculesbad) collected seeds of two Piloselloidea, which now, when flowering, show, that they are both female; the one is a form of H. magyaricum, the other belongs to the species with so-called dichotomous scapes; it then seems as if the female forms were more common in the S. E. part of Central-Europe. The report given here will, it is to be hoped, show, that the Hieracia offer a great many interesting problems, and that some of them bear an interest reaching far beyond the genus, but it will also show, that at present we are only in the mere beginning of our knowledge about these phenomena. I hope in further reports to be able to explain several questions which now are unsolved, but there are more problems here than one single man can take up. — I cannot end this paper without expressing my best thanks to the Director of our Botanical Gardens, Professor, Dr. E. War- ming, and to our Garden-inspector Mr. A. Lange for their kind- ness in placing a part of the garden at my disposal for these experiments and in helping me in all possible ways. And finally I have to acknowlegde my debt of gratitude to Professor W. Bateson, of Cambridge, who has kindly corrected the grammar and vocabulary of the English. Copenhagen, July 1906. — 948 — Literature. Correns, G. (1905): Gregor Mendels Briefe an Carl Nägeli 1866—1873. Ein Nachtrag zu den veröffentlichten Bastardierungsversuchen Mendels. — Abh. d. math.-phys. Kl. d. k. sächsischen Ges. d. Wissensch., vol. XXIX, No. 3, pp. 187— 265. Juel, H.O. (1904): Die Tetradenteilung in der Samenanlage von Taraxacum, — Stockholm, Arkiv för Botanik, vol. 2, No. 4. — — (1905): Die Tetradenteilungen bei Taraxacum und anderen Cichorieen. — K. Svenska Vet. Akad. Handl., vol.39, No.4, 21pp, 3 plates. Kirchner, ©. (1905): Parthenogenesis bei Blütenpflanzen. — Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Ges., vol. XXII, Generalversammlungs-Heft, pp. (33)— (97). Mendel, G. (1870): Uber einige aus künstlicher Befruchtung gewonnene Hieracium-Bastarde. — Verh. d. naturf. Vereins in Brünn, VIII, Abhandl. pp. 26—31. — Reprinted in: Ostwald’s Klassiker d. exakten Wissensch., No. 121, pp. 47—53. Murbeck, Sv. (1904): Parthenogenese bei den Gattungen Taraxacum und Hieracium. — Lund, Botaniska Notiser for 1904, No. 6, p. 285—296. Nägeli, C. von, und Peter, A. (1885): Die Hieracien Mitteleuropas. I. Pilo- selloiden. München. Ostenfeld, C. H. (1904, 1): Zur Kenntnis der Apogamie in der Gattung Hiera- cium. — Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Ges., vol. XXII, No. 7, pp. 376—381. — — (1904,2): Weitere Beiträge zur Kenntnis der Fruchtentwicklung bei der Gattung Hieracium. — Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Ges., vol. XXII, No. 9, pp. 537— 541. — — og Raunkiær, CG. (1903): Kastreringsforsog med Hieracium og andre Cichorieæ (Danish with English summary). — København, Botanisk Tids- skrift, vol. 25,3, pp. 409— 413. Peter, A. (1884—85): Uber spontane und kiinstliche Gartenbastarde der Gattung Hieracium, sect. Piloselloidea. — Engler’s Bot. Jahrb., vol. V, pp. 203—286, 448 —496, vol. VI, pp. 111—136. Raunkiær, C. (1903): Kimdannelse uden Befrugtning hos Mælkebotte (Taraxa- cum). — Kobenhavn, Botanisk Tidsskrift, vol. 25,2, pp. 109—140. — Abstract is given in Bot. Centralbl., vol. 93, 1903, pp. SI—83. Rosenberg, O. (1906): Uber die Embryobildung in der Gattung Hieracium. — Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Ges., vol. XXIV, No. 3, pp. 157—161, Pl. XI. Schultz, F. (1856): Plantes hybrides. — Archives de Flore, journal botanique. IL, p. 254—255. Wissembourg. Strasburger, Eduard (1904): Die Apogamie der Eualchimillen und allgemeine Gesichtspunkte, die sich aus ihr ergeben. — Jahrb. f. wissensch. Bot., vol. XLI, No. 1, pp. 88—164, 4 plates. Zahn, H. (1904): Bemerkungen über C. H. Ostenfeld’s Artikel, Zur Kenntnis der Apogamie in der Gattung Hieracium. — Allg. bot. Zeitschrift. Karlsruhe X, No. 11, pp. 170—172. KBHVN. BIANCO LUNO 44 Explanation of the plate (Tavle I). Fig. 1. Old corymb of H. excellens. — 2. Young corymb of the same. 3. Scape with terminal head of H. pilosella. 4. Corymb of H. aurantiacum. — 5. Corymb of H. excellens x aurantiacum, g. 6. H. excellens X pilosella, 2. TIME. pilosella x aurantiacum. 8. Female head of a form of H. pilosella. All the main figures are natural size; the detail-figures which give the form of the outer flowers of each plant are magnified twice. Tavle I. oa Su ares x oh eres BROER STETTEN $ : « ntm Se pin ee ae NUN Botanisk Tidsskr Botanisk Tidsskrift, Bd. 27 1906 Tavle I. . ipl oat Wi GÆS DERE N. Halkjær lith. Alfred Jacobsens Tryk. Arbejder fra den Botaniske Have i København. Nr. 33. List of Phanerogams and Vascular Cryptogams found in the Angmagsalik District on the East coast of Greenland between 65° 30' and 66° 20’ lat. N. By Chr. Kruuse. Reprinted from ,MEDDELELSER OM GRONLAND* Vol. XXX. LIBRARY BOTANICAL GARDEN, Copenhagen. Printed by Bianco Luno. 1906. Lieu | 2 VAE) NEO pe ro a we HR mus, bangs ; Introduction. IARDEN. The plants mentioned in this list were mainly collected during the two Greenland Expeditions of Amdrup and during a third journey undertaken by me, in the years 1898—99, 1900 and 1901—02. They were mostly collected and determined by myself. The plants found by Berlin and Nathorst during the short stay of ‘‘Den andra Dicksonska Expeditionen” in Kong Oscars Havn (Tasiusak) in 1883 are also entered in the list. They are published partly in the description of this expedition, partly in Kgl. Sv. Vetenskaps-Akademiens Handlingar og Bihang (see Literary List). I have also embodied the small collection brought home by Mr. Knutsen from the Danske Konebaads- Expedition in 1883—85 and published in Medd. om Gronl. III & IX together with the species found by Cand. Bay during the Expedition of Ryder in 1892 at Tasiusak and published by Mag. scient. N. Hartz in Medd. om Gronl. The limits of the district were traced from botanical and practical reasons. The northern limit is purely botanical and climatic, being distinctly expressed at Kap Wandel on abt. 66° 18’ lat. N. Here the coast becomes wider, the current that farther northward has kept the ice to the land now turns out, the inlets towards the south are broad and deep. The most nor- __thern points I have visited are at the inner end of the Sermilik inlet on about the same latitude, and I have therefore traced __the limit at the “Lille Isfjord” west of Kap Wandel on 66° 20' CYlat. N. The southern limit falls through the outer end of the 15* MAY 212 Sermilik inlet on 65° 30’ lat. N. and 38° long. W., so that the most southern point examined is the Adloe-Dal at Kap Dan (Naujanguit). The very west side of the Sermilik inlet I have found no opportunity of examining in its outer southern part, and it is therefore natural for me to stop here. However, the limit is scarcely good from a botanical point of view as this west side, as far | can see, must have quite a similar vegetation to the distriet described here though somewhat influenced by the slight extent of the land free from ice. The right limit ought perhaps to be traced 25’ more west at the western point of the outer end of the inlet, Nukajik. The district south (west) of this, Inigsalik, will certainly when examined more exactly show a similar character to the region north of 66° 20’ lat. N., the area being narrow between the inland ice and the sea without any belt of rocks and islands along the coast. But certainly it will turn out to be of a more southern type. Practically it is still unknown from a botanical point of view. This district, Angmagsalik, forms geographically spoken a whole, this part of the coast being characterized by being free from ice on a very broad area, by the large far penetrating inlets and by the numerous islands along the coast among which the Angmagsalik island takes the foremost place. It forms like Scoresby-Sund, an oasis, as it were, on the coast besides so poor. All inlets and sounds together with the islands except some of those farthest out have been visited and examined though in a very different degree. While for instance the en- virons of the trading station, Tasiusak, and the ramifications of the Angmagsalik inlet have been relatively thoroughly exa- mined and will scarcely contribute any more to the flora of the Phanerogams, several of the most eastern points were only visited once, abt. 2 hours for every locality. Still, this is but of slight import, for I have when staying for a rather long time 213 (11 days) on Stenö in 1899 convinced myself that the flora of the outer coast may be perfectly well collected at such a short visit, and in 1902 I have got at the same result through con- trolling visits at localities formerly untrodden. The localities examined are in enumeration of the localities arranged in a series from East to West, the distriet having its main coast in this direction and also its greatest extent, while the extreme points are at a distance of hardly one degree of latitude from each other. Within this main arrangement they are arranged from North to South in the individual inlets, so that they may be the more easily found out, many of the localities with characteristic vegetation being on about the same latitude though they are widely separated in east-western direction and belong to different systems of inlets. Latitudes and Longitudes are stated, partly according to the maps published in Medd. om Grönl. IX, X and XXVII, partly, for the localities outside these, according to a map designed by Commander G. Holm, but not published, and if no wider limits are stated they pass as a rule for the landing-place. Loealities. Lat. N. Long. W. of Grw. PC ER sub So a ie 2e de Ga al’ af a TER S spn i EP PTT 66° 18’ Shak Be a 9 ifs a ca oes 65° 36' STE Amagä (Præstefjæld) ........ 65° 38’ 31.328 mel. Ye. ou nn Berg ke A - - 66° 18’ 37235 Amakä (Kap Hörring) ....... 65° 38’—39' … 379 34 RESUME > . u. «2 2208 nee 65° 36 DU. Den ee ae 2. En 65° 36 37° 10' Bonner a a u 66° 7! SEE TU Bishakken 24h SEERE eus oe 65737 37° 34! —40' Hans (ied. Ns tke men 2 66° 15’ 35° 158 RE an ER LAGRE VE 66° 2’ 35° 45! ASE PEN Et RER Ng 65° 56’ 36° 34’ Ikerasak Fugleholme ........ 65° 49’ 36° 50° AE NES NET EE 65° 35 31° Weerisaucai’ 2 eS ira 66.05 37° 20’ —30’ Localities. Lat. N. Inemuketiok, „Sarnen 65° 45! Ingmuikertorayik.... sen aan... 65° 54' SUE EEE ES IE RR, 65° 58’ Jean OL RE sole NG 65 97. Kanganitsar’. MORNEIERUIGN. 242. 65° 56! Kansarsiorttei an to” ee det 65° 49 Kangerdluarsikajik .......... 65857 Kangerdlugsuatsiak .......... 66° 16'— 19! Kapa\Vandelez ge er ee 66° 18 Kernertok sr rets nee 65° 45! Kernerinarsultie re nen. 65° 42! Kingak Angmagsivik......... 655574 Kingorsuak ere 66° 5'—10' Kordiortok SO ROME 65° 41’ Kuarm SNA ER, 2e 653521 Misutok a a RER eee 66° 0! More OR N ei ees Gn 2) INIGEREUSOK ses sete ye: nr 66° 18' Norsitl PAIN MAR, 6583: Numakititakız. Anh. Aten Gan ae: Saracens ans genre TC 65855! Sara. yl epee ae 65° 38" Sénmiilikt Meren ie ee eye 65° 39’ Siena tae cece ese soe 65° 56! SMART nen een 63.59; STE OR I 66° 3" Stony Oem cesses Wik Oe ae 66° 15! Masuda er Eee 65287. Masiusarsik kitdlek ys x). er 65737 Tasiusarsik i Angmagsalik Fjord 65° 47' INnmenekelak > sis eee as: 65° 54! BUG ose a, Seren eee 69253: ink. ie a CR RE 65° 39’ RE meee tts 3 65° 52! Witorkanmut <0. 0072s 65° 54! CAES. un VAN ee 66° 10! Long. W. of Grw. 36° 59! BE 37° 40' 35° 54' 37° 36° 54' 36210) 35° 17'— 34° 46" Byles) By ie 31 Dal 37° 5'—15! 37 24 310.38, 36° 58' Boe Be) 34° 53° DSL By) 10% 36845] ay) EY 37° 40' STED 3a 0 Ba 35° 22! 3133 37. a — 50 215 According to the collections of Berlin and Knutsen in 1883 and 84 we knew from Angmagsalik 109 species, to which Nathorst in a later work adds still 2 species, thus in all I 11. To these Hartz adds 5 on the basis of the collections of Bay, so that 116 species were known from the district in 1892 (not as stated by Hartz (l.c. p. 392) 120). Of these 116 species are omitted Triglochin palustre, as well as Draba corymbosa and Campanula groenlandica, that are not or at any rate in this list are not considered different as to species from severally Draba hirta and Campanula rotundifolia, after which the number of known species is reduced to 113 species. In this list are mentioned 183 species, so that the number has been added to with 62°/0, though the conception of species has been taken in a very wide sense. Thus I have with Gelert united Draba rupestris and corymbosa with Draba hirta, Glyceria Borreri with G. distans, Festuca.duriuscula with F. ovina, Campanula groenlandica with C. rotundifolia, and Woodsia ilvensis, gla- bella and hyperborea are considered to be one species, while the Alchimilla forms filicaulis, alpestris, Wichurae and glome- rulans are considered to be separate species. In spite of that the augmentation is very considerable, and though the number has not been increased to the double of it, as foretold by Warming, still Nathorst was very far from being right when he declared that, what might still be found would be only single ‘‘plantae rarae” of no importance for the flora as a whole. No less than 52 of the species added are plants of a wide distribution which within Greenland itself have been found in very different localities and bear a prominent part in the phy- siognomy of the vegetation’), and even within the district given 1) They are: Dryas octopetala v. integrifolia. Alsine verna. Potentilla nivea. Cochlearia officinalis *Potentilla tridentata. Draba alpina. *Epilobium lactiflorum. Draba aurea. *Epilobium Hornemanni. Draba nivalis 216 15 signed with * of these (or 10°/o of the original number) are species giving the tone among the others. The rest (17)!) of the new found species must both within this distriet and on the whole in Greenland be characterized as rare plants, and finally one species, Sedum acre, has not formerly been found in Greenland. The knowledge of the flora of East Greenland has thus been augmented to a rather con- siderable degree. In a later work I shall examine more exactly the importance of this for the judgment of the phytogeography of the region. *Draba Fladnizensis. Draba arctica. Draba incana. *Cardamine bellidifolia. Cardamine pratensis. Papaver radicatum. *Ranunculus pygmaeus. “Coptistrifolia Sedum villosum. Pedicularis lanata. Mertensia maritima. Pyrola rotundifolia v. grandiflora. *Cassiope tetragona Campanula uniflora. Antennaria dioica. Arnica alpina. Rumex acetocella. *Salix aretica v. groenlandica. Habenaria albida. Habenaria hyperborea. Juncus castaneus. 1) They are: Potentilla emarginata. Alchimilla filicaulis. Alchimilla alpestris. Alchimilla Wichura. Callitriche hamulata. Draba crassifolia. Ranunculus reptans. Sagina caespitosa. Saxifraga aizoides. Juncus arcticus. Scirpus caespitosus. Elyna Bellardi. Carex capitata. Carex microglochin. Carex rupestris. Carex brunescens. Carex atrata. Carex supina. Carex rotundata. "Carex pedata. *Agrostis canina Aira flexuosa. Glyceria angustata. *Glyceria distans. *Lycopodium annotinum. Equisetum variegatum. *Equisetum arvense. *Aspidium Dryopteris. Aspidium Phegopteris. Woodsia ilvensis. Gentiana tenella. Galium palustre. Hieracium dovrense. Potomogeton filiformis. Juncus triglumis. Juncus bulbosus. Lycopodium complanatum cha- macyp. Botrychium lanceolatum. In arranging the plants I have followed Lange’s ‘‘Con- spectus Flora Groenlandica” (Meddelelser om Grönland II) by reason of the comparison with this fundamental work though it has become antiquated in several respects (f. inst. the main- tenance of Apetalae as a special group). I have also followed the nomenclature ofLange as far as possible, and I have innovated only where newer works have necessitated my doing so. These innovations are greatest within the family Cruciferae where I have followed Gelert’s revision for the genera Draba and Cochlearia, ‚Compositae, determined by Amanuensis Dahlstedt in Stockholm, Cyperaceae, determined by Inspector of the Bo- tanical Museum at Copenhagen, C. H. Ostenfeld, the other orders of Monocotyledones and Fülices, where the limitation of the species stated in ‘‘Flora Arctica” has been followed. In several cases especially when determining the large genera I have not been content with the result obtained, but I have been obliged to stop at what I considered a preliminary position, as the systematising cannot be final, until the plants have been cultivated and ob- served continually through years in the arctic countries. There is now every prospect of this going to be done at the new established Danske Arktiske Station in Disco, and it is my hope that also systematic questions will be treated there. In composing this list I have besides those cited in Lange’s Conspectus p. XVI ff. employed the following works: Berlin: Karlvaxter insamlade under den svenska Expeditionen til Gronland 1883. Öfversigt af Kungl. Vetenskaps-Akademiens Förhandlingar, NOs) py i. Engler und Prantl: Die natürlichen Pflanzenfamilien. Gelert: Notes on arctic Plants. Botanisk Tidsskrift 21. Bd., 3. Hefte. Ko- benhavn 1898. — Studier over Slægten Batrachium. Botanisk Tidsskrift 19. Bd. p. 7. Kobenhayn 1894. Gunnar Andersson & H. Hesselman: Bidrag till Kannedomen om Spetsbergens och Beeren Eilands Karlvaxtflora. Bihang t. K. Svenska Vet. Akad. Handl. Bd. 26. Afd. III. No: 1. Hartz, N.: Fanerogamer og Karkryptogamer fra Nordest-Grönland €. 75°— 70° N. Br. og Angmagsalik c. 65° 40° N. Br. Meddelelser om Gron- land 18. Hefte. 218 Haussknecht: Monographie der Gattung Epilobium 1884. Hegelmayer: Monographie d. Gattung Callitriche. Stuttgart 1864. Lange, Joh.: Conspectus Florae Groenlandicae. Meddelelser om Gronland 3. Hefte. Kobenhavn 1890. — Bemærkninger om de i 1883—85 indsamlede Planter paa Østkysten af Grønland. Medd. om Gronl. 9. Hefte. 1889, p. 271. Nathorst, A.G.: Botaniska anteckningar fran nordvestra Grönland. Ofversigt af Kungl. Vetenskaps-Akad. Förhandlingar 1884, No: 1. — Fortsatta anmarkningar om den grönlandska vegetationens historia. Kgl. Vet.-Akad. Förhandl. 1891, No: 4. Nordenskiöld: Den andra Dicksen’ska Expeditionen till Grönland. Stock- holm 1885. Neuman: Sveriges Flora. Lund 1901. Ostenfeld, C.: Flora Arctica. I. København 1902. Rosenvinge, L. Kolderup: Andet Tilleg til Gronlands Fanerogamer og Karsporeplanter. Medd. om Gronl. 3. Hefte. Kobenhavn 1892. Raunkiær, C.: De danske Blomsterplanters Naturhistorie 1. — Dansk Excursions Flora. 1890. I beg the many botanists who during the composing and else have assisted by word and deed to receive my best thanks. I shall name here Professor E. Warming, who always has assisted me, Professor Wittrock, Stockholm, who left the rich collections of the Rigsmuseum to my disposal, Amanuensis Dr. R. Fries, who assisted me at the named museum, Ama- nuensis Dahlstedt, who kindly determined the genera Ta- raxacum and Hieracitum, Inspector of the museum at Copen- hagen mag. sc. C. H. Ostenfeld, who determined Cyperaceae and mag. sc. C. Raunkiær, who determined Juncus bulbosus. Randers, the 25th of March 1906. Chr. Kruuse. 219 Fam. 1. Rosaceae. 1. Dryas octopetala L., var. integrifolia (M. Vahl) Hartz Fanerog. p. 320. D. integrifolia Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 3 & 234. Rosenv. Till. p. 654. In table-land, rather rare, high up on the mountains and most often on the shady side, not observed below 300 m. above the level of the sea. In bloom from the 28 of June— 24% of July, in fruit from the 13" of July. Kap Wandel, Amagak in Sermilik, Kilikitak, Kakasuak and the westside of Kingorsuak, Tunok, Adloe, Anava, Kordlortok, Orsuluiak near Tasiusak 65° 35’ n. Br. All specimens have entire leaves, as a rule closely convoluted; in favorable localities the young leaves are plane and obtain a length af about 10 mm. and a breadth of until 4 mm. In unfavourable (dry) localities all leaves are involuted and obtain only a length of 5—6 mm. and a breadth of 2 mm. The species does not flower every year and not until the tufts have reached a diameter of more than 5ctm. The flowers are rather small (15—20 mm. in diameter) and shortstalked (the stalks 2—3, rarely 4 ctm.). The dust well developped. Sets, though rarely, well-developped fruit; old fruit- stalks from a previous year are common. The tufts are very low, 1 —2 ctm. thick, having rarely a diameter of 20 ctm.; older speci- mens are always dead in the middle and much lichenized. The species evidently thrives badly within the territory examined. Dryas octopetala L. has not been found anywhere. 2. Potentilla palustris (L.) Scop. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 3 & 234. Comarum palustre Berlin Karlv. p. 32. Hartz Fanerog. p. 391. Rather rare; on the banks of brooks and lakes, and in pools. Flowers sparingly in August. The shoots are until 60 etm. long. Kingorsuak, Ikerasausak, Tunok, Kuarmiut, Tasiusak. Kong Os- cars Havn (Berlin)! 220 3. Potentilla anserina L. 7 groenlandica Ser. Lge. Consp. Fl. groenl. p. 5 & 234. Berlin Kärlv. p. 33. Rather rare, on clayey and sandy flats on the beach. Kingorsuak in several places, Ikerasausak, Tunok, Kordlortok and Grünlænderpynt at Tasiusak. Is as a rule very low, compressed with 3—4 ctm. long leaves, with 2—3 couples of leaflets and abt. 20ctm. long, 4—5 jointed offshoots, but in favourable localities vigorous specimens appear with 12 ctm. long leaves (5 couples of leaflets) and 50—60 ctm. long offshoots with 10—12 ctm. long joints. Flowers abundantly and sets many fruits. In spring the leaves are strongly reddish brown, later in the year they commonly assume a somewhat greenish colour. Flowers from the middle af July to the middle of August, with fruit in August. 4. Potentilla maculata Pour. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 6 & 234. Berlin Karly. p. 33. Hartz Fanerog. p. 391. a. vulgaris. On herby slopes and in heath, rather common over the whole district. Kong Oscars Havn (Berl.)!, Tasiusak (Bay.)!, Kap Wandel, Nigertusok, Smalsund, Kingorsuak, Ingmikertorajik, Akiliarisek, Kuarmiut, Tunok, Elvbakker a. sev. pl. at Tasiusak, Adloe, Kap Dan, Misutok. 2. hirta Lge.') Falkefjæld at Kingorsuak, Kangerdluarsikajik. 1) There seems to me to be no reason of separating with Rydberg (Further studies on the Potentilla) this variety as a distinct species (P. Langeana Rydb.), as the characters referred to are very variable, and numerous transitions are found. In the same plant the outer calyx and the leaf denticles may be obtuse and acute, the sepals oval or oval- lanceolate, and even the hairiness of the upper surfaces of the leaves and the under calyx are very variable. Completely glabrous leaves are rare. Neither do these characters vary in a parallel way; in almost glabrous specimens (shade-loving forms) the stem is upright with up- right branches, the leaf denticles obtuse, while outer a and calyx are lanceolate and more or less acute. 221 5. Potentilla emarginata Pursh. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 8 & 235. Found only in one place, Kakasuak at Kingorsuak, 66° 8’ lat. N. 2 small sterile specimens. 6. Potentilla nivea L. Lge. Consp. F. Groenl. p. 8 & 235. Found only in one place: The west side of Kingorsuak, 66° 8’ lat. N., on a humid, shady rocky wall. In the above named locality two 20 ctm. high flowering spe- cimens, belonging to the main species, were found on the 27* of July. In spite of zealous searchings I did not succeed in finding the species anywhere else, so that it must at least be very rare here, though in West Greenland it grows far more towards the south. 7. Potentilla tridentata Soland. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 10 & 236. In table-land, on rocks, on herby slopes, rather rare, between 66° and 67°5’ lat. N. Kingorsuak, Ikerasausak, Akiliarisek. The species prefers the interior of the country and thrives especially in cracks of the rocks where there is very dry some time of the year, but it has also been found on the outer coast in a few places. It is rather rare, but grows gregariously where it appears. Flowers in the latter half of July; fruit ripens in August; old fructifications are common, 8. Sibbaldia procumbens L. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 1! & 236, Berlin Karlvaxter p. 34. Hartz Fanerog. p. 391. Common on herby slopes and rocks of the table-land above the slopes. Flowers from the 20 of June—the 1%* of Aug.; sets abundant fruit that remains throughout the winter; old empty fructi- fications are common. Forms often dense plantations of a height of abt. 5 ctm. | 9. Alchimilla alpina L. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 11 & 236. Berlin Kärlv. p. 34. Hartz Fanerog. p. 391. Nigertusok, Akiliarisek, Kingorsuak, (Kangarsuk) (Knutsen), Jern O, Kong Oscars Havn (Berl.), Tasiusak in several places. Alchimilla vulgaris L. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 11 & 236. Berlin Kärlv. p. 34. Hartz Fanerog. p. 391. Of this polymorphic species several forms appear within the district; they are all well separated without any distinct transitions and seem to keep constant. The distinguishing characters are rather small, but in larger plantations it is possible to distinguish the individual sub-species by their peculiar structure. I. The calyx hairy. 10. Alchimilla filicaulis (Buser). The stems glabrous, at the top capillary like the branches of the inflorescence. The root-leaves plane with open basis, bluish grey, 7-lobed, the midlobe with 6—9 denticles on each side. The calyx infundibuliform or at the top oval-cylindric, hairy with scarce protruding hairs. Not common; on herby slopes between 66° 19’ lat. N. and 65° 35 lat. N.; 10—15, exceptionally 50 ctm. high. New for Greenland. Akiliarisek, Kingorsuak, Tunok, Sarfakajik, at Kordlortok Så, Elvbakker at Tasiusak, Adloe. f. vestita Buser. Stems hairy; very rare, in herby slopes. The tent place at Kingorsuak, Cassiope Fjæld, Amagä and Elv- bakker at Tasiusak. II. The calyx glabrous. 7 The lower half of the leaf nerves glabrous, the upper half adpressed hairy on the under side 11. Alchimilla alpestris (Schmidt). The stems and the stalks of the root-leaves almost glabrous or downwards clothed with adpressed hairs. The leaves glabrous er (except the nerves). The denticles of the upper stem leaves are directed towards the point of the segment of the leaf. On humid, well sheltered herby slopes, up to 50 ctm. high, found only in one place, and not before observed in Greenland. Tasiusak, Misutok 66° lat. N. ff The leaf nerves hairy in their whole length with adpressed shining hairs. *The leaves glabrous on their upper surfaces (but often slightly hairy at the bottom of the incisions). 12. Alchimilla Wichurae (Buser). The underside of the leaves adpressed hairy. Dark green, folded with sharp keels. On humid well sheltered herby slopes with high snow cover in winter; rather rare between 66° 20’ and 65° 35’ lat. N.; 15— 22 ctm. high. New for Greenland. Kap Wandel, Nigertusok, Ikerasausak, Kuarmiut, Tasiusarsik Kitdlek, Nordfjord and Elvbakker at Tasiusak. ** The upper surface of the leaves hairy, at least along the edge. 13. Alchimilla glomerulans (Buser). A. vulgaris f. subsericea Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 237. A. vulg. Hartz Fanerog. p. 392. Berl. Kärlv. p. 34. The most common form of the east coast; widely distributed on herby slopes and in copses of willows and found up to 1000 m. above the level of the sea; collected by all former travellers. Kong Oscars Havn (Berlin, Bay), Kingorsuak (The name of Kangarsuk in Lange |. c. is due to a misreading). It has already been found on 63° lat. N. (Eberlin) south of Angmagsalik, but no other form of A. vulg. is found in the collections of the Bot. Mus. of Copenhagen. Fam. 2. Halorhagidaceae. 14. Hippuris vulgaris L. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 13. Rosenv. Till. p.658. H. vulg. v. maritima Lge. |. c. 237. Berlin Kärlv. p. 36. Hartz Fanerog. p. 391. 224 In low watered ponds, rare. Tasiusak (Bay.), Kong Oscars Havn (Berl.), ponds in Elv- bakker and on Amakä, Tunok. . The number of the leaves of the whorls varies from 4 to 11, the length of the air leaves is between 5 and 12 mm., the breadth 1,5—2 mm., the water leaves vary between 5 and 12 mm. (length) and 1,5--3 mm. (breadth), and these variations may appear together in the same specimen in all combinations. It is therefore impos- sible to distinguish between the main form and f. maritima (Hellen) Hartm. 20—50 ctm. high, with up to 1,3 m. long rhizomes creeping at a depth of 4—5 etm. in sand and mud on ground covered with no other plants. The air shoots begin to appear early in June. Flowers though rarely in July. Sets ripe fruit. Seed plants with 5—6 ctm. long rhizomes and 1—4 strict 2—3 ctm. high shoots were observed on the 15 of August 1902. Fam. 3. Callitrichaceae. 15. Callitriche verna Kitz. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 14 & 238, Berlin Kärlväxter p. 37. a. genuina. — Kordlortok. 3. minima (Hpp.). Kong Oscars Havn (Berlin), ponds in Elvbakker and on Amaka, Ingmikertok in Angmagsalik Fjord in a dried up pool on the camp, Ikerasak Fugleholme. 16. Callitriche hamulata Kütz., var. trichophylla Kütz. In a pond with abt. 35 etm. water on sandy and muddy ground. 3—10 ctm. high, with fruit on the 30 of Sept. 1901. Found only in one place, Sparganium-Dam in Elvbakker at Tasiusak. e — Fam. 4. Oenotheraceae. 17. Epilobium anagallidifolium Lam. Haussk. Monographie p. 152, Rosenvinge Till. p. 659. E. alpinum. Lge. Consp. p. 14 & 238, Berlin Kärlväxter p. 35. to 1 or Nigertusok, Kangerdlugsuatsiak, Utorkarmiut, Ikatek, Sierak, Tasiusarsik in Angmagsalik Fjord, Tunok, Amagä, at Kordlortok Så, the brook of the colony, Kong Oscars Havn (Berlin). Rare. Forms cover in spots in humid places as the banks of brooks, at the foot of black stripes, on herby slopes and in manured places, It is 2—5 ctm. high, but fructiferous specimens may exceptionally reach 11 ctm. Flowers in July, sets abundant fruit. 18. Epilobium lactiflorum Hausskn. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 238. Rare, on herby and grassy slopes exposed to the south with high snow cover in winter. 10—20 ctm. high, fructiferous up to 40 etm. Flowers in July, sets abundant fruit. Kangerdlugsuatsiak, Tunok, Sierak, Tasiusarsik in Angmagsalik Fjord, Sarfakajik. 19. Epilobium Hornemanni (Rchb.). Hausskn. E. alsinefol. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 15 & 239. On herby slopes, not common between 66° 10’ and 65° 35’ lat. N., snow covered in winter. Flowers July—August, sets abundant seed. 10—20, sometimes up to 50 ctm. high. Kangerdluarsikajik, Ikatek, Kingorsuak, Sierak, Tunok, Sarfa- kajik, at Kordlortok Sö, Amaga, Tasiusarsik in Angmagsalik Fjord. 20. Chamaenerium angustifolium (L.) Scop. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 16 & 239, Berlin Kärlv. p. 35, Hartz Fanerog. p. 391. Grows gregariously on herby slopes close to the foot of the rocks and in copses of willows, obtains commonly a height of 25 —30 ctm., but is on the outer coast only 10, in the interior up to 70 ctm. high. Between 66° 19’ and 65° 35° lat. N. Kangerdlugsuatsiak, Eskimo Ö, Kangerdluarsikajik, Kingorsuak, Ikerasausak, Akiliarisek, Ingmikertok, at Kordlortok Sö, Kuarmiut, Tasiusak (Kong Oscars Havn) Berl. Bay, common in Elvbakker. f. foliosa. Hausskn. Monogr. p. 37. Kingorsuak, Tasiusarsik in Angmagsalik Fjord, Amakä at Kor- dlortok. 16 296 ~~ f. ramosa. Hausskn. |. c. p. 38. Amakä at Kordlortok. f. stenophylla. Hauskn. IL. c. p. 38. In sand at the foot of rocks in the neighbourbood of the trading station (Tasiusak). — 21. Chamaenerium latifolium (L.) Spach. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 16 & 239, Berlin Kärlv. p. 35. Hartz Fanerog. p. 391. In table-land, heath and on herby slopes. The following forms appear: a. f. platypetala Hausskn. Monogr. p. 191. Tasiusak (Berlin, Bay). Commonly distributed between 66° 20’ and 65°35! lat. N. as well on the coast as in the interior on gravelly slopes, on humid sand along the banks of brooks etc.; until 30 ctm. high. Flowers from the middle of July till the middle of August, sets abundant fruit. BP. stenopetala Hausskn. |. c. More rare than the main form, and in more favourable loca- lities, herby slopes and humid sand. Akiliarisek, Kingorsuak, Kangerdluarsikajik, Tunok, Kordlortok Sö, Amaga, Elvbakker, Tasiusak (Hartz). 7. f. brevifolia Hausskn. 1. c. In shady places in cracks. Kordlortok, Kakasuak, Tunok. 0. f. venosa Hausskn. |. c. In humid shady localities. The west side of Kingorsuak, Tasiusak, Amaga. The forms named her are not completely constant and transitions are often observed between all af them, but as they appear ecologi- cally in a different manner I put them down here. Fam. 5. Empetraceae. 22. Empetrum nigrum L. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 181, Berlin Kärlväxter p. 60. Hartz Fanerog. p. 391. two we —] Widely distributed everywhere in all formations; is found as well on the skerries farthest out in the sea, as in the interior on the border of the inland ice and on the highest ascended tops. Forms cover of a height of up to 20 ctm.; flowers late in June, sets abundant and ripe fruit, but only in favourable localities; many fruits do not attain ripeness and remain throughout the winter, they dry up next spring. Fam. 6. Caryophyllaceae. 23. Silene acaulis L. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 19 & 241. Berlin Kärlväxter p. 28, Hartz Fanerog. p. 391. Common on gravelled and sandy ground in table-land and heath, especially on sloping ground, avoiding humid and occasion- ally inundated places, is often snowless in winter, werefore older tufts often die off at the top-or become eroded from the NE. side in the form of a horse-shoe. The tufts become up to 40 ctm. in diameter and 10 ctm. high, but are usually not more than severally 20 and 5 ctm., on lichen flats only 2—3 ctm. broad and 1 ctm. high. The tufts flower every year, 15 of June— 15!" of August, but only with a slight number of flowers; the flowers are first reddish purple, later pink, and towards fading almost white; really white flowered tufts are very rare. Sets in August abundant seed having the power of germination. Seedlings and young specimens are common. In cracks of rocks a sterile shade-loving form with stretched jomts very usually appears. 24. Viscaria alpina (L.) Don. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 19 & 241. Berlin Kärlv. p. 28. Widely distributed in table-land, heath and on slopes, but grows always spread and is but a secondary constituent part of the vegetation. The height is 5—20 ctm.; it is sometimes branched and often 3—5 peduncles shoot out from the same zhizome; the inflorescences are 2—4 ctm. long, compact. The number of the lobes of the corolla is very variable, also the colour, from deep crimson to light shades, and towards decay the colour fades a great deal. 16° 228 A. albiflora. — Elvbakker at Tasiusak. 7. pleniflora. — Kong Oscars Havn (Berlin)! Elvbakker. 25. Sagina Linnaci Presl. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 21 & 242. Berlin Kärlv. p. 31. Not common, in humid places (not in pools), on herby slopes, in table-land and on oozy and stony flats, forms sometimes cover over smaller spots. Up to 5ctm. high in shady places, for instance among carices and grass, but as a rule only 1—2ctm. The tufts manystemmed, richly flowering (1 tuft bore 257 flowers and fruits) ; sets abundant seed, having the power of germination, in August. Kakausak at Kingorsuak, Sierak, Tunok, Sarfakajik, Kordlortok Sö, Tasiusak, Kong Oscars Havn (Berl.)! 26. Sagina nivalis L. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 22 & 242. Berlin Karlv. p. 31. On stony plains and in gravelled and sandy places with scarce vegetation. Not common. Grus O, Kingorsuak on a “cone of debris‘ in a river, Amagak in Sermilik, Tunok, Ingmikertok, Sarfakajik, Elvbakker, Tasiusak, Grünlænderpynt, Kong Oscars Havn (Berl.)! 27. Sagina caespitosa (J. Vahl) Lge. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 22 & 242. Very rare; in gravelled and sandy places near the beach. Sten O, Tunok, Adloe at Kap Dan, Grénlenderpynt in Tasiusak. 28. Alsine biflora (L.) Wbg. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 23 & 243. Berlin Kärlv. p. 30. Widely distributed everywhere on herby slopes and in table- land. The tufts up to 30 ctm. in diameter and with 5 etm. high flowerstalks, but most often smaller, 5—10 etm. in diameter. Very richly flowering (a tuft of a diameter of 15 ctm. bore 531 flowers and fruits); even small delicate globular specimens of a diameter of 1—2ctm. bear numerous flowers. Sets abundant and ripe fruit. 229 The flowers are nearly always white, only exceptionally a reddish purple specimen is found. Shade-loving specimens with stretched joints are always sterile. 29. Alsine verna Bartl. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 24 & 243. Appears in the following forms. B. rubella (Wbg.). Kilikitak at Kingorsuak, Anava and Adloe at Kap Dan. 7. hirta Wormsk. Kap Wandel, Kakasuak and Falkefjæld at Kingorsuak, Sarfakajık, Kilitilik at Tasiusak. 0. propinqua (Richards). Nigertusok, Kilikitak and Falkefjæld at Kingorsuak. 30. Honckenya peploides (L.) Ehrh. Halianthus peploides (L.) Fr. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 26 & 243. Berlin Kärlväxter p. 30. Kordlortok at Tasiusak. a. diffusa Horn. Here and there on the beach and in gravelled places near the sea. Flowers in the latter half of June, sets scarce fruit in August. The tufts may be up to 1 D-mt., but not more than 2—3 ctm. high and incoherent; only exceptionally, and particular in the inner part of the inlets, more than one specimen is found in each locality. Kingorsuak in several places, Kingak, Sierak, Tunok, Grön- lenderpynt in Tasiusak, Kong Oscars Havn (Berl.)! 31. Stellaria borealis Big. var. calyeantha Bong. * Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 28 & 244. Berlin Kärlv. p. 30. Very rare. On herby slopes and in copses; also in humid shady cracks of rocks in sheltered places in the interior; always snowcovered in winter. Flowers in August. Fruit not observed. 10—15 etm. high, forms as a rule incoherent, soft, but closely entangled tufts, but in the high dense copse of willows near Kingorsuak it was found only with single or at most 3 ascending, thin, up to 40 ctm. high shoots. 230 Kingorsuak, the birds’ islet near Misutok, Tasiusarsik in Ang- magsalik Fjord, Kuarmiut, Elvbakker near Tasiusak, Kong Oscars Havn (Berl.). Northern limit 66° 8’. 32. Stellaria humifusa: Rottb. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 28 & 244. Berlin Kärlv. p. 30. Not common; on the beach and in birds’ islets. The tufts are as a rule small (diameter of up to 5 ctm.) with very short and short jointed stems creeping closely to the ground, but in manured places and in good shelter they may become up to 30ctm. in diameter. In shade of rocks or algae washed ashore it becomes stretched stem joints (until 3 ctm.) and large leaves (until 12 mm.); but on sand and oozy flats it is utterly small-leaved. Flowers rather sparingly in July, sets ripe fruit. Tunok, Kingorsuak, birds’ islet near Misutok, Sierak, Ikatek, Ikerasausak, Ingmikertorajik, Kingäk, Tasıusak in several places, Kong Oscars Havn (Berl.) ! 33. Cerastium trigynum Vill. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 30 & 244. Berlin Kärlväxter p. 30. Hartz Fanerog. p. 391. Widely distributed in humid places, as well on the coast as in the interior and high up in the mountains, but thrives best on the coast and is fond of the manured spots round Greenland tent and dwelling places, where it often forms a dense cover and colours the ground white with its numerous flowers (diameter of until 15 mm.); sets abundant ripe fruit. var. brachypetala Lge. petalis calyce aequilongis. Kingorsuak (Kangarsik) (Knutsen). 34. Cerastium alpinum L. : Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 31 & 245. Berlin Kärlväxter p. 29. Hartz Fanerog. p. 391. The following forms appear: a. legitimum Lindbl. Rather rare on herby slopes and in copses of willows. Kingorsuak, Kingak Angmagsivik, Tunok, Kuarmiut at Kor- dlortok Sö and Elvbakker near Tasiusak, Anava. 231 2. lanatum Lindbl. ' Kong Oscars Havn (Berlin! Bay!). Widely distributed in table- % land. Attains in exposed habitat rarely a height of more than 5 ctm.; but in sheltered and fertile (manured) places it may attain 27 ctm. In copses and in shady cracks of rocks it may, as observed by Berlin (1. c.) in South Greenland, become very stretched jointed and assume the habit of Cerastium alpestre. 7. procerum Lge. In copses of willows and on herby slopes; also on, manured ground, up to 35 ctm. high. At Kordlortok $6, Elvbakker, round the trading station at Tasiusak. All forms vary a great deal as regards the length of the corolla, that in proportion to the calyx may be between 5:2 and 1:2. Fam. 7. Violaceae. 35. Viola palustris L. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 33 & 246. Berlin Kärlväxter p. 27, Hartz Fanerog. 391. On herby slopes, grassy slopes and on the banks of brooklets and ponds, rare, 5—15 ctm. high. Tunok, Kordlortok Sö; the specimens are sterile and small-leaved. Elvbakker and near the trading station in humid hollows covered with Salix herbacea; Sarfakajık, Subularia-Dam, between grassy tufts, Kong Oscars Havn (Berl.)! It flowers late in July till the middle of the August and has late in August often numerous fully ripened fruits. Cleistogamic flowers appear more often than the great ones. Fam. 8. Cruciferae. 36. Cochlearia officinalis L. Gelert: G. Andersson & H. Hesselman Bidr. t. Spetsbergens och Beeren Eilands Kärlväxtflora, Bih. t. K. Sv. Vetensk. Akad. Handl. Bd. 26. Afd. III. Nr. 1. p. 34. C. groenlandica L. Lge. 232 i Consp. Fl. Grognl. p. 35 & 246, C. fenestrata R. Br. Verm. Schr. Lge. I. c. 8. groenlandica (L.) Gel. 1. e. On the beach and on birds’ tufts and birds’ islets. rare. Kingak, Ikerasausak. f. minor Lge. On birds’ islets and near the beach, rare. Sten Ö, Kingorsuak, birds’ islet near Misutok, Ingmikertorajik, Anava, Tasiusarsik. 7. oblongifolia (D.C.) Gel. In manured places, on the border of sea-weed at the beach, rare. Kingak, Ingmikertok, Sierak, Tunok, Aluit near Kap Dan. Flowers in June—July, often immensely richly (tufts of a height of 3—4 ctm. and the same diameter may have more than 100 flowers), sets abundant ripe fruit. The species prefers manured places near the beach and may here attain a height of until 20 ctm., but appears never in greater numbers of specimens, certainly owing to the scarce bird life. 37. Draba alpina L. Gelert: Notes on arctic plants. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. Pp. oul. Very rare; in table-land, 4—5 ctm. high, flowers from 20%— 30% June. Ikerasausak, Kingorsuak. f. algida (Adams) Gel. ]. c. Kingorsuak, Ikerasausak, Tasiusarsik in Angmagsalik Fjord, Kuarmiut. Yellowflowered Drabas are very rare within the district exa- mined, and the colour is somewhat paler than farther north (Jaune 3; Lacouture, Repertoire Chromatique, Planche VI) but still unmistakable and can by no means be mistaken for any of the whiteflowered ones. The yellowish colour appearing in Draba Fladnizensis and hirta is secondary (Gelert 1. c.), produced by preparation and drying. In nature I never saw any such shade of colour, not even an at- tempt of it. The species flowers sparingly and sets seed only in slight quantities; on the whole it thrives badly within the district 233 examined, certainly on account of the southern position. The sou- thern limit is 66° lat. N. 38. Draba crassifolia Grah. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 38. On herby slopes. In bloom on the 26% and 27% of July, 2 —4 emt. high with old siliques "from the previous year; grows gre- gariously in humid eracks and on the vertical shady side of small grass-walls. Found only near Kingorsuak on Kakasuak and on the westside of the inlet. 39. Draba aurea M. Vahl. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 39 & 247. In table-land preferring gravelly places where there is plenty of water in spring, for instance in wild brooks and among blocks of stone on the sunny side (at a height of 500-700 mt.). Becomes 5—15 etm., exceptionally 30 ctm. high with 1—4 flowering stems. The leaves in spring reddish purple. Flowers richly late in June and in the middle of July, sets abundant seed, having the power of germination, in August. Rare, but where it is found there are often numerous specimens on a small area. Avoids the outer coast. Kakasuak near Kingorsuak, Akiliarisek, Ikerasausak. 40. Draba nivalis Liljeb. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 39 & 248. On rocks, in table-land, rare, 3—8 ctm. high. Flowers from 20% June, in fruit from 1 August. Kap Wandel, Kingorsuak, Misutok, Tasiusak near the station, Adloe near Kap Dan. f. tenella Lge. (f. elongata Wats.). Kingorsuak on the westside. 41. Draba Fladnizensis Wulf. Gelert Notes on arctic plants p. 302. D. Wahlenbergii Hartm. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 40 & 248. Rather common in all formations, as well in the coast region as in the interior. Flowers from the middle of June till the middle 234 of August, sets abundant ripe fruit in August. Thickly tufted, most often manystemmed; 3—15 etm. high, as a rule. f. homotricha Lindbl. — Kuarmiut. 42. Draba hirta L. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 42, Berlin Kärlväxter p. 24. Dr. corymbosa Berl. |. c. Commonly distributed in all formations, 2—20 ctm. high, flowers from the 20** of June till October, sets abundant ripe fruit. Varies very much. Most common are forms belonging to D. rupestris R. Br., but also specimens belonging to the main form are common in sheltered localities; when growing in much exposed habitat, it is reduced to a minimal size (f. stricta, f. trichella), but it becomes very robust on manured ground with broad dentate leaves and a thick, stem. The hairiness varies very much from the thick hairy small forms to almost glabrous. The form and hairiness of the silique is likewise subject to great variations. After having examined the great material at my disposal, I do not, however, consider it possible to keep the individual forms from each other, and there- fore I do not note them down. The species is, like the genus of Draba on the whole, certainly strongly developping, and possibly forming new species; but these cannot be determined till after having been cultivated through years in favourable localities within the arctic circle. I consider the different forms only climatic and local varieties of one or few fundamental forms. 43. Draba arctica J. Wahl. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 43 & 249. Kingorsuak on the west side in shade, Kingak Angmagsivik, Sarfakajik. 44. Draba incana L. Lge. Const. Fl. Groenl. p. 44 & 249. Variat: f. confusa Ehrh. silicula stellato-puberula non contorta, foliis caulinis dentatis. C. 5 ctm. alt. Tunok, Ikerasausak. f. contorta Ehrh. silicula glabra contorta, foliis omnibus integerrimis (vel caulinis rarius unidentalis). C. 15 ctm. alt. Akiliarisek. These two forms are constant in the material before me, but they cannot be kept from each other in the remaining arctic ma- terial accessible. All transitions are on the contrary found here. *Brassica campestris L. Introduced with food for hens. Was found in great quantities round the landing place of the trading station and grew in a mixture of mould and barley corn. Flowered richly in July—August. Seeds not observed. *Sinapis arvensis L. Introduced with food for hens. Was found in several places near the colony, partly in kitchen-middens, partly at the landing place, but single specimens were also seen on original soil and attained there a height of 40 ctm. Flowered richly in July— August. Seed not observed. 45. Subularia aquatica L. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 250, Berlin Karlvaxter p. 26. In ponds on sandy ground covered with a layer of mud, 1 ctm. thick, is found both submerse and on dried up ground, the largest depth of the water is 40 ctm. It flowers in the middle of August. Developped flowers were not taken but above the water; all sub- merse specimens had buds, but no open flowers. Fruit was found in abundance on the 10%—the 15 of August, the seeds ripe. The specimens grow gregariously in great numbers, but still with large intervals, forming no cover. They are 1—1,5 ctm. high with 3— 5 strict leaves, 4—7 mm., exceptionally 15 mm. long; the peduncles are bent down, the bear 1 —3 flowers, of which as a rule only the oldest one (the lowest) sets fruit. The white petals are also found in the submerse specimens. The siliques 1,5—2,8 mm. long, c. 1,5 —2 mm. broad, 1—1,5 mm. thick with up to 6 light brown seeds. Found only near Tasiusak. Pond at Elvbakker abt. 100 mt. above the level of the sea. Pond in Amaka abt. 3 mt. above the level of the sea. Kong Oscars Havn near the beach (Berlin)! 236 46. Cardamine bellidifolia L. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 47 & 251. In table-land, 1—5 ctm. high with many stems: flowers in July, sets abundant ripe fruit. In shady cracks the tufts become very incoherent, the leaves large with long stalks and the flowers rare. Not common, but found as well near the sea as in the interior, more frequent above than below a height of 300 mt. Kap Wandel, Grus Ö, Kingorsuak in several places, Sierak, Kordlortok and Amagä near Tasiusak. 47. Cardamine pratensis L. Lge. Consp. Fi. Groenl. p. 48 & 251. Very rare; in the edge of brooklets and in low ponds, as well submerse as on the dried up ground. The leaves are 2—5, ex- ceptionally 8 etm. long with 3—6 couples of leaflets; these are broadly oval (f. angustifolia Hook. Fl. boreal. Am. I. p. 45 has not been found). All specimens, even a very great one are sterile, not even peduncle is indicated. It propagates by prolifie germs on the leaflets. These loosen themselves from the plant, fold or roll them- selves together against the upper surface of the leaf, and the germ appears at the ground of it; still, I have seen a few with the germ in the middle of the upper surface of the midrib. Roots shoot out in a number of 1—6 on the under side of the germ. Especially the end leaflets seem to be particularly disposed to the formation of germs, but I have also observed them on the side leaflets. The formation of germs does not take place, till after the leaf has loosened itself from the mother-plant. Pool near Kordlortok Sö, ponds and dry pools in Elvbakker and in the colony brook between the houses. 48. Arabis alpina L. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 48 & 251, Berlin Kärlväxter p. 23, Hartz Fanerog. p. 392. Widely distributed on herby slopes, on rocks, in fertile places in the heath ete. It flowers from the 15 of June—the 15” of August, with fruit in August, sets abundant ripe seed. 237 BP. glabrata A. Bl. Norg. Fl. In copses of willows. — Kingorsuak. 7. minor Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 252. In table-land high up in the mountains (above 500 mt.); is a very stunted form belonging to the East coast. Kakasuak and Cassiope Fjæld near Kingorsuak, Kordlortok Fjæld and Sömands Fjæld near Tasiusak. 6. ruderalis Wormskj. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 251. On tent places, house ruins, kitchen-middens etc. Is a luxuriant form produced by abundant nutriment. Kingak Angmagsivik. Fam. 9. Papaveraceae. 49. Papaver radicatum Rottb. P. nudicaule. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 52 & 253. In table-land on the shady side, high up in the mountains (above 500 mt.). 5 specimens were found, among which a large old one with 37 fruits and flowers on 20 ctm. high peduncles; the others were small flowered. The flowers yellow, dust well developped; seed was found but not ripe; still several old capsules indicate that it may be found. With flower on the 27—28* of July. The westside of Kingorsuak, Cassiope Fjæld 66° 10'—8' n. Br. Fam. 10. Ranuneulaceae. 50. Thalictrum alpinum L. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 53 & 253, Berlin Karlvaxter p. 19. Hartz Fanerog. p. 392. On herby slopes and in copses of willows, not rare, grows often gregariously covering spots of 1/2 mt., but is only of slight importance to the appearance of the vegetation, being mostly hidden by higher plants in whose shade it thrives best. It is 10—12, exceptionally 20 ctm. high with 3—5, exceptionally 10 ctm. long leaves. Flowers richly from the 20 of June to the 1* of August, pollen rich, normal. Sets fruit, but to a slight degree, ripe seeds not observed. 238 Kap Wandel, Nigertusok, Kangerdiugsuatsiak, Kingorsuak, Aki- liarisek, Tunok, Kuarmiut, Misutok, Elvbakker, Tasiusak (Bay), Kong Oscars Havn (Berlin)! 51. Batrachium paucistamineum (Tausch.) var. eradicata (Lestad.). Gelert: Bot. Tidsskr. Bd. 19, p.28. Hartz Fanerog. p. 392. Ranunc. confervoides Fr. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 54 & 253. In a pond with c. 40 ctm. deep water on sandy ground covered with a mudlayer abt. 1 ctm. thick numerous 5—15 ctm. high speci- mens were found. The lobes of the leaves 1,5—2 ctm.; with one (two) flowers; 5—7 mm. in diameter, pollen well developped, sets abundant ripe fruit. A few specimens with very short (4 mm.) thick lobes were found in a dried up place in the pond, evidently a form of drought. Pond in Amakä near Kordlortok, Tasiusak (Bay.)! 52. Ranunculus glacialis L. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 54 & 254, Berlin Kärlväxter p. 19. Hartz Fanerog. p. 392. Widely distributed in table-land, especially on the coast and on the shady side of the mountains in the interior. 5—15 etm. high. Flowers from the 10 of June—the 1“ of August; the flowers 15—30 mm. in diameter, first reddish purple-brownish red, later on red and at last white and widely open. Sets rich ripe fruit in August. The seeds well developped. The plant is fond of humidity and is often found on dripping wet ground on the border of snow drifts. It begins flowering already 2—3 days after having become snowless. Kong Oscars Havn (Berlin)! Tasiusak (Bay.)! 53. Ranunculus pygmaeus Wablbg. Lge. Const. Fl. Groenl. p. 55 & 254. Widely distributed in humid cold shady places as well on the coast as in the interior, but is most often found on the shady side of the mountains and along perennial snow-drifts. This explains that neither Berlin nor Bay has collected it. 239 I—12 ctm. high. Flowers from the 15” of June, with fruit from the 10% of July; fruit rich, ripe. var. Langeana Nathorst. Ofvers. af Kgl. Vetensk.-Akad. För- hand]. 1884, No: 1, p. 47. Kingorsuak the west side. 54. Ranunculus hyperboreus Rottb. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 55 & 254, Berlin Kärlväxter p. 21. Very rare; in pools. 10—20 ctm. long; the leaves 5—8 mm. broad, 1 at most 2 flowers. Sets ripe fruit. It flowers from the 25 of June; with fruit in August. Eskimo O, Ikerasak Fugleholme, Tasiusarsik, Amaka and Elv- bakker in Tasiusak, Kong Oscars Havn (Berlin)! v. ruderalis. Coarse, branched, rooting off-shoots shoot out from a little tuft with many leaves. The joints of the stems 2—3 ctm. long. The leaves coarse, 1—2,5 ctm. broad on 2 ctm. long stalks; the peduncles 1—3 ctm. long, the calyx trisepalous, half as long as the tetrape- talous corolla. Stamens and fruit well developped. The plant is in all parts coarser and shorter than the main species. It must be considered a luxuriant form produced by abundant nutriment and want of water. It bears a certain superficial resemblance to R. pygmeus. Kingak Angmagsivik in a few small half dried up pools on the kitchen-midden. 55. Ranunculus reptans L. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 57. In a dried up pond on gravelly ground, where the water in winter is abt. 30 etm. high. Formed a complete, but open cover over some hundred mt. The tufts have 1—3 off-shoots with 3—5ctm. long joints. The leaves are abt. 2 (exceptionally 4—5) ctm. long, at the point 1 (exceptionally 3) mm. broad. The pe- duncles 5 (1—6) ctm. long, upright. The flowers, 1—4 in each specimen, abt. 5 mm. broad, well developped, sets ripe fruit. The whole plant is reddish brown. Amakä near Kordlortok at Tasiusak abt. 3 mt. above the sea. 240 56. Ranuneulus acer L. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 58 & 255, Berlin Kärlväxter p. 19. On herby slopes; rare, 30—40 ctm., in very favourable places up to 70 ctm. high; the ground-leaves most often long-stalked (stalks of 15—35 ctm.); the lower stem-leaf short-stalked (1 —4 ctm.) ; the upper one sessile; all leaves hispid. The stem branched at the top, 2-many flowered. The flowers up to 26 mm. in diameter, pollen well developped. Sets abundant ripe fruit. Tunok, Kordlortok Sö at the foot of a hill, Amaga, Elvbakker near Tasiusak, Kong Oscars Havn (Berlin)! var. Nathorstii Berlin 1. c. p. 20. On herby slopes; rare. 15—40 ctm. high; with few flowers, the ground-leaves long- scaped, all leaves bi- or tripartite, the segments trilobate, the lobes linear with parallel edges. The segments of the lowest stem-leaf of 15t and 2"4 order often stalked and the lobes very long. The whole plant especially towards the top hispid; the hairs compressed and widely separated. Easily recognizable on account of the finely divided leaves; still, distinct forms of transition to the main species are found; some specimens taken late in autumn agree best with the description of Berlin. Slope on Amaga, the south side of Kordlortok Fjæld, Kong Oscars Havn (Berlin)! fl. pleni. The south side of Kordlortok Fjæld near Tasiusak. 57. Coptis trifolia Salisb. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 58 & 255. On herby slopes and in fertile heath, rather common. 5— 10 ctm. high, flowers from the the 25 of June to the 1° of August, with fruit in August; the fructification is not common and takes scarcely place every year. Fruit well developped. Nigertusok, Kangerdlugsuatsiak, Kangerdluarsikajik, Kingorsuak, Akiliarisek, Ikerasausak, Misutok, Tunok, Norsit, Tasiusak. 241 Fam. 11. Saxifragaeeae. 58. Saxifraga nivalis L. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 59 & 256, Berlin Kärlväxter p. 39, Hartz Fanerog. p. 392. In heath and table-land and on steep rocks, common especi- ally on the shady side of the rocks. 5—20ctm. high, often with many stems or several specimens closely together. It flowers from late in June till the middle of July, sets abundant ripe fruit. Kap Wandel, Kangerdlugsuatsiak, Kingorsuak, Akiliarisek, Ku- armiut, Ingmikertok, Tasiusarsik, Elvbakker, Kong Oscars Havn (Berlin)! Tasiusak (Bay)! var. tenuior Wahlenb. Rather common in humid and cold places near snow-drifts and brooks. Kingorsuak, Akiliarisek, Ikerasausak, Sierak, Tunok, Kordlortok. 59. Saxifraga stellaris L. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 60 & 256, Berlin Kärlväxter p. 39, Hartz Fanerog. p. 392. On sandy and gravelled, humid ground, not common. 2—10 ctm. high, thickly tufted, with many stems; the cymes up to 6-flowered; the diameter of the flowers 5—10mm., pollen well developped, the capsules shining red or reddish brown. Sets abundant ripe fruit !). Kangerdlugsuatsiak, Kingorsuak, Ikerasausak, Tunok, Tasiusarsik in Angmagsalik Fjord, Sierak, Elvbakker, Grünlænderpynt and Nord- Fjord near Tasiusak, Kong Oscars Havn (Berlin)! Tasiusak (Bay)! var. acaulis. Thickly tufted, low, each rosette with one sessile flower. In dried up pools, submerse during the greatest part of the year. Ponds on Amaga near Tasiusak. var. laxa. The stems undivided, ascending with stretched joints, the leaves 1) The form comosa does not appear within the district. 17 242 lanceolate-spatulate, few-dentated, almost entire. The flowers small, 3—4 in cluster. In a thick shady copse of willows near Kingorsuak. var. viridis. The leaves small; the fruits green. Elvbakker near Tasiusak on humid sand. 60. Saxifraga cernua L. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 61 & 256, Berlin Karlvaxter p. 38. On herby and grassy slopes and in table-land and on rocks 10—20 ctm. high. The flower 10—12 mm. wide. Commonly distributed in the whole of the district. Kong Oscars Havn (Berlin)! var. ramosa Gmel. 15—30 ctm. high, vigorous, with many axillary bulbs at the ground and in the inflorescence. Rather rare and only in the interior. Kingorsuak on the west side and Kakasuak, Kingak Angmagsivik. 61. Saxifraga rivularis L. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 61 & 256, Berlin Kärlväxter p. 39, Hartz Fanerog. p. 392. On humid moss in brooks and on rocks; rather common. Kap Wandel, Sten Ö, Smalsund, Kingak Angmagsivik, Sierak, Norsit and Aluit at Kap Dan, Anava, Tasiusak in several places, Kong Oscars Havn (Berlin)! Tasiusak (Bay)! B. hyperborea (R. Br.) Engl. Monogr. Saxifr. p. 105. In humid and cold places, especially at the foot of perennial snow-drifts, rare. The west side of Kingorsuak. y. purpurascens Lge. Rare, in similar places as the main species. The westside of Kingorsuak on a house ruin. 62. Saxifraga decipiens Ehrh. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 62 & 257, Berlin Kärlväxter p. 38, Hartz Fanerog. p. 392. 243 a. groenlandica (L.) Lge. Common on herby slopes, in heath, table-land and especially on rocks. 5—10 ctm. high, thickly tufted, with many stems. Flowers numerous, well developped. In bloom from the 10“ of June: sets abundant ripe fruit. Kong Oscars Havn (Berlin)! Tasiusak (Bay)! A. Sternbergii (Willd.) Engl. Monograph. Saxifr. p. 188. Here and there in shady cracks of the rocks. Kingorsuak, Akiliarisek, Kingak Angmagsivik, Tasiusarsik in Angmagsalik Fjord, Tasiusak. 7. purpurascens. — The leaves of the corol reddish purple. Kingak Angmagsivik on a house ruin. 63. Saxifraga aizoides L. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 64 & 257. On the banks of small brooks and on humid rocks; 100 —600 m. above the sea; rare. 4—5ctm. high; incoherently tufted, reddish brown. Flowers from the 15% of July—the 15 of August. The flowers well developped; sets comparatively rare fruit (ripe fruit not observed, and only few old fructifications). Kingorsuak, Tunok, Ikerasak, Sarfakajik, Kordlortok at Tasiusak. 64. Saxifraga Aizoon L. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p.65 & 257, Berlin Kärlväxter p. 38, Hartz Fanerog. p. 392. Here and there on steep rocks. 5—10 ctm. high. Flowers in July, sets (though rarely) ripe fruit. Kap Wandel, Nigertusok, Kangerdluarsikajik, Kingorsuak, Akili- arisek, Ikerasausak, Tunok, Amagä, Kordlortok, Sarfakajık, Elvbakker, Kong Oscars Havn (Berlin)! Tasiusak (Bay)! B. robusta Engl. Monogr. Saxifrag. p. 244. 25 ctm. high, the leaves 1—3 ctm. long, 5 mm. broad, in bloom on the 25 of July, on fertile sunny rocky steps and at the foot of rookeries. Kakasuak and Falkefjeld near Kingorsuak. 65. Saxifraga oppositifolia L. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 66 & 257, Berlin Karlvaxter p. 58. 12° 244 Widely distributed in all formations as well along the coast as in the interior. Still the specimens rarely attain a considerable greatness (stems of a length of 35 ctm. are rare) and most of them are very small. Tufts of a diameter of 1—6 ctm. are most frequent. It flowers from the 15 of May till the middle of June, but delayed flowers are found. Even minimal tufts of a diameter of 5 mm. or creeping specimens of the length of 1 ctm. bear 1 —2 flowers, that are often covered with snow or are exposed to —4 —5° C. without interrupting the flowering. Fruit is found already in the first week of June, and the seeds are most often spread before the end of June. The two forms mentioned by G. An- dersson and H. Hesselman (Bidrag t. Kännedomen om Spets- bergen o. Beeren Eilands Kärlväxtflora. Bih. t. K. Sv. Vet.-Akad. Handl. Bd. 26. Afd. II. No: I, p. 23), f. reptans and f. pulvinata, with numerous forms of transition are found almost equally fre- quently within the district, in the way, that f. reptans is preferably found in steep and sloping places and very humid localities, and f. pulvinata prefers plane field and such localities where the soil during some time of the summer is totally dried up. Both of them belong to the most common plants on areas of sand-drift, especially where the sand-grains are large (— 1 ctm. diameter); and they are often so totally covered, that nothing but the flower rises above the sand, but this does not apparently seem to hurt them. Fam. 12. Crassulaceae. 66. Sedum Rhodiola D.C. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 67 & 258, Hartz Fanerog. p. 392, Rhodiola rosea L. Berlin Kärlväxter p. 37. Rather commonly distributed on herby slopes, on steep rocks, steps and in fertile heath, but nowhere numerous and bearing but a slight part of the vegetation. 20—30 ctm. high; flowers from the 10 of June til August, sets abundant fruit, hermaphroditic flowers were not observed. Kap Wandel, Nigertusok, Kangerdlugsuatsiak, Sten O, Moræne Ö, Grus Ö, Kangerdluarsikajik, Sarfak, Kingorsuak, Amaga Sermilik, Ikerasausak, Tunok, Anava and Aluit near Kap Dan, common near Tasiusak, Kong Oscars Havn (Berlin)!, Tasiusak (Bay)! 245 67. Sedum annuum L. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 67 & 258, Berlin Kärlväxter p. 37. Rare; on steep rocks above herby slopes, only in the interior, as a rule 5, from 2—8 ctm. high; with many stems. Flowers from the 25% of June—15 of August; sets abundant, full ripe fruit and dies then. The flowering is very abundant, a specimen, 5 ctm. high, had 125 flowers, a large one of a height of 8 ctm. 171 flowers. Nigertusok, Kangerdluarsikajik, Kingorsuak on several places, Akiliarisek, Sierak, Tunok, Ikatek, Tasiusarsik in Angmagsalik Fjord, Sarfakajık, Kordlortok Sö, Tasiusak, Kong Oscars Havn (Berlin) ! 68. Sedum villosum L. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 67. On steep sun-lit rocks above the herby slopes, snow-covered in winter, rare. The specimens are 3—6 ctm. high. It flowers in the middle of June, sets abundant seed. Wintering branches with dark reddish green, closely rosulate leaves of a diameter of abt. 6 mm. are sometimes found snowless, but alive in winter. Nigertusok, Kingorsuak, Akiliarisek, Amaga in Sermilik, Sierak, Amaga near Tasiusak, Udkigsfjeld near the colony. 69. Sedum acre L. Sp. pl. Fl. Dan. Tab. 1457. — New for Greenland! On rocks and algal ground, was especially rankly growing in eracks and fissures, which it filled up totally, and among the algae themselves, immediately above the high-water mark; it forms tufts of a breadth of more than 20 ctm. and a length of more than 1 mt. and a height of more than 3 ctm. Tunok, Ingmikertok in Angmagsalik Fjord, Amaka near Tasiusak. — Geographical distribution: Europe, Siberia, Asia Minor, North Africa. Fam. 18. Umbelliferae. 70. Archangelica officinalis Hoffm. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 68, Hartz Fanerog. p. 392. 246 Rather rare and only in the interior on warm, sun-lit slopes with water-courses running throughout the summer or on springs; always snow-covered in winter. 40—100 etm. high, with 1—many stems, the stems up to 6 ctm. in diameter, erect with 2—4 leaves and 1—3 basal-leaves, 1—5 umbels on every stem. The umbels are up to 10—15 ctm. in diameter, the involucres 0—1, sometimes lobate, the involucels many-leaved, often lobate. It flowers from the 1% of July till Oc- tober, with fruit from August, the fruit does not ripen every year. The corollas greenish-white or yellowish-green of a peculiar sweetish odour; the honey-formation abundant; proterandrous. The specimen dies after having set fruit, but the stems often remain throughout the winter, dry up, and often with umbels and fruits that have not become fullripe. The seed germs in spring; seedlings are found in great numbers below the dead specimens. The plant is at least 4 years in reaching full development. During the first year they get but 1—2 leaves with 10—15 ctm. long stalks and single tripartite plate with serrated leaflets; the root is 5—10 mm. thick. The second year the number of the leaves is 3—6, the form is the normal one, but they are but 25—35ctm. long. The root is until 3 ctm. thick. The third year there are 5—8 leaves with until 50 ctm. long and 2 ctm. thick stalks and 40—50 ctm. broad plate, the root is now until 8 ctm. in diameter at a length of 10—20 ctm., reaches but just as far as the earth’s crust, but goes 60 ctm. into the ground. The whole plant has a peculiar carrotish taste, leaving a musky umbelliferous taste. It is especially during the flowering time eaten with preference by the natives who often undertake miles long wanderings to get hold of it. One man can carry with him 15—20 kilogram stalks besides immense lots, peeled and eaten on the spot. As a consequence the plant is now limited to localities not easily accessible, high up on the rocks or behind glaciers, rapid rivers or ice-filled inlets, and nowhere else it now attains its most vigorous development, but is going to be ex- tirpated in all localities easily accessible. Northern limit 66° 19’ lat. N., observed up to 700 mt. above the level of the sea, thrives best at a height of 150—300 mt. Kilikitak and Kakasuak near Kingorsuak, Akiliarisek, the bottom of the Sierak valley, Ikerasausak, in two places near the bottom on the eastern side, Kuaralik near the Sermilik road from the colony. t an — The large island in Kordlortok Sö, the southern side of the Kor- dlortok Fjæld, Amagà. Stated, but not collected (Bay)! Fam. 14. Plantaginaceae. 71. Plantago maritima L. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 68, Berlin Kärlväxter p. 58. The tufts small, 1—2 (exceptionally 8) ctm. in diameter, flower stalks 1—6 ctm. long, the inflorescense 5 mm. thick and 4—6 mm. long. It flowers in July. Found but in one place, 65°33’ lat. N., Grénlenderpynt near Tasiusak on a small stony plain, presumably in the same place where it was collected by Berlin. Fam. 15. Plumbaginaceae. 72. Armeria vulgaris Willd., var. sibirica Turcz. Rosenvinge, Tilleg p. 683. A. sibirica Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 70 & 259, Hartz Fanerog. p. 392. In table-land up to 350 mt. above the level of the sea; rare, 5 ctm. high; abundantly flowering. Flowers in July. Adloe near Kap Dan, Elvbakker near Tasiusak, Tasiusak (Bay)! Fam. 16. Lentibulariaceae. 73. Pinguicula vulgaris L. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 71 & 260, Berlin Kärlväxter p. 58. In humid places in heath and table-land, especially near the edge of steeply sloping rocks; rare; 5—10 ctm. high with 1—3,5 ctm. long leaves. Flowers in July; sets ripe fruit in August. The leaves are frequently set with small insects. Nigertusok, Kakausak near Kingorsuak, Akiliarisek, Sierak, Ikerasak, Tunok, Kuarmiut, Misutok, Kordlortok, Elvbakker, Kong Oscars Havn (Berlin)! 248 Fam. 17. Serophulariaceae. 74. Veronica alpina L. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p.72 & 261, Berlin Karlvaxter p. 261, Hartz Fanerog. p. 392. Rather common on herby and grassy slopes and in copses of willows. 5—20 ctm. high; stems glabrous or towards the top somewhat hairy; they grow close together and form often a cover of more than 1 D mt. or in 4—5 branched isolated tufts with ascending shoots. Flowers from the 20 of June till the 1° of August, sets abundant ripe fruit. Kap Wandel, Nigertusok, Kangerdlugsuatsiak, Kangerdluarsikajik, Smalsund, Ikatek, Kingorsuak, Akiliarisek, Ikerasausak, Tunok, Ta- siusarsik in Angmagsalik Fjord, Sarfakajik, Adloe near Kap Dan, common near Tasiusak, Kong Oscars Havn (Berlin)! Tasiusak (Bay)! var. villosa. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 93; 5—10 ctm. high, the whole plant very hairy. Tasiusarsik in Angmagsalik Fjord together with the main species and transition forms. 75. Veronica saxatilis L. fil. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 73 & 261, Hartz Fanerog. p. 392. Here and there on herby slopes and on steps of steep rocks above the slopes; 5—10 ctm. high, up to 2 mm. thick, far branching shoots forming small tufts. The leaves always glabrous. The corolla up to 1 ctm. in diameter. Flowers from the 1° of July. Sets abundant ripe fruit. Old fructifications with open capsules remain often 3 years on the plant. Nigertusok, Ikatek, Kakasuak near Kingorsuak, Akiliarisek, Kuarmiut, Tasiusarsik in Angmagsalik Fjord, Amagä, Kordlortok Sö, Elvbakker, Tasiusak (Bay)! 76. Pedicularis flammea L. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 75 & 262, Berlin Kärlväxter p. 58. Rather rare in fertile heath. 5—15 etm. high, often with many stems; flowers from the 20 of June till the 15 of July, sets abundant ripe fruit, old fructifications are common. 249 Kap Wandel,’ Kingorsuak, Sierak, Tunok, Ikerasausak, Kor- dlortok, Elvbakker, Kong Oscars Havn (Berlin)! 77. Pedicularis hirsuta L. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 76 & 262, Berlin Kärlväxter p. 57. Common in heath and table-land, is often found in places where there is much humidity in spring, but is always dry in summer; 10—25ctm. high, with up to 7 flowering stems, flowers from the 1% of July, sets abundant ripe fruit, old fructifications are common and remain on the plant until 3 years after the ripening. 78. Pedicularis lanata Cham. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 76 & 262. Very rare; on sandy slopes. 5—15 ctm. high, flowers in July, sets ripe fruit. Kingorsuak, Elvbakker at Tasiusak. 79. Bartsia alpina L. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 78 & 263, Berlin Karlvaxter p. 58, Hartz Fanerog. p. 392. Commonly distributed on herby slopes and in fertile heath. 10—20 ctm. high, as a rule with many stems, often with 2—3 years old fruit-stalks, flowers July-August, sets abundant ripe seed. Kap Wandel, Kangerdlugsuatsiak, Odesund, Kangerdluarsikajik, Kingorsuak, Akiliarisek, Amagak in Sermilik, Kuarmiut, Ikerasausak, Sierak, Tunok, Misutok, Kordlortok, Sarfakajik, Elvbakker, Kong Oscars Havn (Berlin)! Tasiusak (Bay)! var. Jensenii Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 263. In fertile humid heath on the bank of a dried up brook. A 12 ctm. high specimen with 6 erect shoots, issuing at a bow from a rhizome abt. 0,8 ctm. thick and 1 ctm. long with numerous thick adventitious roots. The leaves light green; the corolla pale blue; was found in bloom on the 24* of July. It bore besides the fresh year’s shoots 4 old and dry from previous years of which one with rests of a capsule. The bottom of Kingorsuak 66° 10’ lat. N. 250 80. Euphrasia latifolia Pursh. Fl. Am. sept. II. p. 430. E. officinalis L. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 79 & 264, Berlin Kärlväxter p. 56. Rather rare, on herby and grassy slopes and on rocky steps above the slopes. 1—15 ctm., as a rule unbranched stems (rarely with two branches from the ground). Flowers richly in the latter half of July, sets abundant ripe fruit. Thrives best in the interior. Nigertusok, Kakasuak near Kingorsuak, Akiliarisek, the bottom of the Sierak Dal, Tasiusarsik in Angmagsalik Fjord, Sarfakajik, Tasiusarsik, Kordlortok Sö, Elvbakker, Kong Oscars Havn (Berlin)! Fam. 18. Boraginaceae. 81. Mertensia maritima (L.) Don. Stenhammaria maritima (L.) Rehb.; Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 80 & 264. On a stony plain near the beach; found only in one place in bloom on the 9 of July, faded on the 26% of August. But 3 spe- cimens altogether were found. Grünlænderpynt near the trading station? Tasiusak 65° 37’ lat. N. Fam. 19. Labiatae. 82. Thymus Serpyllum L. var. prostrata Horn. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 81 & 264, Berlin Kärlväxter p. 57, Hartz Fanerog. p. 392. Commonly distributed in the interior on herby slopes and on rocky steps above these, also in the best parts of the table-land, rare on the coast and only on herby slopes. Always decumbent or at best as espalier against blocks of stone with up to 40 ctm. long and 3mm. thick branches. Flowers in July, sets ripe fruit. Northern limit Kap Wandel 66° 20’ lat. N. Fam. 20. Gentianaceae. 83. Gentiana nivalis L. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 82 & 264, Berlin Kärlväxter p. 55. 251 On rocky steps above the herby slopes; rare. 2—10 ctm. high with up to 10 flowering branches, flowers in July, sets abundant ripe fruit. Kap Wandel, Nigertusok, Kakasuak near Kingorsuak, Akiliarisek, Misutok, Sierak, the bottom of the Sierak Dal, Ikerasak, Tunok, Tasiusarsik in Angmagsalik Fjord, Kordlortok Fjæld, Kong Oscars Havn (Berlin)! 84. Gentiana tenella Rottb. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 265. On rocky steps above herby slopes, very rare. 1—10 ctm. high, divided from the ground in one erect main stem and 3—4 ascending branches, ending each with one flower. Flowers in the end of July; the corolla pale bluish purple, sets fruit, but the ripening was not observed. Found but on the humid: steppy side, exposed to the south, of the mountain Kakasuak c. 700 mt. above the level of the sea, where numerous specimens were found. Kingorsuak. *Malva neglecta Wallr. On refuse-heaps near the colony, sterile, introduced. Fam. 21. Diapensiaceae. 85. Diapensia lapponica L. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 83'& 265, Berlin Karlvaxter p. 55, Hartz Fanerog. p. 392. Common every where. Kong Oscars Havn (Berlin)! Tasiusak (Bay)! Commonly distributed in table-land, heath, on rocky steps and on herby slopes. Forms tufts of as much as 35 etm.s’ diameter and 7 ctm.s’ height above the ground; the tufts are often dead at the top or in spots. Seedlings and small specimens of 3—10 mm.s’ diameter are common in table-land. Flowers from the 15% of June till the 15 of August, sets abundant ripe fruit. The peduncles are 0,5—4 ctm. long. Fam. 22. Pyrolaceae, 86. Pyrola rotundifolia L. var. grandiflora D. C. P. grandiflora Rad. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 84 & 266. Found but in one place on green-sward among blocks flung down, but here in great numbers. 10 (exceptionally 15) ctm. high, with 4—6 flowers in clusters, the corollas white with a faint pink shade, 1—1,5 ctm. in diameter; they have a faint agreeable odour. In bloom on the 1° of August. The west side of Kingorsuak, 66° 8’ lat. N. 87. Pyrola minor L. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 84 & 266, Berlin Karlvaxter p. 54, Hartz Fanerog. p. 392. Here and there, never common or in greater numbers, in copses of willows, and on herby slopes in well sheltered localities in the interior. 10—15 ctm. high with leaves of a length of 2—3 ctm. Flowers up to 10 in the cluster; where it appears on the coast it has always been found to be sterile. Kap Wandel, Nigertusok, Kangerdluarsikajik, Cassiope Fjæld, Kakortok and the west side of Kingorsuak, Ikerasausak, Tunok, Ta- siusarsik in Angmagsalik Fjord, the bottom of the Kuarmiut, Sierak Dal, Kordlortok Sö, Elvbakker, Kong Oscars Havn (Berlin)! Ta- siusak (Bay)! Fam. 23. Ericaceae. 88. Phyllodoce coerulea (L.) Gren & Godr. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 86 & 266, Berlin Kärlväxter p. 53. Rather common on herby slopes and in the most fertile parts of the heath, especially in shelter of rocks on the sunny side. Up to 30 ctm. high. Flowers sparingly from the 20 of June till the 1st of August; sets (rather sparmgly) ripe fruit. Kap Wandel, Kangerdlugsuatsiak, Smalsund, Kingorsuak, Akili- arisek, Ikerasausak, Kingak Angmagsivik, Tunok, Sierak, Sarfakajik, Kordlortok Så, Amaga, Elvbakker, Udkigsfjeld, Sömandsfjeld, Kong Oscars Havn (Berlin)! 253 89. Cassiope tetragona (L.) Don. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 87 & 266. Found but in a single place in heath on the shady side of a mountain range between 150 and 800 mt. above the level of the sea from 66° 5'’—66° 9’ lat. N. and only rank in the middle of the stated area. Here the tufts attained a diameter of 30—70 ctm. and a height above the ground of 15—25ctm., its development was also most vigorous almost in the middle of its vertical distribution between 500 and 700 mt. above the level of the sea; here almost every specimen was flowering (*‘/6—*7/1) and numerous ripe and old fruits were seen; lots of young specimens were also found (but seedlings were not seen). Many of the less vigorous specimens were much injured from Exobasidium. On the extreme points of the habitat downwards and in horizontal direction but a single sterile and stunted specimen was found after a long time spent in searching, while the limit upwards (800 mt.) was due to orographic influences, the rock being here covered with debris offering no habitat and the boundary-specimens being vigorous and commanding cover-forming. Kingorsuak from Cassiope Fjæld as far as below the first glacier on the west side. 90. Cassiope hypnoides (L.) Don. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 87 & 267, Hartz Fanerog. p. 392. Andromeda hypnoides Berlin Karlvaxter p. 53. Rather common on herby slopes, on rocky steps, in humid places in table-land and among blocks of stone, often in shade. The tufts up to 25 ctm. in diameter, thick, up to 5 ctm. high. Flowers richly from the 20 of June, sets abundant ripe fruit. Kap Wandel, Nigertusok, Kangerdlugsuatsiak, Ikatek, Kingorsuak, Akiliarisek, Ikerasausak, Tunok, Elvbakker, Kordlortok, Sarfakajik Amaga, Kong Oscars Havn (Berlin)! Tasiusak (Bay)! 91. Loiseleuria procumbens (L.) Desv. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 88 & 267, Azalca procumbens L. Berlin Karlvaxter p. 53. Commonly distributed in table-land, on rocky steps and herby slopes and in heath. Flowers from the 10 of June till the 15 of July, sets abundant ripe fruit, old fructifications are often found. The tufts become up to 70 ctm. in diameter and 2—3 ctm. high with the branches buried in the earth, the head of the root is often thickened. Old tufts are always dead in the middle. 92. Rhododendron lapponicum (L.) Whe. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 88 & 267, Berlin Karlvaxter p. 53. Rare and only in the interior, in heath and on rocky steps, especially where water is oozing down in summer. The stem often tuberously thickened in the earth’s crust up to 1,3 ctm. in diameter; the branches up to 30 etm, long and 0,5 ctm. thick, decumbent or ascending, but not more than 8 ctm. above the ground. Flowers from the 20 of June till the 15 of July, sets abundant ripe fruit. Nigertusok, Eskimo O, Kingorsuak, Sierak, Elvbakker. BP. viride Berlin Kärlväxter p. 53. Smaller than the main species. The leaves greenish on their under sides. Tasiusarsik in Angmagsalik Fjord one single sterile specimen, abt. 10 ctm. high, Kong Oscars Havn (Berlin)! Fam. 24. Vaeciniaceae. 93. Vaccinium uliginosum L. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 90 & 268, Berlin Kärlväxter p. 52, Hartz Fanerog. p 392. Commonly distributed in the interior on herby slopes and in humid fertile heath, also as espalier in table-land. Up to 50 ctm. long stems and branches, arising up to 25 ctm. above the ground, The leafing takes place in the latter half of May. Flowers in June, the flowers fragrant, sets abundant ripe fruit. * microphyllum Lge. |. c. Appears together with the main species and transition forms, but is more hardy and is therefore also found on the coast and in dry places in the table-land exposed to the wind; requires much humidity in spring. Flowers rather sparingly, sets ripe fruit. Common everywhere. Fam. 25. Rubiaceae. 94. Galium palustre L. var. minus Lge. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 92 & 269. Found but in one place in the edge of a pond among moss and grass, but here very numerous. 3—10 ctm. long, richly branched creeping shoots with 4-leaved whorls. The joints of the stems 0,7—1 ctm. long. The leaves 1—5 mm. long, c. 1,5 mm. broad. The flowers 1—4 in cyme, abt. 1 mm. broad, the corol white, tripetalous, the fruit 0,5—0,8 mm. in diameter. Flowers from the 10 of July till the 10% of August, in fruit on the 20" of August. The Subularia Dam in Elvbakker at Tasiusak. Fam. 26. Campanulaceae. 95. Campanula uniflora L. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 92 & 269. Very rare, high up in the mountains on the shady side in the interior, up to 15 ctm. high. In bloom from the 13 of July till the 15t of August. The west side of Kingorsuak, Amaga in Sermilik. 96. Campanula rotundifolia L. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 93 & 270, Berlin Kärlväxter p. 50, Hartz Fanerog. p. 393. C. groenlandica Berlin |. c. This very variable species appears in two forms. a. arctica Lge. l.c. C. rot. v. linifolia Wbg., C. rot. v. Langs- dorffiana D. C., CG. Scheuczeri Vill., C. helerodoxa (West) Witasek. Commonly distributed on herby slopes, in copses of willows and heath, 10—30 ctm. high, 1—6 flowers. In older specimens numerous bowed off-shoots') issue from a vigorous perpendicular top-root. By and by they arise and flower. While still sterile they bear oval-lanceolate leaves and cordate or oval basal-leaves; the leaves of the flowering stem become towards the top more and 1) See Warming: Botanisk Tidsskr. Copenhagen 1877, p. 84. 256 more linear, and sometimes all leaves except the 2—3 lowest are narrow linear. The lobes of the calyx are 4—9 mm. long (1/2— 1/5, exceptionally '/41—1/s of the length of the corolla). The corolla 13—20 mm. long, and when dried 15—20 mm. wide at the top. Flowers in July—August—September, sets ripe fruit. A few spe- cimens are approaching the main species very much. BP. uniflora Lge. 1. c. GC. groenlandica Berlin 1. c. Commonly distributed in all formations; 5—10ctm. high stem ascending from a perpendicular master-root, less often with than without the above mentioned lateral shoots. The stems have 1 flower, or 1 fully developped and 1—2 checked flowers. Basal leaves as in the preceding plant. The stem leaves most often somewhat broader, narrow lanceolate-oval or lanceolate-lingulate, the upper ones always narrowest, often linear. The calyx quinque- (6—9-) dentate, the denticles narrow, 1/3 (exceptionally !/4—1/5) of the length of the corolla. The corolla often large and open and more broad than long when dried. The flowers erect. Flowers July— October, sets abundant ripe fruit. I have referred C. groenlandica, described by Berlin, to this form because I do not consider it differring as to species from it. Taken each by itself the original specimens of Berlin in the Riks- museum in Stockholm are very characteristic, but examined together with a greater number of specimens, collected by me for this pur- pose, all transitions will be found to appear, and not all original specimens are exactly congruent with the description. Those of them which I have seen are not dentate (this character has oc- casioned Lange’s referring a specimen collected by Mr. Knutsen at Kingorsuak (Kangarsuk) to C. groenlandica) neither are the sepals always so short as stated; in one specimen they are even almost as long as 1/3 of the length of the corolla, and this is in another of the specimens not more broad than long. It will on the whole be impossible to base a separation of species on the above named characters. This will appear from the following list of measurings. In the list all the numbers are given in millimeter, and the form of the leaves is given by the greatest measured breadth divided by the greatest length of the same leaf. I have endea- voured to measure the broadest leaves among the lower stem leaves. C:C. indicates the length of the lobes of the calyx in proportion to those of the corolla, both of them measured from the deepest “ULLOJ SUIMO0[-opeys (4 SIaMOJ OU], t9}8 9} JO SOAROT OUI, “19MOJJ UO YM swøjs JE (, Pa ee ) bog ee. | 0 08:7 En 01:7 0 Sir VAUUY | à] y = Ho 20%), VAUUUY | +; ERE a FIS - | iv ayeyuap FE | cj:Z] 97ep109 66 Slag AOYIEAAIA || 008 paq i: J 0 82:8 ayejuap Gaal 21:9] 9J8p.109 "66 Sieg NESMISBL | OLE | SEALE) LI:9 G = 0 91:7] 0 Gib 0 ZO Alor WBS | OOF | 92:08 | 08:6 G I 0 12 0 9 Wes ZI:E ploquioya "CO “loz YRAIIS | OST | ZI:LI | LI:9 G = 0 ABOUT 0 GI BIS ZT: 6: L punos 0 Se VSUUY os | IG:LI | 21:8 g = ayejuap 01:1 purda.t 92:6 0 = 66 Ser YVEMT JOE 61:91] 91:4 | — | + 0 sist || DB ae wie gl 0 a | | | du May v £L:ç'e "20 Sler Bey | OS] | 82:08 | 08:8 8 € 0 | Go: 1 0 03:9°€ 9JUP109 ‘ZO Sr PIBWIY || OSS |9'22:81] ST SE) SG y 0 About] 0 I} 8 12:58 | 0 "CO "ig, Jarmaeny 109 | OF EL) 81: 8 G I 0 GI: ] 0 GY WIS 97:7 0 EO Slog Weyryweg | 091 02:02 | 08: | GF | 0 08:7 0 VI MRIS 62:6 0 "86 Slag YESMISL] | OOS | 81:81 |81:% Lo FE 0 ABOUT] 0 IOUT 0 20 Slog Xesmiseg, soyyuqargl] VET Terran 8 (1 0 avout] 0 avout 0 | 081 | GE: GG] 50:5 8 Io, = 14:71 2:9 Es, z a UOISIDUT W10 4 UOISIOUT UI10q ST EBBE = I. ee soaro]-Jeseq own pue afd Suipurg |? = AINSBIW EEE 3 ıoddn IIMO'T 2] — - — - ay} JO WIO æ 09 || SE ie) 258 ineision of the brim of the calyx to its point. L.Br. is the length of the corolla divided by its breadth when dried and compressed; only totally stretched corollas have been measured. It is seen that the breadth of the corolla is varying indepen- dently of the length of the denticles of the calyx and the form and indentations of the leaves. Especially the form of the leaves is very dependent on the habitat. Shade produces broad dentate leaves, a free habitat narrow entire leaves, but not even these two characters are varying in a parallel way. This has besides, been stated abready by Goebel in 1895") and later on by Familier”). It seems as if these shade loving forms are flowering late in the year and sometimes have broad corollas. Fam. 27. Compositae. 97. Taraxacum croceum Dahlstedt. G. Andersson och H. Hesselman: Bidr. t. kännedomen om Spetsbergens och Beeren Eilands Kärlväxtflora. Bih. t. K. Sv. Vet.-Akad. Handl. Bd. 26. Afd. Ill. No. 1, p. 12. Taraxacum officinale Web. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 94 & 270, Berlin Kärlväxter p. 44, Hartz Fanerog. p. 392. The leaves, 5—12, are lingulate, 5—33 (as a rule 10) ctm. long, at the top 1—1,5ctm. broad, more or less deeply lobate dentate or slightly and remote sinuate dentate. The denticles wry. The point of the leaf round or pointed. The leaves green, glabrous with purple midnerve. 1—4 peduncles, 10—60 (as a rule 20) ctm. long, the heads 3—2,5 ctm. in diameter. The flowers yellow, the marginal flowers 1,75—2 mm. broad with a broad reddish purple or bluish purple stripe on their outer sides, running out into three middenticles. Style and stigma saffron coloured. Outer phyllaries protruding, 5—6 mm. long and 1,5—2 mm. broad with white or reddish purple edges and rough brownish purple point. Inner phyllaries linear, 1 ctm. long, 1mm. broad, at the point contracted to a brownish 1) Ueber die Abhangigkeit der Blattform v. Camp. rot. v. Lichtintensitat. Sitzungsb. d. bayr. Akad. d. Wissensch. 1895 p. 331. ?) Flora Bd. 87, 1900 p. 95. 259 purple, often slightly dentated appendage. The fruit 2,5 mm. long, oboval lanceolate, pale terracotta coloured or dirty straw coloured with small upright denticles. The beak up to 9 mm. long. Both forms mentioned by D. are often found side by side, and it is impossible then to keep them from each other. They flower from the 20“ of June till the 1° of September, set abundant ripe fruit in August. On herby and grassy slopes, on steps, in copses of willows and less often in table-land and heath. Rather common in the whole district both on the coast and in the interior, noted in all places. Kong Oscars Havn (Berlin)! Tasiusak (Bay) ! 98. Hieracium alpinum L.') Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 95 & 271, Berlin Karlvaxter p. 44, Hartz Fanerog. p. 392. Rather common on herby and grassy slopes, on steps and in heath. The leaves numerous, 2—8 ctm. long. The peduncle 15—20 ctm. high, hairy, the heads 2—3,5ctm. in diameter. Flowers from the 10 of July till September, sets abundant ripe fruit. Common everywhere in the district both on the coast and in the interior. Kong Oscars Havn (Berlin)! Tasiusarsik (Knutsen) ! Tasiusak (Bay)! 99. Hieracium nigrescens Willd. *hypareticum Almquist. Berlin Kärlväxter p. 46. H. atratum Fr. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 271. Here and there on herby slopes and in copses of willows in the interior. 30—50 ctm. high, the basal-leaves 10—20 ctm. long. The number of the heads 2—8. Flowers from the 20 of July till the 30% of September, sets abundant ripe fruit. Kangerdluarsikajik, Kakasusak and Kilikitak near Kingorsuak, Ikerasausak, Kuarmiut, the bottom of the Sierak Dal, Tasiusarsik in Angmagsalik Fjord, Kordlortok Sö, Kuaralik at Sermilik-Vejen, Amakä at Kordlortok Fjæld, Amagä, Elvbakker, Kong Oscars Havn (Berlin)! 1) The Hieracium species were kindly determined by Amanuensis Dahl- stedt in Stockholm. 18* 260 100. Hieracium dovrense Fr. *groenlandicum Almg. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 272. Very rare and only in the interior in especially well sheltered, warm localities with large and constant snow cover in winter, on herby slopes and in copses of willows. 30—40 ctm. high, with 2—3,10 ctm. long stem leaves. Kakasuak near Kingorsuak, Akiliarisek, 66° 19'—66° 8' lat. N. 101. Gnaphalium supinum L. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 99 & 275, Berlin Karlvaxter p. 42, Hartz Fanerog. p. 392. Here and there on rocky steps and on herby slopes, 4—6 ctm. high, flowers from the 15 of July till the 1° of October, with ripe fruit in August. Kakasuak, the west side of Kingorsuak, Ikatek, Smalsund, Tasiusarsik kangigdlek, Elvbakker, Kong Oscars Havn (Berlin)! Tasiusak (Bay)! B. subacaule Whe. Tasiusarsik in Angmagsalik Fjord, Kordlortok, Kong Oscars Havn (Berlin)! 7. fuscum Sommerf. More common than the chief species, on similar localities. 5—8 ctm. high. Kakasuak, the east side of Kingorsuak, Kingak Angmagsivik, Ingmikertok, Kordlortok, Sarfakajik, Elvbakker, Kong Oscars Havn (Berlin)! 102. Gnaphalium norvegicum Gunn. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 99 & 275, Berlin Karlvaxter p. 42. Not common; on herby slopes and rocky steps in the interior. 10—40 ctm. high, the leaves 5—17 ctm. long, 1—2,7 ctm. broad. Flowers from the 20 of July—the 1° of September, sets abundant fruit, old fruit-stalks common. Kakasuak, the east side of Kingorsuak, Akiliarisek, Ikatek, Ikerasausak, the bottom of the Sierak Dal, Sierak, Tunok, Tasiusarsik in Angmagsalik Fjord, Sarfakajik, at Sermilik-Vejen near the colony, Kordlortok Fjæld, Amaga, Elvbakker, Kong Oscars Havn (Berlin)! 261 103. Antennaria dioica (L.) Gärtn. var. hyperborea Don. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 100 & 275. Very rare, on rocky steps. 7—15 ctm. high, with 1—5 stems, flowers richly in the latter half of July, with fruit on the 18 of ” August. Akiliarisek, Kordlortok Så, 66° 19'—65° 40’ lat. N. 104. Antennaria alpina (L.) Gärtn. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 100 & 275, Berlin Kärlväxter p.42. Hartz Fanerog. p. 392. Rather common on herby slopes and rocky steps in all parts of the district. 5—12 etm. high. Flowers from the 15 of June till the 15% of August, sets abundant ripe fruit. Kakasuak, the east and west side of Kingorsuak, Falkefjæld, Akiliarisek, Sten Ö, Fugleholm, Tunok, Tasiusarsik in Angmagsalik Fjord, Kordlortok, Adloe, Sarfakajik, Amagä, Amaka, Elvbakker, Kong Oscars Havn (Berlin)! Tasiusak (Bay)! var. glabrata. — Cassiope Fjæld near Kingorsuak. 105. Erigeron alpinus L. Fl. Dan. Tab. 292. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 101 & 276, Berlin Kärlväxter p.43. Rosenvinge Tilleg p. 699. Rather common on herby and grassy slopes and rocky steps in the interior. 10—20 cmt. high, often with many stems, the _ basal leaves lanceolate spatulate, hairy on their under sides, more or less hairy or almost glabrous on their upper surfaces, ciliate, with a distinct midnerve, and 2—4 more or less distinct secondary nerves, sometimes a little fleshy with indistinct nerves. The stem leaves numerous, lanceolate-linear, hairy, ciliate. The heads single or 2—3 together. The phyllaries almost equally long, upright, compressed, closely hairy with white unjointed or slightly jointed woolly hairs. The marginal flowers pink or light purple, the outer tubular discous flowers 2. Nigertusok, Kangerdlugsuatsiak, Kangerdluarsikajik, Kingorsuak, Akiliarisek, Tasiusarsik in Angmagsalik Fjord, Kordlortok, Sarfakajik, Elvbakker, Kong Oscars Havn (Berlin)! 262 Northern limit 66° 20’ lat. N. None of the specimens I saw can with certainty be referred to Erigeron neglectus Kerner, no more than the specimens the named author has distributed under this name (Fl. exic. austr. hung. N. 254) are totally congruent with the accompanying de- scription, as to the hairiness of the leaves, the character of the involucre ete. Even Rosenvinge I. c. p. 700 has proved this; and Linné having according to Lange I. c. p. 276 sanctioned the Fl. dan. figure as the plant named by him, I see no reason what- ever of changing its name because it does not appear in the Alps, and above all I see no reason of changing it for E. neglectus, to judge from the original descriptions, not found in Greenland, if on the whole anywhere. 106. Erigeron unifiorus L. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 101 & 276, Hartz Fanerog. p. 392. Here and there in heath, table-land and on rocky steps in the interior. 15—20 ctm. high, with many stems, the leaves spa- tulate, glabrous or hairy, ciliate, stem and stemleaves long hairy, the phyllaries hairy with jointed woolly hairs, no tubular 2 flowers. The marginal flowers purple or white. Kingorsuak, Akiliarisek, Tunok, Tasiusarsik in Angmagsalik Fjord, Kordlortok. B. pulchellus Fr. Lge. |. c. Common in table-land, heath and on rocky steps, 4—8 ctm. high; with 1—3 stems, the whole plant hairy, the hairs of the involuere purple, jointed, the marginal flowers short, white or yel- lowish white. Tasiusak (Bay)! I see no reason of uniting E. uniflorus with E. alpinus as proposed by Berlin; certainly the two species may on account of homogeneous conditions of life be of a striking resemblance as to habits and vegetative characters, but any gradual diminution of the number of the tubular female flowers and with this a steady tran- sition to E. uniflorus I did not observe. 107. Arnica alpina Olin. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 103. 263 Found only in one place, on a low gravel bank formed by disintegration. 12—22 ctm. high with 2—3 couples of leaves, the upper and lower (if there are 3 couples) lanceolate, trinervate, having thin hair on their upper surfaces, the middle ones (second couple) oval, long pointed, glabrous on their discs, all leaves ciliate. The stem especially towards the top lanate. The head 1—1,5 ctm. in dia- meter, the involucre lanate, the ray-flowers 2 ctm. long, light yellow, the disc-flowers 1 ctm. long, somewhat darker yellow. The fruit drab coloured (brun clair). The fruit edged, ribbed, hairy with upright protruding white hairs. The pappus white. Flowered on the 27 of July; old withered heads from the pre- vious year were seen. The west side of Kingorsuak, north of the first glacier 66° 7’ lat. N. Fam. 28. Polygonaceae. 108. Koenigia islandica L. Lge. Gonsp. Fl. Groenl. p. 104 & 277, Berlin Kärlväxter p. 60. Here and there, not common; on humid sand, in dried up brooks, on moss in pools and old house places. Appears in two forms according to the habitat. In manured places it becomes 5 ctm. high with 2—3 alternate leaves and branches and 1 couple of opposite basal leaves. The rosette at the top has 3—4 leaves. The leaves are 7—-10 mm. long and 2—4 mm. broad, oval lanceo- late-spatulate. In poor, sandy localities the height is 0,5— 1,5 ctm., the plant unbranched or with one branch, the stem-leaves are wanting, basal leaves and rosette leaves oval, 2—4 mm. long and c. 2 mm. broad. Both forms flower richly in July— August and set ripe seed. They grow most often gregariously, forming cover together with Hypna over spots of ‘/2 Q mt., in sunny localities deep red, in shade sappy light green. The west side of Kingorsuak, Ikerasausak, Kingak Angmagsivik, Tunok, Ingmikertok, Elvbakker Tasiusak, Kong Oscars Havn (Berlin)! Ikatek in Sermilik (Knutsen)! 264 109. Polygonum viviparum L. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 105, Berlin Kärlväxter p. 60, Hartz Fanerog. p. 392. Commonly distributed in all formations as well on the coast as in the interior. Appears in two forms connected by transitions: a. vulgaris. On herby slopes and in copses in sheltered lo- calities. The rhizome as a rule not swoln, 5—7 etm. long, s-for- med curved at the top, closely covered with brown ligules and short rests of Jeaf stalks. Most often 2 stems, 20—30 ctm. long. The inflorescence 5—9 etm. long, with bulbs on the lower 2/3. Flowers in July. The flowers white-pink. The bulbs are eagerly searched by Emberiza nivalis. 2. alpina. Whe. fl. Lappon. In table-land and heath. The rhizome short, 2—3 ctm., strongly s-formed, bent double, swoln, up to 1 etm. thick, only at the point set with 2 ctm. long leafstalks. The stem 5—10, exceptionally 20 ctm. high; the ground leaves {—5ctm. long, 0,5—3ctm. broad oval. The inflorescence 2—-6 ctm. long with bulbs on the lower half part. The flowers pink, the flowering begins on the 20 of June and is continued in shady localities until the beginning of the frost. Note. The tubers are eaten by the natives. 110. Oxyria digyna Campd. Lge. Gonsp. Fl. Groenl. p. 105, Berlin Kärlväxter p. 59, Hartz Fanerog. p. 392. Commonly distributed in table-land, herby slopes, copses of willows, manured places and cracks in the rocks as well on the coast as in the interior; found at all heights above the level of the sea. 5—50, commonly 20 ctm. high; thickly tufted with numerous rests of old leaf-stalks round the top of the many headed rhizome. The leaf-stalks 1—20 ctm. long, the blade 1—5 ctm. broad. Flowers from the 20 of June until September, sets abundant ripe fruit. Seedling plants and young specimens are most frequently found. The great variations of the size of the plant are due to the wide extent of the habitat of the plant, the smallest specimens are found in stony plains and in table-land. The great specimens are restricted to the copses. 265 111. Rumex acetosella L. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 106. Rare and only in the interior at 300—700 m. height above the level of the sea on rocky steps. 10—15 ctm. high as a rule, with many stems, leaves with one er two more or less distinct denticles at the ground. The east side of Kingorsuak, Akiliarisek, 66° 19'—66° 10’ lat. N. var. integrifolius Wallroth. 5—10 ctm. high, many stemmed tufts, all leaves with round or pointed basis. Rare, on rocky steps. Kilikitak, Kakasuak, Kingorsuak, Akiliarisek, Tunok. Both of them flower in July and set ripe fruit in August. Fam. 29. Salicaceae. 112. Salix herbacea L. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 107 & 278, Berlin Kärlväxter p. 61, Hartz Fanerog. p. 392. _ Commonly distributed in all formations as well on the coast as in the interior, often gregariously and forming cover of a height of 5 ctm. Lonely growing specimens attain sometimes a thickness of the stem of 0,8 ctm. and a length of 40ctm. In table-land the stem is not rarely tuberously thickened at the surface of the earth to a diameter of 1,5 ctm. The leaves are 0,5—3 ctm. broad, come out after the 1% of June. Flowers richly from the 6" of June, sets abundant ripe fruit, that is spread in August. 113. Salix arctica Pall. 3. groenlandica Lundstr. Salix groenlandica And. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 108 & 279. Commonly distributed in humid places as pools, oozy and sandy flats, on brooks, more rarely in copses; branches are as a rule decumbent, rooting, 20—30 ctm. long. Flowers from the 1% of July, sets abundant ripe fruit. 114. Salix glauca L. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p.110 & 279, Berlin Karlvaxter p.61, Hartz Fanerog. p. 392. 266 Commonly distributed in all formations as well on the coast as in the interior. 5—250 etm. long, up to 5 ctm. thick stems, as a rule adpressed, but in copses they may arise to 105 ctm. above the earth. The shoots distinctly separated in long-shoots, upright, stretched and straight with most often large oval leaves, and crooked knotty lateral short-shoots with oval lanceclate leaves. The hairiness of the leaves is much varying from thickly lanate or silkhairy to almost glabrous; the former are the most common on the short shoots, in heath and table-land, the latter in copses and on herby slopes (var. subarctica Lundstr.); but are not rarely found together in the same specimen; especially where a stem with hairy narrow leaves is broken, broad, obtuse glabrous leaves are seen on the rank long-shoots, shooting ont from the stub. The hairiness varies also much according to the season. The styles, the hairmess of the ovary and the form of the nectary are varying very much, but* not in a parallel way (as stated by Lundstrøm: Die Weiden Novaja Zemljas) so that no certain systematic separations can be built on these circumstances. The limit between S. glauca, var. subarctica and S. groenlandica is as stated by Lundström and Rosenvinge incertain and these two species ought certainly to be united to one single; I have not done it here because of biological differences between them as to habits and habitat making one hardly never doubt in nature which of the two plants one is before. Fam. 30. Betulaceae. 115. Betula nana L. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 112 & 280, Berlin Kärlväxter p. 64, Hartz Fanerog. p. 392. Not common and only in the interior, in heath and table-land, most as espalier, but appearing often gregariously in the habitat, so that it is a considerable constituent part of the vegetation. Up to 20 ctm. raised above the earth, the stem up to 2 m. long, but as a rule but 40—-60 ctm. Flowers from the 20™ of June till the 15 of July, sets ripe fruit. Kangerdlugsuatsiak, Kingorsuak, common, Akiliarisek, Amaga in Sermilik, Ikerasausak, Tunok, Sierak, Kordlortok Sö, Amaka (numerous), Sarfakajik, Amaga, Udkigsfjæld, Elvbakker, Kong Oscars Havn (Berlin)!, Tasiusak (Bay)!, Tasiusarsik and Orsuluiak (Knutsen)!. 267 Fam. 31. Typhaceae. 116. Sparganium minimum Fries. Rosenvinge Tilleg, p. 709. Anm. p. 710. «Sparganium» in B. G. Nathorst. Kritiska anmärkn. om den grönl. vegetat. hist. Bihang t. kgl. sv. Vet.-Akad. Handl. Bd. 16, Il, Nr. 6, 1890 p. 17. Ostenf. Fl. arctica p. 18. Very rare, in ponds with 20—40 ctm. deep water, sometimes drying up in August. The stems are 30—40 ctm. long, with 2—3, 60—80 etm. long floating leaves, 1—2 female heads without or with one short stalk; sometimes the lower one is free from the ligule; 1 male head. Flowers in the middle of August, sets ripe seed. Amakä in one of the ponds, Sparganium-Dam in Elvbakker near Tasiusak. The Sparganium mentioned by Prof. Nathorst I. c. is un- doubtedly the above named species and the finding place is un- doubtedly my locality, ,Sparganium-Dam*, passed by N. on his long walking tour on the 4 of September 1883. Fam. 82. Potamogetonaceae. 117. Potamogeton filiformis Pers. Rosenvinge Tilleg p. 710. P. marinus Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 117 & 282. Found but in a single place in a pond with abt. 30 ctm. water and sandy ground covered with a layer of mud abt. 2 ctm. thick, 10—20 ctm. high; stems with numerous leaves shoot out from the thin, white, creeping rhizome; sterile. Amaka. 65°39’ lat. N. Fam. 88. Orehidaceae. 118. Habenaria albida (L.) R. Br. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 118 & 282. Rare, on herby and grassy slopes; abt. 20 ctm. high with four 268 leaves. Tubers with 5—8, fleshy, white branches. Flowers from the 15 of July till the 15% of August. Kakasuak, Tunok, the bottom of Sierak Dal, Sierak, Tasiu- sarsik in Angmagsalik Fjord, Sarfakajik, Amakä near Kordlortok. 119. Habenaria hyperborea (L.) R. Br. Platanthera hyperborea Z. major. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 118 & 283. Very rare; on herby slopes; 10—15 ctm. high with 3—7 leaves. Flowers in August. Sarfakajik, the south side of Kordlortok Fjæld. Fam. 84. Colehieaceae. 120. Tofieldia borealis Wbg. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 122 & 284, Berlin Kärlväxter p. 66, Hartz Fanerog. p. 392. Here and there in heath, on grassy slopes and on rocky steps, but always singly and not common; not observed on the coast. 5—15 ctm. high. Flowers from the 20% of June till August, sets ripe fruit. Kap Wandel, Nigertusok, Kangerdlugsuatsiak, Kakasuak and the west side of Kingorsuak, Ikerasak, Kuarmiut, Misutok, Tunok, Elv- bakker, Kong Oscars Havn (Berlin)! Tasıusak (Bay)! Fam. 80. duneaceae. 121. Juneus biglumis L. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 122 & 284, Berlin Karlvaxter p. 67, Ostenf. Fl. arct. p. 25. On humid spots in table-land; very rare, 2—7 ctm. high, with fruit in August. Kap Wandel, Kordlortok Sö, Elvbakker, Kong Oscars Havn (Berlin)! 269 122. Juncus triglumis L. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 122 & 284, Ostenf. Fl. arct. p. 25. Not found but in one place in humid table-land. 2—4 ctm. high; in bloom on the 10% of July together with J. biglumis. Elvbakker near Tasiusak 65° 35’ lat. N. 123. Juncus castaneus Sm. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 123 & 284, Ostenf. Fl. arct. p. 24. Not found but in one place near the brim of a small low sandy islet in the delta of a large river. 10—20 ctm. high speci- mens with fruit from the previous year and old 10 ctm. long leaves, the new leaves were on the 24 of June 3—5 etm. long. Kingorsuak 66° 15’ lat. N. 124. Juncus trifidus L. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 123 & 284, Berlin Kärlväxter p. 67, Ostenf. Fl. arct. p. 26. Commonly distributed in the whole district in table-land, heath, grassy slopes, on stony plains and other dry places, often snowless in winter. 3—20 ctm. high thick tufts or very spread covering among lichens (Stereocaulon). Flowers from the 20“ of June, sets abundant ripe fruit. Kong Oscars Havn (Berlin)! 125. Juncus aretieus Willd. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 124 & 284, Ostenf. Fl. arct. p. 24. Not found but in one place on a very low sandy islet in a river delta towards a lake. The rhizome creeping at the depth of 3—5 ctm., up to 50 etm. long with numerous 20—25 ctm. high (of these the end-leaf abt. 5 ctm.) shoots, with flowers and numerous old fruit bearing shoots on the 29% of July. Kingorsuak 66° 16’ lat. N. 126. Juncus bulbosus (L.) Gelert. Ostenf. Fl. arct. p. 24. J. supinus Moench. Rosenv. Tillæg p. 714. Triglochin palustre L. Berlin Kärlväxter p. 65. 270 Very rare, in half dried up ponds where there has been water of at most 50 etm., on coarse sand. 1—1,5 ctm. high, sterile shoots with 1—3 off-shoots above ground, the stemjoints of which are one-leaved and 5—7 mm. long. The whole plant has a reddish colour and grows gregariously so that it may form cover together with Subularia aquatica on small flats of a diameter of up to 10 ctm., separated by bare narrow parts; it is found as well sub- merse as in the drained ground. The submerse specimens are more greenish than the air plants. Amaka, pond near the sea, but above the high-water mark, Elvbakker in the Subulariadam, Kong Oscars Havn (Berlin)! 127. Luzula multiflora (Ehrh.) Lej. 2. congesta (Taylor) Lge. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 125 & 285, Hartz Fanerog. p. 392, Ostenf. Fl. arct. p. 31. On fertile grassy slopes and in heath; rather rare and only in the interior. 10—20 ctm. high, thickly tufted. Flowers in July, sets ripe fruit. Akiliarisek 66° 20", Kingorsuak 66°10, Sierak 66°, Tunok 65° 56’ lat. N., Kordlortok Sö, Tasiusak (Bay)! 128. Luzula areuata (Wbg.) Sw. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 127 & 285, Berlin Karlvaxter p. 68, Hartz Fanerog. p. 392. On humid rocky slopes among moss especially on the shady side. 15—920 ctm. high, flowers in July, sets ripe fruit. Kakasuak, Cassiope Fjæld and several other places near Kingor- suak between 66° 8’—10' lat. N. var. confusa Lindb. Commonly distributed in the whole district in table-land and heath. 10—25 ctm. high, flowers in July, sets rich ripe fruit. Kong Oscars Havn (Berlin)! Tasiusak (Bay)! 129. Luzula spicata (L.) D. C. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 128 & 286, Berlin Kärlväxter p. 68, Hartz Fanerog. p. 392, Ostenf. Fl. arct. p. 28. to -) _ Commonly distributed in all formations as well near the coast as in the interior, is not cover forming, but appears very frequently and in great quantities in the vegetation. 10—20 ctm. high, many- strawed, thickly tufted, always with lots of old stems and leaf rests round the ground. Flowers from the 15% of June till the 15% of August, sets abundant ripe fruit, is often snowless in winter, and the seeds are spread by the wind over the snow. Kong Oscars Havn (Berlin)! Tasiusak (Bay)! Tasiusarsik kidlek (Knutsen)! BP. major Lge. 1. c. Rare; on herby slopes. 20—30 ctm. high; with 1—3 ctm. long ears; flowers during the first half of July; sets ripe fruit. West side of Kingorsuak, Akiliarisek, Tasiusarsik in Angmag- salik Fjord, Ikerasausak, Elvbakker near Tasiusak. Fam. 86. Cyperaceae ». 130. Scirpus caespitosus L. f. austriaca (Palla). Palla Bericht d. deutsch. bot. Gesellsch., 1897 p.468, Ostenf. Fl. arctica p. 43, Lge. Consp. FI. Groenl. p. 129 & 286. Rare, on the banks of rocky brooks and in humid places in heath and on rocky steps, grows gregariously and forms cover over small spots. 7—10 ctm. high, flowers from the 15 of July. Sierak, Misutok, Tunok, Kordlortok Fjæld near Tasiusak 66° — 65° 40’ lat. N. 131. Eriophorum Scheuchzeri Hoppe. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 129 & 286, Berlin Kärlväxter p. 68, Hartz Fanerog. p. 392, Ostenf. Fl. arct. p. 41. Not common, in pools, on river banks and on sandy flats, in the interior. 15—20 ctm. high, flowers from the 20% of June, sets ripe fruit July— August. Eskimo Ö, Kingorsuak, Ikerasausak, Sierak, Tunok, Ikerasak Fugleholme, Kordlortok Sö, the valley behind the colony, Kong Oscars Havn (Berlin)! Tasiusak (Bay)! 1) Determined by Inspector C. H. Ostenfeld. 272 132. Elyna Bellardi (All.) C. Koch. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 130 & 287, Ostenf. Fl. arct. p. 44. Very rare on rocky steps where the water is running down in spring, but where there is very dry later in summer, 15 ctm. high, flowers in July. Akiliarisek, Sarfakajik, 66° 18’—65° 40’ lat. N. 133. Carex nardina Fr. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 131 & 287, Berlin Karlvaxter p. 73, Ostenf. Fl. arctica p. 48. Common in table-land and heath, and on rocky steps in the interior, not so frequent on the outer coast, 5 ctm. high, flowers in June and July. 134. Carex capitata Soland. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 132 & 287, Rosenvinge Tilleg p. 718, Ostenf. Fl. arctica p. 49. Very rare on herby slopes on gravelly ground. 20 ctm. high with fruit on the 17 of August 1902. Kordlortok Så 65° 42’ lat. N. 135. Carex scirpoidea Mich. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 132 & 287, Berlin Karlvaxter p. 53, Ostenf. Fl. arctica p. 82. Common in pools and near ponds, forms often especially to- gether with other Carex-species and grasses cover. 5—20 ctm. high, flowers from the 20% of June. 136. Carex mieroglochin Wbe. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 133 & 288, Ostenf. Fl. arct. p. 92. Very rare on rocky steps above herby slopes in half dried up small water courses. 5—18ctm. high, thickly tufted, with fruit on the 25%—96 of August. Kordlortok Fjæld, Sarfakajik, 65° 40’ lat. N. 273 137. Carex rupestris All. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 133 & 288, Ostenf. Fl. arctica p. 86. Rare; in table-land in the interior. 5—8 ctm. high, flowers in June. Cassiope Fjæld near Kingorsuak, Tunok. 65° 56’—66° 15’ lat. N. 138. Carex Macloviana D'Urv. Ostenf. Fl. arctica p. 54. C. festiva Dewey. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 134 & 288, Berlin Kärlväxter p. 72. Rather rare; on grassy slopes and in grassy field, especially near small ponds in the interior, grows gregariously and forms cover together with grasses. 10—40 ctm. high; stiffly upright, green; flowers in July, sets ripe fruit. The bottom of the Sierak Dal, Sarfakajik, Kordlortok Sö, Nord- fjord, Sparganium Dam, Elvbakker; Kong Oscars Havn (Berlin)! 66° and 65° 42’—35! lat. N. 139. Carex lagopina Wbg. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 135 & 288, Berlin Karlvaxter p. 72, Ostenf. Fl. arctica p. 58. Rare; on humid sandy flats near the beach and in pools. 15—25 ctm. high; flowers in July, sets ripe fruit. Falke S6 near Kingorsuak, 66° 5’ lat. N., the bottom of the Sierak Dal, the valley behind the station, Kong Oscars Havn (Berlin)! 140. Carex glareosa Wbg. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 137 & 289, Berlin Karlvaxter p. 73, Ostenf. Fl. arctica p. 58. Common in the interior at the high-water mark in sandy and clayey places, and here and there on the outer coast and some- times at a greater distance from the beach in heath and table-land. 5—20, in manured places up to 40 ctm. long, decumbent or as- cending shoots forming thick tufts on the firm marshy or clayey ground. The tufts are often 50 ctm. in diameter. Forms together with Cerastium trigynum cover on.tent and house sites, and on 19 274 birds’-islets. Flowers from the 20 of June, sets abundant ripe fruit. Kangerdlugsuatsiak, Kangerdluarsikajik, Kingorsuak, Ikerasausak, Sierak, Kingak Angmagsivik, Tunok, Unartok, Kuarmiut, Isi, Ing- mikertok, Ingmikertorajik, Kanganitsai, Adloe near Kap Dan, Amaka, the valley behind the colony, Grénlenderpynt, Kong Oscars Havn (Berlin)! 141. Carex brunescens (Pers.) Poir. Ostenf. Fl. arctica p. 56, C. vitilis Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 136 & 289. Very rare; found but in one place in pools. 20 etm. high, with fruit on the 6% of August. Tunok. 65°56’ lat. N. 142. Carex atrata L. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 139 & 289, Ostenf. Fl. arctica p. 64. Very rare; not found but in one place on fertile herby slopes. 10—65 etm. high, with fruit on the 25—26™ of August. Sarfakajik. 65°40! lat. N. 143. Carex salina Wbg. v. subspathacea Wormskj. Ostenf. Fl. arctica p.73, C. subspathacea, 2. curvata Drej. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groen]. p. 140 & 289, Berlin Kärlväxter p. 71. Not common; on clayey and sandy flats near the high-water mark especially near estuaries, only in the interior, grows grega- riously; 1—3, exceptionally 5 ctm. high, with creeping and ascending abt. 2 ctm. long shoots. Flowers from the 1% of July. In a single place, Grönlsenderpynt, specimens were collected, forming transition to the main species; they grew in a salt marsh in an estuary and formed cover. Kingorsuak, Ikerasausak, Sierak, Tunok, Kordlortok Vig on Amaka, Grünlænderpynt, Kong Oscars Havn (Berlin)! 144. Carex rigida Good. Ostenf. Fl. arctica p. 77, Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 145 & rw 4) or 291, Berlin Kärlväxter p. 72, Hartz Fanerog. p.392, C. hyper- borea Lge. |. c. p. 145, Hartz |. c. Commonly distributed in all formations, as well in the interior as on the coast. 5—20 ctm. high, flowers from the 20* of June, sets abundant ripe fruit. v. Bigelovi (Tuck.). G. hyperborea Drej. Lege. I. c. On herby and grassy slopes, in grassy field and in humid, sandy places, much more rare than the main species and only in the interior. 20—30 ctm. high, flowers July— August, sets ripe fruit. Akiliarisek, Kingorsuak, Kangerdluarsikajik, Tunok, Sarfakajik, Nordfjord, Amaga, Elvbakker, Tasiusak (Bay)! 145. Carex capillaris L. Lge. Gonsp. Fl. Groenl. p. 148 & 292, Berlin Karlvaxter p. 69, Ostenf. Fl. arctica p. 90. Very rare; on rocky steps. 5—10 ctm. high, flowers in July; grows gregariously on small, dried up, but in spring wet spots. Kap Wandel, Kakasuak and the west side of Kingorsuak, Kong Oscars Havn (Berlin)! 146. Carex rariflora (Wbg.) Sm. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 150 & 292, Berlin Kärlväxter p. 70, Ostenf. Fl. arctica p. 67. Not rare in pools, river beds and in humid sandy flats. 5— 20 etm. high; flowers from the 20 of June, sets ripe fruit. Kangerdlugsuatsiak, Eskimo Ö, Kingorsuak, Ikerasausak, Tunok, common near Tasiusak, Kong Oscars Havn (Berlin)! 147. Carex supina Wbg. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 151 & 293, Ostenf. Fl. arctica p. 86. Rare; on rocky steps and in dry cracks in the interior. 10 etm. high; flowers in July. Kangerdlugsuatsiak, Akiliarisek, Kilikitak near Kingorsuak. 66° 10'—18' lat. N. 195 276 148. Carex rotundata Wbg. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 152 & 293, Ostenf. Fl. arctica p. 94. Very rare; at the edge of ponds and pools. 25 ctm. high; flowers in August. Amaka in pools and Subularia Dam in Elvbakker, 65° 35’ — 37. lat..N. Carex rotundata ad C. pullam accedens C. H. Ostenf. Tunok in a low pond 65° 54’ lat. N. Fam. 37. Gramineae. 149. Phleum alpinum L. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 155 & 294, Berlin Kärlväxter p. 74, Hartz Fanerog. p. 392, Ostenf. Fl. arctica p. 100. Here and there in copses of willows, on herby slopes and in humid heath. 20—45 ctm. high; flowers in July, sets ripe fruit. Kingorsuak, Akiliarisek, Kangerdlugsuatsiak, Nigertusok, Kanger- dluarsikajik, Grus O, Ikerasausak, Tunok, Tasiusarsik in Angmag- salik Fjord, Tasiusarsik kitdlek, Sarfakajik, Kordlortok 56, Amaga, Elvbakker, Kong Oscars Havn (Berlin)! Tasiusak (Bay)! 150. Alopecurus aristulatus Mich. Gelert in Ostenf. Fl. arctica p. 100. A. fulvus Rosenvinge Tillæg p. 727, Berlin Kärlv. p. 74. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groen. p. 294. A. geniculatus Lge. |. c. p. 156. Very rare; not found but in half or totally dried up ponds at Isi 65°58’, Amaka 65°37’ and on Elvbakker 300’ above the level of the sea 65°35! lat. N. Kong Oscars Havn (Berlin)! 151. Agrostis canina L. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 158 & 295, Ostenf. Fl. arct. p. 118. Very rare; on grassy slopes and in grass field on humid ground. 18—20 etm. high, thickly tufted with remaining ligules, with fruit in the latter half of August. Amaka at Kordlortok between a pond and the sea, Amaga on grassy slopes. 65° 38’ lat. N. X9 Q = 152. Agrostis borealis Hartm. Murb. in Botan. Not. 1898 p. 11. Ostenf. Fl. arct. p. 109. Agrostis rubra L. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 157 & 295, Berlin Kärlväxter p. 76. Here and there, not common; on grassy and herby slopes and in stony plains. 5—30 ctm. high, thickly tufted, tunicate, in sheltered localities, upright, in open places with diverging decumbent straws. Flowers from the 15 of July till the 1%* of September, sets ripe fruit. Amaga in Sermilik, Kingorsuak, Kangerdluarsikajik, Ikatek, Sarfakajik, Kordlortok Sö, Amaga, Grünlænderpynt, Elvbakker, Kong Oscars Havn (Berlin)! 153. Calamagrostis neglecta (Ehrh.) Gelert. Gelert in Ostenf. Fl. arctica p. 103. C. stricta v. borealis. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 161 & 296. C. hyperborea, Berlin Karlvaxter p. 75. Here and there in pools, on grassy slopes, on sand and clayey beach, where it forms thick associations over small areas. 20—45 ctm. high; flowers in August, sets ripe fruit; after having shed the flowers the straws often remain throughout the winter below the snow cover, and they are still seen upright at the be- ginning of the next flowering. Kingorsuak, common, Ikerasausak, Kingak Angmagsivik, Ikerasak, Tunok, Tasiusarsik kitdlek, Sarfakajik, Kordlortok Sö, Amaka, Amaga, Elvbakker, Grénlenderpynt, Kong Oscars Havn (Berlin)! 154. Aira cæespitosa (L.) Bab. f. alpina (L.) Gelert. Ostenf. Fl. arct. p. 113, A. alpina Lge. Consp. Fl. Groen. p. 163 & 296, Berlin Kärlv. p. 76. 179. Cystopteris fragilis (L.) Bernh. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 188 & 306, Berlin Kärlväxter p. 82, Hartz Fanerog. p. 392, Ostenf. Fl. arctica p. 6. Common on herby slopes, in copses of willows, on rocky steps and in humid fertile heath. 15—30 ctm. high. The leaves come out from the 15 of June, usually with sporangia in July— September. Commonly distributed as well on the coast as in the interior. 180. Asplenium viride Huds. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 305, Berlin Kärlväxter p. 81, Ostenf. Fl. arctica p. 81. Very rare; in humid shady cracks in the rocks, on herby slopes. Numerous, 5—10 etm. long leaves shoot out from the rhizome, squeezed into fine cracks. Almost all the 4—5 mm. long, oval or rhombic segments are sporuliferous (from the 26 of July till the 4 of September). Kakasuak near Kingorsuak 66° 8’ lat. N., Kordlortok 65°38’, Kong Oscars Havn (Nath.)! 181. Woodsia ilvensis (L.) R. Br. Gelert in Ostenf. Fl. arctica p. 7. a. rufidula (Michx.) Kock. W. ilvensis R. Br. Lge. Consp. p. 188 & 307, Hartz Fanerog. p. 302. Rather common on herby slopes, rocky steps and in heath. 5—12 ctm. high, thickly tufted, with many leaves. Begins coming out on the 15% of June, almost every leaf bears numerous sporangia. Common as well on the coast as in the interior. 2. alpina (Bolton) Aschers. & Gräbn. W. hyperborea Lge. Consp. p. 189. Here and there in the interior in cracks on herby slopes and on rocky steps. Kap Wandel, Nigertusok, Kilikitak, Kakasuak and in several places near Kingorsuak, Tunok, Kilitilik near Tasiusak. 7. glabella (R. Br.) Trautw. W. glabella R. Br. Lge. Consp. p. 189. Very rare and only in the interior on rocky steps, 3—5 etm. high with numerous sporangia in July. Kilikitak and Falke Fjæld near Kingorsuak, Misutok, 66° 10'— 66° lat. N. 287 Fam. 42. Ophioglossaceae. 182. Botrychium Lunaria (L.) Sw. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 190 & 307, Berlin Kärlväxter p. 83, Ostenf. Fl. arctica p. 7. Very rare; on herby slopes, just below the rocky walls. 9 ctm. high, with a 2 ctm. long, sterile, 9 lobate leaf; the fertile leaves 5 ctm. long, of these the upper ones 2 ctm. with incurvate, 2—8 m. m. long sporangia bearing lobes. The sporangia were closed on the 13 of August. Kong Oscars Havn (Berlin)!, Amakä at Kordlortok, 65° 35’ — 38 lat. N. 183. Botrychium lanceolatum (Gmet.) Angstr. Lge. Consp. Fl. Groenl. p. 190 & 307, Ostenf. Fl. arctica p. 2. Very rare; on rocky steps above herby slopes. 10—12 ctm. high with developped, but not open sporangia on the 14t—1s of July. Akiliarisek 66° 18° and Tasiusarsik in Angmagsalik Fjord 65° 48 lat. N. 20—6— 1906. Arbejder fra den Botaniske Have i København. Nr. 34. Species nova Marsupellae, muscorum generis. Gy: Vw Auctore €. J ensen. Reprinted from „MEDDELELSER OM GRONLAND* Vol. XXX. SSS = a LIBRARY NEW YORK BOTANICAL GARDEN. Copenhagen. Printed by Bianco Luno. 1906. IARDEN Marsupella groenlandica C. Jens. nov. sp. Dioica, cespites densos et nigros formans; planta ad 6ctm. alta et 1 mm. lata; caulis e parte subterranea procumbente et defoliata erectus vel suberectus, ad 0,20 mm. latus, rigidus, firmus, stoloniferus, pauciramosus, ramis ventralibus e basi cur- vata erectis; stolones e partibus inferioribus caulis sat numerosi, longi, horizontales vel inflecti, leniter colorati, efoliati, una cum partibus inferioribus caulis radicellulas rubras gerentes. Cellulae corticales majores, rectangulares vel quadratae, in sectione transversa rotundae et ovatae, parietibus mediocriter incrassatis; cellulae infra stratum corticale elongatae, angustae, valde in- crassatae, prosenchymaticae, 2—3. stratosae: cellulae centrales numerosissimae, parenchymaticae, elongatae, parietibus medio- eriter incrassatis. Folia inferiora parva, remota, superiora magnitudine crescentia, densiora, crassa et rigida, transversim affixa, semiamplexa, squarroso-patula, non decurrentia, late ovata, maxime concava et subcochleariformia, apice late emarginato vel rotundato, sæpissime irregulariter secta, præcipue in foliis anosioris, margine non reflexo; cellulae rotundato-polygonatae, basilares majores, marginales et apicales minores et rotundato- quadratae, ad angulos magis et distincte triangulariter incras- satæ, parietibus lateris dorsalis folii valde incrassatis, ceteris vix incrassatis; cuticula laevis. Flores 2 et fructus desunt. Androecium apicale, bracteae 5—7, densae, parum minores quam folia, antheridia singula in axilla. 20* MAY 2 1 1907 vier 292 DES Fig. 1. Marsupella groen- landica C. Jensen. Planta mascula in magnitudine naturali. Fig. 2 Marsupella groenlandica C.Jensen. Ramulus masculus (c.?2/1). re DN © = ab F aN © 3 29 SOC SENT ie Js & se O © ) 294 Species peculiaris, habitu et magnitudine Cesiae revolutae et formis certis Marsupellae emarginatae similis, characteribus Marsupellae aquaticae affinis, sed facile distinguitur preprimis foliis cochleariformibus, subintegris — integris. Habitat: Groenlandia occidentalis; Disco (Lyngmarken), 1898, leg. M. P. Porsild. Groenlandia orientalis; Hurry Inlet (Ryders Dal), 1900, leg. C. Kruuse. 28—11—1906. Arbejder fra den Botaniske Have i Kobenhavn. Nr. 35. List of the Hepaticae and Sphagnales found in East-Greenland between 75° and 65°35 lat. N. in the years 1898—1902. By C. Jensen. tv Reprinted from ,MEDDELELSER OM GRONLAND* Vol. XXX. LIBRARY 02e 0 LE ———— N E W Y ORK SOTANICAL . GARDEN. Copenhagen. Printed by Bianco Luno. 1906. The mosses mentioned in this list were brought home from the following expeditions, viz: Den danske Baadekspedition 1898--99, Den svenske Ekspedition 1899, Den danske Baadekspedition 1900, Den danske Ekspedition 1901—1902. The collectors are chiefly P. Dusén, N. Hartz and C. Kruuse. The mosses collected by P. Dusén have already been published in Ofversigt af Kongl. Vetensk.- Akad. Förhand- lingar, 1900, no. 6 (Hepaticae) and in Bihang till K. Svenska Vet.-Akad. Handlingar, Band 27, Afd. III, no. I ‘Sphagna). The places where the mosses have been taken are: Lat. N. Long W. of Grw. Waldes: 7.2.5.2 dee eee Gar SK 3105 PIRWIARCeK: : 2: AA 66° 18’ 31:35 Amaka (Kap Hörring) ....... 65° 38’—39' 37° 34 HAN «UE 65° 36’ 37° 10’ a A 0 73.10 Br&fjord near Kap Wandel... 66° 19’ Panne Land... 222 71° 45) Clavering Ö, Kap Mary ...... 74° 10' Menor Oo 2... 2/73 eee 66° 7’ 35834) Einkäkker'.. :... ..- Kuren 65° 37! 37° 34’ —40! Poke Of: >... . yore 66° 15 0 Er Fleming Inlet: ; ... eg: 71° 40° Grénlenderpynt near Tasiusak. 65°37’ 312.33! Hold): with Hope . . 292322242 73° 30! ones niet... aie eee 70° 51' Ike ASE EE Un UE 65° 56’ 36° 34! 21 MAY 2 1 1907 298 Lat. N. Long W. of Grw. Ikerasausakk ir Dan wares. m 66° 0'—5' 37° 20' —30' Ingmukertotajik 4.21 At... 65° 54’ BUS ern U Se. ee 65957! 35.52 Kaiser Franz Joseph Fjord... 73° 30'— 73° 10' Kafarsak Bean See a oe 66° 49 Kakasuak near Kingorsuak.... 66° 5’—10' 31° 5'—15/ Kanrerdluarsikank 027 65° 57! 36° 10° Kangerdlugsuatsiak.......... 66° 16’—19' 35°17'—97' Kap Borlase Warren ........ 14° 19 Kap Dalton Pere er... en 69° 25’ Kap Kranklin wits eee eee 132 15! Kap: Giesecke..... 5.2. RR. 80: 74° 50 Kap Greg sks ee el: aeaibie 70° 58’ Kap Hildebrandt 77%. 66° 47' RAD OPA EME ES NET DER 72230, Kapı seatorth ee. oe Bech gars cr. 1150: Kap Ste waltrcn ees ao ase 70° DE) Kap* Wandel. eHaM tence) 66° 18° 34° 46! Kap Watimmg iit. at. ECM 67° 1'—9" Kingoxsmak sa), sr. ee À 66° 5'—10' 37° 5'—15! © Karma ei aap ee 65° 52° 31.38, Langö (Ikerasarmiut) ........ 67° 4' Lille Pendulum Ö........... 74° 30' EOL AL eee. Mebane 66° 58’ Midtpynt n. Kangerdlugsuatsiak. 66° 15! 33220. MISMO ea NE NEL fee 66° 0’ 36° 58! Nanerlalkae u ee et 66° 36! Nordfjord near Tasiusak ..... 632 37% 31039 Nordostbughin ra ren. TAVS Vl NordrevSkerasak creme" 65° 56’ NOrs ie Be Sle 65833! 3128 NAN. Ber erw cote ee 67° 16’ Robertson O in Sofia Sund... 73°5' Ryders Dal in Hurry Indlet .. 70° 51' Bohss Tu ve RARES RS EU RES 122407 SE EV Re I LR BØRN, te 65855) 20010. SITE OMR RE BES AA 65° 56’ BT? 5’ RAD SU ee NER Re Ph 65° 59’ 33.50: Sree ee an N u en 66° 3' 35° 31! Lat. N Long W. of Grw Söndre Aputitek............ 67° 16' US TSA ET 2 mae eras 65° 37! 37° 33! Tasiusak near Kap G. Holm .. 66° 45 Tasiusarsik kidlek........... 65° 37! EYES LS Tasiusarsik in Angmagsalik Fjord 65° 47 37° 4 BEY fos Sd SSIS wed EE <) 65° 53° 36° 45’ —50! Warner Sund A hea Tier 69° 45’ option (hatha an ease 69° 45’ (0 bras SR CORRE TEE 65° 54’ 36° 18’ Ras UT SERPENT ES 66° 22’ CE RIT: iach ad PR seo as 66° 10’ 35.33 Fam. 1. Hepatieae. 1. Marchantia polymorpha L. Tunok (Kruuse): var. alpestris Nees. Kap Seaforth in Fleming Inlet, on mew-hillocks, gonid. (Hartz) ; Ikerasausak, in Archangelicetum, 6, gonid.; Sierak Dal, in herby slopes; Ingmikertorajik, fert.; Kuarmiut, gonid.; Amaka, on river sides, gonid.; Elvbakker; Tasiusak (Kruuse). This variety comes nearest to var. mamillata Hagen, from which it only disagrees in having few mamillae. 2. Chomocarpon commutatus (Lindenb.) Lindb. Preissia commutata Nees. Bonteko Ö, ster. (Dusen); Kap Seaforth, on the beach; Fleming Inlet Kingua; Nordostbugt, in bogs (Hartz); Kakasuak near Kin- gorsuak (Kruuse). 3. Asterella pilosa (Wahlenb.) Trevis. Lille Pendulum Ö, fert.; Clavering Ö, Kap Mary, fert. (Dusén); Kakasuak near Kingorsuak, 420 mt. above the level of the sea, fert.: Kangerdluarsikajik, fert.; Tunok, fert.; Elvbakker, fert. (Kruuse). 213 300 4. Peltolepis grandis Lindb. Bræfjord near Kap Wandel; Kap Wandel; Akiliarisek, among Salix arctica (Kruuse). 5. Sauteria alpina (N. B.) Nees. Kap Seaforth; Canning Land, fert. (Hartz). 6. Clevea hyalina (Somm.) Lindb. Kap Franklin, fert. (Dusén). 7. Odontoschisma Macounii Aust. O. tessellatum (Bergg.) C. Jens. Clavering Ö, Kap Mary; Kap Franklin; Röhss Fjord; Hurry Inlet, on the field near Ryders Elv (Dusén, Kruuse); Turner O (Koch). 8. Hygrobiella laxifolia (Hook.) Spruce. Jern Ö (Kruuse). 9. Cephalozia albescens (Hook.) Kaal. Pleuroclada albescens Spruce. Hurry Inlet (Dusen); Smalsund; Jærn Ö (Kruuse). var. islandica (Nees) Kaal. Turner Sund (Hartz & Kruuse); Tunok; Ikerasausak, on heath; Tasiusak, in bogs at Nordfjord (Kruuse). 10. Cephalozia bicuspidata (L.) Dum. Kap Parry; Hurry Inlet (Dusen); Kap Stewart (Hartz, Dusén); Turner Sund; Midtpynt at Kangerdlugsuatsiak; Ikerasausak; Jærn Ö (Kruuse). var. cavifolia Arnell. Fleming Inlet; Liverpool Kyst, southern part (Kruuse); Turner Sund (Hartz & Kruuse); Kap Dalton (Hartz); Nualik, Dede Hus Pynt; Kingorsuak, on sandy flats; Ikerasausak; Sierak Dal, on sandy flats; Ingmikertorajik (Kruuse). 301 Everywhere in arctic regions this species has an inclination to get concave leaves, which are smaller and with shorter lobes. The colour is commonly more or less red-brown and dark, the leaf-cells and the cuticular-cells of the stem are shorter. There exists howewer a gradual transition between these forms and the main-species. li. Cephalozia media Lindb. Kap Parry (Dusén). 12. Cephalozia pleniceps (Aust.) Lindb. Clavering O, Kap Mary, perianth. (Dusén); Hurry Inlet, near Ry- ders Elv, fert. (Kruuse); Turner Ö (Koch); Turner Sund, fert. (Hartz & Kruuse); Akiliarisek, among Salix arctica (Kruuse). 13. Cephalozia divaricata (Frane.) Dum. Kap Giesecke; Lille Pendulum Ö; Clavering O, Kap Mary; Robertson O in Sofia Sund (Dusén); Nordostbugt, in bogs, 9, gonid. (Hartz); Hurry Inlet, & and 2, (Dusén); Turner Ö (Koch); Turner Sund, partly forma elongata, (Kruuse); Kap Dalton (Hartz); Nualik, partly in a derelict Eskimo-house; Ingmikertorajik; Tunok, on sandy ground; Tasiusak (Kruuse). var. inceurva Lindb. Nordostbugt (Hartz); Turner Sund; Depot Ö, in old tombs (Kruuse). var. grimsulana (Jack) Kaal. Hurry Inlet, Ryders Dal, perianth. (Kruuse). This species varies in the same manner as Cephalozia bicuspi- data, but apparently in still higher degree. Probably one or other undescribed species is hidden amongst all these more or less disagreeing forms. 14. Cephalozia striatula C. Jens. Fleming Inlet (Hartz); Hurry Inlet, Ryders Dal (Kruuse); Turner Sund (Hartz & Kruuse). 302 > 15. Cephalozia asperifolia C. Jens. Hurry Inlet, Ryders Dal; Nualik, in a derelict Eskimo-house (Kruuse). 16. Ptilidium ciliare (L.) Nees. Röhss Fjord (Dusen); Vahls Fjord; Odesund; Jærn O; Tasiusak (Kruuse). 17. Chandonanthus setiformis (Ehrh.) Lindb. Blepharostoma setiforme Lindb. Vahls Fjord (Kruuse). 18. Blepharostoma trichophyllum (L.) Dum. Kap Giesecke; Lille Pendulum Ö; Clavering Ö, Kap Mary; Kap Franklin; Röhss Fjord; Kap Parry (Dusen); Fleming Inlet (Hartz & Kruuse): Nordostbugt, in bogs (Hartz); Hurry Inlet, Ryders Dal (Dusén, Kruuse); Kap Stewart (Hartz, Dusén); Turner Sund (Hartz & Kruuse); Kap Dalton (Hartz); Midtpynt at Kangerdlugsuatsiak (Kruuse). 19. Anthelia julacea (L.) Dum. Fleming Inlet; Nordostbugt, in bogs (Hartz); Hurry Inlet, Ry- ders Dal (Kruuse); Turner Sund (Hartz & Kruuse): Kingorsuak, on sandy flats; Ikerasausak, on sandy flats; Sierak Dal, on sandy flats: Kordlortok Sö; Elvbakker, in bogs; Grünlænderpynt at Tasiusak, on stony flats (Kruuse). 20. Anthelia nivalis (Sw.) Lindb. Clavering Ö, Kap Mary; Röhss Fjord; Hurry Inlet (Dusén); Liverpool Kyst, southern part (Kruuse); Kap Stewart (Hartz, Dusén): Ikerasausak, partly in Archangelicetum, partly on damp grassy ground; Ingmikertorajik; Tasiusarsik in Angmagsalik Fjord (Kruuse). 21. Martinellia Bartlingii (Nees). Martinellia Carestiae (D. N.) Lindb. ap. C. Jensen. Mosser fra Østgrønland, p. 376. Hurry Inlet, Ryders Dal (Kruuse); Turner O (Koch); Tasiusak (Kruuse). 303 22. Martinellia subalpina (Nees) Lindb. Jern Ö (Kruuse). 23. Martinellia irrigua (Nees) Lindb. Tunok (Kruuse). 24. Martinellia uliginosa (Sw.) Lindb. Jærn O (Kruuse). 25. Martinellia curta (Mart.) Lindb. Depot O, in old tombs; Tasiusak (Kruuse). 26. Martinellia rosacea (Cord.) Lindb. Hurry Inlet (Dusén); Elvbakker (Kruuse). 27. Arnellia fennica (Gottsch.) Lindb. Southbya fennica Gottsch. Kap Borlase Warren (Dusén, Hartz); Gaaseland in Scoresby Sund (Hartz) !). 28. Aplozia sphaerocarpa Dum. var. lurida (Dum.) Jungermania nana Nees. Nordostbugt, in bogs (Hartz); Hurry Inlet, Ryders Dal, perianth. (Kruuse). 29. Jungermania quinquedentata Huds. Lille Pendulum O; Clavering Ö, Kap Mary; Kaiser Franz Jo- seph Fjord, forma gracilis; Réhss Fjord, partly forma gracilis; Kap Parry (Dusén); Fleming Inlet; Nordostbugt, in bogs (Hartz); Hurry Inlet, Ryders Dal (Dusén, Kruuse); Kap Stewart, forma gra- eilis (Dusén); Turner Ö (Koch): Turner Sund, partly forma gracilis (Hartz & Kruuse); Kap Dalton (Hartz); Lille O (Kruuse). 1) Mylia Taylori has not been found in East-Greenland, the very un- important sample, referred by me in «Mosser fra Östgrönland» to this species, belongs to Arnellia fennica. 304 var. turgida Lindb. Hurry Inlet (Hartz, Dusen). 30. Jungermania lycopodioides Wall. Tasiusak (Kruuse). 31. Jungermania Floerkei W.M. Röhss Fjord (Dusen)!); Ödesund; Misutok; Ingmikertorajik ; Tasiusak; Anava; Adloe (Kruuse). 32. Jungermania Baueriana Schiffn. Lille Pendulum Ö (Dusén); Canning Land; Fleming Inlet (Gartz); Hurry Inlet (Dusén); Nualik; Bræfjord near Kap Wandel, partly forma viridis on the rhizome of Cystopteris fragilis; Akili- arisek, among Salix arctica; Depot O, partly in old tombs; Smal- sund; Sarfak Pynt; Ingmikertorajik; Tasiusarsik in Angmagsalik Fjord; Adloe (Kruuse). This species, described by V. Schiffner in ,Lotos*, 1903, no. 7, is widely distributed. A part of Jungermania Floerkei and of J. Iycopodioides in the former moss-lists from Greenland cer- tainly belong to J. Baueriana. 33. Jungermania Binsteadii Kaal. Kaiser Franz Joseph Fjord; Röhss Fjord (Dusén). I have had the opportunity of seeing this species in great quantities, during my stay in the Sarjek-Mountains in Lule-Lapmark. It is therefore of no doubt to me, that it is a proper species, which not at all is allied to Jungermania quinquedentata, but comes nearest to Jungermania gracilis. 34. Jungermania quadriloba Lindb. Nordostbugt, in bogs (Hartz); Hurry Inlet (Dusén). 35. Jungermania ineisa Schrad. Kap Greg, creeping on compact Sphagnum Girgensohnii (Hartz). 1) The specimens from Lille Pendulum Ö and Hurry Inlet (Öfversigt af Kongl. Vetenskaps-Akademiens Forhandlingar, 1900, no. 6) belong to J. Baueriana. ) Pa | f= 4 as (3 : Pye \ Ç Na / | = | I TH = Pa % Se hr Jungermania alpestris var. major. Fig. 1—2. Partes superiores plantarum gonidiiferarum, a. congregationes goni- diarum (2%/:). Fig.3. Pars superior plantae femineae cum perianthio (*h). Fig. 4. Gonidia (7°°/:). Fig.5. Textura cellularis limbi superioris folii (11/1). Fig. 6. Textura cellularis mediae folii (1). 306 36. Jungermania elongata Lindb. Fleming Inlet (Kruuse). 37. Jungermania socia Nees. Röhss Fjord (Dusen); Turner Sund, perianth. (Hartz & Kruuse); Ingmikertorajik, gonid. (Kruuse). 38. Jungermania alpestris Schleich. Röhss Fjord (Dusen); Fleming Inlet; Liverpool Kyst, southern part (Kruuse); Kap Stewart (Dusén); Turner Sund (Hartz & Kruuse); Kap Dalton (Hartz); Nualik, partly in a derelict Eskimo-house: Lille O; Kap Hildebrandt, eastside; Akiliarisek; Midtpynt at Kanger- dlugsuatsiak; Odesund; Kingorsuak, on sandy) flats, f. amphigastriata ; Ikerasausak, partly ¢ in Archangelicetum; Misutok; Smalsund: Ing- mikertorajik, gonid.; Jærn Ö; Tasiusarsik in Angmagsalik Fjord; Nord- fjord at Tasiusak, in bogs; Tasiusak (Kruuse). var. major, V. NOV. Hurry Inlet, & and 9, gonid. (Dusén); Kap Brewster, gonid. (Hartz). Amongst the numerous forms of this species one form occurs twice as large, usually of green colour and with larger leaf-cells. I have called it Jungermania alpestris a latior Nees'). Arnell asserts that the a latior Nees is Jungermania Wenzelii Nees, I therefore prefer to call this strong form var. major. 39. Jungermania Wenzelii Nees. Tasiusak (Kruuse). 40. Jungermania globulifera n. sp. Dioica, cæspites humiles et laxos formans, rufescens, perpusilla, pro parte in substrato occulta; caulis erectus vel suberectus, ad 8 mm. longus et 0:26 mm. latus, simplex vel ramosus, mediocriter fragilis, postice sat dense radicellifer; cellulis corticis rectangulis, tenui- et rufescente membranatis. Folia ad 0:42 mm. longa et 0°65 mm. 1) Ofversigt af K. Vetensk.-Akad. Förhandlingar, 1900, no. 6, p. 800. 307 lata, caule duplo latiore, mollia, tenuia, sat remote dissita, patentia, oblique affixa, ad anticum vergentia, non decurrentia, vel in antico paullulum decurrentia, rotundate rectangularia , bilobata; incisura 1/3-1/3, lata, obtusa, interdum modice gibba, lobis ovatis, obtusis Jungermania globulifera G. Jensen. Fig. 1. Planta sterilis gonidiifera (°°/1). Fig. 2. Cellulae corticalis (**’/1). Fig.3. Cellulae folii ex margine lobi (31). Fig. 4. Gonidia (29/7). vel rotundatis, æquimagnis vel inæquimagnis (lobus posticus sæpis- sime major), sæpe conniventibus. Cellulae foliorum sat parvae 308 (loborum 0:02—0'026 mm. in diametro), fere æquimagnae, rotundate- | quadratae, modice chlorophylliferae, pellueidae, membranis rufescen- tibus, sat tenuibus, ad angulos non vel jeniter incrassatis; cuticula laevis. Foliola nulla. Flores 2 et fructus \ \ 5 | \ desunt. Planta 4 parum minor; androe- | | 2 . f as NA | À cium terminale, ovatum; bracteae ‘foliis À /| ; N | N 2 cs majores, latissimae et valde concavae, \ \ N . . . . . WEN 17) dense imbricatae; incisura brevis, ob- SEN RY Mp / 5 A 3 A 2 NZ ( tusa, lobis rotundatis, æquimagnis; an- ( ‘ \~ N theridia 2 in axilla. Gonidia globosa — ve ovalia, uni — bicellularia, nunquam in- N crassata et angulata, 0°017—0°019 mm. eS lata et 0‘019—0-022 mm. longa, rufa, anosiora brunnea, in apicibus foliorum \ N FR YY) congregationes formantia. iss VA Ab Jungermania alpestri distmguenda - 7 cellulis foliorum tenui-membranatis, lobis ( ey obtusis—rotundatis, gonidiis_ globuli- \ en à formibus, non incrassato—angulatis, non VA = cornutis. Jungermania globulifera) Habitat in solo arenaceo ad Kingor- C. Jensen. suak et Sierak Dal, & (Kruuse), sociis Planta mascula (27/1). Bryis, Pohliis, Polytrichis, Anthelia julacea, Cephalozia bieuspidata var. cavifolia. 41. Jungermania ventricosa Dicks. Hurry Inlet, Ryders Dal (Kruuse); Turner Sund, perianth. (Hartz & Kruuse); Ikerasausak, on heaths, perianth. and gonid.; Kap Hildebrandt, the eastside; Tasiusak near Kap G. Holm; Ing- mikertorajik; Elvbakker; Tasiusarsik in Angmagsalik Fjord; Tasiu- sarsik (Kruuse). var. porphyroleuca (Nees). Röhss Fjord (Dusén); Ingmikertorajik (Kruuse). The forms by me referred to “porphyroleuca” are all without perianth, I therefore have been unable to decide certainly whether they belong to Schiffners Lophozia porphyroleuca (“Lotos” 1903, no. 7). By this reason | prefer to call them “variety” of Junger- mania ventricosa. 309 42. Jungermania Mülleri Nees. Röhss Fjord; Hurry Inlet (Dusen). 43. Jungermania Homschuchiana Nees. J. Mülleri Nees, var. bantryensis (Hook.) Lindb. Hurry Inlet, perianth. (Dusen). 44. Jungermania heterocolpa Thed. Nordostbugt, in bogs (Hartz); Hurry Inlet, gonid. (Dusen). 45. Jungermania inflata Huds. Hurry Inlet, Ryders Dal; Smalsund (Kruuse). 46. Jungermania Kunzeana Hub. Kap Dalton (Hartz); Ingmikertorajik; Tunok; Tasiusak (Kruuse). 47. Jungermania groenlandica Nees. Hurry Inlet, & (Dusén). 48. Jungermania polita Nees. Nordostbugt, in bogs (Hartz). 49. Jungermania minuta Cranz. Lille Pendulum Ö; Kaiser Franz Joseph Fjord; Röhss Fjord; Kap Parry, fert.; Hurry Inlet (Dusen); Turner Sund; Ingmikertorajik; Tasiusak (Kruuse). 50. Nardia obovata (Nees) Carr. Jungermania obovata Nees. Southbya obovata Lindb. Jærn O; Elvbakker, in a well-like hole, wherein a rile dis- appears (Kruuse). 51. Nardia scalaris (Schrad.) Gr. Alicularia scalaris Corda. Jern O (Kruuse). 310 52. Nardia minor (Limpr.) Arn. Alicularia minor Limpr., Nardia haematosticta (Nees) Lindb. Turner O (Koch). 53. Marsupella aquatica (Lindb.) Schiffn. var. gracilis v. n. Gracilis, elongata, atrata, remotifolia, cellulis foliorum minoribus. Habitat ad Tasiusak, in fundo aquulae ad 2—6 mt. profundae inundata (Kruuse). 54. Marsupella groenlandica C. Jens. Hurry Inlet, Ryders Dal (Kruuse). 55. Marsupella condensata (Angstr.) Arn. Gymnomitrium condensatum Angstr. Tasiusarsik in Angmagsalik Fjord, & (Kruuse). 56. Marsupella apiculata Schiffn. Kordlortok S6 (Kruuse). 57. Cesia revoluta (Nees) Lindb. Sarcoscyphus revolutus Nees. Hurry Inlet (Dusen). 58. Cesia corallioides (Nees) Carruth. Gymnomitrium corallioides Nees. Hold with Hope; Robertson O in Sofia Sund; Röhss Fjord; Kap Parry; Kap Stewart (Dusén); Jærn O; Tasiusak (Kruuse). 59. Cesia coneinnata (Lightf.) Gr. Gymnomitrium concinnatum Corda. Robertson O in Sofia Sund; Réhss Fjord; Kap Parry (Dusén) ; Turner Sund, 2 (Kruuse); Kap Dalton (Hartz); Jærn O; Tasiusak (Kruuse). 60. Prasanthus suecicus (Gottsch.) Lindb. Gymnomitrium suecicum Gottsche. Turner Sund, fert. (Hartz). »11 61. Riecardia pinguis (L.) Gr. Aneura pinguis Dum, Kap Giesecke; Kap Borlase Warren; Clavering O, Kap Mary (Dusén). / Fam. 2. Sphagnales. 62. Sphagnum inundatum Russ. S. subsecundum Nees, var. inundatum (Russ.) C. Jens. Hurry Inlet; f. ano-drepanoclada (Dusén). 63. Sphagnum squarrosum Crome. Hold with Hope, f. subimbricata, ano-dasyclada (Dusén). 64. Sphagnum teres (Schimp.) Angstr. Nordostbugt, in bogs (Hartz); Midtpynt at Kangerdlugsuatsiak, f. orthoclada; Kingorsuak, the westside, f. anoclada; Jærn O, f. squar- rosula; Kangerdluarsikajik; Tunok, f. ano-dasyclada; Kuarmiut, f. spuarrosula; Tasiusarsik in Angmagsalik Fjord, f. anoclada; Amaka, on the border of a pond; Tasiusak; Adloe, f. anodasyclada and f. dasyclada, viridis (Krause). 65. Sphagnum fimbriatum Wils. Nordostbugt, in bogs (Hartz); Hurry Inlet, f. anoclada (Dusén) : Kap Dalton, f. orthoclada (Kruuse). 66. Sphagnum Girgensohnii Russ. Nordostbugt. f. orthoclada; Kap Greg, f. anoclada and f. ortho- clada (Hartz); Hurry Inlet Kingua, f. ano- et orthoclada; Kap Dalton, f. anoclada; Akiliarisek, among Salix arctica, f. anoclada; Ikera- sausak, on rills in the heath, f. orthoclada; Misutok, f. anoclada and f. dasy-mastigoclada; Tasiusarsik in Angmagsalik Fjord, f. ano- clada; Anava; Tasiusak (Kruuse). 67. Sphagnum Russowii Warnst. Tasiusak, f. orthoclada, tenella (K.). 312 68. Sphagnum Warnstorfii Russ. Nordostbugt, in bogs (Hartz); Nualik, f. anoclada, pallescens; Akiliarisek, among Salix arctica; Eskimo O, f. ano-dasyclada, pallescens; Ikerasausak, on rills in the heath; Misutok; Sarfak; Tunok, f. mastigoclada, viridis; Adloe, f. anoclada and f. dasyelada, versicolor (Kruuse). 69. Sphagnum rubellum Wils. Kap Warming, f. flavo-viridis; Kangerdluarsikajik (Kruuse). 70. Sphagnum acutifolium Ehrh. Hurry Inlet, f. gracilis, f. ortho-dasyclada, pallescens, f. ano- clada, f. orthoclada and f. ano-dasyclada (Dusén). 71. Sphagnum riparium Angstr. Ikerasausak, f. dasyclada; Norsit; Tunok, f. submersa; Amaka, on the border of a pond (Kruuse). 72. Sphagnum balticum Russ. Hurry Inlet Kingua, f. orthoclada (Kruuse). 73. Sphagnum cuspidatum Ehrh. var. Kruusei v. n. Gracilis, pallide-fuscescens. Caulis tenuis, tegumento corticali e triplici et quadruplici strato cellularum formato, cellulis sat magnis, strato lignoso fusco; folia caulina triangulari-lingulata, sat magna, in parte superiore fibrosa et porosa, vel triangulari-ovata, ad basim fibrosa, in hac re folia ramulina subsimilia; limbo marginali inferne dilatato. Folia ramulina e basi ovata longe acuta, subsecunda, poris ut in formis emersis Sphagni cuspidati typici; cellulae chlorophylliferae trigono-ovatae, in latere concavo folii subliberae. Flores et fructus desunt. Habitat ad Tasiusak (Kruuse). Sphagnum cuspidatum was not hitherto recorded from Green- land. The here described form disagrees from the main-species by the brown wood-cylinder. Perhaps a proper species? The sample is very small. 28 1 1000: Arbejder fra den Botaniske Have i København. Nr. 36. —————————— EEE “<{Ä‚,“”uüu 6 NmbÄ®Äl®RAr_hb®hZT[m[ Ferskvandsalger fra Vest-Gronland. Af A s X's nv E/ Larsen. (Med Tavle VIL— VII.) Sertryk af -MEDDELELSER OM GRØNLAND”. XXXIII. + RDC Dee LIBRARY NEW YORK BOTANICAL RUE. Kobenhavn. Bianco Lunos Bogtrykkeri. 1907. I trettende Hefte af «Meddelelser om Gronland» (Kbh. 1890) har P. Lauridsen givet en Bibliographia Groenlandica, endvidere har R. Boldt (Grunddragen af Desmidieernas utbredning i norden Helsingfors 1888) sammenstillet den indtil 1888 foreliggende Desmidiacelitteratur angaaende Skandinavien og de nordligere Egne. Den forste Angivelse om Ferskvandsalger fra Gronland har jeg funden hos Lyngbye (Tentamen Hydrophytologiae Danice 1819), som nævner et Par Arter uden dog nærmere at angive Findested. Dernest angiver G. Dickie i det mindste nogle Des- midiaceer, muligvis ogsaa andre Ferskvandsalger; det har des- verre veret mig umuligt at faa hans Afhandling at se; den findes ifolge Lauridsen i Edinburgh Bot. Soc. Trans. 1868. Fra 1869 er en Afhandling af G. C. Wallich om Desmidiaceer fra Godthaab; fra 1871 en Afhandling af Berggren om Alger fra Ind- landsisen; fra 1878 en Afhandling af Wittrock om Oedogoniaceer ; fra 1879 Rosenvinges Arbejde om Ulothrix og Conferva; fra 1883 Wittrocks Afhandling «Snöns och Isens Flora» og Rosen- vinges om Spirogyra groenlandica; fra 1885 Nordstedts Af- handling om grønlandske Desmidieer; fra 1888 Boldts om samme Emne; 1893 publicerede Boldt en mindre Fortegnelse over nogle nye grønlandske Ferskvandsalger; 1897 et større Arbejde af Richter og et Par Angivelser af Vanhöffen. Jeg har I efterfølgende Fortegnelse søgt at medtage alle hidtil kendte Carter og dertil føjet alle af mig fundne. Følgende Slægter er nye for Vest-Gronland: 21° 308 Sacheria, Tolypothrix, Anabena, Geminella, Stichococcus, Binuclearia, Myxonema, Draparnaldia, Trentepohlia, Clado- phora, Rhizoclonium, Debarya, Eudorina, Coelastrum, Scene- desmus, Palmella, Dactylothece, Glenodinium. Det Materiale, jeg har haft til Bearbejdelse, er samlet gen- nem mange Aar og af mange forskellige. Lokaliteterne for Indsamlingerne er fordelte saa at sige langs hele Vestkysten fra ca. 60° til ca. 74° N. Br. Nedenfor er i en Tabel ordnet Lokaliteterne med de dertil hørende Breddegrader; angaaende disse sidste maa jeg bemærke, at de for største Delen er til- nermelsesvise, idet de er afleste paa de forskellige Kort, som findes i «Meddelelser om Grønland». I Tabellen findes end- videre angivet, hvem der har samlet paa den og den Lokalitet, endvidere hvilket Aar Indsamlingen er foretaget. Naar en Art senere anføres fra en Lokalitet, er Samlerens Navn tilføjet, hvis flere har samlet paa denne Lokalitet. En Del af Materialet, nemlig det der er samlet af Warming og Holm, er tildels bearbejdet før af Frk. Maria Levin, hvis Optegnelser og Tegninger blev mig overgivet; i de allerfleste Tilfælde har jeg kunnet genfinde de af Frk. Levin fundne Arter; en Tegning, som skyldes Frk. Levin, findes paa Tab. VIII, Fig. 5. Det samlede Antal Arter, som nu kendes fra Vest-Grønland, er 352, deraf er 213 Arter Desmidiacéer. Boldt Ill og Børgesen I (se Litteraturfortegnelsen) omtaler Forskellen mellem Algefloraen paa den nordlige og den sydlige Del af Grønlands Kyster; en Forskel, der navnlig skulde give sig tilkende ved Forekomsten af Micrasterias- og store Eua- strum-Arter. Grænsen mellem det nordlige og det sydlige Om- raade skulde være ved Holstenborg, for Vestkystens Vedkom- mende, og Egnene nord for Angmagsalik for Østkystens Ved- kommende. Jeg maa hertil bemærke, at i det mindste nogle af de hos Boldt og Børgesen nævnte Arter gaar højere mod Nord. Saaledes fandtes Micrasterias denticulata helt oppe ved Umunap timilia, endvidere fandtes Micrasterias americana og Euastrum 309 oblongum i Prøver fra Egedesminde, Euastrum verrucosum fandtes baade i Prøver fra Disco og Egedesminde, Euastrum pectinatum fandtes ved Sarkak og Ikamiut, Tetmemorus gra- nulatus fandtes paa Disco. Paa den anden Side angiver Boldt l. c. nogle Arter, som ikke forekomme syd for Holstenborg, to ‘af disse fandtes ogsaa kun i Prøver nord for Holstenborg, men en, nemlig Staurastrum pachyrhynchum, fandtes i Prover fra sydligere Lokaliteter helt ned til c. 60° N. Br. Antallet af Arter, som vise Forskellen mellem Algefloraen i den sydlige og den nordlige Del, maa altsaa indskrenkes betydeligt. Muligvis kan andre Slegter eller Arter af Chlorophyceer hjelpe til at udrede disse Forhold; der kan saaledes henvises til, at Chætophora- ceerne (Myxonema og Draparnaldia) ikke er fundne højere mod Nord end ved Godthaab. Fra Disco er der af Porsild hjembragt nogle faa Plankton- prøver; Planktonet synes at vere taget fra Bred, det indeholdt en ret stor Del Bundformer. Af Planktonformer kan nævnes: Dinobryon-Arter, Anabaena-Arter, Pandorina, Eudorina, Pedia- strum-Arter, baandformede Diatomeer o. 1]. Ret mærkelig er Forekomsten af Anabaena-Arter, disse synes ellers ikke at gaa saa hejt mod Nord; men her paa Disco forekom mindst to ægte Planktonformer begge med Luftvacuoler i Cellerne. I nogle Jordprever, hjembragte af Kornerup, var en be- tegnet «Sandslette foran Indlandsisen»; til Forskel fra de andre fandtes den at vere en ret vel sammenhængende Klump (de andre var pulverformede). Denne sammenhengende Masse havde en graagron Farve. Ved nærmere Undersøgelse viste det sig, at det grønlige Skær skyldtes en blaagren Alge, som aabenbart holdt Sandkornene sammen. Algen var daarlig bevaret, rime- ligvis er det en Phormidiumart. Der er Sandsynlighed for, at vi her har et Forhold, der svarer til det af Warming omtalte (Warming og Wesenberg-Lund: Bidrag til Vadernes, Sandenes og Marskens Naturhistorie. D. Kgl. danske Vidensk. Selsk. Skrifter, 310 7. Række, Naturvidensk. og Matem. Afd.II. 1. pag. 23). Mellem Sandkornene fandtes endvidere ikke faa Diatomeer. Ved den systematiske Ordning af Arterne har jeg mest holdt mig til den af West I angivne. Desmidiaceerne har jeg ordnet alfabetisk. Tegningerne ere udførte ved Hjælp af Tegneprisme og Seiberts Mikroskop Objektiv V Ocular I (*”/1) eller Objektiv HI Ocular 1 (71) eller Objektiv VI Ocular I (°*°/1). Frk. Emma Hallas, som har bestemt Arterne af Slegterne Oedogonium og Bulbochete for mig, Dr. O. Nordstedt, som har laant mig Sirodot’s Arbejde om Batrachospermum og Dr. F. Borgesen, som paa flere Maader har ydet mig sin verdi- fulde Hjælp, beder jeg modtage min bedste Tak. Ligeledes tillader jeg mig at udtale en ærbødig Tak til Direktionen for Carlsbergfondet, som ved sin Understøttelse har sat mig i Stand til at fuldføre dette Arbejde. København i Januar 1907. Fortegnelse over Findestederne. Nordlig Nordlig Findested | "Bredde Samlet af Aar Findested Bradde Samlet af Aar Ameralik ...... c. 64° 5” | J. Vahl 1830 | Igaliko ........ 60° 56° Rosenvinge 1888 Amitsuarsuk ... c. 64° 30° J. Vahl 1828 FE eee — J. Vahl 1828 Arsuk-Fjord ... c.61° 10° Rosenvinge 1888 | Igdlorsuit...... c. 60° 47° Rosenvinge 1888 Augpiletok..... c. 68° 22’ Kruuse 1897 | Ved Iginiarfik- | cle. “Bes . 68° 7 IK 1897 Aumat-@ ...... c. 68° 37° Kruuse 1897| Fjord ye DES | — Sylow 1883 | Ikamiut ....... e. 68° 38° Kruuse 1897 i fe.69° 1A... .… | Se vedIndlands-\ see lensed 1884 PO 2. - \ -70° 20° J Porsild 1898 isen N Eredesminde.... le. 68° 47 f Warming \ 1884 | Tmussulik....... e. 68° 18° Kruuse 1897 3 tog Holm f Koriek 1500 c. 60° 58’ Rosenvinge 1886 Fiskenæs ...... c. 62° 30° Rosenvinge 1888 f Warming \ = = RO Em’ = Frederikshaab.. c.62° Rosenvinge 1886 ke ee LE \ og Holm f — — nr = Jessen 1894 | Julianehaab .... 60°43’ Sylow 1881 Frederikshaabs fc. 62° 30° | £ = — lse = Rosenvinge 1888 Isblink \ -62° 45' ee Pa — ....) — |Lassen 1890 Godhavn ...... ego ia if Warming iggy] — ....| — |Jeasen [189% Se oma" Ivigtut ....... c. 60° 36’ Jessen 1894 —— oe oes ie Ivnarsulik ..... c. 68° 5° Kruuse 1897 er we ne 1897 | Kagsiarsuk. e. 60° 52’ Rosenvinge 1888 Sn Er = en 1898 | Kaesimiut ..... e. 60° 50 Rosenvinge 1888 a ae ÉN pie Kanalak ....... c. 68° 35° Kruuse 1897 el eeos . 11 an 1883 | Kangatsiak..... e. 68° 20° Kruuse 1897 = er — i FE 1884 | Kavdluanit..... e. 73° 35° Ryder 1886 4 le Rosanvinse 1886 Kekertok ...... e. 73° 41° Ryder 1886 Be’ Br Ostenfeld 1893 | Kekertarsuatsiak c. 68° 25° Kruuse 11897 eel on Kingua Kuaner-) a | -or f Warming | = c. 62° 5° Jessen 11894 ° 3 Holstenborg.... 66° 58 \ og Holm f 1884] sok C4 Eh LUCE Hartz 1890 | Kingua Neriok . c. 61° 40° Jessen 1894 = es Ostenfeld 1895 | Kingua Orpiksuit c. 68° 40° Hartz 1890 = CE “4 J. Vahl ‚1833 ee c. 61° 30° Jessen 1894 Hunde-® ...... ce. 68° 52° Kruuse 1897 = J | = å (ing i = 890 0497 f Warming | Kingua Tasiusak c.70° Hartz 1 Jakobshavn .... | 69° 13 \ og Holm f 188% — — e. 60° 10° Jessen 1894 = ed UNR J. Vahl 1836 | Kipisako....... c. 60° 59 Rosenvinge 1888 312 | | | | ; | Nordlig | < ; LE Nordlig | Findested Brodde Samlet af | Aar Findested | Bredde. | Samlet af | Aar = = a ave o ’ N 5 - nr | Konnok ars ic. 61° 14°) Rosenvinge |1888 Stremfjord, ue 66° 15/Nenzen 1884 Ser Reef ee — | Lassen 1890} søndre | | ne ° 59 { Warming \\jgg4 | Sukkertoppen .. ¢ 65° 25’ Warming | 1884 Kristianshaab .. |c. 68° 50 \ og Holm y 188% PP > <> | og Holm f — Bar — | Hartz 1890 = | Rosenvinge |1886 Kronprinsens-@.| ¢.69° Kruuse 11897 ae — |Ostenfeld 11895 Kugsuak Taser-\ ne oan | Sulugsugut .... |c. 65° 17) Hansen 1885 miut f ¢. 60° 16 | Jessen 1894 Sydpreven...... e. 60° 28" Jessen 1894 Kungalik ...... ? Jensen 11884 | Tasermiut ..... ? | J. Vahl 1828 : i © 44'| Kr 118 | | Lyngmarken ... ie 69 fe Kruuse: 1897 Taser miutsiak Ve. 60° 28’| Jessen 1894 WNarsaky...: sss; 'e. 60° 55° Rosenvinge 1888| Tasermiut | | ai ae | 2. jd: Vahl |1829 | Tasernak King Ve. 60° 16'| Ostenfeldi REB NunarsuakKron-) | 69° | Kr 1189 Basen S| Å prindsens-@ y © © ruuse 11897 | Tasiusak ...... c. 73° 20° Ryder 1887 Nunasarnak .... (6. 69° 20° Rosenvinge |1888 | 9 ved Tavdlortuit ¢. 61° 5° | Rosenvinge 1888 \ i À ‚| Tessilike een. ic. 68° 42°, Sylow 1883 RENAN pre ble. 729 35 Ryder Kon enone ee ‚| Sal: c. 60° 29°) Jessen 11894 Patoot. 1.2403. ce. 70° 15’) Hartz 1890| Tasermiut f Ritenbenk ..... |c. 69° 44’| Sylow 1883 | Tunugdliarfik .. | c.61° | Rosenvinge |1888 | 5 7 aan | or’ | Ritenbenk Kul-\ Ale ER & Umanap timilia. | c. 74° 5 | Ryder 1887 brud f Cras | Lors Uld we Unartok seeren c. 60° 30° Jessen 1894 Sagdlersuak.... |c. 68° 16’ Kruuse 1897 | Upernivik-@ ... ec. 60° 46° Lassen 1890 Sarkak .. see c370S00 Hartz 1890 | Uperniviarsuk .. |c. 72° 47’ Ryder 1887 Simiutarsuak... |c. 68° 11’, Kruuse 11897 | | Under Lokalitetsangivelserne er Navnene paa felgende Samlere forkortede paa angivne Maade: Ostenfeld til Ostfd. Rosenvinge til Rsvge. Warming og Holm til W. & H. Litteraturfortegnelse. Ahlner = Ahlner: Bidrag till Kannedomen om de svenska Formerna af Alge- slagtet Enteromorpha. Stockholm 1877. Berggren — Berggren, S.: Alger från Grönlands indlandsis. (Ofversigt af K. Svenska Vet. Akad. Förh. Stockholm 1871). Boldt I = Boldt, R.: Bidrag till Kannedomen om Sibiriens Chlorophyllo- phycéeer. (Ofversigt af K. Svenska Vet. Akad. Förh. Stockholm 1885). Boldt II = Boldt, R.: Desmidieer fran Grönland. (Bihang till K. Svenska Vet. Akad. Handl. Bd. 13. Stockholm 1888). Boldt HI = Boldt R.: Studier öfver Sötvattensalger och deras Utbredning. Ill: Grunddragen af Desmidieernas utbredning i norden. Stockholm 1888. Boldt IV — Nagra Sötvattensalger fran Grönland. Botaniska Notiser 1893. Borge — Borge O.: Süsswasserchlorophyceen gesammelt von Dr. A. O. Kihl- mann im nördlichsten Russland, Gouvernement Archangel. (Bihang till K. Svenska Vet. Akad. Handl. Bd. 19. Stockholm 1894). Bornet et Flahault — Ed. Bornet et Ch. Flahault: Revision des Nostocacees hétérocystées. (Annales des sciences naturelles VII Serie Botanique. 1886 Tome 3—4; 1887 Tome 5; 1888 Tome 7). Brand — Brand F.: Cladophora-Studien. (Botanisches Centralblatt Bd. 79— 80, 1899 IN—IV). Brunnthaler — Brunnthaler, J.: Die coloniebildenden Dinobryon-Arten. (Verh. k. k. Zool.-botan. Gess. in Wien 1891). Børgesen I — Børgesen, F.: Ferskvandsalger fra Ost-Grenland. (Meddelelser om Grenland. Kbh. 1896). Børgesen II = Børgesen, F.: Freshwater Alge of the Ferées. (Botany of the Feroes. Part I. Kbhv. 1901). Chodat — Chodat, R.: Algues vertes de la Suisse. Berne 1902. Delponte = Delponte, J. B.: Specimen Desmidiacearum subalpinarum. Au- guste Taurinorum (873. Gomont — Gomont, M.: Monographie des Oscillariées. (Annales des sciences naturelles. VII. Serie, 15—16. Botanique 1892). Hansgirg — Hansgirg, A.: Prodromus der Algenflora von Böhmen. 2. Th. Prag. 1892. Hazen — Hazen, T. E.: The Ulothricaceae and Chaetophoraceae of the United States. (Memoirs of the Torrey Botanical Club. Vol. XI. No. 2. 1902). 314 Hirn — Hirn K. E.: Zur Kenntniss der Desmidiaceen Finnlands. (Acta Soc. pro Fauna et Flora Fennica. Helsingfors 1903). Larsen — Larsen, E.: The Freshwater Algæ of East Greenland. («Meddelelser om Grønland». Vol. XXX. Kbh. 1904). Lemmermann — Lemmermann, E.: Beiträge zur Kenntniss der Plankton- algen. (Berichte der deutschen bot. Ges. 1900). Lundell = Lundell, P. M.: De Desmidiaceis que in Sueciae invente sunt. Upsaliæ 1871. Lyngbye — Lyngbye, H.C.: Tentamen Hydrophytologiæ Danicæ. Hafniæ 1819. Nordstedt I — Nordstedt, O.: Desmidiaceae ex insulis Spetsbergensibus et Beeren Eiiand. (Ofversigt af K. Svenska Vet. Akad. Förh. Stockholm 1872). Nordstedt II — Nordstedt, O.: Desmidieae arctoæ. (Öfversigt af K. Svenska Vet. Akad. Forh. Stockholm 1875). Nordstedt III = Nordstedt, O.: Desmidieer samlade af S. Berggren under Nor- denskiöld’ska Expeditionen til Grönland 1870. (Öfversigt af K. Svenska Vet. Akad. Förh. Stockholm 1885). Nordstedt IV — Nordstedt, O.; Fresh-water Algæ collected by Dr. S. Berggren in New Zeeland and Australia. (K. Svenska Vet. Akad. Handlingar. Bd. 22. 1888). Pringsheim = Pringsheim, N.: Beitrage zur Morphologie und Systematik der Algen III Die Coleocheten. (Jahrb. für wissenschaftl. Botanik II. Bd.). Raciborski — Raciborski: Monogr. Pediastr. (Mem. ac. imp. des sciences de Cracovie. Tome 19—20. 1889—90). Ralfs = Ralfs, J.: The British Desmidieae. London 1848. Richter — Richter, P.: Süsswasseralgen aus dem Umanakdistrikt. (Biblio- theca Botanica. Heft. 42. Stuttgart 1897). Rosenvinge I — Rosenvinge, L. Kolderup: Bidrag til Kundskaben om Slagterne Ulothrix og Conferva. (Botanisk Tidsskrift. Bd. 11. Kbh. 1879—80). Rosenvinge II — Rosenvinge, L. Kolderup: Om Spirogyra groenlandica nov. sp. og dens Parthenosporedannelse. (Ofversigt af K. Svenska Vet. Akad. Forh. Stockholm 1883). Schilling = Schilling, A. J.: Die Süsswasser-Peridineen. Marburg 1891. (Dissert.). Schmidle = Schmidle, W.: Beiträge zur alpinen Algenfiora. (Oesterr. bot. Zeitschr. 1895). Senn = Senn, G.: Ueber einige koloniebildende Algen. (Bot. Zeit. 1899). Sirodot I = Sirodot, S.: Les Batrachospermes. Organisation, Fonction, Deve- loppement, Classification. Paris 1884. Sirodot If = Sirodot, S.: Etude de la famille des Lemanéacées. (Annales des sciences naturelles. 5. Série. Botanique. Tome 16. 1872). Stockmeyer — Stockmeyer, S.: Ueber die Algengattung Rhizoclonium Kutz. (Verh. der zool.-bot. Gess. in Wien. Botanik Bd. 40. 1890). De Toni = De Toni: Sylloge Algarum. Patavii 1889. Vol. I. Vanhöffen — Vanhöffen, V. C.: Peridineen und Dinobryeen. Botanische Er- gebnisse etc. (Bibliotheca Botanica. Heft 42. Stuttgart 1897). 315 Wallich = Wallich, G. C.: Note on the Desmidiaceae of Greenland. (Monthly microscopical Journal and transactions of the royal microscopical Society. Vol. I. London 1869). West I = West, G. S.: A Treatise on the British Freshwater Algæ. Cam- bridge 1904. West II = West, W.: A Contribution of the Freshwater Algæ of West-lce- land. (Journ. of the Linnean Soc. Botany vol. 29. London 1893). West III = West, W. and West, G. S.: A Monograph of the British Desmi- diaceae. Vol. I—II. London 1904—05. Wille I — Wille, N.: Ferskvandsalger fra Novaja Semlja. (Öfvers. af K. Svenska Vet. Akad. Förh. Stockholm 1879). Wille II = Wille, N.: Bidrag til Kundskaben om Norges Ferskvandsalger I. (Christiania Vid. Selsk. Forh. 1880). Wittrock I = Wittrock, V. B.: Om Gotlands och Olands Sötvattensalger. (Bihang till K. Svenska Vet. Akad. Handl. Stockholm 1872) Wittrock Il = Wittrock, V. B.: Oedogonieae Americane hucusque cognite. (Botaniska Notiser 1878). Wittrock III = Wittrock, V.B.: Om Snöns och Isens Flora. Stockholm 1883. A. Flagellata. Fam. Orchromonadaceae. Gen. Dinobryon Ehrb. Om Slegten Dinobryon er kun meget lidt kendt fra Gron- land. Vanhöffen omtaler ganske kort to Arter: D. sertularia Ehrb. og D. stipitatum Stein. I det Materiale jeg har haft til Bearbejdelse, har jeg flere Gange truffet paa forskellige Former af denne Slægt, dels i de faa Planktonprever, jeg har haft, dels i Praver tagne paa almindelig Maade. Folgende Arter kendes nu: 1) D. sertularia Ehrb. — Brunnthaler I pag. 297. Figur hos Lemmermann Tab. XVIII fig. 9. Lo. Cell. 26—28,6 u, La. Cell. 7,5—9 u. — Den er almindelig i Prøver tagne ved Godthaab og Kristianshaab af W. & H. Vanhöffen anfører den fra Karajak. 2) D. protuberans Lem. — Brunnthaler pag. 298. Fig. hos Lemmermann Tab. XVIII fig. 16. Lo. 39 », La. 9,1 4. Ret almin- delig i Prøver fra Egedesminde, samlede af W. & H. 3) D. stipitatum Stein var. elongatum (Imhof) Br. — Sm. Brunnthaler I. — Hos denne Form fandtes af og til Cyster; da Lemmermann angiver, at disse ikke tidligere er kendte her, giver jeg en Figur Tab. VII fig. 1. Lo. Cell. 90 y, La. Cell. 6,6 », Diam. Cyst. c. 13 a. — Den findes almindeligt i Planktonprever fra Disco tagne af Porsild. Vanhöffen anforer D. stipitatum samt en Varietet med meget lange Stilke, hvilken sidste rimeligvis er var. elongatum. 317 4) D. divergens Imhof. — Brunnthaler p. 299. Former af denne Art er tagne paa Disco af Porsild; de havde det Udseende, som vor Tavle VII fig. 2 viser. Lo. 45,5 a, La. 6,5 y. Fam. Chromulinaceue. Gen. Hydrurus Ag. H. foetidus Kirchn. — West I p. 46. — Funden i Materiale fra: Patoot, Disco, Tiningnertok Tasermiut, Tasermiut. Richter anforer den fra Asakak. B. Dinoflagellata. Fam. Peridiniaceae. Gen. Peridinium Ehrb. 1) P. einetum Ehrb. — Figur hos Schilling. Denne Art er ret udbredt, men forekommer dog kun i faa Expl. i de enkelte Prøver. Lo. 43—53 u, La. 39—49 u. — Med Hensyn til Forekomsten for- tjener det at bemærkes, at den er funden i Prøver fra det nord- ligste Findested c. 74° N. Br. Umanap timilia, Kekertok, Kavdluanit, Ritenbenk, Disco, Kekertarsuatsiak, Augpiletok, Sø ved Indlands- isen, Itivnek, Godthaab (C. Petersen), Isortok, Igaliko, Igdlorsuit, Julianehaab (Rsvge.). 2) P. tabulatum Ehrb. — Angives af Vanhöffen uden nærmere Betegnelse af Findested. 3) P. umbonatum Stein. — Figur hos Schilling. Lo. 27,3— 32,5 u, La. 22,1—28 y. — Forekomststederne vare folgende: Ke- kertok, Disco, Egedesminde, Kingua Orpiksuit, Holstenborg (W. & H.), Julianehaab (Rsvge.). Den var sjælden i Prøverne. Gen. Glenodinium Ehrb. En lilie Glenodinium er faa Gange set, den ligner Schillings Figur af @. Pulvisculus Stein Lo. = 26 y, med de faa konserverede Exemplarer er det vanskeligt at sige noget bestemt om Arten. Hol- stenborg (W. & H.), Sukkertoppen (Ostfd.). 318 (. Rhodophyeeae. Fam. Helminthocladieae. Gen. Batrachospermum Roth. 1) B. moniliforme Roth. — Fra en Bek ved Ameralik er 1830 (J. Vahl) samlet nogle Exemplarer af denne formrige Art; de synes at staa ner Sirodot’s Varietet: scopula. Sirodot I p. 213. Pl. IX. Farven af de tørrede Exemplarer var rødlig. Richter angiver B. moniliforme Roth., typicum Sirodot fra Ka- rajak Nunatak. 3) B. corbula Sirodot. — Sirodot I p. 226. Pl. V. — Samlet af Hartz ved Orpiksuit. 3) B. sporulans Sirodot. — Angives af Richter fra Karajak Nunatak. 4) B. sp. — Samlet af Ostenfeld ved Godthaab. Der fandtes kun Hanplanter; det er sikkert en af de tvebo Arter, muligvis B. coerulescens Sirodot. 1. c. p. 270. Fam. Lemaneaceae. Gen. Sacheria Sirodot. S. fluviatilis Sirodot. — Sirodot II pag. 70. — Fandtes i tørret Tilstand i Exemplarer fra Ameralik (J. Vahl 1830). D. Chlorophyeeae. Fam. Oedogoniaceae. Gen. Oedogonium Link. Oedogonium-Ärter forekom meget almindeligt i Materialet, som sedvanligt oftest i steril Tilstand; det nordligste Findested var Kavdluanit (c. 73° 35’). De Prøver, der indeholdt fertile Ex- emplarer blev gennemset af Frk. E. Hallas, som bestemte baade alle Oedogonium- og Bulbochætearter for mig. Folgende Ocdo- goniumarter kendes nu fra Vest-Gronland: 319 1) 0. Areschougii Wittr. — Angives af Wittrock II: fra Kekertok. 2) 0. Boseii (Le. Cl.) Wittr. — Angives af Wittrock ll: fra det nordlige Grenland. 3) 0. depressum Pringsh. -— Angives af Richter: fra Karajak Nunatak. 4) 0. paludosum (Hass.) Wittr. — Disco. 5) 0. punctato-striatum De Bar. — Angives af Wittrock II: fra Claushavn. 6) 0. rufescens Wittr. — Disco. 7) 0. upsaliense Wittr. — Holstenborg (W. & H.) ifelge Frk. Levin’s Optegnelser. Wittrock II angiver den fra: Igdlutjait, God- havn, Sapiursak, Tessiursarsoak. Gen. Bulbochæte Ag. Sterile Bulbocheter vare almindelige i Materialet, nordligste Forekomst var Kavdluanit (c. 73° 35'). Af fertile Bulbocheter findes følgende: 1) B. intermedia De Bar. — Disco. Ifølge Frk. Levin's Op- tegnelser findes den ved Holstenborg (W. & H.). Wittrock II an- giver den fra det nordlige Grønland. 2) B. megastoma Wittr. et Lund. — Disco. 3) B. minor A. Br. A. Germanica Wittr. — Disco. 4) B. mirabilis f. Wittr. — Disco. Ifølge Frk. Levin's Opteg- nelser findes den ved Holstenborg (W. & H.). Wittrock II angiver den fra Igdlutjait. 5) B. nana Wittr. — Disco. Wittrock II angiver den fra det nordlige Grønland. 6) B. polyandria Cleve. — Angives af Wittrock II fra det nordlige Grønland. forma: notabilis Hirn. — Disco. 7) B. rectangularis Wittr. — Disco. 2. Lundelli Wittr. findes ifølge Frk. Levin’s Optegnelser ved Egedesminde (W. & H.). 8) B. repanda Wittr. — Angives af Wittrock Il fra det nord- lige Grønland. 9) B. subintermedia Elfv. — Disco. 10) B. varians Wittr. f. Hawaiensis Nordst. — Disco. 320 Fam. Coleochaetaceae. Gen. Coleochaete Breb. 1) €. seutata Breb. — Pringsheim. Figur 1. c. Tab. IIL. Egedesminde, Godthaab (Petersen). Den angives af Richter I fra Ikerasak. 2) €. decorans Richter. — Angives af Richter: fra Ikerasak. 3) €. Ikerasacensis Richter. — Angives af Richter I: fra Ikerasak. Fam. Herposteiraceae. Gen. Herposteiron Näg. H. confervicola Nig. — West I pag. 72. Fandtes paa Oedogonier fra Disco. — Angives af Richter: fra Umanak. Fam. Ulotrichaceae. Gen. Ulothrix Kiitz. 1) U. tenerrima Kütz. — Hazen pag. 151. Cellens Bredde varierede fra 7,8—9 y. Sukkertoppen (W. & H.), Julianehaab (Lassen, Ostfd.), Kug- suak Tasermiut. 2) U. variabilis Kütz. — Hazen pag. 152. Cellens Bredde 4,5—6 u. Kingua Tasiusak (Hartz), Egedesminde, Kanalak, Augpiletok, Holstenborg (W. & H.), Frederikshaab (Rsvge.), Julianehaab (Jessen), Kugsuak Tasermiut. Den angives af Richter I: fra Karajak. 3) U. moniliformis Kütz. b. Braunii Hansg. — Angives af Richter: fra Ikerasak. Gen. Gloeotila Kiitz. G. pallida Kiitz. — Angives af Boldt IV: fra Godhavn. Gen. Geminella Turp. 6. interrupta Turp. — West I pag. 78. Cellens Bredde 6 y. — Kavdluamit. Gen. Stichococeus Nag. S. subtilis (Kütz.) Klercker. — Hazen pag. 162. Cellens Bredde 5,27 y 321 Godhavn (W. & H), Disco, Holstenborg (W. & H.), Julianehaab (Lassen), Kingua Tasiusak (Jessen). Gen. Binuelearia Wittr. B. tatrana Wittr. — West I pag. 80. Cellens Bredde 9,1 y. Nutarmiut Tasiusak, Aumat @ (Sylow), Kingua Kuanersok. ‘ Fam. Chaetophoraceae. Gen. Myxonema Fries. M. lubricum (Dillw.) Fries. — Hazen p. 195. Hovedgrens Bredde 19 y, Sidegrenes Bredde 6,5 uw. Juliane- haab (Lassen). M. tenue (Ag.) Rab. — Hazen I pag. 202. La. Cell. 6—9 y. — Julianehaab (Lassen), Kugsuak Tasermiut. Gen. Draparnaldia Bory. D. glomerata (Vauch.) Ag. — Hazen p. 220. Stammeceller var 25—27 y brede; Grenceller 4—7 u. Godthaab (Petersen, J. Vahl), Nunasarnak, Frederikshaab (Rsvge.), Igaliko. Fam. Microthamniaceae. Gen. Microthamnion Nag. M. Kützingianum Nag. — Hazen pag. 191. La. Cell. indtil 5,2 w. — Egedesminde, Holstenborg (W. & H.), Sukkertoppen (W. & H.), Godthaab (Petersen). M. strictissimum Rab. — Hazen pag. 191. La. Cell. 3,9—4,2 pw. — Sukkertoppen (W. & H.), Igdlorsuit. Den angives af Richter I: fra Umanak. M. exiguum Schmidle. — La. Cell. 2—2,6 u. Holstenborg (W. & H.), Fiskernæs. Fam. Trentepohliaceae. Gen. Trentepohlia Martius. T. aurea Mart. — Chodat pag. 362. La. Cell. 20—26 ». — Bjornesund. [59] 19 XXXIII. 322 Fam. Ulvaceae. Gen. Enteromorpha Link. E. intestinalis Link. f. minima se Uhlner pag. 48, Tab. I, fig. 8. Cellens Højde i den øvre Del 15,6 u; i den nedre c. 9—10 ps Taget af Porsild paa Disco paa et Sted, der kunde naas af Bolge- sprojtet. Fam. Prasiolaceae. Gen. Prasiola Ag. (incl. Hormidium Kütz.). P. crispa (Lightf.) Menegh. — West I pag. 99. — Godhavn (W. & H, Kruuse, Porsild), Disco, Jakobshavn (W. & H.) Hunde @, Aumat (Kruuse), Holstenborg (W. & H.), Sukkertoppen (W. & H.), Godthaab (W. & H.), Ameralik, Fiskernæs, Frederikshaab (Jessen), Tavdlorsuit, Narsak, Kagsiarsuk, Julianehaab (Jessen), Sydproven. Den angives af Lyngbye | fra Gronland uden nermere Lokalitets- bestemmelse. Fam. Microsporaceae. Gen. Microspora Thuret. 1) M. floceosa (Vauch.) Thur. -- Hazen pag. 173. La. 14,3—- 15,6. — Ikamiut, Igaliko (Rsvge.), Narsak. 2) M. stagnorum (Kütz.) Lagerh. — Hazen pag. 176. La. Cell. 9—10 u. — Kekertarsuatsiak, Holstenborg (W. & H.), Itivnek, Sukkertoppen (W. & H.), Godthaab (W. & H.), Narsak, Tasermiutsiak Tasermiut. Rosenvinge I angiver den fra Agdlumersat. Richter I angiver den (under Navn af Ulothrix stagnorum (Kütz.) Rab.) fra Karajak Nunatak. 3) M. tumidula Hazen. — Hazen pag. 177. La. Cell. 6,5—9. Umanap timilia, Kekertok, Godhavn (Kruuse), Kristianshaab (W. & H.), Egedesminde, Godthaab (W. & H., Rsvge., Petersen), Nuna- sarnak, Kingua Kuanersok, Upernivik-Q, Julianehaab (Sylow, Jessen), Unartok, Sydproven. Fam. Cladophoraceae. Gen. Cladophora Kütz. (. fracta Kütz. — Brand. pag. 287. Cellerne af en Tykkelse varierende fra 19,5—50 4; Længden 150—250 w. Forgrening ikke 323 særlig rigelig. Denne Form synes mig at staa ner ved Brand’s var.: lacustris l. c. pag. 294. — Itivnek. €. alpina Brand. — Brand pag. 306. — Cellernes almindelige Tykkelse er 40—50 y, den gaar dog op til c. 60 ». Cellerne ere korte. Membranen er ret tyk 4—5 w. Forgrening meget sparsom. — Funden mellem Mos ved Egedesminde. Gen. Rhizoelonium Kütz. R. hieroglyphieum Kütz. em. Stockm. — Stockmeyer p. 571. La. Cell. c. 30 x. — Isortok. Fam. Vaucheriaceae. Gen. Vaucheria D. C. V. sp. — I enkelte Prøver blev et Par Gange funden sterile Exemplarer af denne Slegt. — Ritenbenk Kulbrud, Disco. Fam. Zygnemaceae. Gen. Mougeotia Ag. M. calcarea (Cleve) Wittr. — Den angives af Boldt IV fra Igaliko. M. sp. — Sterile Exemplarer fandtes hyppigt og fra mange Lo- kaliteter, det nordligste Findested var Kekertok c. 73° 41’. Gen. Debarya Wittr. D. glytosperma (De Bar.) Wittr. — De Toni pag. 727. La. Fil. 13—15,6 w, La. Spor. 39—42 y. — Igaliko. Gen. Zygnema Ag. 1. sp. Sterile Exemplarer fandtes overordentlig almindeligt, nordligste Findested var Kekertok e. 73° 41’. Wittrock III omtaler en Zygnema sp. fra Indlandsisen ved Auleitsivik-Fjord. Gen. Spirogyra Link. S. groenlandica K. Rosenv. — Sml. Kolderup Rosenvinge II. La. Cell. veg. 22,8 x, La. Cell. Sporif. 45,8 y, La. Spor. 34,2 u. — Narsak. Den angives af Rosenvinge Il fra Disco; af Boldt IV fra Atane- kerdluk og Igdlutjait; af Richter I fra Ikerasak og Umanak. BYS 324 S. Hassalli (Jenner) P. Petit. — Angives af Richter fra Umanak. S. Weberi (Kütz.) P. Petit. — Angives af Richter fra Ikerasak. Fam. Desmidiaceae. Gen. Ancylonema Berggren. 1) A. Nordenskiöldii Berge. — Berggren angiver den fra Ind- landsisen, Wittrock III angiver den fra Indlandsisen ved Auleitsivik- Fjord. Gen. Arthrodesmus Ehrb. 2) A. bifidus Breb. — fere sim. Fig. Boldt II pag. 30 Tab. II fig. 34. Lo. 13 y, La. 11,7 w. — Godthaab (W. & HL). Boldt II angiver den fra Lyngmarken. 3) A. glaucescens Wittr. forma convexa West. — Hos West II pag. 103 Tab. XXII fig. 10 er en Afbildning af denne Form. Den af mig fundne er lidt større; og set forfra skraane Siderne lidt stærkere ind mod Isthmus end paa West’s Figur, sml. vor Figur Tab. VII fig. 5. Lo. 15,6 », La. 14,5 », La. Isthm. 6,5 w. — Godt- haab (Petersen). 4) A. granulatus nov. sp. — Cellen er, set forfra, dybt ind- snøret, dog saaledes at Indsnoringen forløber jævnt, ikke pludseligt. Polerne lidt konvexe. Set fra oven er Halvcellerne elliptiske. Der er i det hele fire stærke lige Torne alle i et Plan. Cellen er tydelig granuleret, Granula ikke ordnede paa bestemt Maade, Isthmusegnen er glat”). Lo. Cell. 31,2 u, La. sine spin. 25 yw, La. Isthm. 7,8 y, Lo. spin. 13 y, sml. Figuren Tab. VII fig. 7. — Egedesminde. 5) A. Incus (Breb.) Hass. Ralfs Tab. XX fig. 4. Lo. 26 y, La. 33 y, La. Isthm. 8 ». — Kekertok, Uperniviarsuk, Nutarmiut Tasiusak, Aumat (Sylow), So nær Indlandsisen, Sukkertoppen (Ostfd.), Godthaab (W. & H., Petersen, Ostfd.), Igaliko, Kagsimiut, Juliane- haab (Sylow), Sydproven. Wallich I angiver den fra. Godthaab. Boldt II angiver den fra Sakkok, Tasiusak, Amitsok-Fjord, Friedrichsthal. 7) The cells in the front view are deeply constricted, the sinus not linear, but rounded, rapidly widening outwards. The poles are somewhat con- vex. The vertical view of the semicell elliptic. There are altogether four strong straight spines all in one plane. The cells are distinctly granulate; the granules are not arranged regularly. The region of the isthmus is smooth. 325 6) A. oetocornis Ehrb. — Ralfs Tab. XX fig. 2. Lo.17—19,5 y, La. 14,3—15 y, La. Isthm. 4,2—5 y. — Kekertok, Sukkertoppen (Ostfd.), Godthaab (W. & H.). B. trigonus Boldt II pag. 30 Tab. Il fig. 36. Lo. 19 y, La. 16,9 y, La. Isthm. 8,4 u. — Uperniviarsuk. Boldt If angiver A. octocornis fra Sakkak, Kap York og Fried- richsthal. Gen. Closterium Nitzsch. 1) €. acerosum Ehrb. — Ralfs Tab. XXVII fig. 2. La. 28 y. — Narsak. 2) €. acutum Breb. — Ralfs Tab. XXX fig.5. La. 11,7 2. — Jakobshavn (W. & H.). Nordstedt III angiver den fra Ritenbenk. 3) €. Brebissonii Menegh. — Angives af Wallich fra Godthaab (Tetmemorus Brebissonii). 4) €. cornu Ehrb. — Angives af Dickie fra Disco. Sml. Boldt Ill pag. 57. 5) €. costatum Cord. — Angives af Nordstedt III fra Sapiursak, Tessiursarsoak, Jakobshavn. 6) €. Diane Ehrb. — Ralfs Tab. XXVIII fig. 5. La. 15 y. — Ritenbenk, Disco, Egedesminde, Ikamiut, Kekertarsuatsiak, Aug- piletok, Sukkertoppen (Ostfd.), Godthaab (W. & H., Petersen), Igaliko (Rsvge.), Julianehaab (Sylow). Wallich I angiver den fra Godthaab, Nordsiedt Ill fra Kekertok, Pakitsok, Sapiursak, Tessiursarsoak, Jakobshavn. 7) €. didymotocum Bréb. — Angives af Richter fra Umanak. 8) (. intermedium Ralfs. — Ralfs Tab. XXIX fig. 3. La. 18,2— 27 u. — Holstenborg (Ostfd.), Godthaab (W. & H., Petersen, Ostfd.), Igdlorsuit. 9) €. Jenneri Ralfs. — Ralfs Tab. XXVIII fig. 6. La. 9—10 y. Kingua Orpigsuit, Holstenborg (Ostfd.). Den angives af Nordstedt III fra Sapiursak. 10) €. juncidum Ralfs. — Ralfs Tab. XXIX fig. 6. La. 7,8. — Disco, Godthaab (W. & H.), Igaliko (Rsvge.). Angives af Nordstedt III fra Wlortlek, Kekertok, Sapiursak, Tessiursarsoak. 326 11) €. Kützingii Bréb. — Angives af Nordstedt III fra Pakitsok, Sapiursak. 12) €. Leibleinii Kütz. — Ralfs Tab. XXVHI fig. 4. La. 32 y, Lo. 180 y. — Godthaab (W. & H.), Narsak. 13) €. lineatum Ehrb. — Ralfs Tab. XXX fig. 1. La. 17 w, Lo. 440 ». — Godthaab (W. & H., Petersen). 14) €. macilentum Bréb. — West III Vol. I pag. 118 Tab. XII fig. 8—10. La. 15,2—17,8 u, Lo. 360—420 u. — Godtbaab (W. & H.). 15) €. parvulum Näg. — West III Vol. I pag. 133 Tab. XV fig. 9—10. La. 10,4 », Lo. 108 y. — Kingua Orpiksuit, Augpiletok, Kornok. Angives af Boldt II fra Ivigtut og Igaliko. 16) €. rostratum Ehrb. — Ralfs Tab. XXX fig. 3. La. 23 y, Lo. 290 u. — Igaliko (Rsvge.). Nordstedt III angiver den fra Jakobshavn. 17) €. striolatum Ehrb. — Ralfs Tab. XXIV fig. 2. La. 23 y, Lo. 240 vu. — Umanap timilia, Ritenbenk, Disco, Jakobshavn, Kingua Orpiksuit, Aumat (Sylow), Godthaab (W. & H., Petersen), Igaliko (Rsvge.), Tasersuak Kingua Tasermiut. Nordstedt Ill angiver den fra Godhavn, Kekertok, Pakitsok, Sapiursak, Tessiursarsoak, Jakobshavn; Boldt II fra Igalıko; Richter fra Umanak. 18) €. Venus Kütz. — Angives af Boldt II fra Sofiehamn. Gen. Comarium Ralfs. 1) €. anceps Lund. — Lundell pag. 48 Tab. III fig. 4. Lo. 33,8 y, La. 19,5 w, La. Isthm. 13 y. — Nunarsuak Kronprinsens-0, Simiut- arsuak, Holstenborg (W. & H.), Sukkertoppen (W. & H.). Den angives af Nordstedt Il fra Jakobshavn og af Boldt II fra Atanekerdluk og Qvannersoit. forma. subparvula nob. — Denne Form synes mig med lige Ret at kunne henføres enten til CG. anceps Lund eller til C. par- vulum Breb. sml. Figuren hos Lundell. |. c. og hos Nordstedt II Tab. VII fig. 21. Den mangler den skarpe Fure ved Polerne, som Nordstedts Figur viser, men har til Gengæld dennes mere indbuede 327 Sider og svarer til den i Størrelse"). Lo. 27,3 y, La. 15,6 y, sml. Tab. VII fig. 6. 2) €. angustatum (Wittr.) Nordst. — Angives af Boldt II fra Igdlutjait, Atanekerdluk og Igaliko. 3) €. annulatum De. Bar. B. elegans Nordst. — Nordstedt IV Tab. 5 fig. 19. Lo. 58 yw. La. 23 u. — Egedesminde. Boldt Il angiver CG. annulatum fra Lyngmarken. 4) ©. amoenum Bréb. — Angives af Boldt II fra Amitsok-Fjord og af Richter I fra Umanak. 5) €. aretoum Nordst. — Nordstedt II pag. 28 Tab. VII fig. 22. Lo. 16,9 w, La. 13 4, La. Isthm. 11,7 w. — Kekertok, Uperniviarsuk, Julianehaab (Jessen). Nordstedt III angiver den fra Godhavn, Illortlek, Kekertok, Sa- piursak, Tessiusarsoak, Jakobshavn. Boldt II angiver den fra Kap York. Nordstedt II omtaler pag. 28 at have set C. arctoum f. trigonum fra Grønland. 6) €. arrosum Nordst. — Angives af Boldt II fra Tasiusak, mellem Atanekerdluk og Sadok og ved Kap York. 7) €. bioculatum Breb. — Nordstedt II pag. 20 Tab. VI fig. 8. Lo. 22—26 u, La. 20—24,7 u, La. Isthm. 7—9,1 w. — Kekertok, Nutarmiut Tasiusak, Disco, Jakobshavn, Nunarsuak Kronprindsens-Q, Hunde-@, Kristianshaab, Egedesminde, Ikamiut, Portusut, Augpiletok, Iginiarfik-Fjord, Ivnarsulik, Godthaab (Petersen, Ostfd.), Igaliko (Rsvge.), Julianehaab (Sylow). Wallich | angiver den fra Godthaab, Boldt II fra Tasiusak, Atanekerdluk, mellem Atanekerdluk og Sadok, Friedrichsthal. 8) €. biretum Breb. — Ralfs Tab. XVI fig. 5. Lo. 58,5 yw, La. 52 y, La. Isthm. 19,5 sw. — Tasersuak Kingua Tasermiut. Boldt II angiver den fra Igdlutjait og Atanekerdluk. 9) €. Blyttii Wille. — fere sim. Nordstedt II pag. 8 Tab. VII fig. 4. De af mig iagttagne Exemplarer ere lidt mindre end Nord- 1) It appears to me that this form may be referred equally well either to C. anceps Lund or C. parvulum Bréb. Compare figure given by Lun- dell (1. c.) and that given by Nordstedt (II, Pl. VII, fig. 21). The acute notch at the poles shown in Nordstedt's figure is wanting. but it has the more concave sides of the latter and agrees with it in size. 328 stedts, men ligner dem ellers. - Lo. 18,2—19,5 y, La. 16,9—18,2 y, La. Isthm. c. 5,2 a. — Isortok. Den angives af Nordstedt III fra Sapiursak. 10) €. Botrytis (De. Bar.) Menegh. — Ralfs Tab. XVI fig. 1. Lo. 52—66 y, La. 45,5—58,5 », La. Isthm. 13—14,3 u. — Kekertok, Sarkak, Ritenbenk, Godhavn (Porsild), Disco, Kronprinsens-@, Kristianshaab (W. & H.), Egedesminde, Portusut, Kekertarsuatsiak, Augpiletok, Kangatsiak, Inugsulik, Holstenborg (W. & H., Ostfd.), Itivnek, Sukkertoppen (Ostfd.), Godthaab (W. & H., Ostfd.), Kornok, Isortok, Igaliko (Rsvge.), Julianehaab (Jessen). Wallich I angiver den fra Godthaab; Boldt II angiver den fra Maligiak, Igdlutjait, Atanekerdluk, Sakkok, Sofiehamn, Lyngmarken, Igaliko, Amitsokfjord, Ivigtut, Grønnedal; Richter I angiver den fra Umanak. 11) €. caleareum Wittr. — Angives af Boldt II fra Igdlutjait. 12) €. einetutum Nordst. — Nordstedt II pag. 27 Tab. VII fig. 20. Lo. 40 », La. 27 y, La. Isthm. 19,5 y. — Sagdlersuak, Holstenborg (WE SER): 13) €. coelatum Ralfs. — Ralfs Tab. XVII fig. 1. Lo. 44,2 y, La. 39 », La. Isthm. 15,6 a». — Godthaab (Ostfd.). 14) 6. connatum Breb. — Ralfs Tab. XVII fig. 10. Lo. 91 y, La. 57 y, La. Isthm. 41 u. — Igaliko (Rsvge.). Den er muligvis funden af Dickie fra Disco. 15) €. conspersum Ralfs. — Ralfs Tab. XVI fig. 4, Lo. 104 y, La. 78 y, La. Isthm. 24,7 a. — Inugsulik, Iginiarfik, Sø ner Ind- landsisen. B. rotundatum Wittr. — Boldt II pag. 26. Lo. 90 y, La. 70 y, La. Isthm. 27 y. — Tasersuak. Kingua Tasermiut. C. conspersum angives af Boldt II fra Maligiak, Atanekerdluk, Ritenbenk Kulbrud ; Richter I angiver den fra Ikerasak. 16) €. costatum Nordst. — Nordstedt II pag. 25 Tab. VII fig. 17. Lo. 40,3 », La. 30 y, La. Isthm. 13 u. — Kristianshaab (W. & H.), Egedesminde, Holstenborg (W.& H.), Sukkertoppen (W. & H., Ostfd.), Godthaab (Petersen). Nordstedt III angiver den fra Jakobshavn, Tessiursarsoak, Sa- piursak, Pakitsok, Kekertok, Illortlek, Godhavn; Boldt Il angiver den fra Mellam-Fjorden, Sakkok, Lyngmarken, Tasiusak, Godhavn?, Unar- toarsuk, Atanekerdluk, Igdlutjait, Kap York, Julianehaab. 329 17) ©. erenatum Ralfs. — Ralfs Tab. XV fig. 7. Lo. 29—35 y, La. 24—27 y, La. Isthm. 11—14 2. — Godhavn (W.& H.), Hol- stenborg (W. & H.), Julianehaab (Jessen). forma. crene laterales 3. Nordst. I pag. 30 Tab. VI fig. 7. Lo. 30—34 u, La. 26—27 u, La. Isthm. 10,4—13 y. — Godhavn (Porsild), Holstenborg (W. & H.), Godthaab (W. & H.). forma. erene laterales 2. Nordst. I pag. 30 Tab. VI fig. 8. Lo. 26 yw, La. 20,8 y, La. Isthm. 10,4 u. — Kristianshaab, Egedes- minde, Holstenborg, alle tre Steder samlet af W. & H. subsp. costatum Nordst. forma groenlandica nob. — Den gronlandske Form adskiller sig i folgende fra Nordstedts Figur: (Nordstedt I pag. 30 Tab. VI fig. 9.) Granulationerne i Midten af Halvcellerne bestaa hver af en lang Forhejning samt ved disses indre Spids en lille Knop; Granulationerne langs Halvcellernes Rand er mere adskilte; endelig er selve Randens Fremspring ofte for- synede med smaa Vorter sml. Figuren Tavle VII Fig. 8 1). Lo. 39— 41,64, La. 28,6— 33,8 4. Kekertok, Kavdluanit, Ritenbenk, Iginiarfik- Fjord, Holstenborg (W. & H.), Sukkertoppen (W. & H.). C. crenatum angives af Wallich I fra Godthaab, af Nordstedt III fra Ritenbenk, Godhavn, Illortlek, Kekertok, Pakitsok, Sapiursak, Tessiursarsoak; af Boldt Il fra Maligiak, Patoot, Sakkok, mellem Atanekerdluk og Sadok, Atanekerdluk, Lyngmarken, Tasiusak, Kap York, Julianehaab, Gronnedal. 18) €. cucumis Ralfs. — Nordstedt If Tab. VII fig. 28—29. Lo. 96—109 u», La. 48—60 y, La. Isthm. 33—39 w. — Kingua Tasiusak (Hartz), Disco, Tessilik, Inugsulik, Sukkertoppen (W. & H.), Godthaab (W. & H., Petersen, Ostfd.), Julianehaab (Rsvge.). Nordstedt III angiver den fra Illortlek, Sarpiursak, Tessiursarsoak ; Boldt II angiver den fra Mellam-Fjorden og Igaliko. 19) €. eueurbita Breb. — Klebs, Desm. Ostpress. Tab. III fie. 8. Lo. 524, La. 26 u. — Egedesminde, Sukkertoppen og Holstenborg, alle tre Steder samlet af W. & H. 1) The Greenland form differs from Nordstedt’s figure (Nordstedt I, p. 30, Pl. VI, fig. 9) in the following points: The granulation in the centre of each semicell consists of a long elevation, and at the inner apex of the latter, near the isthmus, there is a small protuberance; the granules along the margin of the semicells are more scattered; lastly the undula- tions of the margin itself are often furnished with small protuberances (cf. Pl. VII, fig. 8). 330 20) €. eyelicum Lund. areticum Nordst. — Nordstedt I pag. 31 Tab. VI fig. 13. Lo. 65—68,4 u, La. 66—70 u, La. Isthm. 22— 23,4 u. — Umanap timilia, Tasiusak, Jakobshavn (W. & H.), Kri- stianshaab (W. & H.). Egedesminde, Tessilik, Aumat (Kruuse), Sagdlersuak, Simiutarsuak, Iginiarfik, Holstenborg (W. og H.), Sukker- toppen (W. & H., Rsvge.), Godthaab (Petersen). C. cyclicum angives af Nordstedt III fra Ritenbenk, Godhavn, Nlartlek, Kekertok, Pakitsok, Tessiursarsoak, Jakobshavn; Boldt Il angiver den fra Sakkok, Tasiusak, Atanekerdluk, Maligiak, Julianehaab. 8. subarcticum Boldt. — Boldt II pag. 23 Tab. I fig. 24. Lo. 65 yp, La. 66,3 y, La. Isthm. 26 u. — Holstenborg, Godthaab begge Steder samlet af W. & H. 21) €. excavatum Nordst. forma major Boldt. — Boldt II pag. 28 Tab. II fig. 30. Lo. 31 y, La. 19,5 w, La. Isthm. 10,4 7. — Disco. Boldt Il angiver forma major og forma ellipticum Wille. Finde- stederne ere Sakkok, Tasiusak og Igdlutjait. 22) €. globosum Bulnh. — Nordstedt II Tab. VII fig. 25. Lo. 16,5 y, La. 13 y, La. Isthm. 10,4 sw. — Jakobshavn, Godthaab, begge Steder samlet af W. & H. Nordstedt IT angiver den fra Godhavn, Pakitsok, Sapiursak, Jakobshavn; Boldt Il fra Tasiusak og Richter I fra Umanak. 23) €. granatum Breb. — Ralfs. Tab. XXXII fig. 6. Lo. 28— 41 pu, La. 17—25 y, La. Isthm. 5,2— 7,872. — Kekertok, Sarkak, Riten- benk, Godhavn (Porsild), Disco, Nunarsuak Kronprinsens-@, Kristians- haab (W. & H.), Tessilik, Kingua Orpiksuit, Kangatsiak, Inugsulik, Sagdlersuak, Sø nær Indlandsisen, Holstenborg (W. & H., Ostfd.), Itivnek, Sukkertoppen (W. & H.), Godthaab (W. & H., Petersen, Ostfd.), Kingua Sermiliarsuk, Kornok (Rsvge., Lassen), Isortok, Igaliko (Rsvge.), Julianehaab (Rsvge., Jessen), Tasersuak Kingua Tasermiut. Var. subgranatum Nordst. — West Ill Vol. II pag. 188 Tab. LXIII fig. 5—6. Lo. 264%, La. 19,5, La. Isthm. 6,5. — Egedes- minde, Unartok. i C. granatum angives af Nordstedt III fra Godhavn, Pakitsok, Sapiursak; Boldt II angiver den fra Maligiak, Ritenbenk Kulbrud, Lyngmarken, Sofiehamn, mellem Atanekerdluk og Sadok, Sakkok, Patoot, Amitsok-Fjord, Ivigtut, Gronnedal. 24) €. Hammeri Reinsch. — West III Vol. II pag. 181 Tab. LXII fig. 21. Lo. 42,9 y, La. 28,6 y, La. Isthm. 11,7 ». — Godthaab (Petersen), Kingua Sermiliarsuk. 331 Angives af Nordstedt III fra Jakobshavn; af Boldt fra Atane- kerdluk. 25) €. hexagonum Elfving. — Angives af Richter fra Ikerasak. 26) €. hexalobum Nordst. — Nordstedt I pag. 33 Tab. VII. fig. 16. Lo. 40 u, La, 32 yw, La. Isthm. 14,3 y. — Kristianshaab (W. & H.), Holstenborg (W. & H.), Sukkertoppen (W. & H,, Ostfd.). Den angives af Nordstedt III fra Ritenbenk, Kekertok, Pakitsok, Sarpiursak. Boldt Il angiver den fra Mellam-Fjord. B. rossicum Borge. — Borge pag. 30 Tab. II fig. 32. Lo. 45 u, La. 30 y, La. Isthm. 14,3 4. — Simiutarsuak, Sukkertoppen (W. & H.). 27) €. hexastichum Lund. — Lundell pag. 33 Tab. III fig. 13. Lo. 54 pr, La. 404, La. Isthm. 20 ». — Disco, Sukkertoppen (Ostfd.), Godthaab (W. & H.). Nordstedt III angiver den fra Sapiursak; Boldt Il fra Ivigtut. 28) €. holmiense Lund. B. integrum Nordst. Nordstedt I pag. 28 Tab. VI fig. 5. Lo. 58,5 u, La. 36,4 y, La. Isthm. 17,6 ». — Kristianshaab (W. & H.), Egedesminde, Augpiletok, Inugsulik, Holstenborg (Ostfd.), Godthaab (Petersen), Ivigtut, Tasersuak Kingua Tasermiut. Var. undulata nob. — Membranen er set forfra stærkt unduleret; endvidere er Membranen stærkt fortykket navnlig ved Hjørner og Poler!). Lo. 56 w, La. 33,8 y, La. Isthm. 17 w. Sm. ane VIE fe. 9. Iginiarfik-Fjorden. C. holmiense og Former angives af Nordstedt III fra Jakobs- havn, af Boldt II fra Igdlutjait og Patoot. 29) €. Holmii Wille. form. depauperata Boldt. — Boldt II pag. 27 Tab. Il fig. 29. Lo. 58,5 y, La. 54,6 y, La. Isthm. 20,8 u. — Sarkak, Inugsulik. Boldt II: Sofiehamn, Igdlutjait, Ritenbenk Kulbrud, Maligiak. 30) €. homalodermum Nordst. — Nordstedt II pag. 18 Tab. VI fig. 4. Lo. 53,3 u, La. 48 y, La. Isthm. 16,5 u. — Kristianshaab (W. & H.), Egedesminde. 1) The membrane in the front view is deeply undulate; the membrane is moreover considerably incrassated, especially a‘ the angles and at the poles. 31) €. Kjelmanni Wille. — Angives af Boldt II fra Atanekerdluk, Igdlutjait og Godthaab. 32) €. latum Bréb. — Angives af Boldt Il fra Igdlutjait og Maligiak. 33) €. margaritiferum (Turp.) Menegh. — Ralfs. Tab. XVI fig. 2. Lo. 33—60 y, La. 27—52 y, La. Isthm. 13—20 jp Kekertok, Ritenbenk, Egedesminde, Holstenborg (W. & H.), Sukker- toppen (W. & H.), Godthaab (W. & H.). b. incisum Kirchn. forma minor nob. — Denne Form ligner ganske den af Boldt II p. 26 Tab. II fig. 28 omtalte, men er i alle Dimensioner mindre, sml. Tab. VII fig. 10). Lo. 40,3 w, La. 30 w, La. Isthm. 13 x. — Tessilik. C. margaritiferum og Former angives af Boldt Il fra Maligiak, Igdlutjait, Atanekerdluk, Sofiehamn, Ivigtut, Julianehaab, Amitsok- Fjord, Friedrichsthal. Wallich I angiver den fra Godthaab. 34. €. Meneghinii Bréb. — Ralfs... Tab. XV fig. 6. Lo. 23 —26 u, La. 15,6—19,5 w, La. Isthm. 5—7,8 u. — Kekertok, Kavdluanit, Nutarmiut Tasiusak, Godhavn (Porsild), Disco, Kingua Orpiksuit, Kangatsiak, So ner Indlandsisen, Holstenborg (W. & H., Petersen, Ostfd.), Kingua Sermiliarsuk, Kornok, Isortok, Igaliko, Igdlorsuit, Tasersuak Kingua Tasermiut. forma: Boldt IL pag. 13 Tab. I fig. 16. Lo. 10,4 w, La. 9,1 u, La. Isthm. 3,9 po. — Egegesminde. C. Meneghinii og Fomer angives af Wallich I fra Godthaab, af Richter I fra Ikerasak og af Boldt II fra Patoot, Sakkok, Maligiak, Igdlutjait, mellem Atanekerdluk og Sadok, Sofiehamn, Ivigtut, Gronnedal. 35) €. microsphinetum Nordst. — sim. Fig. Børgesen | pag. 16 Tab. 1 fig. 6. Lo. 42 w, La. 28,6 y, La. Isthm. 15,6 y. — Holsten- borg og Sukkertoppen (W. & H.). Den angives af Boldt II fra Mellam-Fjord. 36) €. nasutum Nordst. — Nordstedt I p. 33 Tab. VII fig. 17. Lo. 39—40 u, La. 32—34 u, La. Isthm. 12—14 po. — Jakobs- havn, Nunarsuak Kronprinsens-®, Kristianshaab (W. & H.), Egedes- minde, Tessilik, Kekertarsuatsiak, Simiutarsuak, Iginiarfik-Fjord, 1) This form exactly resembles the one mentioned by Boldt (il, p. 26, PI. I, fig. 28). but is smaller in all its dimensions. 333 Holstenborg (W. & H., Ostfd.), Sukkertoppen (W. & H., Ostfd.), Godt- haab (W. & H., Ostfd.). Den angives af Nordstedt III fra Ritenbenk, Godhavn, Illortlek, Kekertok, Sapiursak, Tessiursarsoak, Jakobshavn; af Boldt II fra God- havn, mellem Atanekerdluk og Sadak, paa en Ø udenfor Tasiusak, Tasiusak, Kap York, Friedrichsthal. 37) €. nitidulum De Not. — forma Borge pag. 28 Tab. II fig. 28. Lo. 27 u, La. 22 » La. Isthm. 7,8 4. — Ivnarsulik, Igaliko (Rsvge.). 38) €. notabile De Bar. — Angives af Boldt II fra Unartoarsuk. 39) €. Nymannianum Grun. — Angives af Wittrock III fra Ind- landsisen ved Auleitsivik-Fjord. 40) €. Ochthodes Nordst. — Nordstedt II p.17 Tab. VI fig. 3. Lo. 72—82 y, La. 58—65 u», La. Isthm. 17—19,5 y. — Kekertok, Kavdluanit, Ritenbenk, Nunarsuak Kronprinsens-@, Kristianshaab (W. & H.), Egedesminde, Sagdlersuak, Iginiarfik-Fjord, Holstenborg (W. & H., Ostfd.), Godthaab (Petersen, W. & H.), Tunugdliarfik, Narsak, Julianehaab (Rsvge.). Boldt Il angiver den fra Mellamfjorden, Atanekerdluk, Sakkok, Sofiehamn, Igaliko, Julianehaab. 41) €. orbieulatum Ralfs. — Angives af Nordstedt III fra Illartlek, Sapiursak. 42) €. ordinatum nov. Sp. — En ret lille Cosmarium; Cellen er lidet længere end bred. Halvcellerne er set forfra nærmest halv- cirkelformede, Randen er tydelig bølget. Isthmusindsnævringen be- løber sig paa hver Side til ¢. 4/4 af Cellens Totalbredde. Set fra Siden er Cellen nærmest rektangulær, dog er hver Halvcelle op- svulmet paa Midten paa Grund af Granuleringen, der findes her. Langs Cellens Omkreds ser man, naar Cellen ses forfra, en Række store tandformede Ophøjninger; midt paa hver Halvcelle findes des- uden en Række af c. 5 langstrakte kraftige Forhajninger'). Lo. Cell. 30 y, La. Cell. 25 w, La. Isthm. 13 ». Tab. VII fig. 11. Samlet af Hartz ved Sarkak. !) A rather small Cosmarium; the cells are a little longer than they are broad. Front view of semicell allmost semicircular. The margin distinetly undulate. Length of sinus on each side about ‘'/s of the total breadth of the cells. Side view of cells almost rectangular, but each of the semicells are somewhat thickened in the centre on account of the gra- 334 43) €. orthostichum Lund. 2. pumilum Lund. forma: groenlandica nob. — Lundells form findes omtalt og afbildet Lundell pag. 24 Tab. II fig. 10. Den gronlandske Form er lidt mindre, Halvcellerne er forholdsvis mindre fladtrykte; set fra oven er Cellen mere opsvulmet paa Midten end Tilfældet er hos Lundell’s Afbildning af Hovedarten. Granula er hos den grønlandske Form ordnede omkring Cellens Poler, desuden er der lidt nedenfor Midten af hver Halvcelle et Bælte af Granula'). Lo. 19,5 », La. 18,2 w, La. Isthm. c. 8 y, sml. Tab. VII fig. 12. — Tessilik. 44) €. parvulum Breb. — Nordssedt II pag. 27 Tab. VII fig. 21. Lo. 27,3 w, La. 14,3 y, La. Isthm. 10,8 y. — Ivigtut. Boldt II angiver den fra Sakkok, Patoot, Igdlutjait, Julianehaab. 45) €. phaseolus Bréb. — Ralfs. Tab. XXXII fig. 5. Lo. 35,5 y, La. 34,9 u, La. Isthm. 7,8 u. — Kristianshaab (W. & H.), Aug- piletok, Godthaab (W. & H., Ostfd.). forma: elevatum Nordst. sydl. Norges Desm. p. 17 Tab. I fig. 5. Lo. 26 », La. 26 y, La. Isthm. 9 uw. — Kekertok, Riten- benk, Godthaab (Petersen). y. achondrum Boldt. — Boldt I pag. 103 Tab. V fig. 7. Lo. 36,4 u, La. 32 y, La. Isthm. 9 a. — Sukkertoppen (Ostfd.), Godthaab (W. & H.). C. phaseolus og Former angives af Nordstedt III fra Sapiursak; af Boldt I fra Sakkok og Maligiak. 46) €. Pokornyanum (Gum) West et G. S. West. — West III Vol. II pag. 190 Tab. LXII fig. 15. Lo. 25,6 », La. 15 », La. Isthm. 7,8 u. — Godthaab (Petersen). 47) €. Portianum Archer. — Larsen pag. 87 fig. 1. Lo. 38 y, La. 27 yw, La. Isthm. 10,4 4. — Godthaab (Petersen). nulation which occurs there. In the front view a series of large denti- form protuberances are visible around the periphery of the cells; more- over a series of about five oblong strong protuberances occur in the centre of each semicell. Lundell's form is mentioned and figured in his work: De Desmidiaceis (p. 24, Pl. II, fig. 10). The Greenland form is somewhat smaller, the semicells are relatively less compressed; the cells in the vertical view are more inflated at the middle, than in the figure of the main species given by Lundell. In the Greenland form the granules are arranged around the poles of the cells, moreover a zone of granules occurs a little below the middle of each semicell. ray 335 48) €. pregrande Lund. — Lundell pag. 54 Tab. II fig. 21. Lo. 95 y, La. 58,5 u, La. Isthm. 23,4 y. — Godthaab (Ostfd.). Angives af Boldt Il fra Amitsok-Fjord. 49) (. premorsum Bréb. forme. — Lo. 62,4—65 y, La. c. 52 y, La. Isthm. c. 14,3 a. — Af denne stærkt varierende Art er funden flere Former, hvoraf Expl. gives Tab. VIL fig. 13 og 14. Sml. iøvrigt Schmidle pag. 20. — Kavdluanit, Ritenbenk, Kingua Orpigsuit, Por- tusut, Inugsulik, Godthaab (Petersen). 50) €. protractum (Nig) Archer. — Hirn pag. 11 Tab. I fig. 10. Lo. 41,6 y, La. 38 y, La. Isthm. 8 ao. — Kornok. 51) €. protumidum Nordst. A. triquetrum Nordst. — Nord- stedt I pag. 35 Tab. VII fig. 19. Lo. 33,8 u, La. 29 y, La. Isthm. 16,5 w. — Holstenborg, Sukkertoppen (begge Steder samlet af WS HH): 7. evolutum Nordst. — Nordstedt I pag. 35 Tab. VIT fig. 20. Lo. 40 y, La. 31 w, La. Isthm. 16,5 w. — Holstenborg (W. & H.). 52) 6. pseudaretorum Nordst. — Angives af Boldt II fra Kap York. 53) €. pseudobiremum Boldt. — Angives af Boldt II fra Lyng- marken og Sakkok. 54) €. pseudoprotuberaus Kirchn. — Børgesen I pag. 18 Tab. I fig. 12. Lo. 39 », La. 30 y, La. Isthm. 11,7 ». — Kristianshaab (WEEK). A. angustius Nordst. — Nordstedt IV pag. 59 Tab. VI fig. 16. Lo. 35 y, La. 26 y, La. Isthm. 9 y. — Disco. Nordstedt III angiver en Form af GC. pseudoprotuberans fra Illortlek, Pakitsok og Sapiursak. 55) €. pulcherrimum, Nordst. — Angives af Boldt fra Patoot og Julianehaab. 56) €. punetulatum Breb. — Klebs Desm. Ostpreuss. p. 37 Tab. lll fig. 50—51. Lo. 32,5 u, La. 28,6 uw, La. Isthm. 11 w. Kekertok, Kavdluanit, Uperniviarsuk, Sarkak, Ritenbenk, Kristians- haab (W. & H.), Kingua Orpigsuit, Ikamiut, Kekertarsuatsiak, Sagdlersuak, Iginiarfik-Fjord, Ivnarsulik, Holstenborg (W. & H., Ostfd.), Sukkertoppen (W. & H.), Godthaab (W. & H.), Kornok, Narsak, Julianehaab (Rsvge.). 336 forma: fere sim. forma Børgesen I pag. 12 Tab. I fig. 3. Lo. 34 y, La. 29 yw, La. Isthm. 9 w. — Sukkertoppen (Ostfd.). C. punctulatum og Former deraf angives af Nordstedt III fra Ritenbenk, Illortlek, Kekertok, Pakitsok, Sapiursak, Jakobshavn; af Boldt II fra Maligiak, Sofiehamn, Igdlutjait, Atanekerdluk; af Richter fra Ikerasak. 57) €. pyenochondrum Nordst. — Nordstedt II pag. 23 Tab. VI fig. 14. Lo. 58,5 y, La. 49,4 y, La. Isthm. 20 yw. — Holstenborg (Wisk OH): Den angives af Boldt II fra Patoot. 58) €. pygmæum Arch. — Angives af Boldt II fra Atanekerdluk og Sakkok. 59) €. pyramidatum Ralfs. — West III Vol. II pag. 199 Tab. LXIV fig. 5—7. Lo. 58 y, La. 43 p, La. Isthm. 16,9 w. — Riten- benk, Egedesminde, Sukkertoppen (Ostfd.). Wallich angiver en C. pyramidatum Breb. fra Godthaab. 60) €. quadratum Ralfs. — Ralfs Tab. XV fig. 1. Lo.58,5—76 y, La. 32,5—42 y, La. Isthm. 18,2—22,8 ». — Umanap timila, Kekertok, Kavdluanit, Uperniviarsuk, Nutarmiut Tasiusak, Ritenbenk, Kristianshaab (W. & H.), Egedesminde, Augpiletok, Inugsulik, Sagdlers- suak, Holstenborg (W. & H.), Sukkertoppen (Ostfd.), Godthaab (W. & H.), Igaliko (Rsvge.), Julianehaab (Rsvge.). forma: Wille pag. 37 Tab. XII fig. 20. Lo. 57,2 w, La. 37,5 y. — Jakobshavn. C. quadratum og Former deraf angives af Nordstedt III fra Illortlek, Kekertok, Pakitsok, Sapiursak, Tessiursarsoak; af Boldt II fra Godhavn, Igdlutjait, Atanekerdluk, Sakkok, Lyngmarken, Tasiusak, Maligiak, Julianehaab, Grønnedal. 61) €. quadrum Lund. — Angives af Boldt II fra Sofiehamn. 62) €. quadrifarium Lund. — Lundell pag. 32 Tab. III fig. 12. Lo. 41,6 », La. 31 w, La. Isthm. 14 ps. — Nutarmiut Tasiusak, Egedesminde. forma: ornatum nob. — Den kommer Hovedarten ner, men har en endnu rigere Granulation end denne sm]. Tab. VII fig. 157). Lo. 55 y, La. 42 y, La. Isthm. 19,5 ». — Tasiusak (Ryder). C. quadrifarium angives af Boldt II fra Igaliko. 1) This comes near the main species, but is still more richly furnished with granules (cf. Pl. VII, fig. 15). 337 63) €. quinarium Lund. — Lundell pag. 28 Tab. II fig. 14. Lo. 36,4 y, La. 32 uw, La. Isthm. 8 x. — Godthaab (W. & H.). 64) 6. rectangulare Grun. — Angives af Boldt II fra Maligiak. 65) €. reniforme Arch. — Fig. West I pag. 167. Lo. 65 y, La. 53 yw, La. Isthm. 19,5 w. — Disco, Kronprinsens-Ø, Egedesminde, Sø ner Indlandsisen, Igaliko (Rsvge.), Julianehaab (Lassen, Jessen). forma: groenlandica nob. — Membranen er sterkt og pludselig fortykket ved Halvcellernes Poler. Granula er ordnede i regelmæssige Lengderekker; en temmelig stor Flade ved Isthmus er ikke granuleret. Isthmus ret snæver”). Lo. 53.3 y, La. 45,5 u, La. Isthm. 13 4. — Kingua Orpigsuit, Julianehaab (Jessen). Tab. VII fig. 16. 66) €. scenedesmus Delp. — Delponte Tab. VII fig. 31. Lo. 39 », La. 42 4. La. Isthm. 10 ». — Sarkak, Disco, Kingua Orpigsuit, Igaliko (Rsvge.). Boldt II angiver den fra Sofiehamn. 67) €. sexnotatum Gutw. var. tristriatum (Liitkem.) Schmidle. forma: borealis nob. — Den grønlandske Form kommer Schmidles Figur ner (Schmidle Tab. XV fig. 33), men er lidt bre- dere, Granula i Midten er lidt større og af en lidt afvigende Form; Granula i Randen er lidt mindre”). Lo. 22 4, La. 19,5 y, La. Isthm. 6,5 w, sml. Tab. VIII fig. 1. — Kekertok. 68) €. solidum Nordst. — Angives af Boldt II fra Kap York. 69) €. speciosum Lund. «a. biforme Nordst. — Nordstedt I pag. 30 Tab. VI fig. 11. Lo. 57,2 w, La. 41,6 », La. Isthm. 19,6 y. — Nunarsuak Kronprinsens-@, Sagdlersuak, Iginiarfikfjorden, Sukker- toppen (W. & H.). B. simplex Nordst. — Nordstedt I pag. 31 Tab. VI fig. 12. Lo. 43 y, La. 30 », La. Isthm. 16 ». — Godhavn (Kruuse), Kri- stianshaab (W. & H.), Kanalak, Augpiletok, Holstenborg (W. & H.), Sukkertoppen (W. & H.). !) The membrane is considerably and suddenly incrassated at the poles of the semicells. The granules are regularly arranged in longitudinal rows; a fairly large area at the isthmus is destitute of granulation. Isthmus rather narrow. ?) The Greenland form comes near Schmidle’s figure (Schmidle Pl. XV, fig. 33) but is somewhat broader; the granules in the middle are a little larger and differ somewhat in form; the granules at the margin are somewhat smaller. XXXII. 23 338 8. simplex Nordst. forma intermedia Wille. — Wille pag. 41 Tab. XII fig. 29. Lo. 37 y, La. 27,3 w, La. Isthm. 16,5 w. — Hol- stenborg (W. & H.). — C. speciosum angives af Boldt II fra Patoot, Maligiak, Igdlutjait, Atanekerdluk, Godhavn, Grønnedal. 70) €. sphalerostichum Nordst. — Angives af Boldt II fra Kap York. 71) €. striatum Boldt. — Boldt I pag. 104 Tab. V fig.9. Lo. 13,5 w, La. 12,6 y, La. Isthm. c. 3 w. — Patoot, Ritenbenk, Aug- piletok, Inugsulik, Sø ner Indlandsisen, Igaliko (Rsvge.), Igdlorsuit. var. manmillatum nob. — Denne Form adskiller sig fra Hovedarten ved midt paa Halvcellen at have et tydeligt Fremspring. Den kan minde meget om C. Blyttii Wille, men kan kendes fra denne ved at ses fra Toppen; set paa denne Maade viser den sig at mangle Fremspring ved Enderne, medens C. Blyttii har saadanne, sml. Nordstedt III Tab. VII fig. 4, og vor Figur Tab. VIII fig. 2°). Lo. 14,3 øv, La. 15 y, La. Isthm. 5 y. — Patoot. Boldt II angiver C. striatum fra Sakkok, Sofiehamn, Maligiak, Igaliko og Friedrichsthal. 72) €. subeostatum Nordst. — Børgesen I pag. 12 Tab. 1 fig. 4. Lo. 36,4 u, La. 32,5 y, La. Isthm. 11,7 vw. — Kingua Sermiliarsuk. 73) €. suberenatum Hantzsch. forma: Nordstedt II pag. 21 Tab. VI fig. 10. Lo. 24—36,4 1, La. 19,5—26 y, La. Isthm. 9— 11,7 u. — Kekertok, Sarkak, Kron- prinsens-@, Nunarsuak Kronprinsens-O, Egedesminde, Sø nær Indlands- ° isen, Holstenborg (W. & H., Ostfd.), Sukkertoppen (W. & H., Ostfd.), Godthaab (W. & H., Petersen), Kornok, Julianehaab (Jessen), Ivigtut. forma: Nordstedt II pag. 21 Tab. VI fig. 11. Lo. 26—32 y, La. 23,4—26 y, La. Isthm. 7,8—10 w. — Kekertok, Kavdluanit, Nutarmiut Tasiusak, Kronprinsens-@, Kangatsiak, Sagdlersuak, Hol- stenborg (W. & H.), Sukkertoppen (W. & H., Ostfd.), Godthaab (W. & H., Ostfd.), Isortok, Tasersuak Kingua Tasermiut. ; forma: rotundatum Boldt. — Boldt II pag. 19 Tab. I fig. 19. — Lo. 35 y, La. 27 y, La. Isthm. 11,7 4. — Holstenborg og Godt- haab (begge Steder samlet af W. & H.). 1) This form is distinguished from the main species by having a distinct protuberance in the centre of the semicell. It greatly resembles C. Blyttii Wille, but differs from the latter in the vertical view, when seen in the latter view it lawes the protuberances at the poles which occur on C. Blyttii (cf. Nordstedt Ill, PI. VIL, fig.4, and our figure, Pl. VIII, fig. 2). 339 forma: depauperata nob. — Denne Form ligner vel mest Nordstedts Figur (Nordstedt II Tab. VI fig. 10), Granula i Halv- cellernes Midte er reduceret til c. 6 ganske smaa Vorter, som næppe give sig til kende, naar Cellen ses fra Toppen, sml. Tab. VIII fig. 3'). Lo. 28,6 u, La. 24,7 u, La. Isthm. 7 y. — Kekertok, Sarkak, Disco. C. subcrenatum og Former deraf angives af Nordstedt III fra Sapiursak; af Boldt II fra Quannersoit, Maligiak, Igdlutjait, Sakkok, Lyngmarken, Sofiehamn, Patoot, Unartoarsuk, Mellanfjord, Kap York, Godthaab, Ivigtut, Igaliko, Julianehaab, Amitsok-Fjord, Fried- richsthal. 74) €. sublobatum Archer. f. dissimile Nordst. — Børgesen I pag. 17 Tab. I fig. 11. Lo. 31 x, La. 23 y, La. Isthm. 13 u. — Umanap timilia, Kronprinsens-@, Egedesminde. 75) €. subquasillus Boldt. — Angives af Boldt Il fra Igdlutjait. 76) €. subspeciosum Nordst. — Nordstedt II pag. 22 Tab. VI fig. 13. Lo. 39—49,4 y, La. 29—39 yw, La. Isthm. 11,7—16,5 y. — Kingua Tasiusak (Hartz.), Godhavn (W. & H.), Inugsulik, Holsten- borg (W. & H.), Sukkertoppen (W. & H.), Narsak (Rsvge.). Den angives af Boldt Il fra Godhavn og Atanekerdluk. 77) €. subtumidum Nordst. — Angives af Boldt II fra Sarkok, Igdlutjait, Friedrichsthal, og af Richter | fra Ikerasak. 78) €. tetragonum Nig. — Angives af Nordstedt III fra Jakobshavn. 79) €. tetraophthalmum Kütz. — Delponte Tab. IX fig. 1—4. Lo. 116 y, La. 83 y, La. Isthm. 23 wv. — Ritenbenk, Godthaab (W. & H.), Igaliko (Rsvge.). Den angives af Nordstedt II fra Sapiursak, af Boldt II fra Sarkok, Gronnedal, Amitsok-Fjord. 80) €. tinetum Ralfs. — Ralfs Tab. XXXII fig. 7. Lo. 11—13 y, La. c. 10 », La. Isthm. 6,5—7 ». — Kekertok, Nutarmiut Tasiusak, Kristianshaab (W. & H.), Egedesminde, Tessilik, Iginiarfik-Fjord, Godthaab (W. & H.), Kornok (Rsvge.), Igaliko (Rsvge.), Tasermiut- siak Tasermiut. 1) This form most closely resembles Nordstedt’s figure (Nordstedt II, PI. VI, fig. 10). The granulation in the middle of the semicells is reduced to about 6 quite small protuberances, which are scarcely visible when the cells are seen in vertical view (ef. Pl. VII, fig. 3). 23* 340 Den angives af Boldt II fra Amitsok-Fjord, Igaliko, Ivigtut, Friedrichsthal, mellem Atanekerdluk og Sadok. 81) €. trachypleurum Lund. — Lundell pag. 27 Tab. II fig. 12. Lo. 52 y, La. 44,2 u, La. Isthm. 14 ». — Sukkertoppen (Ostfd.). 82) €. tumidum Lund. — Lundell pag. 45 Tab. III fig. 16. Lo. 32 u, La. 27,3 y, La. Isthm. 9 uw. — Jakobshavn (W. & H.), Narsak (Rsvge.). Boldt II angiver den fra Amitsok-Fjord. 83) €. Turpinii Breb. — fere sim. Fig. Lundell pag. 29 Tab. Ill fig. 9. Lo. 70—78 u, La. 65—70 u, La. Isthm. 16,9— 20,8 u. — Kekertok, Sarkak, Ritenbenk, Godhavn (Porsild), Disco, Egedesminde, Kingua Orpigsuit, Kangatsiak, Inugsulik, Ivnarsulik, So ner Indlands- isen, Holstenborg (Ostfd., W. & H.), Godthaab (Petersen, W. & H.), Kornok (Rsvge.), Isortok, Tasersuak Kingua Tasermiut. forma: gallica Lund. — fere sim. Børgesen I pag. 13 Tab. I fig. 7. Lo. 67,6 u, La. 58,5 y, La. Isthm. 13 ». — Nutarmiut Tasiusak. Boldt II Maligiak, Igdlutjait, Lyngmarken. 84) €. undulatum Corda. — Ralfs Tab. XV fig. 8. Lo. 55,9 y, La. 37,7 y, La. Isthm. 16,9 4. — Kekertok, Sarkak, Ritenbenk, Disco, Jakobshavn (W. & H.), Nunarsuak Kronprinsens-@, Tessilik, Iginiarfik, Holstenborg (Ostfd.), Sukkertoppen (W. & H.), Godthaab (W. & H., Petersen, Ostfd.), Igaliko (Rsvge.). Var. erenulatum Wittr. — West. III Vol. II pag. 150 Tab. LIX fig. 11. Lo. 28 yw, La. 21,5 pu, La. Isthm. 9 y. — Aumat-® (Sylow), Inugsulik, Holstenborg (W. & H.). Var. minutum Wittr. — West III Vol. II pag. 149 Tab. LIX fig. 6. Lo. 26 w, La. 19,5 w, La. Isthm. 9 y. — Inugsulik. Var. subundulatum Wille. — sim. Fig. Børgesen I pag. 17 Tab. I fig. 8. Lo.52 w, La. 38 yw, La. Isthm. 16,9 y. — Kavdluanit, Jakobshavn (W. & H.), Godthaab (Petersen). Boldt II angiver C. undulatum og Former deraf (subundulatum og en Form af C. Meneghimii — C. undulatum crenulatum) fra Grønnedal, Amitsok-Fjord, Friedrichsthal og Atanekerdluk; Richter fra Ikerasak og Dickie fra Disco. 85) €. venustum (Bréb.) Archer. — Børgesen I pag. 17 Tab. I fig. 10. Lo. 39 yp, La. 28,8 », La. Isthm. 9,1 y. — Kronprinsens-@. Boldt II angiver den fra Lyngmarken. 341 Gen. Cylindrocystis De Bary. €, Brebissonii Menegh. — West III Vol. I pag. 58 Tab. IV fig. 23—29. La. 14,3—16,9 a». — Jakobshavn (W. & H.), Egedesminde, Sukkertoppen (W. & H., Ostfd.), Julianehaab (Rsvge.). Nordstedt III angiver den fra Ritenbenk, Illortlek, Kekertok, Tessiursarsoak, Jakobshavn; Boldt Il fra Godhavn, Lyngmarken, Patoot, Kap York, Julianehaab; Wittrock Ill fra Kornoks søndre Is- strom, Indlandsisen ved Arsuk-Fjord. Gen. Desmidium Ralf. D. Swartzii Ag. — Ralfs Tab. IV. La. c. 39 un. — Kekertok, Sarkak, Ritenbenk, Godhavn (Porsild), Disco, Kronprinsens-0, Kang- atsiak, Ivnarsulik, So ner Indlandsisen, Holstenborg (W. & H., Ostfd.). Nordstedt III angiver den fra Illortlek, Pakitsok, Sapiursak, Jakobshavn. Gen. Euastrum Ralfs. 1) E. ansatum Ralfs. — Ralfs Tab. XIV fig. 2. Lo. 68,4—78 y, La. 45,6—52 y, La. Isthm. 11,7—13,4 w. — Uperniviarsuk, Nutar- miut Tasiusak, Jakobshavn (W. & H.), Kingua Orpigsuit, Iginiarfik- Fjord, Sukkertoppen (Ostfd.), Godthaab (W. & H., Petersen, Ostfd.), Igaliko (Rsvge.), Julianehaab (Rsvge.), Tasersuak Kingua Tasermiut. Nordstedt Ill angiver den fra Godhavn, Illortlek, Sapiursak, Tessiursarsoak, Jakobshavn. 2) E. Berlini Boldt. — Angives af Boldt II fra Gronnedal. 3) E. bidentatum Näg. — fere sim. West III Vol. II pag. 39 Tab. XXXVII fig. 16. Lo. 53 y, La. 32,5 w, La. Isthm. 7,8 pu. — Nutarmiut Tasiusak, Egedesminde, Augpiletok, Kangatsiak, Inugsulik, Iginiarfik-Fjord, Holstenborg (Ostfd.), Sukkertoppen (Ostfd.), Godt- haab (W. & H., Petersen, Ostfd.), Kornok (Lassen), Julianehaab (Sylow), Tasersuak Kingua Tasermiut. Boldt II angiver den fra Maligiak, Mellan-Fjord, Igdlutjait, Atane- kerdluk, Sarkok, Tasiusak. | 4) E. binale (Turp.) Ralfs. — Ralfs Tab. XIV fig. 8b. Lo.22y, La. 17 u. — Kekertok, Kavdluanit, Nutarmiut Tasiusak, Godhavn (Porsild), Godthaab (W. & H., Ostfd.), Igaliko (Rsvge.). * dissimile Nordst. — Nordstedt II pag. 31 Tab. VIII fig. 31. 342 Lo. 27 u, La. 19,5 w, La. Isthm. 7,8 4. — Holstenborg (W. & H.), Godthaab (W. & H.), Sydpraven. var. elobatum Lund. — West III Vol. II pag. 54 Tab. XXXVIII fig. 35. Lo. 26 w, La. 16,9 y, La. Isthm. 4,2 y. — Jakobs- havn (W. & H.). forma: secta Turn. — West III Vol. Il pag. 53 Tab. XXXVIII fig. 30. Lo. 23 u, La. 16 y, La. Isthm. 6 y. — Godthaab (Petersen), Julianehaab (Jessen). E. binale og Former deraf angives af Wallich I fra Godthaab; af Nordstedt III fra Sapiursak og Jakobshavn; af Boldt II fra Sakkok, Mellanfjord og Igaliko. 5) E. Boldtii Schmidle. — Schmidle pag. 27 Tab. XVI fig. 5. Lo. 28 y, La. 19,5 w, La. Isthm. 5,2 x. — Kekertok, Uperniviarsuk. Boldt II angiver den fra Tasiusak (E. denticulatum forma). 6) E. erassicolle Lund. — West III Vol. II pag. 71 Tab. XL fig. 9. Lo. 26 y, La. 15,6 pw, La. Isthm. 5,2 ». — Kekertok. Angives af Nordstedt III fra Sapiursak. 7) E. euneatum Jenner. — Angives af Boldt II fra Maligiak, Friedrichsthal, Amitsok-Fjord, Igaliko, Ivigtut. 8) E. dentieulatum Gay. — West III Vol. Il pag. 56 Tab. XXXIX fig. 4. Lo. 24,7 u, La. 19,5 w, La. Isthm. 6 y. — Kekertok, Sar- kak, Ritenbenk, Nunarsuak Kronprinsens-@, Kingua Orpigsuit, Ikamiut, Godthaab (W. & H., Petersen). Boldt II angiver den fra Tasiusak, Friedrichsthal, Ivigtut, Grennedal. 9) E. didelta (Turp.) Ralfs. — Ralfs Tab. XIV fig. 1. Lo. 127 y, La. 69 w, La. Isthm. 16,9 u. — Godthaab (Petersen, Ostfd.), Ig- dlorsuit, Julianehaab (Sylow). Den angives af Wallich I fra Godthaab; af Boldt II fra Juliane- haab og Ivigtut. 10) E. dubium Nag. — West III Vol. II pag. 43 Tab. XXXVIII fig. 8. Lo. 27,3 y, La. 20,8 u, La. Isthm. 4,5 a. — Sarkak, Jakobs- havn (W. & H.), Kingua Orpigsuit, Sukkertoppen (Ostfd.), Godthaab CNE HN): Angives af Boldt II fra Sakkok, Mellan-Fjord (E. binale forma Ralfs fig. 8 d). 11) E. elegans (Bréb.) Kütz. — Ralfs Tab. XIV fig. 7a. Lo. 52 u, La. 32,5 y, La. Isthm. c. 8 x. — Kekertok, Nutarmiut Tasiusak, 343 Sarkak, Godhavn (Porsild), Kristianshaab (W. & H.), Egedesminde, Augpiletok, Kangatsiak, Sagdlersuak, Iginiarfik-Fjord, Holstenborg (W.& H.), Sukkertoppen (W. & H.), Godthaab (W. & H., Petersen, Ostfd.), Kornok (Rsvge., Lassen), Igaliko (Rsvge.), Igdlorsuit, Taser- suak Kingua Tasermiut. forma: Ralfs Tab. XIV fig. 7c. Lo. 27,54, La. 21 y, La. Isthm. 6,5 u. — Kekertok, Kavdluanit, Sarkak, Ritenbenk, Godhavn (Por- sild), Jakobshavn (W. & H.), Egedesminde, Kingua Orpigsuit, Portusut, Augpiletok, Holstenborg (Ostfd.), Godthaab (W. & H.), Igaliko (Rsvge.). Wallich angiver den fra Godthaab; Boldt II fra Maligiak, Sakkok, Lyngmarken, Sofiehamn, Tasiusak, Mellan-Fjord, Amitsok-Fjord, Friedrichsthal, Ivigtut, Igaliko. 12) E. gemmatum Breb. — West III Vol. II pag. 63 Tab. XXXIX fig. 19. Lo. 52 u, La. 40 4, La. Isthm. 12 4. — Godthaab (Petersen). 13) E. montanum West et G. S. West. — West III Vol. II pag. 58 Tab. XXXIX fig. 8—9. Lo. 26 y, La. 19,5 u, La. Isthm. 5 w. — Godthaab (Petersen). Boldt II angiver den fra Julianehaab (= Cosmarium Meneghinii forma Tab. I fig. 15 1. c.). 14) E. oblongum (Grev.) Ralfs. — West III Vol. II pag. 12 Tab. XXXIV fig. 7—9. Lo. 143—167 u, La. 70—80 u, La. Isthm. 26 —28 y. — Egedesminde, Holstenborg (Ostfd.), Godthaab (Petersen), Tasersuak Kingua Tasermiut. Nordstedt III angiver den fra Tessiursarsoak: Boldt II fra Ivigtut og Friedrichsthal. 15) E. pectinatum Bréb. — Ralfs Tab. XIV fig.5. Lo. 65—76 y, La. 44—49,4 w, La. Isthm. 11,7—13 y. — Ikamiut, Holstenborg (Ostfd.), Godthaab (Ostfd.), Ivigtut, Tasersuak Kingua Tasermiut. var. brachylobum Wittr. forma. — Denne Form kommer Wittrocks Varietet meget nær sml. Wittrock I pag. 48 Tab. IV fig. 5. Den mangler den midterste Vorte paa hver Halvcelle og er i det hele lidt anderledes prydet end Wittrocks Form sml. Fig. nob. Tab. VIII fig. 41). Lo. 66 w, La. 42 y, La. Isthm. 13 ps. — Sarkak. Boldt Il angiver E. pectinatum og Former deraf fra Friedrichs- thal, Amitsok-Fjord, Igaliko og Grønnedal. 1) This form comes very near to Wittrock’s variety (Wittrock I, p. 48, Pl. IV, fig. 5). The central protuberance on each of the semicells is wanting, and it is altogether somewhat differently ornamented than Wittrock's form (ef. Pl. VIII, fig. 4). 344 16) E. rostratum Ralfs. — Angives af Nordstedt III fra Sa- piursak og Jakobshavn. 17) E. verrucosum Ehrb. — Børgesen II pag.217 Tab. VII fig. 2. Lo. 102,6 », La. 95 y, La. Isthm. 26,6 w. — Disco, Egedesminde, Holstenborg (Ostfd.), Godthaab (W. & H.), Kornok (Rsvge.). A. rhomboideum Lund. — Lundell pag. 16 Tab. I fig. 8. Lo. 14 w, La. 99 y, La. Isthm. 24,7 y. — Godhavn (Porsild), Isortok. Boldt II angiver E. verrucosum fra Amitsok-Fjord og Fried- richsthal. Gen. Gonatozygon De Bary. G. Brebissonii De Bary. — West III Vol. I pag. 31 Tab. 1 fig. 8. Lo. c. 200 y, La. 10,4 ». — Egedesminde, Godthaab (Ostfd.). 6. monotenium De Bary. — Angives af Nordstedt Ill fra Riten- benk og Pakitsok. Gen. Gymnozyga Ehrb. G. moniliformis Ehrb. — Ralfs Tab. IIL Lo. 28 y, La. 18,2— 21 uw. — Ritenbenk, Holstenborg (Ostfd.), Sukkertoppen (Ostfd.), Igaliko (Rsvge.), lvigtut. Den angives af Wallich I fra Godthaab (Didymoprium). Gen. Hyalotheca Kütz. H. dissiliens Breb. — Ralfs Tab. I fig. 1. La. 25—28 ». — Kekertok, Kavdluanit, Nutarmiut Tasiusak, Sarkak, Godhavn (Porsild), Disco, Kristianshaab (W. & H.), Egedesminde, Kingua Orpigsuit, Aumat-@ (Sylow), Augpiletok, Ivnarsulik, Sø nær Indlandsisen, Hol- stenborg (W. & H.), Sukkertoppen (Ostfd.), Godthaab (W. & H., Petersen, Ostfd.), Igaliko (Rsvge.), Julianehaab (Rsvge., Jessen), Ivigtut, Tasersuak Kingua Tasermiut. forma: quadridentula Nordstedt. Sydl. Norges Desm. pag. 48 Tab. I. La. 30,5 w. — Egedesminde. forma: bidentula Nordst. 1. c. La. 19,5 ». — Kristianshaab (W. & H.), Egedesminde. H. dissiliens og Former deraf angives af Wallich I fra Godt- haab; af Nordstedt III fra Ritenbenk, Godhavn, Pakitsok, Jakobshavn og Sapiursak; af Boldt II fra Sakkok, Mellanfjord, Sofiehamn, Tasiusak, Kap York, Julianehaab, Friedrichsthal, Ivigtut, Amitsok- Fjord; af Richter fra Karajak. 345 Gen. Micrasterias Ag. 1) M. americana Ralfs. — I Prover fra Egedesminde fandtes et Par Former, saaledes en lig Boldt’s (Boldt I pag. 5 Tab. I fig. 1), desuden en noget afvigende Form med flade ja endog noget kon- vexe Polarlober og mindre Papiller, sml. Tab. VIII fig. 5. Tegningen skyldes Frk. Maria Levin’). Lo. 134 y, La. 128 w, La. Isthm, 26 y. Richter angiver den fra Umanak. 2) M. angulosa Hantzsch. — Angives af Nordstedt Ill fra Jakobshavn. 3) M. conferta Lund. — Angives af Boldt II fra Ivigtut. 4) M. denticulata Bréb. — Boldt II pag. 5 Tab. I fig. 2. Lo. 128 a, La. 171 y. — Umanap timilia, Godthaab (Ostfd.). 5) M. papillifera Breb. var. glabra Nordst. — West III Vol. II Tab. XLIV fig. 4. Lo.117 u, La. 104 yp, La. Isthm. 17 y. — Ta- sersuak Kingua Tasermiut. Hos en noget lignende Form taget ved Godthaab (Ostfd.), havde den polære Lobe noget mere konkave Sider og flere Papiller. Sml. Tab. VII fig. 6. Lo. 143 w, La. 130 y, La. Isthm. 19,5 y. Boldt II angiver M. papillifera fra Amitsok-Fjord og Ivigtut. 6) M. rotata (Grev.) Ralfs. — West III Vol. II pag. 102 Tab. XLVIll fig. 1. Lo. 200 w, La. 169 w, La. Isthm. 30,2 y. — Godt- haab (W. & H.). M. sp.? — Wallich angiver fra Godthaab en Micrasterias-(Hal- ocystis-) lignende Form, uden dog at omtale nogen bestemt Art. Gen. Penium De Bary. 1) P. curtum Bréb. — West III Vol. I pag. 97 Tab. X fig. 21. Lo. 36,4—41,6 w, La. 17—23,4 u. — Nunarsuak Kronprinsens-ÿ, Aumat-@ (Kruuse), Iginiarfik-Fjord, Holstenborg (W. & H.), Sukker- toppen (W. & H.), Godthaab (W. & H., Petersen), Julianehaab (Sylow). Den angives af Nordstedt III fra Illortlek, Kekertok, Tessiur- sarsoak, Jakobshavn; af Boldt II fra Atanekerdluk, Unartoarsuk, Godhavn, Igdlutjait, Kap York; af Richter fra Ikerasak. 1) A few forms occurred in material from Egedesminde, thus, one livre that of Boldt (cf Boldt I, p. 5, Pl. I, fig. 1), and another, which differed somewhat in having flattened, even somewhat convex polar lobes, and smaller papillæ (ef. fig. 5 [on Pl. VIII]; drawn by Miss Maria Levin). 346 2) P. eylindrus Breb. — West III Vol. I pag. 84 Tab. VI fig. 1 —2. Lo. 39 v, La. 12 wu. — Holstenborg (W. & H.). 3) P. margaritaceum (Ehrb.) Bréb. — West III Vol. I pag. 83 Tab. VII fig. 32. Lo. 88,4 y, La. 19,5 u. — Disco, Inugsulik, Iginiarfik-Fjord. Den angives af Nordstedt III fra Sapiursak og Tessiursarsoak. 4) P. navieula Breb. — West III Vol. I pag. 75 Tab. VII fig. 15. Lo. 68 un, La. 15,2 u. — Tessilik. Den angives af Nordstedt III fra Sapiursak. 5) P. polymorphum Perty. — West III Vol. I pag. 90 Tab. IX fig. 11. Lo. 48 u, La. 23 y. — Kekertok. 6) P. Regelianum (Näg.) Wille. — Wille pag. 55 Tab. XIII fig. 71. Lo. 39 y, La. 19,5 u. — Disco, Sukkertoppen. (Ostfd.), Godthaab (W. & H.). x Den angives af Boldt II fra Patoot, Unartoarsuk, Ekalluit, Quannersoit, Igdlutjait. 7) P. truneatum Bréb. — Angives af Dickie fra Disco. Gen. Pleurotænium Nag. 1) P. Ehrenberghii (Bréb.) De Bary. — West III Vol. I pag. 205 Tab. XXXIX fig. 9—11. Lo. 500 y, La. 39 x. — Sarkak, Kron- prinsens-Ö, Kangatsiak, Godthaab (Ostfd.), Kornok (Rsvge.), Isortok. 2) P. trabecula (Ehrb.) Näg. — West III Vol. I pag. 209 Tab. XXX fig. 11—13. Lo. c.500 u, La. 43 a. — Egedesminde, Isortok. Den angives af Nordstedt III fra Sapiursak; af Boldt II fra Atanekerdluk, Grønnedal, Amitsok-Fjord. 3) P. truncatum (Bréb.) Näg. — West III Vol. I pag. 203 Tab. XXIX fig. 4. La. c. 50 a. — Egedesminde, Igaliko (Rsvge.). Den angives af Nordstedt III fra Pakitsok og Sapiursak. Gen. Sphærozosma Arch. S. excavatum Ralfs. — Boldt II pag. 42 Tab. II fig. 52. Lo. 9 y, La. 10,4 u, La. Isthm. 5,8 u. — Kekertok, Uperniviarsuk, Nutarmiut Tasiusak, Sukkertoppen (Ostfd.), Godthaab (Petersen, Ostfd.), Kornok. Wallich I angiver den fra Godthaab; Boldt II angiver den fra Tasiusak, Sofiehamn, Kap York, Friedrichsthal. S. vertebratum (Bréb.) Ralfs. — Ralfs Tab. VI fig. 1. La. 26 y. — Disco. 347 Gen. Spondylosium Breb. S. pulchellum Arch. — Boldt Il angiver den mellem Ataneker- dluk og Sadok. Gen. Staurastrum Ralfs. 1) 8. acarides Nordst. — Nordstedt I pag. 40 Tab. VII fig. 26. Lo. 39 u, La. 28 y, La. Isthm. 15 y. — Ivigtut. 2) S. aculeatum Menegh. B. ornatum Nordst. — Nordstedt I pag. 40 Tab. VII fig. 27. Lo. 45,5 w, La. 36,4 u, La. Isthm. 15,6 4. — Nutarmiut Tasiusak, Disco. forma: spinosissima Wille. — Wille pag. 55; baade trigona, tetragona og pentogona er fundne. Lo. 39—42 y, La. 35—45 y, La. Isthm. 15—19 2. — Holstenborg (W.& H.), Sukkertoppen (W. & H., Ostfd.), Godthaab (W. & H.), Kingua Kuanersok. forma: simplex Boldt. — Boldt II pag. 38 Tab. Il fig. 49. Lo. 37 u, La. 39 y, La. Isthm. 13 uv. — Kristianshaab, Egedesminde, Holstenborg (alle Steder samlet af W. & H.). Boldt II angiver den fra Julianehaab. forma: torta Borgesen. — Borgesen I pag. 28 Tab. II fig. ‘26. Lo. 30 uw, La. 33 u, La. Isthm. 10 ». — Kekertok, Sarkak, Nunarsuak Kronprinsens-®, Tessilik, Portusut, Sulugsugut. 3) S. alternans Bréb. 2. pulchrum Wille. — Wille pag. 53 Tab. XIII fig. 66. Lo. 32,5 », La. 28 », La. Isthm. 10,4 ». — Hol- stenborg (W. & H.), Sukkertoppen (Ostfd.). Boldt II angiver S. alternans og 2. pulchrum fra Kap York, mellem Atanekerdluk og Sadok, Friedrichsthal, Amitsok-Fjord, Julianehaab, Godthaab og Ivigtut. 4) S. aphidoxon West. var. alpinum Schmidle. — Schmidle pag. 34 Tab. XVI fig. 17. Lo.26 w, La. 28,6 u, La. Isthm. 9 4. — Julianehaab (Sylow). 5) S. arachne Ralfs. — Angives af Boldt II fra Amitsok-Fjord. 6) S. arcuatum Nordst. — Angives af Boldt II fra Amitsok- Fjord. 7) 8. avieula Breb. — Delponte Tab. XII fig. 23—29. Lo. 28,64, La. cum acul. 37 yw, La. Isthm. 9 2. — Godthaab (W. & H.). Den angives af Boldt II fra Friedrishsthal. 348 8) 8. basidentatum Borge. forma: groenlandica nob. — Borge har (Chloroph. Norske Finnm.) beskrevet denne Form ;. Schmidle har derpaa (Einige Algen aus Sumatra 1895) beskrevet en Varietet „basigranulata“ heraf, denne sidste kommer den grønlandske Form ret ner. Hos den grønlandske Form mangler Takker ganske, Mem- branen er kun prydet med Vorter, Ordningen af disse er noget lig- nende som hos Schmidles Form, dog er der i Polen et nøgent Felt, ligesom hos Hovedarten. Hvad Størrelsen angaar stemmer den meget godt med Schmidles Angivelse, er altsaa lidt mindre end Borges Form. Sml. Tab. VIII fig. 71). Lo. 20,8 u, La. 23,1 p, La. Isthm. 6,5 w. — Kekertak, Iginiarfik-Fjord. 9) 8. Bieneanum Rab. forma: spetsbergense Nordst. — Nord- stedt II pag. 33 Tab. VIII fig. 35. Lo. 35—39 y, La. 30—35 y, La. Isthm. 12—13 a». — Nunasarnak, Igaliko. var. elliptica Wille pag. 50 Tab. XIII fig. 49. Lo. = La. — 38 y, La. Isthm. 11 #. — Godthaab (W. & H., Ostfd.). 10) 8. brachiatum Ralfs? — Angives af Wallich fra Godthaab. 11) 8. Brebissoni Arch. — Den Figur der kommer den nærmest er Wolles i Desm. of the United States 1884. Tab. XLV fig. 5—6. Lo. 39 y, La. 36,4 u, La. Isthm. 10,4 py. — Kekertok, Julianehaab (Sylow). Den angives af Nordstedt III fra Ritenbenk, Godhavn, Sa- piursak, Jakobshavn; Boldt II angiver den med Sporgsmaalstegn fra Atanekerdluk, Tasiusak. 12) S. brevispina Breb. —— Ralfs Tab. XXXIV fig. 7. Lo. = La. = 39 y, La. Isthm. 13 w. — Egedesminde, Godthaab (W. & H.). 13) S. eapitulum Breb. 7. amoenum Rab. forma: spets- bergense Nordst. — Nordstedt I pag. 39 Tab. VII fig. 25. Lo. 39 y, La. 26 yw, La. Isthm. 19,5 sw. — Godhavn (W. & H.), Sulugsugut, Godthaab (W. & H., Ostfd.). Boldt II angiver den fra Tasiusak (S. amoenum). 1) Borge (Chloroph. Norske Finnm) has described this form; afterwards Schmidle (Einige Algen aus Sumatra 1895) described a var. “‘basigranu- lata” of it which rather resembles the Greenland form. The latter is edentate; the membrane is ornamented with protuberances only, the latter are arranged somewhat similarly to those in Schmidle’s form, only there is a naked area at the poles as is the case in the main form. In regard to its size it agrees fairly well with Schmidle’s statement, and consequently is somewhat smaller than Borge's form (cf. Pl VIII, fig. 7). 349 14) 8. eristatum (Näg.) Arch. — Angives af Boldt Il mellem Atanekerdluk og Sadok. 15) 8. euspidatum Bréb. — Ralfs Tab. XXI fig. 1. Lo. 39 u, La. 26 yw, La. Isthm. 7,8 #. — Kekertok, Disco. Wallich angiver den fra Godthaab. 16) S. dejectum Bréb. — Ralfs Tab. XX fig. 5. Lo.26 y, La. 20,8 u, La. Isthm. 5,2 u. — Kekertok, Ritenbenk, Egedesminde, Godthaab (Ostfd.), Julianehaab (Sylow). BP. apiculatam Lund. — Hirn. pag. 20 Tab. II fig. 30. Lo. = La. — 24 y, La. Isthm. 6 w. — Godthaab (Petersen). Nordstedt III angiver den fra Sapiursak; Wallich Godthaab. 17) S. Dickiei Ralfs. — Ralfs Tab. XXI fig. 3. Lo. 28,6 y, La. 30 w, La. Isthm. 7,8 u. — Egedesminde, Godthaab (W. & H.), Julianehaab (Rsvge.). forma: groenlandica Borges. — Børgesen I pag. 25 Tab II fig. 2. Lo. 26 », La. 23,4 », La. Isthm, 9 uw. — Sukkertoppen (Ostfd.). Wallich angiver den fra Godthaab; Boldt II Tasiusak, Kap York. 18) 8. dilatatum Ehrb. — Angives af Nordstedt III fra Riten- benk, Sapiursak, Jakobshavn. 19) S. echinatum Breb. — fere sim. Ralfs I Tab. XXXV fig. 24. Lo. 30 y, La. c. 26 yw, La. Isthm. 7 4. — Kekertok. Wallich angiver den fra Godthaab. 20) 8. fureigerum Breb. — Ralfs Tab. XXXIII fig. 12. Lo. sine procul. 32,5 y, La. cun procul. 45,5 w, Lo. cum procul. 49,4 y, La. Isthm. 13 ». — Kekertok, Kavdluanit, Ritenbenk, Egedesminde, Godthaab (W. & H., Petersen, Ostfd.). Boldt II angiver den fra Ivigtut og Grønnedal. 21) §. gracile Ralfs. — Ralfs Tab. XXII fig. 12. Lo. 39 yw, La. 52 y, La. Isthm. 13 u. — Kekertok, Egedesminde, Kingua Orpigsuit, Julianehaab (Jessen). Boldt I angiver den fra Sofiehamn. 22) S. Griffithianum Nig. — Angives af Nordstedt III fra Pa- kitsok og Jakobshavn. 23) 8. hexaceros (Ehrb.) Wittrock. forma: alternans Wille. — Wille pag. 53 Tab. XIII fig. 63. Lo. — La. = 25 y, La. Isthm. 7,8 u. — Kristianshaab, Godthaab (W. & H.). 350 Boldt II angiver S. hexacerum (Ehrb.) Wittr. fra Julianehaab, Mellanfjord, Igdlutjait, Godhavn. 24) 8, hirsutum (Ehrb.) Bréb. — Ralfs Tab. XXII fig. 3. Lo. 37,7 y, La. 31,2 y, La. Isthm. 10,4 uw. — Julianehaab (Sylow). 25) 8. insigne Lund. — Angives af Nordstedt III fra Illortlek, Pakitsok, Sapiursak; af Boldt II fra Kap York. 26) 8. jaculiferum West. — Børgesen Il pag. 232 Tab. VIU fig. 1. Lo. 26 u, La. 22 y, La. Isthm. 7 w, La. acul 35 y. — Kekertok, Egedesminde, Sukkertoppen (Ostfd.), Igaliko (Rsvge.), Julianehaab (Jessen). 27) S. lanceolatum Arch. — Nordstedt III Tab. VII fig. 6. Lo. c. = La. = 19,5 y, La. Isthm. 10,4 x». — Aumat @ (Sylow). Nordstedt III angiver den fra lllortlek. 28) S. lunatum Ralfs. — forma: Borgesen I Tab. II fig. 27. Lo. 28 y, La. 25 y, La. Isthm. 11 w. — Disco, Egedesminde, Godt: haab (Ostfd.). var. triangularis Børgesen I Tab. Il fig. 28. Lo. — La. = 32 y, La. Isthm. 12,7 ». — Godthaab (Ostfd.). 29) S. margaritaceum Ehrb. — Ralfs Tab. XXI fig.9. Lo. 23,4 4, La. 24,7 u, La. Isthm. 6,5 w. — Kekertok, Egedesminde, Keker- tarsuatsiak, Godthaab (W. & H.), Kagsimiut. 3. truncatum Boldt Il pag. 37 Tab. II fig. 48. Lo. c. = La. = 32 y, La. Isthm. 13 ps. — Holstenborg (W. & H.). Boldt Il angiver disse to Former fra Tasiusak, Atanekerdluk, Kap York og Ivigtut. 30) S. megalonotum Nordst. — Nordstedt II] pag. 11 Tab. VII fig. 7. La. 39 uw. — Uperniviarsuk, Julianehaab (Rsvge.). forma: Børgesen I pag. 28 Tab. Il fig. 29. Lo. 41—48 y, La. 34—39 y, La. Isthm. 14,3—16 p. — Kristianshaab (W. & H.), Portusut, Julianehaab (Sylow). Nordstedt III angiver Pakitsok, Sapiursak, Tessiursarsoak, Ja- kobshavn; Boldt II Mellanfjord, Kap York. 31) S. Meriani Reinsch. — Frank. Algenfl. Tab. 12 fig. 1. Lo. 42—45 u, La. 23,4—24,7 u, La. Isthm. c. 17 u. — Kristianshaab (W. & H.), Egedesminde, Godthaab (Petersen). Nordstedt III angiver den fra Jakobshavn. 32) 8. minutissimum Reinsch. — Nordstedt II pag. 33 Tab. VII 351 fig. 36. Lo. = La. = 16,5 p, La. Isthm. 11,7 y. — Iginiarfik- Fjord, Sukkertoppen (Ostfd.), Tasersuak Kingua Tasermiut. Nordstedt III angiver den fra Ritenbenk, Illortlek, Kekertok, Sapiursak, Jakobshavn; Boldt Il fra Tasiusak, Mellanfjord, Kap York. 33) S. monticulosum Breb. — Ralfs Tab. XXXIV fig. 9. Lo. sine acul 37 y, La. sine acul 39 y, La. Isthm. 15 y. — Disco. B. bifarium Nordst. forma: Børgesen I pag. 29 Tab. II fig. 25. Lo. sine acul 30 w, La. 28 y, La. Isthm. 9 a. — Kekertok, Godthaab (W. & H., Ostfd.). Boldt II angiver den med Spargsmaalstegn fra Kap York. 34) S. muticum Bréb. — Ralfs Tab. XXI fig. 4. Lo. 28 y, La. 27 y, La. Isthm. 8,4 a. — Igaliko (Rsvge.). 35) 8. oligacanthum Bréb. forma: simplex nob. — Nordstedt har givet en Afbildning af denne Art (Nordstedt II pag. 36 Tab. VIII fig. 39), den gronlandske Form er lidet mindre, endvidere er Tor- nene aldrig tvespidsede, men stedse med enkelt Spids, der er tillige færre af dem. Sml. Tab. VIII fig. 81). — Iginiarfik-Fjord. 36) S. orbieulare (Ehrb.) Ralfs. — Ralfs Tab. XVI fig.5. Lo. 31 y, La. 28 y, La. Isthm. 8—9 y. — Godthaab (W. & H., Ostfd.), Julianehaab (Rsvge.). Den angives af Boldt II fra Ivigtut, Julianehaab og Igaliko. 37) 8. oxyacanthum Arch. — Angives af Nordstedt III fra Pakitsok og Sapiursak. 38) 8. paehyrhynchum Nordst. — Nordstedt II pag. 32 Tab. VIII fig. 34. Lo. 32,5 y = La., La. Isthm. 10,4 ». — Godthaab (W. & H., Ostfd.). forma: Børgesen I pag. 24 Tab. II fig. 19. Lo. 30 y, La. 35 a, La. Isthm. 9 y. — Uperniviarsuk, Nutarmiut Tasiusak, Kri- stianshaab (W. & H.), Egedesminde, Kingua Orpigsuit, Tasersuak Kingua Tasermiut. forma: Børgesen I pag. 24 Tab. II fig. 20. Lo. 38 w, La. 36 y, La. Isthm. 11,4 w. Disco, Kristianshaab (W. & H). !) Nordstedt has given a figure of this species (Nordstedt II, p. 36, Pl. VIII, fig. 39), the Greenland form is somewhat smaller; moreover, the spines are never bifurgate, but are always simple at their apices, and occur less frequently (cf. Pl. VIII, fig. 8). 392 forma: Boldt II pag. 32 Tab. II fig. 39. Lo. 33,6 y, La. 37 y, La. Isthm. 9 4. — Kekertok. Nordstedt III angiver den fra Sapiursak; Boldt II fra Kap York og Gronnedal. 39) S. papillosum Kirchn. — Boldt I pag. 114 Tab. V fig. 23. Lo. 30 y, La. 31,4 y, La. Isthm. 7,8 w. — Egedesminde, Igaliko. 40) S. paradoxum Meyen. forma: minutissima Heimerl. — Schmidle pag. 36 Tab. XVI fig. 16. La. 15,6 », Lo. 7,2 ». — Tessilik. 41) 8. pilosum Arch. — Delponte Tab. XI fig. 29—30. Lo. 52 y, La. 50 y, La. Isthm. 21 ». — Holstenborg (W. & H.). 42) S, polymorphum Breb. — Ralfs Tab. XXI fig. 9k. Lo. 42 y, La. 45 u. — Disco, Jakobshavn (W. & H.), Egedesminde, Holstenborg (Ostfd.), Sukkertoppen (W.& H.), Godthaab (W. & H., Petersen), Julianehaab (Sylow). S. polymorphum? forma: spinosa nob. — Denne Form, som i meget minder om S. polymorphum, udmærker sig navnlig ved de stærke Spidser i Cellens Hjørner; i Polerne og i Isthmusegnen er Cellen ikke granuleret. Sml. Tab. VIII fig. 91). Lo. 30 y, La. 26 y, La. Isthm. 7 w. — Kekertok. S. polymorphum angives af Wallich fra Godthaab; af Boldt II fra Igdlutjait, Ivigtut og Friedrichsthal. 43) 8. proboseideum (Bréb.) Arch. var. altum Boldt I pag. 117 Tab. VI fig. 34. Lo. 78 y, La. cum brach. 78 y, La. Isthm. 19 y. — Godthaab (Ostfd.). Boldt Il angiver den fra Ivigtut. 44) 8. pseudosebaldi Wille. — En Form, som jeg med nogen Tvivl henfører hertil, er samlet af Ryder ved Kekertok. La. 41,6— 48 yw, La. Isthm. 11,7 a. Sml. Tab. VIII fig. 10. 45) 8, punetulatum Breb. — Ralfs Tab. XXII fig. 1. Lo. 33,8 y, La. 35 y, La. Isthm. 9 uw. — Kekertok, Kavdluanit, Nutarmiut Ta- siusak, Iginiarfik-Fjord, Sukkertoppen (Ostfd.), Godthaab (W. & H., Petersen), Kingua Kuanersok, Narsak, Julianehaab (Rsvge.), Taser- miutsiak Tasermiut. 1) This form, which comes near S. polymorphum in many points, is par- ticularly characterized by the strong, pointed protuberances at the angles of the cells; the cells are not granulated at the poles and in the region of the isthmus (ef. Pl VIII, fig. 9). 353 8. Kjelmanni Wille. forma: trigona og tetragona. — Wille pag. 50 Tab. XIII fig. 50—52. Lo. 33—39, La. 26—32 y, La. Isthm, 11—14,3 g. — Umanap timilia, Holstenborg (W. & H.), Sukkertoppen (W. & H., Ostfd.). forma: Boldt II pag. 35 Tab. Il fig. 43. Lo. 39 w, La. 38 y, La. Isthm. 16 a. — Kristianshaab, Sukkertoppen (begge Steder W. & H.). S. punctulatum og Former deraf angives af Nordstedt III fra Ritenbenk og Sapiursak; af Boldt IL fra Igdlutjait, Sofiehamn, mellem Atanekerdluk og Sadak, Lyngmarken, Patoot, Mellanfjord, Igaliko, Friedrichsthal, Godthaab, Ivigtut. 46) 8. pygmeum Bréb. forma: major Wille pag. 51 Tab. XIII fig. 54. Lo. c. = La. = 394, La. Isthm. 16,94. — Egedesminde, Holstenborg, Sukkertoppen (alle Steder W. & H.). 2. pygmeum Wille I pag. 51 Tab. XIII fig. 56. Lo. 32,5 y, La. 35 y, La. Isthm. 10,4 w. — Den ligner ganske Willes Figur, men viser set fra Toppen en trekantet ugranuleret Flade om Halv- cellens Pol. — Godthaab (W. & H.). i forma: Boldt II pag. 34 Tab. II fig. 42. Lo. = La. — 32 y, La. Isthm. 13 uw. — Godthaab (W. & H.). forma: Larsen pag. 99 fig. 5. Lo. c. — La. = 30 u, La. Isthm. 9 u. — Kekertok, Uperniviarsuk, Holstenborg (W. & H.), Narsak. S. pygmeum og Former deraf angives af Dickie fra Disco; af Nordstedt III fra Ritenbenk, Illortlek, Kekertok, Pakitsok, Sapiursak, Jakobshavn; af Boldt II fra Lyngmarken, Maligiak, Kap York, Juliane- haab, Friedrichsthal. 47) 8. saxonicum Bulnh. — fere sim. Wolle Desm. United States Tab. XLV fig. 33—34. Lo. 71,5—76 y, La. 58,5— 66 y, La. Isthm. 19,5—25 y. — Kekertok, Egedesminde, Holstenborg (W. & H.), Godthaab (Ostfd.). Den angives af Nordstedt III fra Godhavn, Kekertok, Sapiursak ; af Boldt II fra Atanekerdluk. 48) 8. seabrum Bréb. — Angives af Boldt II fra Kap York. 49) 8, Sebaldi Reinsch. forma: groenlandica Børgesen I pag. 30, Tab. II fig. 31. Lo. 654, La. 78 y. — Egedesminde, Kornok (Rsvge.). 50) S. sexcostatum Breb. — Ralfs Tab. XXIII fig. 5. Lo. 44,2 y, La. 39 yw, La. Isthm. 19 uw. — Kingua Tasiusak (Hartz.). XXXIIL 24 354 51) 8. sibirieum Borge. var. erassiangulata Børgesen I pag. 26 Tab. II fig. 22. . Lo.c.—= La. = 18,2 y, La. .Isthm. 10,4 u. — Sukkertoppen (Ostfd.). 52) S. spongiosum Breb. — Angives af Boldt II fra Sakkok, Tasiusak, Kap York. 53) 8. teliferum Ralfs. — Delponte Tab. XI fig. 1—4. Lo. 39 y, La. 32,5 y, La. Isthm. 13 y. — Ritenbenk, Disco, Egedes- minde, Godthaab (Petersen), Kugsuak Tasermiut. forma: ordinata Borgesen I pag. 27 Tab. II fig. 23. Lo. 38 y, La. 35 gr, La. Isthm. 11,7 uw. — Kekertok, Nutarmiut Tasiusak. S. teliferum angives af Boldt II fra Sakkok og Tasiusak. 54) 8, tetracerum Kütz. — Angives af Boldt II fra Sofiehamn og Grønnedal. 55) 8. trapezicum Boldt. — Angives af Boldt Il fra Igdlutjait og Atanekerdluk. Gen. Tetmemorus Ralfs. 1) T. granulatus (Breb.) Ralfs. — West IN Vol. I pag. 219 Tab. XXXII fig. 7. La. 33 »..— Disco, ‚Godihaah (W. apie Petersen). Den angives af Boldt II fra Igaliko, Amitsok-Fjord, Ivigtut. 9) T. levis (Kütz.) Ralfs. — Ralfs I XXIV fig: 3. Lors 83,6 u, La. 23,4— 26,6 u. — Nutarmiut Tasiusak, Sukkertoppen (W. & H.), Godthaab (W. & H., Ostfd., Petersen), Nunasarnak. var. attenuatus Wille. — Wille pag. 58 Tab. XIV fig. 77. Lo. 104 y, La. 26 p. — Igdlorsuit. Den angives af Boldt II fra Julianehaab og Friedrichsthal. Gen. Xanthidium (Ehrb.) Ralfs. 1) X. antilopeum Kütz. 7. dimazum Nordst. sydl. Norges Desm. pag. 38 Tab. I fig. 19. Lo. 52 y, La. 45,5 », La. Isthm. 14,3 y. — Godthaab (W. & H.). 9) X. armatum (Bréb.) Ralfs. — Ralfs Tab. XVII a. Lo. 133 y, La. 76 y, La. Isthm. 38 y. — Godthaab (Ostfd.). 3) X. eristatum Bréb. — Angives af Wallich fra Godthaab. 4) X. fascieulatum Ehrb. — Delponte Tab. XIII fig. 20. Lo. = La. = 57,2 y, La. Isthm. 19 u, Lo. acul. 17 y. — Disco, Godt- haab (W. & H.), Kornok. 355 Den angives af Nordstedt III fra Pakitsok og Sapiursak; af Richter fra Karajak. 5) X, groenlandieum Boldt. — Boldt Il pag. 31. — Denne sjældne Desmidiacé forekom i enkelte Prøver. I Indsamlinger af Hartz fra Sarkak fandtes en Form lig den af Boldt beskrevne, dog fandt jeg de to øverste Vorter noget mindre. Klorofyliegemet fandt jeg delt i 8 sammenhængende Partier; idet der var Firedeling, baade naar man ser det fra Toppen og forfra; der var flere Pyrenoider. Tegningen Tab. VIII Fig. 11 viser disse Forhold, tillige ses Proto- plasmaet trukket tilbage fra Væggen, hvorved dennes fine Punktering bliver synlig"). Lo. 53 y, La. 56 y, La. Isthm. 14 y. forma: depauperata nob. — I Indsamlinger fra Disco (Por- sild) og Kornok (Rsvge.) fandtes en Form med meget lidet frem- trædende Vorter, navnlig hos Individerne fra Kornok var Vorterne smaa; midt paa hver Halvcelle fandtes et Parti med fine men dog tydelige Porer. Sml. Tab. II fig. 127). Lo. 52—62,4 y, La. 61 — 67,2 a, La. Isthm. 17—18,2 y. X. groenlandicum angives af Boldt II fra Maligiak og Sakkok. Fam. Volvocaceae. Gen. Sphaerella Sommerf. S, nivalis Sommerf. — Chodat pag. 141. Diam. Cell. c. 18 u. — Godthaab, Sukkertoppen (Rsvge.). Berggren anforer den taget paa Indlandsisen (Protococeus ni- valis); Wittrock Ill anfører den fra folgende Steder: Kipisako Is- strom, Kornok søndre Isstrom, Indlandsisen ved Arsuk-Fjord, Ind- landsisen ved Kangarsuk (62° 34’), ved Ilulialik (søndre Isortok-Fjord) og ved Auleitsivik-Fjords Indlandsis. ‘) This rare Desmid occurred in a few gatherings. In Hartz’s gatherings from Sarkak a form occurred like the one described by Boldt, the two topmost protuberances were, however, somewhat smaller. The chloro- plast was divided into 8 connected parts, there being on appearing qua- dripartite in vertical and frontal view; there were several pyrenoids. These points are shown in the figure given on Plate VIII (fig. 11), more- over, the protoplasmic mass is seen withdrawn from the membrane allowing the fine punctuation of the latter to become visible. In gatherings from Disco (Porsild) and Kornok (Rsvge.) a form occurred with not very prominent protuberances, the latter were small especially in the individuals from Kornok; an area with fine but distinct pores occurred in the middle of each semicell (cf. Pl. VIII, fig. 12). 24* 12 — 356 S, pluvialis (Flotow.) Wittr. — Angives med Sporgsmaalstegn af Richter fra Ikerasak. Gen. Pandorina Bory. P. morum Bory. — West I pag. 192. Cellens Diameter var 14,3 u. — Uperniviarsuk, Disco (Plankton), Fiskernæs, Isortok. Den angives af Boldt IV fra Julianehaab, Sakkok, Godhavn og Sofiehamn; Richter angiver den fra Ikerasak. Gen. Eudorina Ehrb. E. elegans Ehrb. — West I pag. 194. Diam. Cell. 13 y. — Disco. Gen. Volvox (L.) Ehrb. Y. globator L. — Richter angiver den fra Umanak. Gen. Chlamydomonas Ehrb. 1) €. Braunii Goroschankin. — Angives med Spergsmaalstegn og uden Findested af Richter. 2) €. flavo-virens Rostaf. — Angives med Sporgsmaalstegn af Wittrock III fra Havis ved Qvannersoit. 3) €. sp. — En Chlamydomonas lignende Organisme som næppe lader sig bestemme, er funden i Prøver fra Kanalak. Cellens Dia- meter var 10.4 y. Fam. Characieae. Gen. Characium A. Br. (. groenlandieum Richter. — Angives af Richter fra Umanak. Fam. Pleurococcaceae. Gen. Pleurococeus Menegh. P. vulgaris Menegh. — Berggren angiver den fra Indlandsisen (Protococeus vulgaris). f. cohærens Wittr. — Angives af Wittrock III fra Ind- landsisen ved Auleitsivik-Fjord og fra Kornok søndre Isstrom ? 357 Gen. Trochiseia Kütz. T. aspera (Reinsch) Hansg. — West I pag. 203. Diam. 23,4 — 98,6. — Holstenborg (W. & H.). Den angives af Richter fra Ikerasak. Gen. Urococcus Kütz. U. insignis Hass. — Angives af Boldt IV fra Atanekerdluk; af Richter fra Umanak. Fam. Hydrodictyaceae. Gen. Pediastrum Meyen. 1) P. Boryanum (Turp.) Menegh. — Uperniviarsuk, Godhavn (Porsild), Kangatsiak, Sø ved Indlandsisen, Holstenborg (W. & H.), Itivnek. P. Boryanum angives af Boldt IV fra Maligiak, Godthaab og Ivigtut; af Richter fra Ikerasak. var. granulatum Braun. — fere sim. Raciborski Fig. 14— 15-16. Lo. Cell. 13—19,5 ». Diam. Coenob. —96 u. — Umanap timilia, Godhavn (Porsild), Disco (i Plankton), Kornok, Isortok, Igaliko (Rsvge.). var. longicorne. forma: granulata. — Raciborski fig. 13. La. Cell. 13—19 w.; Lo. spin. 7—10 y.; Diam. Coenob. 60—97 y. — Sarkak, Disco (i Plankton), Kangatsiak, Ivnarsulik, Holstenborg (Ostfd.), Isortok. var. brevicorne. — Raciborski fig. 12. Lo. Cell. 19,5 y. Diam. Coenob. 78 y. — Disco (i Plankton). 2) P. integrum Nag. — West I pag. 210. Lo. Cell. 18 y. La. Cell. 25 y. Diam. Coenob. 84 y. — Umanap timilia, Uper- niviarsuk, Godhavn (Porsild), Tessilik, Isortok. var. scutum. — Raciborski fig. 6. Diam. Cell. c. 15 a. — Kangatsiak. 3) P. muticum brevicorne Rac. — Raciborski fig. 7. — Kornok. 4) P, rotula A. Br. — Angives af Boldt IV fra Friedrichsthal. 5) P. tricornutum Borge. — Chodat p. 230. La. Cell. 7,8 y. — Kekertok, Kornok. 6) P. undulatum (Wille) Boldt. — Angives af Boldt IV fra Godthaab. 7) P. vagum Kütz. — Angives af Boldt IV fra Sofiehamn. 358 Fam. Protococcaceae. Gen. Coelastrum Näg. I) €. microporum Näg. — Chodat pag. 231. Diam. Cell. 7,8 y. — Disco, Sukkertoppen (W. & H.); i Proven fra sidstnævnte Sted optraadte den i stor Mengde, saaledes som man undertiden ogsaa ser det her i Landet. 2) €. sphericum Nag. — Chodat pag. 231. Diam. Cell. c. 7 y. — Nutarmiut Tasiusak, Kingua Orpigsuit, Holstenborg (Ostfd.), Sukkertoppen (W. & H.). 3) €. proboseideum Bohlin. — Figur hos Senn. Diam. Cell. 107927 Kornok. Gen. Crucigenia Morren. C. rectangularis (Näg.) Gay. — West I pag. 216 fig. 90 A—C. Lo. Cell. 7—10 y, La. Cell. 5—6 y. — Sarkak, Disco (i Plankton), Augpiletok, Godthaab (Petersen), Isortok. Den angives af Boldt IV fra Igdlutjait og Sakkok. Gen. Scenedesmus Meyen. 1) S. bijugatus (Turp.) Kütz. — Chodat pag. 212. Lo. Cell. 13 —17 y, La. Cell. 6—6,5 w. — Uperniviarsuk, Augpiletok, Holsten- borg (W. & H.), Itivnek, Kornok. 2) S. obliquus (Turp.) Kütz. — Chodat pag. 210. Lo. Cell. 13 —17 y, La. Cell. 3—5 y. — Disco, Itivnek, Sukkertoppen (W. & H.), Isortok. 3) 8. quadricauda (Turp.) Bréb. — Chodat pag. 213. Lo. Cell. LG, EarGell}6, 2.) — Kangatsiak, Kornok, Unartok. 4) 8. denticulatus Lagerh. — West I pag. 220. Lo. 13 y, La. Cell. 5,2 y. — Kangatsiak. Gen. Ankistrodesmus Corda. A. faleatus (Corda.) Ralfs. — West I pag. 223. La. Cell. 1,5 x. — Tessilik. Wallich angiver en Arthrodesmus falcatus fra Godthaab, den er muligvis at fore herhen. Gen. Oocystis Nag. 0. solitaria Wittr. — Chodat pag. 190. Lo. Cell. 18,2 y, La. Cell. 9 v. — Kekertok, Kavdluanit, Nutarmiut Tasiusak, Sarkak, 359 Jakobshavn (W. & H.), Kingua Orpigsuit, Holstenborg (W. & H., Ostfd.), Sukkertoppen (Ostfd.), Godthaab (Petersen), Kingua Ser- miliarsuk, Isortok. Den angives af Boldt IV fra Igaliko, Sakkok, Lyngmarken, Atanekerdluk, Maligiak; af Richter fra Ikerasak. 0. Nägelii A. Br. forma: typica. — Chodat pag. 189. Lo. Cell. 26 y, La. Cell. 14 4. — Disco (i Plankton). Gen. Nephroeytium Näg. N. Aghardianum Nig. — West I pag. 228. La. Cell. 10,4 „u — Ritenbenk, Ikamiut, Augpiletok. Den angives af Richter fra Umanak (N. Naegelii Grun. = N. Aghardianum Naeg. b. majus Naeg.). Gen. Eremosphera De. Bar. E. viridis De. Bar. — Angives af Boldt IV fra Igaliko. Gen. Dictyosphærium Nag. D. pulchellum Wolle. — Chodat ‘pag. 187. Diam. Cell. 5 y, Diam. Coenob. 19,5 uw. — Narsak. Angives af Richter fra Ikerasak. D. Ehrenberghianum Nag. — Angives af Richter fra Ikerasak. Fam. Palmellaceae. Gen. Palmella Lyngb. P. miniata Leibl. — Chodat pag. 110. La. Cell. 4—5 y. — Kungalik, v. Bjornesund. Gen. Palmodactylon Nag. P. varium Nig. — West I pag. 241. Diam. Cell. 6,5 y. — Julianehaab (Jessen). Richter angiver med Sporgsmaalstegn en Palmodactylon sp. fra Karajak. Gen. Dactylothece Lagerh. D. Braunii Lagerh. — West I pag. 246 fig. A—D. La. Cell. 3,9 u. — Augpiletok. 360 Gen. Schizochlamys A. Br. S. gelatinosa A. Br. — Angives af Richter fra Ikerasak. Gen. Spherocystis Chodat. S. Schroeteri Chodat.? — I Materiale fra Egedesminde fandtes en lille Chlorophycé meget lignende S. Schroeteri. Figur hos Chodat pag. 115 fig. A og B. Cellens Diameter 6,5 y. Gen. Apiocystis Nag. A. Brauniana Nag. — Angives af Richter fra Ikerasak. Gen. Tetraspora Link. 1) T. cylindrica (Wahlb.) Ag. — Chodat pag. 112. Diam. Cell. 7,8 4. — Disco. 2) T. explanata Ag. — Chodat pag. 112. Diam. Cell. 4,2 y. — Kangatsiak. 3) T. lubrica Ag. — Chodat pag. 112. Diam. Cell. 4—5,2 u. — Friedrichsthal, Amitsuarsuk. 4) T. gelatinosa (Vauch.) Desv. — Angives af Richter fra Umanak. 5) T. natans Kütz. — Angives af Richter fra Ikerasak. 6) T. lacustris Lem. — Lemmermann i Forschungsberichte Plön. VII pag. 118. Tab. I fig. 13. Diam. Cell. 6—7 y. — Hvor- vidt de iagttagne Exemplarer høre herhen eller til Sphærocystis Schroeteri Chod. kan være vanskeligt at afgøre; de synes mig dog at stemme godt med Lemmermann’s Figur. Disco (i Plankton). K. Heterokontae. Fam. Tribonemaceae. Gen. Ophiocytium Nag. 1) 0. majus Nag. — West I pag. 255. La. 7,8—9,1 u. — Egedesminde, So ved Indlandsisen, Holstenborg (W. & H.), Godthaab (W. & H.), Isortok. 2) 0. parvulum (Perty) A. Br. — West I pag. 255. Lo. 4— 5,2 u. — Kekertok, Egedesminde, Holstenborg (W. & H.), Itivnek, 361 Godthaab (W. & H., Ostfd.), Igdlorsuit, Julianehaab (Rsvge.), Taser- miutsiak Tasermiut, Tasersuak Kingua Tasermiut. Boldt IV angiver den fra Ivigtut. Gen. Tribonema Derbes. & Solier. T. bombycina (Ag.) Derbes. & Solier. — Hazen pag. 184. La. 6,5—7,8 u. — Umanap timilia, Ritenbenk Kulbrud, Godhavn (W. & H., Rsvge.), Disco, Jakobshavn, Hunde-Ö, Egedesminde, Kanalak, Aumat @ (Sylow), Augpiletok, Holstenborg (W. & H., Ostfd., J. Vahl), Sukkertoppen (W. & H.), Godthaab (W. & H.), Narsak, Julianehaab (Rsvge.), Tasermiutsiak Tasermiut. Den angives af Richter fra Karajak og Umanak; af Wittrock III fra Qvannersoit. forma: tenuis Hazen. — Hazen pag. 185. La. 4—5 u. — Egedesminde, Holstenborg (W. & H.), Narsak. F. Myxophyeeae. Fam. Stigonemaceae. Gen. Stigonema Ag. 1) S, informe Kütz. — Bornet et Flahault Tome 5 pag. 75. La. Fil. 60—70 u. — Kingua Sermiliarsuk. 2) 8. ocellatum Thuret. — Bornet et Flahault Tome 5 pag. 69. La. Cell. 25—27 y. — Nunarsuak Kronprinsens-@, Simiutarsuak. 3) 8. turfaceum Cooke. -— Angives af Richter fra Karajak. Fam. Scytonemaceae. Gen. Seytonema Ag. 1) 8. myochrous Ag. — Anfores af Lyngbye fra Grønland uden nermere Oplysning om Findestedet. 2) S. gracile Kütz. — Wittrock III angiver en Varietet: minor fra Indlandsisen ved Auleitsivik-Fjord; det er muligvis den samme som Berggren omtaler. Gen. Tolypothrix Kütz. T. lanata Wartm. — Bornet et Flahault Tome 5 pag. 120. La. Fil. ¢.:9: 4. — Disco. 362 Fam. Nostocaceae. Gen. Nostoe Vaucher. 1) N. Linekia Bornet. — Bornet et Flahault Tome 7 pag. 192. Trich. La. 3,9 4; Heterocyst. La. 5,2 y. — Igaliko. 2) N, piscinale Kütz. — Angives af Richter fra Karajak. 3) N. spongieforme Ag. — Angives af Richter fra Ikerasak. 4) N. commune Vauch. — Angives af Lyngbye uden nærmere Betegnelse af Findested, kun saaledes: in subalpinis Groenlandie. 5) N. sphericum Vauch. — Bornet et Flahault Tome 7 pag. 208. La. Cell. c. 4 »; La. Heteroc. c. 6 y. — Disco. 6) N. pruniforme Ag. — Bornet et Flahault Tome 7 pag. 215. Trichom. La. 4,2 4; Heteroc. La. 6,5 w. — Kingua Orpigsuit. Gen. Anabæna Bory. 1) A. flos-aquæ Bréb. — Bornet et Flahault Tome 7 pag. 228. La. Spor. 10,4 w. — 1 Plankton fra Disco. 2) A. borealis Spec. nov. Sml. Tab. VII fig. 3 og 4. — I Fersk- vandsplankton fra Disco, samlet af Porsild, fandtes en Form, som det ikke er lykkedes mig at henfore til nogen mig bekendt Art. Traadene forekom enkeltvis; de var rette og forsynede med en tyk Geléskede, navnlig omkring de vegetative Celler, mindre omkring Sporene; Geléskeden er ofte indsnævret ud for de Steder, hvor de vegetative Celler støde sammen. Geléen er farveløs. De vegetative Celler er kugleformede og 9,7 » i Diameter. Heterocysterne om- trent kugleformet og 10,4 m i Diameter. Sporerne støde ikke op til Heterocysterne, de forekom enkeltvis eller faa i Rad; Episporiet er farveløst og glat; Sporens Længde 30 y, Bredde 10,4 y. Paa det Sted hvor Sporen stoder op til den vegetative Celle er Episporiet ofte formet som en lille Skaal, hvori den vegetative Celle har Plads. Traadenes Farve havde tabt sig en Del, jeg formoder den er lys blaagron. Cellerne indeholdt talrige Luftvacualer. Naar Geléskeden medregnes, naar Traaden en Tykkelse af c. 32 u'). 3) A. variabilis Kütz. — Angives af Richter fra Umanak. 1) In freshwater-plankton from Disco gathered by Porsild a form was found which I have not succeeded in referring to any of the species I have met with hitherto The filaments occurred singly. They are linear and furnished with a thick mucous sheath, especially around the vegetative 363 Fam. Oscillatoriaceae. Gen. Phormidium Kütz. Richter angiver Ph. laminosum Gom. (under Navn af Hypeothrix eloiophila [Kütz.] Rab.) fra Karajak Nunatak. Phormidium-Arter findes i Prover fra Unortok samlede af Jessen, men Materialet var desværre opbevaret i Spiritus, saa en Bestemmelse vil næppe give sikkert Resultat. Den tidligere omtalte Phormidium-Art fra en ,Sandslette foran Indlandsisen" var endnu daarligere bevaret, den havde Traade der var 1,3—1,9 u tykke, Skillevægge var utydelige, Skeder tynde og farveløse. Gen. Oseillatoria Vauch. 1) 0. amoena Gom. — Gomont Tome 16 pag. 225 Pl. VII fig. 9. La. Fil. 5 vw: — Igaliko. (Vahl.) 2) 0. brevis Kütz. — Gomont Tome 16 pag. 229 Tab. VII fig. 14. La. Fil. 4 w. — Fiskernæs. 3) 0. chlorina Kütz. — Angives af Richter fra Umanak. Fam. Rivulariaceae. Gen. Calothrix Ag. C. parietina Thuret. — Bornet et Flahault Tome 3 pag. 366. La. Fil. 10—13 y. — Kingua Neriak, Kingua Sermiliarsuk. Den angives af Richter fra Karajak. Gen. Rivularia (Roth.) Ag. R. borealis Richter. — Angives af Richter fra Ikerasak. cells, the mucuos being less thick around the spores; the mucuos sheath is often constricted in such places where the vegetative cells come into contact with each other. The mucuos is colourless. The vegetative cells are globose and 9,7 x in diameter. The heterocysts are nearly globose and 10,4 w in diameter. The spores do not come into contact with the heterocysts, they occur singly or arranged in a series of a few together. The episporium is colourless and glabrous; length of spore 30 z; breadth 10,4 ». At the spot where the spores come into contact with the vegetative cells the episporium is often shaped like a small cup, in which the vegetative cells occur. The colour of the filaments is somewhat faded, I belewe it had been pale blue-green. The cells contain numerous air-vacuoles. The thickness of the filaments, the mucuos sheath included, is 32 y. 364 Fam. Chroococcaceae. Gen. Merismopedia Meyen. 1) M. elegans A. Br. — West I pag. 348. Diam. Cell. 7,8 y. — Umanap timilia, Augpiletok, Kingua Sermiliarsuk. 2) M. glauca (Ehrb.) Nig. — West I I. c. Diam. Cell. 4 y. — Egedesminde, Kingua Sermiliarsuk. 3) M. aeruginea Bréb. — Angives af Richter fra Umanak. 3 g Gen. Gloeocopsa Kütz. 1) 6. Magma (Breb.) Kütz. — Hansgirg pag. 147. Diam. 6,5 y. — Holstenborg (W. & H.). Angives af Richter fra Karajak Nungtak. 2) 6. aeruginosa Kütz. — Hansgirg pag. 153. Diam. 4,2 un. — Sukkertoppen (W. & H.). Gen. Aphanothece Näg. A. microscopica Näg. — Angives af Richter fra Umanak. Gen. Chroococeus Nag. 1) €. turgidus (Kütz.) Nag. — West I pag. 352. Diam. 14,3— 18,2 4. — Umanap timilia, Holstenborg (Ostfd.), Kingua Kuanersok. 3) €. fuscescens (Kütz.) Richter. — Angives af Richter fra Umanak. Pong A 1 @ ow # OO 09 bj =. CE or ee of 59 IQ 09 tt — POP cae” QUE Er” er "rj _ am 09 og ut nb mk Figurforklaring. Tabel VII. Dinobryon stipitatum Stein. var. elongatum (Imhof) Br. ‘%#/:. Dinobryon divergens Imhof. ‘1. Anabena borealis nov. sp. 17/1 Anabæna borealis nov. sp. ‘11. Arthrodesmus glaucescens Wittr. forma convexa West. °°; Cosmarium anceps Lund. forma subparvula nov. form. **:. Arthrodesmus granulatus nov. sp. ""lı. Cosmarium crenatum Ralfs. var. costatum Nordst. forma groen- landica nov. form. 551, Cosmarium holmiense Lund. var. undulata nov. var. *°°):. Cosmarium margaritiferum Menegh. b. incisum Kirchn. forma minor nob. 795/,, Cosmarium ordinatum nov. sp. °°). Cosmarium orthostichum Lund. 7. pumilum Lund. forma groen- landica nov. form. *°°/1. Cosmarium premorsum forma. 305] 1. pots AA = 305 1 Cosmarium quadrifarium Lund. forma ornatum nov. form. 295/,. Cosmarium reniforme Arch. forma groenlandica nov. form. *°°):. Tabel VIII. Cosmarium sexnotatum Gutw. var. tristriatum (Lütkem.). Schmidle forma borealis nov. form. Cosmarium striatum Boldt. var. mammillatum nov. var. °%],. Cosmarium suberenatum Hantzsch. forma depauperata nov. form. *°°);. Euastrum pectinatum Bréb. var. brachylobum Wittr. forma. *°*):. Micrasterias americana Ralfs. forma. *"%ı. Tegningen skyldes Frk. M. Levin. Micrasterias papillifera Breb. forma. 5513. Staurastrum basidentatum Borge. forma groenlandica nov. form. **°);. Staurastrum oligacanthum Breb. forma simplex nov. form. ‘%%/:. Staurastrum polymorphum Breb.? forma spinosa nob. *°);. Staurastrum pseudosebaldi Wille? °°°/:. Xanthidium groenlandicum Boldt. *°°);. Xanthidium groenlandicum Boldt. forma depauperata nov. form. *°°):. Tavle VII. XXXIII. Medd. om Gronland. mete te Soy > SEE m 9 Dec DE IC Re ER => Ce ONE used JG — + E. LARSEN del. Medd. om Grønland. XXXIII. Tavle VIII. 12° E. Larsen del. Fig. 5 M. Levin del. AUS à dt + (€. H. OSTENFELD an Z E [és Le LA Q oO 2 4 2 © —_— a = # LIST OF THE PHANEROGAMAE ERIDOPHYTA OF THE FÆROES Arbejder fra den Botaniske Have i Kobenhavn. Nr. 37. ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS TO THE LIST OF THE PHANEROGAMAE AND PTERIDO- PHYTA OF THE F/ERÖES C. H. OSTENFELD. Se the publication in 1901 of my list of the flowering plants and ferns found in the Faeröes! several investigators have con- tributed to the flora. The result is not a few additions to the list together with new localities of already known species. Further, a reexamination of the material of several critical species has caused alterations in my views of their value, and besides that some spe- cialists have examined Færoese specimens of several genera, e. g. Mr. H. Dahlstedt the genus Taraxacum and Mr. W. Becker (of Hedersleben) the genus Viola. For all these reasons I feel it ne- cessary to publish a corrected list of the vascular plants, containing the additions and corrections to the former list. For convenience I follow the same arrangement of the plants as in the main list, i.e. the alphabetical arrangement of the species within a genus, of the genera within a family (order), and of the families within the large groups: Sympetalae, Choripetalae, Monocotyledones. Gymno- spermae and Pteridophyta. With regard to the nomenclature I have used the same names as in the main list, with very few exceptions. I do not find it convenient to have different names to the same plant in the different parts of one work, so the changes are ex- tremely few. I have in the following list repeated all the species names, consequently also the names of plants to which I have nothing to add or correct. The list will therefore contain the ' names of all the flowering plants and ferns hitherto found in the Færûes. I have to mention the main contributors to this list. An Ame- rican lady Miss Elisabeth Taylor has for several years lived 1 See Vol. I pp. 41—99. Botany of the Fzerées. 54 836 in the Ferées; she has collected many plants in the different is- lands, especially in the Nordreöer. A member of the teaching staff of the Highschool at Fagralid on Bordö, Mr. R. Rasmussen is an eager and successful botanical explorer; he has investigated some parts of Bordö, Kunö and Kalsö very thoroughly. Further I may men- tion one inhabitant more, Mr. Gazet Patursson, who has found many interesting plants especially in the southern part of Strömö. In 1903 I visited the islands again and studied the vegetation in the neighbourhood of Thorshavn (Strömö), but the floristic result was very poor, because this place is most often visited. In the literature after 1900 I have found only one book, in which there are remarks on the Faeroese flora, viz. W. Bisiker: Across Iceland, With illustrations and maps and an appendix by A.W. Hill on the plants collected. London (E. Arnold), 1902. The Appendix II (pp. 226—231) to this book is »a list of plants collected in the Faroes and Iceland in June and July 1900«. The places in the Faeröes vi- sited by the authors are Trangisvaag (Syderö), Thorshavn (Strömö) and Klaksvig (Bordö), just the ordinary stopping-places on the way to Iceland, and all visited and investigated by many botanists be- fore. The list gives most of the plant-names without indication of which of the three places is the locality, only »Faroes« is added to the name, and it contains both Icelandic and Feeroese species together. All this makes it probable, that the records of Draba verna, Viola ericetorum (= V.canina), Dryas octopetala, Geum rivale and Galium uliginosum are incorrect, as none of these species have been found before in any of the three visited places, and Draba verna and Viola canina are not elsewhere recorded from the Feerées. All these spe- cies are not rare in Iceland. I therefore consider the records as incorrect and do not take them up in my list. It remains only to refer to the paper by Mr. H. Dahlstedt on the Feroese Hieracia!. He describes herein all the species found in the Ferées as new. A good many of them I refound in 1903 and was able to determine correctly, as shown by a later revision of my material by Mr. Dahlstedt. I take here the opportunity of thanking Miss Elisabeth Tay- lor, Mr. G. Patursson and Mr. R. Rasmussen for their valuable contributions to the flora, and Mr. H. Dahlstedt and Mr. W. Becker for assistance with regard to the Taraxaca, Hieracia and Viole. I also wish to give my best thanks to Mr. W. H. Beeby for his kind 1 See Vol. II, pp. 625—659, pl. XI—XII. 837 help in correcting the English in this paper and for his friendly leaving at my disposal his large collection of Shetland plants. The abbreviations used are explained in the following manner: Str. = Strömö. Ost. = Österö. Syd. = Syderö. Vid. = Viderö. G. P. = Gazet Patursson. R. R. = R. Rasmussen. E.T. = Miss Elisabeth Taylor. ! found by myself. I have examined all the specimens recorded in the list, unless there is added »according to«. The species of the following list to which a number is prefixed are truly wild-growing or quite naturalized, while a + means that the species is introduced lately and at present not completely naturalized. I. Dicotyledones. A. Sympetalae. Fam. I. BORRAGINACEAE. Anchusa arvensis (L.) M. Bieb. Mertensia maritima (L.) D. C. Myosotis arvensis (L.) Roth. 3. M. palustris (L.) Roth., var. strigulosa Rehb. The specimens collected by H. G. Simmons at Ejde (Ost.) in 1895 */s) bear ripe fruits. 4. M. repens Don. 5. M. versicolor (Pers.) Sm. | RS Fam. II. CAMPANULACEAE. 6. Campanula rotundifolia L. Str.: Vestmanhavn (according to G. P.). Fam. III. COMPOSITAE. 7. Achillea millefolium L. 8. A. ptarmica L. 9. Bellis perennis L. + Chrysanthemum leucanthemum L. Str.: sparsely in a cultivated grass-field at Kirkebö (G. P., 1904). + Cirsium arvense (L.) Scop. 10. C. palustre (L.) Scop. Also found in the Nordreöer: Kalsö: Husum and other places (ac- cording to R.R.), Viderö: Viderejde, in enclosed fields (E.T.). 54* 11. Gnaphalium supinum L. 12. Hieracium ardisodon Dahlst. Str.: Sandegærde near Thorshavn (!). 13. H. ciliolatum Dahlst. 14. H. constrietiforme Dahlst. 15. H. cordifrons Dahlst. Str.: Thorshavn, at the rivulet; Havnedal, at the rivulet; Syderdal (!). + H. danicum Dahlst., K. Svenska Vetensk. Akad. Handl., Bd. 25, No. 3, 1893, pp. 118 & 120. AH. vulgatum *integrifolium Joh. Lange, Haandbog i den danske Flora, ed. 1, 1851, p. 456: H. integrifolium Lange, ibidem, ed. 2, 1856—59, p. 520: Flora Danica, tab. 2661; non H. integrifolium Fries, Herb. Normale, fasc. XII, No. 23, 1846, nec Symbolæ Hierac., 1848, p. 117. In a little plantation in the enclosed fields around Thorshavn I found in 1903 a Hieracium, which I could not identify with any of the Færoese species described by Mr. Dahlstedt. I therefore sent some specimens of it to Mr. Dahlstedt, who determined them as H. dani- cum, adding, that the species probably had been accidentally in- troduced to the Ferées. His supposition is without doubt right, as will appear from the following: In 1898 the direction of the Botanical Garden of Copenhagen sent different young shrubs to Torshayn for planting and some of them were forwarded to Mr. Jone Isaksen, to whom the small plantation in question belongs. As H. danicum occurs in the shrubberies and carpets in the Bota- nical Garden of Copenhagen, it is but natural to suppose, that some fruits have been carried with the sending of shrubs to Thorshavn and have grown here. — It will be interesting to follow this intro- duction, of which we know the date so exactely. 16. H. epileucoides Dahlst. 17. H. epileucum Dahlst. 18. H. faeröense Dahlst. Str.: On grassy slopes at Thorshavn and Sandegærde (!); specimens from this locality have been issued in I. Dörfler, Herbarium nor- male, No. 4550. 19. H. Hartzianum Dahlst. 20. H. heterophyllum Dahlst., and var. pinnatifrons Dahlst. 21. H. kalsöense Dahlst. 22. H. leucograptum Dahlst. Str.: On grassy slopes at Höjvig near Thorshavn (!). 23. H. melanochrotum Dahlst. 839 24. H. Ostenfeldii Dahlst. 25. H. perampliforme Dahlst. 26. H. peramplum Dahlst. Str.: Thorshavn, at the rivulet (!). 27. H. perintegrum Dahlst. Str.: Thorshavn, at the rivulet (!). 28. H. sarcophylloides Dahlst. 29. H. scotieiforme Dahlst. Str.: On grassy slope at Höjvig near Thorshavn (!); specimens deter- mined by Mr. H. Dahlstedt. 30. H. Simmonsianum Dahlst. 31. H. subrubicundum Dahlst. Str.: Thorshavn, at the rivulet (!). 32. H. veterascens Dahlst. Str.: Thorshavn (Th. Mikkelsen); Höjvig (!); Syderdal (!). var. eidense Dahlst. 33. Leontodon autumnale L., and var. Taraxaci (L.). 34. Matricaria inodora L., var. phaeocephala Rupr. 35. Senecio vulgaris L. 7 Sonchus arvensis L. 36. Tanacetum vulgare L. 37. Taraxacum spectabile Dahlst. in Botaniska Notiser 1905, p. 159. var. faeröense Dahlst., nov. var.; Syn. T. palustre Rostrup, Feer- öernes Flora, 1870, p.51, non D.C.; T. laevigatum Ostenfeld, Botan. Tids., Bd. 22, 1898, p. 139, non D. C.; T. croceum Ostenfeld, Bot. Fær- öes, vol. I, 1901, p.45, non Dahlstedt. A forma primaria diversum foliis vulgo (semper in specim. cul- tis) solo arcte adpressis, pedicellis vulgo foliis brevioribus + decum- bentibus, involucris angustioribus basi ovato-descendente, squamis exterioribus angustioribus nec non ligulis angustioribus calathioque flosculis paucioribus magis radiante. Mr. H. Dahlstedt of Stockholm has lately examined all the Færoese specimens of Taraxacum preserved in the Botanical Mu- seum of Copenhagen and has given me the results of his studies. The species, which I in my list had taken as H. croceum Dahlst., is according to Mr. Dahlstedt a special Færoese variety of his species H. spectabile. He has sent me the description just quoted and also all the following remarks concerning the Taraxaca. The T. spectabile, var. faeröense Dahlst. has been collected in the following places: 840 Bordö: Klaksvig (A. Poulsen, 1886); Str.: Kirkebö. Thorshavn and Sandegærde (C. A Feilberg & E. Rostrup, 1867); Syd.: Tværaa and Trangis- vaag, rock-ledges at Kvanhaugen (J. Hartz, C. H. Ostenfeld & E. Warming, 1897); Viderö: Malinsfjæld, 300 M. (J. Hartz & C. H. Ostenfeld, 1897). Mr. Dahlstedt remarks: »The characters given above are only re- lative, and they are such as might possibly be induced by the place of growth, but that is not the case. I have had specimens raised from fruits from Syderö under cultivation through several genera- tions, and they keep themselves distinct from cultivated specimens of the main form (from Sverige, Jemtland)«. var. maculiferum Dahlst., nov. var. A forma primaria et a var. precedente satis diversum foliis in pagina superiore + purpureo-maculatis squamisque paullo laxius adpressis. Syd.: Tværaa and rock-ledges at Kvanhauge (J. Hartz & C. H. Osten- feld, 1897); Str.: Havnedal near Thorshavn (C. H. Ostenfeld, 1903). Col- lected in the Færôes as early as 1821 (by Trevelyan?), as there are specimens in the Riksmuseum of Stockholm, labelled: »Faeröe, 1821, about 2000 feet above the Sea.« [Also collected on St. Kilda, Outer Hebrides by O. Paulsen, 1905). »This variety differs only from the foregoing form by the cha- racters given in the diagnosis, but as it seems that both characters always are combined, it is probable, that they are persistent. — The variety in question is of special interest, as it in many re- spects reminds us of the nearly related species T. naevosum Dahlst.« 38. T. naevosum Dahlst., nov. spec. Folia dense et late lobata — pinnatifido-lobata, lobis latis — an- gustis deltoideis, utrinque v. precipue in margine superiore + dentata inferne angustius lobata, inter lobos inferne + irregulariter dentata, lobo terminali satis brevi, lato ovato-triangulari — hastato, supra pur- pureo- v. atropurpureo-maculata (v. in umbrosis fere emaculata) et in pagina superiore vulgo pilis crassis articulatis sparsis — densiusculis obtecta, petiolis + intense purpureis nervoque mediano inferne v. pro max. parte purpureo. Involucrum + obscure oleraceum, magnum satis longum, squa- mis exterioribus longis lanceolatis breve acuminatis, supra medium inv. attingentibus, anguste v. inconspicue marginatis, apice + purpureis v. fuscopurpureis el in pag. interiore superne + fuscoviolaceis, laxe ad- pressis v. erecto-patentibus, apicibus vulgo + recurvato-patentibus, inte- rioribus sub apice + purpureo leviter callosis. Calathium obscure luteum, multiflorum, radians. 841 Ligule longæ, marginales latiuscule, extus stria lata rubro-pur- purea vittate, dentibus in lig. omnibus + rubris. Anthere polline + replele. Stylus et stigmata livescentes. Achenium fusco-stramineum apice muricato-spinulosum, ceterum fere leve v. minute tuberculatum, c. 4 mm. longum, 1 mm. latum, py- ramide c. 0,9 mm. longo, rostro 8—9 mm. longo et pappo albo. Syd.: Ravine near Kvanhauge (J. Hartz & C. H. Ostenfeld, 1897). Geogr. area: Regio alpina and subalpina of the Scandinavian mountains. Mr. Dahlstedt writes: »The form found in a ravine near Kvanhauge seems to me to be the same as T. naevosum Dahlst., a hitherto undescribed species, which is rather common in the al- pine and subalpine parts of the Scandinavian mountains. The in- volucres and the fruits of the Faroese form are quite like those of the Scandinavian one, but the leaves differ in lacking the purple- spots and the coarse hairiness on the upper side. In Scandinavia similar forms have been found here and there and always growing in shadow; they want the spots, but very seldom the coarse hairs, although sometimes very sparsely occurring. T. naevosum differs from T. spectabile, var. maculiferum by longer, more patent outer phyllaries, shorter achenes, shorter beak (pyramid), but longer rostrum and developed, more or less abundant pollen. var. (?) bipinnatifidum (Rostr.) Dahist.; T. obliquum Fr., var. bi- pinnatifidum Rostrup, Færôernes Flora, 1870, p. 51. A forma primaria foliis valde et profunde laciniatis laciniis del- toideis valde laciniato-dentatis omnibus in apicem elongatum attenuatis. Sandö: At the dune at Sandsbugt (C. A. Feilberg & E. Rostrup, 1867). »Of this very peculiar form only three fruiting individuals have been collected, and it is therefore difficult to examine the characters of the involucre and the phyllaries. It seems to agree with the main species as regards the phyllaries. The achenes also are simi- lar to those of the main species, but they are somewhat longer and more coarsely denticulate towards the top. The leaves bear the same characteristic hairiness of the upper side as the Scandinavian species of the main form. Of this last specimens from open and sunny places have deeply and narrowly laciniate leaves, which come rather near to the leaves of the Faeroese form, but are easily di- stinguable by their wanting the laciniation of the second order (»bipinnatifidus«), highly characterizing the Færoese form. This diffe- 842 rence is too great to justify us in regarding the form as a merely growing-place-form. I suppose that it is a race adapted to living in the sandy soils of the dune. Nevertheless closer examination of new material and also cultivation is highly desirable. Flowering specimens are necessary to settle the question of the true (correct) systematic place of it.« 39. Tussilago farfarus L. Fam. CONVOLVULACEAE. Convolvulus sepium L. —|- Fam. IV. DIPSACACEAE. 40. Suceisa pratensis Moench. + Trichera arvensis (L.) Schrad. Fam. V. ERICACEAE. 41. Calluna vulgaris Salisb. 42. Erica cinerea L. 43. Loiseleuria procumbens (L.) Desv. Str.: Kirkebö Rejn from c. 250—300 M. (Lyngbye, Rostrup, G. P., !). Fam. VI. GENTIANACEAE. 44. Gentiana campestris L., subsp. islandica Murb., mostly »ad subsp. germanicam Murb. accedens«. 45. Menyanthes trifoliata L. Fam. VII. LABIATAE. 46. Brunella vulgaris L. 47. Galeopsis tetrahit L. None of the collected specimens seems to belong to G. bifida Boenn. + Lamium dissectum With. y+ L. intermedium Fr. + L. purpureum L. 48. Mentha aquatica L. Sandö: Sandslid (accord. to G. P.). The few specimens existing in our herbarium (from Vaagö and Strömö) are quite sterile, without any flowers at all. 49. Thymus serpyllum L. Besides the main form with purple corollas a form with rose-coloured (pink) flowers has been found on Fuglö, at about 550 M. (J. Hartz & C. H. Ostenfeld, 1897). 843 Fam. VIII. LENTIBULARIACEAE. 50. Pinguicula vulgaris L. 51. Utricularia vulgaris L. Miss E. Taylor has discovered this interesting addition to the Færoese flora. She found it in 1904 and reinspected the locality in 1906, and in both summers she only saw specimens without any flowerstalks at all. Vaagö: plenty in pools and ditches about half way from Midvaag to Sörvaagsvatn, in the outfields. Fam. IX. LOBELIACEAE. 52. Lobelia dortmanna L. Fam. X. PLANTAGINACEAE. 53. Litorella lacustris L. 54. Plantago coronopus L. Syd.: Cliffs on the west coast opposite Lopra (Ove Paulsen). 55. P. lanceolata L., and f. depressa Rostr. + P. major L. 56. P. maritima L. Fam. XI. PLUMBAGINACEAE. 57. Armeria elongata (Hoffm.) Koch., mostly var. maritima (Mill.) Fam. XII. PRIMULACEAE. 58. Anagallis tenella L. 59. Lysimachia nemorum L. 60. Primula acaulis (L.) Jacq. Fam. XIII. PYROLACEAE. 61. Pyrola minor L. Kunö: Skard, both at the top of the mountain and in its lower parts, flowering and fruiting sparingly (R.R.); Vid.: Malinsfjæld, c. 400— 500 M.: Mornefjæld, c. 300 M.; and eastern ridge of Villingedalsfjeld; in all places with flowers (E. T.). Fam. XIV. RUBIACEAE. + Galium aparine L. 62. G. palustre L. 63. G. saxatile L. 844 Fam. XV. SCROPHULARIACEAE. 64. Alectorolophus groenlandicus (Chab.) Ostf. emend. 65. A. minor (Ehrh.) Wimm. & Grab. I hope to be able in another place to treat the northern species of Alectorolophus minor, sens. lat. 66. Bartschia alpina L. J. Landt in his book on the Faeröes (1801) mentions, that Bartschia occurs in the North-Strömö, but as no later investigator had found it, and as the statements of the Rev. Landt are not al- ways correct, I had omitted it in my list. Now I have got evi- dence of the correctness of its occurring in the Faeröes, as both Miss Taylor and Mr. R. Rasmussen have sent me specimens. Vaagö: near Sörvaag (sent to R.R. from a relative, Mr. Niclas Ras- mussen, but without more exact indication of the locality); Vid.: rock- ledge on Mornefjæld, ab. 300—400 M. (E.T.). In my list (1. c. pp. 55—56) I have put down the result of my examination of the Færoese Euphrasias, but I expressed some doubt with regard to the correctness of my determinations, as I must admit, that the limits between the small-flowered forms were arbitrary. I have taken up again the study of these interesting plants and have had a large material at my disposal, consisting of the collections made by Mr. J. Hartz and myself in the Faröes in 1895, 1896, 1897 and 1903 together with smaller collections from other investi- gators. As some of the species in question have been described upon specimens from Shetland or Scotland, it was necessary to have material from these countries for comparison. We have in the Botanical Museum of Copenhagen a good many Euphrasias from Shetland and Scotland sent me from my friend Mr. W. H. Beeby and from the English monographer of the genus the late F. Towns- end, and furthermore Mr. Beeby had sent me all his Shetland- Euphrasias on loan. I have therefore been able to decide several points of interest, having in my hands specimens from the original locality and original collecting-date (»co-types« of the American bo- tanists) of E. foulaénsis Towns., E. paludosa Towns. (= E. scotica Wettst.) and E. borealis (Towns.) Wettst.; besides the type speci- mens of E. arctica Lange and E. gracilis Fr., f. atropurpurea Rostr. are in our herbarium. The following treatment will show, that the result of my ex- amination is a reduction of the number of species. I think, that it is because the authors have had too scanty material at their di- 845 sposal, that they have described so many species —- this is a com- mon fault by monographers working in a country far away, a fault which now-a-days often is committed with regard to northern spe- cies belonging to genera, monographed by Central-European botanists. 67. Euphrasia borealis (Towns.) Wettst. This is the only Faeröese species with larger corollas, and it is therefore easily distinguished from the other species. On the other hand it is very near E. brevipila Burnat et Gremli, and is perhaps, as suggested by Mr. Townsend, only an eglandular from of it. 68. E. curta Fr., Wettst. Small specimens of this species are not rare beyond the en- closed fields in the lowlands; they are rather broadleaved and tend to approach E. latifolia Pursh, without giving place for any doubt with regard to their naming. 69. E. minima Jacquin apud Schleich.; R. Wettstein, Monogr. der Gatt. Euphrasia, 1896, p. 151; E. scotica Wettst., 1. c. p. 170: Townsend, Journ. Botany, 1897, p. 425; Ostenfeld, Bot. Fær., I, p. 56; E. paludosa Townsend, Journ. Botany, 1891, p. 161, non R. Br.; E. gracilis Ostenfeld, Bot. Fzrées I, p.56, non Fr.; E. latifolia Osten- feld, ibid. p. 56, non Pursh; E. arctica Lange apud Rostrup, Fzréernes Flora, Bot. Tids. IV, 1870, p. 47, ex parte (quoad plants færoenses). In 1891 Mr. F. Townsend published a note in the Journal of Botany on a new form of Euphrasia, which he named E. paludosa. He had found it in boggy ground around Braemar in Scotland. In some respects it was like E. gracilis, but differed, among other cha- racters, in its small, whitish flowers, its short and rather broad capsule and its wet habitat. As R. Brown had applied the name paludosa to another species (from Australia), R. Wettstein in his monograph (1896, p. 151) altered the name of Townsend’s plant 10 E. scottica Wettst. (more correctly spelt scotica), and under this name the plant has gone since (e. g. by Townsend, Monograph of the Bri- tish species of Euphrasia, Journ. of Botany, 1897, p. 425, and Eu- phrasia scotica, Journ. of Botany, 1903, p. 57). Wettstein considers E. scotica to be very near E. minima and says (l.c. p.171), that the only difference of importance lies in the length of the capsule in proportion to the calyx, but adds that he does not know if this difference is constant. Shortly after Town- send (Monograph, p. 426) declares, that it is not constant, as he has found specimens of E. scotica with capsules exceeding the calyx; he says that »a marked distinction seems to lie in the form of the 846 upper leaves and bracts of E. scotica which are narrower than those of E. minima and have a cuneate base.« I have examined many hundred specimens of E. scotica from Scotland, Shetland and the Fxröes and have compared them with many specimens of E. minima both from the Alps and from Scandinavia, and I can not find any distinction which holds good. I feel pretty sure, that the Scottish etc. plant is identical with true E. minima. Townsend who has seen a good deal of my Færoese material, has determined many speci- mens with capsules exceeding the calyx as E. scolica, specimens which are quite like the typical E. minima from the Alps. As pointed out by R. Wettstein (l.c. p.159) E. minima varies much with regard to the colour of the corolla; the true E. scotica represents a form with pale or whitish flowers (f. pallida Gremli), but from this we find all possible variations of colour until a form with dark purple corolla (f. purpurascens Wettst. 1. c. p. 159). The main form is very common in the Ferées, and also the purple- flowered form occurs frequently in the Færoese heaths; it is the same form which has been described as E. foulaénsis Towns. apud Wettstein (l.c. p. 139). I have examined Mr. W.H. Beeby’s speci- mens from Hamnafeld on Foula, Shetland, upon which F. Town- send has made his description, and they are, after my opinion, only rather coarse, unbranched E. minima with dark purple corol- las and long capsules; the specimens were found among heather and this explains their somewhat flexuose stem. Both Wettstein (I. c. p.140) and Townsend (Monograph, p. 423) compare it with E. lati- folia Pursh; but it is easily distinguised from it by its nearly glabrous leaves; common to both forms are the obtuse teeth of the leaves and bracts. The same form has been described in 1870 by E. Rostrup (Færôernes Flora, p. 48) as E. gracilis, f. atropurpurea Rostr., which consequently is the name to be used. I have seen Rostrup’s speci- mens (from Hestö) and found them almost identical with Beeby’s specimens of E. foulaënsis. The synonymy of the form is then as follows: E. minima Jacq., f. atropurpurea (Rostr. sub E. gracili); E. minima, f. purpurascens Wettst., Monographie, p. 159; E. Foulaénsis Towns. ap. Wettstein, 1. c. p. 139; Townsend, Journ. of Botany, 1897, p. 422; E. atropurpurea (Rostr.) Ostenfeld, Bot. Feerées, I, p. 55; E. gracilis Fr., f. atropurpurea Rostrup, Faeröernes Flora, Bot. Tids., IV, 1870, p. 48. E. gracilis Fr. is distinguished from it by its slender, erect, often 847 branched stem, longer internodes, small and quite glabrous leaves, rather short and small capsule and dark-coloured stem and leaves. 70. Pedicularis palustris L. 71. Veronica alpina L. Kunö: not rare at high levels, f. i. Nakken (R. R.). 72. V. beccabunga L. + V. hederifolia L. 73. V. fruticans Crantz; V. saxatilis Scop. A very interesting discovery for the flora. Kalsö: Mountain north of Husum, ab. 500 M. (E. T.). 74. V. officinalis L., and f. glabrata Fristedt. 75. V. serpyllifolia L. As mentioned in my list (l.c. p.57) there occurs in the hills a variety: var. borealis Læstad., which is easily distinguised from the main species by its denser clothing of the short raceme, lower growth and bright-blue corollas. The clothing consists of a pubescense of short crisped hairs, among which longer patent hairs, partly glan- dular, especially in the flower-stalks, occur. L. M. Neuman (Sveriges Flora, 1901, p. 132) considers this form as a separate species, viz. V. borealis (Læstad.) Neuman, and I should think he is right in so doing. It is probably identical with V. humifusa Dickson. Besides from the Ferées, where this form is rather common in the hills, I have seen specimens from Lapland (collected by Le- stadius), from the Alps, the Apennines and the higher mountains of North America (especially in British Columbia). It seems therefore to have a wide range of distribution. Fam. XVI. VACCINIACEAE. 76. Vaccinium myrtillus L., and f. pygmaea Ostf. 77. V. uliginosum L., and f. microphylla (Lge.). 78. V. vitis idaea L. Str.: Between Leinum and Kvalvig, fruiting in Aug. 1900 (accord. to E. T.). B. Choripetalae. Fam. XVII. CALLITRICHACEAE. 79. Callitriche autumnalis L. 80. C. hamulata Kitz. In my preliminary list (Botan. Tids., vol. 22, 1898, p. 140) I have reported C. pedunculata D.C. from the Færåes, while in my list in Bot. Færåes, vol. I (p. 59) I have altered it to C. hamulata. I now 848 think that both opinions are correct, as I take C. pedunculata as merely a variety of C. hamulata, distinguished by its stalked fruits. Such a form: C. hamulata Kutz., f. pedunculata (D. C. pro sp.) has been found in Strömö (Miavevatn). 81. C. stagnalis Scop. Fam. XVIII. CARYOPHYLLACEAE. + Agrostemma githago L. 82. Alsine verna Bart., var. hirta (Wormskj.) Lge. 83. Cerastium Edmondstonii (Watson) Murb. & Ostf. Cerastium alpinum has been recorded from Fuglö in my list (l. c. p. 60), but on closer examination I find it to be only a male form of C. Edmondstonü, which elsewhere always occurs as a her- maphrodite. The male specimens from Fuglö differ from the type in the more branched inflorescence and the whole shape of the tufts, but the broad sepals and the narrowness of the white mem- branous margins of the bracts point decidely to C. Edmondstonü. With regard to the name of this species S. Murbeck (Bota- niska Notiser, 1898, p. 246) and I myself (l. c. p. 60) have pointed out that the oldest name must be C. latifolium, 5, Edmondstonü Watson, London Botan. Soc. Catalogue of British Plants, 1844. The species name C. arcticum given by Joh. Lange, Flora Danica, fase. 50, p. 7, 1880, to forms of this neighbourhood, can not be retained for two reasons: 1° it is much later than Watson’s name. 2° Lange himself has mixed two distinct species together, as his description and the drawings in the plate are based upon partly C. Edmond- stonii from East-Iceland, partly C. alpinum from Greenland (a con- densed dwarf form). From this it will be evident, that the name C.arcticum in all cases should be omitted. 84. C. glomeratum Thuill. 85. C. tetrandrum Curtis, and var. zetlandicum Murb. 86. C. trigynum Vill. 87. C. vulgare Hartm., mostly var. alpestre (Lindbl.). 88. Honckenya peploides (L.) Ehrh., and var. major Rostr. 89. Lychnis flos cuculi L. 90. Melandrium rubrum (Weig.) Garcke. Myggenæs (accord. to G. P.); Vaagö: Midvaag, rock-ledge on the fowling cliffs (accord. to G. P.). 91. Sagina nivalis @Lindbl.) Fr. 92. S. procumbens L. 849 S. procumbens L. x subulata (Sw.) Prsl. Str.: bare, gravelly, damp places between Thorshavn and Höjvig ' 1903); Syd.: Frodeby (E. Rostrup & C. A. Feilberg, 1867). Probably not rare. 93. S. subulata (Sw.) Prsl. 94. Silene acaulis L. 95. Spergula arvensis L. An examination of the Færoese specimens with mature fruits showed, that they all belong to S. sativa Boenn. The localities of the examined individuals are: Str.: Thorsvig (J. Hartz & C. H. Ostenfeld, 1897), Thorshavn (E. Rostrup & Feilberg, 1867, C. H. Ostenfeld, 1903); Ost.: Ejde (E.T.). 96. Stellaria media (L.) Cyril. As an unusual locality the following is worthy of notice: Vid.: Vil- lingedalsfjæld, in a hole under a hammer, ab. 400 M. (E. T.). 97. S. uliginosa Murr. Fam. XIX. CHENOPODIACEAE. 98. Atriplex Babingtonii Woods. Mr. O. Paulsen has examined all the specimens of Atriplex collected in the Ferées, and he supposes, that all belong to A. Babingtonu. As his determinations are deciding with regard to all fruiting individuals, I think it better to omit the two other species from the flora, viz. A. hastata and A. patula, at least until further researches alter the question. The species is common on the coasts; specimens with fruits have been collected as follows: Bordö: Bordövig (J. Hartz & C. H. Ostenfeld, 1897); Str.: Sande- geerde (E. Rostrup & C. A. Feilberg, 1867), Thorshavn (J. Hartz & C. H. Osten- feld, 1897; O. Paulsen, 1903). Thorsvig (J. Hartz & C. H. Ostenfeld, 1897); Syd.: Trangisvaag (E. Rostrup & C.A. Feilberg, 1867), between Trangis- vaag and Tværaa (C. H. Ostenfeld, 1895); Vaagö: Sörvaag (E. Rostrup & C. A. Feilberg), Midvaag (J. Hartz & C. H. Ostenfeld, 1897). 7 Chenopodium album L. Fam. XX. CORNACEAE. 99. Cornus suecica L. Fam. XXI. CRASSULACEAE. 100. Sedum rhodiola D. C. 101. S. villosum L. 850 Fam. XXII. CRUCIFERAE. Arabis alpina L. As stated in my list (I. c. p.66) Trevelyan records it from the hills of Kunö, but as this island lately has been much investigated by Miss E. Taylor and Mr. R. Rasmussen without refinding the Arabis, I doubt the statement of Trevelyan. 102. Arabis petraea (L.) Lam. + Brassica campestris L. y+ B. napus L. T B. nigra (L.) Koch. 103. Cakile maritima Scop., var. latifolia (Poir.) 104. Capsella bursa pastoris (L.) Moench. 105. Cardamine hirsuta L., both var. campestris Fr. and var. silvatica (Lk.). 106. C. pratensis L. 107. Cochlearia officinalis L., coll. As pointed out in my list (1. c. p. 67) the Cochlearias of the Feer- öes are very varying, but I had not succeeded in discovering dis- cernible limits. During 2—3 years I have had several Cochlearias under cultivation in the Botanical Garden of Copenhagen and among them some raised from seeds collected in the Faeröes. The results were, that many distinct forms occur, which keep their special characters from generation to generation, but it seems very difficult, if possible, to express these distinctions verbally. Consequently my opinion is, that at present we are not able to distinguish the elementary spe- cies of Cochlearia, but must retain the old collective name C. offici- nalis. I do not doubt, that many forms will be segregated in fu- ture, and I think the English and Scottish botanists are on the right way, when separating C. alpina H. C. Watson, C. micacea Marshall and C. groenlandica »L.« from the common C. officinalis »L.« I have compared authentic specimens of C. micacea Marshall (see Journ. of Botany, vol. XXXII, 1894, p. 289, pl. 345, 346; cfr. Journ. of Botany, XXX, 1892, p. 225, pl. 326 A) with Færôese specimens grown in bare gravelly places in the hills, and I have found them quite like; but on the other hand there are specimens which do not match any of the above mentioned »species« in their typical shape, but are intermediate-looking. 108. Draba hirta L., f. rupestris (R. Br.). 109. D. incana L. + Raphanus raphanistrum L. 851 + Sinapis alba L. f S. arvensis L. 110. Subularia aquatica L. As the localities in my list (l. c. p. 67) through a fault in the printing are incomplete, I give them all here again: Sando: lake between Skopen and Sand; Str.: Leinumvatn and Miavevatn, lake on Vardebakken, at ab. 300 M.; Havnedal, a little pool at ab. 200 M.; Ost.: Kornvatn near Nees, at ab. 100 M.; Toftevatn. Fam. XXIII. DROSERACEAE. 111. Drosera rotundifolia L. Fam. XXIV. EMPETRACEAE. 112. Empetrum nigrum L. Fam. XXV. GERANIACEAE. + Geranium molle L. 113. G. silvaticum L. Fam. XXVI. HALORAGIDACEAE. 114. Myriophyllum alterniflorum D.C. Fam. XXVII. HYPERICACEAE. 115. Hypericum pulchrum L., f. procumbens Rostr. 116. H. quadrangulum L. Str.: near Höjvig (Th. Mikkelsen); Vaagö: refound on the old lo- cality at Sörvaag (E.T., 1906). Fam. XXVIII. LINACEAE. 117. Linum catharticum L. Fam. XXIX. OENOTHERACEAE. 118. Chamaenerium angustifolium (L.) Scop. Bordö: Fagralid, rock-ledge, sparingly and not producing any flower during the last five years (accord. to R. R., 1901—05); Kalsö: Husum, ravine, flowering (accord. to R.R.). 119. Epilobium alsinifolium Vill. 120. E. anagallidifolium Lam. E. anagallidifolium Lam. X palustre L. 121. E. lactiflorum Hausskn. 122. E. montanum L. 123. E. palustre L. Botany of the Fzerées, 55 852 Fam. XXX. OXALIDACEAE. 124. Oxalis acetosella L. Recorded from the Ferées by Trevelyan, but not refound until Mr. R. Rasmussen in 1904 discovered it on Kunö. He has later found it in several places with flowers and fruits; he writes to me: »Oxalis occurs everywhere in the ravines and talus of débris from Nakken (the northern cape) to Skardsgjov, but only in the eastern half of the island«. Fam. XXXI. PAPAVERACEAE. 125. Papaver radicatum Rottb. Kuno: on the hill-plateau at the southern end of the island (J. Hartz & C. H. Ostenfeld); everywhere in the hills of the eastern half of the is- land (accord. to R. R.). Fam. XXXII. PAPILIONACEAE. 126. Lathyrus pratensis L. Myggenes, and Vaagö: Midvaag (accord. to G.P.). 127. Lotus corniculatus L., f. carnosa (Pers.). Kuno: Skard, and Kalsö: Husum (accord. to R. R.). T Pisum sativum L. + Trifolium hybridum L. y+ T. pratense L. + T. procumbens L. 8. T. repens L. 129. Vicia cracca L. Bordo: Fagralid, in a ravine (accord. to R.R.); Str.: Kirkebö, on two spots in the outfields (accord. to G. P.); Vid.: Viderejde, in the en- closed field (E. T.). Fam. XXXIII. POLYGALACEAE. 130. Polygala serpyllacea Weihe. 131. P. vulgaris L., var. Ballii (Nyman) Ostf. Fam. XXXIV. POLYGONACEAE. 132. Koenigia islandica L. 133. Oxyria digyna (L.) Campd. 134. Polygonum amphibium L. 135. P. aviculare L. + P. convolvulus L. 136. P. viviparum L. 137. Rumex acetosa L. 853 + R. acetosella L. 7 R. crispus L. 138. R. domesticus Hartm. R. domesticus Hartm. X obtusifolius L. 139. R. obtusifolius L., f. agrestis Fr. Fam. XXXV. PORTULACACEAE. 140. Montia lamprosperma Cham.; Syn. M. rivularis auctt.,non Gmel. In my list (l. c. p. 73) I have mentioned, that all the Montias from the Ferées belong to the form with finely netted and shiny seeds, and that this form is more northern than M. minor Gmel. I have followed most of the botanists in naming this form »Montia rivularis Gmel.«, but this name is not correct according to the opi- nion of H. Lindberg. He has pointed out (Medd. af Soc. pro Fauna et Flora Fenn., vol. 27, 1901, pp. 18—21), that the differences between the two species described by G. C. Gmelin in his Flora Badensis (1806) are based only upon the vegetative parts of the plants, and the characters taken from the testa of the seeds are not at all mentioned. Upon this last character Ad. de Chamisso has first laid emphasis, when he in Linneea (1831, p. 565) described his new species M. lamprosperma; this author says, that the seeds of M. minor and M. rivularis have just the like structure, and places his new species as a contrast to them. This view is after H. Lind- berg — with the opinion of whom I agree — the correct one, and consequently the Montia which occurs in Greenland, Iceland, the Feerées , Scandinavia etc. must bear the name M. lamprosperma Cham. It consists of a smaller (annual?) form — the typical — and a larger perennial water-form: var. boreo-rivularis Lindb. fil., both found in the Faeröes!. Fam. XXXVI. RANUNCULACEAE. 141. Caltha palustris L., and var. radicans (Forst.). 142. Ranunculus acer L., and f. pumila (Whbg.). This species varies very much after its much varying habitats. In luxuriant rock-ledges a tall and robust form with the stem pa- tently stiff-hairy beneath (f. velutina Lindbl.) is met with. In bare gravelly places in the hills the f. pumila Whbg. is the substitute. This last form is — after the description — probably the same as 1 The more southern species, M. minor Gmel., with smaller, tuberculate-netted, somewhat opaque seed-testa has a parallel development, the water form of which must be named M. minor Gmel., var. rivularis (Gmel.) Lindb. fil. 55* 854 R. icelandicus (should be R. islandicus) published by Davis (Minne- sota Botan. Studies, IV, 1900 p. 472, Native and cultivated Ranun- culi of North America and segregated genera) upon specimens col- lected by Miss E. Taylor in Seydisfjord in East-Iceland (which does not belong to North America!). 143. R. auricomus L. Recorded from the Ferées by Trevelyan and rediscovered by Mr. G. Patursson in 1904. Str.: Kirkebö, the lowest ledge of the hill above Kirkebö. + R. ficaria L. The Rev. J. Landt mentions this species from Kirkebö (Str.), and Mr. G. Patursson has seent me pretty and large specimens taken April 10., 1904 in full flower. It occurs on the churchyard and around the ruins of the cathedral; without doubt it has been introduced in former times. 144. R. flammula L. My form speciosa (l. ec. p. 74) resembles in many respects the Scottish species R. scoticus Marshall (= R. petiolaris (Lange) Marshall, Journ. Botany, XXX, 1892, p. 289, pl. 328), but differs in the more numerous, larger and broader petals a. o. 145. R. glacialis L. 146. R. repens L. 147. R. reptans L. I should prefer to take this as a distinct species and not as a form of R. flammula, as I have done in my list (I. €. p. 74). 148. Thalictrum alpinum L. Fam. XXXVII. ROSACEAE. 149. Alchimilla acutidens Buser; Syn. A. Wichurae Buser. 150. A. alpina L. 151. A. faeroénsis (Lange) Buser. In J. Dörfler’s Herbarium normale, Cent. XLVII, Nr. 4654, Ice- landic specimens of this interesting species have just (Dec. 1906) been distributed, and the well-known authority in Alchimilla Mr. R. Buser of Geneva has thereof taken the opportunity of giving a rather exhaustive list of citations concerning the form in question. He is of the opinion, that it is a subspecies of A. splendens Christ, to which it is very near-allied, but its quite peculiar geographical distribution removes it so much from the alpine A. splendens and its different races, that it deserves — after my opinion — specific rank. 855 152. A. filicaulis Buser, with var. denudala Buser and var. ve- slila Buser. The var. denudata has been found on Vid.: Villingedalsfjæld, ab. 500 M. (E.T.). 153. Dryas octopetala L. Kunö: Gjovadal near Skard (R. R.); Vid.: Mornefjæld (accord. to E.T.). 154. Geum rivale L. Str.: Ravnabjörgini south ofKirkebö and rock-ledge near Kirkebö (G.P.). 155. Potentilla anserina L. 156. P. erecta (L.) Dalla Torre. 157. P. palustris (L.) Scop. Rediscovered in its old locality given by Mohr on Vaagö: Gaase- dal (E.T.). 158. P. verna L.; P. maculata Pourr. 159. Rosa mollis Sm. 160. Rubus saxatilis L. 161. Sibbaldia procumbens L. 162. Spiraea ulmaria L. Fam. XXXVIII. SALICACEAE. 163. Salix glauca L. Kunö: Skard (accord. to R.R.; the locality is perhaps the same as »Hills on the south side from about 250 m.«); Vid.: Ormedalen (E. T.). 164. S. herbacea L. 165. S. phylicifolia L. Fam. XXXIX. SAXIFRAGACEAE. 166. Saxifraga caespitosa L.; S. decipiens Ehrh. 167. S. hypnoides L. 168. S. nivalis L., and var. tenuis Whbg. 169. S. oppositifolia L. 170. S. rivularis L. 171. S. stellaris L. Fam. XL. UMBELLIFERAE. + Aegopodium podagraria L. Str.: The churchyard and gardens in Kirkebö (G. P.); gardens in Velbestad (accord. to G. P.); a plantation in Thorshayn (!). 172. Angelica silvestris L. 173. Archangelica officinalis Hoffm. 174. Haloscias scoticum (L.) Fr. Sandö: Troldhoved (accord. to G. P.). 856 Fam. XLI. URTICACEAE. 175. Urtica dioica L. y+ U. urens L. Fam. XLII. VIOLACEAE. Mr. W. Becker of Hedersleben (Germany) has examined the material of Viole from the Fzeröes and has kindly sent me the following notes. 176. Viola palustris L. 177. V. silvestris (Lam.) Rehb., var. nov. rotundato-crenata Becker; Syn. V. Riviniana Ostenfeld, Bot. Faeröes, I, p.80, non Rchb. Folia plerumque rotundato-cordata, subacuminata, rotundato-crenata. Mr. Becker means that the Færoese form of the Silvatica-group does not exactely match V. silvestris, var. Riviniana, but represents an intermediate stage between V. silvestris, typica and var. Riviniana. From his letter I quote: »it is especially noteworth with regard to the inferior systematical rank of the V. Riviniana, that there occur in islands forms which come more or less near to V. Riviniana or may be identical with it and at the same time show the characters of the true V. silvestris. « 178. V. tricolor L., subsp. nov. faeroénsis Becker. Folia ovato-rotundata, plane crenata, ad apicem obtusissima, par- tim subemarginata, ad basim in petiolum breviorem abrupte vel sub- abrupte angustata. Stipulae lyrato-incisae, lacinia terminalis lata ob- tusa, laciniae laterales breves oblongae, obtusiusculae, introrsum 1—2, extrorsum 3—4. Sepala late lanceolata. i To this description Mr. Becker add the following note: »The form in question is characterized by the broad-ovate leaves and by the stipules pinnatifid to a smaller degree than the main form (coming near to the stipules of Viola cornuta)«. In my list (1. c. p. 80) I had named the form »V. tricolor L. subsp. genuina Wittr., forma« and had mentioned, that it is perennial. I should now like to name it: V. tricolor L., subsp. genuina Wittr., var. faeroénsis (Becker), as it without doubt belongs to the subspecies genuina in Wittrock’s sense. All the specimens from the Ferées are of this form. It is found in the southern part of Str. (Kirkebö and Velbestad) and on Sando (Sand, and other places according to Dr. Knud Poulsen), and it occurs always around the houses and in the enclosed fields. II. Monocotyledones. Fam. XLIII. COLCHICACEAE. 179. Narthecium ossifragum (L.) Huds. 180. Tofieldia palustris Huds. New to the faeroese flora. Bordö: Mountain between Kvannesund and Klaksvig (E. T., 1903). Fam. XLIV. CYPERACEAE. 181. Carex atrata L. 182. C. binervis L. C. caespitosa L. X Goodenoughti Gay should be omitted, see under C. Goodenoughü. 183. C. dioica L. 184. C. echinata Murr.; C. stellulata Good. 185. C. flacca Schreb.; C. glauca Scop. C. flacca Schreb. X Goodenoughiü Gay. The Rev. G. Kükenthal has examined the specimens, which Mr. C. Raunkizr determined as the just mentioned new hybrid, and he does not believe in the hybrid nature of them. He writes: Nil nisi forma spiculis abbreviatis Caricis Goodenoughii Gay. 186. C. flava L. C. flava L. X fulva Good. 187. C. fulva Good.; C. Hornschuchiana Hoppe. 188. C. Goodenoughii Gay. The specimens which in my list (l. c. p. 81) are named C. cae- spitosa X Goodenoughi do not belong to this hybrid. It would a priort also have been curious, if a hybrid should occur in a country where one of the parent species, at least at present, has not been found. The form in question must be referred to var. juncella Fries, characterized by its densely tufted growth and the very narrow long leaves. I have in 1903 reexamined its only known locality in the Ferées, viz.: Syd.: near Tværaa, boggy place in the enclosed field (!). C. Goodenoughii Gay X rigida Good. 189. C. incurva Lightf. 190. C. leporina L. 191. C. Lyngbyei Hornem.; Syn. C. cryptocarpa C. A. Mey. 858 The name C. Lyngbyei is older than €. cryptocarpa, and as it has been published by Hornemann just on specimens from the Færôes (collected by H. C. Lyngbye), I feel it necessary in a list of Froese plants to prefer it. The type-specimens, which have been pictured in Flora Danica, tab. 1888, are in the herbarium of the Botanical Museum of Copenhagen. C. Lyngbyei Hornem. X rigida Good., f. sub-Lyngbyei G. Kükenthal. In a salt-marsh at the head of Trangisvaagfjord on Syd. I found in 1897 a curious robust Carex-form growing among (. Lyng- byei, C. Goodenoughü and C. salina, subsp. kattegatensis. I took it at first as a hybrid between the two first named species, but could later not find a satisfying determination of it. Now the Rev. G. Kükenthal has examined it and given it the name placed above, remarking at follows: »multo magis ad C. Lyngbyei acce- dens quam C. haematolepis Drej.!, sed praeter spiculis erectis squa- mae latae basi involventes uninervae culmusque rigidus C. rigidam indicant.« The specimens are tall and robust, of about the same shape as C. Lyngbyei; the leafy shoots bear long and broad leaves, higher than the flowering shoots. 1—2 male spikes with brown, obtuse scales, 2—3 short-cylindrical or ovoid, erect female spikes; the lower one short-stalked, with a leafy bract, as long as or longer than the short upper ones, which often are male at the top. The female scales are dark-brown or blackish with pale midvein ovate, subacute, about as long and broad as the perigynium. 192. C. panicea L. 193. ©. pilulifera L. 194. C. pulicaris L. 195. C. pulla Good.; C. saxatilis auctt. Kuno: above Kuno village, c. 400 M. (R. R.). 196. C. rigida Good. 197. C. salina Whbg., subsp. kattegalensis Fr. Str.: Saltmarsh at Selletræ (J. Hartz & C. H. Ostenfeld), a somewhat divergent form, which nevertheless also by the Rev. G. Kükenthal is referred to the form here given. 198. Eriophorum polystachyum L. 199. E. vaginatum L. 200. Heleocharis multicaulis Sm. *In my Flora Arctica, I, 1902 (p. 76) I have showed, that C. haematolopis Drej. according to the authentic specimens is a hybrid between C. Lyngbyei and C. rigida. 201. 859 H. palustris (L.) R. Br. Mr. H. Lindberg of Helsingfors has examined the specimens from the Faröes and has testified, that all are: Scirpus palustris L., subsp. eupalustris Lindb. fil. 202. 203. H. uniglumis Lk. Scirpus caespitosus L. All the specimens from the Faeröes belong to var. germanica (Palla), but are somewhat merging into var. austriaca (Palla). Mr. E. Broddesson of Lund (Sweden), who has examined our speci- mens has labelled most of them »Scirpus germanicus Palla, ad austriacum Palla vergens.« and Str: 204. 205. 206. 207. 208. 209. 210. S. pauciflorus Lightf. Fam. XLV. GRAMINEAE. Agropyrum junceum (L.) P. B. A. junceum (L.) P. B. X repens (L.) P. B. A. repens (L.) P. B. Agrostis canina L. A. canina L. X vulgaris With. A. stolonifera L.; A. alba L. A. vulgaris With. Aira alpina L., vivipara. I think it is better to keep this form distinct from A. caespitosa not take it as merely a viviparous form of it. 211. 212. 213. A. caespitosa L., var. brevifolia Hartm. A. flexuosa L. Airopsis praecox (L.) Fr. Myggenes (accord. to G. P.); Nolsö (E. Rostrup & C.A. Feilberg); Kirkebö (G. P.); Syderdal (!). Alopecurus geniculatus L. A. pratensis L. Anthoxanthum odoratum L. Apera spica venti (L.) P. B. Avena sativa L. A. strigosa Schreb. Briza media L. Bromus mollis L. Catabrosa aquatica (L.) P. B. Dactylis glomerata L. Digraphis arundinacea (L.) Trin. 860 218. Elymus arenarius L. 219. Festuca ovina L., vivipara. f F. pratensis Huds. 220. F. rubra L., and f. arenaria Osbeck. The large, broad-leaved form which I in my list have named var. planifolia Trautv., is according to Mr. R. Rasmussen common in the cliffs inhabited by sea-fowls. I do not know whether the variety name is correct or not, but the form is a very remarkable one. 221. Glyceria distans (L.) Whbg. 222. G. fluitans (L.) R. Br. 223. G. maritima (Huds.) Whbg. Syd.: On the west-coast opposite Lopra, ab. 125 M. supra mare (Ove Paulsen). 224. Holcus lanatus L. 225. H. mollis L. 7 Hordeum vulgare L. + Lolium multiflorum Lam. y+ L. perenne L. Öst.: Ejde (sown with seeds from England, but nearly superseded by other grasses«, 22. Aug., 1817, H. C. Lyngbye). 226. Molinia coerulea (L.) Moench. 227. Nardus stricta L. T Phleum pratense L. 8 228. Phragmites communis Trin. 229. Poa alpina L., vivipara. 230. P. annua L. 231. P. glauca M. Vahl. 232. P. nemoralis L., f. glaucantha Gaud. 233. P. pratensis L., f. humilis Ehrh. 234. P. trivialis L. In my list (1. c. p. 90) I have described a f. pallida, but this name must fall, as f. pallescens Stebler & Volkart, 1895 is earlier. 235. Psamma arenaria (L.) R. & S. 236. Sieglingia decumbens (L.) Bernh. {+ Triticum vulgare Vill. Fam. XLVI. IRIDACEAE. 237. Iris pseudacorus L. Fam. XLVII. JUNCACEAE. 238. Juncus balticus Willd. 861 239. J. biglumis L. Str.: Kirkebörejn, ab. 350 M. (!). . bufonius L. . conglomeratus L. . effusus L. . lampocarpus Ehrh. . obtusiflorus Ehrh. . squarrosus L. . supinus Moench. . trifidus L. 248. J. triglumis L. 249. Luzula arcuata (Whbg.) Sw. 250. L. campestris (L.) D.C. L. multiflora (Ehrh.) Lej. 252. L. silvatica (Huds.) Gaud. L. spicata (L.) D.C. Fam. XLVIII. JUNCAGINACEAE. 254. Triglochin palustre L. Fam. XLIX. LILIACEAE. 255. Scilla verna Huds. Mr. G. Patursson writes, that according to a communication from Mr. Skaalum of Thorshavn this pretty little plant grows in several places on Nolso and Sando. Fam. L. ORCHIDACEAE. 256. Habenaria albida (L.) R. Br. Str.: Ravnabjorgini near Kirkebö (G. P.); Vid.: rock-ledge on Morne- fjeeld, ab. 400 M. (E. T.). 257. H. viridis (L.) R. Br.; Coeloglossum Hartm. Kalsö: Mountain near Husum (E.T.); Vid: Malinsfjæld, ab. 400 M.(E.T.). 258. Listera cordata (L.) R. Br. Bordö: Fagralid (R. R.), flowering in May—June, fruiting in August; Vid.: Malinsfjæld, slope ab. 2—300 M. flowering (E. T.). 259. Malaxis paludosa (L.) Sw. 260. Orchis latifolius L. Myggenes: »Lundelandet« (accord. to E. T.); Str.: Velbestad (ac- cord. to G. P.). 261. O. maculatus L. 262. O. masculus L. Str.: Between Velbestad and Kirkebö, and Ravnabjorgini near Kirkebö (G. P.). Do > HA Te SEE 862 Fam. LI. POTAMOGETONACEAE. 263. Potamogeton alpinus Balb. 264. P, filiformis Pers. 265. P. gramineus L. P. gramineus L. X perfoliatus L. 266. P. natans L. 267. P. perfoliatus L. 268. P. polygonifolius Pourr. 269. P. praelongus Wulf. 270. P. pusillus L. 2 1. Ruppia maritima L., f. rostellata (Koch). 2. Zostera marina L. Fam. LIL. SPARGANIACEAE. 273. Sparganium affine Schnizl. III. Gymnospermae. Fam. LIII. PINACEAE. 274. Juniperus communis L., f. nana (Willd.). IV. Pteridophyta. Fam. LIV. EQUISETACEAE. 275. Equisetum arvense L. Specimens referable to f. pseudosilvalica Milde have been found on Slope at Sandegærde near Thorshavn (!). 276. E. heleocharis Ehrh., f. limosa (L.). Str.: Kirkebö (G. P.); Ost.: Lervig, in ditches (R. R.). 277. E. palustre L. 278. E. pratense Ehrh. Kunö: near the village (accord. to R.R.); Str.: Kirkebö (G. P.). 279. E. silvaticum L. Fam. LV. HYMENOPHYLLACEAE. 280. Hymenophyllum peltatum (Poir.) Desv. Fam. LVI. ISOETACEAE. 281. Isoétes echinosporum Dur. 282. 1. lacustre L. 863 Fam. LVli. LYCOPODIACEAE. 283. Lycopodium alpinum L. 284. L. annotinum L. 285. L. selago L. Fam. LVIII. OPHIOGLOSSACEAE. 286. Botrychium lunaria (L.) Sw. Fam. LIX. POLYPODIACEAE. 287. Aspidium dryopteris (L.) Baumg. Str.: Kirkebörejn, rock-ledge sloping towards Arge (!). 288. A. filix mas (L.) Sw. 289. A. lonchitis (L.) Sw. Vid.: Rock-ledge on Mornefjæld, ab. 300 M. (accord. to E. T.). 290. A. phegopteris (L.) Baumg. 291. A. spinulosum (Müll.) Sw., subsp. dilatatum (Hoffm.) Sw. 292. Asplenum adiantum nigrum L. 293. A. trichomanes L. 294. Athyrium filix foemina (L.) Roth. 295. Blechnum spicant (L.) With. 296. Cystopteris fragilis (L.) Bernh. 297. Polypodium vulgare L. Fam. LX. SELAGINELLACEAE. 298. Selaginella selaginoides (L.) Link. Separate copies issued Nov. 1st, 1907. Botany of the Fieröes, vol. Ill. Arbejder fra den Botaniske Have i Kebenhavn. Nr. 38. List of the Andreaeales and Bryales found in East-Greenland between 74°15' and 65° 35° lat. N. in the years 1898—1902. By Charter Au ait esse 1bo. Reprinted from ,MEDDELELSER OM GRÖNLAND“ Vol. XXX. Se — LIBRARY NEW YORK NICAL 2DEN. Copenhagen. Printed by Bianco Luno. 1907. JAN 15 1909 The mosses mentioned in the following list were collected by C. Kruuse and N. Hartz during the following expeditions: Den danske Baadexpedition 1898—99. - — = 1900. Den danske Expedition 1901—02. The Sphagnales and Hepaticae collected at the same ex- peditions have been determinated by C. Jensen, who also had determinated some of the Bryales when I recieved the collections. Lists of the situation of the localities have been published by C. Jensen: List of the Hepaticae and Sphagnales found in East- Greenland, and C. Kruuse: List of Phanerogames and Vascular- Kryptogames appearing in the Angmagsalik District. (Medd. om Grønland vol. XXX, pag. 213—14 and 297—99). The mosses, which have not hitherto been found in Green- land have been marked with *. to w = 1. Polytrichum commune L. Kap Greg mixed up in tufts of Sphagnum Girgensohnii, and with Ceratodon purpureus and Hypnum aduncum (forma integerrima) (N. Hartz). Elvbakker, Tasiusak st.1); Amaka on the border of a pond among Spagnum riparium st. (Kruuse). 2. Polytrichum juniperinum Willd. Kuarmiut st.; Skeergaardshalveen st.; Skerasak st.; Hurry Inlet st.; Turner Sund in tufts of Sphaerocephalus palustris st.; Tasiusak st.; Krotodok st.; Narsik cfr.?) (Kruuse) Kap Borlase Warren st. among Ceratodon purpureus (Hartz). 3. Polytrichum strictum Banks. Ingmikertorajik cfr., partly mixed with Dicranum elongatwn; Ödesund st. among Dicranum fuscescens; Tasiusak cfr. among Sphaerocephalus turgidus and Dieranum elongatum; Sarfak with Sphagnum Warnstorffii st. Turner Sund efr. and d; Kap Dalton st.; Adloe Kap Dan st.; Depot © st.; Norsit &; Krotodok st. (Kruuse). Kap Borlase Warren st. (Hartz). 4. Polytrichum pilosum Neck. Nualik, Døde Hus Pynt @; Adloe cfr.; Tunok cfr.; Ryders Dal cfr.; Jærno 6; Kingorsuak on sandy flats st. (Kruuse). 5. Polytrichum sexangulare Flörcke. Turner Sund sparingly with Jungermannia ventricosa and J. quingvidentata cfr.; Misutok with Jungermannia alpestris st.; Kap Warming st.; Sabine Ø st.; Tasiusarsik in Angmagsalik Fjord with 1) st. = signifies sterile. 2) efr. = signifies fruiting. >17 Dieranum elongatum st.; Elvbakker, Tasiusak sparingly with Pohlia gracilis, Bartramia ityphylla and Anthelia julacea st. (Kruuse) Kap Dalton st. (N. Hartz). 6. Polytrichum alpinum L. Kap Greg, partly in tufts in a length of ce. 15 ctm., partiy mixed with Pohlia nutans st.; Kap Brewster st. (Hartz); Ryders Dal st.; Anava, partly cfr.; Nualik, Dede Hus Pynt, more samples, partly efr.; Eskimo © cfr.; Kunak Ø st.; Utorkarmiut st.; Depot Ø st.; Kingorsuak, the westside st.; Elvbakker, Tasiusak in Koloni- bekken cfr.; Krotodok, Tasiusak st.; Falkefjord st.; Midtpynt near Kangerdlugsuatsiak st. var. septemtrionalis (Sw.). Sondre Aputitek st.; Tasiusak cfr. (Kruuse). 7. Polytrichum urnigerum L. Kingorsuak, the westside, mixed up in tufts of Hylocomium proliferum, Dicranum scoparium and Sphaerocephalus turgidus st.; Kap Hillebrand st. (Kruuse). *S. Schistophyllum osmundioides (Sw.) La Pyl. var. microcurpus Br. eur. Nordostbugt in bogs with Meesea trichoides $ minor, Swartzia montana, Blepharostoma trichophyllum and other mosses st. (Hartz). 9. Astrophyllum hymenophylloides (Hüb.) Lindb. Sabine © st. (Kruuse); Fleming Inlet st. (Hartz). 10. Astrophyllum cinclidioides (Blytt.) Lindb. Falkefjord 2; Amaka near Kordlortok on the border of a pond st.; Tunok in archangelicetum st. (Kruuse). 11. Astrophyllum medium (Br. eur.) Lindb. var. arcticum C. Jensen. Nordostbugt in bogs st.; Kap Seaforth on mew-hillocks st. (Hartz). 318 12. Astrophyllum orthorrhynchum (Br. eur.) Lindb. Fleming Inlet, sparingly among other mosses st. (Hartz); Kap Dalton st. (Kruuse). 13. Timmia austriaca Hedw. Canning © st.; Sabine @ st. (Kruuse); Kap Dalton st. (Hartz). 14. Sphaerocephalus palustris (L.) Neck. Nordostbugt in bogst st.; Kap Seaforth on mew-hillocks st.; Kap Dalton st. (Hartz). Akiliarisek st.; Elvbakker st.: Ingmiker- torajik st.; Turner Sund, several samples st.; Henry @, 840 m. above the level of the sea st.; Midtpynt near Kangerdlugsuatsiak st.; Ryders Dal st. (Kruuse). 15. Sphaerocephalus turgidus (Wahlb.) Lindb. Kap Dalton, several samples st. (Hartz, Kruuse); Liverpool Kyst st.; Henry @, 840 m. above the level of the sea st.; Anava st.; Elvbakker st.; Krotodok st. (Kruuse); Nordostbugt in bogs st.; Jan Mayen st. (Hartz). 16. Paludella sqvarrosa (L.) Brid. Falkefjord st.; Amaka near Kordlortok on the border of a pond st.; Elvbakker st. (Kruuse); Nordostbugt in bogs st. (Hartz). 17. Meesea trichoides (L.) Spruce. var. minor (Brid.). Nordostbugt in bogs st. (Hartz); Ryders Dal st. (Kruuse), in both places sparingly mixed up in tufts of other bog mosses. 18. Philonotis fontana (L.) Brid. Ikerasausak in archangelicetum st.; Elvbakker, several samples st.; Ryders Dal ¢; Kangerdlugsuatsiak st.; Turner Sund st.; Ikatek 3; Amaka on the border of a pond st.; Tasiusak 9; Henry ® 840 m. above the level of the sea st.; Tasiusarsik in Angmag- salik Fjord st.; Jærn © st.; Sabine @ st.; Tunok st.; Ingmikertorajik st.; Kap Warming st. (C. Kruuse); Nordostbugt in bogs st.: Fleming Inlet st.; Kap Brown st.; Kap Borlase Warren st. (Hartz). 319 19. Philonotis caespitosa Wils. Tasiusak 4; Kap Wandel cfr. and å (Kruuse) (C. Jensen determ.). 20. Bartramia crispa Sw. Kap Dalton cfr. (Hartz); Elvbakker cfr.; Turner Sund cfr. (Kruuse). 21. Bartramia ityphylla Brid. Amaka, on the border of a pond cfr.; Elvbakker, in bogs st., and at Kolonibakken cfr.; Smalsund cfr.; Tasiusak cfr.; Lille @ st.; Kap Wandel cfr.; Adloe st.; Narsik cfr.; Krotodok cfr. (Kruuse). 22. Conostomum tetragonum (Vill.) Sw. Tunok cfr.; Vahls Fjord cfr.; Kingorsuak st.; Ikerasausak in the heath st.; Amaka st.; Tasiusak cfr.; Lille © st.; Nualik, Dade Hus Pynt st.; Turner Sund st. (Kruuse); Misutok efr. 25. Bryum capillare (L.). Kap Wandel st. (Kruuse). 24. Bryum elegans Nees. Utorkarmiut st. (Kruuse). 25. Bryum neodamense Itzigs. var. ovatum Jur. Lille © st.; Ryders Dal st.; Tasiusarsik st. (Kruuse). 26. Bryum ventricosum Dicks. Nordostbugt in bogs d; Kap Seaforth on mew-hilloks 9 (forma tenuis, brevifolia) (Hartz); Amaka on the border of a pond st. (var. duvalloides Itz.); Tunok st. (forma cavifolia); Elvbakker st. (Kruuse). 27. Bryum argenteum L. Falkefjord st. (Kruuse); Kap Greg st. (Hartz). 28. Bryum eirratum Horusch. Turner Sund cfr.; Ryders Dal cfr.; Ikerasausak in archangeli- cetum efr.; Kangerdluarsikajik cfr. (Kruuse); Kap Dalton efr. (Hartz). 320 29. Bryum obtusifolium Lindb. Kap Borlase Warren among Philonotis fontona st.; Kap Greg st. (Hartz); Sabine Ø st.; Turner Sund st. (Kruuse). 30. Bryum teres Lindb. Kap Borlase Warren st. (Hartz); Sierak st. (Kruuse). 31. Bryum purpurascens (R. Br.) Br. eur. Kingorsuak on sandy flats efr.; Ingmikertorajik Fugleholm efr. (Kruuse). 32. Bryum arcticum (R. Br.) Br. eur. Sabine @ efr. (Kruuse). 33. Bryum pendulum (Horusch) Sch. Kap Brewster cfr.; Kap Borlase Warren efr. (Hartz). var. compactum (Hornsch.) Sch. Kap Borlase Warren cfr. (Hartz). 34. Bryum archangelicum Br. eur. Turner Sund cfr.; Ryders Dal cfr. (Kruuse). 35. Bryum inelinatum (Sw.) Blandow. Ikerasausak in archangelicetum cfr.; Sierak cfr.; Tasiusak cfr. (Kruuse); Kap Dalton efr. (Hartz). 36. Plagiobryum Zierii (Dicks.) Lindb. Canning Ø st. (Kruuse). 37. Pohlia albicans (Wahlb.) Lindb. Tasiusak st.; Ingmikertorajik st.; Ikerasausak in archangelicetum st. (Kruuse). var. glacialis Schleich. Kap Tobias st.; Amaka on the border of a pond st.; Liverpool Kyst st.; Elvbakker st. (Kruuse). 38. Pohlia commutata (Schimp.) Lindb. Turner Sund: several sterile tufts, partly mixed with other mosses; Kangerdlugsuatsiak st.; Jern@ cfr.; Tasiusak st.; Tasiusarsik 321 in Angmagsalik Fjord st.; Ryders Dal st.; Smalsund 2; Nualik st. (Kruuse); Nordostbugt in bogs & and cfr.; Kap Brewster st. (Hartz). var. filum. Nualik st. under Snebræen; Misutok st.: Kingak Angmagsivik in heat st. (Kruuse); Kap Warming st. (Hartz). 39. Pohlia graeilis (Schleich.). Jameson Land st.; Kap Greg st. with Ceratodon purpureus; Nordostbugt in bogs st. among other mosses (Hartz); Elvbakker st.; Ingmikertorajik st. with Amblystegium aduncum, and in bogs; Tunok st.; Kingorsuak on sandy flats st.; Kap Dalton among other mosser st. and d; Sierak Dal on sandy flats st.; Bræfjord near Kap Wandel st.; Henry © 840 m. above the level of the sea st.; Fleming Inlet st.; Akiliarisek st.; Tasiusak st. in a rill (Kruuse). 40. Pohlia proligera Lindb. Depot © in an old tomb. 2; Turner Sund st. (Kruuse); Kap Greg st. (Hartz). 41. Pohlia nutans (Schreb.) Lindb. Turner Sund, several samples cfr.; Kap Warming cfr.; Nualik, Dede Hus, more samples, partly cfr.; Ingmikertorajik cfr. and Ing- mikertorajik Fugleholm cfr.; Nordre Skerasek cfr.; Sondre Aputitek efr.; Anava st.; Depot © st.; Tasiusak cfr.; Hurry Inlet cfr.; Kap Wandel cfr.; Adloe st.; Sabine Ø st. (Kruuse); Kap Greg efr. (Hartz); Sierak cfr. (Kruuse). *var. strangulata (Nees) Schimp. Lille © cfr. (Kruuse). var. sphagnetorum Schimp. Turner Sund cfr. in tufts of Sphaerocephalus palustris (Kruuse) ; Nordostbugt in bogs with Sphagnum (Hartz). 42. Pohlia rutilans (Br. eur.) Lindb. (C. Jensen det.). Anava cfr. (Kruuse). 43. Pohlia eueullata (Schwer.) Lindb. Elvbakker st. mixed with Polytrichum commune and Bartramia erispa; Tasiusak cfr.; Ingmikertorajik in large tufts cfr. (Kruuse). 322 44. Pohlia crassidens Kindb. Hurry Inlet, Ryders Dal st. (Kruuse). 45. Pohlia Ludwigii (Spreng.) Lindb. Kap Greg st. among Ceratodon purpureus (Hartz). 46. Pohlia eruda (L.) Lindb. Nordostbugt in bogs st.; Kap Borlase;Warren st.; Kap Brewster st. (Hartz); Elvbakker, more tufts, partly efr.; Kap Wandel st.; Bræfjord near Kap Wandel st.; Turner Sund st.; Kap Dalton cfr.; Sabine © st.; Nualik, Døde Hus Pynt st.; Henry @ 840 m. above the level of the sea st.; Depot @ st., more samples; Anava st.; Ingmikertorajik st.; Akiliarisek st.; Kap Brown st.; Midtpynt near Kangerdlugsuatsiak st.; Krotodok st.; Kakasuak near Kingorsuak st. in herby sloaps; Falkefjord st. (Kruuse). var. minus Sch. Nordostbugt in bogs st. (Hartz); Tasiusak in bogs with Comarum st. (Kruuse). 47. Leptobryum pyriforme (L.) Wills. Kap Borlase Warren cfr.; Kap Seaforth on new-hillocks among Sphaerocephalus palustris st. (Hartz); Ingmikertorajik Fugle- holm mixed with Tortula latifolia st. (Kruuse). *48. Tayloria serrata (Hedw.) Br. eur. var. pallida nov. var. Peristomium valde hygroscopicum, exsiccatum erecto-intrieatum, humidum valde spiraliformiter involutum, ad basin in dentes 32 fere hyalinas fissum. Sporæ glabro, 0'014—0'017 mm. Gemmule absunt. Kap Borlase Warren (Hartz). 49. Leersia spathulata (C. M.) Lindb. Sabine © cfr. (Kruuse); Jan Mayen cfr. among Stereodon re- volutus and Barbula rubella (Hartz). 50. Leersia affinis (Hedw.) Lindb. Fleming Inlet st. (Kruuse). dl. Tortula ruralis (L.) Ehrb. Kap Borlase Warren st. (Hartz); Falkefjord st.; Ryders Dal st.; Misutok st.; Eskimo © st.; Depot @ st.; Anava st.; Kap Brown 323 st.; Kap Dalton st.; Turner Sund st.; Elvbakker st.; Ingmikertorajik st.; Tasiusak st. (Kruuse). 52. Tortula norvegica (Web.-f.) Wahlenberg. Kap Borlase Warren st. (Hartz). 53. Tortula latifolia (Hedw.) Lindb. Kakasuak near Kingorsuak cfr.; Ingmikertorajik Fugleholm cfr.: Tasiusak efr.; Kap Warming st.; Nordre Skerasak st.; Elvbakker efr.; Utorkarmiut cfr.; Falkefjord cfr.; Ingmikertorajik cfr.; Kap Dalton cfr.; Hurry Inlet cfr. (var. encalyptratus (Lindb.)) (Kruuse). BP. muticus Brid. Depot Ø st.; Jern Ø st. (Kruuse). 54. Mollia tortuosa (L.) Schrank. Midtpynt near Kangerdiugsuatsiak st. (Kruuse). 55. Barbula rubella (Hofm.) Mittm. Kap Borlase Warren cfr.; Jan Mayen cfr. (Hartz). 56. Dieranum fuscescens Turn. Ingmikertorajik st.; Pynt i Ödesund st.; Jærn © st.; Misutok st.; Akiliarisek st. among Salix arctica (Kruuse). var. tenella C. Jensen. Elvbakker st.; Ikerasarmiut st. (Kruuse). *57. Dieranum montanum (Hedw.) C. Jensen det. Kunak @, a little sterile tuft (Kruuse). 58. Dicranum elongatum Schleich. Ingmikertorajik st. among Sphaerocephalus palustris, Poly- trichum strietum and Jungermannia minuta; Elvbakker st.; Amaka on the border of a pond st.; Tasiusak st.; Krotodok st. (Kruuse). 59. Dieranum congestum Brid. Pynt i @desund st.; Ryders Dal st.; Turner Sund st.; Henry Ø 840 m. above the level of the sea st.; Krotodok st. (Kruuse); Kap Borlase Warren st. (Hartz). 324 var. spadiceum (Zett.) CG. Jensen det. Krotodok st. (Kruuse). 60. Dicranum angustum Lindb. Nordostbugt in bogs sparingly in tufts of Amblystegium poly- gamum, Hypnum trichoides, Oncophorus Wahlenbergii and other mosses (Hartz). 61. Dicranum Bonjeani De Not. f. orthophylla. Adloe Kap Dan st. (Kruuse). 62. Dieranum scoparium (L.) Hedw. Midtpynt near Kangerdlugsuatsiak st.; Kingorsuak on the west- side st.; Ingmikertorajik Fugleholm st.; Kap Wandel st. (var. pa- Iudosum Sch. forma orthophylla); Misutok st. (forma brevifolia orthophylla); Krotodok st. (Kruuse); Ingmikertorajik st. (forma brevifolia orthophylla) (Kruuse). 63. Dieranum negleetum Jur. Turner Sund st. more samples; Ryders Dal st.; Elvbakker in bogs st. (Kruuse). 64. Dieranum Mühlenbeckii Br. eur. Ingmikertorajik st.; Ingmikertorajik Fugleholm st. among Di- cranum elongatum and Polytrichum strietum. Akiliarisek among Salix arctica st. (Kruuse). 65. Dieranum molle Wils. Amaka on river sides st.; Adloe st.; Elvbakker cfr.; @desund st.; Ikerasausak in the heath st.; Nordfjord near Tasiusak in bogs efr.; Krotodok st. 66. Dicranum Starckei W. M. Lille @ st.; Tasiusak st.; Amaka on river sides cfr.; Tasiusak Misutok with Seirpus caespitosus st. (Kruuse). 67. Dicranum Schisti (Gunn.). Nualik st.; Krotodok st.; Ødesund st. (Kruuse). 325 *68, Dieranoweissin eirrata (L.) Lindb. Ingmikertorajik cfr. (Kruuse). 69. Dieranowussia erispula (Hedw.) Lindb. Kap Dalton efr.; Fleming Inlet cfr. (Hartz); Sondre Aputitek st. (Kruuse). 70. Dieranoweissia compacta (Schleich) Schnup. I | Falkefjord cfr.; Ingmikertorajik Fugleholm cfr. (Kruuse). 71. Blindia acuta (Huds.) Br. eur. Sarfakajık st. (Kruuse). 72. Swartzia montana (Lam.) Ehrb. Kap Borlase Warren cfr. (forma brevifolia); Fleming Inlet st. (ex parte var. stricta); Nordostbugt in bogs cfr.; Kap Dalton st.; Jan Mayen st. (Hartz) Ryders Dal st.; Tasiusak (forma brevifoliu stricta); Turner Sund several samples, partly cfr.; Kangerdlug- suatsiak cfr.; Sabine © cfr.; Midtpynt near Kangerdlugsuatsiak cfr. (Kruuse). 73. Ditrichum flexicaule (Schleich.) Hampe. Nordostbugt in bogs st. (Hartz); Sabine © st.; Turner Sund st.; Ryders Dal st. (Kruuse). *74. Ditrichum zonatum (Brid.) Limpr. Kingorsuak on sandy flats st. (Kruuse). 75. Oncophorus Wahlenbergii Brid. Kap Dalton st.; Nordostbugt in bogs (forma elata, sqvarrosa c. fol. subdenticulata) st. (Hartz); Kingorsuak, the westside st. (Kruuse). 76. Oncophorus virens (Sw.) Brid. Falkefjord cfr. (Kruuse). 77. Oncophorus strumifer (Ehrb.) Brid. Krotodok cfr. (Kruuse). 326 78. Oncophorus polycarpon (Ehrh.) Brid. Canning Ø st.; Sarfak Pynt st. (Kruuse). 79. Oncophorus torquescens (Bruch.) Lindb. Krotodok cfr. 80. Ceratodon purpureus (L.) Brid. Kap Borlase Warren st.; Kap Greg (forma brevifolia viridis) st.; Jan Mayen st. (Hartz); Tunok st.; Ryders Dal efr.; Tasiusak st.; Adloe st.; Dunholm (f. brevifolia) st.; Kap Warming st.; Anava st.; Ikerasarmiut st.; Ingmikertorajik st. (f. brevifolia); Henry © 840 m. above the level of the sea st.; Lille © cfr.; Kap Dalton st.; Misutok st.; Isi in the Sermilik Fjord cfr.; Ingmikertorajik Fugleholm st. (Kruuse). Si. Dorcadion Killiasii (C. M.) Lindb. (C. Jensen det.). Kap Dalton cfr. (Kruuse). 82. Doreadion Blyttii (Schimp.) Lindb. Falkefjord cfr. (Kruuse). 83. Grimmia ericoides (Schrad.) Lindb. Adloe st. (Kruuse). var. epilosa H. Müll. Turner Sund st. (Kruuse). S4. Grimmia hypnoides (L.) Lindb. Elvbakker, in bogs st.; Amaka on the border of a pond st.; Lille © st.; Sun © st.; Kangerjiks © st.; Wahls Fjord st.; Odesund st.; Jærnø st.; Henry Ø st.; Falkefjord st.; Krotodok st. (Kruuse) ; Jan Mayen st.; Fleming Inlet st. (Hartz). 85. Grimmia fascicularis (Schrad.) C. M. Jærn Ö st.; Sarfakajik in herby sloaps with Carex pulla (forma atrata) st. 86. Grimmia alpestris Schleich. Nualik, Dede Hus Pynt cfr. (Kruuse). 327 87. Grimmia mollis Br. eur. Kap Warming st. (Kruuse). SS. Grimmia apocarpa (L.) Hedw. Canning © cfr. Kap Brown cfr. (Kruuse). 89. Grimmia gracilis Schleich. Jan Mayen cfr. (forma nigra) (Hartz). 90. Grimmia alpicola Sw. (C. Jensen det.). Falkefjord st. (Kruuse). *O1. Sekra minor (L.) Adans. (C. Jensen det). Amaka on the border of a pond mixed with Amblystegium pseudostramineum st. (Kruuse). 92. Andreaea petrophila Ehrh. Nualik, several tufts, partly cfr.; @desund st.; Kap Hillebrandt efr.; Jærn Öst.; Kap Warming st.; Lille © st.; Krotodok cfr.; Falke- fjord efr. (Kruuse). *93. Amblystegium Juratzkanum Sch. ? Kap Borlase Warren st., very sparingly mixed up in a tuft of Tayloria serrata var. pallida. The sample is too little for an exact determination. 94. Amblystegium protensum (Brid.) Lindb. Kap Wandel st. (Kruuse); Nordostbugt in bogs st. (Hartz). 95. Amblystegium stellatum (Schreb.) Lindb. Nordostbugt in bogs with Amblystegium Sendtneri, A. aduncum ete. st.; Kap Borlase Warren st. (Hartz). Hurry Inlet st.; Misutok with Seirpus caespitosa st. (Kruuse). 96. Amblystegium polygamum Br. eur. Nordostbugt in bogs with Hypnum trichoides, Oncophorus Wahlenbergii etc. st.; Kap Dalton st. (Hartz). 328 97. Amblystegium Sendtneri (Schimp.) Lindb. Nordostbugt in bogs with A. turgescens, A. revolvens, A. sar- mentosum ete. cfr. (Hartz). Ryders Dal (var. vulgaris Sanio) st. (Kruuse). 95. Amblystegium Cossoni (Schimp.) Lindb. Nordostbugt in bogs st. (Hartz). 99. Amblystegium revolvens (Sw.) De Not. Nordostbugt in bogs with other species of Amblystegium st. (Hartz). 100. Amblystegium vernicosum Lindb. Nordostbugt in bogs with jung capsules (Hartz). 101. Amblystegium aduneum (L.) Lindb. Ödesund st.; Kap Dan st.; Anava st.; Ingmikertorajik st.; Ingmikertorajik Fugleholm st.; Sten © st.; Depot © (f. viridis gra- eilis) st.; Kingorsuak cfr. (f. gracilis); Turner Sund, several samples st.; Kap Wandel st.; Amaka st.; Akiliarisek st.; Tasiusak st.; Ta- siusarsik in Angmagsalik Fjord st. (var. major); Kunak © st.; Mi- sutok st.; Krotodok st. (Kruuse); Nordostbugt in bogs st.; Kap Greg st.; Fleming Inlet st. (Hartz). var. orthothicioides Lindb. Kap Seaforth on new-hilloks cfr. (Hartz). 102. Amblystegium exannulatum (Br. eur.) De Not. ystes Liverpool Kyst, southern part st.; Amaka on the border of a pond with Juncus st.; Ikerasausak (f. ortho-brachyphylla) st.; Ta- siusak (f. orthophylla) st.; Ingmikertok (f. orthophylla) st.; Ikera- sausak st.; Gronlænderpynt st. (Kruuse). 103. Amblystegium tundrae Arnell ex. p. Syn: Drepanocladus tundrae Loeske in: Zweiter Nachtrag zur Moosflora des Harzes (Verh. des Bot. Vereins der Prov. Branden- burgs XLVI pag. 194). Amaka on the border of a pond with Juncus st.; Elvbakker in bogs st. (Kruuse). 329 104. Amblystegium fluitans (L.) De Not. Nordostbugt in bogs st. (N. Hartz). 105. Amblystegium purpurascens (Schimp.). Sieralik on sandy flats st.; Depot Ø with A. sarmenlosum st.; Jern Ø st.; Elvbakker st.; Tasiusak st. on sandy flats, among Sphag- num Girgensohnii; Ikerasausak in rills in the heath st. (Kruuse). 106. Amblystegium Berggrenii €. Jensen. Ikerasausak among Sphagnum riparium (Kruuse). *107. Amblystegium pseudostramineum (C. M.) Lindb. Amaka on the border of a pond st. (Kruuse). 108. Amblystegium Kneiffii Br. eur. Kap Borlase Warren (f. brevifolia orthophylla) st. (Hartz). 109. Amblystegium polycarpon (Bland.). Kap Borlase Warren (Hartz). Isi in Sermilik Fjord in ponds with Alopecurus geniculatus (forma simplex) st. (Kruuse). 110. Amblystegium brevifolium Arnell. Ryders Dal st. (Kruuse). 111. Amblystegium badium (Hartm.) Lindb. Adloe st. (Kruuse). 112. Amblystegium scorpioides (L.) Lindb. Ryders Dal, Vargudden, with A.sarmentosum, Stereodon chryseus and Ditrichum flexicaule st. (Kruuse). 113. Amblystegium turgescens (Jensen) Lindb. Nordostbugt in bogs among other bogmosses (Harpidium, Bryum ventricosum) st. (Hartz). Liverpool Kyst, partly mixed with Ambl. Sendtneri, Paludella sqvarrosa etc. st.; Ryders Dal with Ambl. Sendtneri st. (Kruuse). 114. Amblystegium giganteum (Sch.) De Not. Sabine Ø st. (Kruuse). RAN, 23 330 115. Amblystegium cordifolium (Hedw.) De Not. Nordostbugt in bogs with Paludella sqvarrosa and other mosses st.; Kap Dalton st. (Hartz). 116. Amblystegium sarmentosum (Will.) De Not. Nordostbugt in bogs st. (Hartz); Turner Sund st.; Ryders Dal st.; Kap Dalton st.; Jern Ø st.; Adloe st.; Ødesund st.; Nualik st. (Kruuse). 117. Amblystegium stramineum (Dicks) De Not. Nordostbugt in bogs among Paludella sqvarrosa st. (Hartz). Eskimo © st.; Adloe, Kap Dan st. with Sphagnum Girgensohnii; Anaya st.; Falkefjord among Paludella st.; Tasiusak with Poly- trichum juniperinum st.; Ingmikertorajik st.; Ingmikertorajik Fugle- holm st.; Ikerasausak among Sphagnum Girgensohnii st.; Kordlortok Sø on the border st.; Kuarmiut among Sphagnum teres st. (Kruuse). 118. Amblystegium trifarium (W. M.) De Not. Nordostbugt in bogs (Hartz). 119. Hypnum reflexum Starke. Ingmikertorajik efr.; Akiliarisek among Salix arctica st. (Kruuse). 120. Hypnum Mildei (Schimp.). Nordostbugt in bogs st. (Hartz). 121. Hypnum plumosum Huds. Ryders Dal among Sphaerocephalus palustris st.; Sabine © st. (Kruuse). 122. Hypnum turgidum Hartmann. Turner Sund st.; Sabine Ø st. (Kruuse); Kap Seaforth on mew-hilloks st. (Kruuse). | 123. Hypnum albicans Neck. Kap Wandel st. (Kruuse). *124. Hypnum erythrorrhizon (Br. eur.) Hartmann. Ingmikertorajik st. (Kruuse). 331 125. Hypnum trichoides Neck. Nordostbugt in bogs st.; Kap Dalton st. (Hartz); Kap Brown st.; Kingorsuak, the westside, among Sphagnum teres st. (Kruuse). *126. Lesquereuxia filamentosa (Dichs.) Lindb. var. brachyelados (Schwäg.) (C. Jensen det.). Ingmikertorajik 4; Tasiusarsik in Angmagsalik Fjord 2 (Kruuse). 127. Myurella tenerrima Brid. Tasiusak among Swartzia montana st.; Misutok at Woodsia ilvensis among Swartzia montana st. (Kruuse). 128. Myurella julacea (Will) Br. eur. Sabine © among Swartzia st.; Kangerdluarsuatsiak among Swartzia st.; Ryders Dal among Sphaerocephalus palustris, Poly- trichum alpinum and Bryum ventricosum st. (Kruuse); Jan Mayen among Leersia spathulata st.; Fleming Inlet among Leersia affinis st. (Hartz). 129. Hylocomium proliferum (L.) Br. eur. Kap Wandel st.; Kingorsuak, the westside st. (Kruuse). *130. Campylium hispidulum (Brid.) Mitten. Turner Sund in tufts of Dieranum neglectum st. (Kruuse). 131. Stereodon revolutus Mitten. Kap Borlase Warren st.; Jan Mayen st. (Hartz); Kap Dalton, several samples, st. (Hartz, Kruuse); Turner Sund st.; Ikerasarmiut st.; Ryders Dal st. (Kruuse). 132. Stereodon ehryseus (Schwägs.) Mitt. Sabine © st.; Turner Sund st.; Ryders Dal, Vargudden st. (Kruuse). *133. Stereodon rufescens (Dicks.) Mitten. Kap Wandel among Bartramia ityphylla st. (Kruuse); Kap Borlase Warren sparingly in tufts of Tayloria serrata var. pallida. 134. Isopterygium pratense (Br. eur.) Lindb. Kap Seaforth on mew-hillocks st. (Hartz). 23° 332 135. Isopterygium nitidum (Wahlb.); Lindb. var. pulchellum (Dicks.). Fleming Inlet st. (Hartz); Turner Sund st.; Ryders Dal st.; Henry Ø 840 m. above the level of the sea st.; Krotodok st. (Kruuse). 136. Plagiothecium denticulatum (L.) Br. eur. Turner Sund st. (Kruuse). * var. Donii (Sm.). Kingorsuak, in the great thicket of Salix st. (Kruuse). 137. Climacium dendroides (L.) W. M. Kakasuak near Kingorsuak among Thalictrum st. (Kruuse). 28—8—1907. Arbejder fra den Botaniske Have i Kobenhavn. Nr. 39. Sertryk af Botanisk Tidsskrift. 28. Bind. København 1907. Lieutenant Olufsen’s second Pamir-Expedition. Plants collected in Asia-Media and Persia by Ove Paulsen. V. LIBRARY NEW YORK Fungi. Determinavit E. Rostrup. BOTANICAL GARDEN, Chytridiaceae. 1. Synchytrium Anemones Wor. In caulibus Isopyri anemonoides K. et K. In montibus Alai, ad Olgin Lug, alt. 2800™, 24—6—98. Nr. 544. Peronosporaceae. 2. Peronospora Trifoliorum de Bary. In foliis Meliloti. Chawast prope Samarkand. 7—5—98. Nr. 126. 3. Cystopus candidus (Pers.) Lévy. In foliis Taphrospermi altaici C. A.M. Ad Olgin Lug in montibus Alai, alt. 2600™, 24--6—98. Nr. 538. Ustilaginaceae. 4. Cintractia pulverulenta Cooke et Mass. In paniculis Erianthi Ravennae (L.). Ishak rabat ad fl. Amu Daria, inter Chiwa et Tshardshui. 25—6—99. Nr. 1876. 5. Ustilago Jensenii Rostr. In Hordeo cult. Ad Buchara. 29—5 —99. Nr. 1738. Uredinaceae. 6. Puccinia Phragmitis (Schum.) Kke. In foliis Phragmitis. Prope Samarkand. 22—5—98. Nr. 258. — Pamir, Prov. Goran, Kuh-i-lal, alt. 2600™. 14—10—98. Nr. 1520. 7. Puccinia anomala Rostr. In foliis Hordei cult. Ad Buchara. 29—5—99. Nr. 1738. | 8. Puccinia Polygoni Pers. In foliis Polygoni (Bellardi?). Prov. Ferghana, inter Margelan et Andidshan. 27—5—98. Nr. 309. 9. Puccinia aberrans Pers. In foliis Smelowskiae calycinae C. A.M. Pamir, in montibus prope Tshatir Tash. Alt. 4200m. 15—7—98. Nr. 795. 10. Puccinia Pimpinellae (Str.) Lk. In foliis Zosimiae tragioidis Boiss. Pamir. Alt. 3800™. 1—8—98. Nr. 1002. 11. Puccinia Gymnandrae Tranzchel. In foliis Lagotis borealis (Pall.). Pamir: Chargush. Alt. 43000. 3—9—98. Nr. 1239. Botanisk Tidsskrift. 28, Bind. 15 JAN 15 1909 la à — 216 — 12. Puccinia Asperulae Fuckel. In Asperula humifusa Bess. Merw. 6—6— 99. Nr. 1786. 13. Puccinia. Cirsii Lasch. In foliis Cousiniae triflorae Schrenk. Prov. Ferghana, inter Margelan et Andidshan. 27—5—-98. Nr. 304. 14. Puccinia suaveolens (Pers.) Rostr. In foliis Cirsii arvensis. Pamir, Prov. Wakhan, Torguz. Alt. 2900», 19—9—98. Nr. 1389. 15. Puccinia Absinthii DC. In foliis Artemisiae sacrorum Ledb. Pamir, Prov. Goran, Kuh-i-lal. Alt. 2600m. 14—1!0—98. Nr. 1519. 16. Puccinia conglomerata (Strauss) L. et K. In foliis Ligulariae altaicae DC. In montibus Alai, ad Olgin Lug. Alt. 2600™, 24—6—98. Nr. 578. 17. Uromyces Salsolae Reich. In foliis Halocharidis hispidae C. A. M. Prope Buchara. 25—5—99. Nr. 1708. 18. Uromyces Astragali (Opiz) Sacc. In foliis Astragali sp. Prov. Ferghana, inter Margelan et Andidshan. 27—5—98. Nr. 307. 19. Uromyces Limonii (DC.) Lév. In foliis Staticis otolepis Schrenk. In desertis salsis ad Buchara. 13—5—99. Nr. 1670. 20. Gymnosporangium juniperinum (L.) Fr. In ramis et galbulis Juniperi pseudosabinae F. et M. In montibus Alai, ad Olgin Lug. Alt. 26000, Nr. 514. 21. Melampsora populina (Jacq.) Lév. In foliis Populi euphraticae Oliv. Kiptjak ad fl. Amu Daria, Chiwa. 24—-7—99. Nr. 2012. 22. Melampsora aecidioides (DC.) Schroet. In foliis ramulisque Populi albae L. Samarkand. 3 -5—98. Nr. 86. 23. Melampsora Helioscopiae (Pers.) Cast. In foliis Euphorbiae pilosae L. Prov. Ferghana, prope Osh. 16—6—98. Nr. 370. 24. Melampsora Apocyni Tranzchel. In foliis Apocyni veneti L. Kiptjak ad fl. Amu Daria, Chiwa. 24—7—99. Nr. 2010. 25. Aecidium tataricum n. sp. Aecidiis amphigenis, dense gregariis; pseudoperidiis flavis, profunde urceolatis, margine subtilissime dentate ; aecidiosporis rotundato-angulatis, 16—18 y diam. In foliis Ixiolirionis tatarici Schult. Transcaspia, ad Bami. 24—4—98. Nr. 46. 26. Aecidium Spinaciae n. sp. Maculis orbicularibus, 4—5 mm latis, intense sangvineis; pseudoperidiis hypophyllis, niveis, margine crenu- lato; aecidiosporis globosis. In foliis Spinaciae tetrandrae Stev. Ad Jangi Kurgan prope Samarkand. 22—5—98. Nr. 257. 27. Aecidium Isopyri Schroet. In foliis Isopyri anemonoides Kar. et Kir. Ad Olgin Lug in montibus Alai. Alt. 2800", 24—6—98, 28. Aecidium Thalictri Joh. In foliis Thalictri Trautvetteriani Regel. Prov. Ferghana. Ad Osh. 18—4—99. Nr. 1646. 29. Aecidium Pimpinellae Kirchn. In foliis Umbelliferae. Prov. Ferghana. Ad Osh. 14—4—99. Nr. 1631. — 217 — 30. Aecidium Lappulae Thümen. In foliis Lappulae barbatae (M. B.). Ferghana. 16—6—98. Nr. 361. . Polyporaceae. 31. Polyporus igniarius (L.) Fr. Ad truncos Salicis. Ad Chiwa. 11—7—99. Nr. 1967, 32. Polyporus suaveolens (L.) Fr. Ad truncos Salicis. Prov. Ferghana, Gultsha, 1—4—99. Nr. 1610. 33. Polyporus hirsutus Fr. Tshinas prope Tashkent. 10—5—98. Nr. 134. 34. Polyporus varius (Pers.) Fr. Ad truncos. Persia, prov. Gilan. Ad Imam Sadé Hashim. 10—9—99. Nr. 2190. Agaricaceae. 35. Schizophyllum commune Fr. Ad truncos Mori albae L. Persia, prov. Gilan. Ad Resht, in silvis. 14—9—99. Nr. 2171. Erysiphaceae. 36. Uneinula Salicis (DC.) Wint. In foliis Populi balsamiferae L. Pamir, prov. Wakhan, ad Langarkisht. Alt. 3000™. 10—9—98. Nr. 1340. 37. Erysiphe Pisi (DC.) Schroet. In foliis Meliloti officinalis Desv. Pamir, prov. Wakhan. Ad Langarkisht. Alt. 3000m. 10—9—98. Nr. 1341. 38. Erysiphe communis (Wallr.) Fr. In foliis Convolvuli sp. Persia, ‘prov. Gilan. Ad Resht. 13--9—99. Nr. 2154. 39. Erysiphe taurica Lév. Ad folia Zygophylli Eichwaldi C.A. M. Prope Nukus ad fl. Amu Daria, Chiwa. 8—8—99. Nr. 2072. 40. Erysiphe Pegani Sorok. In foliis Pegani Harmala L. Pamir, prov. Wakhan. Ad Langarkisht. Alt. 3000m. 10—9—98. Nr. 1355. 41. Erysiphe Alhagi Sorok. In caulibus et foliis Alhagi camelorum Fisch. Prope Nukus ad fl. Amu Daria, Chiwa. 8—8—99. Nr. 2073. Sphaeriaceae. 42. Laestadia Lini n. sp. Peritheciis lenticularibus, epidermide tectis, dense sparsis, copiosis; ascis elavato-oblongis, sessilibus, 4-8-sporis, 40 w 1, 9 w er.; sporidiis monostichis, oblongo-fusoideis, 12—13 y 1., 3 u er. In caulibus emortuis Lint perenni. Ad Olgin Lug in montibus Alai. Alt. 3000m. 25—6—98. Nr. 570. 43. Laestadia Pegani n. sp. Peritheciis nigris, dense gregariis, lentiformibus, depressis, 80—90 yw latis; ascis ovato-oblongis, curvatis, sessilibus, aparaphysatis, 8-sporis, 60 y 1., 24 mw er., membrana superne usque ad 10 y crassa; sporidiis inordinatis, oblongis, 12—13 y 1., 6 x er. In caulibus emortuis Pegani Harmala L. Transcaspia. 13—5—98. Nr. 188, 15* Se 44. Sphaerella Tassiana de Not. In foliis Junei triglumis L. Pamir 25—7—98. Nr. 952. 45. Sphaerella Cruciferarum (Fr.) Sace. In caulibus Parryae fruti- eulosae Ryl. In montibus Alai. Alt. 2600m, 24—6—98. Nr. 524. 46. Pleospora herbarum (Pers.) Rbh. In caulibus emortuis: Hy- menolaena Lindleyana Kl. Nr. 1234. Parrya nudicaulis Kar. Kir. Nr. 1073. Parrya pinnatifida. Nr. 557. Sedum gelidum (Schrk.) Ldb. Nr. 1030. Sedum Rhodiola DC. Nr. 1054. Umbilicus Lievenii Ldb. Nr. 1024. Zozimia pamirica Lipsky. Nr. 1254. Zozimia tragioides Bois. Nr. 1002. — Pamir 1898 et 1904. 47. Pleospora platyspora Sacc. In caulibus emortuis: Astragalus Alitschuri B.F. Nr. 849. Astragalus Scheremetewiany B.F. Nr. 1075. Trachydium sp. Nr. 1074. Trigonella Emodi Bth. Nr. 846. Pamir 1898. Pezizaceae. 48. Sphaerospora verruculosa Berk. et Br. Inter muscos. Pamir, prov. Wakhan. Ad Torguz. Alt. 2900m. 21—9—98. Nr. 1408. Fungi imperfecti. 49. Cytospora chrysosperma (Pers.) Fr. In cortice Populi sp. Tshinas prope Tashkent. 10—5—98. Nr. 137. Pamir, prov. Shugnan. Alt. 2200™. 7—12—98. Nr. 1549. 50. Septoria Stellerae n.sp. Peritheciis atris, minutis, primo tectis, cortice immersis, densissime gregariis; conidiis semicirculari-curvatis, 20 u l., 1—2 y er. In ramis Stellerae Lessertii (Wickstr.) C. A. M. Chiwa ad Giaur-Kala. 11—8—99. 51. Coniothyrium caespitulosum Sacc. In ramulis Reaumuriae oxianae (Lib.). Chiwa. 25--6—99. 52. Camarosporium Roumeguerii Sacc. In caulibus emortuis Kochiae (prostratae L.?). Pamir, ad lacus Jashil Kul. Alt. 3800m, 93—7—98. Nr. 885. 53. Leptothyrium scutiforme (Fr.) Sacc. Ad caules exsiccatos Calligoni caput medusae Schrenk. Transcaspia. 5—6—98. (Legit Litivinow). 54. Ramularia Anchusae Mass. In foliis Anchusae italicae Retz. Prov. Ferghana. 8—6—98. Nr. 335. 55. Heterosporium Paulsenii n. sp. Caespitulis gregariis, velutinis, aterrimis, caulicolis; hyphis fuscis, septatis, laevibus; conidiis obscure fuligineis, 1-5-septatis vel continuis, grosse verruculosis, 20—45 y |. 10—13 » er. In caulibus Macrotomiae euchromi (Royle) Pauls. Pamir 27—7— 98. Nr. 864. 56. Polythrincium Trifolii Kze. In foliis Trifolii. Pamir, Prov. Shugnan, Chorock. Alt. 2200™ 7—2—99. Nr. 1581. KBH. BIANCO LUNO JAN 15 1909 Arbejder fra den Botaniske Have i Kobenhavn. Nr. 40. Sertryk af Botamsk Tidsskrift. 28. Bind. København 1907. Lieutenant Olufsen’s second Pamir-Expedition. Plants collected in Asıa-Media and Persia by Ove Paulsen. VI. LIBRAR\ Cyperaceae NEV by BOTA C. H. Ostenfeld. IR In 1900 the late Mr. C. B. Clarke had the Cyperaceae collected by Ove Paulsen in Central-Asia and Persia for determination. When he sent the collection back with names, he wrote a letter to Mr. Paulsen, in which he proposed him to give the collection to me for closer deter- mination, as especially the Carices “are merely matched with plants in herb. Kew, and then the name on the Kew-plant is assigned to yours”. In 1902 I began to study the collection, but other works took my time, and it was not untill this year, that I could begin again on the deter- mination. In most cases I agree with the determinations made by Clarke, f. 1. in nearly all the species of Cyperus and Scirpus, but with regard to the Kobresia and Carex the differences are more frequent; especially he has not determined the distigmate Heterostachye correctely. When my determination differs from Clarke’s, I have always given his name in brackets or in notes. In some cases the name used by Clarke is a synonyme to that used by me, as he followed the Flora of British India by Hooker fil. and not always took the eldest name. The paper has been written entirely by me who consequently alone is responsible for it. I beg to express my thanks to the well-known Caricologist the Rev. G. Kiikenthal who has been good enough to give me the description of Carex pseudofoetida Kiik. The Botanical Museum, Copenhagen, December 1906. I. Cyperus L. 1. C.serotinus Rottb.; Meinshausen, Die Cyperaceen der Flora Russ- lands, Acta Horti Petropolitani, vol. XVIII, 1900, p. 234; C. Monti L. fil. Boissier, Flora Orientalis, vol. V, 1884, p. 366; Ledebour, Flora Rossica, vol. IV, 1853, p. 240; Juncellus serotinus C.B. Clarke, Hooker fil., Flora of British India, vol. VI, 1894, p. 594. N. 2139. Persia, Provincia Gilan, near Enseli, September 12, 1899. — 220 — 2. C. rotundus L.; Meinshausen, 1. e., p. 241; Ledebour, Fl. Ross., p. 242; Boissier, Fl. Orient., p. 376; Hooker, Fl. Brit. India, p. 614. N. 308. Ferghana, near Kuwa, in a stony desert between Margelan and Andidshan. May 27, 1898. N. 1762. Transcaspia, near Merw. June 3, 1899. 3. C. haspan L.; Hooker, Fl. Brit. India, p. 600. N. 2103. Chiwa, in rice-fields, August 19, 1899. Called “Dungus-ot”. Il. Scirpus L. 4. S. hamulosus Steven; Meinshausen, |.c. p.247; Isolepis hamulosa Ledebour, Fl. Ross., p. 257. N. 2085. Chiwa, at the river Amu-Darja near Kisil-yi. August 12, 1899: 5. S. maritimus L.; Meinshausen, |. c. p. 250; Ledebour, Fl. Ross., p. 249; Boissier, Fl. Orient., p. 384; Hooker, Fl. Brit. India, p. 658. N. 178. Samarkand. May 12, 1898. N. 1763. Transcaspia, near Merw. June 3, 1899. N. 1773, 1775. Transcaspia, near Merw. June 5, 1899. N. 2104. Chiwa, in rice-fields, August 19, 1899. Called „Tjigin“. 6. S. affinis Roth; Meinshausen, 1. c., p. 251; S. maritimus, var. affinis Clarke; Hooker, Fl. Brit. India, p. 659; S. maritimus, f. compactus, Ledebour, Fl. Ross., p. 249. N. 1978. Chiwa, at the lake Akdarbent-Kul, July 14, 1899. 7. S. Tabernaemontani Gmel.; Ledebour, Fl. Ross., p. 248; S. la- custris, var. Tabernaemontani C.B. Clarke; Hooker, F1. Brit. India, p. 658; S. lacustris, 2, digynus Godr.; Boissier, Fl. Orient., p. 383; S. lacustris, f. glauca Meinshausen, 1. c., p. 252. C. B. Clarke had named the specimens S. lacustris. N. 1410. Pamir, Prov. Wakhan, in a swamp at Sermut; alt. c. 2800™. September 22, 1898. N. 1946. Chiwa, July 9, 1899. 8. S. littoralis Schrad.; Meinshausen, 1. e., p. 252; Ledebour, Fl. Ross., p. 249; Boissier, Fl. Orient., p. 383; Hooker, Fl. Brit. India, p. 659. N. 1981. Chiwa, at the lake Chasawat-Kul; July 15, 1899. 9. S. compressus (L.) Pers.; Meinshausen, 1. c., p. 254; Boissier, Fl. Orient., p. 385; S. caricis Retz.; Hooker, Fl. Brit. India, p. 660; Blys- mus compressus Panz.; Ledebour, Fl. Ross., p. 260. N. 489. Alai Mountains, at the river Taldyk, alt. 2640™. June 22, 1898. N. 872, 878. Pamir, at the lake Jashil-Kul, alt. 3780™; around hot sulphur-springs. July 23, 1898. — 221 — N. 1031. Pamir, on the shore of the lake Jashil-Kul, alt. 3780. August 4, 1898. N. 1147. Pamir, at the lake Bulung-Kul, alt. 3800, August 23, 1898, N. 1189. Pamir, near the lake Jashil-Kul, alt. 3800™, around a hot sulphur-spring. August 29, 1898. 10. S. setaceus L.; Meinshausen, ].c., p. 256; Boissier, Fl. Orient., p. 379; Hooker, Fl. Brit. India, p. 654; Isolepis setacea R. Br.; Ledebour, Fl. Ross., p. 256. N. 1337. Pamir, Wakhan, at Langarkisht, alt. 3000™. September 9, 1898. 11. S. alpinus Schleich.; Meinhauser, |. c., p. 257; Boissier, Fl. Orient., p. 378; S. pumilus Vahl; Hooker, Fl. Brit. India, p. 654; Isolepis oligantha C. A. Mey.; Ledebour, Fl. Ross, p. 255. N. 603. In the Alai Steppe, at Sary Tash, alt. 3270™, at the rivulets. June 27, 1898. 12. S. pauciflorus Lightf.; Meinshausen, |. c., p. 257; Ledebour, Fl. Ross., p. 246; Boissier, Fl. Orient. p. 379; Hooker, Fl. Brit. India, p. 654; O. Fedtschenko, Flore du Pamir, Acta Horti Petropolitani, vol. XXI, 1903, p. 427. N. 487. Alai Mountains, at the river Taldyk, alt. 2640™. June 22, 1898. 13. S. acicularis L.; Meinshausen, ]. c., p.259; Eleocharis acicu- laris, Ledebour, Fl. Ross., p. 243; Eleocharis acicularis, R. Br., Hooker, Fl. Brit. India, p. 628; Heleocharis acicularis, Boissier, Fl. Orient. p. 388. The specimens collected belong to the submerged form (f. submersa Hj. Nilsson in Botan. Notiser, 1888, p. 147). N. 1454. Pamir, Wakhan, in the lake at Rang, alt. 2700™. Oc- tober 3, 1898. 14. S. palustris L.; Meinshausen, 1.c., p.262; Eleocharis palustris, Ledebour, Fl. Ross., pag. 244; Eleocharis palustris R. Br.; Hook, Fl. Brit. India, p. 628; Heleocharis palustris, Boissier, Fl. Orient., p. 386. At least the specimens of N. 1415 and 1455, with ripe fruits, are nearest to subsp. eupalustris (S. eupalustris H. Lindberg fil.). As to the value of the Eleocharis argyrolepis Kierulff (cfr. Boissier, 1. c., p. 386, and Meinshausen 1. c., p. 262), I should think it to be only a form of S. palustris, but I must admit that I know it only from descriptions. N. 870. Pamir, at the lake Jashil-Kul, alt. 3780™, around a hot sulphur-spring. July 23, 1898. N. 1415. Pamir, Wakhan, in a swamp at Sermut, alt. c. 2800™; September 22, 1898. N. 1455. Pamir, Wakhan, in the lake at Nut; October 3, 1898. 999 — Ill. Kobresia Willd. 15. K. Bellardi (All.) Degland; B. Fedtschenko, Mat. fl. shugnan, Travaux du Musée Bot. de l’Acad. Imp. d. sc. de St. Pétersbourg, I, 1902, p. 166; O. Fedtschenko, Sec. Suppl. à la Fl. du Pamir, Acta Horti Petropol., vol. XXIV, 1905, p. 346; K. scirpina Willd., Meinshausen, 1. c. p. 275; K. capillifolia C. B. Clarke, Journ. Linn. Soc. vol. XX, p. 378; Hooker, Fl. Brit. India, p. 697; K. macrolepis Meinshausen, 1. c. p. 276; Elyna Bellardi (All.) Koch; E. spicata Schrad.; Ledebour, Fl. Ross., p. 262; Boissier, Fl. Orient., p. 394. The late C.B. Clarke had named the specimens Kobresia capillifolia, but I cannot find any valuable difference between the arctic-alpine Ko- bresia Bellardi and the asiatic-alpine K. capillifolia; perhaps the latter is a taller plant, the bracteoles are somewhat larger and their margins more broadly membranous; but leaves, old sheaths, culms, spikes and nuts are quite like in both plants. No doubt the K. macrolepis Meinshausen |. c. is identical with K. capillifolia and consequently I take it as K. Bellardi. N. 715. Pamir. In a salt marsh near the river Murghab, alt. 3800™. July 7, 1898. N. 897. Pamir. In bogs near Jashil-Kul, alt. 3780. July 25, 1898. N. 979. Pamir. On the shore of Jashil-Kul, alt. 3780. July 28, 1898. 16. K. schoenoides (C. A. Mey.) Boeck.; Meinshausen, |. c. p. 278; O. Fedtschenko, Fl. du Pamir, p. 427; Hooker, Fl. Brit. India, p. 697; Duthie, Alcock’s Plants, no. 88; Elyna schoenoides C. A.Meyer; Ledebour, Fl. Ross., p. 262; Boissier, Fl. Orient., p. 394. N. 1093, 1106. Pamir. In the mountains near Jashil-Kul, alt. 3850 — 4050”, July 11—13, 1898. N. 1146. Pamir. At the lake Bulung-Kul, alt. 3800™, August 23, 1898. 17. K. stenocarpa (Kar. et Kir.) Meinshausen, I. c. p. 278; A. schoe- noides var. humilis O. Fedtschenko, Fl. du Pamir, p. 428; Elyna stenocarpa Karelin et Kiriloff, Enum. Plant. Soongoric., no. 870, 1842; Ledebour, Fl. Ross., p. 262; E. humilis C. A. Meyer ex E.R. Trautvetter, Observationes etc., Acta Horti Petropolitani, I, 1870, p. 21. There are specimens of a Kobresia from two places in Pamir named by the late C. B. Clarke „K. schoenoides, var. humilis G. B. Clarke". The specimens are only flowering, but they are so different from K. schoenoides that I feel sure they are a distinct species. They belong to the section Elyna of the genus, as the spikelets contain one female and 3—4 male flowers, and they are nearly related to K. schoenoides, from which they differ mainly in the structure of the leaves. In the plant in — 223 — question they are much shorter than the stem, most often recurved, flat with scabrous margins and keel, while K. schoenoides has involute (chan- nelled-incurved), erect and long leaves. Our species is undoubtedly the plant described by Karelin and Kiriloff as Elyna stenocarpa; the authors remark that their species is: “ab om- nibus Elynis inflorescentia magis composita distinctissima; habitu simil- lima Kobresiæ caricinæ, sed spice e spiculis androgynis composite et squamæ femineæ solitarie nec bine”. Just the comparison with the aspect of Kobresia caricina = K. bipartita is well found. On the other hand our plant is the same as has been described by Trautvetter (I. c.) in Acta Hort. Petrop. as E. kumilis C. A. Meyer. His description agrees also very well with our specimens, and he points out the difference between E. humilis and E. schoenoides just with regard to the form and structure of the leaves. Kobresia persica Kiikenthal et Bornmiiller (in Oester. Botan. Zeitsch., 1897, p. 133, Pl. II) is very near our species according to both the de- scription and the drawing, but the authors state: “spiculis secundariis vel unisexualibus vel androgynis (potius 2-floris)”, which not quite agrees with our specimens (being all androgynous and the lower spikelets 4-5-flowered), but I should think K. persica being a depauperated form of K. stenocarpa. N. 627. Pamir, at a rivulet near Kisil-Kul, alt. 4000™. June 29, 1898. N. 663. Pamir, near the river Muscol, alt. 4300™. July 2, 1898. 18. K. Royleana (Nees) Boeck.; O. Fedtschenko, Fl. du Pamir, p. 428 (exclus. syn. Elyna stenocarpa); Hooker, Fl. Brit. India, p. 698; Duthie, Alcock’s plants, No. 89. N. 488. Alai Mountains, at the river Taldyk, alt. 2640™. June 22, 1898. N. 757, 759. Pamir, in the dry bed of the river Bos-tjilga, July 12, 1898. N. 702. Pamir, in bogs at the river Murghab, alt. 3800™. July 8, 1898. N. 898. Pamir, in bogs near Jashil-Kul, alt. 3780™. July 25, 1898. N. 1219. Pamir, in the Chargush-pass, alt. 4240™, September 3, 1898. IV. Carex L.'). 19. C. parva Nees; Hooker, Fl. Brit. India, p. 712; O. Fedtschenko, Fl. du Pamir, p. 428; C. macrorrhyncha Kar. & Kir.; Ledebour, Fl. Ross. p. 266; Meinshausen, |. c. p. 307. 1) The species have been arranged after Meinshausen’s paper. Although his arrangement is not at all a natural one, it seems convenient to follow it. — 294 — N. 899. Pamir, in a swamp near the lake Jashil-Kul, alt. 3780™. July 25, 1898. 20. C. microglochin Whbg.; Ledebour, Fl. Ross., p. 269; Boissier, Fl. Orient., p.398; Hooker, Fl. Brit. India, p. 711; Meinshausen, 1. ¢., p. 309; O. Fedtschenko, Fl. du Pamir, p. 428; Supplément p. 346. N. 699. Pamir, in a swamp near the river Murghab, alt. 3800™; July 8, 1898. 21. C. physodes M. Bieb. (determ. Paleskij); Ledebour, Fl. Ross., p. 274; Boissier, El. Orient., p. 399; Meinshausen, I. c. p. 312. N. 1880. Transcaspia, in the desert near Kara Aigir; June 26, 1899. The specimens are very fragmentary, containing only rhizomes with old sheaths. 92. C. stenophylla Whbg.; Meinshausen, |. c., p. 316; Ledebour, Fl. Ross., p. 270; Boissier, Fl. Orient., p. 400; Hooker, FI. Brit. India, p. 700; O. Fedtschenko, Fl. du Pamir, p. 429; Supplément, p.346; C. steno- phylla, var. desertorum Litwinow apud Kneucker, Carices exsicc., fasc. VI, n. 153; C. desertorum Litwinow, Fl. Turkestan. Fragmenta, I, Trav. du Musée Bot. de l’Acad. Imp. des Sciences de St. Pétersbourg, I, 1302 up ns. Mr. D. Litwinow has separated the stenophylla-like Carex from Turkestan from the true C. stenophylla Whbg., on account of its nearly nerveless utricle with attenuated base and longer beak, and I find the same distinctive character in all the specimens with ripe fruits collected by O. Paulsen in Asia-Media. The utricle is thin-walled, at least in its basal part, and the nut does not fill it out, but I do not base a new species on these few characters alone, and therefore | take the Central-Asiatic form as var. desertorum Litw. of C. stenophylla; of the beneath men- tioned numbers the no.’s, 110, 476, 559 and 1625 agree exactely with the specimens of var. desertorwm distributed in the quoted exsiccatum (Kneucker, no. 153). Nr. 110. Turkestan; near Samarkand; May 6, 1898. N. 476. Alai Mountains; in a pasture at Olgin Lug, alt. 2640™; June 21, 1898. N. 599. Alai Steppe; near Sary Tash, alt.3270™, June 27, 1898. N. 682. Pamir; in the barren plain at Sary Mullah, alt. 4070™, July 5, 1898. N. 774. Pamir; in salt-places in the steppe Tschatir Tash, alt. 4000™; July 14, 1898. N. 854. Pamir; in the barren plain at the lake Jashil-Kul, alt. 3780™, July 31, 1898. — 9295 — N. 1029. Pamir; on the shore of the lake Jashil-Kul, att. 3780; August 4, 1898. N. 1625. Ferghana; near Osh, April 10, 1899. Fig 1. Carex pseudofoetida Kükenth. (ab. °/s nat. size). 93. C. pseudofoetida G. Kükenthal, Mitth. bot. Ver. Thiiring. N. F., XV, 1900, p. 4 (nomen solum); C. foetida G. Kiikenthal, Bot. Centralbl., 75, 1898, p. 108, non Villars; probably C. euraica O. Fedtschenko, Fl. Pamir p. 429, but not of Kunth. — 996 — Several specimens of a Carex-species related to the foregoing are present in the collection from Pamir. The species, Fig. 1, agrees exactly with a plant collected in Turkestan (Terski Alatau, No. 805) by V. F. Brotherus and distributed from the Herbarium of Helsingfors. It is labelled „©. foetida Vill.“ by the Rev. G. Kükenthal and published under this name in Botan. Centralbl. (quoted above), but later Kükenthal has changed his opinion and has given the form in question the new name C. pseudofoetida, but without any description. He has now been so kind to give me a description of this new species, which I with his permission publish here: “C, pseudofoetida Kükenthal, sp. nov. Rhizoma longe repens lignosum crassum. Culmus 6—20 cm altus subincurvus rigidus tereti-compressus laevis basi vaginis brunneis longe obtectus. Folia culmo breviora conferta 2—3 mm lata rigida. Spicule paucæ androgyne in capitulum oblongo-ovatum 7—10 mm longum dense congestæ. Squame lanceolato-ovate acute fusco-castaneæ clarius carinate marginibus + hyaline. Utriculi squamas subsuperantes demum patentes membranacei ovati planoconvexi 4mm longi inferne stramineis superne ferruginei glabri obsolete nervosi basi subrotundata breviter stipitati margi- nati in rostrum mediocre obscure coloratum marginibus fere læve ore hyalino oblique sectum attenuati. Achænium parvulum. Stigmata 2. Area: Turkestan, Pamir, Persia, East-Sibiria (Mouth of the river Lena, leg. Bunge).” I think it is a good species, mostly related to C. incurva, from which it differs in the much stouter growth, the much broader leaves, the brown scales and the smaller, plano-convex or applanated biconvex utricle. Probably it is this species which by Mrs. O. Fedtschenko, Fl. du Pamir, p. 429 is named C. curaica Kunth, a quite different species, of which f. inst. the utricles are strongly nerved and with scabrous beak. The late Clarke had named our specimens with this wrong name. N. 626. Pamir. At a rivulet near Kisil-Kul, alt. 4000"; June 29, 1898. | N. 646. Pamir. Rather common in the salt-soil on the shore of the lake Kara-Kul, alt. 4000; July 1, 1898. N. 656. Pamir. In salt-soil at the river Muscol, alt. 4100™; July 2, 1898. N. 803. Pamir. At the river Alitshur ad Borsala, alt. 3930; July 16, 1898. N. 871. Pamir. At a hot sulphur-spring near the lake Jashil-Kul, alt. 3780; July 23, 1898. N. 1131, 1134. Pamir. In salt-marsh on the shore of the lake Bulung-Kul, alt. 3800™; August 19, 1898 (Fig. 1). = — 94. C. gracilis Good.; C. acuta L. ex parte; Ledebour, Fl. Ross., p. 313; Meinshausen, 1. c., p. 335; Boissier, Fl. Orient. p. 419. There are specimens from two places in Pamir, which I refer to C. graeilis; they are rather different from the ordinary type of this species having short erect female spikes, but in all essential characters they agree with it (phyllopod, flat leaves, etc.). N. 981. Pamir, on the shore of the lake Jashil-Kul, alt. 3780™; July 28, 1898. N. 1268. Pamir, at Djangarlik near the river Pamir-darja. Sep- tember 6, 1898. 25. C. orbicularis Boott, Proc. Linn. Soc. I, 1845, p. 254, and Transact. Linn. Soc. XX, 1851; p.134, Clarke in Hooker, Fl. Brit. India, p. 711 as synon. to C. rigida. In the material of Carices from Pamir there are several numbers of an interesting species in many respects intermediate between C. Goodenoughii Gay and C. rigida Good (see Fig.2). The late C. B. Clarke had named the specimens C. vulgaris Fr. (= C. Goodenoughii}, and on the other hand I was inclined to identify them with ©. rigida. Now we have in the Copenhagen Herbarium a Carex from “Herb. Ind. Or., Hooker fil. & Thom- son” collected in West-Tibet, regio alp., alt. 14—16,000 feet, which is quite the same form as the Pamir plant, and this species is named C. orbicularis Boott. I have not seen the preliminary description of C. orbi- cularis by Boott in 1845, but the diagnosis and the full description in Boott’s paper from 1854 agree well with our plant. Therefore I use Boott’s name for it. It deserves certainly a specific rank in spite of its relations to the above mentioned two species, of which it probably is the Central-Asiatic mountain representative. As an addition to the description given by Boott I will mention the following characters: Tufted, with short stolons; old leaves and sheaths persistent; leaves rather short, 3—3,5 mm broad, flat (with papillose epidermis-cells on both surfaces), glaucous; stems 10—20 cm high; one terminal male spike with obtuse more or less darky brown scales; 2—3 short globose or ellipsoid female spikes, sometimes with male flowers in the top, sessile or the lower very shortly stalked; bracts very short, not sheathing, with blackish ears, blade of the lower one shorter than the spike, setaceous, those of the others mostly wanting. Scales of the female spikes obtuse, blackish or black-brown with lighter midvein and margins, shorter and narrower than the mature fruit; utricle orbiculate or obovate. about 2—2,5 mm long, apiculate with a short entire beak, plano-convex, nerve- less, mostly black-brown, when mature, with exception of the basal part, faintly papillose; nut orbiculate or obovate, biconvex or plano-convex, api- culate; stigmas 2. — 998 — I should think that the Carex rigida mentioned by O. Fedtschenko (Fl. Pamir, p. 431, Supplément, p. 346) belongs to this species. Fig. 2. Carex orbicularis Boott. (ab. 2/3 nat. size). N. 664. Pamir, near the river Muscol, alt. 4200™, July 2, 1898. N. 700, 701. Pamir, in a bog at the river Murghab, alt. 3800m, July 8, 1898 (Fig. 2). N. 716, 717. Pamir, in a salt-marsh at the river Murghab, alt. 3800, July 9, 1898. — 299 — N. 1028. Pamir, on the shore of the lake Jashil-Kul, alt. 3780m, August 4, 1898. Fig. 3. Carex orbicularis Boott, var. bulungensis Ostf. (ab. */s nat. size). As a monstrose form of this species I take a plant collected in Pamir (in a bog near Jashil-Kul, July 25, 1898, No. 896); it agrees with the other specimens except in the scape and largeness of the utricles; they are 3—5 mm large, but deformed, 3—4 times as long as the scales, ovate or oblong, blackish. Probably it is due to an attack by some parasitic — 230 — animal, but at the first glance one should take the specimens as belonging to the Melanantha-group. A Carex-form collected in a salt-marsh on the shore of the lake Bulung-Kul (Pamir, alt. 3800™, August 19, 1898, No. 1135) belongs probably also to C. orbicularis Boott, but it looks very different; the stems are about 59 cm high, the leaves 20—30 cm long and 2,5—3 mm broad; as growing in a loose soil the rhizomes are not so tufted, but with longer stolons. Taken as a whole it resembles Carex Goodenoughii, but the essential characters, such as the flat leaves, the orbiculate utricles, etc., are the same as in C. orbicularis. I therefore place it under this species, but as a variety, var. bulungensis Ostf., nov. var. (Fig. 3). 26. C. Regelii C.B. Clarke in O. Fedtschenko, Fl. du Pamir, p. 430, Supplément, p. 346; C. melanantha Auctt. ex parte. I have compared our specimens with the types in the Kew Her- barıum and found that they fully agree with them. The species is very near C. Moorcroftii Falconer and ©. melanantha C. A. Mey., which latter name has been given to our specimens by the late C. B. Clarke, but differs from the first named in its much darker scales of the female spikes, in the nearly beak-less utricle and in the lack of the large covering masses of old leaves and sheaths, from the second species in the wholly male terminal spike, and the uppermost lateral spikes male being at the top. N. 602. Alai Steppe; near the rivulets at Sary Tash, alt. 3270", June 27, 1898. N. 559. Alai Mountains; alt. 3200. June 25, 1898. The spe- cimens are too young for a definite identification. 27. C. macrogyna Turcz., Meinshausen, l.c., p. 357; C. ferruginea, 8, Ledebour, Fl. Ross., p. 294; C. tristis Auctt., an M. Bieb.? The specimens agree very well with the plants of C. macrogyna, which I have seen, but it must be admitted, that it is very nearly related to C. tristis M. Bieb., from which it only seems to be distinguished by the stouter growth, paler scales with broad membranous margins and ovate utricles with short entire beak. — C. B. Clarke had named it ‘Carex sp.”. N. 558. Alai Mountains; alt. 2900™; June 25, 1898. N. 758. Pamir; in the dry river-bed of the Bos-tjilga. July 12, 1898. N. 1080. Pamir; in the mountains near the lake Jashil-Kul, alt. 3800™; August 11, 1898. 28. C. supina Whbg.; Meinshausen, 1. c., p. 392; Ledebour, Fl. Ross., p. 305; Boissier, Fl. Orient., p. 414; Hooker, Fl. Brit. India, p. 733. N. 356. Ferghana; Issik Bulak at the river Langar, alt. 650m, June 16, 1898. — 31 — N. 535. Alai Mountains; in Juniper-forest, alt. 2700"; June 24, 1898. 29. C. nitida Host, var. conglobata (Kit.). Ascherson u. Graebner, Synops. Mitteleurop. Flora, II 2, 1902, p. 114; C. nitida, 2, Ledebour, Fig. 4. Carex songorica Kar. et Kir. var. pamirica Ostf. (ab. 1/3 nat. size). Fl. Ross., p. 306; C. nitida O. Fedtschenko, Fl. Pamir, p. 431; C. obesa Meinshausen, 1. c., p. 392; Boissier, Fl. Orient., p. 414. The specimens collected agree well with the C. conglobata from Hungary (e. g. Kneucker, Cyp. exsicc., n. 103). Botanisk Tidsskrift. 28. Bind. 16 — 232 — N. 359. Ferghana; Issik Bulak at the river Langar, alt. 650m; June 16, 1898. N. 445. Alai Mountains; in Juniper-forest, alt. 2640m; June 20, 1898. N. 507. Alai Mountains; near Olgin Lug; alt. 2650™; June 22, 1898. N. 600. Alai Steppe; near Sary Tash, alt. 3300™; June 27, 1898. 30. C. vesicaria L., var. alpigena Fries, Mantissa 3, p. 142, 1842; Meinshausen I. c., p. 373; C. vesicaria, 7, Ledebour, Fl. Ross., p. 317; €. vesicaria, var. pamirica O. Fedtschenko, Fl. Pamir, p. 432; Exsice. Fries, Herb. Normale, VIII, no. 71. There are in the collection three no.’s of a Carex-species from Pamir, which I refer to the above quoted variety of C. vesicaria. The plants are 50—75 cm high, consequently taller than the Scandinavian var. alpigena, and also coarser and more broad-leaved; but the shining, chestnut-brown utricle with the comparatively short, faintly bifid beak agrees well with the type of the variety. On the other hand our specimens belong without doubt to the same form which Mrs. O. Fedtschenko has described as var. pamirica. C. B. Clarke had named it “C. utrieulata Boott”. N. 1021, 1026. Pamir; at the lake Jashil-Kul, alt. 3780™; August 2 and 5, 1898. N. 1161. Pamir; at the lake Bulung-Kul, alt. 3800™; August 24, 1898. 31. C. songorica Kar. et Kir.; Meinshausen I. c., p. 377; Ledebour, Fl. Ross., p. 316. The specimens (see Fig. 4) represent an alpine form (var. pamirica Ostf. n. var.) of the C.songorica. The utricles are shining, darkly red-brown in the upper part, obsoletely nerved and not so abruptly attenuated into the bifid beak as in the main form. Culms erect, 35—40 em high. By C. B. Clarke the specimens had been named “C. nutans Host.”. N. 967. Pamir; onthe shore of Jashil-Kul, alt.3780™; July 28, 1898. KBH. BIANCO LUNO f Li al) 4 i : RS ET Le | i + ) wa Det SÆR Fa, a à LA Lu ont SON Beng ’ u. 3 det ima, PPP j À . P r à à À L a RR? L "HT he J y ) È tale i fi | " \ Oe TS * & N Pr 5 Jag , 4 nar j ; 4 à i «| å å ¥ 2 ET gx sår i . tj > 2 1 D ‘ J N + Wr ‘ ‘ i À 24 2 ER - x “I } ; u + < es ; | x i . | ds Gr ' "ET i 4 1 ‘ sy f y k P i+ ; 1 „Ir on % F "HAUT ' PR Te . à iel LA = K , il, Fair + 4 +. Vee MVA i fi [iz a , Poe ARE] a t ÿ i! MAN . ae, ll nt, TAM. ns km re WE | Le scr a D GT ee Le whe ape PO Taped) it Mi JUNE i wy be che a alee ay Fun Mr dal Pry, JAN 15 1909 Arbejder fra den Botaniske Have i Kobenhavn. Nr. 41. Sertryk af Botanisk Tidsskrift. 28. Bind. Kebenhavn 1907. Lieutenant Olufsen’s second Pamir-Expedition. Plants collected in Asia-Media and Persia by Ove Paulsen. VII. Labratae. det. J. Briquet. 1. Scutellaria orientalis L. var. mollis Briq., var. nov. A var. genuina Boiss. differt bracteis molliter dense tomentosis, apice Magis conspicue acuminatis. Caracteribus caeteris vix sejungenda. Ferghana: N. 316, on a mountain near Osh. May 30. 1898. 2. Scutellaria Paulsenii Briq., sp. nov. (Fig. 1). Suffrutex, caudice lignoso caules multos procumbenti-adscendentes proferente. Rami brevissime adpresse puberuli vel glabrescentes, internodiis brevibus. Folia parva, ovata, apice obtusa, infra medium latiora, basi breviter rotundato-cuneata, sessilia vel fere sessilia, marginibus superficialiter crenatis, utrinque viridia brevissime parce puberula vel subglabra. Verti- eillastri in spicastra terminalia tetragona congesti, bracteis elliplieis + vio- laceis, subintegris vel integris, praesertim ad margines laxe villosellis, laxe imbricatis. Calix sub anthesi parvus, laxe villosellus. Corolla magna vio- lacea, extus breviter adpresse pubescens typi S. alpinae. Planta 10—15 cm alta. Foliorum lamina superficie 1—1,2 x 0,7 em, crenis circ. 0,5 mm altis. Spicastra ad 5 em longa. Bracteae superficie cire. 1 x 0,7 cm. Calix sub anthesi vix ultra 2—3 mm longus. Corolla calicis os ad 2,5 em excedens. Species habitum S. alpinae omnino refert, sed folia minora etiam basilaria sessilia vel fere sessilia, dum in illa folia basilaria serrato-crenata semper conspicue petiolata sunt. Affinitas magna est etiam cum S. virente Boiss. quae a nostra bracteis magis reticulato-nervosis, foliis profunde incisis petiolatis discedit. Pamir: N. 620, at Bordo-ba (border of the Alai-steppe) Alt. 35002. June 27. 1898; N. 752, at the river Kara-su. Alt. 3700m. July 12. 1898. 3. Scutellaria adenostegia Briq., sp. nov. Herba perennis. Caules adscendentes vel erecti, undique breviter glanduloso-puberuli, cinerascentes. Folia satis parva, ovata, apice obtusa vel subacuta, basi truncato-subcordata, petiolo quam lamina breviori in- 16* — 934 — structa, valide et regulariter crenata, supra viridia glabrescentia, subtus albo- vel cinereo-tomentosa, dura, rugosa. Verticillastri in spicastra terminalia tetragona congesti, bracteis late ovatis, apice breviter apiculatis, super- ficialiter erenulatis, reticulato-nervosis, undique laxe piloso-glandulosis, viscosis, imbricatis. Calix sub anthesi parvus, undique breviter piloso- Fi ‚1. Seutellaria Paulsenii. ls. UT] glandulosus, viscosus. Corolla speciosa flava, extus pubescens typi S. orientalis. Planta cire. 25 cm alta. Foliorum lamina superficie ad 1,8 x 1,8 em, crenarum culmina 1 —2 mm alta, petiolis 0,5—1 cm longis. Spicastra ad 10 cm longa. Bracteae infimae ad 1,3 x 1,5cm. Calix sub anthesi (seu- tello incluso) 3—4 mm longus. Corolla calicis os ad 3 cm excedens. Affinis S. orientali a qua bracteis latissime ovatis reticulato-nervosis viscosis pulchre differt. S. multicaulis Boiss. longe diserepat foliorum forma et bractearum indole. Ferghana: N. 386, near Gultsha. Alt. 1600m, June 17. 1898. Fig.2. Nepeta Paulsenii. 113. 4. Nepeta Paulsenii Briq., sp. nov. (Fig. 2). Herba perennis. Caulis robustus, basi induratus, ramosissimus, ramis erectis vel erecto-adscendentibus crebris, viridibus, inferne glabrescentibus, superne breviter piloso-pubescentibus. Folia satis parva, oblonga, apice acuta — 236 — vel subacuta, basi in petiolum brevem cuneata, marginibus irregulariter inciso-laciniatis, viridibus, utrinque (praesertim subtus) subhispidule laxe pilosulis. Vertieillastri multiflori in spicastra terminalia densa oblongo- cylindrica congesti, infimis 1—2 longius distantibus, pedunculo communi dense et mollius pubescente; bracteae calicem subaequantes ex basi late ovata longe acuminatae, praesertim secus margines molliter vestitae; brac- teolae bracteis similes sed lanceolato-subulatae, vel subulatae. Calix an- guste campanulatus, rectus, extus +- grosse pilosus, dentibus tubum sub- aequantibus vel demum aliq. brevioribus, anguste lanceolato-subulatis, longe acuminatis sed non spinescentibus. Corolla parva, exserta, in sicco pallida, tubo superne antice vix ampliato; labrum villosellum apice profunde emar- ginatum; labioli labrum subaequantis lobi laterales breves rotundati, medium major obcordatus. Genitalia normalia; stamina labrum corollinum haud excedentia; stylus exsertus. Planta circ. 50 cm alta. Foliorum lamina superficie ad 1,5 x 0,5 em, laciniis ad 2mm altis, petiolus 3—4mm longus. Spicastrorum pars con- gesta sect. long. ad 5 x 1,5 cm, vertieillastris infimis (cum adsint) a caeteris internodiis ad 5 cm longis separatis; bracteae infimae superficie ad 7 x 3 mm, bracteolae infra 1 mm latae. Calix sub anthesi ca. 5 mm longus, maturus 6mm longus, tubo 3,5mm profundo, dentibus 2,5 mm longis. Corolla calicis os ca. 5mm excedens, labrum 2,5 mm longum; labioli 2,5 mm longi lobi laterales vix 1 mm alti, medius superficie fere 2>< 2 mm. Stylus labrum corollinum ad 2 mm excedens. Nuculae maturae desunt. Species § Spicatarum a speciebus orientalibus et centrali-asiatieis etiam ab iis quas nuper descripsit el. Lipsky nobis differre videtur foliorum forma, indumento, nec non organisatione calicis, caeterum N. podostachydi Benth. et subincisae Benth. affinis. Pamir: Near the lake Jashil Kul. Alt. 3800™. July 28. 1898. 5. Nepeta kokanica Reg. Deser. pl. nov. a cl. Fedtsch. lect. p. 65. N. cephalotes 2. brevipedunculata Reg. 1. c.; N. pamirensis Franch. in Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat. 1896 p. 345; N. supina Duthie non Stev.; N. pamiro- altaica Lipsky in Act. Hort. petrop. XXIII, 1,230 (1904). Nomen N. kokanicae huic speciei a cl. Regel datum antiquissimum et secundum art. 44 et 46 Regul. Nomencl. internation. conservandum est. Anabaptisatio cl. Lipskyi nostro sensu nequaquam adprobanda est. Pamir: N. 794, on mountains at Tshatir Tash. Alt. 4200™. July 14.1898; N. 992, in mountains at Jashil Kul. Alt. 3800™. July 29. 1898. 6. Nepeta reniformis Briq., sp. nov. (Fig. 3). Herba annua, parva, debilis, radice fusiformi tenui undulata vel varie torta. Caulis simplex vel e basi parce ramosus, brevissime puberulus, coeruleo-violascens, superne pilis laxis longis praeterea praeditus, inter- — 237 — nodiis brevibus. Folia parva, petiolata, latissime ovata, reniformia, latiora quam longa, apice rotundata, basi late truncato-subcordata, subintegra vel superficialiter erenulata, violascentia, utrinque pilis longissimis albis lax- issime floucoso-villosa, indumento demum —- deciduo. Verticillastri ad apices congesti capitulos foliosos indistinctos formantes, foliis floralibus (bracteis) a caeteris parum distinctis; bracteolae lineari-lanceolatae, apice acu- minatae subspinescentes viola- ceae laxe villosae calices cire. aequantes. Calix rectus elon- gato-campanulatus, pilis longis laxe villosus, dein +- glabres- cens, aequaliter 5-dentatus, dentibus e basi deltoidea brevi longe et demum sat rigide se- taceis, apice subspinescentibus, ore intus villosello. Corolla caerulescens exserta, parvula, tubo antice sensim et parum ampliato; labrum breve, pro- funde emarginatum, lobis ro- tundatis; labri lobi laterales Fig.3. Nepeta reniformis. 111.6. demum deflexi, breves, rotun- dati, medius major late obcordatus. Genitalia sub labro corollino ad- scendentia haud exserta normalia. Nuculae oblongae, pallide viridi-fuscae, laeves, nitidulae. Planta 5—8 cm alta. Foliorum lamina superficie 5—12 x 6—15 mm, petiolus 5—15 mm longus. Bracteolae longiores ad 10 mm longae. Calix sub anthesi vix 5mm longus, maturus 7—8 mm longus, tubo 5 mm pro- fundo, dentibus 3mm longis. Corolla calieis os circ. 6 mm excedens, labrum vix 2mm longum; labioli 3—4 mm longi lobi laterales vix ! mm alti, medius superficie 2 x 2mm. Nuculae sect. long. 2 x 1 mm. Species eximia ad § Micronepetas Boiss. pertinet, ab omnibus speciebus notis valde discrepat foliis reniformibus, indumento, nec non calicis forma. Pamir: N. 725, on mountains at Shatshan. Alt. 3800™. July 11. 1898. 7. Nepeta fallax Briq., sp. nov. Herba annua. Caulis basi ramosus, ramis adscendentibus, elongatis, glabris vel subglabris, internodiis elongatis saepe purpurascentibus. Folia parva, membranacea, late ovata, apice obtusa, infra medium latiora, basi — 938 — truncato-subattenuata, vix obscure subcordata, petiolo limbum subaequanti insidentia, margine obscure vel superficialiter crenulata, praesertim subtus laxe floccoso-villosella, vestimento cum aetate deciduo. Verticillastri dense multiflori, pauci in axillis superioribus dissiti, caeteri ad apices ramorum congesti foliis floralibus reductis fulcrati. Bracteolae lanceolato-lineares laxe villoso-pilosae, apice acuminato-subulatae aliq. subspinescentes, purpu- rascentes. Calix rectus campanulatus, superne laxe piloso-villosellus, pur- purascens, inferne glabrescens pallidior membranaceus, aequaliter 5-dentatus, dentibus anguste lanceolato-acuminatis, apice subspinescentibus, ore intus vix pilis ullis praeditus. Corolla parva purpurascens, tubo superne antice parum ampliato; labrum oblongum breve emarginatum; labioli quam la- brum alig. longioris lobi laterales breves rotundati, medius major ob- cordatus. Genitalia normalia sub labro occulta. Nuculae oblongae atrae laeves nitidae. Planta ultra 20 cm alta. Caulis internodia ad 10cm longa. Foliorum lamina superficie ad 8 x 12 mm, petiolus ad 10 mm longus. Bracteolae ad 10mm longae. Calicis maturi 6mm longi tubus 3—3,5 mm profundus, dentes 2—2,5 mm longi. Corolla calicis os ad 5mm excedens; labrum 1,5—2 mm longum; labioli 2—3 mm longi lobi laterales infra 1 mm alti, medius sect. long 2 x 2mm. Nuculae sect. long. cire. 2>< 1 mm. Species insignis habitu Lamii amplexicaulis etiam ad $ Micronepetas referri debet, ab omnibus formis seriei caracteribus datis eximie differt, etsi affinitates cum praecedente ex pilorum structura et foliorum forma desumptas nounullas adsint. Pamir: N. 1145, near the lake Bulung Kul. Alt. 3800™. Aug. 23. 1898. 8. Nepeta satureioides Boiss. Alai mountains: at Olgin Lug. Alt. 2600m. June 22. 1898. 9. Nepeta daénensis Boiss. Pamir: N. 792, on mountains at Tshatir Tash. Alt. 4000™. July 14. 1898; N. 858, on dry plains at Jashil Kul. Alt. 3800™. July 21. 1898; N. 1006, ibid. Aug. 1. 1898. 10. Dracocephalum Paulsenii Briq., sp. nov. (Fig. 4). Herba prostrata humilis. Rami ex caudice lignoso sat crasso crebri, internodiis brevibus, undique dense patule breviter pubescentes, vel can- escenti-pubescentes. [Folia parva, breviter petiolata, ovata, profunde crenato- pinnatifida, Jaciniis margine revolutis, supra viridia breviter adpresse pub- escentia, subtus albo-tomentosa. Verticillastri ad apices ramorum in capi- tula globoso-ovata vel oblonga vix vero spicata congesti. Bracteae ambitu ellipticae pinnatifidae, laciniis obtusatis apice breviter subacuminatis nullo modo aristatis, violaceae vel violaceo-coeruleae laxe villosae. Calix tubuloso- campanulatus, + patule pilosulus, superne violaceus, tubo infra labiolum aliq. constrieto, fauce intus villoso; labrum tridentatum, dente postico la- tissime ovato, lateralibus angustius ovalis, cum postico altius connatis, omnibus apice brevissime acuminatis, nullo modo aristatis; labioli dentes 2 ovato-lanceolati, apice bre- viter acuminati nec aristati. Corolla exserta, coeruleo- violacea, extus dense bre- viter pubescens, tubo ultra dentes calieinos antice in faucem ventricosulam am- pliato; labrum breve apice emarginatum; labioli deflexi labro longioris lobi laterales ovato-rotundati breves, me- dius major obcordatus. Ge- nitalia sub labro adscen- dentia, nec id superantia. Antherae glabrae. Planta 5—10 cm alta. Foliorum limbus superficie 3—4 x 3—4 mm, petiolus 2—3 mm longus, sinus inter lacinias 1 — 1,5mm profundi. Capitula sect. long. ad 2—3 x 1,5em. Calicis sub an- thesi 6—7 mm longi tubus cire. 4mm profundus, labri Fig. 4. Dracocephalum Paulsenit. */1.6. 2—3 mm longi sinus inter- dentales 1 mm profundi; labri dentes ad 2,5 mm longi. Corolla calicis os circ. 7mm excedens, labro 2,5 mm longo, labiolo 3—3,5 mm longo. Species a cl. Regel, Franchet et Fedtschenko cum D. discolori Bunge altaico confusa, ab eo optime differt bractearum laciniis et calicis dentibus apice brevissime ex culmine saepius subobtuso acuminatis, nec longe aristato-spinescentibus, ut et corolla minori. Species nostra D. Aucheri Boiss. nobis magis affinis esse videtur, a quo tamen foliis discoloribus non viscosis, bractearum forma etc. differt. Pamir: N. 619, at Bordo-ba (at the border of the Alai-steppe). Alt. 3500™, June 27. 1898; N. 784, on mountains at Tshatir Tash. Alt. 4200™, July 14. 1898; N. 991, on mountains near Jashil Kul. Alt. 3800™. July 29. 1898. 11. Dracocephalum pamiricum Briq., sp. nov. (Fig. 5). Herba parva hypogaee longe stolonifera, stolonibus fuscis squamigeris. — 240 — Caules procumbentes, ramosi, ramis breviter puberulis, internodiis brevibus. Folia ovata, apice obtusa vel rotundata, basi subcordata, petiolo quam lamina breviori instructa, margine regulariter crenata, utrinque breviter puberula, pallı- de virentia. Ver- ticillastri pluri- flori ad apices ramorum in Ca- pitula ovoidea magna foliosa congesti. Folia floralia (brac- teae) a caeteris foliis vix diversa calices aequan- tia. Bracteolae obovato - ellipti- cae vel obovato- lanceolatae, membranaceae, versus basem integrae, super- ne incisae, in- cisionibus ari- statis. Calix bre- vissime pedicel- latus, tubulosus, membranaceus, pallidus, brevi- ter pareissime puberulus; — la- brum tridenta- tum, dentibus ovato - acumina- tis, aristatis, al- Fig.5. Dracocephalum pamiricum. 12.9. tius connatis ; labiolum a labro sinu profundo separatum dentibus ovato-lanceolatis, angustioribus, aristatis; noduli ad sinus interlabiales parum conspieue evoluti. Corolla ex luteo ochroleuca extus puberula, labrum oblongum apice emarginatum; labiolum labrum aequans vel aliq. brevius, lobis lateralibus ovatis, medio obcordato. Genitalia sub labro corollino adscendentia occulta. Antherae glabrae. DA — Planta ad 10cm alta, stolonibus longissimis (in spec. nostr. ultra 20 em longis). Foliorum lamina superficie ad 2 x 1,5 cm sed saepe minor, crenae ad 1,5mm altae, petiolus vix 1 cm longus. Inflorescentia sect. long. ad 4 x 3 cm. Bracteolarum aristae 2—4 mm longae. Calicis 1,4 cm longi tubus cire. 7 mm profundus, labia 7 mm longa, labri dentibus sinibus 2—3mm profundis separatis, sinus inter labioli dentes 5 mm profundus. Corolla ealieis os cire. 1,3 cm excedens, labro 5—6 mm longo, labiolo 5mm longo. Species pulchra affinis est D. grandifloro L. et D. noduloso Rupr. Cum D. noduloso flores luteos commune habet, discrepat autem ab illo inflorescentia haud spicata, calice tantum ad sinus interlabiales obscure plicato-noduloso, dentibus calicinis omnibus aristatis, innovatione stolo- nosa etc. Pamir: N. 659, at Mus-kol. Alt. 4100™. July 2. 1898; N. 724, on mountains at Shatshan. Alt. 3800™. July 11. 1898. 12. Dracocephalum pulchellum Briq., sp. nov. (Fig. 6). Herba mediocris. Caules ex caudice lignoso crasso — fusiformi cre- berrimi adscendentes, internodiis infrafloralibus valde elongatis, parce puberuli, purpurascentes. Folia parva, membranacea, ovato-rotundata, basi cordata, margine regulariter crenata, inferiora longe, caulinaria brevius petiolata. Verticillastri ad apices ramorum in capitula globosa, cinereo- villosa, foliis parum mutatis suffulta congesti. Bracteolae ellipticae sub- integrae villosellae. Calix breviter pedicellatus tubulosus, laxe villosellus, vestimento demum —- deciduo et tune calix coerulescens, bilabiatus: labri dentes triangulari-lanceolati, acuminati, altius quam caeteri connati; labioli dentes lanceolato-acuminati sinu profundo separati. Corollae violaceae exsertae extus crispulo-pubescentis tubus superne antice aliq. ampliatus; labrum bilobum, lobis rotundatis; labioli longioris lobi laterales ovato- rotundati, medius major obovatus. Genitalia sub labro corollino adscen- dentia labrum corollinum modice excedentia. Antherae glabrae. Nuculae elongato-oblongae, fuscae. Planta infra 20 cm alta. Foliorum limbus superficie 5-10 x 4—8 mm, crenae ad 1,5 mm altae, petiolus (in basilaribus) ad 2,5 cm longus. Capitula diam. ad 1,5—2 cm. Pedicelli 2—3 mm longi. Calicis demum cire. 7—8 mm longi tubus circ. 5 mm profundus, dentes 2 mm longi; sinus interlabiales et sinus inter labioli dentes 2 mm profundi, sinus inter dentes labri cire. 1 mm profundi. Corolla calicis os 3—-4 mm excedens; labrum 1,5 mm, labiolum 2,5 mm longum. Genitalia labrum corollinum ad 2mm excedentia. Nuculae sect. long. 2 x 0,6 mm. Species pulcherrima cum D. stamineo Kar. & Kir. omnino quoad ha- bitum et calicis structuram comparanda, differt autem abunde bracteolis calicibusque laxe sublanato-villosellis nec tomentosis et staminibus multo brevius exsertis. Piamir: N. 1099, on mountains near the lake Jashil Kul. Alt. 4100™, Aug. 11. 1898. Fig, 6. Dracocephalum pulchellum. 13. 13. Dracocephalum Moldavica L. Pamir: N. 1432, prov. Wakhan, at Namatgut. Alt. 2700™. Sept. 27. 1898. 14. Lallemantia Royleana Benth. Samarkand: N. 261, in the steppe at Kerki. May 23. 1898; N. 121, 122, in the steppe at Chawast. May 7. 1898; Ferghana: N. 1623, at Osh. Apr. 10. 1899. — 943 — 15. Hypogomphia turkestana Bunge. Specimina hujus speciei a cl. Paulsen lecta nana sunt et dense cinereo- villosa. In N. 176 quidem caules simplices 3—4 cm alti et habitus pusillus, verticillastri biflori vel subbiflori, folia subintegra cum diagnosi H. deser- torum Benth. congruunt. Verisimillime non species diversae adsunt, sed varietates cujus revisio (incl. illis a cl. Regel descriptis) ulterius ex- ponere spero. Samarkand: N. 176, in steppe at Balan-Hur. May 12. 1898; N. 237. May 21. 1898; N.275, in the steppe at Chawast. May 23. 1898. 16. Brunella vulgaris L. Persia: N. 2166, in forests at Resht. Sept. 14. 1899. 17. Eremostachys labiosa Bunge var. canescens Reg. Mon. Gen. Erem. p. 9 (1886). Samarkand: N. 115, in steppe at Balan-Hur. May 6. 1898. 18. Eremostachys adpressa Reg. Mon. p. 12. Ferghana: N. 314, on a mountain near Osh. May 30. 1898. 19. Eremostachys nuda Reg. Mon. p. 14. Ferghana: N. 366, Agh Jer near Osh. June 16. 1898. 20. Eremostachys speciosa Rupr. Sert. Tiansch. p. 68 (det. O. P.). Ferghana: N. 363, at Langer near Osh. June 16. 1898. 21. Phlomis oreophila Karel. et Kir. Alai mountains: N. 569, at Olgin Lug. Alt. 3000™. 22. Lamium amplexicaule L. Samarkand: N. 99. May 6. 1898. 23. Lamium album L. Alai mountains: N. 467, in the Juniper forests at Olgin Lug. Alt. 2600m. June 21. 1898. 24. Lagochilus diacanthophyllus (Pall.) Benth. var. leiacanthus Reg. Descr. pl. nov. VII, 84 (1879). Pamir: N. 815, near the lake Jashil-Kul. Alt. 3800™. July 18. 1898. 25. Lagochilus Paulsenii Briq., sp. nov. (Fig. 7). Suffrutex ramis e caudice lignoso crasso adscendentibus, superne parce brevissime pilosulis inferne glaberrimis caesio-albicantibus. Folia trifida vel 5-pinnatifida, basi in petiolum alatum cuneata, ambitu ovato- triangularia, segmentis profunde incisis, partitionibus ultimis apice obtusis, omnibus perangustis, viridibus, parce pilosulis vel glabris. Spinae in axillis superioribus petiolum aequantes vel superantes, albae, laeves. Calix parcissime breviter pilosulus, mox glabrescens; lobi anguste elongato-ob- longi, apice obtusi, mucrone brevi spinescente aucti, tubo 2—3 longiores, nervis marginalibus inferne fere ad apicem conspicuis, anastomosibus paucis — 244 — parum prominulis. Corolla adhuc juvenilis alabastrum subinclusum vil- losum constituens. Planta cire. 25 cm alta. Foliorum partitiones divaricatae, laxae. Spinae ad 1,5 cm longae. Calicis tubus ad 1 cm longus, lobi 2— 2,5 cm longi et 3—4,5 mm lati. Species probabiliter saepius cum prae- cedente confusa, tanquam videre possumus diversa videtur. A L. diacanthophyllo (Fig. 7) discrepat calicis lobis tubum bis vel ter longioribus (nec subaequantibus vel parum superantibus), anguste oblongato-elongatis (nec ovato-oblongis), nervis marginalibus fere ad apices inferne conspicuis (in L. dia- canthophyllo tantum versus basin distinctis, superne longe in anastomoses irregulares Fig.7. Calyx Lagochili Paulsenii (ad sinistr.) et L.diacanthophylli å : £ (ad dextr.). 441.6. Aucheri Boiss. in mentem revocat; species abeuntibus). Longitudo calicis loborum L. nostra differt autem lobis margine minute puberulis (nec pulchre ciliatis), apice rotundatis mucrone additis (nee acuminatis ete.). Studis futuris constantia caracterum invocatorum com- probanda erit. Alai mountains: N. 416, at Sufi Kurgan. Alt. 2100m. June 18. 1898. | 26. Chamaesphacos ilicifolius Schrenk. Buchara: N. 201, in sandy desert at Jakatut. May 14. 1898. 97. Salvia silvestris L. Ferghana: N. 296, at Margelan. May 27. 1898. 28. Perowskya scrophulariifolia Bunge. Ferghana: N. 315, on a mountain at Osh. Alt. 1200m, May 30. 1898. 29. Ziziphora clinopodioides M. B. var. dasyantha (M. B.) Boiss. Pamir: N. 1049, at Jashil-Kul. Alt. 3800™. Aug. 5. 1898; N. 1005, ibid. Aug. 1. 1898. 30. Ziziphora tenuior L. Samarkand: N. 261 bis, in the steppe at Kerki. May 23. 1898. 31. Satureia Calamintha (L.) Scheele var. nepetoides (Jord.) Briq. Lab. Alp. mar. p. 438 (1895). Persia: N. 2159, in forests at Resht. Sept. 14. 1899. 32. Satureia debilis (Ledeb.) Brig. in Engl. u. Prantl Nat. Pflan- zenfam. IV, 3a p. 302 (1897). = Mi. Persia: N. 2179, prov. Gilan, in forests at Imam Sadé Hashim. Sept. 16. 1899. 33. Thymus Serpyllum L. var. angustifolins Wallr. Ferghana: N. 352, at Issik bulak near Osh. June 16. 1898. 34. Mentha aquatica L. var. persica Briq. var. nov. Planta circ. 25cm alta. Caulis ramosus, debilis, ramis divergenti- adscendentibus, gracilibus, breviter adpresse pubescentibus, superne cine- rascentibus. Folia pro specie parva, superficie 2—2,5 >< 1,5 — 1,8 cm, ovata, apice obtusa vel subobtusa, marginibus infra medium convexioribus, supra: viridia pubescentia, subtus pallide virentia, breviter adpresse prae- sertim ad nervos pubescentia, petiolo brevi densius vestito 5 mm longo praedita; nervatio simplex vel fere simplex, subtus alig. prominula; ser- ratura constans ex dentibus crenatis parvis, crebris, culminibus obtusius- culis cire. 0,5 mm altis et 1—2 mm distantibus. Capitula pro specie parva. Calix fere 3mm longus, extus subadpresse brevissime pubescens. Var. denticulatae H. Braun (in Verh. zool.-bot. Ges. Wien XL, 480 (1890); Brig. in Jace. Cat. fl. valais p. 441) valde affinis, differt indu- mento brevi plantam totam cinerascentem efficiente. Persia: N. 2162, in forests at Resht. Sept. 14. 1899. 35. Mentha longifolia Huds. subsp. Royleana Brig. in Engl. u. Prantl. nat. Pflanzenfam. IV, 3a p. 322 (1897). var. intercedens Briq., var. nov. Planta ad 50cm alta. Caulis adscendens, ramosus, ramis adscen- dentibus, breviter adpresse canescenti-pubescentibus, internodiis medio- cribus. Folia oblongo-lanceolata, ınediocria, superficie ad 4x 1,5 cm, apice acuminata, marginibus leviter convexis, basi subcordata, petiolo brevi incano 2—4 mm longo insidentia, utrinque breviter incano-tomentella, tomento glandulas sessiles occulente; nervatio simplex subtus haud pro- minula; serratura constans ex dentibus mediocribus, acutis, prorsus versis, culminibus infra 1 mm altis et 3—4 mm distantibus. Spicastrum satis debile, verticillastris (inferioribus exceptis) congestis, cinerascentibus. Calix parvus cire. 1,5 mm altus, tubo 1 mm profundo, dentibus lanceolatis vix ultra 0,5 mm longis. Var. tenellae Brig. (in Bull. Herb. Boiss. Il, 695, 1894) affinis a qua foliis utrinque incano-tomentosis differt. Eandem vel fere eandem plantam distribuit Litwinow sub no. 68 ex Turcomania ad rivulum Ashabadka. Transcaspia: N. 1780, at a stream near Merw. June 6. 1899. 36. Mentha longifolia Huds. subsp. modesta Briq. in Engler u. Prantl Nat. Pflanzenfam. IV, 3a p. 322. var. Pamirensis Brig. var. nov. — 246 — Planta cire. 50 cm alta. Caulis mediocris, inferne glabrescens, superne molliter adpresse pubescens. Folia in axe primario ovata vel ovato-sub- lanceolata, in ramulis flagellisque saepius lanceolata, utrinque cinereo- virentia et (praesertim subtus) molliter laxe pubescentia, majora superficie ad 4,5 x 2,3 cm; petiolo incano 1,4 mm aucta; nervatio subsimplex, vesti- mentum in pagina inferiori obscure subareolans; serratura constans ex dentibus sat robustis, dissitis, extus undulatis vel concavis, culminibus acutis prorsus versis 1—1,5 mm altis et 3—5 mm distantibus. Spicastrum breve, verticillastris einerascentibus congestis. Calicis 2 mm longi tubus 1,2 mm profundus, dentes lanceolati fere 0,8 mm _ longi. Var. thibetanae Brig. affinis, differt autem indumento molli, foliis subtus obscure subretinerviis, spicastro brevi, calice majori. Pamir: N. 1396, prov. Wakhan, at Torgus. Alt. 2900™. Sept. 19. 1898. 37. Mentha longifolia Huds. subsp. modesta Brig. in Engl. u. Prantl Nat. Pflanzenfam. IV, 3a p. 322 (1897). var. thibetana Briq. in Bull. Herb. Boiss. II, 697 (1894). Folia supra quam in spec. thibetanis magis pubescentia, dentes di- stantiores, sed caeterum vix sejungenda. Pamir: N. 1502, prov. Shugnan, at a stream near Misjus. Alt. 2400™. Oct. 10. 1898. Paulseniella Briq., gen. nov. Calix aperte campanulatus, breviter aequaliter quinquelobus, fauce nuda, fructifer auctus, membranaceus, campanulatim inflatus. Corolla minima, parum exserta; tubus cylindricus, intus nudus, limbus subaequa- liter breviter 5-lobus, lobis superioribus magis approximatis. Stamina 4 subinclusa, subaequalia, distantia, filamentis medio tubi corollini insertis, nudis; antherae biloculares loculis demum apice clipeatim confluentibus. Discus antice in glandulam tumens. Stylus apice aequaliter bifidus, ramis apice globoso-incrassatis. Nuculae ovoideae, tuberculoso-rugosae. — Species adhue unica. | 38. Paulseniella pamirensis Briq., sp. nov. (Fig. 8, 9). Herba annua, radice tenui fusiformi. Caulis mediocris, simplex vel subsimplex, parce patule pilosulus, inferne glabrescens et saepe pur- purascens, internodiis pluribus sensim decrescentibus. Folia oblongo- elliptica, apice obtusa vel subobtusa (summis tantum acutis), margine leviter convexe convergentibus, basi in petiolum brevem rotundato-cuneata, margine regulariter crenata, membranacea, viridia, parce pilosula vel glabrescentia; nervatio simplex, nervis lateralibus utrinque 7—9 parum prominulis. Verti- cillastri 6-flori in spicastra densa oblonga vel abbreviata terminalia et axillaria breviter pedunculata congesti; bracteae ovato-ellipticae, integrae, — 247 — pilosulae, calices subaequantes, nullo modo imbricatae; bracteolae multo minores angustioresque. Calix sub anthesi aperte campanulato-pateriformis, parvus, extus parce margine densius pilosulus lobis brevibus ovatis ob- tusis; maturus valde auctus inflato-campanulatus, membranaceus, 10-ner- Fig.8. Paulseniella pamirensis. 1126. vius, marginibus introrsum recurvis. Corolla minima, solitarie ex calice amplo exsertula, limbi marginibus longe villosellis. Nuculae sordide atro-brunneae. Pianta 20—25cm alta. Caulis internodia 5...4...3,5...3... Botanisk Tidsskrift. 28. Bind. 17 EONS etc. cm longa. Foliorum lamina superficie 2—5 >< 1—1,4 cm, crenae 1—1,5 mm altae et eorum culmina 2—3 mm distantia, petiolus 3—8 mm longus. Spicastra terminalia sect. long. ad 8 x 1,3 cm, lateralia minora; bracteae 3—4 mm longae. Calix sub " ; ti ; anthesi 3,5 mm altus, ore 3,5 mm latus, A iM lobis vix 0,5 mm altis; maturus sect. 63 Boy long. 5x 3 mm. Corolla calicis os i u / 2mm excedens, limbo infra 1 mm Hela lato. Nuculae sect. long. 2x 1,5 mm. Ey Genus novum distinctissimum in honorem el. Ove Paulsenii nominavimus. Pertinet ad tribum Stachyoideae-Pogoste- moneae, sed cum nullo genere hujus tribus confundi potest. Ab omnibus Fig. 9. Paulseniella pamirensis. enim differt calice sub anthesi ample Corolla aperta simul stamina campanulato-pateriformi, maturitate cam- ostendens. Stylus. jf panulatim inflato-aucto, corolla minima subaequali tubo exsertulo et limbo brevissimo, staminibus 4 aequalibus, styli ramis apice globoso-incrassatis. Habitu Elsholtziae ut et nuculis rugosis accedit, sed spicastrorum non dorsiventralium bracteae nullo modo imbricatae, et calicis corollaeque caracteres omnino diversi. A Pogostemone calicis corollaeque indole ut et stylo etiam longe differt. Pamir: N. 1379, prov. Wakhan, in fields at Sergin. Alt. 2900m, Sept. 16. 1898. KPH. BIANCO LUNO Arbejder fra den Botaniske Have i Kobenhavn. Nr. 42. Sertryk af Botanisk Tidsskrift. 28. Bind. København 1908 The Dasycladacex of the Danish West Indies. By F. Borgesen. The following treatise comprehends the species of Dasycladaceæ hitherto found in my material of alge collected during my three sojourns at the West Indies. In the arrangement of the genera I follow the system of Olt- manns in his “Morphologie und Biologie der Algen”. I. Dasycladee. Neomeris Lamouroux. N. annulata Dickie. Dickie, On the Alge of Mauritius (Journal Linnean Society, vol. 14 p. 198). H.Solms-Laubach, Ueber die Algengenera Cymopolia, Neomeris und Bornetella (Ann. du Jardin bot. de Buitenzorg, Vol. XI. 1893). Neomeris Kelleri Cramer, Ueber die verticillirten Siphoneen besonders Neomeris und Cymopolia (Neue Denkschrift. der schweiz. naturf. Gesell- schaft, Bd. XXX, 1887), and Ueber die verticillirten Siphoneen besonders Neomeris und Bornetella (Neue Denkschriften, Bd. 32, 1890). Besides the typical form, which I have collected in great quan- tities, I have found a few specimens which in the form and size of the sporangia show some difference. The sporangia were namely cylindrical about 2'/2 times as long as broad with the apex obtuse, —, rounded (see Fig. 1d). The spore was about 190, long and 70 u = broad. As to the size of the spores of N. annulata Solms (|. c. — p.71) gives the length to be 140» and the breadth 65—70y and te these dimensions agree very well with those of the common typical — form. But sometimes also other sizes are to be found, in one ES, Robe on | Mey min IC Fig.9. Acicularia Schenckii (Möb.) Solms. A. Ends of rays. B. Corona superior with hair-scars. ©. Corona inferior. Fig. A 10:1, fig. B and C 60:1. — 283 — inferior (Fig. 9 B and C) of almost the same oblong — cordate shape, with a rather deep sinus in the end turned outwards, deepest in the corona superior. Corona superior has two hair-scars one behind the other. Rather a large number of gametangia (about 200) were found in the rays of one of the specimens; they were about 60, broad, but I may mention that the plant was yet quite immature; the calcareous massula in which the gametangia ought to be embedded I was unable to see in this specimen. This species was found: St. Croix, at Longpoint most probably in shallow water; St. Thomas, the lagoon of Bovoni in shallow water; St. Jan, off Cruzbay in about 30 meters depth (only one specimen found), and off America Hill in about 16 meters depth (only two specimens found). KBH. BIANCO LUNO Fi Sole LÉ an, À : à» à FÅ i = mæ 7 ie, N = pis Hs ee ie Sn a La y= BETEN "EV J Le på i «| lire. ¥ 7 1 . || = Wee (| x wa = pis hls te dite hori. tas (Seine Ce gee HY DAY elt TT eue N ee Are ye parw eat BAAS Pr: ee er LOMME 4 | silo EEE Pern sis). (OUR LEE BA diniy Wo Andere Sei Neil EE Et Nos TRO, GET RSR note ET Vo arte NU Se ard + retail fy ur np DES oa 30 “AE | Man 09 Ugh? CIN ANT AT eh ee ale : ANNE AIS Tir" er Lena eed Intoganal ja eo le obo Saw RES TER .. MO ctl Her ho find ale weet Bee ie}, ï nc" \ : . ot > à ie 7 un MAT ANDI es WO <4 ESAS ba Nr tke FN re Ban sam of feces ru Bar EUTIN Dia NAN su = IPS) r 2 ee AR ty Arbejder fra den Botaniske Have i København. Nr. 4 | The Structure and Biology of Arctic Flowering Plants. Reprinted from MEDDELELSER OM GRONLAND= Vol. XXXVI. Copenhagen. Printed by Bianco Luno. 1908. Ericineæ (Ericacee, Pirolaceæ). 1. Morphology and Biology. By Eug. Warming. 1908: XXXVI. N DEC 16 1911 LIBRARY NEW YORK BOTANICAL GARDEN, The following notes on the Arctic Ericineæ were for the most part published as early as 1885—86 in Botanisk Tidsskrift (Köbenhavn); Det Kgl. Danske Videnskabernes Selskabs Oversigt; and Det Kgl. Svenska Vetenskaps Akademiens Bihang. But as they were written in Danish, they have been but little used by foreign botanists. They have now been collected and published in the presefit (36 th) volume of Meddelelser om Gronland in English, after having been supplemented by addi- tional observations and figures, some of which are old, but have not hitherto been published, while some are new, having been made during the present year (1907) and based upon the rich material belonging to the Botanical Museum in Copenhagen. The present notes are the first of a series upon the structure and biology of the Arctic flowering-plants which will probably be published by me and by several other Danish botanists; the object of publication is that they may serve as a basis for subsequent botanical studies by those who may work in Arctic countries, and who may thereby be enabled to make biological observations on the spot more quickly and with greater accuracy. I wish to mention here that when Exstam in 1894 (p. 419) wrote in regard to me that I “in einer Menge von Fällen nur in Alkohol aufbewahrtes oder getrocknetes Material zu seiner [9: meiner] Verfügung gehabt’ as regards the investigations in flower-biology of Scandinavian plants, this is not quite correct, and I never made the above statement. On the contrary, both during my travels in West Greenland in 1884 when, on board a Danish man-of-war, I visited the Danish colonies situated between 64° and 69° N. lat. (Godthaab, Sukkertoppen, Holstensborg, Egedesminde, Jakobshavn and Godhavn) and also during my travels in Finmark, in 1885, where I stayed for a long time at Bosekop, Kaafjord and Tromsø (69° —70° N. lat.) I have always been very careful, above all things to 1* study the plants in the field, or at least to base my investigations on living material found growing in the open, and to make accom- panying pencil sketches; afterwards I drew the published figures from spirit-material, but with continual reference to the notes and sketches made from the living material. In most cases I have investigated the biology of the flowers in their natural habitats. Almost all the figures have been drawn by myself, this applies more particularly to the flower-biology figures, a few only of the morphological figures have been drawn by others, under my super- vision. This first paper on the morphology of the structure of the flowers of the Ericineae will be followed by a second, on their ana- tomy, by Mr. Herning E. Petersen, Mag. sc. Copenhagen, December, 1907. The species mentioned in the following are: - Andromeda polifolia.............. p- 29 Arctostaphylos alpina............. p. 34 — Uva-Wist. PE oe p. 39 (Bryanthus coeruleus.............. p. 17) (Cassandra calycilata .. 2.5... 2... p. 32) Cassiope hypnoides:.........+.... p. 22 — HAART IDs CCE ee p. 25 Dedumspalusino, were ECC CEE EE pa 6 Loiseleuria procumbens ........... p- 13 Lyonia calyculata........+..+..-.- p. 32 Phyllodocexcocrwleay. 1). u bu ee pe: 19 Pirola’ minor oder: Bald yore ee p. 62 — ip UNION DES 2 sas! PACE lee p. 63 ei MONDEO. EEE a p. 56 UN ASCHE Sieh COCO EE p. 62 Rhododendron lapponicum ......... p. 10 Vaccinium Myrtillusan er 2er... p. 42 == ODYCOCCOR ta eee p. 53 — WLG LOS URE Een. p. 45 — Vitis TTADS ER do evo p. 49 Principal literature. ABROMEIT, J., 1899, Botanische Ergebnisse der ... unter Leitung Dr. v. Dry- galski ausgesandten Grönlandsexpedition. B. Samenpflanzen (Phanero- gamen). (Bibliotheca botanica, 42. Stuttgart.) DusÉN, P., 1901, Zur Kenntniss der Gefässpflanzen Ostgronlands. (Bihang t. K. Svenska Vet. Akad. Handl., 27. III.) Exsram, O., 1894, Zur Blütenbestäubung in den schwedischen Hochgebirgen. (Öfversikt af K. Svenska Vet. Akad. Förhandlingar.) — 1897, Einige blütenbiologische Beobachtungen auf Novaja Semlja. (Tromso Mus. Aarsskr., 18). HaGzunp, E, 1905, Ur de högnordiska Vedväxternas Ekologi. Akademisk Afhandling. Uppsala. KJELLMAN, F. R., 1883, Ur polarvaxternas lif. (Nordenskiölds Studier och Forskningar.) LinpMAN, C. A., 18872, Bidrag till kannedomen om skandinaviska fjellvaxternas blomning och befruktning. (Bihang till K. Svenska Vetensk. Akadem. Handl., 12.) — 1887), Blühen und Bestaubungseinrichtungen im Skandinavischen Hoch- gebirge. (Botan. Centralblatt, 30.) Porrius, B. R., 1903, Blombiologiska lakttagelser. (Acta Soc. pro Fauna et Flora fennica, 25, Vol. 1.) SKOTTSBERG, C., 1901, Einige blütenbiologische Beobachtungen im arktischen Teil von Schwedisch Lappland, 1900. (Bihang till K. Svenska Vetensk. Akad. Handlingar, 27.) SYLVÉN, N, 1906, Om de svenska Dikotyledonernas första förstärknings- stadium. Med 25 Tafl. (K. Svenska Vetenskapsakademiens Handlingar, Bd. 40, No. 2.) WARMING, EuG., 1884, Om Skudbygning, Overvintring og Foryngelse. (Natur- historisk Forenings Festskrift. Kjebenhavn.) — 1885, Biologiske Optegnelser om grønlandske Planter. 1. Crucifere, Ericineæ (with French Resume). (Botanisk Tidsskrift, 15.) — 18862, Om nogle arktiske Vexters Biologi. (Bihang till K. Svenska Vet. Akad. Handlingar, 12.) — 1886b, Om Bygningen og den formodede Bestovningsmaade af nogle grønlandske Blomster. (Oversigt over D. K. Danske Videnskabernes Selsk. Forhandl.) — Sur la structure et le procede presume de pollination chez quelques fleurs groenlandaises. (Résumé, ibid. pp. XXV—XXXIII.) — 1887, Om Gronlands Vegetation. (Meddelelser om Grenland, Vol. 12.) Muuuer, H., 1873, Die Befruchtung der Blumen durch Insekten. Leipzig. — The Fertilisation of Flowers. London, 1883. — 1881, Alpenblumen, ihre Befruchtung durch Insekten. Leipzig. Knut, P., 1898—1905, Handbuch der Blüthenbiologie. I—II. Loew, E., 1894, Blütenbiologische Floristik der mittleren und nördlichen Europa sowie Grönland. Stuttgart. SCHRÖTER, C., 1904—1908, Das Pflanzenleben der Alpen, eine Schilderung der Hochgebirgsflora. Zürich. LANGE, JoH., 1880, Conspectus Flore Groenlandice. (Meddelelser om Gren- land, Vol. 3.) — 1887, Tillæg til Grønlands Fanerogamer og Karsporeplanter. (Ib.) KOLDERUP ROSENVINGE, L., 1892, Andet Tillæg til Grønlands Fanerogamer og Karsporeplanter. (Meddelelser om Grønland, Vol. 3, pp. 647—749.) Ord. Hricacew. Ledum palustre L. with f. decumbens Ait. and f. groenlandica (Oed.). Lance, Con- spectus, p. 89. Kıerıman, 1883, p. 505. Warning, 1884, pp. 45, 47, 101. 1885, p. 189, fig. 12, 13; p. 205. 1886b, pp. 118, 125; 1886—87, p. 110. Porrius, 1903, p. 43. Haczunn, 1905, p. 28. Syrven, 1906, p. 133, tab. IX. Material from West Greenland and Finmark. A low shrub, in favourable localities attaining a height of as much as 1 m.; in the Arctic regions often found as a dwarf shrub (usually forma decumbens) with prostrate branches, and almost hidden by moss and lichens. The lower part of the stem is prostrate and curving, forming many, usually very slender roots; offshoots may be produced, but propagation by seed appears to be its normal mode of reproduction. | have not observed runners er stolons with scale-leaves; the growth of the primary root appears to be very strong, and according to Hacıusp a great number of branches arise more or less irregularly from the base of the primary shoot. The foliage-leaves remain green two (or three) years; the under sides are densely covered by woolly hairs of a rusty colour. The margins are more or less revolute (Fig. 1). The size of the leaves, both as regards breadth and length varies considerably under differing conditions of life (see Kyrrımas. Lance and Warmine). According to Haczox» the largest leaves occur on basal shoots and on those which have remained for several years in a vegetative condition. The buds are protected by scale-leaves, and the limit of each year’s growth is distinctly marked (Fig. 1). A branch generally requires two or more years to attain the maturity required for flowering. According to Haciunp the plant flowers periodically every other year; I have found from two to four years to intervene between the flowering periods. The plant flowers in spring. The inflorescence is a terminal, many-flowered umbelliform raceme. The flowers are formed during the summer previous to that in which they open, and are enclosed in a terminal bud which is protected by scale- leaves, and is somewhat larger and more globular Fig. 1. Ledum palustre var. decumbens Disko; June 8, 1907 (slightly magn.). (Fig. 1 A and Dj. Foliage- 4, A floral terminal bud. 2, Portion of a branch i with limits of two year's growths. C, A leaf, dorsal leaves do not occur on this view. D, A branch like 4, but with vegetative terminal bud. (E. W., 1907.) than are the vegetative buds flowering year's-growth. After setting fruit the whole of the floral year’s-shoot dies. Immediately below it there is developed during the summer either a single branch or several (as many as five), rather closely placed, and often arranged almost in a (spurious) whorl. The rest of the main shoot remains branchless. The flowers emit a powerful perfume which evidently increases towards night. The question arises whether the strong scent of the whole plant may not be in this as in other cases a guide to insects. The polypetalous corolla is saucer-shaped, about 1 cm. across (Fig. 2); and white, or more rarely pink. The filaments are white. The flower of the broad-leaved form has five to ten stamens; the number varies because some of the antipetalous stamens, which are always shorter than the antisepalous, are often suppressed; in the flower of the narrow-leaved form (f. decumbens), the number of the stamens is generally ten." The filaments are glabrous except in the lower part, a short distance above the base, where they are covered with short projecting hairs (Fig. 2 B, F); these hairs probably serve to retain the honey. The anthers are glabrous and have no appendages (Fig. 2 B, G, H). Fig. 2. A-H, Ledum palustre f. groenlandica; I, L. palustre var. decumbens. (From West Greenland; July, 11, and 12, 1884.) A, Open flower. B, Stamens and pistil of a completely closed bud; the pores are open. C, Pollen tetrad. D, Stigma seen from above. Z, Base of the pistil. 7, Base of a filament. G, H, Anthers. J, Open flower. (E. W., 1885.) The plant is protogynous for a short time and then homo- gamous. The pores at the apex of the anthers are open in the bud while the latter is still quite closed, and while the stamens as yet are highly twisted and lie close to the pistil (Fig. 2 B 1 Unlike BERGGREN (Fanerogamfloran, p. 856) I have been unable to find any constant difference between the flowers of the narrow-leaved forms and those of the broad-leaved (Fig. 2 A shews that of f. grönlandica, with 6 stamens and Fig. I that of f. decumbens). G, H), consequently, the pollen-grains (Fig. 2 C) might be shed at that time, but we can scarcely think that this occurs until the flowers open and the anthers as well as the pollen-grains are dry. In the full-blown, expanded flower, the stamens are widely spreading (Fig. 2 À, I), and the stigma is ripe (glistening). The latter consists of five small protuberances seated upon the apex of the style which is flat and has a sharp edge (Fig. 2 D). Self-pollination appears rather difficult unless the wind transfers the pollen to the stigma; in this connection an important feature to note is undoubtedly that the inflorescence comprises so many flowers, and that they occur so closely together that geitonogamy may take place. Cross-pollination by insects may easily take place, and many kinds of insects are doubtless able to obtain the honey which is secreted abundantly and in large drops at the ten-lobed base of the ovary (Fig. 2 E), and is retained by the hairs which occur upon the basal parts of the stamens. In Fig. 3. Ledum palustre. Greenland Ledum palustre var. decum- (From West Greenland.) Ripe capsule in natural position. bens is visited by Argynnis chariclea Herbst; but in a garden near Copenhagen I have seen dead or dying individuals of three kinds of flies (most frequently Empis chioptera Fall., then Rhamphomyia hybrida Zett., and a species of Microphorus (velutinus?) adhering to it by their wings and legs; the cause of death is unknown; the strong perfume appears to stupefy them. Porrius observed a number of insect-visitors (1. c.). The ovary is covered with two kinds of hairs, viz. small, shiny, pearl-like glandular hairs, and setaceous hairs (Fig. 2). 10 As a rule the fruit ripens; this is at least the case in the most southernly and the central parts of West Greenland. The capsule has septieidal dehiscence; the valves open from the base towards the apex and persist, this should be connected with the fact that the capsule is inverted and nods on the curving stalk (Fig. 3). Rhododendron lapponicum Wahlbg. WARMING, 1885, p. 185, fig. 11; p. 205. Asromerr, 1899, pp. 49, 51. Skorrsperc, 1901, p. 15. Dusty, 1901, p. 42. Hacronp, 1905, p. 18. Syrves, 1906, p. 133. Material from Greenland and Finmark. A dwarf shrub, as much as 20—25 cm. high; the irre- gularly branching stems are often much curved. It may also occur as an espalier-like shrub, closely pressed to the ground; in the latter case a great number of dormant buds develop from the axils of the lower leaves, due to the fact that many of the branches die at their apex (Hacruno). The primary root is strong, often thick and irregularly curved. Slender adventitious roots may arise on damp soil, but very sparingly, and the stems do not appear to produce offshoots. The year’s growths are short (from I to 3 cm.) and have a few (only as many as 8) closely set leaves (Fig. 6 #). The buds are protected by a few arched scale-leaves (Fig. 4); the bud-scars and the limits of each year's growth are distinctly marked. The leaves have been observed to come out in June- August. According to Hacruso the primary shoot lives for a few years and then dies down, and new shoots arise from its base. The branches live 3—4 or more years in a vegetative condi- tion before they flower. They branch but sparingly. The foliage-leaves remain green on the branches some two years and then fall. Those of the last year are fresher II green in colour than are the older ones, which are more down- wardly directed (Fig. 4 F). The flowers, numbering from two to six, are aggregated in a terminal, umbelliform inflorescence which arrests the growth of the branch, and which passes the winter protected by arched scale-leaves (Fig. 4 F). The floral buds are larger and more globose than are the vegetative ones (cf. Fig. 4 A and F). No foliage-leaves occur between the scale-leaves and the inflorescence. Fig. 4. Rhododendron lapponicum. (From Greenland.) A, Vegetative bud in early spring (June 19, 1887). F. Branch with a floral terminal bud (from field in East Greenland bare of snow; Nov. 4, 1891). B, C, D, Various parts of its flowers (more highly mag.). Z, Young flowers from the same floral bud. (E. W.. 1907.) After flowering two or more new shoots arise immediately below the dead apex of the shoot and dichotomy takes place. The flowers, which have large, thin bracts, scale-like and curved, erect or more or less inclined, are formed during the year previous to that in which they expand and reach in the development of their different parts at least to the stages shewn in Fig. 4 B—E. The corolla is widely bell-shaped (12—17 mm. wide) and purple in colour: in its interior, immediately above its base, it bears a ring of short hairs, probably as a protection to the honey which is secreted by the low, ring-shaped and some- 12 what lobed disk below the ovary (Fig. 5 B, D). The hairs which occur at a corresponding height on the swollen part of the filaments (Fig. 5 £) may also serve to protect the honey. Some of the antipetalous stamens are often suppressed so that the stamens of the flowers vary in number from five to ten; and 4-merous corollas may occur together with 5-merous (Fig. 6 A, B, C). The stamens project beyond the corolla, and are widely spreading so that the anthers are at a distance from the stigma (Figs. 5, 6). They are generally bent downwards towards the front or lower side of the flower. The stamens have no appendages or other projections, but dehisce at the apex by two large Fig. 5. Rhododendron lapponicum pores (Figs. 5, 6). (From West Greenland). i 2 A, Flower (2/1). 2, Another flower, front view (5/1). C, Stigma. The Ovary 1S D, Pistil (the style should not have been drawn thicker covered by peltate towards the apex). Z, Stamen. (E. W., 1885.) glandular hairs as is also the case with the leaves (Figs. 4, 5, D); evidently because assimilation takes place in it as in the latter. Generally the style is so long that the stigma stands at the same level as the anthers and cannot touch the latter when they bend inwards towards it (Fig. 5). But it may also happen that the stamens are half the length of the pistil (Fig. 6 L). At Godhavn I found flowers, the stamens of which were short and appeared to have smaller anthers which could scarcely 13 dehisce and the pollen of which was abnormal (Fig.6 @, H). They must be regarded as female flowers. The style is long and the stigma has 5 protuberances (Figs. BU). The flowers are homogamous or very slightly protogynous; they are evidently adapted for cross-pollination by insects, but self-pollination may also take place. According to SKOTTSBERG they have in Lapland a very strong perfume suggestive of that of the rose. Fig. 6. Rhododendron lapponicum. (From West Greenland; July 15, 1884.) A, B, Various forms of flowers (slightly mag.) C, Floral diagram. 9, Diagram of a dehisced capsule. £, Branch in spring. F, Leaf. G, Flower with sterile stamens. H, A stamen of the same; tetrads are developed, but appear to be abnormal. J, Normal anther which is open. X, Stigma. Z, Flower with normal stamens. (E. W.) Pollen may occur in quantities in the open anthers at the same time that the stigma is viscid, and pollen may be found on the stigma of flowers which have not as yet fully expanded. The plant is chiefly propagated by seed. The capsules ripen both in West and in East Greenland (Angmagsalik). Loiseleuria procumbens (L.) Desvaux. Warming, 1885, p. 181, fig. 9, p. 204. 1886 b, p. 126. Linpman, 1887, p. 73. Sxorrsperc, 1901, p. 16. Hacronp, 1905, p. 21. Exsram, 14 1894, p. 428. Porrius, 1903, p. 44. Syzven, 1906, I, p. 132, tab. IX. H. Mürter, 1881, p. 377, fig. 151, and (under the name of Em- petrum nigrum L.) p. 171, fig. 67. Schröter, 1904, pp. 129— 136. Material from West and East Greenland, Sweden and Norway. A dwarf shrub with a strong primary root. The branches are more or less prostrate (Fig.7 C), their lower parts are often hidden by moss and other plants and covered by soil; they may attain to a thickness of about one centimetre and are more or less curving. Roots often arise from the stem especially on damp soil, but they are generally hair- like; they may however become strong and then new plants may arise. According to Haczunn and Syrven the primary shoot dies in the second year or later (after Fig. 7. Loiseleuria procumbens. 4—5 years) and is replaced by (From West Greenland.) strong lateral shoots. A, Part of a shoot showing the mode of 2 3 branching; 7 signifies the main axis, and The year s shoots are bran- II a lateral axis of the ist order. B, A £ PRE similar shoot; to the leaf a belongs the ched; the first internode of the Branch ag; to, tg; to.c/ eG, A flowering. branches of the first- order mE branch (reduced one-half). (E. W., 1907.) elongated (Fig. 7). Scale-leaves are absent, but the basal parts of the leaves are erect and protect the young parts which occur between them (Fig. 7). The leaves live a couple of years (according to Haczund three years) and after death may sometimes persist for a long time, black and decaying upon the branches, before they crumble away and turn into mould; but as a rule they disappear quickly. The branches sometimes continue growing for several years before they are stopped by an inflorescence. At the 15 end of the floral branches from two to four flowers arise from the axils of bracts, or the two lower ones may occur in the axils of foliage-leaves. Each flower has two bracteoles at its base (Fig.8 E, C). Between the flowers the abortive apex of the main-shoot may be observed (Fig. 8 D). The same plant appears sometimes to flower several years in succession; the flowering plants have often only two pairs of foliage-leaves on the shoots and are extremely rich in flowers. After fructification the flowering part of the shoot dies and branches arise from the axils of the foliage-leaves which occur Fig. 8. Loiseleuria procumbens. A Pistil and part of the calyx (from West Greenland). 8, Shews the form of the open flower (West Greenland); about 5/4. €, a flower-bud with its two bracteoles (br). D, Apical portion of a branch; on each side of the dead apex of the shoot (/) which had borne a flower, occur two buds (Z/) in the axils of the two upperniost leaves (Upernivik; Aug. 30, 1886). Æ, Flower-stalk with its two bracteoles (br), F, G, Parts of a flower-bud (Iceland; Sept. 10). 4, Diagram of calyx, petals, and carpels (cp). (E. W., 1907.) immediately below so that the branching becomes dichotomous. In favourable localities great numbers of adventitious shoots are formed (Hactonp). The median petal is anterior. The carpels are antipeta- lous when they are of the same number as the petals (Fig. 8 4), but often they are fewer in number. 4- or 6-merous flowers are sometimes met with. The flowers are formed during the year previous to that in which they open, and by the beginning of winter have large pistils and stamens (Fig. 8 F, G). All the parts of the flower are glabrous. The flowers 16 (Fig. 8 B) are not fragrant, but they bloom a very long time. The corolla is brilliantly coloured, rose-red or crimson. The Greenland and Scandinavian specimens (Fig. 9 4) — as also those from Switzerland, according to H. Mi:rer — are from 4°5 to 6 mm. in diameter. I have seen specimens from the north of Sweden measuring as much as 7 to 8mm. in diameter (Fig. 9 F). The corolla falls off without carrying the stamens with it. In Greenland the flower is at first protogynous for a short time, and then a long homogamous period ensues. This is also Fig. 9. Loiseleuria procumbens. (From West Greenland.) A, Flower seen from above. 3, Stamen (1/1). C, Pistil in longitudinal section, and a stamen (1/:1).] D, Pollen tetrad. Z, Anther seen from the dorsal side (26/1). £, Outline of a corolla. (E. W., 1885.) the case in Scandinavia, Nova Zembla, and in the Alps (Warming, Linpmay, Exstam, Ricca, and H. Müzrer). According to Linpman the female stage begins even in the bud. In Italy the flower is, according to Ricca, markedly protogynous. H. Mürrer is of opinion that spontaneous self-pollination can only occur when the flowers close in unfavourable weather, or remain closed, for under other conditions the anthers are too far from the stigma (Fig. 9 A). In Greenland the weather appears to have very little influence on the flower as the stamens in rainy weather at most curve perhaps slightly more inwards towards the 17 pistil. During rain the flowers may be filled with water. But judging from Miller's figure, the anthers in the Greenland and the Scandinavian specimens appear on the whole to stand closer to the pistil than in the Alpine specimens; sometimes even they are in direct contact with it (Fig. 9 A); the stamens are more erect than those in the plants from Central Europe, or they may even be curved inward; so that spontaneous self-pol- lination is inevitable. Linoman also mentions movements of varia- tion and self-pollination, but Exsram did not observe any such movements, he even refers it to ‘‘Alpenpflanzen bei denen immer die Narben mit dem Blütenstaube der eigenen Staub- beutel bestreuet auftraten.” In Greenland, honey is secreted abundantly by the ring- shaped, lobed nectary at the base of the ovary (Fig. 8 A). In Greenland I have seen small flies in the flowers; ‘at the top, near the region of snow” Wormsxion observed a butterfly sucking at one of the flowers, so cross-pollination appears sometimes to take place. The fruit ripens in East and West Greenland and in Fin- mark. But the fruit formed does not always ripen the year the plant flowers, in which case it appears to perish. After the corolla has fallen off the calyx closes round the ovary. Phyllodoce coerulea (L.) Gren. & Godr. Phyllodoce taxifolia Salisb. Bryanthus coeruleus (L.) Dippel. Warming, 1885, p.170, figs. 3, 4; p. 203; 1886a, p.19. LinpMay, 1887, p. 72, tab. IV, fig. 39. Exsram, 1897, p. 428. A. Creve, 1901, p. 43. Sxorrsperc, 1901, p. 12. Poppivs, 1903, p. 43. Hacrunr, 1905, p.13. Syzvéx, 1906, p. 132. Material from Greenland, Norway (Finmark) and Sweden. An evergreen dwarf shrub; the branches are more or less prostrate and produce slender roots, generally few in number; according to Haczunn they occur abundantly on damp soil. XXXVI. 2 18 The primary root is strong; the adventitious roots may some- times also become strong, and then new plants may be produced by their agency (Haczunp). Dormant buds occur. According to Haczuxp the primary stem grows monopodially for some years, then it dies and is replaced by new shoots which arise from the base; these shoots die after a period of three to four years and are replaced by three to four new shoots near the apex (compare also Syzvé). Fig. 10. Phyllodoce coerulea (Bryanthus coeruleus). (From West Greenland; July 7, 1884.) A, B, Two branches with flowers (West Greenland; July 5, 1884); slightly reduced. €, A leat in dorsal view; length 9mm. D, A leaf which has a flower situated in its axil. Z, Stamen with short hairs upon it; and some hairs from it more enlarged. F, Valve from a cap- sule seen from the inner side. @, A leaf-bud in the act of opening (July 6, 1884). A, Branch in spring; J and //, shoots-of different order. J, Diagram of flower (the sta- mens omitted). A, Longitudinal section of a flower. (E. W.) Not until then, and therefore when it is several years old, does it appear that the plant flowers. According to Haczunn the buds are naked, but I am of opinion that the short, brown and somewhat erect leaves, which usually decay quickly, and which occur at the base of each year’s shoot and are 19 instrumental in marking the limits of each year’s growth fairly distinctly, ought strictly speaking to be called scale-leaves (see Fig. 10G, H). The year’s growths are rather short, only from one to two cm. long. According to Hacıunv assimilation may take place in the foliage-leaves for several years, but no definite proof of this has been given. In Greenland I found three-years-old leaves which were still green. The flowers, numbering from one to six, are situated at the apex of the branches (Fig. 10 A, 6); they spring from the axils of the foliage-leaves which occur immediately below the rudimentary uppermost parts of the BØR branches. After flowering the whole of the floral É portion of the shoot dies. The leaves, which subtend the flowers (Fig. 10 D) are relatively broader than the other foliage-leaves (Fig. 10 C; Fig. 11) anda smaller The flowers have two thin bracteoles at the base of their stalk (Fig. 12 A). After the floral portions of the shoots have portion of their margin is rolled back. | Fig. 11. ; ä ; : : i à Phyllodoce arise in the axils of the leaves immediately below leu died, two to several new foliage-bearing shoots them. (Bryanthus There is a certain periodicity in the plants oe flowering, and this is the case with the plants in a en the whole of the district in question. Thus the species flowers sparingly or scarcely at all during certain years, and then there follows a year rich in flowers (Hactunp). The flowers are formed during the year previous to that in which they open. The following I find to be the ‘‘flower-biology;” the account differs considerably from that of Axerr (1869). In Greenland the flowers are among the earliest spring flowers, they are very conspicuous, being raised into the DES 20 air on long stalks (Fig. 10). The violet-purple, urceolate corollas, which are covered with red glandular hairs, usually turn their throats downwards (Figs. 10, 12). I have found the flowers to be scentless (Bessers mentions them as fragrant). They are 9 to 11 mm. in length. The flower is protogynous for a short time (Greenland and Finmark), and then becomes homogamous (as also observed by Linpman and Exstam). Even in the bud, while the anthers are still Fig. 12. Phyllodoce coerulea (Bryanthus coeruleus). From West Greenland, A, A young flower which has just expanded; only two of the anthers have opened: pollen already seen upon the stigma (July 6, 1884). B, A flower the anther and stigma of which are at the same level. €, A third flower, also young, newly expanded, in which, as in 2, the pores and stigma occur at the same height, 1/3 to */3 that of the corolla; the anthers are full of pollen: only the long stamens are open; quantities of pollen occur upon the stigma. D, The same flower as C, seen from above; the glandular hairs are omitted. Z, The pistil and the nectary seen from above. 7, Anther. G, Pollen tetrad. 47, Base of the flower- stalk with the two bracteoles. (E. W., 1885.) closed, the five-lobed stigma (Fig. 12 E) is glistening and viscid; but immediately upon the slight expansion of the corolla the anthers on the longest stamens may be found to have dehisced and the pollen-tetrads (Fig. 12 G) to have been shed upon the stigma. There are two elongated pores at the apex of the anthers (as shewn in Fig. 12 F) which have no appendages. The pollen may be so dry and may lie so loosely in the anthers that when the flowers are shaken slightly it flies out 21 of the latter as clouds of dust. I very often found shed pollen upon the inner parts of the flower. Self-pollination must undoubtedly take place easily because the anthers always stand around the style with their pores turned towards the stigma which is below or almost on the same level with them (Fig. 10 AK; Fig. 11 A). Almost all the tetrads I found on the stigma occurred at its edge. The normal arrangement seems to be for the anthers to stand immediately below the stigma or around it. I find that both in Greenland and in Finmark some variations occur in the relation between the stamens and the pistil, as also may be seen from the figures. The stigma may occur from 1 to 2 mm. above the anthers. But I have not found the anthers to stand as close to the stigma in the European as in the Greenland flowers (Fig. 10 K). These differences in the relative length of the organs in question do not seem to depend upon the age of the flower; the anthers appear however to stand closer to the stigma in the young flowers than in the older ones. Linnman has also noticed these variations, and has observed the stigma to be situated even lower than the base of the anthers (l.c. p. 72). The flower is also distinctly adapted for cross-pollination by insects. This may take place easily when an insect thrusts its proboscis through the narrow throat of the corolla down to the honey, which is secreted by a yellow, ten-lobed nectary (Fig. 12 E). The filaments are hairy at their bases, the hairs serving in this as in other cases to retain the honey in the drooping flower (Fig. 10 E; Fig. 12 A). We may assume humble bees to be among the insect- visitors. In Finmark | saw them visit the flowers, and on the Dovre Lisoman saw Bombus alpinus, in Lapland Sxorrsperc Bombus serimshiranus D., in Varanger Porrius Bombus lapponicus Fabr. and B. nivalis Dheb. do so. In Finmark | often observed styles and stamens which had been bitten off by ants. After fertilisation the corolla falls off and the calyx with wo mw its glandular hairs closes on the ovary, which is also covered with glandular hairs. The fruit, which is a septicidal capsule (Fig. 10 F), ripens both in West and East Greenland. It is seated upon an upright, straight stalk. The carpels are antipetalous (Fig. 10.J) and the lobes of the stigma antisepalous; the arrangement of the parts of the flower is the same as in the Ericacee. Cassiope hypnoides (L.) Don. Warmine, 1885, p. 170, figs. 7, 8; 1886—87, p.113. Linpmay, 1887 a, p. 71, tab. III, fig. 37. Exstam, 1894, p. 428. ABROMEIT, 1899, p. 49. Skorrspere, 1901, p. 12. Haczunn, 1905, p. 26. SyLvEn, 1906, p. 131. Material preserved in spirit, and observations from Green- land and the north of Scandinavia. A creeping dwarf shrub with a strong primary root. The prostrate, woody stems, which are often covered by moss and soil, frequently give off many very slender, but much branched roots. Hence it may spread over large patches of ground and break up into independent plants. The stems branch sparingly, generally with one to two branches from the upper part of the year’s shoots, especially when the latter produce flowers. But owing to the shortness of the year’s shoots numerous branches often occur crowded together into dense cushions. The buds have no scale-leaves, but the year’s shoots have small foliage-leaves at their bases, the limits of each year’s growth are therefore not distinctly marked. The stems are slender (usually about 1 mm. thick), but may attain to a thickness of 4mm. The wood of an 11-vears- old branch, according to Haciunp, was only 1°25 mm. in diameter, its largest annual ring being 0°25 mm. The foliage-leaves are more or less erect (Figs. 13, 14); they remain several years on the branches, but very possibly 23 are unable to perform their functions for more than two, or at the most three, years. In exposed, dry situations the older leaves often become quite colourless. The flowers occur singly at the apex of the branches, and are drooping (Fig. 13). The leaves at the base of the peduncles are shorter and broader, and more scale-like than the usual foliage-leaves (Fig. 14 Fi. The flowers are formed in the bud during the year previous to that in which they expand (Fig. 14 B). The calyx and peduncle are deep-red in colour. The bell-shaped corolla is white with purple teeth and is widely expanded, hence no hairs occur upon its interior (Fig. 15). Above their slender bases the filaments become very thick (being broader than those in C. tetragona), and are covered with small pointed warts (Fig. 15 Fj; they stand close to the ovary, with their long, hairy appendages directed straight out- wards (Fig. 15 A. Bj. The pores are elongated (Fig. 15 E, Fy; at first they turn downwards, after- Fig. 13. Cassiope hypnoides. Part of a plant: 7/1. (E.W., 1885). wards upwards (consequently in the drooping flower downwards). Lixpuax points out that the appendages must be shaken before the pollen (Fig. 14 C) can be shed. The style is conical and very thick at the base (Fig. 15 C). The carpels are antipetalous, and the flower is obdiploste- monous. In the material from Greenland the apex of the style is evenly rounded off so that the stigma is not very prominent (Fig. 14 E; Fig. 15. A, Cı. Lixpwax and Exstam found the latter to be more distinct, occurring as a flat, somewhat rough disk. The flower is homogamous or perhaps protandrous for a 24 short time (Warmine, Exstam), according to Linpmax protogynous- homogamous (Norway, the Dovre). As the anthers dehisce in the still incompletely open flower, and the stigma may also be shiny, pollination will, in all probability, take place immediately the flower expands (Fig. 14 D). Pollen is at that time seen shed and lying on the inner parts of the flower. Honey is secreted by the slightly lobed, ring-shaped disk at the base of the ovary (Fig.15 C) and appears to be retained there between and outside the basal parts of the stamens; Fig. 14. Cassiope hypnoides. 4, The flower still in a bud; 4/1 (Disko; July 20, 1884). 8, A flower is within the bud (Upernivik; Sept. 2. 1886). C, Pollen tetrad. D, Even in a flower of this age the anthers are open, and the pollen has fallen out (Disko; July 22, 1884). 2, Apex of the style shewing stigma covered with mucilage. #, Base of a peduncle with the surrounding leaves (those in front have been removed). G, Capsule. (E. W.) in effecting this the small warts on the filaments (Fig. 15 F) most probably play a part. Self-pollination as well as cross-pollination by insects appears to be able to take place. According to SxorrsserG the flowers are slightly fragrant in Lapland and are visited by Bombus lapponicus. | The plant sets ripe fruit in East and West Greenland, in Iceland and in Scandinavia (Fig. 13; Fig. 14 G). In West Greenland | have seen specimens which had abundant fruit from the previous year, but were barren in the present year. Norman and Haczunn have made similar observations; therefore it may be assumed that flowering and barren years alternate. 25 After. flowering the pedicel rises straight into the air and the sepals close round the valves of the fruit (Fig. 13; Fig. 14 G), Fig. 15. Cassiope hypnoides. (From West Greenland.) A, Flower in longitudinal section. B, Flower seen from above. C, Pistil with the slightly lobed nectary. D,E,F, Stamens. (E. W., 1885.) Cassiope tetragona (L.) Don. Warmine, 1885, p.175, figs.5, 6; p.203; 1886 b, p.118 ; 1886 — 87, p. 108, fig. 2. Exsram, 1898, p.9. Apromeir, 1899, p. 48. Anpversson & Hesserman, 1900, p.43. Hasıunv, 1905, p.24. Syrven, 1906, I, p. 130, tab. IX. Material preserved in spirit from Greenland, Spitzbergen and Finmark; observations from Greenland and Finmark. A dwarf shrub of the Calluna-type. The older stems, which attain, although rarely, to a length of from !/2 to */4 metre, are prostrate and form extremely slender and abundantly branch- ing roots; they are often overgrown by mosses, lichens and other plants as also covered by soil. The plant has a strong primary root which keeps alive during the whole of its life, while the adventitious roots are not of much importance. The present species is chiefly or almost exclusively propagated by seed. The primary shoot has been described by Sytven. The cotyledons are oval. The primordial leaves and the second year’s leaves are flat. After that the leaves gradually attain the well-known form which is shewn in my figures 16 and 17 and in Hessıns E. Perersen’s figure. 26 The growth ofthe stem is monopodial, the flowers occurring singly in the axils of leaves (Figs. 16, 17), the lateral branches are few in number, being developed generally from the basal parts of the year’s shoots, and especially below floral year’s-shoots (Fig. 16 G); they often arise from the axils of opposite leaves and are therefore themselves opposite (Fig. 17 C). The limits of each year’s growth are not distinctly marked, scale-leaves being absent from the winter buds (Fig. 16 A, E), but the year’s Fig. 16. Cassiope tetragona. (From West Greenland.) A, Apical part of a branch (Upernivik; July 30. 1887). B, Transverse section of a branch shewing the decussate position of the leaves. C, Capsule (about 3/1). D, the flower for the next year is already formed (Godhavn: June 14, 1907; 200m. above the level of the sea). E, Apical part of a branch with flowers formed in its upper part; about >/1 (God- havn: June 14, 1907). F, G, Branches shewing several year’s growths (the asterisks indicate their limits). G, A shoot with lateral branches, g and g!, and fruits (7 and f!) from the two previous years (about ?/ı). j growths have at their base only foliage-leaves, which are smaller, though only slightly so, than are the other foliage-leaves; there- fore the shoots are distinctly thinner at the limits of each year's growths (Fig. 16 F, G). The lateral buds are protected by the subtending leaves. The lateral shoots are often dwarf shoots. The foliage-leaves on each year’s shoot number from about eight to twenty-four. They remain green two to three years. 27 but persist in a decaying and colourless condition for many years (Fig. 17 C). The flowers occur laterally upon the lower part of the year’s shoots; each has four bracteoles at the base of its stalk (Fig. 18 C; Fig.16 D). They are obdiplostemonous and the carpels are antipetalous. They are formed during the year previous to that in which they open, and pass the winter in a fairly well-developed condition (Fig. 16 D, E; Fig. 17 C). The same shoot may flower several years in succession (Fig. 16 G). The corolla is yellowish- white and emits a perfume, which recalls that of the Lily of the Valley (Convallaria ma- jalis), but ‘is not powerful, and is strongest in the evening. t is bell-shaped and nods with down-turned throat on its Fig. 17. Cussiope tetragona. (From curving stalk (Fig. 17). Its West Greenland). = a 5 ee A, A branch with flower; g, new lateral shoot: length is from 7 to 8 (8 9) mm. B, The same in transverse section. C, A branch The length of the pistil is recently cleared of snow (July 12, 1884); the dark leaves are dead. (E. W., 1885.) about */4 of that of the corolla, and the stigma is situated almost at the throat (Fig. 18 A). The anthers, as illustrated in Fig. 18 A, stand at about the middle of the corolla. The filaments are only slightly thicker at their bases than at their apices (Fig. 18). The anthers are black; their pores are elongated, turned upwards, and are open even in the bud. The appendages which are long and slender, are covered with small, stiff hairs (Fig. 18 5); they spread hori- zontally from the anthers and reach well towards the sides of the corolla, so that an insect on thrusting its proboscis into the latter in search of the honey which is secreted by the yellowish-coloured disk below the ovary (Fig. 18 A, D), must 28 inevitably touch them and thereby scatter the pollen tetrads, of this we may easily convince ourselves by experiment. On examining flowers in the fields | have found masses of pollen shed upon anthers, style and stigma. The plant is at first protandrous for a short time and then homogamous. Self-pollination may easily take place, and very early, owing to the position of the stigma below the anthers. Even in completely closed flowers the anthers were found open, and the corolla, anthers, style and stigma were covered with Fig. 18. Cassiope tetragona. (From West Greenland.) A, Open flower. B, Stamen. C, Diagram of a leaf with a flower in its axil, and its four bracteoles. D, Even in such a bud the anthers are open and partly filled with air, but the pollen is not yet shed. Z, Shews the position of the anthers and of the stigma. (E. W., 1885.) pollen. In Fig. 18 D the pores are already open and the anthers are dry, but the pollen is not yet shed. The stalk of the capsule is erect (Fig. 16 G). Ripe fruit is produced in great quantities in West and East Greenland, Iceland, Spitzbergen, the north of Scandinavia and at St. Law- rence-Bay, but many flowers are also met with which appear to have withered without setting fruit. According to Hacionp the fruit doubtless ripens under the snow or during the following spring. The capsule has loculi- cidal dehiscence. 29 Andromeda polifolia L: Warming, 1886, p. 18, Fig. 6. Linoman, 1887, p. 70. Kımıman, 1890, p. 155. Exsram, 1894, p. 427. Porrius, 1903, p. 43. Syrvén, 1906, I, p. 129. Observations and material from West Greenland; Tromso (Norway); Denmark. An erect, evergreen dwarf shrub (about 3—4 dm. high), sparingly branched; the slender, far-reaching subterranean run- ners have long internodes, bear scale-leaves, and have a straight apex (Fig.19 A, D). The roots given off by the runners are very slender and abundantly branched; they arise from the axils of the leaves (Fig. 19 B, E). == A Fig. 19. Andromeda polifolia. (From Denmark; Aug. 5, 1887.) A, Runner. B, Portion of a runner shewing a branch and a root both situated in the axil of a seale-leaf. €, A similar runner. D, The apex of a runner. £, Portion of a runner shewing a branch with a root above. (E. W., 1907.) The year’s shoots have scale-leaves at their bases. The axillary buds are partly protected by the erect petioles (Fig. 20 A). The more vigorous of the lateral shoots arise from the axils of the uppermost leaves, i.e. those below the terminal inflores- cence, and the uppermost shoot often forms a sympodium to- gether with the parent stem. The leaves are coriaceous and articulate, and remain fresh throughout at least one winter; they are strongly glaucous beneath and have revolute margins (Fig. 20 A). The flowers are few in number (from one to five) and occur on long red stalks in an umbelliform raceme; they are secund and drooping. The lowermost may be in the axils of 30 foliage-leaves, the uppermost in those of scale-leaves (Fig. 21 B). Two bracteoles are seated at the base of each stalk (Fig. 21 A). The flowers are formed during the year previous to that in which they open, and pass the winter protected by foliage or by scale-leaves (Fig. 20 A, B, C). In structure the flowers resemble most closely those of Arctostaphylos Uva-ursi. The corolla is rose-red, roundly-urceolate, and 5-angled and turns its narrow throat downwards (Fig. 21 B); the calyx also is rose- coloured. The interior of the corolla is covered with erect, usually somewhat upturned hairs which extend to the margin of the limb (Fig. 21 C, D); its length is from 4 to 6°5 mm.; it con- tinues to grow during flowering. The relative length of the different parts of the flower is shewn in Fig. 21 C. The stigma is situated just at or imme- diately within the throat of the AA UE polifolia. corolla, and the anthers which 4 Branch with terminal bud which encloses are at the level: of the mies flowers for the next year (Denmark; Ang. 5); slightly mag. 2, Pistil from this bud. C, Part of a flower shewing stamens and corolla of jnwards towards the style. The the same bud. (E. W.) Sl the pistil and the corolla, bend filaments are strongly swollen just above their slender, short bases, and are covered with fairly long hairs along the greater part of their length (Fig. 21 G). Here, as is often the case, they probably serve to retain the honey, secreted by the disk at the base of the ovary (Fig. 21 G). The anthers are covered with small protuberances (Fig. 21 E); they open at the apex by two pores of irregular shape. The two appendages are glabrous and slant upwards and outwards (Fig. 21 C, E, G). 31 The stigma is not always distinctly lobed, but sometimes there are five small, rounded projections upon it (Fig. 21 H, I) covered by a thick mucilage which it secretes. The plant is homogamous (WarminG, Linnman, Exstam). The pores of the anthers are open even in the bud, and the pollen grains (tetrads, Fig. 21 /’) lie loose in the pollen-sacs; however, I have not found the pollen shed until the corolla is open and the anthers have become dry. Even in the bud the stigma may be seen to be shiny and very viscid. Self-pollination may Fig. 21. Andromeda polifolia. (From Denmark; May 18.) A, Diagram of the outer leaves of the flower and of the bracteoles. B, Apex of a flowering branch with the two lowest foliage-leaves which protect småll vegetative buds; above them a foliage-leaf, which has been removed, protected the most vigorous of the vegetative buds; above this two bracts are seen, one protecting a flower that has not expanded (7), and another protecting an expanding flower; some closely-set scale-leaves terminate the branch. C, Longitudinal section through a fully expanded flower. D, A flower seen from above. £, Anther. F, Pollen tetrads. G, Ovary with the nectary and two stamens. H, I, Apex of the style, and stigma. (E. W., 1886.) easily take place in the recently expanded flower, because its stigma is situated immediately below the anthers and it almost closes the throat, which is only from 1°25 to 1°5 mm. wide (Fig. 21 D). The hairs on the corolla may serve temporarily to retain the shed pollen-grains. In Finmark I found masses of pollen-grains adhering to the hairs in the throat (July 3, 1885). 32 Sometimes, however, the hairs on the inside of the corolla, especially those at the throat, occur rather sparingly. Cross-pollination by insects may easily take place. Honey is secreted by a hypogynous disk of ten glands (Fig. 21 @). The capsule is erect. Poprrus observed Colias Paleno L., Plusia microgamma Hb. and Bombus agrorum Fabr. visiting the flowers. The flower is obdiplostemonous, and the carpels are anti- petalous. I have found 4-merous flowers in Finmarken and in Greenland. I do not find any important difference between Greenland and European individuals. Lyonia calyculata (L. Don.); syn. Cassandra calyculata (L.) Don. Hacıunn, 1905, p.33. Warmine, 1906, III, p. 150. Material from Finland (flowering in the Botanie Garden in Gopenhagen). A low, erect shrub. The coriaceous leaves remain for more than a year on the branches, and turn reddish in colour in the autumn. The buds, which are protected by scale-leaves are still small even in autumn. The flowers, which are white, occur singly in the axils of the upper leaves, and are drooping. Towards the apex of the shoots they rather cluster together, and the subtending leaves becoming smaller they approximately form a racemose inflores- cence. Two ovate-acute bracteoles occur immediately below the calyx of the flower (Fig. 22 C). After flowering, the whole of the floral portion of the shoot. i. e. about one third to one half of the whole of the years shoot, dies, and then just below it long shoots, from one to several, all similar in appearance, are developed while the lower part of the shoot remains branchless. The corolla is cylindrical-urceolate, about 7 mm. long; and 33 the throat is relatively wide, about 1°5 mm. across. The inte- rior of the corolla is glabrous (Fig. 22 C, H). Although the stigma is situated in the throat (Fig. 22 A) or sometimes even beyond it, the anthers reach only to the middle of the corolla or somewhat higher, yet the pores by means of which they open are not far from the stigma beneath them. The stamens have no bristles nor appendages, but the anthers and filaments are rough with small protuberances (Fig. 22 D, BE). Cassandra calyculata. A, Even in such a bud the pollen has fallen in quantities out of the anthers and is seen to lie upon the glabrous sides of the corolla (about 4/1). B, Pollen tetrad. C, Longitudinal section through a young flower. D, £, Stamen and upper part of anther of C. F, pollen tetrads upon the stigma of a bud. G, Flower; 4, the same in longitudinal section. (E. W.) Self-pollination appears to be able to take place easily. The plant is doubtless homogamous; even in the bud quantities of pollen-grains (Fig. 22 5) fall out of the anthers and are seen to lie upon the inside of the corolla as also upon the stigma (Fig. 22 A, F\. At the base of the ovary there is a honey-secreting disk, dark-green in colour and ten-lobed (Fig. 22 C). In the Botanic Garden in Copenhagen it flowers early, even in the month of March. XXXVI. 3 34 Arctostaphylos alpina (L.) Spreng. Warmine, 1885, p. 206; 1886 a, p. 13, fig. 5. Exsram, 1897, p. 187. Amprony, 1891, p. 70. Sxotrsperc, 1901, p. 11. Hacıunv, 1905, p. 34. A. CLeve, 1901, p. 42. Porrius, 1903, p. 43. SyLvén, 1906, 1p. 129. ScaRÔTER, C., 1904, Pflanzenleben, p. 157. A prostrate dwarf shrub, with a strong primary root. The long, prostrate shoots form adventitious roots, which may grow very strong, and therefore the plant may produce off-shoots, which become detached from the parent and form independent plants. The older branches are closely pressed to the ground, and often more or less subterranean and hidden under decaying leaves or other plants. Wa \ Fig. 23. Arctostaphylos alpina. 4, Terminal bud (Norway; Aug). B, Young inflorescence (Finmark; July 7, 1885); all the parts of the flower are formed, and are fairly large. The foliage-leaves turn deep red in autumn, and then decay, but persist a very long time in the faded and decayed condition until they crumble away. They have a peculiar silvery lustre owing to the fact that the two lowest layers of cells, by separating from the others, form a hollow space inside the leaf filled with air. The buds are protected partly by the petioles which are somewhat erect at the base and adpressed to the stem, and partly by true scale-leaves (Fig. 23 A). The terminal buds are much larger than the others (Fig. 23 A). 35 The inflorescence is terminal and racemiform. It passes the winter with its flowers well developed and protected by scale-leaves (Fig. 23 B); at the base of the terminal bud which encloses the inflorescence, from three to four sterile, true scale-leaves occur, then from two to three scale-leaves of a greener colour subtending vegetative buds, which are more vigorous the higher they occur on the shoot, and which have at their bases less well-developed foliage-leaves, not scale-leaves like those on the purely vegetative buds. On the fruit-bearing shoots these buds have developed into long shoots. When two vigorous shoots develop below the inflorescence the branching becomes dichotomous; if only the upper lateral shoot develops vigorously a sympodium is formed. After the above-mentioned scale-leaves three to five others (bracts) occur subtending flowers. Therefore foliage-leaves do not occur on the terminal flower-bearing shoot of the year, which may be distinguished as a terminal short shoot. The scale-leaves of the floral shoots have hollows within the leaves similar to those which occur in the foliage-leaves, but even larger, so that the two lamelle often arch away from each other considerably. Whether this increases their power of protecting the flower-buds and young shoots against cold and evaporation, still remains to be proved; it seems probable. Lateral shoots are also developed on those shoots which do not bear flowers, especially in their upper part; but gene- rally they are not so vigorous as the long shoots developed from the terminal, flower-bearing short shoot, the upper ones alone excepted which are situated immediately below the latter. The flowers have no bracteoles. The flowers as we have seen are fairly large even in the summer previous to the year in which they open, but are almost completely hidden by decaying leaves. The inflorescence is drooping and the throats of the corollas are turned down- wards. 37 36 The corolla is urceolate, white or whitish-green (Fig. 24): its length is 5 to 6mm.; and its breadth at the base 5 mm.; Fig. 24. Arctostaphylos alpina. A, B, A flower seen from the outside and in longitudinal section; the pollen has already fallen out of the anthers though they have but just opened (5/1). C, An anther of the flower in question; the appendages absent. D, Longitudinal section through a flower with rather short style: pollen grains adhere to the hairs of the inner surface of the corolla (as in B and X). E, F, G, Anthers and stamens in different positions and of different ages (%/1). H, J, The anthers from a bud (2/1). KA, Longitudinal section through a flower with long style. Z, The limb and the throat of the flower seen from above; in the throat the stigma may be seen (breadth of limb about 2!/2mm.; width of throat 1 mm.). M, pollen tetrad. (E. W., 1886.) at the limb 2°5 to 3 mm.; the width of its throat is 1 mm. The interior of the corolla is covered with erect hairs extending as far as to the margin of the limb (Fig. 24 D, B, K). The 37 stamens stand close to the pistil; they reach about half way up the corolla or somewhat higher. Just above their slender bases the filaments suddenly grow very thick and then gradually thinner again (Fig. 24 E); they are covered with short, stiff hairs, and on the swollen part with small pointed warts. The anthers are dark crimson; at first they are horizontal so that the small, terminal, hornlike appendages turn directly outwards or some- what downwards (Fig. 24 H, I); afterwards they are tilted up, so that the appendages are turned rather more upwards. Finally they open by a very wide pore which turns inwards and upwards (Fig. 24 E, F,G). The appendages are short, thick and glabrous, or almost so (Fig. 24 D, E, H, I, K); sometimes they are totally absent (Fig. 24 B, C). The pistil is green and glabrous (Fig. 24 D), and the base appears to secrete honey! (Fig. 24 D). The stigma has low antisepalous protuberances; it is situated at somewhat varying levels (Fig. 24 D, K). The flowers are homogamous, or perhaps they begin by being protogynous for a very short time. The stigma is viscid, even in the bud, and can retain the pollen-grains (Fig. 24 M). But the anthers open either simultaneously with the corolla, or after the latter has expanded. Self-pollination may very easily take place and appears to do so regularly and very early. It is facilitated by the pores of the anthers being very wide and by the large stigma taking up so much space inside the throat of the corolla, beneath the anthers, that the pollen must almost inevitably fall upon it (compare Fig. 24 B, K). If insects visit the plant, cross-pollination may take place, the stigma being the part first touched; but the flowers open so very early in spring and in such winterly surroundings, that 1 SKOTTSBERG is of opinion that it is the base of the corolla which secretes honey; he mentions "10 Gruben in Grunde der Krone, halbdurchsichtig.” 38 few insects can be astir; and those we may assume will be humble-bees (in Lappmark Bombus lapponicus Fabr. and B. nivalis Dhlb.; Porrius). Also, the flowers are so well hidden by branches and leaves that they can scarcely be seen. Therefore, the visit of insects cannot be regarded as playing any pro- minent part in pollination. This may be correlated with the fact that the appendages of the anthers are so unusually small, or even entirely absent; they appear to be a diminishing structure on the point of becoming rudimentäry. The fact that the pores of the anthers are larger than in the other Ericaceæ also sug- gests self-pollination, for the pollen may be shed very easily (Fig. 24 F, G); even in quite young flowers I have found the anthers completely emptied of their contents, and pollen-grains occur in quantities all over the corolla, adhering to its hairs, which are denser than in A. Uva-ursi and reach as far as to the margin of the corolla (Fig. 24 B, D, K, L). The function of the hairs appears to be especially that of retaining the pollen-grains so that they may fall upon the stigma when opportunity offers. The narrowness of the throat is another contributory feature which tends to ensure self-pollination. I have hardly ever examined any open flower without finding pollen upon its stigma, and as a natural consequence of this, fruit is abundantly pro- duced. A, alpina appears therefore to be particularly adapted to self-pollination, while A. Uva-ursi — by the brighter colour and greater conspicuousness of its corolla, by the more scattered hairs in the interior of the same, and by the roughness and length of the appendages of its anthers — appears to be better adapted to cross-pollination by insects. The drupes are spherical, black, and about I cm. in dia- meter. In the north of Scandinavia they ripen as early as August. According to Hactunp and Exsram the seeds are dis- persed by frugivorous birds. 39 Arctostaphylos Uva-ursi (L.) Spr. Warning, 1884, p. 46; 1885, p. 169; 1886 a, p. 18. Linpman, 1887 a, p. 70. H. Jonsson, Botan. Tidsskrift, 1895, p. 288. Porrıus, 1903, p. 43. Sryıven, 1906, I, p. 129. H. Miter, 1881, p.385, fig. 155. Schröter, Pflanzenleben, 1904, pp. 152— 157. Material from Greenland, Iceland and the extreme north of Scandinavia. A prostrate, creeping dwarf shrub; the out-spread and prostrate branches all occur above ground, but often in the Fig. 25. Arctostaphylos Uva-ursi. A, B, F, G, H From Denmark; C from West Greenland; D, E from Iceland. A, Shews the relative position of the buds and of the leaves. B, An inflorescence (July 21). €, Flowering branch (almost natural size). D, A young inflorescence, and a vegetative bud. Z, A flowering branch with buds in the act of expanding (June 3); HK, the primary bud; 1 to 5, the leaves. F, A seedling (1/1) with cotyledon (@) and primary leaf (A). (E. W.) course of time the older ones become covered with soil and plant-remains. The last of the year’s shoots curve slightly upwards, but afterwards become more horizontal (plagiotropic). The plant has a centrifugal growth. The younger branches are only sparingly furnished with adventitious roots; but these are more abundant upon the older ones especially those covered with soil, and one plant may break up into a number of inde- pendent plants. The leaves are more or less vertical (Fig. 25 A, C, E), and remain green upon the stems from two to three years. 40 The terminal buds on the branches were very small in July; they are protected by the basal part of the uppermost foliage- leaves. The lateral buds are also protected by the erect basal part of the petioles (Fig. 25 A, 5). The buds bear scale-leaves, greenish or reddish in colour which merge by easy stages into foliage-leaves (Fig. 25 E). In spring the terminal buds are the first to develop, and then the axillary buds in succession from above downwards, but this succession is not always strictly observed. The lowermost buds onjthe year’s shoots may remain dormant for several years, and may then develop. The inflores- cence is terminal. When it has completed its growth a strong lateral shoot is given off immediately below it (Fig. 25 4), often forming a sympodium with the parent shoot. The inflorescence is a many-flowered raceme and is formed during the year previous to that in which it opens; it passes the winter naked with its flower-buds well-developed (the spe- cimen shown in Fig. 25 B is from Denmark in the month of July). It is drooping (Fig. 25 B,C), and has no foliage-leaves, only subtending scale-leaves, and two bracts at the base of each flower-stalk. The corolla, which turns its throat downwards, is more brightly coloured and more conspicuous than in A. alpina: whitish with a tinge of red, the limb of a deeper red. It varies somewhat in size (from 4 to 6°5 mm. in length; the limb from 3 to 3:5 mm. in breadth; throat from 1°25 to 1°75 mm. in width). The throat is wider than in A. alpina. The interior of the corolla is covered with small, stiff hairs to which the pollen- tetrads (Fig. 26 G) adhere for a long time (Fig. 26 L). The hairs do not extend so far towards the margin as in A. alpina. The stamens are half as long as the pistil (Fig. 26). The two appendages which proceed from the anthers extend first in a straight line and then curve upwards; they are rough with small prickly hairs (Fig. 26 7, N). Linpman found specimens in 41 Norway with much shorter appendages than have those found by H. Mürrer in the Alps and by myself in Greenland. The bases of the filaments are slender and crowded in between the nectary and the thick base of the corolla (Fig. 26 A). Their form and hairiness is shewn in figure 26 H, N, etc. Besides the long hairs, small papille also occur. Fig. 26. Arctostaphylos Uva-ursi. A—H, From West Greenland, near Holstensborg; /—N, from Finmark (Sakkabani, 375 m. above the level of the sea). A, The flower is beginning to open, the greater part of the pollen has been already shed; pollen is lying upon the stigma. 8B, Flower (about 2/1). €, The corolla seen in front view, shewing the stigma inside the throat. D, The calyx and the corolla seen from below. Z, The base of the ovary. F, A flower in longitudinal section (about 47/2). G, Pollen tetrad. A, Stamen. J, Even in such a bud the anthers are open and have shed their pollen. A, Transverse section of corolla shewing that the hairs usually occur in ten longitudinal rows. Z, M, The same flower; the pollen is shed and is lying on the hairs of the corolla and in the mucilage upon the stigma. N, Stamen. (E. W.) In some cases the filaments were not as hairy as were those figured by H. Mürzer and by Linnman or as were my specimens from the west of Finmark. Honey is secreted by the ten-lobed disk at the base of the ovary (Fig. 26 F, L). The flower is probably at first protandrous for a short time and then homogamous (according to Porrius homogamous in Lap- 42 mark). Self-pollination may take place by the pollen falling upon the stigma beneath the anthers. Even in the bud, before the corolla opens the anthers dehisce and shed their pollen. In the newly expanded flower shewn in Fig. 26 A the greater part of the pollen had been already shed, and pollen-tetrads were lying upon the stigma. Self-pollination is also assumed by Linpman (Central Norway). Cross-pollination by insects may easily take place. Any insect which visits the flower must touch the appendages of the anthers and shed the pollen and become dusted with it; and as the stigma is placed just at the entrance of the mouth of the corolla (Fig. 26 F, L) the insect will inevitably knock against it as well. The visiting insects observed on the Dovre were: - Bom- bus alpinus, B.agrorum, and Thrips (Linpmani. The plant produces abundant fruit (red drupes) in West Greenland, where they may keep fresh throughout the winter. A seedling plant (from Denmark) is shewn in Fig. 25 G, F, H. Vaccinium Myrtillus L. Warmine, 1884, p. 76, fig. 18. Linpman, 1887, 69, tab. IV, fig. 38. Egsram, 1894, p. 427. Skorrsperc, 1901, pp. 11, 13. Porrius, 1903, p. 42. Svyzvén, 1906, I, p. 127. H. MüLzer, 1873, p. 355, fig. 133; 1881, p.381. ScHRÖTER, 1904, pp. 166, 176—78, tab. IX. A dwarf shrub with erect, assimilatory shoots, and long, subterranean runners which have elongated internodes, bear scale-leaves, and have a straight apex (Fig. 27 A, D). Roots, hair-like and branching, spring from the axils of leaves, above the axillary buds (Fig. 27 A); some of the roots become thicker. In course of time the runners, which branch, be- come woody and as thick as goose-quills, and form annual rings. They may live for more than a year beneath the surface of the soil, before they bend upwards and develop into an assimilatory leaf-bearing shoot (Fig. 27 C). While the sub- 43 terranean runner is round, the assimilatory shoot is angular owing to the edges of the decurrent leaves (Fig. 27 C). The year’s shoots are unbranched; they have scale-leaves at their bases. It is a usual thing for the terminal bud to die and then the apex of the shoot has the form of a small, pointed cone (Fig. 28 L; Fig. 27 C). The uppermost lateral bud gene- rally continues the growth sympodially. Besides this bud, from one to three of the other upper lateral buds may grow out. The foliage-leaves fall in autumn. The buds are protected by scale-leaves which sometimes persist at the base of.the year’s shoot even after the leaves have come out. Fig. 27. Vaccinium Myrtillus. A, Parts of a runner in June (4/1). B, A leaf of same (mag.). C, A runner which bends upwards towards the light; it terminates at / and continues its growth sympodially (1/1). (E. W., 1884.) The flowers occur singly in the axils of one or two of the lower foliage-leaves on the year’s shoot, but rarely in the axil of the uppermost scale-leaf. They are 4- and 5-merous. The corolla is urceolate-globose (Fig. 28). and entirely glabrous. Usually it is of a dull deep-red colour, but according to Liypman and SxorrsserG on the Dovre and in Lapland the colour is much deeper than in the lowlands. The length is from 4 to 5 mm., the width of the throat is 2 mm. The filaments are bent inwards towards the style, and the anthers stand erect, parallel to the latter (Fig. 28 B). The pores at the apex of the two tubes into which the anthers are prolonged lie immediately below the stigma which protrudes somewhat further. The pale brown anthers are slightly rough (Fig.28 E, F); on their dorsal side they have moreover two upwardly curving rough appendages which stand at about the middle of the corolla. ig. 28. Vaccinium Myrtillus. — (From Finmark). A, Open flower. 3, Longitudinal section through flower; there are already many pollen tetrads (C) upon the stigma (2). Z, F, Anthers of B. G, H, In this bud the anthers are open, and the pollen falls easily out of them when they are dry, but pollen has not yet been shed upon the stigma; on the latter two small drops (J) have been secreted. K, A flower the corolla of which has been split by insects (Stockholm). JZ, Apical portion of a branch with the uppermost lateral bud; to the right the scar left by the subtending leaf. (E. W.) The flower is protandrous for a very short time and then homogamous (this agrees with the statement of Linpmax, Exstam and H. Mürrer; according to Azur the plant is slightly protogy- nous). The anthers open while still in the bud (Fig. 28 G, A), and the pollen falls easily out of them as soon as they are dry. At any rate the stigma ripens immediately after the flower has expanded, but even in the bud I have seen drops secreted upon it (Fig. 28 J). 45 Pollen tetrads (Fig. 28 C) may be found scattered abundantly upon the style, and may also, though with great difficulty, find their way to the small stigma (Fig. 28 D) which is situated at, or immediately within, the throat of the corolla, sometimes however slightly beyond the latter. Honey is secreted abundantly and occurs in large drops on the disk. On the Dovre the flowers are visited by Bombus alpinus (Lixpmay), in Lapland by B. consobrinus, B. lapponicus and B. scrimshiranus (SKOTTSBERG). The flowers are often found split at the throat; they have been split by insects (Fig. 28 AK); and then the style is thrust far out. The form of the ovary varies (see figures, and SPRENGEL, Entdeckter Geheimnis, tab. XXII, fig. 21. H. Mürzer, Befruchtung, fig. 133, 1; Lipman |. c.). Vaccinium uliginosum L. et var. microphyllum Lange (l. c. p. 91). Kıerıman, Fr., 1883, p. 508 with fig. Warmine, 1884, p. 77; 1885, p. 197, fig. 16; p. 206. 1886b, p.118. Linnman, 1887, p.68, tab. Ill, fig. 35. Exsram, 1894, p. 427. Popprus, 1903, p. 42. Sxorrs- BERG, 1901, pp. 11, 15. Sven 1906, I, p. 128. H. Minter, 1873, p. 355; 1881, p. 381. Schröter, 1904, pp. 172 — 74. Material from Greenland, Iceland and Finmark. A dwarf bush with subterranean runners the apices of which are straight (Fig. 29 D); at the point where the runner rises above the soil in a curve, the scale-leaves merge by easy stages into foliage-leaves (Fig. 29 C). Very slender roots, which branch rather abundantly, arise from the leaf-axils above the axillary bud (Fig. 29 /). The foliage-leaves generally fall at the end of the season of growth, often turning red, but they may persist in a decaying and 46 colourless condition. They are covered on both sides with a glaucous layer of wax which prevents them from getting wetted ; the rain-drops therefore can be seen sparkling with a silvery lustre on them. The buds are protected by closely fitting scale-leaves (Fig. 29 A). The terminal bud usually fails to develop, and at the end of the shoot the small, conical, decaying portion of it may be observed (Fig. 29 G, /’); sometimes a larger part dies than merely the terminal bud. Below the dead portion two to Fig. 29. Vaccinium uriginosum. (From West Greenland.) A, Branch in spring (Disko; June 2, 1907: Porsild). B, To shew the mode of branching (reduced); 7, ZI, III are successive axes. C, Runner with scale-leaves which merge by easy stages into foliage-leaves (slightly mag.). D, Apex of a subterranean runner. Z, A runner with branches and roots in its leaf-axils (July). Z, Portion of a branch, shewing the position of the leaf relative to the axillary bud and the dead apex of the shoot (J). G, Branch (from Upernivik); the snow has recently disappeared (May 17, 1887); I is the apex of the main axis; the terminal bud is floral. (E. W.) four axillary buds develop into new shoots so that the branching becomes dichotomous (Fig. 29 5). The lower part of the year’s shoot remains unbranched. At the end of the flower-bearing branches one to four buds occur which develop into dwarf-shoots, each bearing from one to two flowers (Fig.30 A, C, E); the buds are protected by scale-leaves. The flowers are formed during the year previous to that 47 infwhich they open (Fig. 30 @, H); 4- and 5-merous flowers are found on the same plant, but other numbers also may occur. The corolla is tinged with rose-colour or else is white (SKOTTSBERG: - ‘‘der nach aussen gewandte Teil der Krone purpur- roth in Lapland”). I found the flower to be scentless in Green- land, but according to Wormsxsotp it has ‘‘a pleasant, sweel, aromatic perfume which almost recalls that of the Woodruff (Asperula odorata).’ Linpmax found that the specimens on the Dovre mountain had a strongly pungent, spicy fragrance. Fig. 30. Vaccinium uliginosum. (From West Greenland.) A, Branch (Upernivik; July 13, 1887); slightly mag. B, Shoot in the act of expanding (Upernivik; July 10): the largest leaf is 6 mm. long. C, Apex of a branch bearing two flowers (Upernivik: July 10); the corolla 3 mm. in length. D, Flower-bud of V. uliginosum f. microphylla; the anthers are open, and the pollen is lying loose in them. Upon the stigma a small drop of mucilage is seen, but no pollen (June). EZ, A fruit-bearing branch (Ivigtut; Aug. 20) reduced; J, Main axis. F, 5-merous calyx of a flower with 4-merous corolla, 8 stamens, and an 8-lobed nectary. G, A flower-bud (from Fig.29G). 4, Stamens of the same. J, Pollen tetrad. 4, In the mucilage upon the stigma occur many pollen grains; from the flower C in Fig. 31 (Godthaab; June 29). JL, The nectary, with drops of honey. M, Flower of f. microphylla; length 6 mm. N, Ripe fruit. (E. W.) The corolla is urceolate-globose and drooping (Fig. 30 A, C); on looking down into the flowers, in some, only the stigma and the scabrous anthers (Fig. 31 F, G) with their appendages are visible (Fig. 31 D), in others, a greater part of the interior (Fig. 31 Bj. The corolla is from 3°5 to 6 mm. long, in the Scandinavian specimens it measures as much as 7 to 8mm. in length; the throat is from 3 to 4mm. wide. The flower is slightly protandrous (as in the Alps according 48 to H. Mürrer, Befr., p. 355); the anthers are open and the pollen lies loose in them before the corolla has expanded (Fig. 30 D) and before the stigma is quite ripe. Homogamy ensues and lasts for a longer time (according to Liypman and Exsram “the flower is protogynous-homogamous”). The filaments bend inwards and the anthers touch the style (Fig. 31 C). In a smaller form with an ovoid corolla Lixpmax found the stigma wide spreading. se 7 H | Fig. 31. Vaccinium uliginosum L, f. mierophyllum Lange. A, Open, 5-merous flower from West Greenland (June 29, 1884). B, Same seen from above. C, A 4-merous flower of the same date; there is pollen in the anthers, and the stigma is able to retain the pollen. D, The same seen from above. Z, Of same date. F, G, Stamens of the same. ZA, Apex of the style. (E. W., 1885.) The stigma is placed just within or at the throat of the corolla, but it scarcely projects beyond it. The anthers stand at a slightly lower level with their appendages spreading straight outwards or directed upwards (in the inverted flower downwards; Fig. 31 ©). Consequently the flowers are distinctly adapted for cross-pollina- tion. An insect in search of honey (Fig. 30 L) cannot avoid touching the appendages with its proboscis and thereby shedding the pollen. The following insect-visitors have been observed: Bombus nivalis on the Dovre (Lixpmax); Bombus consobrinus, 49 Bb. lapponicus and B. scrimschiranus in the north of Sweden (SKOTTSBERG). But self-pollination also must easily take place as the flowers are drooping and the stigma consequently is below the anthers. That self-pollination takes place I conclude from the fact that in one of the distriets of Greenland (Godthaab), where it was still quite winterly and quantities of snow were lying on the ground, pollination had already taken place, although | never observed any insects visit the flower, either there or anywhere else in Greenland. The flowering period is very long; during the whole of the summer I spent in Greenland | found newly expanded flowers. Abundant fruit is set regularly in East and West Greenland and ripens the same year as that in which the plant flowers. The berry is globular, from 9 to 12 mm. in diameter. Vaccinium Vitis-idæa L. et f. pumilum Hornem. (Lange |. c. p. 90). Kıeııman, 1883, p. 508, fig. Warminc, 1884, p.77; 1885, p. 194, figs. 14, 15; p. 205; 1886b, p. 7. Linpman, 1887, p. 69. Exstam, 1894, p. 427; 1897, p. 124. Porrius, 1903, p. 42. SyLvéx, 1306, 1, p. 128, tab. IX: H. Minter, 1881, p. 380, fig. 153. Schröter, Pflanzenleben, pp. 163—172. Observations and material from Greenland, Norway (Fin- mark) and Sweden. A dwarf shrub with long, subterranean runners, which bear scale-leaves (Fig. 32) and live sometimes for more than a year beneath the surface of the soil, being seen to consist of older parts which are brown, and younger parts pale in colour. The runners have very slender, branching roots which are given off beyond the buds, from the axils of leaves (Fig. 34 F); they have a straight apex (Fig. 32). XXXVI. 4 50 The aerial shoots are a few centimetres high; consequently, they are often hidden by moss and other plants; they have coriaceous foliage-leaves which remain green a couple of years or more. The buds are protected by scale-leaves, hence the limits of each year’s growth are distinctly marked. The flowers pass the winter in terminal buds protected by scale-leaves. They occur from two to four (or several), in a racemiform cluster; each has two bracteoles a little above the base of the pedicel; 4- and 5-merous flowers may be found in the same inflorescence. They always turn the mouth of their pale-rose-coloured, campanulate corolla down- Fig. 32. Vaccinium Vitis-idea L., f. pumilum. (From West Greenland (Christianshaab), July 26, 1884.) A, Small plant with its runners. B, A leaf. (E. W., 1885.) wards (Figs. 33, 34) and are inconspicuous and more or less hidden by leaves; they are scentless. The flowers of the typical form from Central Europe are from 8 to 10 mm. long, and the throat is from 7 to 8mm. wide, but the flower of the form pumilum is always smaller (5 to 8 mm., with the throat 5mm. in diameter; in Nova Zembla according to Exstam 4 to 8 mm.}; compare my figure with that of H. Mürrer; both are magnified 5 times. i In the typical form the style projects far beyond the corolla, and the pores of the anthers are widely separated from the stigma (Fig. 33 H; Fig. 34 B); in the Greenland form pumilum the distance between the pores and the stigma is less, one öl reason being that the flowers are smaller in size; but they also differ somewhat in other details of structure. In some the relation of the different parts to each other is the same as in the typicai form (Fig. 33 A, B); but in others the pores of the anthers are situated almost exactly in the throat and therefore much nearer to the stigma, which is situated only slightly beyond the throat or practically in it (Fig. 33 C, D). Liypman also mentions differences in the flower, and on Dovre he has observed this form with a flower 7 mm. long, and the anthers protruding and standing rather close to the stigma. Lastly Fig. 33. Vaccinium Vitis-idea. A—G, forma pumilum from West Green- land (Christianshaab; July 26, 1884). H, from Stockholm: typical form. A, B, One of the larger flowers. €, D, One of the smaller flowers. Z, F, Stamens of À. G, The nectary. 7, A flower magnified as A—D; June 17, 1881 (Cf. Fig. 34 A). (E. W., 1885.) it may be mentioned that there are even some cases in which the stigma stands somewhat lower than the pores (Fig. 34 D). These differences no doubt depend partly upon the growth of the style, but only partly. Exsram writes: — ‘der Griffel wächst später noch so dass die Narbe in einer völlig erblühten Blume an den Blütenrand heranragt oder sich ein wenig über diesen erstreckt.” a> 52 In other respects I see no difference between the European form and the Arctic form pumilum’. The filaments in both the forms are covered with long, rough hairs (Fig. 33 F’, A ete.; Fig. 34 E) which perhaps serve to retain the honey, but most probably are a substitute for the appendages which occur on the anthers in V. uliginosum. The anthers lie close to the style and are rough with small pointed protuberances (Fig. 33 E, F) which doubtless cause the insects to touch the anthers more violently and thus increase the resulting shock. Fig. 34. Vaccinium Vitis-idea. A, Flower-bud (Stockholm); length 9mm. B, Open flower (Finmark; July 15, 1885); length 8 mm. from the stalk to the mouth of the corolla. C, Pollen tetrad. D, Flower (from West Greenland, Auleitsivik Fjord); only a few pollen tetrads are left in the anthers. E, Hair from the filament. F, Portion of a runner with a branch and a root in the axil of a scale-leaf. (E. W.) Slight protandry occurs (H. Mürzer, p.38, records homo- gamy; Exstam reports homogamy or slight protandry in Nova Zembla). I have found the pores of the anthers open a long time before the flowers expand, consequently, the pollen may fall out immediately the flowers open. Self-pollination appears to be able to take place, owing to * EKSTAM writes, l.c. p.427: “der Stempel ist in der Knospe hakenformig gebogen; beim Eröffnen der Blithe richtet er sich doch nicht ganz auf.” This I have not observed. 53 the position of the pores, and may occur more easily in pumi- lum than in the form from Central Europe; but the Greenland flower is evidently adapted also for pollination by insects. Honey is secreted by the thick, lobed disk at the base of the style (Fig. 33 @). The style and the stamens are often placed near to the upper side of the corolla. Lısoman has seen specimens in which the stamens had been bitten off by insects (Dovre). Exsram and O. Saxresson saw Bombus visit the flower. The plant sets fruit in West Greenland (Exsram records : — “Epizoische Samenverbreitung” “durch beerenfressende Vögel” in Nova Zembla). Vaccinium Oxycoccos L. et var. microcarpum. Oxycoccos palustris Pers. et f. pusillus Rupr., O. microcarpus Turez. Warminc, 1884, p.49. Linpman, 1887, p.73. Popprus, 1903, p. 42. Observations from Norway (Finmark) and Denmark. A creeping dwarf shrub; the prostrate, rooting stems which occur above ground, are very slender and delicate, and have elongated internodes (Fig. 35); the roots, which arise from above the axillary buds, are hair-like and branch fairly abundantly (Fig. 35 K). The foliage-leaves remain green on the stems about two years; their under sides are covered with a very glaucous layer of wax. The buds are protected by scale-leaves, and the lateral buds also by the somewhat erect, subtending petioles (Fig. 35 F,@, H). Branches arise not only below the apex of the floral shoot (Fig. 35 B, D, E), but also occur scattered here and there lower down on the stem. The year’s growths have at their bases a few scale-leaves which are not close-set. The flowers are in a small inflorescence of from one to four flowers, at the apex of the leaf-bearing shoot. They are 54 formed during the year previous to that in which they open (this is also the case in Denmark). The flowers pass the winter in an almost globular bud, which is much larger than the more ovoid leaf-buds (compare Fig. 35 A and J with A). The flowers, which have long, slender peduncles are lateral and situated in the axils of scale-leaves (umbellate); the floral shoot terminates blindly above the flowers where it bears barren scale-leaves (Fig. 35 DB); but sometimes it keeps on Fig. 35. Vaccinium Oxycoccos. (From Denmark). A, A branch (slightly mag.); March 8; the terminal bud is floral. B, C, Two branches bearing fruit — the flowering stage at least, being over (slightly reduced); 1, axis of the first order; u, axis of the second order. D, E, The basal portion of J has borne flowers and is now dead (March 25); below that, new branches occur more or less sympodially. F, G, Shewing the position of the buds as subtended by the erect petioles. H, A branch entirely vegetative (Oct.28). J, A branch with terminal floral bud (Oct. 28). X, Portion of a stem shewing the position of the axillary bud (g) and of the root (r) in relation to the leaf (7); Oct. 20. (E. W.) growing and develops into a leaf-bearing shoot (Fig. 35 C). It may appear as if there were a terminal flower, but this can hardly be the case. Sometimes one of the upper foliage-leaves subtends a lateral, entirely floral shoot. After flowering, one or several of the upper buds may develop into new shoots and then sympodial or dichotomous branching occurs (Fig. 35 D, E). Each flower has two bracteoles half way up its stalk. The flowers are protandrous; even in the bud (Finmark) 55 the pores of the anthers are open and the pollen-tetrads fall out easily (Fig. 36 B). The four petals of the deep-rose-red corolla are quite free, and in the expanded flower they are bent back (Fig. 36 A). The length of the petals is from 6 to 7 mm.; and that of the stamens from 4 to 6 mm. The filaments have fine hairs at their edges; the anthers are covered with small warts (Fig. 36 Æ, F); they dehisce even in the bud, and before the stigma is ripe, by means of two pores, one at the Fig. 36. Vaccinium Oxycoccos. (From Finmark, Norway.) A, The anthers contain a quantity of pollen (magnified as A in Fig.37). B, A flower-bud: the pollen lies loose in the anthers, but has not yet fallen out of them. C, Pollen tetrad. D, E, F, Androecium and stamens of B. G, H, J, K, Fruits of var. microcarpum (from Bosekop in Finmark). Z, Leaf of same, length 5 mm. WM, Style with stigma of B. (E. W.) apex of each of the two long, non-coherent tubes into which they are prolonged. In the expanded flower the stamens are erect and stand close to the pistil (Fig. 36 A; Fig. 37 A), which is at first only slightly longer, but gradually increases. The pollen tetrads (Fig. 36 C) are easily shed. At the base of the style there is a disk which secretes honey (Fig. 37 B). 56 Linpman speaks of self-pollination as rather uncertain, be- cause the stigma is so far removed from the anthers; but in the Greenland specimens it is closer to them than in the spe- cimens from temperate Europe; in Danish specimens the style grows to a length of from 7 to 8 mm., and may project from 1-5 to 3 mm. beyond the anthers (Fig. 37). In Finmark I found the length of the style to be from 5°5 to 6 mm., and it pro- jected only from 0°5 to 1 mm. beyond the anthers (Fig. 36 A). The fruit varies as regards its form as shewn in Fig. 36 G—K. Fig. 37. Vaccinium Oxycoccos. The var. microcarpum with (From Denmark.) downy pedicels has not yet been A, A large flower; length of stamens 6 mm.: that of the petals 61/2 mm. B, Nectary. (E. W.) cimens which occur there may found in Greenland, but the spe- have as small leaves as microcarpum. In Bosekop (Finmark) the two forms were found growing together. The flowers of the one piant are not quite twice as large as those of the other. Fam. . Pirolacew. Pirola rotundifolia L. et var. grandiflora Raddi. Warming, 1884, pp. 75, 97; 1885, p. 165, fig. 2; 1886, b, pp. 7, 18. Linpman, 1887, p. 74. Exsram, 1897, p. 123. Asromerr, 1899, p. 40. Porrius, 1903, p.44. Syıvex, 1906, p. 134. H. Minter, 1881, p. 376, fig. 150. Observations and material from West and East Greenland. An evergreen, somewhat suffrutescent plant; the long, slender, subterranean runners have long internodes and bear scale-leaves. Fig. 38 A shews a runner like the one in ques- tion; it is there shewn as having risen above the ground in a curve and having formed a vertical aerial shoot (/) with two foliage-leaves (f, f), which has died down to the ground; but from its base a new shoot (JJ) has been given off which Fig. 38. A—C, Pirola rotundifolia (from Denmark), D, P. secunda (from Denmark). A, A rhizome terminating in 1, in a dead inflorescence and two decayed foliage-leaves (7,7); II, A lateral shoot bearing 3 foliage-leaves. 2, A subterranean runner with branch; of the two shoots the lower one is below the surface of the soil, and the upper one has risen above the ground and bears a large terminal bud (g). C, A vertical rhizome term- inating in a (dead) inflorescence; f, a foliage-leaf. Two pale lateral shoots bearing scale- leaves rise straight into the air and are somewhat ‘abnormally lengthened owing to the fact that the plant has been overgrown by moss. D, The apex of a runner of P. secunda. (E. W.) bears three foliage-leaves and terminates in a bud protected by scale-leaves. In Fig. 38 B a similar runner is shewn which has risen above the ground (bearing the terminal bud, 4) and has given off a branch at a. The runners are curved like a hook at the apex (Fig. 39 B. C, E). Their roots spring from the axils of the scale-leaves, above the axillary buds (Fig. 39 A, B, D, F), and are very slender and sparingly 58 branched (Fig. 39 A, B). Fig. 38 C shews a vertical rhizome with a single foliage-leaf and terminating in an inflorescence which is now dead; it was overgrown by Sphagnum; two slender shoots bearing scale-leaves arise from it straight into the air. Fig. 40 D is a runner which has risen above the ground and formed an aerial part bearing a single foliage-leaf. Each aerial year's-shoot bears some thin scale-leaves at its base besides one to three foliage-leaves (compare Fig. 40 B and C). The latter may remain green two (to four) years (Fig. 40 A; Fig. 41) and may afterwards remain on the branches in process of decay for a longer time before crumbling away. The aerial part of the shoot may attain an age of several years Fig. 39. Pirola rotundifolia var. grandiflora. A—C, Parts of different runners, shewing the positions of the roots and branches, as also the form of the shoot-apices. D, P. chlorantha (from Denmark), the runner is rising above the ground (almost natural size). Z, F, Parts of different runners. (E. W.) before its growth is stopped by a terminal inflorescence; it then dies down to the uppermost lateral shoot (Fig. 38 A). Vegetative reproduction takes place by means of the run- ners, hence this species often occurs in patches, forming fairly large clusters in copses and on moors; but as the run- ners are long and wide-spreading it nevers occurs as a dense covering. The flowers have a faint perfume suggestive of that of the Lily of the Valley. The petals are white, tinged with rose-red especially towards the margin; the calyx and the pedicels are deep-red. While flowering the petals are widely expanded (Fig. 42) so that the corolla is wheel-shaped, measuring from 14 to 30 mm. 59 in diameter (as also, according to Linnman, p. 75, do those upon the plants found on the Dovre mountain; in Nova Zembla, according to Exsram they measure from 12 to 20 mm.; and upon Pirola rotundifolia in Denmark and Sweden, they measure from 14 to 16 mm.; cf. Fig. 42 A and K). The two back petals arch slightly above the erect stamens (Fig. 42 J). Fig. 40. Pirola rotundifolia var. grandiflora, (From Upernivik in West Greenland; May 27.) A (about 1/1); the basal portion of a flowering plant; the rhizome bears the leaves a and b on that year’s growth which is the oldest but one; 7—5 foliage-leaves and 6—10 scale- leaves of the next year’s growth; p, scale-leaves. B, The apex of a runner with two foliage-leaves (Z) and a terminal vegetative bud. C, A similar runner with a terminal floral bud. D, A runner with branches and bearing a foliage-leaf near its apex. Z, An inflorescence which has been taken out of a terminal floral bud. F—/, Parts of a flower from the same inflorescence; (F) stamen; (G) petal; (7) petal with two stamens; and (/) pistil; length of petal about 1/2 mm, (E. W., 1907.) Homogamy appears to be the rule. Even before the flower is quite open the stigma is viscid and the pores of the anthers are widely open (Fig. 42 H, I). In the bud the pores of the yellow anthers are turned downwards (Fig.42 H, I) as in the other species of Pirola, so self-pollination is impossible, as Lixpmax has also pointed 60 out; but in the open flower the anthers are tilted backwards and the pores then face upwards (Fig. 42 D, F). In the fully open flower the pollen tetrads fall in quantities out of the anthers without hindrance. The style is bent forwards and downwards (Fig. 42 A, B, K). The stigma consists of five low protuberances (which appear to be somewhat higher than those in the typical form of P. rotundi- folia) seated upon the apex of the style which is flat and has a sharp edge (Fig. 42 @). I have not ob- served secretion of honey in any flowers on the Greenland plants; neither has SR Exstam in those from Nova Zembla nor Porrivs in Finland. Cross-pollination by N insects must be of possible occur- rence, and indeed Fig. 41. Pirola rotundifolia. (From Greenland, Tasuisak; Aug. 1896.) Shoot with scale-leaves and 3 year’s growths with (visitors in Finland, foliage-leaves. (E. W., 1907.) cf. Poprws 1. c.) be- appears a necessity cause in the fully open flower the pores of the anthers turn upwards, away from the stigma, so that the pollen will have difficulty in falling down spontaneously upon the latter. The Greenland form grandiflora appears, however, to be somewhat better adapted for self-pollination than the European Pirola rotundifolia, because in the former the distance between the pores and the stigma is only from 3 to 5 mm., while it is 6 61 to 8 mm. in the latter. The style in the European P. rotundi- folia is relatively longer and also is often more downwardly directed (cf. Fig. 42 A—B and K). In flowers from Denmark and Sweden I have found styles measuring from 7 to 8 mm. in length, while those in the Greenland flowers measured 5 to 6°5 mm. only. In addition to this the stamens appear to be Fig. 42. Pirola rotundifolia L. var. grandiflora (A—I from West Greenland). P. rotundifolia L. (from Stockholm; July). A, B, Flower seen in side and front view (July 26, 1884). C, A flower-bud (its bract reaches a little way along the flower-stalk); about 3/1. D, £, F, The anthers of an older flower. G, Stigma seen from above. 4, J, The anthers of a younger flower before they change their position; about 10/1 K, A flower from Stockholm; magnified as 4 and &; about 15mm. in diameter. (E. W., 1885). more erect in the typical form of P. rotundifolia, but bent further forward and somewhat shorter in grandiflora. The flowers are formed during the year previous to that in which they open and reach the stage of development shewn in Fig. 40 E—/. The floral buds are larger and more ovoid than are the purely vegetative buds (cf. Fig. 40 B and C). 62 Ripe capsules are developed in West Greenland, but per- haps this is a rare occurrence. The diagram of the flower is the same as that given in Ercacer, Blüthendiagramme, Vol. I, p. 344. Pirola rotundifola L. var. 2 arenaria Koch. Judging from herbarium material the style appears to be even shorter than that in var. grandiflora, and the flowers to be smaller than those of P. rotundifolia. Pirola minor L. Exstam, 1894, p. 429. Porrius, 1903, p. 44. In the structure of its shoot it is quite similar to P. rotundi- folia.! The leaves are still of a fresh green colour on two- year-old shoots. 2 G Fig. 43. Pirola minor. (From West Greenland, Kingua Tassiusak). A, A flower; the petals have been removed (about ?/ı). B, A flower (slightly mag.). C, D, E, Anthers. F, Pistil. G, Ovary and stigma seen from above. (E. W.). I have only a few notes on the biology of the Greenland flowers as I did not meet with any living specimens. Fig. 43 is drawn from spirit-material. The diameter of the flower is only from 7 to 8 mm. According to Porriws it is scentless and devoid of honey in Finland, and very rarely visited by insects. According to AxELL 1 Also Pirola secunda and P. chlorantha correspond in the structure of their shoots with P. rotundifolia (Fig. 38 D; Fig. 39 D); P. wmbel- lata differs somewhat, its stems being lignified to a greater extent, and P. uniflora differs in an even higher degree. 63 (Sweden) it is homogamous, and according to Exsram (Nova Zembla) protogynous-homogamous. Exsram writes: — "In der jungen Knospe sind die Staubfaden dicht an den Stempel gedruckt, welcher bereits reif zu sein scheint. Die Antheren sind nach aussen gebogen, mit den Poren nach unten gegen die Basis. Beim Eröffnen der Blüte haben dann die Antheren einen Bogen von 90° beschrieben und wenden also die Poren nach der Öffnung der Blüte. Da indessen der Stempel gerade und länger ist als die Staubfäden, kann eine Selbstbestaubung hier nicht stattfinden (Birkenregion bei Are).” The plant sets ripe fruit in Greenland, at any rate in the southern districts. Pirola uniflora L. Warning, 1884, pp. 75, 76, 86; fig. 23. Linpman, 1887, p. 74. Exstam, 1894, p. 429. Poppivs, 1903, p.44. Marne, G., 1907, Nagra bildningsafvikelser i blomman hos Pyrola uniflora L. (Svensk Botan. Tidskrift, 1, p. 270). Observed in Finmark. From the horizontally growing roots leaf-bearing shoots proceed at irregular intervals; they are usually unbranched, and are about 8—12 cm. in height; they terminate in a flower and reach an age of 2—4 years. At the base of each shoot a root usually arises upon the mother-root (Warming, 1884). Each shoot has therefore from 2 to 4 year’s growths, each of which, after some scale-leaves, bears a rosette of 3 (2—5) foliage-leaves, and lastly the shoot terminates in a bud protected by scale- leaves which lives over the winter. The scale-leaves are thin and very distinctly veined. The flower is white, drooping and strongly scented; it is homogamous, and is devoid of honey. The petals are almost horizontally expanded (Fig. 44). In Finmark I found the diameter to be from 14 to 16 mm.; 64 Linpman (on the Dovre), 13 mm.; Exstam, 12—20 mm.; Miter (in the Alps), 22 mm. The stamens are spreading and parallel with the corolla; they are entirely glabrous and the pores at the apex of their two short anther-tubes (Fig. 44 C) turn outwards, away from the stigma, the five rays of which are large and erect and stand opposite to the diaphragms of the ovary (Fig. 44 C). The stamens generally occur in groups of 2 and 3; Fig. 44. Pirola uniflora. (Alten in Finmark; July 6, 1885). A, Stamen. B, Pistil. €, An abnormal flower (fully 3/1; 14 mm. in diameter): 6-merous calyx; 6-merous corolla; 10 stamens; 5-cleft stigma; the antisepalous stamens have the larger anthers. D, Stamen. Z, Pollen tetrads. (E. W.) 3 Linne has, according to Linnmån, given a diagram of this in his “Ölandska Resan.” Fig. 44 C shews one of the frequent deviations from the normal type with 6-merous calyx and corolla (see Marne, l. c.). In Finland Porrws found it to be but rarely visited by insects (the pollen-seeking Aricia meteorica L.). After having set fruit, the shoot dies away entirely, if not during the same year, then in one of the following years. The plant appears never to develop lateral shoots. 65 A summary of the morphology and biology of the Krieinee. All the Ericineæ are adapted for cross-pollination by insects, and some instances are known of the visits of insects (mostly species of humble bees) to the flowers, although these visits appear to occur very sparsely and rarely. All the species here in question, with the exception of Pirola, secrete honey. The honey-secreting organs surround the base of the ovary, or in the case of superior flowers, the base of the style. As many of the species have drooping flowers it is evidently a useful feature that several have hairs near the base of the filaments and of the petals which serve to retain the honey and to pre- vent intruders from entering. This is doubtless also the reason why the base of the filaments is swollen in some of the species (Rhododendron, Ledum, Cassiope hypnoides, Andromeda poli- folia, Arctostaphylos, Phyllodoce). All the flowers are coloured, the majority are even of a ‘conspicuous colour. Some of them are scented (Ledum, Pirola, Cassiope tetragona, C.hypnoides, Arctostaphylos alpina, Vacci- nium uliginosum, and (according to Bessers) Phyllodoce). The pollen grains which, as is well-known, are always united into tetrads, are quite glabrous and dry; even before the buds open the pores at the apex of the anthers are generally formed, and the grains lie loosely in the air-filled pollen-sacs, even if they are not always dry enough to fall out easily. This is also the case in Denmark with Erica Tetralix and Calluna vul- garis. Exceptions to this are Loiseleuria, the anthers of which are of the usual kind, and Phyllodoce. The sole function of the appendages, which occur on the anthers of all the species which have bell-shaped and drooping XXXVI. 5 66 flowers except Lyonia, Phyllodoce, and Vaccinium Vitis-idea, must be to serve as an aid in cross-pollination; the insect will touch them and thereby shake the anthers so that the pollen falls out. The fact that in the same species either the anthers, or the appendages, or both these organs are covered with small protuberances, must have the same purpose, viz. to Oppose the proboscis of the insect, and thereby increase the resulting shock. That these appendages are, on the other hand, wanting in species with open flowers which are usually more or less erect or are, at most, horizontally projecting but not drooping (Pirola, Loiseleuria, Ledum, Rhododendron), may easily be understood. Vaccinium Oxycoccos also belongs to those species in which the appendages are wanting, but its filaments are covered with hairs which perhaps serve the same end. This may apply also to Vaccinium Vitis-idea. The fact that in many species the base of the filament is very slender compared with the part just above it, appears also to be useful; it is thereby much easier for the insects to put the filament in motion and shake it, than if its base had been thick. Arctostaphylos alpina occupies a peculiar position by reason of the fact that its appendages are short, thick and glabrous or even entirely wanting (aborted). This should be correlated with the fact that the throat is very narrow, narrower than in A. Uva-ursi, so that the insect must inevitably touch the filaments and shed the pollen. This is also the case in Phyllodoce. On comparing the above two species it will be seen that while A. alpina is far the better adapted for self- pollination, A. Uva-ursi is the better adapted for pollination by insects. In the structure of its flower Andromeda polifolia approaches nearest to Arctostaphylos Uva-ursi, especially in that the interior of its corolla is covered with erect hairs as is the case in the two species of Arctostaphylos. We may be justified in concluding that these hairs are connected with the 67 extreme narrowness of the throat: the hairs serve to gather up the pollen grains as they fall and to retain them until they either are conveyed by chance to the proboscis of an insect-visitor, or fall upon the stigma of the same flower. No species in which the corolla has a wide mouth has such hairs, because in such a case they would be superfluous. When they are wanting also in other species which have narrow throats (Vac- cinium Myrtillus, Lyonia and Phyllodoce to which may be added Erica Tetralix and Erica cinerea) the reason may per- haps be found in the fact that the pores of the anthers are so near to the mouth of the flower that there would be difficulty in spreading the pollen in the interior of the corolla. The stigma has in all the species only very small papilla, but secretes mucilage abundantly which, in specimens preserved in spirit, appears hardened and usually filled with small vacuole- like balls. The stigma always reaches at least the level of the anthers, but usually it is higher than they and will therefore easily and immediately be able to receive the pollen which may have been brought by an insect-visilor. On the other hand, self-pollination will in most cases be able to take place easily, as the stigma lies below the anthers, either on account of the position of the flower — in the greater number of species the mouth of the flower turns downwards — or else because the style is bent downwards, as in Pirola, and must inevitably in this position be dusted with the pollen when it is shed. And with regard to this point, there occurs in some Arctic species, as already shewn, a tendency to facilitate self-pollination, the distance between the pores and the stigma being shortened, and the chances of a favourable result being thereby made greater. But in regard to this, Pirola rotundi- folia f. grandiflora differs from the typical form; Vaccinium Vitis-idæa f. pumilum from the typical species; and the Phyl- lodoce specimens among themselves. In Loiseleuria the anthers also appear to approach nearer to the stigma than they do in 5* 68 the Alpine specimen. We may be justified in connecting this tendency toward self-pollination with the scarcity of insects in the country in question. It will facilitate self-pollination if the interior of the corolla by its covering of hairs is able to gather up the pollen grains and retain them as mentioned above. Some species appear to me to. be less well-adapted for self-pollinalion, especially of Ledum and Rhododendron. The former with its richly-flowering inflorescence recalls somewhat that of the Umbellifere, and geitonogamy must evidently be able to take place easily in it. All the flowers are for the most part homogamous for a long period, but some begin by being protogynous for a short time (Arctostaphylos alpina, Cassiope hypnoides, Ledum, Phyl- lodoce, Loiseleuria, Rhododendron) and others protandrous, also for a short time (Cassiope tetragona, Vaccinium Myrtillus, V. Oxycoccos, V. uliginosum, V. Vitis-ideea). Probably self-pollination sometimes takes place before the flower opens, so that a kind of cleistogamy occurs, because as has been mentioned, the anthers generally open while still in the bud, and in some cases, I even found the pollen shed (Arctostaphylos Uva-ursi). 1 found the anthers dehisced, and fully developed pollen grains lying loose in the buds in this species and in the following: Cassiope tetragona, C. hypnoides, Andromeda polifolia, Leduin palustre, Vaccinium Vitis-idea, V. uliginosum, V. Oxycoccos, Lyonia, as also in Erica Tetralix, E. cinerea and Calluna vulgaris. In. the greater number of these species I also found that the stigma in the bud was viscid and capable of retaining the pollen, or was at least able to do so in flowers which had just expanded. In a greenhouse in Copenhagen, in a flower of Lyonia not yet expanded, I found pollen upon the stigma. In Finmark, in a bud of Cassiope tetragona, | found the stigma viscid and the anthers open; the pollen could not however fall out, but did so immediately that the anthers became dry after the expansion of the bud. This 69 approach to cleistogamy doubtless harmonizes well with the conditions of life under which these Arctic plants live. On the other hand it is then of but slight biological importance that the corollas are coloured and doubtless on the whole keep fresh a very long time. (On this and on Cleistogamy in Campanula uniflora see Warmine, 1886, b, pp. 150—154.) Of other peculiarities it is interesting to note the examples of the ovary being protected by a similar covering of hairs as are the vegetative parts, while the style is quite glabrous; here again it is two of the open-flowering species, Ledum and Rhododendron, which must be mentioned; of the others Phyl- lodoce only (and Erica Tetralix). Vaccinium- and Arctostaphylos-species have fleshy fruits; the others have capsules. As examples of plants in which the stalk of a drooping flower rises straight into the air when the fruit becomes a capsule may be mentioned Casszope and Phyllodoce. In the nodding capsule in Ledum the position of the valves is in harmony with this position of the fruit. In all the species the flowers are undoubtedly formed the year previous to that in which they open; this has at any rate been verified in the greater number of them. They are most developed in Arctostaphylos alpina which is also the one to flower the earliest in spring. Considering the shortness of the summer it is evidently very useful that the development of the flowers should be spread over two years. All the Greenland Ericacee have woody stems and should be referred to the growth-form called ‘‘dwarf-sbrubs” (some are of decided prostrate growth, e. g. Arctostaphylos alpina and A. Uva-ursi); Pirola however differs most in this respect. The buds have typical scale-leaves in most of the species (Arctostaphylos, Andromeda, Cassandra, Ledum, Vaccinium, etc.) ; quite devoid of scale-leaves are Cassiope tetragona, the Arctic heather which extends farthest towards the north, and Casszope 70 hypnoides. Also Loiseleuria has branching year’s-shoots and no typical scale-leaves. From a vegetative point of view most of these Greenland Ericineæ agree very closely with Calluna, their chief means of propagation being seeds; it is chiefly by the primary root that the plant absorbs food from the soil, the adventitious roots play a less prominent part in this respect. Decided deviations from this rule are the Pirolas, Andromeda polifolia, Vaccinium Myrtillus, Vaccinium Vitis-idea and uliginosum, all of which have subterranean runners with elongated internodes. It is characteristic of the Ericineæ that the adventitious roots spring from the axils of leaves, above the buds. Of all the 16 species of Ericineæ, mentioned above, two only have typical deciduous leaves, viz. Vaccinium uliginosum and Vaccinium Myrtillus. The leaves of Arctostaphylos alpina appear neither to fall nor to keep fresh during winter. The leaves of the other species keep fresh through at least one winter, and the ensuing spring they appear to be able to assimilate afresh; they are then found to contain starch; the leaves of some of the species can evidently keep fresh even longer. The form of branching of the Ericineæ is rather varied. In the Pirola-species a racemose inflorescence generally occurs which terminates the growth of the pleiocyclic shoot; in this genus the foliage-leaves occur in a few-leaved rosette. There usually occur only subterranean lateral shoots which begin as colourless runners bearing scale-leaves (see Warning, 1884). Pirola uniflora is an exception (ibidem p. 86, Fig. 23). In some of the Ericaceæ the flowers occur singly in the axils of foliage- leaves (Cassiope tetragona), or on small dwarf-shoots which occur towards the base of the long-shoots, and bear only a few pairs of foliage-leaves, dying after setting fruit (Calluna vulgaris). Solitary flowers occur also in Vaccinium Myrtillus (for further information regarding its sympodial growth, etc., see Warminc, 1884, pp. 76—77). Vaccinium uliginosum may 71 also be placed among the species which bear solitary flowers, but with some interesting variations. As in V. Myrtillus the apex of the shoot fails to develop, and the upper dwarf-shoots usurp its place. Each dwarf-shoot usually bears only one or two flowers which are protected by scale-leaves, but as is the case with the apices of the long-shoots, those of the dwarf- shoots also fail to develop. This species is consequently 3-axial. False dichotomy is common on account of the shoot structure, In a great number of other Ericaceæ the vegetative shoots are likewise terminated by floral shoots, but these species are bi-axial. New shoots are developed immediately below the dying apices of the floral shoots, and are stronger the nearer they occur to the latter. The buds which occur lower down on the mother-shoot often become dormant. If many new shoots are developed it results in a dichotomy with several branches often arranged almost in a whorl, e. g. in Ledum; if only one or a few new lateral shoots are developed a sympodium is often formed, e.g. in Arctostaphylos Uva-ursi. To this divi- sion belong also Phyllodoce, Cassiope hypnoides, Loiseleuria, Rhododendron lapponicum, and Vaccinium Vitis-idea. Arcto- staphylos alpina belongs also to this group, although it presents certain peculiarities. My warm thanks are due to Dr. Reypre of the British Museum for his kindness in reading the proofs of the present paper. 3—59— 1908. oh 2 LT ae a | BAS tr Bae En AL ena Ce TEE FARER TEE ar 2 We : à . me we Bet Cet heats. | chad | i Ae LIE STE CA "SAG Vibe 0 iy to Vans Arbejder fra den Botaniske Have i København. Nr. 44. The Structure and Biology of Arctic Flowering Plants. Reprinted from ,MEDDELELSER OM GRONLAND* Vol. XXXVI. 0 0 — LIBRAR Y = W VORK BOTANICAL GANDEN. Copenhagen. Printed by Bianco Luno. 1908, 14 ‘ ur i Å ies M ER k . Fo "ha - TE 1. Ericinee (Pirolaceæ, Ericacee). 2. The biological anatomy of the leaves and of the stems. By Henning Eiler Petersen. 1908. 1909 NOV 26 Introduction. The flora of a particular country or district may in the main be divided more or less distinctly into three groups of plants, viz.: — (1) Those plants which reach their maximum in the area in question, i.e. occur as frequently as circumstances permit, or are at any rate widely distributed there; (2) those which are the advanceguards of the intruding vegetation; and lastly (3) those which are the survivors of an earlier vegetation that is now becoming extinct. Within the first group, which doubtless includes the greater part of the species occurring in the district, we may distinguish between those which have recently migrated thither, and those which are descendants of an old vegetation of the district that have adapted themselves to the climate, continually although slowly changing. Generally, when a plant migrates into a particular district we may assume that the climate of the latter suits it. But this does not imply that all the different parts of its structure are in correlation with the climate; this is not necessary, and such features may often be sought for in vain. The plant may have a protoplasm which does not require special external contrivances, as for example organs that tend to check transpiration. On the other hand it may in most cases be said of a vegetation that is dying out, that it is becoming extinct owing to the climate offering it too much opposition. In the latter case a protoplasm will be found which is less capable of resistance, as also external structures which are in every way more specialized, and which in combination with a certain lack of power in the protoplasm to adapt itself to the new conditions, are unable to maintain the life of the plant in the region in question. Starting now from the view given above, — that a plant which migrates into a particular district need not from the first be provided with special contrivances suited to the climate of the country, but, on getting foothold in the district, will change more 76 or less in response to the existing climate and may adapt itself to, or be more directly influenced by, the new conditions — we must arrive at the conclusion that to ascertain the influence of the climatic factors of a particular district on its plant-world we must investigate the vegetation which is the oldest in the area, and which thrives well there at the present time. But also in this case, the lesser or greater power of the protoplasm to utilise external contrivances must be taken into consideration. If a plant needs only slight pro- tection against, for example the danger of excessive transpiration, then of course it cannot give us any information regarding the influence of climate on the structure of plants. From the above it will be seen why it is desirable that plant-geographical studies should go hand-in-hand with studies in the lesser or greater adapta- tion of the plant-world to climate. Forms with a limited distribution are of course the best objects of study with regard to ascertaining the special demands of a climate over a long period, but species with a wider distribution may also be useful in regard to this point. Here it must be borne in mind that the fact of the occurrence of a species in different climates need not exclude it from being used in the above-mentioned studies. As we know, species often change their locality according to the climate, so that the different external factors in the different localities amount to the same sum total. In regard to all plant-migrations, the power plants possess mutually to supplant each other of course plays a prominent part; therefore it may be asked, whether the components of the vegetation of any area which are becoming extinct may not in themselves reflect the existing climate of the area in question. This cannot be denied. It is however my opinion, that but rarely are plants entirely expelled from a particular area by other plants, the reason for ultimate extinction usually lying in the fact that the relationship between the life-functions or the external organs and the external factors is faulty. With regard to the influence of climate on the plant-world it must be pointed out, that it is difficult to arrive at any isolated result; the influence of a climate cannot be expressed in a single sentence, the climate not being constant itself during the year, and the plant-world not consisting of homogeneous ma- terial. Hence, the different plant-types must always be kept distinct and treated separately. To keep the influence of the individual localities distinct from the climatic factors proper is also doubtless very difficult. In beginning to enter upon studies of the kind men- 77 tioned frequently already, it might suffice when, as in the present paper, we are considering the anatomy of the plants, to point out how far the light-assimilatory tissues and the power of protection against the danger of excessive transpiration have been developed. In regard to these points the climatic factors will at any rate be of importance. All these studies should, however, always be followed by investigations into the influence other climates may possibly have on the plants in question. It is with these points in view that I have taken up the present work. I am well aware that no definite result as to the influence of the climate on the Arctic plant-world can be arrived at merely by the study of the families treated here. Neither am I an authority upon Arctic climatology. I have only tried to explain the different types of adaptation and place them in their mutual relation to each other. I have attempted as far as possible to investigate the older Arctic forms, and the length of time the individual species have been in the Arctic region; but I have not succeeded in arriving at any definite conclusion regarding this point. In this connection I have been content to refer to the different geographical distributions. I shall return to this subject at the end of this paper. The material at my disposal has not been of much service in regard to comparison with other climates. Generally, Danish speci- mens, wherever they occurred, have been compared with those from the Arctic regions. But there was one great drawback in regard to the Danish (North European) as well as the Arctic material — it was too scanty. It is obvious that in ample material all the variations of a plant are more likely to occur than in scanty material. By having only a few specimens for investigation there is a possibility that too great importance may be attached to varia- tions which occur but seldom. It would have been possible for me to determine the variations which occurred in the material I had at my disposal, but owing to the fact that the habitats have not been recorded, it would have been impossible for me to enter into the reasons for the different variations; hence, 1 have not discussed them more fully. I cannot say that I have brought to light any particularly new and interesting facts; the subject has been too often dealt with in regard to its main points to allow of that. The value of the present paper lies principally in the fact that a great deal of information regarding these plants has here been collected, and that the individual species have been mutually compared. As mentioned above, the anatomy of the greater number of the plants has already been described, but I am of opinion that the present work would become too superficial if I merely referred in it to these descriptions. I have treated each species according to a certain fixed plan and this I have preferred to employ with regard also to those species which have previously been described elsewhere. In the present paper they will all be compared with each other and that by a single author who must necessarily have some definite starting point. Only in the case of Cassiope tetragona, upon which a small monograph has already been published, have the main points of structure been dealt with superficially. It is chiefly the leaves and the stems which are here described, these organs being of the greatest importance in a biological, climato- logical connection. The roots, which occurred but sparingly in the material, have been investigated only for the sake of the mycorhiza, in the cases where this was possible. The bud-scales have not been examined at all. No attempt has been made towards giving a systematic anatomical account. The photographs of the transverse sections of the stems have been taken by Mr. A. HessExzo. The illustrations have been drawn partly by Professor Warmine and partly by me. The material consisted chiefly of specimens preserved in spirit, and was all from the Botanical Museum in Kjöbenhavn; it had been collected over a long period by different naturalists. The following is a list of the chief literature: — ABROMEIT, J., 1899, Botanische Ergebnisse der .... unter Leitung Dr. v. Dry- salski ausgesandten Grönlandsexpedition. B. Samenpflanzen (Phanero- gamen). (Bibliotheca botanica, 42. Stuttgart.) AMBRONN, H., 1890, Allgemeines über die Vegetation am Kingua-Fjord. (Die internationale Polarforschung 1882—83: Die deutschen Expeditionen und ihre Ergebnisse, Bd. II, p.61, Berlin, 1890.) BONNIER, G., 1894, Les plantes arctiques comparées aux mêmes espèces des Alpes et des Pyrénées. (Revue gen. de Botanique, T. VI.) BREITFELD, H., Der anatomische Bau der Blätter der Rhododendroidee. (Engl. bot. Jahrb. Bd. 9.) BÖRGESEN, F., 1890, Nogle Erieine-Haars Udviklingshistorie. (Botanisk Tids- skrift, Bd. 17.) — 1895, Bidrag til Kundskaben om arktiske Planters Bladbygning. (Bota- nisk Tidsskrift, Bd. 19.) HESSELMAN, H., 1900, Om Mykorrhizabildningar hos arktiska växter. (Bihang till K. Sv. Vetensk. Akad. Handlingar, Bd. 26, Afd. III, Nr. 2.) 79 KIHLMAN, A.O., 1890, Pflanzenbiologische Studien aus Russisch Lappland. (Acta soc. pro fauna et flora fennica, T. VI, Nr. 3.) Kraus, G., 1872, Einige Beobachtungen uber die winterliche Farbung immer- grüner Gewachse & Weitere Mitteilungen über die winterliche Färbung immergrüner Gewächse. (Sitzungsber. der phys. mediz. Societat zu Erlangen, Heft 4.) LALANNE, 1890, Recherches sur les feuilles persistantes. (Actes de la soc. Lin. de Bordeaux, T. 44.) Liprorss, B., 1896, Zur Physiologie und Biologie der wintergrünen Flora. (Bot. Centralblatt, XVII.) — 1907, Die wintergriine Flora. (Lunds Universitets Arsskrift, N. F., Bd. 2, Nr. 13.) LINSBAUER, K., 1900, Zur Anatomie der Vegetationsorgane von Cassiope tetra- gona. (Sitzber. der. kais. Akad. zu Wien, Bd. 20.) LJIUNGSTRÖM, 1883, Bladets byggnad inom familien Ericaceæ. (Lunds Univ. Ärsskrift.) Maury, P., 1887, Sur les variations de structure des Vaceinium de France. (Journal de Botanique, T. 1.) Niepenzv, F., 1890, Ueber den anatom. Bau der Laubblätter der Arbutoidee und Vaccinioideæ. (Engl. bot. Jahrb., Bd. 11.) PETERSEN, O. G., 1901, Diagnostisk Vedanatomi, Kjøbenhavn. ROSENBERG, O., 1900, Ueber die Transpiration mehrjähriger Blätter. (Bihang till k. sv. Vetensk. Ak. Handlingar.) ScHuLz, E, 1888, Ueber Reservestoffe immergrüner Blatter (Flora, Bd. 46.) SCHROETER, C., 1904—1908, Das Pflanzenleben der Alpen, eine Schilderung der Hochgebirgsflora, Zürich. SEGERSTEDT, P., 1884, Studier öfver buskartede stammars skyddsväfnader. (Bihang till kgl. sv. Vetensk. Ak. Handlingar, Bd. 19, Afd. III, H. 4) SIMON, S., 1902, Ueber den Bau des Holzkörpers bei sommer- und winter- grünen Gewächsen. (Ber. d. deutsch. bot. Gesellsch., Bd. XX.) STENSTRÖM, K. O. E., 1895, Ueber das Vorkommen derselben Arten in ver- schiedenen Standorten u.s. w. (Flora, Bd. 90.) Tepin, H., 1892, Bidrag till kännedomen om primäre barken hos vedartede dikotyler. (Arbeten frän Lunds Botaniska Institution, XI.) WARMING, E., 1885, Biologiske Optegnelser om grønlandske Planter. 1. Cruci- feræ, Ericineæ (with French Resume). (Botanisk Tidsskrift, Bd. 15; — 1887, Om Grønlands Vegetation. (Meddelelser om Grønland, Bd. 12) — 1897, Exkursionen til Skagen. (Botanisk Tidsskrift, Bd. 21.) WooDHEAD, T. W., 1904—06, On the ecology of woodland plants. (Journ. of the Lin. soc. Botany, XXX VII.) The species mentioned in the following are: — Andromeda polifolia............. p. 107 Arctostaphylos alpina............ p. 115 — Cohen FASE JAR SSR AN AN p. 112 (Bryanthus coeruleus) ........... p. 99 (Cassandra calyculata)........... p. 110 Cassiope hypnoides.............. p. 105 Th bol NT UT ree ote ee ts p. 101 Chimophila umbellata............ Den 287 Detim pause eee te + os, hs pe yon Loiseleuria procumbens .......... p. 96 Lyonia calyeulata. ......2....... p. 110 (Oxycoccos palustris) -........... p. 118 Thyliodoce cocrulea.... +> =. sue 00 Pirola GE ANA] LOT. 2.2... LR à p. 80 u WIRENOT EEE SE RER ide wi: p. 83 — rotundifolia.............. p. 80 Seni On NICE SE ee p. 86 SY SCCUNDA Se Sa see ste ee p. 84 Rhododendron lapponicum........ P- S9 Vaccintum Myrtillus 2... we ee p. 127 Vaccinium: Oxycoccost.c8 3... Sat: - p. 118 — wliginosum®... ANSE ES. p. 123 - PAS ES TEN ee. p. 121 Anatomical deseription of the different species. Pirolacew. Pirola grandiflora Rad. Syn. Pirola rotundifolia v. grandiflora DC. Warning, 1885, p.16. Srenstrom, 1895, p. 137 (cf. fig.) Material examined from: — West Greenland: tent 16 (Ryder); Sarfanguak; Godhavn; Upernivik; Kangerdluarsuk. East Green- land: Cape Stewart. The leaf (Fig. 1). The outer walls of the epidermis are fairly thick, cuticularized beneath the cuticle, and thickened especially on the upper surface of the leaf. Lateral walls undul- ating, irregularly thickened, furnished with numerous pores. Hairs are absent. Stomata are confined to the lower surface; they project slightly. The epidermis of the lower surface contains chlorophyll grains. Distinct palisade-tissue does not occur; in form, the upper cells of the mesophyll correspond 81 more closely to the other cells, with perhaps less tendency to alobate form, but like them they consist of more or less irregular, rounded, paren- chymatous cells. The lobes men- tioned above cha- racterize more particularly the central and lower cells of the meso- phyll, and are seen most dis- tinctly in the transverse and longitudinal sec- tion; in surface section the cells of the mesophyll are irregular, but no lobes can be seen. In surface section the inter- cellular spaces, which never attain any considerable size, are sharply defined and shew transparent in contrast with the brownish colour (in spirit-material) of the cells of the mesophyll; they are smaller XXXVI. Fig. 1. Pirola grandiflora. 1, Leaf in transverse section. 2, The epidermis of the lower surface. 3, Hydathode. 2, The epidermis of the upper surface. 5, Stoma. 6, Horizontal section through the mesophyll which answers to the palisade-layer. 7, Horizontal section through the lower cells of the mesophyll. The peculiar intercellular spaces should be noted. (Hab. several places in Greenland; Z is from Upernivik). (H.E. P.) The letters which accompany the figures indicate the same every- where: — Zp, epidermis; Zi, the epidermis of the lower surface: Es, the epidermis of the upper surface; Chl, chlorophyll grain; pa, palisade-tissue; Jnt, intercellular space. The upper and lower epidermis seen from the surface are drawn always with the same magnification in regard to each species. 6 82 and fewer in number towards the upper surface of the leaf, larger and more numerous towards the lower surface of the leaf, where the mesophyll may begin to resemble spongy paren- chyma, but cannot actually be termed spongy parenchyma. Especially in this part of the leaf the intercellular spaces impress one as rather curious, as it appears that they are not formed normally between 2—3 or more cell-walls, but by the walls of two adjoining cells separating from each other (Fig. 1, 7). That this can really be the case may be proved by comparing the corresponding circumstances in Fir. secunda (Fig. 3, 2). Here we are undoubtedly dealing with a kind of secondary intercellular-space-formation. All the cells of the leaf give the reaction for tannin, but least is given by the central cells of the mesophyll. In this point the Greenland specimens of this species differ from the Danish individuals of Pir. rotundifolia which is otherwise very closely related to Pir. grandiflora; the Danish Pir. rotundifolia has cells in the centre of the mesophyll which are entirely devoid of tannin, forming a distinctly transparent, central area. There is no stereom developed around the veins of the leaves. Hydathodes occur over the termination of the vascular bundles (Fig. 1, 3). The stem. From a biological point of view the structure of the stem presents no feature of any great interest. In the young stem a layer of cortical cells occurs under the epidermis — thick-walled like the latter, and devoid of starch. When the primary epidermis falls off, a kind of cork is formed consisting of angular cortical cells. There is no regular periphery, but the older formations persist for a long time. The other parts of the structure of the stem present no point of interest beyond the fact that the inner cortex consists of large parenchymatous cells, abundantly filled with starch, and that annual rings may occur in the central cylinder. The root has endotrophic hyphe in its outer cells. 83 There is probably no other difference between the Danish Pir. rotundifolia and the Greenland grandiflora form than the one mentioned above. Pirola minor L. (Fig. 2 Warning, 1897, p. 103. Srensrrém, 1895, p. 137 (cf. fig.). Finmark: Alten. Färöes: Bordö. Fig. 2. Pirola minor. 1, Leaf in transverse section. 2, The mesophyll near the epidermis of the upper surface. 3, The epidermis of the upper, 4, of the lower surface (Finmark). (H. E. P.) The leaf resembles in its main points that of Pir. grandi- flora. As differences of importance may be mentioned that stomata occur on the upper surface of the leaf, but are fewer in number than those of the lower surface, and are slightly 6 84 projecting; also in the present case cells distinctly devoid of tannin occur in the middle of the mesophyll. The epidermis of the lower surface contains chlorophyll grains as in grandi- flora. Warmine has described in his paper, Exkursionen til Skagen i Juli 1896 (see above), the anatomy of the leaf of this species. He mentions a rather peculiar fact in regard to the stomata. On the leaves of “‘light-plants” (from the Danish downs) these organs cease to be functional at an early date, so that they occur on older leaves as useless structures, but in ‘‘shade-plants” (from woods: Tidsvilde Hegn, and Hornbæk Plantage) they are well-developed and function normally. The specimens which I have examined and which are from Finland and the Färöes come nearest to the Danish wood-forms in this respect. The stomata do not occur especially along the veins as in Pir. grandiflora. In all other points it resembles Pir. grandiflora. I have made no examination of the roots. Pirola secunda L. (Fig. 3). Of this species I have had for examination only spirit- material from Disco (Porsild) and from Denmark. Further I have investigated herbarium-specimens from Holstensborg in Greenland, and Asbirgi in Iceland. The structure of the leaf corresponds in the main points with that of Pir. grandiflora and of minor. The upper and lower epidermis are somewhat thicker than in these forms. Stomata occur on both sides, but are fewer in number on the upper surface, as is the case in Pir. minor. On the latter surface the stomata are especially confined to the area near the veins of the leaves. Both the upper and lower epidermis contain chlorophyll grains. Hydathodes occur, but hairs are absent. The cells of the mesophyll are of the same form as those of the mesophyll in the two above-mentioned species. No cells 85 devoid of chlorophyll occur. The intercellular spaces are in many cases formed by the separation of two neighbouring membranes and not normally either between three cells or between the lobes of two as may be conjectured to be the case in Pir. grandiflora and in minor. In regard to the Chl Fate. er KL ew OO AK Es Fig. 3. Pirola secunda. 1, Leaf in transverse section. 2, Lower mesophyll with the characteristic intercellular spaces. 3, The epidermis of the lower, 4, of the upper surface. >< about 430. (Denmark: Hornbek Plantage). (H. E. P.) structure of the leaves the two northern specimens agree exactly with those from Denmark. The structure of the stem presents no feature of import- ance it corresponds essentially with that of the two mentioned above. | No examination has been made of the roots. 86 Pirola uniflora L. (Fig. 4.) The specimens are from Finmark: Alten (July 6, 1885, Warming). The Danish specimens are from Tidsvilde Hegn and from Hornbek Plantage. This species differs from the three described above in regard to the leaf, the inner structure of the latter being much Fig. 4. Pirola uniflora. 1, Leaf in transverse section; below the epidermis of tbe upper surface (es) a palisade-like layer of cells is seen. Cf. note p.81. 7, 2 and 3, X about 120; 4 X about 250. (Finmark: Alten) (H. E. P.) more dorsiventral, and arranged on the whole in a typical manner. The epidermis of the upper and lower surface have only slightly thick- ened outer walls and much undulating lateral walls. Stomata occur only on the lower surface and are slightly projecting. Hairs are absent. Chloro- phyll grains occur in both the upper and lower epidermis. The upper layer of the mesophyll is of pali- sade-form, and the cells are short and broad; the rest of the mesophyll is loosely arranged with large intercellular spaces, and consists as usual of irregu- larly rounded thin-walled cells which branch but slightly and are colourless in the spirit-material. In Danish specimens the palisade-cells were somewhat longer and more slender than in the specimens from Alten, otherwise there was no especial difference between them. 87 The stem and the roots have not been particularly examined. [Chimophila umbellata (L.) DC. (Fig. 5.) Material is at my disposal only from the wood ‘‘Sandflugts- plantage” at Rønne in Bornholm. This species, the leaves of which are coriaceous, presents quite a different type of leaf from those of the three mentioned above. It stands in the same relation to Pirola uniflora as Arctostaphylos Uva-ursi does to Vaccinium Myrtillus. The'i-leaf ‘is dorsiventral with thick outer layers in the epidermis, consisting of a thickened cuticle and cuticularized layer. Stomata oc- eur only on the lower surface and on a level with the epidermis. Hairs are absent; starch Fig. 5. Chimophila umbellata. occurs in both the Cf. note p. 81. (Bornholm: Rönne.) (H.E.P.) upper and the lower epidermis. The palisade-tissue consists of from two to three layers of cells. The structure of the spongy parenchyma is loose and it consists of elongated cells, elongated more or less in the direction of the length of the leaf. Hydathodes are absent. Annual rings are distinctly visible in the stem. Petersen, p. 72; SEGERSTEDT, pp. 35—37. The roots have not been investigated. | Of the above five species only Pirola grandiflora and 88 Pirola minor occur in the Arctic regions. If the three other species be mentioned in order of their relation to the Arctic region, Pirola uniflora and secunda come first and Chimophila umbellata comes last. On grouping these five species according to the xerophilous structure of their leaves — they are all ever- greens — then Chimophila is the most xerophilous and Pirola uniflora the least. There need not necessarily be anything peculiar in this. The reason why the purely Arctic form Pir. grandiflora, as also Pirola minor and secunda (as regards Pir. uniflora see below), do not present any especially xero- philous characters is that these three forms being saprophytes are subject to quite different conditions from those of the autophytes and consequently they cannot in so high a degree as the latter offer resistance to external factors such as wind and weather. The view that these latter plants are more inde- pendent has been put forward by Warne (Biol. opt. p. 36) according to whom it was first given by Heinricaer. The structure of Pirola uniflora is not xerophilous, but it is reported to have evergreen leaves. There must be some cause underlying this, as the structure of the leaves is exactly that of a deciduous leaf. Possibly some saprophytic circum- stance is connected with this. The species is not entirely Arctic and lives in Finmark under conditions which do not occur in Arctic regions (viz. as a woodland-plant). In spite of its xerophilous structure Chimophila is not an Arctic plant. Thus the Pirolaceæ cannot be said to make any special con- tribution towards the interpretation of the influence of Arctic climate upon plant-structure. * 1 A general account of the Ericaceæ is given in a separate section at the end of this paper. 89 Ericacew. Rhododendron lapponieum Wahlenb. (Figs. 6—8.) Warning, 1887, pp. 111—12; 1885, pp. 35—36. Borcesen, 1890, pp. 236—37. Ampronn, 1980, p. 71. O.G. Perersen, 1901, p.78. I have had specimens for investigation from the following localities: — West Greenland: Kakortok (June 6, 1887); Adglu- mersat (June 11, Kornerup); Tatsip-ata (July 15, 1884, Th. Holm); Umanaptimilia (Juli 17, 1887, C. Ryder). East Greenland: Hekla Havn (November 4, 1891, N. Hartz); Finmark: Alten (1885, E. W.). Fig. 6. Rhododendron lapponicum. 1, Leaf in transverse section. 2, Epidermis with stomata below a peltate hair. 3, Stoma in transverse section. 4, The epidermis of the upper surface. 5, The papillæ of the lower epidermis in surface view. 6, Palisade-cells seen from above. (E. Warming.) The leaf. The epidermis of the upper surface is much thickened by the presence of a thick cuticle and beneath it a cuticu- 90 larized layer, and is sparingly covered with large peltate hairs. The lateral walls are almost polygonal. An inner membrane is often seen to have separated from the inner walls of the cells of the epidermis giving an impression that we are here dealing with an inner mucilaginous wall (Fig. 7). But such a structure | have not been able to demonstrate with any certainty. In a few cases I further observed that a similar structure was found in connection with the ‚upper margin of the cells. It is possible that the spaces thereby formed contain a fluid which serves as a protection against the danger of L Es excessive transpiration. In some cases I observed starch — or properly speaking chlorophyll grains with starch — in the upper epidermal cells. The lower epidermis is strongly papillose, each cell-cavity terminating in a pa- Fig. 7. Rhododendron lapponicum. pilla. These papillæ have at their Mor; Membranes. 7Z Tumen. TR Dex a cuticleswhich is slightly aomen figure shews indications of the mucilaginous walls which occur in with prickles. The stomata are con- ts species (Greeniand). (-"*) Aned to the lower surface of the leaf, and, as is well-known from Warmine’s description (l. c. p. 112 and Fig.8 in Om Gronlands Vegetation), they all occur beneath the peltate hairs with which the whole of the lower surface is thickly covered. Upon the inner side of the guard- cells and upon the nearest adjacent cells a cuticularized outer layer may be seen. The palisade-cells occur in 5 to 6 layers, and are small (at most about 50) and diminish in height towards the interior; they constitute about one-third the thickness of the leaf. The spongy parenchyma consists of non-branching cells, united into lamellae that stand at right angles to the longitudinal axis of the leaf. Very large intercellular spaces occur between the lamella. Below the vascular bundles may be seen indications of aqueous-tissue. 91 The leaf is strongly protected especially by its peltate hairs. The stem. The primary cortex consists of homogeneous, rounded cells, with larger or smaller intercellular spaces, and a thick epidermis. The secondary cortex consists of ordinary cork-cells. There is no re great difference between the 327 aie [1 Par ER spring and sum- aie a eves = mer wood, and the limits between Aa the different an- ES x nual rings are not very distinct. Besides the ac- tual limits of the annular rings, which may be verified by cal- eulating the age of the portion of i Fig. 8. Rhododendron lapponicum. the branch in Stem in transverse section (Greenland). x 180. (Phot.) question from the number of its shoots, some confused boundary lines may often be discerned within the cortical zone of growth (O. G. Petersen, p. 78; Ampronn, 1890, p. 71). I have not examined the roots. Ledum palustre L. with f. decumbens Ait. and f. groenlandica (Oed.). (Figs. 9—12.) This species, whose occurrence in the Arctic regions is as , like the latter, specially characterized by the fact of its leaves being excellently protected. frequent as is that of Rhododendron lapponicum, is 92 Warmine, 1887, p.109; idem., 1885, pp. 39—42. BörGEsEN, 1895, pp.236— 237. Liprorss, 1907, p.75. SEGERSTEDT, 1894, p. 22. Ampronn, 1890, p.71. O. G. Perersen, 1901, p. 78. AÄBROMEIT, 1899, p. 54. I have had specimens for investigation from the following localities: — West Greenland: Sukkertoppen (Aug. 16, 1884, E.W.); Amarortalik (July 30, 1884, E. W.); loc. ign. (July 11, 1884 and July 28, 1885, S. Hansen). Finmark: Bosekop (E. W.). Fig. 9. Ledum palustre var. decumbens. 1,2, Transverse sections through different parts of the leaf. x, Transparent cells. 3, Stoma. 4, Spongy parenchyma shewing the transparent cells. 5, 6, Glandular hairs seen laterally and from above. (E. Warming.) The leaf. The epidermis of the upper surface has much thickened outer walls with cuticle, and beneath that a cuticularized layer; the lateral walls are polygonal and have pores; afew glandular hairs occur. The outer walls of the lower epidermis are less thickened on account of the dense hairiness of this surface. According to Livrorss, chlorophyll grains occur in the upper 93 epidermis. There are four kinds of hairs: — 1, unicellular hairs (one kind) with a thick suberised membrane which is of impor- tance only on older leaves, 2, multicellular hairs, a, long and filiform, and consisting of two rows of long, narrow cells, b, two kinds of glandular hairs with larger or smaller multi- cellular apices upon a many- celled stalk. Only the larger glandular hairs occur on the upper surface (I cannot help thinking that BôrGesex (1890) in his Fig. 1 has confused the two kinds of glandular hairs. Fig. 1, f, shews the last stage of the one kind of glandular hair; 7, the last stage of the other; and g, shews a medium stage in the development of i the large hairs which have not been investigated in their younger stages). The stomata, é Fig. 10. Ledum palustre. 1, Leaf in transverse section. z, Transparent cells any special kind of hairs but in the process of disorganization. Sv, Spongy R Eg parenchyma. 2, The tissue below the central by the continuous covering vascular bundle of the leaf. 7, Transparent : cells in the process of disorganization. 7, Thick- of hairs, are confined to the walled cells like those in Andromeda (Green- lower surface and project land: Sukkertoppen). (H.E. P.) slightly. They are so orientated that the transverse section of which are not protected by the leaf does not give the usual view of the stomata, which may be had either in longitudinal or oblique section. This orientation of these organs occurs especially in forms with fur- rows; but, as is well-known, ZLedum approaches these forms by the fact ef its being able to roll in its leaves to some extent. The inner sides of the guard-cells, as also the neighbouring cells of the mesophyll, have a cuticularized outer membrane. In regard to L. groenlandicum, the palisade-tissue consists 94 usually of only 2—3 layers, but in L. palustre frequently of from 5 to 6 layers of palisade-cells of medium height. The spongy parenchyma, which comprises about one-half of the thickness of the leaf, consists in the older leaves of cells which are either non-branching or branch only slightly, and which unite so as to form intercellular spaces at fairly Fig. 11. Ledum palustre. Stem in transverse section; slightly mag. (Greenland). (Phot.) regular intervals. In these spaces, in older leaves, traces of a previous tissue may be found in the form of empty cells or portions of cell-walls. In the young leaves these spaces are entirely filled with a closely-packed tissue consisting of trans- parent cells which are doubtless filled with cell-sap and which perhaps serve as reservoirs of water and are of importance as 95 a protection against excessive transpiration (Fig. 10,1; Fig. 9, 1 2,4). By the disorganization of these cells the large intercellular spaces are formed. Below the vascular bundle, which contains but very little stereom, a tissue occurs consisting of transparent cells (Fig. 10,2) which have far greater power of offering resistance to external factors than those in the spongy parenchyma and which resemble those HI ae te | that oceur in Andro- meda, but are not so compact and Re 2 i a US. ve ir 4 . 4. / »-& sd h | sø pi" + have not the inter- == spersed thick-walled cells, occurring either singly orin trabecule. The leaf varies great- ly in thickness and breadth, sometimes i it is thick and narrow yy a7 | ; 3 ie Be 3 (palustre), sometimes 8: i thin and broad (groen- landicum), but be- sides this there exist Fig. 12. Ledum palustre. hardly any differences Stem in transverse section; the limits of two annual of importance. rings are discernable; x 180. (Greenland). (Phot.) The stem. The primary cortex consists of a zone of small cells which occur just within the epidermis, which is hairy like the leaf and fairly thick-walled; internal to these are transparent, thin-walled cells mixed with a few with thicker walls, and trabecule of such thick-walled cells; while most internal are one to several rows of cells of the same form as the outermost ones. The pith, consists partly of transparent, thin-walled cells and partly of thick-walled cells, the latter occurring as trabecule between the former. The secondary cortex, which according to SEGERSTEDT is 96 developed on the lower parts of the year’s shoots, is formed of cork-tissue in the customary manner (SEGERSTEDT p. 29). There is no difference between the elements of the spring and summer wood (O. G. Petersen, p.78); the limits of the different annual rings are sharply defined, but it is difficult to decide where each annual ring begins (Fig. 16). If the thick line seen in Fig. 9 indicates the completion of the annual ring then the wood first formed is unusually marked and small-celled, if not then it is difficult to explain the presence of this line. I have not examined the roots. (Hesserman, p. 27). Loiseleuria procumbens (L.) Desv. (Figs. 13—14). Warmine, 1885, p.31; idem., 1887, p. 111. Börsesen, 1895, pp. 236—237. Ampronn, 1890, p. 70. Tenin, 1892, p.75. O.G. Petersen, 1901, p. 78. I have had specimens for investigation from the following localities: — West Greenland: Godthaab (June 28, 1884, Th. Holm); loc. ign. (July 28—30, 1885); tent 17 (Aug. 30, 1886, Ryder); tent 14 (July 13, 1887, Ryder); Finmark: Tromsö (June 28, 1885, E. W.); Bosekop (July 3, 1885, E. W.). Iceland: Mossfellsheidi (June 14, 1895). Norway: Tronfiæld (F. Børgesen); Storlien (F. Börgesen). The leaf is subericoidal. The margins of the leaves are somewhat bent inwards, and as the midrib stands out conspi- cuously on the lower surface a kind of furrow is formed on either side of the midrib. The upper and lower epidermis are very much thickened by the presence of a cuticle and beneath it a cuticularized layer except in such places between the margin of the leaf and the central ridge where protective, unicellular hairs occur. The epidermis is however thicker in this plant than in Bryanthus. Mucilaginous membranes are seen in the inner wall of the cells of the epidermis, on their surface and sides (but not in 97 those of the central ridge) (cf. Fig. 6, p. 5, in Warmine’s Om Grönlands Vegetation). According to Livrorss, chlorophyll grains occur in the upper epidermis. The stomata occur only beneath the hairs on the lower surface, and are arranged obliquely and project slightly. The palisade-cells occur in 3—4 layers and are slightly oblique; length (at most) about 60 y. Fig. 13. Loiseleuria procumbens. The leaf. 2, Transverse section. 2, Stoma. 3, The epidermis of the outer surface. Mbr, Membrane. 2, Lumen. (2, Greenland: Tugtokortok.) (H.E.P.) The spongy tissue consists of ordinary, slightly-branching parenchymatous cells, fairly thick-walled, and most developed in a vertical direction; it has large intercellular spaces, which also occur below the vascular bundle in the central ridge on the lower surface. Stereom slightly developed. The stem. The primary cortex (Ten, 1892, p. 75) within the epidermal layer varies in thickness and consists of large, XXXVI. 7 98 transparent cells interrupted by trabecule of thicker-walled cells with contents; these are not, however, as distinctly developed as in Andromeda and Ledum. The primary cortex falls off very early, even by the end of the first year. The outermost part of the secondary cortex consists of an ordinary cork-tissue of no importance. Fig. 14. Loiseleuria procumbens. Transverse section of stem; several annual rings are discernable. >< 180. (Greenland.) (Phot.) The annual growth of the wood is rather difficult to demonstrate, because, as it appears, lines are formed in the annual wood which resemble annual rings, but they can scarcely be such. In some cases the annual rings are however distinct. The spring wood is fairly sharply differentiated from that of the summer (or autumn) (O. G. Petersen, p. 78). I had no material of the root for investigation. 99 Phyllodoce coerulea (L.) Gren. & Godr. (Figs. 15—17.) Phyllodoce taxifolia Salisb. Bryanthus coeruleus (L.) Dippel. Warning, 1885, p. 20; idem, 1887, p. 109. BürGesen, 1895, pp. 234—35. Amprony, 1890, p. 71. O. G. Petersen, 1901, p. 80. Krarman, 1890, p. 232. I have had specimens for investigation from the following localities: — West Greenland: Sukkertoppen (July 5, 1884, Th. Holm); Tatsip-ata (July 15, 1884, Th. Holm); loc. ign. (July 20, 1884, S. Hansen). East Greenland: loc. ign. (Aug. 1892), Dron- ning Louises ©. Norway: (Finmark) Bosekop (1885, E. W.); (Dovre) Vaarstien (July 13, E. W.); Storlien (July 20, 1894, F. Börgesen); Lille Elvedal (July 11, 1887). [Sweden: Härje- dalen). The leaf is rounded, A triangular in transverse sec- Ê— SN { n tion, and furnished with two N SÆR SNE Nee N furrows, one on either side er \ | S of a central ridge, in which “X on oy NS furrows the stomata occur. DEC Ss = The epidermis outside the ee furrows is very much thick- NL ened and has no mucilaginous MS OVS ON inner walls like those in Loise- ea WY LA leurta and the lateral walls GER ( / | are roundly angular; in a few 4 Fig. 15. Phyllodoce coerulea. \ 5 4 : The leaf. 2, Epidermis of the outer surface. in this part of the epidermis 2, Stoma. (2, East Greenland; 2, West Greenland.) (H. E. P.) cases chlorophyll grains occur (Livrorss, p.75). In the fur- rows the epidermis is thin and has very prominent stomata which are rather thickly covered with two kinds of hairs — unicellular bristles, and multicellular, glandular hairs. The stomata are placed obliquely to the longitudinal axis of the leaf, as in the case of ericoid leaves with furrows. 7* 100 The palisade-tissue consists of from 1 to 2 layers of cells as much as 70y in height; they are longest in the specimens from Härjedalen. The spongy parenchyma is relatively large — comparatively larger in this species than in Loiseleuria — and consists of non-branching or slightly branching cells elongated in various directions and not, as is usual in Loiseleuria, elongated chiefly transversely. Large intercellular spaces occur, owing to the form of the leaf and to the fact that the stomata Fig. 16. Phyllodoce coerulea. The leaf. 7, 2, Transverse section. 3, Multicellular hair. (Greenland: Sukkertoppen.) (E. Warming.) are well protected. No especial stereom nor aqueous tissue occur. The stem. The primary cortex has a thick epidermis with the same kind of hairs as on the leaf, and consists of transparent cells with thick walls which occur either singly or in trabecule. The pith has a similar structure. The primary cortex persists during the first and partly during the second year. The secondary cortex is formed by both regular and irregular cork-tissues which exhibit no point of interest. The 101 annual rings are on the whole fairly distinet and the spring wood is differentiated from that of the summer. The roots have not been investigated. Fig. 17. Phyllodoce coerulea. Transverse section of stem. >< 180. (Greenland.) (Phot.) Cassiope tetragona (L.) Don. (Figs. 18—21.) Warmine, 1885, pp.53—54; 1887, p. 108. Linssauer. 1900. Borcesen, 1895, pp. 236—237. Amprony, 1890, p. 70. O.G. PETER- sen, 1901, p. 76. The specimens I have had for examination are from the following localities: — West Greenland: Tatsip-ata (July 15, 1884, Th. Holm); (Disco) Röde Elv (Porsild); Kekertat (Sept. 9, 1886); Pugtokortok (July 13, 1887, C. Ryder); Pröven (July 2, 1888, C. Myhre); Upernivik (July 11, 1886); tent 20 (Ryder); loc. ign. (July 14, 1884). East Greenland: Danmarks O (Nov. 6. 1881, 102 N. Hartz); loc. ign. (July 6, 1892, N. Hartz). Spitzbergen: Tempelbay (July 17, 1882, Nathorst). Norway: Palvand (F. Börgesen). The anatomy of this form has recently been exhaustively investigated by K. Lisszaver; therefore I shall here make only a few supplementary remarks. Stomata may occur on the upper Fig. 18. Cassiope tetragona. Microtome-section through a bud. (Phot.) 103 surface of the leaf, that side of the leaf which is pressed close to the stem. Upon the two sides of the leaf, the parts of the palisade, which form the limit of the air-cavities, are often very unequally developed (Fig. 20), so that the layers of palisade-cells differ rather considerably in number. This difference is most obvious in such parts of the leaf as have not been covered by other leaves, consequently, especially towards the apex of the leaf (Fig. 20, 1 and 2). This may be explained by the fact that the palisade-cells are formed in the bud, the leaves of which overlap each other considerably, leaving the (477 Prete. | | pi / XF & # x + TS nA rn FE Bin rad À Cin SA 2 Ir Us À FED > øk A ¢ ERE Wr X > N'a ts Sy AD 2 Bi Fig. 19. Cassiope tetragona. The leaf. 1, The outer epidermis with cuticle. 2, Inner epidermis with stomata. 3—5, Stomata. (E. Warming.) apices free. It may be proved that the part of the four longitudinal layers of the palisade-tissue which is most well-developed, corresponds with the direction in which the light falls most intensely. Symmetrically-developed flanks occur not only in places where the leaves have overlapped each other, but also on such leaves as have been placed symmetrically towards the light. I observed the Kraus winter-condition in a specimen from Danmarks Ö (Greenland; N. Hartz). Like Lisssaver I have not 104 been able to find any annual rings in the material at my disposal. On the whole the leaf of Cassiope tetragona is of very peculiar structure. By the erect position of the leaves and by their close adhesion to the stem, their surface has no doubt been greatly reduced, a fact which must be extremely favourable in cases of continuous drought. The consequent danger to the stomata, viz. that they are now turned directly towards the Fig. 20. Cassiope tetragona. The leaf. 2 and 2 shew the difference which may occur in the development of the two flanks when the light does not act with the same degree of intensity upon both of them. 3, Slanting palisade-cells. 4 Stoma. (Greenland.) (H. E. P.) wind, is very happily avoided by the growth of the margins of the leaves. The stomata are situated in the interior of a relatively large air-cavity, a fact which greatly checks all move- ment of air. The thin epidermis which lines this cavity, as also the large intercellular spaces of the leaf resulting from the form of the leaf and the position of the palisade-cells, bear witness to the great protection afforded by this air-cavity. It is evident that it must be of vital importance to a leaf that persists through the winter that it should prevent too much dry air from entering into its interior, which would certainly happen in a 105 very high degree, if it had intercellular spaces which were not protected. In regard to leaves which persist for several years, it may be said that the degree of protection is with- out doubt in proportion to the size of the air-cavity. To what degree the air-cavity and the large intercellular spaces serve to utilize the oxygen formed by assimila- tion of the carbonic acid formed by respiration I am not able to say. The leaf is also protected by different kinds of hairs (cf., e. g., Warning, Biol. Optegnelser, p. 53). JunGner's! theories re- garding the importance of the form of the leaf may Fig. 21. Cassiope tetragona. doubtless be regarded as Stem. x 180. (Phot.) extremely fanciful. Cassiope hypnoides (L.) Don. (Fig. 22.) Börsesen, 1895, pp.236—237. Tepin, 1892, p. 75. Hesser- Man, 1900, p. 27. The specimens I have had for investigation are from the following localities: — West Greenland: tent 16 (July 28, 1887, C. Ryder); loc. ign. (Aug. 1, 1892). East Greenland: Dronning Louises Ø (Aug. 8, 1885, Eberlin). [Sweden: Areskutan (Aug. 12, 1890).] This species belongs to that group of the Cassiope 7 Junener, Klima und Blatt in der regio alpina. Flora, Bd. 79, 1894, p. 219. 106 which has neither furrows nor hollows. The leaf is shortly acicular, without protective devices except its small size. In agreement with the statement above given under Cassiope tetra- gona, the intercellu- lar spaces are rather limited in size. But I am not prepared to say whether this is caused directly by the fact of the leaves hav- ing such slight external protective devices, or whether the chief rea- son must rather be found in the smallness of the leaf, which does not allow superabun- dant internal space. The upper and lowerepidermis are very much thickened by the presence of a cuticle and beneath it a cuti- cularized layer, and they Fig. 22. Cassiope hypnoides. The leaf. 7, Transverse section. 2, Longitudinal section have roundly angular not including the middle vein. 3, Stoma. 4, Epidermis f with stomata. (Greenland, Aug.1, 1892.) (H.E.P.) lateral walls , only a few unicellular hairs of no importance occur along the margin of the leaf; the latter is usually somewhat flattened. The stomata, which are not confined to any particular area, project slightly or else occur on the level of the epidermis. The cells of the outer layer of the mesophyll, and partly those of the layer beneath are developed as palisade- cells and slant towards the apex when seen in longitudinal section. The central mesophyll has no large intercellular spaces and con- 107 sists more or less of elongated, irregular, parenchymatous cells which are branchless. The vascular bundle in the middle of the leaf is accompanied by a sclerenchymatous bundle which is large compared with the size of the leaf. The walls of the meso- phyl! are coloured slightly yellow by chlor-zinc-iodine. The primary cortex of the stem consists of transparent cells without contents with a few which are thicker walled, and of trabecule like those in Andromeda and Ledum. It persists for several years. The secondary cortex consists of irregularly- angular corky cells. The annual rings are not distinct. I have not examined the root (cf. Hessermay). Andromeda polifolia L. (Pigs. 23— 24.) Borcesen, 1895, pp. 234—235. SEGERSTEDT, 1894, pp. 29—34. O. G. Petersen, 1901, p.77. Scaurz, 1888, pp. 254—-255. The specimens | have had for investigation are from the following localities: — West Greenland: Tiningnertok (62° 20’. June 6); (Finmark) Bosekop (1885, E. W.); Tromsö (June 28, 1884, E. W.). [Denmark: bog at Herning (Aug. 5, 1887, E. W.): bog at Farum (Febr. 24, 1907, H.E.P.)] The leaf. The outer walls of the epidermis are much thickened (6—8 » in the specimens from Tiningnertok) by the presence of a thick cuticle and beneath it a cuticularized layer. The upper epidermis has much-undulating lateral walls. and inner walls containing ligneous substances which are coloured red by phloroglucin-muriatic acid, a fact which is peculiar to Andromeda and does not occur in the other forms treated of in this paper. Hairs occur on the lower surface of the leaves in the Greenland specimens, but not on those in the Danish or Norwegian ones (BôrGesex, |. c.); the above-mentioned hairs do not play any prominent part as protective structures, the layer of wax on the lower surface of the leaf which occurs 108 in all Andromeda-forms is more useful in that respect. Sto- mata occur only on the lower surface; they often project slightly. The inner sides of the guard-cells, as also the neigh- bouring cells of the epidermis are covered by cuticle. According to Livrorss chlorophyll grains occur in the upper epidermis. Palisade-cells occur in 2—3 layers about 30—40 yw in height Fig. 23. Andromeda polifolia. The leaf. 6, shews the aqueous tissue and the thick-walled cells beneath the vascular bundle in the middle of the leaf. (1—4, Greenland: Tiningnertok, 62° 204. 5, Denmark: Sjælland.) (H.E.P.) at the most, and slanting towards the apex. The spongy parenchyma is of about the same thickness as is the palisade- tissue and consists of non-branching cells which are usually transversely elongated across the leaf, making the latter some- what isolateral, which circumstance harmonizes with the often somewhat erect position of the leaves. All the cells of the mesophyll are somewhat thick-walled. Tannin occurs abundantly 109 in all the cells, and is easily discernable in fresh material, but in spirit material it is seen only in the walls, which are found to be saturated with it, and some more than others (cf. Scrurz). It is possible that the tannin is not distributed quite evenly. Specimens from the bog at Farum (February, 1907) demonstrated very perfectly the Kaars winter-condition. The palisade-cells which are devoid of chlorophyll gave an exceptionally good reaction for tannin (cf. Warmine, Beobach- tungen über Pflanzen mit überwint. Laubblätter. Bot. Centralblatt, Bd. 16, p. 350). Below the central vascular bundle a tissue occurs consisting of very thin-walled cells (Fig. 23, 6), sometimes traversed by thick-walled cells which run from TRE a A + 8 eg ASF Fig. 24. Andromeda polifolia. Transverse section of stem. >< 180. (Tiningnertok.) (Phot.) the ring of bast to the epidermis, a kind of aqueous-tissue. A similar tissue is also met with in Ledum palustre. Stereom is developed thickly around the vascular bundles. In regard to the structure of the leaves, excepting the difference already mentioned with reference to the development of hairs, which 110 occurs only in the Greenland specimens, I have not found any features of importance which serve to distinguish the Danish specimens from the Arctic ones. The young stem has a primary cortex consisting of large, thin-walled cells, with a few thicker walled cells, and trabecule such as occur in the aqueous tissue below the central vascular bundle of the leaf; a uniformly cuticularized epidermis; and a large pith of similar structure to the cortex. The secondary cortex, which ‘according to SEGERSTEDT is developed on the lower part of the year’s shoot, consists of angular cells which have become corky and contain starch. In regard to the formation of annual rings, where the new annual ring begins, either a single tangential wall or several in succession may be observed. The single tangential wall or the outermost ones — in cases of several occurring in succes- sion — collapse and form a continuous peripheral line. Where several tangential walls occur, the latter are within the line in question. I am not prepared to say whether these walls have been formed during spring or in late summer. I am inclined to believe that the latter is the most probable. Otherwise the annual rings do not shew any special differences in the deve- lopment of the summer and autumn wood (Fig. 24) (O. G. Perersen, p. 77). As regards the structure of the stem I have not found any differences between the Danish and the Northern specimens in the material | have had at my disposal. I have not examined the roots. Lyonia calyculata (L.) Don. (Fig. 25.) Cassandra calyculata (L.) Don. O. G. Petersen, 1901, p. 76. Lanrorss, 1907, p. 75. Of Lyonia I have had only a very small quantity of material -— a single sample from Finland — hence I have not been able to enter more fully into this species. 111 The leaf. The epidermis of the upper surface is smooth and fairly thick. The lateral walls of the cells are slightly undulating. The outer walls of the epidermis of the lower surface are not specially developed. Stomata are confined to the lower surface and have no protective devices. Hairs, of one kind only, viz. peltate, occur on both sides of the leaf. They agree most closely with the corresponding hairs in Rhod. Fig. 25. Lyonia calyculata. The leaf. 3, Peltate hairs on the lower surface. Cf. note p. 81. (Finland.) lapponicum, but on the lower surface they do not play any important part as a protective mechanism to the stomata, as is the case in Rhod. lapponicum. According to Livrorss, chloro- phyll grains occur in the upper epidermis. The palisade-tissue, which consists of 3—4 layers of fairly small cells, passes by easy stages into a lacunal central part, formed by trabecule of non-branching parenchymatous cells 112 with large intercellular spaces between the trabeculæ. This central part again merges gradually into a part which usually consists of two layers of cells, and which may be termed the palisade-tissue of the lower surface. Thus, there is a certain isolaterality in the leaf of Lyonia as in that of Arctostaphylos Uva-ursi, which species the present one resembles in regard to its mesophyll. Of these two species Lyonia has the more isolaterality which is connected with the fact that the leaves of this species are sometimes vertical. » Beneath the larger vascular bundles an ill-developed aqueous- tissue occurs, with trabecule of thick-walled cells of similar nature to those in Ledum and others. The stereom, which is of medium thickness, consists of libriform cells. The limits of the annual rings were very indistinct in the material from the Botanic Garden in Kjøbenhavn (0. G. Peter- SEN, p. 76). Arctostaphylos Uva-ursi (L.) Spreng. (Figs. 26—27.) BôürGesex, 1895, pp. 234—235. Secerstenr, 1894, p. 34. O. G. Petersen, 1901, p. 74. Hesserman, 1900, p. 27. The specimens I have had for investigation are from the following localities: — West Greenland: Itivnek (July 1884, E.W.). Iceiand: Thingvellir (June 8, 1884) ; Mossfellsheidi (June 14, 1895); loc. ign. (Jan. 6, 1894, H. Jonsson). Norway: Bosekop (July 7, 1885, E. W.); Sakkabani, 1000’ (1885, E. W.); Tronfjæld. (Denmark: wood at Hjortlund (July 21, 1892); Mölhede; Botanic Garden in Kjebenhavn. Switzerland: St. Moritz.] The leaf. The upper and lower epidermis are very much thickened (on an average as much as 16) by the presence of a thick cuticle aud beneath it a cuticularized layer. Lateral walls not undulating. Hairs occur only along the margin of the young leaf and are not of much importance. The stomata, which are confined to the lower surface, are somewhat sunk 113 on account of the outer walls of the epidermis being so much thickened. The cells of the spongy parenchyma below, and the inner part of the guard-cells, are suberised along the part of their walls which is towards the intercellular spaces. According to Livrorss chlorophyll grains occur both in the upper and in the lower epidermis. Fig. 26. Arctostaphylos Uva-wrsi. The leaf and its parts. Cf. note, p. 81. 1, x about 100; 3, 5, x about 125; 2, 4, x about 250. (7, 2, 4, Finmark: Bosekop; 3, Norway: Tronfjæld; 5, Iceland.) (H.E.P.) The palisade and the spongy parenchyma are distinctly differentiated, but the cells of the latter are in a great number of cases elongated in the same direction as that of the former, so that a kind of isolaterality is here found. The layers of palisade-cells vary in number, as do the individual palisade-cells in regard to height. In specimens from Bosekop, Tronfjeld and Sakkabani the XXXVI. 8 114 layers are from 4 to 5 in number; the cells measuring 67 a by 120 in height (highest measure). In specimens from Hjortlund, Mölhede, and the Botanic Garden in Kjobenhavn the layers are from 2 to 3 in number; the cells measuring about 67 4 in height. In the specimens from St. Moritz the palisade-tissue was found to be of a still greater thickness, but perhaps we are here dealing with an Alpine or Subalpine species; and as it is contrary to what is usually found that the thickness of the palisade-tissues should increase the farther we advanced northwards, I do not attach any great importance to the facts mentioned above, the mate- rial being too scanty for any reliable conclusions to be based upon it. The upper layer of the palisade-cells slants some- what towards the apex. Large intercellular spa- ces occur in the spongy Fig. 27. Arctostaphylos Uva-ursi. parenchyma, which is Transverse section of stem. x 180. (Denmark: Mélhede.) (Phot.) formed by cells which branch but slightly and are transversely elongated. Tannin occurs in all the elements of the leaf. Stereom is very slightly developed, in correlation with the much-thickened epidermis. The stem. The primary outer cortex (cf. SEGERSTEDT) con- sists of a regular, much cuticularized epidermis without stomata, beneath which is a tissue consisting of fairly homogeneous, 115 rounded cells without intercellular spaces. In the innermost layer isolated bast-cells occur. The secondary cortex, which according to SEGERSTEDT is produced on branches 3—5 years of age, does not renew the epidermis as is the case in Arct. alpina. There are typical annual rings, and the spring and summer wood are distinctly differentiated. Now and then a tendency may be traced towards the formation of irregular, ill- defined annual rings, a fact which is often met with in the other Ericacew, Rhodoraceæ and Vaccinaceæ treated in the present paper. In the root I have not observed endotrophic hyphe (ef. HesseLman). Except the difference in regard to the palisade-cells I am not aware of having observed any other points in which the specimens from other countries differed from the Danish in- dividuals. Arctostaphylos alpina (L.) Spreng. (Fig. 28.) BôrGEsEN, 1895, pp. 236—237. O. G. Petersen, 1901, p. 75. Amprony, 1890, p. 70. I have had specimens for investigation from the following localities: — East Greenland: Hekla Havn (N. Hartz); Danmarks O (April 10, 1892, N. Hartz). Norway: (Finmark) Tromsö at Flöj- fjæld (July 24 and 27, 1885, E. W. Sweden: Jämtland (July, E. W.). Denmark: diff. localities. The leaf being deciduous, it naturally differs somewhat in structure from that of the previous plant. Structures which tend to check excessive transpiration and which are especi- ally necessary to protect plants against the dryness of the winter's cold, do not occur. The present species differs from the above in regard to the assimilatory tissue also, which is in itself peculiar as evergreen leaves do not assimilate very much during winter; in short we are here dealing with quite a different type. ee 116 The upper and lower epidermis are thin-walled throughout and have no thick cuticle or cuticularized layer. The outer walls are, however, coloured yellow by chlor-zinc-iodine. The Fig. 28. Arctostaphylos alpina. 1—4, The leaf. Zi, The large air-cavities formed by the epidermis of the lower surface having separated from the mesophyll; some of the large cells of this epidermis may also be seen. 5, shews how the new epidermis of the stem is formed. (Finmark: Tromsö; Jan.5.) (H.E.P.) cells of the upper epidermis have slightly undulating lateral walls while those of the lower are strongly undulating. Hairs are absent. The stomata are confined to the lower surface and 117 project slightly. Besides the guard-cells the epidermis of the lower surface consists partly of small and partly of large cells; the latter, as it appears, function as a kind of aqueous tissue, such as often occurs in the neighbourhood of vascular bundles. According to Livrorss chlorophyll grains occur both in the upper and in the lower epidermis. The palisade-cells occur in a single layer only, but are long (about 80 yw), nearly as long as the spongy parenchyma, and seen in longitudinal section to be placed somewhat obliquely, especially in the neighbourhood of the vascular bundles. The cells of the spongy parenchyma, which are but slightly branched, are usually elongated parallel to the surface of the leaf. Large intercellular spaces occur; in connection with the latter it may be mentioned that the epidermis of the lower surface easily separates from the spongy parenchyma, often forming unusually large air-cavities. The stem. The epidermis and the cortex of the young stem are similar to those of A. Uva-ursi. When the secondary cortex arises, and the formation of cork begins at the boun- dary between the primary and the secondary cortex, a layer, which has already previously been distinctly differentiated, is developed as a new epidermis which, as far as I can judge, persists for a shorter or longer time (several years) (Fig. 28, 5). But when once this new epidermis falls off it is not renewed, and then the external investment of the stem is formed by the cork-layer itself, which develops early (see Fig. 28,5) and exhibits no points of interest. The annual rings in the woody part resemble those in A. Uva-ursi; usually they are distinct, with a more or less marked difference between the autumn and spring wood, but sometimes these are somewhat indistinguishable. Normally, vessels are formed in the spring wood and tracheids in the autumn wood. I have not examined the roots. 118 Vaccinium Oxycoccos L. et var. microcarpum (Figs. 29—31.) Syn. Oxycoccos palustris Pers. SEGERSTEDT, p. 27. O.G. PETERSEN, p. 81. Hesserman, 1900, p. 27. The specimens I have had for investigation are from the following localities: — West Greenland: Godthaab (1895). Fin- mark: Alten (July 7, 1885). Norway: (Finmark) Bosekop; (Dovre) Vaarstien (July 13, 1887). Denmark: bog at Lyngby and Farum; (Jutland) Bjærget in Thy. Fig. 29. Vaccinium Oxycoccos. The leaf. Cf. note, p.81. (Denmark: Lyngby bog.) (E. Warming.) The leaf has no special protective devices as, for example, hairs; a wax-layer occurs only upon the lower surface. Both the upper and lower epidermis are very much thickened with cuticle and beneath that a cuticularized layer; their cells have wavy lateral walls and contain chlorophyll grains. The stomata, which are confined to the lower surface, are on a level with the epidermis and occur in considerable numbers relatively to the size of the leaf. This should probably be connected 119 partly with the small number of leaves and partly with the often great length of the stem which requires an abundant supply of air. Further, it must also be a fact of importance in this connection that the leaves occur only slightly above the level of the soil and in an atmosphere fairly rich in carbonic acid; this increases the necessity for oxygen. Upon the inner side of the guard-cells and upon the adjacent cells a cuti- cularized outer layer may be seen. The palisade-tissue consists of 1—2 layers, and the cells are at most 804 in length. On comparing Danish and northern Chl Fig. 30. Vaccinium Oxycoccos. The leaf. Cf. note p. 81. (Finmark: Bosekop.) (H.E.P.) specimens I have not found any special differences, except perhaps that the lower layer of palisade-cells is better deve- loped in the northern specimens. The cells of the spongy tissue are not much branched and form lamelle which lie somewhat transversely across the leaf a circumstance which harmonises well with the often vertical position of the leaf. The cells of the mesophyll are fairly thick- walled. No aqueous tissue occurs, but a considerable amount of stereom. The Kraus winter-condition was observed on Febr. 24, 1907 (Farum bog), but not on March 22, 1907 (Lyngby 120 bog), nor on Novbr. 11, 1906 (Ruder Hegn (wood)). In the upper palisade-cells a red cell-sap occurs during winter, and then the contents of these cells always give a good reaction for tannin. But in the leaf tannin also occurs in the other cells of the Fig. 31. Vaccinium Oxycoccos. Transverse section of stem (Denmark). X 180. (Phot.) mesophyll. There is scarcely any other difference between the Danish and the northern specimens than the one indicated above. The stem. The primary cortex consists of a fairly com- pact tissue of parenchymatous cells with a rather slightly de- 121 veloped epidermis. The secondary cortex is found early in June and consists of regularly arranged cork-cells (Secersrepr). The limit between the yearly rings of growth in the wood is not sharply defined, neither is there any difference between the spring and summer (or autumn) wood. The roots have not been investigated (cf. HesseLman). Vaccinium Vitis-idæa L. (forma pumila Hornemann). (Figs. 32—33.) SEGERSTEDT, p.26. O.G. Petersen, p. 81. Tepm, 1892, p. 74. Maury, 1887, p. 108. Hesserman 1900, p. 27. I have had specimens for investigation from the following localities: — West Greenland: Isortok (June 8, Kornerup); Kri- stianshaab (July 26, 1884, Hartz 1890). Norway: Bosekop (July 9, 1885, E. W.); Käfjord (July 10 and 15, E. W.); Tromsö (July 15, 1884, E. W.); (Dovre) Kongsvold (July 13, 1887, E. W.). The leaf has no special protective hairs. The upper and =e SES = ) BZ ñ IV vos à NT )) lower epidermis have much-thickened outer walls, with cuticle and beneath that à cuti- cularized layer, and slightly undulating, thickened lateral walls with numerous pores. Chlorophyll grains oc- cur in the lower epi- ) dermis. In small hol- 2: SS 4 lows on the lower Fig. 32. Vaccinium Vitis-idea. surface multicellular The leaf. Cf. note p.81. (Greenland.) (H.E.P.) (glandular) hairs occur which are, however, of no importance as protective devices. The stomata are confined to the lower surface and do not project. The outermost layer of the inner 122 walls of the guard-cells and of the neighbouring cells is euti- cularized. The palisade-cells occur in several layers and are about 50 » in length. In regard to the palisade-tissue the Subarctic and the Arctic specimens do not appear to be in any way inferior to the Danish specimens (of the typical species). Fig. 33. Vaccinium Vitis-idea. Transverse section of stem. >< 180. (Greenland.) (Phot.) In shade-forms (which, as is well-known, always accompany light- forms), Subarctic specimens of which, however, I have not had for investigation, the elements of the leaf are naturally reduced in size (especially the palisade-tissue). The spongy parenchyma is not much branched and has very large intercellular spaces of 123 about the same size as those in the palisade-tissue. No aqueous tissue occurs, nor is the stereom especially well-developed. In the material I had for investigation no difference could be observed between the Danish, the Subarctic and the Arctic specimens. But here, as was the case with regard to the other species, the material was too scanty to be useful for the investigations in question. The specimens from Furca Pass, Switzerland (Aug. 1904; H.E.P.), did not shew any differences of importance. The stem. According to Tenin (1892, p. 74) the primary cortex consists partly of transparent, thin-walled cells containing water and partly of thick-walled cells which contain chlorophyll and occur partly in trabecule and partly in groups (cf. e. g. Ledum). It persists for about three years. The secondary cortex, according to SEGERSTEDT, consists of an ordinary cork- tissue. The spring wood is differentiated from that of the summer (or autumn); but the limits of the annual rings are not always sharply defined. According to Simon (1902) the cause of the distinctness of the annual rings in Vac. Vitis-idea, and of the differentiation of the wood of the different seasons as mentioned above, will be found in the fact that evergreen forms require more stereom, while the deciduous forms need relatively more L ‘“Speichergewebe ;” but this is scarcely to be regarded as a universal rule (cf. Ledum, Rhododendron, etc.y. The roots I have had for examination from Hovmose in Gadevang at Frederiksborg shewed both endotrophic and ecto- trophic mycorhiza. Vaccinium uliginosum L. (with f. microphyllum Lge.) (Figs. 34—37.) Boreesen, 1895, pp. 236—237. SEGERSTEDT, p. 25. AMBRONY, 1890, p. 71. O.G. Petersen, 1901, p. 81. Hesserman, 1900, p. 27. Maury, 1887, p. 105. 124 Fig. 34. Vaccinium uliginosum. The leaf. 7, 2, Transverse section. 3. 4, Stomata. 5, The epidermis of the upper surface. (West Greenland.) (E. Warming.) Fig. 35. Vaccinium uiiginosum. 1, Transverse section, and 2, epidermis of the lower surface, (Greenland: Upernivik.) (H. E. P.) 125 I have had specimens for investigation from the following localities: — West Greenland: Buxefjord (Aug. 17, 1884, E. W.); Sukkertoppen (Aug. 16, 1884, E.W.); Upernivik (July 13, 1886 and July 11, 1887, Ryder); Uperniviks O (July 10, 1886); tent 8 (July 13, 1886, Ryder); tent 16 (July 30, 1887, Ryder); loc. ign. Fig. 36. Vaccinium uliginosum. Transverse section of stem. > 60. (Greenland.) (Phot.) (June 6, 1874, Kornerup). East Greenland: Hekla Havn (Nov. 4, 1891, N. Hartz). Norway: (Finmark) Tromsö (June 28, 1884, E. W.), and loc. ign. (July 4, 1884, E. W.). Iceland: Godaland (June 23, 1886, Feddersen). Denmark: diff. localities. The leaf is of the same type as that of Arctostaphylos 126 alpina; it is deciduous, hairs are absent, and there is only a waxy covering. The upper and lower epidermis are only slightly thickened and have no specially cuticularized layer beneath the cuticle; the lateral walls are slightly undulating. The stomata are con- fined to the lower surface and do not project. The palisade-tissue consists of 1—2 layers of cells, with a height of as much as 100 y, and it is somewhat unequally developed , the lower layer being less deve- loped when the upper consists of long cells. The cells of the spongy Ba, ay Ol is 7 parenchyma are more elongated in the vertical than in the horizontal direction and often branch but slightly; the intercellular spaces are large. The whole of the mesophyll is loosely or. ae # built. In the material at my disposal I have not observed any difference between Danish, Sub- arctic, and Arctic spe- Fig. 37. Vaccinium uliginosum. cimens. Transverse section of stem >< 180. (Phot.) The stem. The primary cortex consists, according to SEGERSTEDT, "of a few layers of cells of which the outermost have scanty chlorophyll-contents with walls thicker than those of the inner, which are loosely con- nected and the contents of which are colourless.” The epidermis 127 is not especially thickened. In the most internal cortex a few bast-cells occur. There is only a slight trace, or none at all, of difference between the spring and autumn wood. As may be seen in Fig. 37 annual rings evidently occur, but it is not always easy to distinguish their boundaries. The roots have not been investigated (Hesserman, p. 27). Vaccinium Myrtillus L. (Figs. 38—39.) Fig. 38. Vaccinium Myrtillus. The leaf. Cf. note p.81. 6, Stoma of the stem. 5, Hair from the margin of the leaf. (1, Tromsö; 2, 4, Stockholm.) (H.E. P.) 128 SEGERSTEDT, p. 20. O.G. Petersen, 1901, p. 80. Maury, 1887, p- 105. Woopuzan, 1904 —06, pp. 387 —391. I have had specimens for investigation from the following localities: — Norway: (Finmark) Tromsö (June 6, 1884, E. W.); (Dovre) Vaarstien (July 15, 1887, E.W.); (Dovre) Kongsvold (July, 1887, E.W.). Sweden: Stockholm (1888, E.W.). Denmark: diff. localities. Fig. 39. Vaccinium Myrtillus. Transverse section of stem. (Denmark: Ruder Hegn (wood).) >< 180. (Phot.) The leaf is of {the same type, both morphologically and anatomically, as that of the preceding and that of Arct. alpina. No special protective hairs occur, nor is a wax-layer present. The upper and lower epidermis have very thin outer walls and no thick cuticle nor cuticularised layer. The lateral walls are undulating. At the margin of the leaf and along its larger veins the leaf-tissue appears to be prolonged into characteristic 129 multicellular glandular hairs (Fig. 39, 5) (cf. Woopnear) which are probably of importance as protective devices in the bud- condition only, if indeed they have any importance in the above connection. Besides these, ordinary unicellular hairs occur in the same situation. The palisade-cells are of one layer only, about 35 # in height, and loosely connected. The spongy parenchyma is few-layered and has large intercellular spaces. Aqueous tissue and stereom are absent. The whole of the leaf is loosely built. The stem. I shall not enter more fully into the structure of the stem, but shall only refer the reader to Secersrenr and Simon. There is no great difference between the spring and summer (or autumn) wood, and the limits between the different annual rings are not very distinct. I have not examined the roots. Summary of the Zricacew. In the present summary I shall briefly compare the chief results arrived at from the special consideration of the biological anatomy of the individual species. I shall begin by comparing the species with each other in regard to protection against the danger of excessive transpiration as indicated by the structure of the leaf; and in regard to the adaptation to light as expressed in the structure of the palisade-tissue; comparing in fact, the separate types of leaf-structure in their relation to external factors. The results thereby arrived at will be viewed in the light of the geographical distribution of each species. In the com- parison of species according to the developmental stage reached by their leaf-structure in relation to the climate, they should, of course, occur in the same habitats or at least XXXVI. 9 130 in localities which are identical when viewed from a physio- logical point of view. Lastly the species within each morphological type should be compared with each other. Quite a distinct matter is the mutual comparison of the types, but into this I shall not enter in the present summary. In regard to the localities in which occur the species with which we are here dealing, I have not any exhaustive know- ledge of their nature, but I feel able to state that on the whole it is scarcely possible that any differences of importance can exist. With respect to all the evergreen forms, the winter and early spring is the time which decides the degree of protection needed against excessive transpiration, but during winter and early spring the nature of the localities is hardly of any consequence, the soil in all cases being entirely frozen; but possibly a more or less thick covering of snow may be of importance. Hartz writes in Östgrönlands Vegetationsforhold! that Cassiope tetragona and Rhododendron lapponicum are often found in places bare of snow, but only the former may be said to thrive well there. The other Zricacee he mentions in the paper in question appear mostly to be covered by snow. It is doubtless customary for all of them to be, as a rule, covered by snow. But if it be now customary for the Ericace®, and, on the whole, the dwarf shrubs of mocrs and rocky flats, to be covered by snow during winter, we may ask of what im- portance are the xerophytic structures. In regard to this I shall first refer to what Warmine says in Grönlands Vege- tation. He writes (p. 121) that “it now and then may happen, and happens everywhere in the Polar regions, that large areas remain bare of snow all through the winter or are very early laid bare of snow, consequently, it is evident that it is espe- cially those leaves that live more than a year that must be 1 Meddelelser om Grönland, Vol. 18, p. 182. 131 protected against excessive transpiration.” Korverup Rosexvince writes in Det sydlige Grönlands Vegetation’ “The strong winds prevailing in the mountains (Föhnen) will be especially dangerous to plants during winter when it either melts the snow or causes it to evaporate largely.” The fact that the plants are thus casually laid bare during winter, as also the melting of the snow in early spring, are both doubtless very dangerous, and sufficiently account for the formation of organs that tend to check transpiration. In accordance with this, Linrorss writes in his paper on the evergreen flora (1907) that it is especially the frozen soil during spring that is of importance in the above-mentioned respect. The spring is doubtless otherwise a very damp season in the Arctic regions. Thus the snow- covering hardly plays any prominent part in regard to those structures of the Æricaceæ which we are here considering. With regard to the two above-mentioned species, Rhodod. lapp. and Cassiope tetragona, we are probably not justified in con- necting the fact of their occurrence in exposed localities with their structure except that such occurrence is due to the fact of their structure being especially xerophytic. It should be remembered that they occur also in less exposed localities, and strictly speaking, most frequently there. On the whole, there is hardly any particular feature in the nature of the habitats of the Éricaceæ with which we are here dealing, which should cause the appearance of different degrees in the adaptations for withstanding drought. With regard to light they all stand on an equality as far as | can see. The species belonging to the deciduous group, which may come into consideration in this connection (strictly speaking only Vaccinium uliginosum and Arctostaphylos, as Vacc. Myr- tillus is not quite Arctic) are doubtless similarly situated as regards the external conditions. 1 Meddelelser om Grönland, Vol. 15, p. 108. 9* 132 I may add that | am well aware that the views given above are in many points open to criticism. The Leaf. Among the forms with broad leaves which persist through the winter Rhododendron lapponicum is doubtless the one that is specially Arctic, and one of the oldest forms of this region; consequently, it may well be.the first to be dealt with. Here we find a thick epidermis on both surfaces; a well-developed covering of peltate hairs; stomata especially well-protected ; several layers of small palisade-cells; and a slightly branching spongy parenchyma arranged in lamellæ around the large inter- cellular spaces. With regard to the last-named feature it may be mentioned that it would be quite indefensible to connect them at all with Arctic conditions such as, for example, the great dampness of air in these regions. According to LaLanse, leaves which may be several years’ old, provided they are not too small, have large intercellular spaces. This feature is not dependent upon any particular climate, but should rather be connected with the thickness of the epidermis, which affords good protection against the danger of excessive transpiration; or better still, the spaces may be rendered necessary in the present instance, because the stiff, coriaceous leaves cannot be stirred so freely by the wind as are deciduous leaves. Trying next to find a species which is as well protected as Rhododendron, we come to Ledum. This is a very common species in the Arctic regions, but it has in addition a much more southerly distribution, in districts with a continental cli- mate, and consequently, a severe winter. It is scarcely as typi- cally Arctic as Rhododendron, neither is it as old-established in the region as the latter. Nevertheless it is justifiable to surmise that its structure reflects to some extent the Arctic climate. The stomata are perhaps not so well protected as those in Rhododendron, but on the other hand we have here 133 more definite aqueous tissue. The palisade-cells are somewhat longer than in Rhododendron, particularly in the decidedly Arctic form L. decumbens. Here we have (in Rhododendron and Ledum), without going deeper into the matter, two distinct kinds of palisade-tissue; which shews that in the Arctic moorland plants the height of the palisade-cells is practically immaterial, so that with regard to this feature the plants may retain unmodified their natural condition. As regards Ledum, its southern distribution may possibly be connected with the height of its palisade-cells. Both the species are well fur- nished with protective devices against excessive transpiration, a fact which is of ordinary occurrence in the Arctic moorland plants. The next five forms which come under consideration, Arctostaphylos Uva-ursi, Andromeda, Lyonia calyculata, Vac- cinium Vitis-idea and Oxycoccos can scarcely be said to have their chief distribution in the Arctic regions. Among them, Lyonia calyculata and Arctostaphylos Uva-ursi extend, perhaps, farthest north. In connection with this, these two species, which also most resemble each other in points of leaf-anatomy, are best protected against the danger of excessive transpiration — Lyonia by its hairs, and Arctostaphylos by the thick outer walls of its epidermis. These two species have moreover the small-celled palisade-tissue characteristic of Rhododendron; among the less protected species this tissue occurs in Vac- cinium Vitis-ideea only. This species has about an equal degree of protection as Vacciniwm Oxycoccos and Andromeda, which two have wax on the lower surface of their leaves. With regard to protection against ‘the danger of excessive transpiration, all the five above-mentioned species rank low compared with Rho- dodendron and Ledum; the reason for this may perhaps be found either in their special nature, or, in their former or present position relative to the Arctic regions. As regards the three latter, the Arctic part of their distribution is more 134 peripheral than that of the two former. The palisade-cells in Vaccinium Oxycoccos and Andromeda are long and occur in layers which are fewer and of greater thickness than in Ledum, And they bear further testimony to the fact that in the Arctic regions the palisade-tissue is independent of light and of drought. The want of protection exhibited in Vacc. Vitis-idæa and Andro- meda appears to have resulted in the cells of the mesophyll becoming fairly thick-walled. The development of cuticle on the inner walls of the guard-cells and adjacent parts is common to all the forms upon which hairs are not developed. All the forms with furrowed and acicular leaves have in their mere outline, and also in the position of their stomata, a special advantage over the broad-leaved forms. Loiseleuria is least protected in regard to its outline. But nevertheless the leaves of this form may be said to be well protected by a thick epidermis, by mucilaginous walls, and by dense hairiness. The palisade-cells are of about medium height. It will excite no surprise to learn that Loiseleuria is common in Arctic regions. Phyllodoce somewhat resembles Loiseleuria in structure, but is possibly more xerophytic than the latter. The palisade- cells are here also of medium size as are those in Ledum. Phyllodoce is hardly so decidedly Arctic as is Loiseleuria. Cassiope hypnoides and Cassiope tetragona, especially the latter, must be regarded as those which shew most adaptation. I shall not here repeat their characteristics, but it will suffice to point out that they are decidedly Arctic (Cass. hypn. occurs in the Southern Alpine regions), and that the palisade-tissue consists of cells which are, if anything, somewhat small. As is the case with Ledum and with Rhododendron among the broad-leaved species, so also here, the protectional devices against the danger of excessive transpiration are highly deve- loped. These two forms have probably originally been developed under Arctic (Alpine) conditions. I am not able to decide what 135 is the age-relationship, from a purely Arctie (Alpine) point of view, which exists between the four above-mentioned species, but I am inclined to believe that the species of Cassiope are the oldest in that respect. The leaves of the deciduous forms scarcely suggest an Arctic climate. They are all built more compactly than are the leaves in the forms especially mentioned by Bércesen (1895); but then it must be remembered that they occur also in moor- land soil or at any rate in sour, peaty soil. Of these forms only Vace. uliginosum is common in the Arctic regions. Ana- tomically it hardly differs from the southern forms. Judging especially from the fact of Arctostaphylos alpina having larger intercellular spaces it is doubtless less xerophytic than is Vacc. uliginosum. Vace. Myrtillus is scarcely sufficiently old- established in the Arctic regions to be referred to the Arctic Flora. Among the cases in which I have investigated the leaves of southern specimens, only rarely have | been able to prove that a lessening of the palisade-tissue accompanies further advance southwards into the lowlands. But then it must be remembered that the material has not in any way been com- plete. In regard to the slight difference observed in the xero- phytic structure of the North-European and of the Arctic individuals of the same species, this may possibly — only possibly — be due to the fact that winter-time, the most dangerous time of the year, the time when evergreen leaves need the greatest protection, does not in many points differ greatly in the localities in question. All the species described in the present paper have tannin in their leaves; most likely it is a family characteristic which is useful to them in the Arctic regions. In some Danish and a few Arctic specimens I have seen the plasma and the chloro- phyll-contents of the evergreen leaves in the winter condition 136 described first by G. Kraus, but since then very little noticed.! In all the evergreen forms these contents are doubtless con- siderably contracted for a shorter or longer period during the winter, either in the palisade-cells only, or also in a part of the cells of the mesophyll. With regard to the individual cases in which this condition has been demonstrated, reference should be made to the particular section. The Stem. In the cortex of the stem of Ledum, Andromeda, Cassiope hypnoides, Phyllodoce and Loiseleuria occur transparent aqueous- tissue cells, among which are scattered a few thicker-walled cells with contents, or else lamellæ of the above cells occur; the tissue in question occurs also below the central vascular bundle in the leaf of Ledum and Andromeda. The protection of the stem against the danger of excessive transpiration does not on the whole present any features, other than those men- tioned above, which can be serviceable for classifying the indi- vidual forms. The fact that the cortex has often no decided xerophytic character is doubtless occasioned either by the com- pact and low growth of the plant or by the circumstance that the old parts of the cortex, though more or less separated, yet adhere for a long time to the stem. The differences with regard to the formation of the annual rings which have been pointed out above, as also the often very slight distinc- tion between the different elements of the wood—both these, and especially the latter, are no doubt systematic characters. In the southern specimens of certain species that extend south- wards, we find the elements of the wood as slightly differentiated as those in the northern specimens — stereom is especially ill-developed, — a circumstance which must bring us to abandon 1 Cf. Rirrer v. GUTTENBERG: Anatom. phys. Untersuchungen über das immergrüne Laubblatt der Mediterranflora. Engl. bot. Jahrb. Bd. 38, 1907, p. 410. 137 the theory that the short period of growth in the Arctic regions is the cause of this slight differentiation. But in spite of this it does not follow that the short period of growth is of no importance whatever in this connection; it is undoubtedly instrumental in lessening the difference between the different elements of the wood; but as yet there hardly exists any accurate data on this point. In some cases other circumstances, such as slight need of stereom (in the case of prostrate stems), are doubtless of importance. Lastly if, with reference to what I have indicated in the introductory lines, | am to point out the species which are most in conformity with the Arctic climate, then among the evergreen species it must be Rhododendron lapponicum, and to a certain extent Ledum and Cassiope tetragona (Cassiope hypnoides also in a measure) and among the deciduous species Vaccinium uliginosum. It is only the structure of the leaves which is of importance in this connection, the stem and the root not shewing any special points of interest in this respect. Among the evergreen species, the greatest progress has doubtless been made by Rhododendron lapponicum and Cassiope tetragona — both true Arctic species which have most probably been long-established in the region in question, -- and only such evergreen species as have, each in its own way, assumed the degree of protec- tion attained by these two, will be able to continue to exist in the Arctic climate. Among the deciduous species such decided differences are not to be found as occur among the ever- greens. 138 Postscript, When working upon the Pirolacee W. Rommet’s paper Anatomische Untersuchungen über die Gruppen der Piroleæ und Clethraceæ, Heidelberg, 1898, escaped my attention; in it the anatomy of the Pirolaceæ is treated of, especially that of the stem and root. That paper would not, however, have influenced my treatment of the species in ques- tion, as the exclusively biological point of view which I have adopted in the present paper required an independent, fresh description. But Ronsmer’s paper should be mentioned here. For the sake of uniformity I give here the respective pages in Rommer’s paper: — Pir. rotundifolia, p. 19, Pir. minor, p. 11, Pir. secunda, p. 22, Chimophila umbellata, p. 28. 30—6—1908. (Sertryk af Vidensk. Meddel, fra den naturh. Foren. i Kbhvn. 1908.) Arbejder fra den Botaniske Have i Kobenhavn. Nr. 45. The species of Avrainvilleas hitherto found on the shores of the Danish West Indies. LIBRARY By NEW YORK i BOTAN Frederik Børgesen. GARDEN. (With Tab. III.) This paper is based upon material collected during my last visit to the islands in 1905—06. The specimens brought home have for the most part been dried but a good deal also have been preserved in spirit or formalin. At first it had been my intention to work out all my material of the Codiaceæ but as Mrs. and Mr. Gepp in London have in- formed me that they are working out a monograph of this family I have preferred to put off my examination of this group until their paper has appeared. I want to bring my best thanks to Mrs. and Mr. Gepp for valuable information as to the Avrainvilleas, received not only personally during a visit to London last autumn but also by letter later on. I am also highly indebted to Dr. Ed. Bornet in Paris, who has most kindly sent to me original specimens of Crouan’s Herb. to be found in Herb. Thuret. The Genus Avrainvillea was founded by Decaisne on a speci- men from Iles des Saintes, near Guadeloupe in his paper: ‘Sur les Corallines ou Polypiers calciféres’ (Annales des sciences naturelles, Botanique, II. sér., tome 18, 1842, p. 108). He describes here the species Avrainvillea nigricans. 28 Later on, several species were described, partly really new partly also forms which had already been described. By reason of this and also from the fact that the same species has been refer- red to different genera, the nomenclature has been highly en- tangled and the attempts which have been made to correet this failure have for the most part been far from successful. In this connection I may mention the paper by Murray and Boodle: “A systematic and structural account of the genus Avrainvillea Deene.” (Journal of Botany, Vol. 29, London 1889, p. 67), where not only the definition of species but also the nomenclature for the most part is highly unsatisfactory. Howe has in a recently published paper: ‘Phycological Studies — III. Further notes on Halimeda and Avrainvillea” (Bulletin of the Torrey Botanical Club, vol. 34, 1907, pag. 491) tried to bring clearness in this disorder. Even if his paper shows a great progress I cannot agree with him in all points. Later on I shall come back to this matter. In the Danish West Indies I have only found this genus in deeper water, for the most part in about 20—30 meters, while in other places e.g. at Jamaica it also occurs in quite shallow water as I have myself seen. Avrainvillea Decaisne. Avrainvillea comosa (Bail. et Hary.) Murray et Boodle. Murray, G. and L. A. Bodle, A systematic and structural account of the genus Avrainvillea Decne (Journal of Botany, vol. XX VII, 1889, p.71). Chlorodesmis comosa Bail. et Harv. in Harvey, Nereis Boreali-Americana, Part III, 1858, p. 29. Only one specimen was found which I refer, not without doubt, to this species, my plant being somewhat different from the speci- mens I have seen from the eastern hemisphere. The plant had no stipe; it was of a dark yellow-green colour and consisted of a large tuft of intertwined filaments about 6—8 cm. high. It was of a very loose consistency, the filaments being for the most part free; it was fastened to the bottom by means of rhizoids (Fig. 1 f) which grew out from the lowest part of the fila- ments and attached themselves to sand and gravel. The filaments were not very richly branched and above the dichotomy there was usually no constriction or it was only present in one of the fila- ments (cfr. Fig. 1 a, b, c, d, e). The thickness of the filaments was about 140 4. The filaments were thin-walled; small spindle-shaped A Fig. 1. Avrainvillea comosa (Bail. et Harv.) Murray et Boodle. Compare text. a—f about */1; g about 17/1. chromatophores occurred in the wall-plasma (Fig. 1 g); in these I have not seen pyrenoids nor have I found amylum. The plant was found: St. Jan, off America Hill in the sea to the west of Tatch Island near Tortola in about 30 meters of water. My plant differs from specimens of the Eastern Hemisphere which I have seen by having lesser branched filaments, by having 30 the filaments only rather seldom constricted above the dichotomy and by its thin walls. But it seems to me that these differences may very possibly be ascribed to the rather great depth at which the plant was found. Avrainvillea nigricans Decaisne. Decaisne, Sur les Corallines etc. (l.c. p. 108). Howe, Phy- cological Studies III (1. c. p.508). Avr. nigricans Decsne., Murray and Boodle 1. c. p. 70, the specimens from ‘Iles des Saintes prope la Guadeloupe, d’Avrainville’. Avr. longicaulis Murray and Boodle, I. c. excluding syn. Rhipilia longicaulis Kütz. Avr. sordida Murray and Boodle, 1. c. at all events the Nr. 174 bis, which I have been able to examine through the kindness of Dr. Bornet and which contains only rather small, but to be sure, quite characteristic spe- cimens of this species). This species is characterized by its very regularly moniliform fllaments, those of the interior being thicker, more often varying to both sides of 50 w (Fig. 2 6, c); while those of the surface grow thinner, about 30 y and get shorter links (Fig. 2a). These fila- ments are woven together forming a very loose and open cortical layer. The chromatophores are spindleshaped and contain a pyrenoid (Fig. 2c); much amylum is to be found, especially in the older filaments. Avr. nigricans has a rather heterogeneous habitus. The stipe, which takes its rise from a terete rhizome lying on the bottom, is terete, though often flattened in the uppermost part, passing evenly into the flabellum; the stipe can be 10—15 cm. longand even more, or quite short. The shape of the flabellum also varies much. It can be transverse, oval or reniform, often with cordate or cuneiform base, with the margin entire, or more or less lacerated, or even lobed. Most commonly it is not at all zonate, but specimens also occur which are very clearly zonate. On account of the very loose texture of the flabellum Avr. 1) As Dr. A. Gepp most kindly informs me only the Nr. 30 of Mazé, Algues de Guadeloupe is the type of Avr. sordida Crn. nigricans is rather easily recognized, as the light is seen through the leaf when kept against the window. Avr. longicaulis is the most common species of the Avrainvil- leas in the Danish West Indies, where it occurs in deeper water at a depth of about 20—30 meters. It has been found hitherto: at St. Thomas in the sea west Fig. 2. Avrainvillea nigricans Decaisne. Compare text. a,b about 71; ce about 17/1. of Water Island; St. Jan in the sound between St. Thomas and St. Jan off Christiansfort, and near the Gt. St. James Isle. This species has already been found at St. Thomas by the Challenger-Expedition; Murray and Boodle have called it Avr. longicaulis (Murray and Boodle 1. c. p. 70). At my request Mr. Gepp has kindly examined the specimen to be found in the British Museum and writes to me as follow: “The St. Thomas ‘Challenger’ speci- men of Avr. longicaulis Murray and Boodle has moniliform filaments measuring 30—70 y in diameter which is M. A. Howe s definition of Avr. nigricans Decsn. It certainly is not Avr. Rawsoni M. A. Howe.” Avrainvillea Mazei Murray and Boodle. G. Murray and L. A. Boodle, A systematic and structural account of the genus Avrainvillea Decsne (Journal of Botany, vol. 27, 1889, p. 70, tab. 288, fig. 6). Avr. longicaulis Howe, Phycological Studies — III. Further Notes on Halimeda and Avrainvillea (1 e. p. 509). Howe has called this species Avrainvillea longicaulis (Kiitz.) Murr. & Boodle, as he considers the Rhipilia longicaulis of Kützing (Tabulae phycologicae Band VIII, p. 18, pl. 28, fig. 2) as being this species and “which may be fairly considered the “type” of the new binomial” (1. c.). He has also (Phycological Studies — II, p. 586) examined fragments of Kiitzing’s Rhipilia longicaulis in Herb. Sonder and has arrived at the opinion that this specimen is the same as the Avrainvillea Mazei even if some smaller disagreements are to be found. Had Howe now called this species Avr. longicaulis (Kiitz.) Howe I might perhaps agree with him but in referring it to Murray’s and Boodle’s Avr. longicaulis, which, as Howe has pointed out, is to be considered as a mixture of Avr. nigricans (the diagnosis) and Zongicaulis (the syn. Rhipilia longicaulis Kütz.) I can not follow him. Howe writes (l.c. p. 510) about the matter: “The maintenance of the binomial Avrainvillea longicaulis for the present species and the crediting of the name to Murray and Boodle are both, we believe, technically correct, even though it may prove a source of some confusion for a time, in as much as Murray and Boodle evidently intended that another species — the true A. nigricans Decaisne — should bear Kiitzing’s name longicaulis. But as Murray and Boodle, in proposing the new combination Avrainvillea longicaulis cited Kiitzing’s Rhipilia longicaulis it cannot be denied that this new combination applies also to Kiitzing’s species and that it applies to it in a peculiar and typical way.” 33 In my opinion the confusion which Murray and Boodle have brought into the Avrainvilleas by this is made much more hope- less. It seems to me that neither the diagnosis of Kitzing (L ec. p.13) nor his figure may be said to give any particularly good characteristic of Avr. longicaulis in the sense of Howe. As on the other hand we have in the diagnosis of Murray and Boodle’s new species Avr. Mazei a comparatively good description, in which they just point out the chief characteristic for this species viz: the cylindric filaments, and they further give a good figure / / b i ED / Ge \ ra = ee Hva) Fig. 3. Avrainvillea Mazei Murray and Boodle. Forma. Compare text. a, b, ce about 7/1. (l. c. tab. 288, fig. 6) of a part of a filament, it seems to me the only correct course to use their name of this species. I shall also point out that I have been able through the kind- ness of Dr. Bornet to see the Nr. 65 of Mazé et Schramm’s Algues of Guadeloupe quoted by Murray and Boodle and which is a well-developed specimen of this species. On the shores of the Danish West Indies I have only found a single, small, but quite typical specimen of this species. The stipe is about 3 cm. long; the breadth of flabellum 7 cm. The filaments agree very well with the figure of Murray and Boodle and with Howe’s description; they are about 50 yw thick, cylindric and strongly constricted above the dichotomy. Vidensk. Meddel.fra den naturh. Foren. 1908. C9 34 While this specimen as mentioned above is quite typical I have, yet with some doubt, referred another specimen (my collec- tions Nr. 1106) to this species (Fig. 3). The specimen in question is large, the stipe being about 20 cm. long and the flabellum 8 cm. high and 11 cm. broad; the margin of the flabellum is irregularly lobed. The filaments of the interior of the flabellum are cylindric (Fig. 3 a, b), about 50 y thick, those of the surface thin, about 20 a and rather torulose or sometimes even moliniform (Fig. 3c). Howe gives the diameter of the filaments as 28—70 y and writes about the filaments: “rarely here and there subtorulose”. This plant seems to me, in a striking way, similar to the figure of Kützing (ies pl 28) Avrainvillea asarifolia nov. sp. Flabelliformis, colore sordide olivaceo-viridi; rhizoma teres, sti- pes cylindricus in superiore parte complanatus, leniter in flabellum terminale transiens; flabellum oblonge reniforme, basi cordata aut cuneata, margine integro aut lobato, tenue et membranaceum, satis distincte zonatum. Filamenta interioris flabelli sæpius paullo moniliformia aut torulosa aut cylindrica, supra dichotomiam con- stricta. Latitudo filamentorum 20—30 „u, sæpius 24—27 y. Filamenta superficiei tenuiora, torulosiora magisque ramosa et inter se plexa, latitudo 8—10—13 y, apice filamentorum interdum in pilum elongato [Tab. nostr. III]. Dark-olive-green or sometimes greyish when dried; most pro- bably of a similar colour when living; rhizome terete; stipe cylin- dric, in the lower part more flattened, higher up 6—23 cm. long, about 7 mm. in diameter; flabellum oblong-reniform with cordate base or especially in older specimens with more or less cunate base until about 10 cm. high and 14 cm. broad, entire or lobed, thin and membranaceous, of a rather firm consistency, being for the most part rather clearly zonate; the surface subglabrous, under a lens fine granulated. Filaments in the interior of the flabellum cylindric or often slightly moniliform or torulose with a rather strong constriction just above the dichotomy (Fig. 4 a, 6). The diameter of the filaments about 20—30 y, more often reaching only 24—27 y. Near the surface the filaments grow gradually slender, becoming more and more torulose and more richly ramified (Fig. 4 c, d), woven together, forming a rather firm but yet open plectenchyma ss 4 À Fig. 4. Avrainvillea asarifolia nov. sp. Compare text. a—f about 1; g about 17%/:. (Fig. 4e); the diameter of the outermost filaments varies from 8— 10—13 p; the walls here in the outermost filaments are rather thick, thicker than those of the filaments in the middle of the flabellum. Sometimes the apex of the filaments runs out in long hairs (Fig. 4 f). (Tab. IIT). The chromatophores are roundish or oblong and contain a 5* pyrenoid (Fig. 4 9); in older filaments especially quantities of amylum are to be found. This species is found at St. Thomas: in the sea to the west of Water Island at a depth of about 20 meter; St. Jan: off Chri- stiansfort in about 30 meter of water, and near the isle Gt. St. James in the sound between St. Thomas and St. Jan at the same depth. By its more or less moniliform filaments this species may remind one somewhat of Avr. nigricans, but firstly the filaments in my species are not at all so regularly monoliform as in Avr. nigricans and further the filaments are much thinner. Compared with Avr. levis Howe of which I possess an original specimen kindly sent to me by Dr. Howe my species differs, be- sides its largeness, by having the filaments of the surface much more torulose than in Avr. levis where the outermost filaments run out in long, thin, only very feebly torulose threads. Avrainvillea spec. The colour of the single plant found when living I cannot tell, on drying it is grey-green with transition to a sordid-yellow; it has a short vertical rhizome covered with sand and gravel quite like those of e. g. Penicillus and Halimeda; then a slender stipe most probably somewhat flattened, on the dried specimen quite flat, especially in the upper part where it evenly passes over into the flabellum; the length of the stipe is 44/2 cm., the breadth only about 4 mm.; the flabellum is transverse-oblong, 8 cm. broad, 51/2 high, thin, of a rather loose consistency with a more or less lacer- ated or lobed margin; the surface is somewhat uneven. Filaments in the interior of the flabellum (Fig. 6 a, b,c) cylin- dric or only very little torulose, about 30 w in average diameter, only just below the dichotomy reaching 40 » or even more, rather strongly constricted above the dichotomy and above the constriction in the thicker filaments often a single monoliform swelling; near the surface the filaments grow thinner (Fig. 6 d, e) becoming irregularly torulose and often strongly constricted; sometimes only one of the branches is developed (cfr. Fig. 6 e). The thickness of these fila- ments is about 14—17 uw; the uttermost part of them often growing Fig. 5. Avrainvillea spec. !lı. thicker (19—25 y). The chromatophores are spindle-shaped and contain a pyrenoid (fig. 6 f). Only a single specimen was found, viz: St. Jan, Maho Bay, where it was growing in a depth of about 16 meters of water. This plant I had at first referred to Avr. levis Howe (Phyco- logical studies — II, Bulletin Torrey bot. Club, Vol. 32, p.565) and 38 Mrs. Gepp to whom I showed my plant during a visit to London in October 1907 then agreed with me; later on after having seen an original specimen of Avr. levis Howe, I have some doubt if my plant really could be referred to this species; but having only one specimen and therefore not being able to form any opinion as to its capability of variation I have preferred to let it be undetermined. The chief characteristic of my plant is that the main filaments in Fig. 6. Avrainvillea spec. Compare text. b,c, d,e about “/1; a and f about 2/1. the middle of the flabellum are cylindric or only very little torulose; and further the increasing of the diameter of the outmost branches. Also the habitus of the plant is rather different from A. lenis, my form being much larger, of a looser consistency and the flabellum with a lacerated and lobed margin. 39 In connection with the above-named species of Avrainvilleas I may also mention a peculiar plant which I first took for an Avrainvillea but later on have found may be like the Flabellaria luteofusca Crn., in Mazé et Schramm, Essai de Classification des Algues de la Guadeloupe, p. 88. Through the great kindness of Dr. Bornet, in whose pos- session Herb. Thuret is and in which Herb. Crouan is incorporated, I have got for comparison with my plant the No. 1403 mentioned by Mazé et Schramm (l. ec.) and which anatomically has shown itself quite to agree with my specimens. Murray (Catalogue of the marine Alge of the West Indian Region, Journal of Botany vol. 27, p. 239) has referred this plant, though with a ?, to the genus Udotea and writes about it: “This very obscure form appears to me to be an imperfect state of an Udotea. Agardh, who had not seen a specimen (loc. cit. p. 76), says, “An potius Avrainvillea forma?” It is certainly not an Avrainvillea though it outwardly resembles one.” Finally Howe in his latest paper: Phycological Studies — III p.513, gives a description of this species, which in all essentials seems to agree well with my plant, even if it, in a few points, shows some differences. I shall now firstly give a description of my plant. The single specimen found is preserved in formalin. Its colour is dark-green and most probably it has had nearly the same colour when living. The stipe (the rizome was wanting) is rather thin, about 4 mm. in diameter; it is cylindrical in the basal part, more flattened upward and passes evenly into the flabellum; the length of the stipe was in the present specimen 4 cm., between the stipe and the flabel- lum there was a broader flattened part on the side of which most probably side-branches have been present. The present fla- bellum is transversely suborbicular, 8 cm. broad and 5!/2 cm. high, entire, only with a little lacerated margin rather thin and mem- branaceous, but of a rather thin texture reminding one of that in Udotea, the surface being rather dense and glabrous; it is distinctly zonate. 40 In the interior of the flabellum the filaments are cylindric or sometimes a little subtorulose, seldom even moniliform (Fig. 8 a-d); above the dichotomy, which is not so very typical, as one of the branches is most often somewhat thinner and placed to the side, just as sometimes filaments divided into three branches (Fig. 8 e) Fig. 7. Cladocephalus luteofuscus (Crouan) Börgs. 1/1. occur, the filaments are less or not at all constricted; the thick- ness of these filaments varies from 60—70 w or a little to- wards one of these. At the surface the filaments divide several times and grow here, rather suddenly, quite thin viz. 6—8 in diameter (Fig. 8 f, g). These thin, torulose, irregularly branched 41 and rhizoid-like ends of the filaments are rather firmly woven to- gether and transformed to a dense and firm plectenchyma (Fig. 3 A), Fig. 8. Cladocephalus luteofuscus (Crouan) Börgs. Compare text. a, b. c. d. e about ”Iı; f, 9, h about 1; à about 1/1. though not so dense but that numerous small openings are present between the filaments. The stipe has a very similar anatomy. The plant is uncalcified. 42 The chromatophores are roundish or oblong (Fig. 8 7), lying quite near the thin wall of the plant; they contain a pyrenoid and are often filled with amylum. It was found at St. Thomas: in the sound to the west of Water Islands where it was growing in about 20—30 meters. Setting aside that the flabellum in my specimen is transversely oblong and zonate while Howe describes the plant as “not at all or very obsoletely zonate” and the shape of the flabellum as “cuneate- obovate or irregularly semiorbicular with cuneate base” my plant agrees very well with Howe’s description. The specimen of Mazé’s alge, Nr. 1403 in Herb. Thuret, upon which Howe has based his description and which I have been able to see myself through the kindness of Dr. Bornet, consists of 3 specimens of which the one again consists of two. Howe considers this No. as the type- specimen. Now Dr. Bornet has communicated the following to me: “Dans l’herbier Crouan le Flabellaria luteofusca est représenté par des échantillons portant les numéros 27, 1403 et 1904. Ces deux derniers seulement sont cités dans le livre de Mazé et Schramm, p. 88. Le No. 27 (10®™¢ envoi Conquérant) est le seul qui soit étiqueté de la main de Crouan.” And Dr. Bornet has most kindly sent me a calk of this specimen, showing that it consists of two small undivided specimens in shape rather like those of the No. 1403. If any one of the three specimens in Herb. Thuret should be preferred it seems to me it may be the No. 27; but why not consider all three as type-specimens? When Howe describes the stipe as simple or 1—3 times dichotomous I think he alludes to the No. 1904. This Nr. of which Dr. Bornet also has sent me a calk is a big specimen whose stipe is several time divided, bearing five flabella, these being nearly obovate with cuneate base and in the uppermost part more or less lacerated. In the British Museum another specimen of this number is present. Dr. A. Gepp has most kindly sent a calk to me; it consists of two plants which also have the stipes branched, the one with three the other with five flabella. It follows from this that the plant is rather polymorph. In the Bulletin of the Torrey Botanical Club, vol. 32, 1905, p. 569 Howe has described a new genus Cladocephalus represented by one species viz. Cl. scoparius. As to the related forms of this genus Howe writes as follows: “The genus Cladocephalus, though having a slight superficial resemblance to Penicillus in habit and form, is most nearly allied to Avrainvillea, being in some respects intermediate between that genus and Udotea. It differs from both genera in having a thamnioid or scopiform capitulum instead of a flabellum.’’ Having examined specimens of this plant, of which Howe has most kindly sent specimens of his type No. 4079, I have found that Cladocephalus scoparius as to its anatomy competely agrees with my plant and with Flabellaria luteofusca Crouan at all events with Nr. 1405. It is therefore the habitus of the plant oniy which could maintain the generic difference of Howe’s plant from Crouan’s and mine, and the question arises if this really is justified. Ultimately this question may of course be settled by investigations in nature itseif, to decide about this finally my material is too scanty. But referring to Howe’s figure as well as to original specimens, it seems to me very probable that Howe’s plant is only to be considered as a form developed under peculiar, most probably unfavourable external conditions of life. Howe writes namely as to the growing-place for his type No. 4079: “Rare and local in the Bahama Islands, on sandy or muddy bottom in 2—10 dm. of water (low-tide).” And further, he adds: “Besides the single speeimen collected on the shores of New Providence, we have thus far met with this remarkable plant on only one occasion, when several hundreds were growing associated with two species of Penicillus in a small area in an inland pond which had been connected with the sea by an artificial canal.” Ponds like these often occur also in the Danish West Indies, where the water is shallow, often dirty, and cloudy and more or less brackish. In such localities the alge are often seen 44 above the surface of the sea when unusually low water oceurs and such low water needs not to be of long-duration in the tropies to eause the parts of the alge which reach over the sea to be burnt and killed by the sun. And it is just under such conditions that I think Howe’s plants have been living. If we suppose that the flabellum has been killed nearly down to the stipe, and the water has later been rippling over the plants, it seems to me very probable that the lowest part of the flabellum and the uppermost part of the stipe may have been shredded into more or less tatters and threads such as we find in Cladocephalus scoparius. However this may be the question at all events arises what the name of my plant should be. As already pointed out, my plant has several points in common with the genus Avrainvillea but it agrees also very much with Udotea, though not in such a way that it may naturally be placed in any of these genera. The most natural thing would surely be to refer it to a special genus and as my plant, setting aside the outer habit, quite agrees with Howe's genus Cladocephalus I think it right to refer it to this genus; the species-name on the other hand may be luteofusca Crouan, my plant as mentioned above agreeing quite well with this species. The name of the plant must therefore in my opinion be Cladocephalus luteofuscus (Crouan) Börgs. June 1908. KPH. BIANCO LUNO Tas. III F.v.M. 1908. | ons ét ig About 2/4 ia nov. spec. llea asarifol mer Avra Arbejder fra den Botaniske Have i Kobenhavn. Nr. 46. Separat-Abdruck aus „ANNALES MYCOLOGICI® (vol. VI, No. 2, 1908) Bemerkungen über einige parasitische Pilze aus Rußland. Von J. Lind. Im Botanischen Museum der Universität Kopenhagen befindet sich ein Exsikkatenwerk russischer Pilze, welches ich nirgends zitiert finde; weder in Saccardo’s Sylloge, noch in Salmon’s Monograph of the Erysi- phaceae oder in Sydow’s Monographia Uredinearum finde ich diesbezüg- liche Notizen. Es dürfte daher angebracht sein, näher auf dieses entweder ganz vergessene oder sehr seltene Exsikkatenwerk, welches allerdings nur aus einem Faszikel besteht, einzugehen. Die Sammlung ist betitelt: „N. C. Sredinsky: Herbarium cryptogamicum rossicum, sectio quarta: Fungi.“ Nur ein Faszikel ist erschienen, enthaltend 50 Nummern: ausgegeben in St. Petersburg 1876. Jeder Pilz befindet sich in einem Kuvert, die Scheden sind sowohl mit lateinischem als mit russischem Text versehen. Ich habe sämtliche ausgegebenen Pilze revidiert und gebe hier zuerst meine Bestimmung, dann diejenige Sredinsky’s in Parenthese. Sredinsky hat sämtliche Pilze außer No. 32 und 36 selbst gesammelt, und er zitiert bei den meisten davon sein in russischer Sprache erschienenes Werk: „Materiali deja flori Novorossi i Bessarabiji. In Sapiski Novoross. Obs. Jesteot I. 1872.“ 1. Ustilago Maydis (de C.) Cda. (Ust. M. de C.). Zea Mays, in eultis prope pagum Muri, distr. Letschgum, gub. Kutais, alt. 1500‘, Sept. 1873. 2. Ustilago utriculosa (Nees) Cda. (Ust. utr. Tul.). Polygenum hydro- piper, prope pagum Gornostaewka, Tauriae septentrionalis, Aug. 1870. 3. Pucciniastrum Vacciniorum (Link) Diet. (Caeoma Vace. Link). Vaccinium uliginosum, circa pagum Schuwalowo, prope Petropolin, Aug. 1870, II. 4. Melampsora salicina Lev. (Mel. sal. Tul.). Salx fragilis, Gorno- staewka, Tauriae sept., Aug. 1870, Uredo. 5. Melampsora populina (Jaqu.) Cast. (Mel. pop. Tul.). Populus nigra, Gornostaewka, Tauriae sept., Aug. 1870. 6. Puceiniastrum Abietis-Chamaenerii Kleb. (Melampsora Epilobii Fuck.), Æpilobium angustifolium, Lewaschowka, prope Petropolin, Aug. 1875, II. I. £ 100 so 10. I: 12. 13. Hr 18. J. Lind. 7. Melampsora Helioscopiae (Pers.) Cast. (Mel. Euphorbiae Tul.). Euphorbia virgata, Odessa, Juni 1872, II. IN. Puceinia Scirpi de C. (Puce. Se. Link). Sccrpus lacustris, prope pagum Jasski, distr. Odessa, Juli 1872, II. III. Puccinia Violae (Schum.) de ©. (Puce. Violarum Link). Vola canina, circa pagum Pargala secunda, prope Petropolin, Juli 1874, III. Puccinia Gentianae (Strauß) Link (Puce Gent. Link). Gentiana septemfida, prope pagum Let, dristr. Ratscha, gub. Kutais, alt. 6500", Aug. 1873, II. Neue Nährpflanze. Puccinia suaveolens (Pers.) Rostrup (Puce. obtegens Tul.). Cörszum arvense, prope monasterium Korsum, Tauriae septentrionalis, Okt. 1812, sw IT Puccinia Circaeae Pers. Circaea lutetiana, prope pagum Muri, distr. Letschgum, gub. Kutais, alt. 1200", Juli 1873. Puccinia Maydis Bereng. Zea Mays, prope pagum Alpani, distr. Letschgum, gub. Kutais, alt. 1200‘, Aug. 1873, III. . Puceinia Buxi de ©. Duxus sempervirens, prope pagum Tehmori, distr. Ratscha, gub. Kutais, alt. 3000‘, Juli 1873. . Puceinia Asparagi de C. Asparagus officinalis, Odessa, Juli 1872, II. 6. Puceinia Bardanae Cda. Zappa tomentosa, Klein-Liebenthal prope Odessam. Aug. 1872, III. Puccinia asarina Kze. (Puce. Asari Link). Asarum europaeum, inter Suaniam et Mingreliam apud fl. Ingur, alt. 3000’, Juli 1874. Puccinia Menthae Pers. (Pucc. M. Tul.). Mentha arvensis, prope pagum Sofiewka. Tauriae sept., Aug. 1871, II. II. . Puccinia coronata (Cda.) Kleb. (Puce. coron. de By.) &hamnus Frangula, circa Pargalam secundam prope Petropolin. Juli 1875. . Puccinia Ribis de C. Ærbes petraeum, prope pagum Tehmori, distr. Ratscha, gub. Kutais, alt. 3800”, Juli 1873. . Puceinia Polygoni-amphibii Pers. (Puce. Polygonorum Link). Zoly- gonum amphibium, prope pagum Gornostaewka Tauriae sept: is, Aug. 1871, I. . Puccinia Acetosae (Schum.) Kke. (Puce. Rumicis Bellynk). Aumex Acetosa, prope pagum Kairi Tauriae sept: is, Aug. 1871. In dem sonst ziemlich seltenen Teleutosporenstadium; Sporen eiförmig, 36—42 <7 20—24 u, Membran braun, glatt, überall gleich dick. 3. Puecinia Pruni-spinosae Pers. (Puce. Prunorum Tul.). Prunus insititia, prope pagum Bagdad, distr. Kutais, alt. 600°, Juni 1874, II. HI. . Puccinia Arenariae (Schum.) Schroet. (Puce. Stellariae Dub.). Sted/aria nemorum, Lewaschowka prope Petropolin, Aug. i875. . Puccinia graminis Pers. (Puce. gram. de By.) Z7ttecum repens, Odessa, Aug. 1872, III. 26. 27. 32. Bemerkungen über einige parasitische Pilze aus Rußland. 101 Uromyces caryophyllinus (Schrank) Schroet. (Urom. Caryophylla- cearum Rbh.). Gypsophila trichotoma, prope Odessam, Aug. 1871, IL. III, neue Nährpflanze. Rabenhorst’s Name ist nicht in Saceardo’s Sylloge aufgeführt, nach Sredinsky ist er im Sitzungsber. d. naturw. Ges. Isis zu Dresden 1870, Heft IV, publiziert. Uredosporen kuglig, ca. 33 u in Diam., Membran hellbraun, stachlig, gleichmäßig dick; Teleutosporen kastanienbraun, glatt, am Scheitel mit breitem Keim- porus, 23—30 u in Diam.; Stiel sehr kurz, byalin. Uromyces Heliotropii Sredinsky. Heliotropium europaeum, in littore wenoso Kujalnitzky limam prope Odessam, Aug. 1871. Ob Sredinsky diesen neuen Pilz in oben erwähnter „Materia“ beschrieben hat, kann ich nicht sagen, Saccardo (Sylloge XIV, S. 277) zitiert: Issatsch- schenko: Parasit. Pilze Gouv. Cherson 1896, und erwähnt den Pilz aus Cherson. Ich finde die Uredosporen hellbraun, stachlig, meist rundlich, manchmal auch eiförmig oder verlängert, 30—33 u vw 18—20 u (die langgestreckten 30—37 u 14—17 u). Die Teleuto- sporen finden sich in denselben Lagern mit den Uredosporen unter- mischt; sie sind mit dicker, glatter, kastanienbrauner Membran versehen und messen 25 ux718—22u. Stiel hyalin 10x4 3 u. . Uromyces Limonii (de C.) Lev. (Urom. Statices Sredinsky). Statice Gmelini, in littore maris prope Odessam, Aug. 1871, III. 9. Uromyces Pisi (Pers.) de By. (Urom. apiculatus Lév.). An Stengeln und Blättern von Zafhyrus sativus, prope pagum Gornostaewka Tauriae sept: is, Juni 1871, II. . Uromyces Poae Rbh. (Aecidium Ranunculacearum de C.). Ranunculus auricomus, in pratis insulae Krestowsky, Petropolin, Mai 1875. . Puccinia Agrostidis Plow. (Aecidium Ranunculacearum de C.). Agwi- legia vulgaris, Pargala secunda, prope Petropolin, Juni 1875. Cronartium ribicolum Dietrich 1856 (Cronart. Ribesii Woron. 1870). Ribes nigrum, in horto botanico Petropolitano, Sept. 1875, leg. A. Th. Batalin, I. Il. 3. Phragmidium Rubi idaei (de C.) Karst. (Phragm. effusum Fuck.). Rubus Idaeus, Lewaschowka, prope Petropolin, Aug. 1875, III. 4. Phragmidium violaceum (Schultz) Wt. (Phragm. asperum Tul.). Rubus fruticosus, Kutais, Juli 1874, II. II. . Synehytrium Anemones (deC.) Woron. (Synch. An.Woron.). Anemone nemorosa, insula Krestowsky, Petropolin, Mai 1875. 5. Cytopus Tragopogonis (Pers.) Schroet. (Cyst. cubic. Lev.). Scor- zonera hispanica, in horto botanico Petropolitano, Sept. 1875, leg. A. Th. Batalin. . Cieinnobolus Cesatii de By. Parasitans in mycelio Erysiphes Galeopsidis de ©. (Er. communis de By.) in foliis Dallofae nigrae, Odessa, Juli 1870. 102 J. Lind. 38. Uncinula Salicis (de C.) Wt. (Uncinula adunca Lev.). Salix nigricans, Lewaschowka prope Petropolin, Aug. 1875. 39. Phyllactinia corylea (Pers.) Karst. (Phyll. guttata Lev.). Corylus avellana, Kutais, Sept. 1873. 40. Phyllactinia corylea (Pers.) Karst. (Phyll. guttata Lev.). - Azalea pontica, Bagdad, distr. Kutais, alt. 600‘, Juni 1873, neue Wirtspflanze, nur spirlich angegriffen. 41. Phyllactinia corylea (Pers.) Karst. (Phyll. guttata Lév.). Zrasxinus excelsior, Bagdad, distr. Kutais, alt. 600°, Juni 1873. 42. Erysiphe Cichoriacearum de C. (Er. lamprocarpa de By.). Zappa tomentosa, in horto botanico Petropolitano, August 1875. Die Peri- thezien über die ganze Blattunterseite verbreitet, 120—140 u in Diam. Asci nur wenig, 76—80 7 56—68 u, zweisporig. Sporen 28—32 u 7 22— 24 u. 43. Erysiphe Polygoni de C. (Er. communis Lev.). Delphinium elatum, in horto Petropolitano, Aug. 1875. 44. Erysiphe Polygoni de C. (Er. communis Lev.). Caltha palustris, in horto botanico Petropolitano, Aug. 1875. 45. Erysiphe Polygoni de C. (Er. communis Lev.). Aguilegia vulgaris, in horto botanico Petropolitano, Aug. 1875. 46. Erysiphe Polygoni de C. (Er. Martii Lev.). Spiraea Ulmaria, Lewa- schowka, Aug. 1875. 47. Erysiphe Polygoni de C. (Er. Martii Lev.). Hypericum quadrangulum, prope catarractam Imatra, gub. Wiborg, Juli 1875. 48. Sphaerotheca Humuli (de ©.) Burr. var. fuliginea (Schl.) Salm. (Sph. Castagnei Lev.). /mpatiens noli tangere, in silvis montis Nakerala, gub. Kutais, alt. 4700‘, Juli 1873. 49. Sphaerotheca Humuli (de C.) Burr. (Sph. Castagnei Lev.). Spziraea Ulmaria, Lewaschowka, prope Petropolin, Aug. 1875. 50. Microsphaera Evonymi (de C.) Sacc. (Calocladia comata Lev.). Evonymus europaeus, Odessa, Aug. 1872. Herr Museumsinspektor ©. H. Ostenfeld machte mich freundlichst auf dieses Exsikkatenwerk aufmerksam. Derselbe entdeckte auch im Phanerogamenherbar auf Pflanzen aus Rußland („Herbarium florae Rossicae a museo botanico acad. imp. sci. Petropolitanae editum“) einige parasitische Pilze, die ich nicht unerwähnt lassen möchte, nämlich: Uromyces Chenopodii (Duby) Schroet. auf Zalimocnemis (Halotis) occulta, Transcaspia, in schistosis montium inter Wannowskoje et Czuli, 1. 10. 1898, leg. Litwinow. Neue Nährpflanze. Synchytrium aureum Schroet. auf Gentiana pseudo-aguatica, Sibiria, prov. Irkutsk, distr. Bagalonsk, 8. 6. 1903, leg. Malzew. Bemerkungen über einige parasitische Pilze aus Rußland. 103 Der Pilz findet sich nur auf den untersten Blättern, die augen- scheinlich in Berührung mit den periodisch wiederkehrenden Über- schwemmungen gewesen sind, vgl. Walter Rytz: Beiträge zur Kenntnis der Gattung Syzchytrium, Centralbl. f. Bakt. u. Paras. Abt. II, Bd. 18 (1907), p. 635. Puceinia Arenariae (Schum.) Schroet. auf Moehringia trinervia. a) Prov. Kiew, in silva prope Golossejewskaja Pustyn, 21. 5. 1903, leg. Rokoezi. c) Prope urbem Wilna, in pineto, 16. 5. 1903, leg. Lonaczewsky. Gloeosporium Veronicarum Ces. auf Veronica hederifolia, Tauria prope urbem Jalta, 23. 3. 1901, leg. Golde. Die Diagnose des Pilzes in Botan. Zeitung 1859, p. 629, die sich unverändert in Sace. Sylloge III, p. 710 und bei Allescher: Fungi imperfecti (Rbh. Pilze Abt. VII) p. 506 findet, ist höchst unvollständig. Ich habe deshalb das Originalexemplar auf Veronica officinalis in Rabenhorst’s Fungi europaei No. 97, von Cesati „in Valle Andurnensi, Pedem., prov. Bugellae. Autumno tempore“ gesammelt, untersucht und gebe hier eine neue Beschreibung: Flecken fehlend. Raschen zerstreut, einzeln stehend, von einem sehr schmalen bräunlichen Saume umgeben, auf beiden Blattseiten, doch meist blattoberseits hervorbrechend, polsterförmig, dick, kreisrund, braun bereift, den Lagern von Zuccinia Veronicae nicht unähnlich. Konidien hyalin, mit körnigem Plasma, selten mit zwei bis drei Oltropfen, diinnwandig, stäbehen- bis keulenförmig, an beiden Enden abgestumpft, nie oder sehr selten gebogen, 15,5—20 4 u. Konidienträger bis 12 u lang und 3 u dick. Das russische Exemplar stimmt mit dem Original gut überein, desgleichen auch dänische Exemplare, die ich bei Horsens in Jütland am 2. April 1902 auf Veronica hederifolia gesammelt habe, und ferner solche aus Böhmen, die auf Veronica triphyllos am 26. März bei Tabor von Bubak gesammelt und in Kabat und Bubak’s „Fungi imperfecti exs.“ no. 376 ausgegeben sind. Exemplare, die ich bei Kopenhagen im August 1907 auf Veronica Tournefortii reichlich sammelte, weichen ein wenig dadurch ab, daß sich zwischen den charakteristischen keulenförmigen Konidien auch einige gebogene und abgerundete Konidien vorfinden. Zu derselben Spezies gehört meiner Ansicht nach auch Bäumler’s Gloeosporium pruinosum. Die Beschreibung seines Pilzes (Österr. Bot. Zeitschr. XXXIX, 1889, p. 171) stimmt völlig mit der von mir ent- worfenen Diagnose überein, die Nährpflanze ist ebenfalls Veronica officinalis, und endlich sind auch die Exemplare, die in Kabat und Bubak's „Fungi imperfecti exs.“ no. 326 als GZ. pruinosum ausgegeben 104 J. Lind: Bemerkungen über einige parasitische Pilze aus Rußland. sind (auf Veronica officinalis bei Preßbaum im Wiener Wald, N.-Öster- reich, 16. 7. 1905 von v. Höhnel gefunden), mit Cesati’s Original identisch. Fuckel (Symb. Myc. 1869, p. 368) hat Gloeosportum Veronicarum auf lebenden Blättern von Veronica officinalis und hederifolia nicht selten um Oestrich gefunden. Der Pilz ist demnach in Deutschland, Dänemark und Rußland auf Veronica hederifolia gefunden und es dürfte auch wohl das Gloeosporium arvense Sacc. et Penz. (auf Veronica hederi- folia in der Schweiz vorkommend) mit G/. Veronicarum zu vereinigen sein. Nur die Unvollständigkeit der Cesati’schen Beschreibung dürfte Veranlassung zu der Aufstellung des G?. pruinosum und Gl. arvense gegeben haben. Gloeosporium Veronicarum Ces. hat demnach als Synonym Gl. pruinosum Bäumler und vermutlich auch GZ. arvense Sacc. et Penzig. Als Nährpflanzen haben zu gelten Veronica hederifolia, officinalis, triphyllos und Tourneforti. Fundorte sind bekannt aus Dänemark, Rußland, Deutschland, Österreich, Ungarn, Italien, der Schweiz und Belgien. Aecidium Ranunculacearum DC. auf Ranunculus pulchellus, prov. Trans- baikalia, prope urbem Czita. Neue Nährpflanze. Doassansia Martianoffiana (Thüm.) Schroet. auf Potamogeton astaticus, Mandshuria chinensis, peninsula laodun, prope stat. viae ferrariae Wanfangoo, 3. 8. 1902, leg. Litwinow. Neue Nährpflanze. Puceinia Malvacearum Mont. auf Malva silvestris, prope urbem Kiew, 18. 10. 1904, leg. Lonaczewsky. Puccinia Acroptili Syd. auf Acroptilon Picris, prov. Samara, distr. Nowo Usen, 8. 9. 1904, leg. Bogdan. Arbejder fra den Botaniske Have i København. Nr. 47. The Structure and Biology of Arctic Flowering Plants. Reprinted from „MEDDELELSER OM GRONLAND* Vol. XXXVI. LIBRARY NEW YORK BOTANICAL GARDEN. Copenhagen. Printed by Bianco Luno, 1908. 2. Diapensiaceae. Diapensia lapponica L. By Henning Eiler Petersen. 1908. 2D AU NUV Introduction. . In this short paper, following the method I adopted in my paper Ericineæ (Pirolaceæ, Ericaceæ) 2. The biological anatomy of the leaves and of the stems,’ I intend pointing out such characters in Diapensia lapponica as are more particularly connected with the climatic factors. As this species has been very exhaustively described in the literature which deals with it, there have been only a few new data for me to record. I have had a fairly large quantity of material at my disposal from West and East Greenland and from Finmark, which has en- abled me to verify the different statements. A List of the chief Literature: — BÖRGESEN, F., 1895: Bidrag til Kundskaben om arktiske Planters Blad- bygning. (Botanisk Tidsskrift, Bd. 19.) Creve, A., 1901: Zum Pflanzenleben in Nordschwedischen Hochgebirgen. (Bihang till kgl. sv. Vet. Ak. Handl., Bd. 26, Afd. III, 15, Stockholm.) GREVEL, W., 1897: Anatomische Untersuchungen über die Familie der Dia- pensiaceae. (Bot. Centralblatt, Bd. 69.) HESSELMAN, H., 1900: Om Mykorrhizabildningar hos arktiska växter. (Bihang till kgl. sv. Vet. Ak. Handl., Bd. 26, Afd. III, 2, Stockholm.) LinpMaAn, C. A. M., 1887: Bidrag till kannedomen om skandinaviska fjäll- vaxternas Blomning och Befruktning. (Bihang till kgl. sv. Vet. Akad. Handl., Bd. 12, Afd. III, 6, Stockholm.) SERNANDER, R., 1901: Den skandinaviska vegetationens spridningsbioiogi. Upsala. SKOTTSBERG, C., 1900: Einige blütenbiologische Beobachtungen in arkt. Teile vom schwedisch Lappland. (Med. frän Stockholms Högskola, Nr. 210, Stockholm.) SyLVEN, N., 1906: Om de svenska Dikotyledonernas första Förstärknings- stadium. (Kungl. sv. Vetensk. Akad. Handl., Bd. 40.) Tevıy, H., 1892: Bidrag till kannedomen om primäre barken hos vedartede dikotyier. Lund. 1 The structure and Biology of the Arctic Flowering Plants, I, Meddelelser om Grenland, Vol. XXXVI, 1908, p. 75. 142 VANHÖFFEN, 1893: Frühlingsleben in Nordgrönland. (Verhandl. der Gesellsch. für Erdkunde zu Berlin, Nr. 8 und 9.) WARMING, E., 1886: Om Bygningen og den formodede Bestovningsmaade af nogle grønlandske Blomster. (Oversigt over d. k. danske Vid. Selsk. Forhandlinger, Kjebenhavn.) — 1887: Om Grønlands Vegetation. (Meddelelser om Grønland XII, Kje- benhavn.) A. The Morphology and Biology. [7 Diapensia lapponica is of decidedly cæspitose habit, a “cushion-plant” with a distinct primary root of long duration (Figs. 1 and 2). Sycvéx has given a description of its early vegetative stages, from which it appears that the cotyledons, as also the other leaves, are leathery and last for two years. The leaves are very closely set. The lateral branches are formed, as far as I can see, without any definite order. In the case of shoots terminating in flowers, vegetative shoots are formed at the base of the floral shoot and sometimes there are two opposite each other. The evergreen leaves are stiff and leathery in consistency; and in form, somewhat oblong-elliptical and tapering towards he base; they are sessile and half encompass the stem, and are flat, but have the apex bent backward. The leaves are functional for hardly more than two years. When they die, they do not fall off, but remain for a long time on the stems in the interior of the tufts. The form of the leaf varies some- what according to the habitat. In individuals growing in the damper and more shady localities, e. g. at Angakugsarfik on Disco (Porsırn, 4650, ‘‘Shade-form submerged during spring”) the leaves were somewhat longer than in the specimens growing in decidedly dry soil. The buds have not any definite bud-scales, but they are fairly well protected, being deeply hidden among the leaves. 143 There is a well-marked, sparingly-branching primary root; in addition to this there are adventitious roots arising from the stem. In some cases (doubtless when growing in a suf- ficiently damp soil) these roots are developed abundantly and grow in towards the tufted plant, whose old leaves provide a certain amount of humus which richly provides the roots with nourishment. According to Hessezmax, both ectotrophic and endotrophic mycorhiza occur very frequently in the young roots; and I am able to confirm his statement. Fig. 1. Diapensia lapponica (Skädavara in Finmark). Tuft in longitudinal section. SERNANDER mentions that the Diapensia-tufts may break up, and the small tufts thereby formed, ‘‘may function as a means of dispersal, as they are blown about on the stony flats and thereby scatter the seeds contained in the capsules.’! Vege- * Kunne fungera som marklôpara, idet de bläsa kring på fjallhederna och derunder utportionera de i kapslerna inneslutna frôna.” 144 tative propagation does not, however, appear to take place in this manner. From reasons unknown to me, the shoots in the tufts often die off without any special order being possibly demonstrable to exist with regard to this point; scattered among the fresh parts occur old, decaying shoots (Fig. 2). The flowers (Fig. 3) are terminal, and, according to the in- vestigations of Warmine and Linpman they are slightly protogynous. WARMING writes (1886), p. 35, “in recently expanded flowers, the corolla of which is still almost erect, the stamens are bent Fig. 2. Tuft of Diapensia lapponica Showing how parts of the tuft have died off. (Skadavara, Finmark.) somewhat forward, more forward than later on; but the anthers are still closed and although they open immediately after, they do not do so until they are moved somewhat away from the stigma. They always remain at the same height relative to the latter, and can touch it and shed pollen upon it, if the stamens are bent inwards in the flower, which I have often done by way of experiment. Consequently, as the open anthers are usually at some distance from the stigma, self-pollination can take 145 place only with difficulty, especially as the flowers are also erect. With regard to the Greenland individuals I have, how- ever, made an observation which points to the possibility of self-pollination — I have seen that the anthers may open at an earlier date, even in the bud.” As a supplement to this description given by Warminc may serve the following hitherto unpublished notes by Osrenrerp, which are taken from his diary of the Ingolf-Expedition and which I have his kind Fig. 3. (Material from Greenland). A, A fully expanded flower seen from above; shows that the anthers are at a distance from the stigma. B, Corolla with stamens seen in side view, and C, pistil with sepal of the same flower. D, E, Pollen-grains. F, A young flower the corolla of which has not yet fully expanded; the anthers are open, the stigma is ripe and has already pollen upon it; the anthers being so near to the stigma, self-pollination may perhaps take place fairly easily. G, A young flower; the anthers are open, and the stigma is ripe; the latter has a tripartite style (see Fig. H). Figures and text are by E. WARMING; 1886. permission to quote: “In a bud which is in the act of opening the stamens are bent closely around the style. The latter is moist when the stamens are just in the act of opening; honey occurs abundantly in large drops at the base of the style. (Either homogamous or) slightly protogynous. The stamens are always bent somewhat inwards. No scent; the flowers were open after rain and always erect.” The structure of the flower has also been described by SKOTTSBERG. Hartz records that it is visited by flies. XXXVI. 10 146 As regards phenological observations, | may mention that Harrz found that, at Scoresby Sound, Diapensia opened-both flowers and leaves-on June 12th; and Vannôrrex in 1893 found that at Karajak (West Greenland) it opened on June 13th.! According to my investigations, fertilisation and embryogeny must certainly often take place long after pollination. The capsules may remain upon the plants far into the next vegetative period. The seeds are probably scattered very slowly. I have found a well-developed embryo in the latter. B. The Anatomy. W. Grever has studied the anatomy of Diapensiaceae and has given what appears to be a very thorough and exhaustive description of the anatomical structure of Diapensia lapponica, except that of the root. For all details of a systematic-ana- tomical nature the reader should refer to this paper, to which I can make but few additions; my aim here is to direct atten- tion to those features of its anatomy which are of especial value to it in relation to climate and other external factors, The leaf. (Figs. 4 and 5). The epidermis of the upper and of the lower surface is very much thickened, especially that of the upper surface. A very thick cuticle occurs everywhere, but it is thicker on the upper surface, and is there characterized by not being of the same thickness everywhere; it sinks at times into depressions of the cellulose membrane. The whole of the external surface of the cuticle is wavy. In the outer walls the layers beneath the cuticle (in both the upper and the lower epidermis) are not quite evenly deposited; there occur, especi- ally towards the lateral walls, canals which extend from the interior outwards towards the cuticle, without, however, reaching the latter. 1 Cf. A. CLEVE, 1901, p. 41. “Auf dem Plateau in Knospe und Blüte “/6, in voller Blüte, ausserdem mit Knospen und verblüht *’/6; Kronenblätter meist weg */7; Früchte aufgeschwollen noch nicht reif lo.” 147 The lateral walls are wavy, and thickened to a great extent and irregularly; in transverse section the thinner areas show up sharply against the band-like thickenings. The inner walls do not contain lignin as in Andromeda. Hairs are absent. Stomata occur only on the lower surface; they are ar- ranged more or less across the longitudinal axis of the leaf. The inner sides of the guard-cells, as well as the neighbouring Fig. 4. Diapensia lapponica. The leaf. A, transverse section; B, spongy parenchyma seen in surface view; C, stomata. (Greenland) (H. E. P.) cells of the mesophyll, are covered by a thin cuticle the presence of which is demonstrated by chlor-zinc-iodine, or by Sudan Ill. Chloroplastids occur in both the upper and lower epidermis (cf. Livrorss). The mesophyll consists of a well-marked pali- sade-tissue, formed by 2—8 layers of cells of no great height, 10* 148 a palisade-like transition-zone, a spongy parenchyma with large lacune, and lastly, just above the epidermis of the lower sur- face, a zone of from one to a few layers of elongated un- branched parenchymatous cells. The cells of the spongy paren- chyma are much branched — but their length is greatest in the direction of the longitudinal axis of the leaf — and they are exceedingly thick-walled. The intercellular spaces in the … spongy parenchyma take up considerable room. As gradually their number and size diminish towards the palisade-tissue, the walls become less thick, until in the palisade-tissue the cells are not characterized by any special thickness of wall although always proportionably thick when compared with those of the deciduous leaves. The elongated, unbranched cells above the epidermis of the lower surface are somewhat less thick-walled than those of the spongy parenchyma, neither have they among them the large intercellular spaces which occur in the spongy parenchyma, and they doubtless form a kind of protective tissue for the spongy parenchyma. The cells of the spongy parenchyma have well-marked pores. None of the Ericaceae I have investigated, not even forms with highly developed intercellular spaces such as Ledum and Arctostaphylos Uva-ursi, have such thickened walls in the cells of their spongy parenchyma as has Diapensia lapponica. Stereom is not developed around the vascular bundles. In the palisade-cells of specimens from Hekla Havn (East Greenland, Nov. 1891, N. Harrz) I have observed the Kraus winter-condition of the plasma. I also found in the leaves of these specimens, and especially in their palisade-cells, an abundance of tannin; on the other hand specimens from Godt- haab in the month of June did not give particularly good reac- tion for tannin. Oily substances, so far as they could distinctly be demonstrated to occur besides tannin (Sudan Ill, Osmic Acid [brown colour|), appear to be present in somewhat varying quantities at the different seasons of the year. Some summer- 149 specimens and the specimens from Hekla Havn gave a slight reaction for oil. As is the case in the stem, the quantity of the oil which occurs, doubtless stands in inverse ratio to the starch-contents. The lower part of the leaf, the part enclosed by the sheath, differs anatomically from the upper part. But here I shall only Dé ne 9 Po Fig. 5. Diapensia lapponica. The leaf. A, stoma; B, the epidermis of the upper surface seen from above; (, epidermis of the upper surface with cuticle; the thickenings in the lateral walls are indicated: D, pores between cells of the spongy parenchyma; E, cells of the spongy parenchyma; F, stomata. (Greenland) (H. E. P.) point out that neither stomata nor epidermis, containing water, occur in this part. The stem (Figs. 6 and 7). The primary cortex has been figured by Ten (Tab. I, fig. 11); it presents no features that are 150 especially characteristic. The structure of it is not markedly xerophytic; the inner layers are collenchymatously thickened as is the case with the sieve-tissue cork, in the secondary cortex, in the older stem. The secondary cortex shows only a slight development of cork-tissue; the outermost layers become corky, but they cohere but imperfectly. The slight development, in the whole of the cortex of xerophytic tissue, is a natural result of the oecological form of the plant, which causes the stems not to come in direct contact with the atmosphere, and the leaves to be closely set and to fall off late-features which make all specially xerophytic tis- sues in the stem unnecessary. he Zen! In transverse section the ele- er ments of the wood, with the ex- » © es (2 oY 7 ® er , ception of the vessels and some # cells of the medullary rays, are peculiarly folded! as if the stem had experienced pressure from several directions (Fig. 7). The reason for this GREVEL states is quite unknown to him, as it also is to me. It is possible that this compression Fig. 6. Diapensia lapponica. is not to be seen in the living Transverse section of stem; slightly mag. plant. In longitudinal section it (Julianehaab.) can be seen that the cells do not lie exactly in the direction of the longitudinal axis of the stem, but are placed obliquely, which gives a very confused appear- ance to the section. Probably this is in a measure connected with the close-set leaves, the frequent formation of adventitious 1 This shows most distinctly in preparations mounted in common glycerin, but not so well in Canada balsam preparations, such as those from which the photographs were taken. 151 roots, and the irregular direction of the elements of the wood. The wood consists chiefly of vessels with bordered pits, tra- cheids and wood-parenchyma. Stereom (libriform cells, etc.) is not especially developed, nor are the elements which occur in the wood particularly thick-walled. There is no difference between the spring and summer (or autumn) wood, and the limits be- tween the different an- nual rings are therefore not distinct. The ves- sels ineach annual ring are usually localized in a certain zone. Ina measure, this causes the annual rings to be differentiated, but as already mentioned their limits are not sharply defined. The slight develop- ment of stereom re- sults naturally from the oecological form of the plant. Sometimes sev- eral, sometimes a few, broad primary medul- Fig. 7. Diapensia lapponicu. lary rayS pass through Transverse section of stem; highly mag. (Julianehaab.) the wood; there are only slight indications of secondary medullary rays; radial cell-rows occur, which are better defined than the other cells, but the cells have by no means distinctly the character of medullary rays. ' The pith consists of thick-walled cells, which form trabe- ! GREVEL denies the occurrence of secondary medullary rays. 152 culae and connections between thinner-walled cells, just as in certain Hricacew, e. g. Ledum. The stem contains, during winter and spring, great quan- tities of oil. A specimen of June I (Greenland: Godthaab) still contained abundance of this substance. A specimen of June 29 (Godthaab; C. H. O.) still showed in- dications of oil, especially in the tissue bordering on the pith. In a specimen of July 6 (Loc. ign.) oil had sæ ET quite disappeared, while starch was = wast found. The root. (Figs. 8and9). Old roots, as was also the case with the stem, are not characterized by any especial de- 2 velopment of cork- tissue. The sieve- tissue is collen- chymatously thick- ened as in the stem. A folding of the cells (not ves- Fig. 8. Diapensia lapponica. sels) similar to that Transverse section of root; slightly mag. in the stem, Was (Kangersuak.) also observed. The vessels are more distinctly marked than in the stem. The for- mation of annual rings and medullary rays is as in the stem. 153 in the younger roots, as mentioned above, both ectotrophie and endotrophie mycorhiza occur (Hesserman). C. Summary. With regard to its flowers, Diapensia lapponica is ento- mophilous, slightly protogynous or homogamous with, however, a tendency to self-pollination. Its oecological form is decidedly xerophytic. pee #3 Fig. 9. Diapensia lapponica. Transverse section of root; highly mag. (Kangersuak.) Anatomically it is only the leaves which are of xerophytic structure, as it is only these organs which come into direct contact with the atmosphere. The xerophytic structure is there indicated by the thick membranes and cuticle of the upper and lower epidermis, and by the great development of thick-walled cells in the spongy parenchyma. ‘The structure of the leaves is not as xerophytic as that of the leaf of Rhododendron lap- ponicum, but approximates to the degree of protection presented by the latter species. Perhaps, owing to the tufted, low-growing 154 | habit of the plant, the leaves do not require as much protection as the species just referred to. Considering both the protection indicated in the vegetative structure, and that which appears in its anatomy, Diapensia lapponica occupies, however, a very high position with regard to xerophytic adaptation, a position which is not surprising when we recall the fact that this species is a very old Arctic species, doubtless often a form adapted to dry soil. The palisade-tissue should rather be characterized as well-developed than as slightly developed, although the indi- vidual palisade-cells do not attain any especially great height. 7.—12.— 1908. ANNE Arbejder fra den Botaniske Have i København. Nr. 48. Sertryk af Botanisk Tidsskrift. 29. Bind. Kobenhavn 1909. Lieutenant Olufsen’s second Pamir-Expedition. Plants collected in Asia-Media and Persia. By Ove Paulsen. Additions and corrections. 1, Bumex, By Ove Paulsen. My specimens of this genus have been in St. Petersburg since 1902 but have now been returned to me, provisionally identified by Mr. W. J. Lipsky. I do not agree always with his determinations. 1. R.crispus L. (After Lipsky: R. orientalis). Pamir, prov. Wakhan, in cultivated land at Langarkisht. The valves are typical, one of them bears a tubercle. The leaves are not much crispate. 2. R. orientalis Bernh. Bois. fl. or. IV p. 1009, Hook. fl. brit. Ind. V p. 58. Of this species I have had only specimens, cultivated some years ago in the botanical garden at Copenhagen. The seeds were collected in October 1898 in Pamir, prov. Goran, at Kuh-i-lal, in an altitude of 2600 M. Seeds were collected from two plants, one (N. 1523) very dense-panicled growing on moist ground, another (N. 1524) with a lax panicle, growing on more dry ground. Both plants were about 2 m. high. The seeds were almost equal, the valves of 1524 larger and without tubercles, those of 1523 smaller and one of them bearing a tubercle. In the cultivated plants the same differences were to be found, only the plants after 1523 in the second year lost the tubercles. 1524 has cordate leaves broader than those of 1523 and is, except for the very lax panicle, and cordate leaves, rather like R. domesticus Hartm., while 1523 resembles R. crispus L. more. The same characters as in 1524 (lax panicle, broad, cordate leaves, broad valves without tubercles) has N. 339, collected by me in cultivated land at Osh in the province of Ferghana. This is after Mr. Lipsky: R. obtusifolius. I identify the plants as R. orientalis because of the cordate leaves of the one form and of the presence of tubercle of the other. Also Mr. Lipsky (in litt.) is Botanisk Tidsskrift. 29, Bind. 11 — 154 — inclined to consider them as R. orientalis and not as R. domesticus as has been done hitherto with the mountain-Rumices from Turkestan (see e.g.: B. Fedtschenko: Mat. fl. Shugnan, trav. Mus. bot. Ac. St. Pb. I., 1902). But I believe that on closer consideration of a larger material more species will be found to exist. a WIR. SD: Too young. I suppose it is a R. Hydrolapathum Huds. Prov. Ferghana: in a dry river-bed of the river Kurshab at Gultsha. June 17th 1898. 4. Rumex turcestanicus n. sp. Glaber perennis, caule striato 0.5—0.8™ elato superne paniculato- ramoso, foliis inferioribus longe petiolatis ellipticis vel ovato-elliptieis (in spec. nostris ca. 12 em. longis, 6 cm. latis), basi cordatis, apice obtusis vel acutiuseulis, planis vel erispulis, foliis superioribus petiolatis elliptico- vel ovato-lanceolatis basi rotundatis apice acutiusculis, panieulae ramis arcuato-adseendentibus elongatis parte inferiori foliis lanceolatis munitis superne aphyllis, verticillastris remotis vel subremotis, pedicellis filiformibus parum infra medium articulatis tandem recurvis valvis maturis subaequilongis vel longioribus, perigonii folis exterioribus dimidiam PN latitudinem valvis aequilongis, valvis ca. 5 mm. longis triangulari-ovatis fere aequilatis ac longis apice obtusis integris marginibus lateralibus in dentes crebros a basi sublatiore subulatos rectos fissis, valde reticulatis, aequaliter calliferis, callis magnis tuber- culosis. A single valve of Found in cultivated land at Bokhara (May 5th Rumex turcestanicus. 1899, N. 1739) and in the province of Ferghana at Slightly magnified. sn (June 9th 1898, N. 340) and at Margelan (Ma sh (Ju ) g (May 37th 1898, N. 287). Mr. Lipsky has identified N. 340 as R. obtusifolius, N. 287 and 1739 as R. pulcher. This species is related to R. nepalensis Spreng., R. pulcher L. and R. reticulatus Bess., but is easily discernible by the broad valves bearing straight spines, and the not divaricated panicle. In foliage it has some resemblance to R. obtusifolius L. 9. Revision der in Central-Asien von Herrn Ove Paulsen gesammelten Uredineen. Von W. Tranzschel, St. Petersburg. In der in Botanisk Tidsskrift, Bd. 28, 1907, p. 215—218 abgedruckten Arbeit „Lieutenant Olufsen’s second Pamir-Expedition. Plants collected — 155 — in Asia-Media and Persia by Ove Paulsen. V. Fungi* hat E. Rostrup ein Verzeichnis von 56 Pilzformen gegeben. Die Nummern 6—30 umfassen die Uredineen. Da einige Bestimmungen dieser letzteren Zweifel in mir erregten, bat ich Herrn Ove Paulsen die Uredineen durchsehen zu dürfen, und wurden vom Botanischen Museum zu Kopenhagen sämmtliche Formen (ausser NN. 20, 25, 27 und 30) mir freundlichst zugesandt. Im Folgenden sebe ich das Verzeichnis mit meinen Bestimmungen. In Klammern setze ich die Nummern des Verzeichnisses von E. Rostrup. - Puccinia Isiacae (Thiim.) Winter. In foliis Phragmitis. Ad Jangi Kurgan inter Samarkand et Djisak. 22—5—98. N 258. (6%, sub P. Phrag- mitis Kke.) — Uredosporen in grossen, zusammenfliessenden Lagern. Zu derselben Art gehört ohne Zweifel das Aecidium Spinaciae Rostrup 1. c. (26), an derselben Stelle und am demselben Tage auf Spinacia tetrandra Stev. eingesammelt (N. 257). Für diese Ansicht sprechen die farblosen Aecidiosporen und das Stroma-artige Gewebe, welches die Aecidienbecher umgibt, wie ich es in meinen „Beiträgen zur Biologie der Uredineen. II.* für die Aecidien der Phragmites-Puceinien beschrieben habe. Auf Spinacia oleracea L. habe ich die Aecidien der Puccinia Isiacae erzogen (1. c.), und ist es höchst interessant, dass die Aecidien auf Spinacia jetzt auch in der Natur entdeckt worden sind. — Der Pilz auf Phragmites aus dem Pamir (6®) scheint richtig als Puccinia Phragmitis (Schum.) Kke. bestimmt zu sein. Die Teleutosporen sind am Scheitel meist kegelförmig verjüngt. Puccinia simplex (Kke.) Erikss, et Henn. — P. anomala Rostr. In foliis Hordei cult. (7). — Uredo- und Teleutosporen. Die zweizelligen Teleutosporen tiberwiegen die einzelligen, doch ist der Pilz sicher nicht P. glumarum (Schm.) Erikss. et Henn. Puccinia Hutchinsiae Dietel. In foliis Smelowskiae calyeinae C. A. M. (9, sub P. abberrante Peck). — Puccinia Hutchinsiae Diet. aus dem russischen Turkestan auf Smelowskia alba (Pall.) B. Fedtsch. (= Hutchinsia alba Bge. — Smelowskia cinerea CG. A. M.) beschrieben (Dietel schreibt irrtümlich H. alta), auf Smelowskia calycina (Steph.) G. A. M. von Herrn O. Paulsen entdeckt, scheint mir kaum von P. aberrans Peck auf Smelowskia americana Ryd. (= Sm. calyeina aut. americ.) aus Utah und Colorado, N. Amerika, verschieden zu sein. Die Teleutosporen der turkestanischen Exemplare unterscheiden sich von den amerikanischen (Rabh.-Winter, Fg. eur. 3505) nur durch dunklere Färbung und die mehr abgerundete Form der unteren Zelle. Puccinia punctata Link sensu lato. In Asperula humifusa Bess. (12, sub P. Asperulae Fuckel). — Teleuto- und Uredosporen. Ur. mit 2 Keimporen. LE — 156 — Puccinia Cousiniae Sydow. In foliis Cousiniae triflorae Schrenk. (13, sub. P. Cirsii Lasch.) — Teleuto- und Uredosporen. Ur. mit 3 Keimporen. Puccinia expansa Link. In foliis Ligulariae altaicae DC. (16 sub P. conglomerata L. et K.) Uromyces Polygoni (Pers.) Fuckel. In foliis Polygoni (Bellardi?). (8, sub Puccinia Polygoni Pers.). — Uredo- und Teleutosporen. Uromyces Glycyrrhizae (Rabh.) Magnus. In foliis Glycyrrhizae sp. (18, sub Uromycete Astragali Sace. in foliis Astragali sp.) — Primäre Uredosporen, mit je 2 Keimporen. „Gymnosporangium juniperinum (L.) Fr.* In ramis et galbulis Juniperi pseudosabinae F. et M. In montibus Alai, ad Olgin-Lug. N 514 (20). — Diesen Pilz habe ich nicht gesehen, doch wird es kaum die genannte Art sein. Die von mir im J. 1900 im Alai-Gebirge gesammelten Gymnosporangium-Arten habe ich, wegen Mangel an Vergleichsmaterial der amerikanischen Arten, nicht bestimmen können. Auf Juniperus pseudosabina habe ich mehrfach eine Gymnosporangium-Art gefunden, welche kuglige grosse harte Gallen erzeugt, ähnlich wie es Kern (Torrey Botan. Club, 34, 1907) für sein @. durum aus Colorado beschreibt. In Olgin-Lug habe ich am 29. Juli 1900 ein Aecidium auf Sorbus tianschanica gefunden, welches ich aber nicht für identisch mit dem Aecidium von @. juniperinum ansehen kann. Melampsora Tremulae Tul. sensu lato. In foliis Populi euphraticae Oliv. (21, sub M. populina Lev., uredosp.). In foliis ramulisque Populi albae L. (22, sub M. aecidioides Schröter, uredosp.) — Uredosporen fast kuglig, ellipsoidisch oder eiförmig, Membran derselben dicker als in euro- päischen Exemplaren. Melampsora Helioscopiae (Pers.) Cast. sensu lato. In foliis Zu- phorbiae blepharophyllae C. A.M. (nec. E. pilosae L.). (23). Eine besondere Form, die ich auch im Ferghana-Gebiete gesammelt habe. Sori teleu- tosporarum nigerrimi, nitentes, in placas magnas rotundatas circa soras uredosporiferos confluentes; teleutosporae prismaticae, 37 —60 y plerumque longae, 13 y latae, membrana sat crassa, apice obscuriore vix incrassata indutae. Aecidium Ixiolirionis Komarov. (Scripta bot. horti Universitatis Imp. Petropolitanae, T. IV, Fasc. II, 1895, p. 269). Sicher ist das von Rostrup l.c. (25) auf Ixiolirion tataricum Schult. beschriebene Aecidium tatari- cum identisch mit der Komarov-schen Art aus Samarkand. Aecidium sp. indeterminabile. In foliis Umbelliferae. (29, sub Aec. Pimpinellae Kirchn.) — Die Nährplanze scheint eine Carwm- oder Sealigeria-Art zu sein. In der von E. Rostrup als Puccinia Pimpinellae (Str.) Lk. (10) und Pleospora herbarum (Pers.) Rbh. (46) auf Zosimia tragioides Boiss. be- stimmten Probe habe ich eine Puceinia nicht finden können. Dagegen fand ich einen Hyphomycet mit braunen glatten Sporen. Die Sporen sind meist 2-zellig, in der Mitte eingeschnürt (circa 20—15 y), häufig 1-zellig, zuweilen 3-zellig, wobei zwei neben einander stehende Zellen über der dritten stehen. Diesen Hyphomycet hat wohl Rostrup für eine Puccinia gehalten. Auch konnte man auf dürren (vorjährigen?) Blattstielen zu- sammen mit Pleospora herbarum kaum eine Puccinia erwarten. 3. Salix. Determ. O. v. Seemen, Berlin. 1. Salix glauca L. (?) (leaves only). Pamir: N. 1051, on the shore of Jashil Kul. Alt. 3800™. Aug. 5. 1898. 2. Salix repens L. var. rosmarinifolia (L.) 9. Pamir: N.812, in a meadow at the Alitschur river. Alt. 3800 2. July 18. 1898; N. 953, at the lake Jashil Kul. Alt 3800™. July 25. 1898. 3. Salix angustifolia Willd. 9. Chiwa: N. 2015 at Kiptjak July 24. 1898. 4. Salix angustifolia Willd. var. carmanica (Born.) (leaves only) S. carmanica Born. Pamir: N. 1333, in the bed of the Pändsch-river at Langarkisht. Alt. 3000™. Sept. 9. 1898. (A shrub, 3—5 high.). Transcaspia: N. 1826, in an island in Amu Daria near Tshardshui. June 19. 1899. (A shrub | —2™ high). 5. Salix Wilhelmsiana (M. Bieb.) Trautv. (Det. O. P.) (leaves only). Chiwa: N. 1997, in an island in Amu Daria. July 23. 1899 (white-hairy). 6. Salix oxycarpa Anders. Pamir: N. 735: Jaman Tal near Pamirski Post. Alt. 3800™. July 12. 1898. (Shrub 4—5™ high.) 7. Salix zygostemon Bois.? (leaves only). — 158 — Pamir: N. 1269, 1270, at Kisil Krashim near Pamir Daria. Alt. 3800™. Sept. 6. 1898. 8. Salix coerulea Wolf. 9. Ist von Wolf selbst als S. coerulea bestimmt, trotzdem nach der von ihm gegebenen Diagnose (Englers Jahrb. XXXII (1903) 275) die Frucht- knoten kahl oder mit behaartem Stielchen sein sollen, hier aber in oberer Teil kurz behaart, später verkahlend sind. Alai montains: N. 395, at Kisil Kurgan. Alt. 2100”. June 18. 1898. (A high tree). 9. Salix alba L. (det. O. P.) (leaves only). Transcaspia: N. 193, at Tshardshui. May 13. 1898. Pamir: N. 1361, at Langarkisht in Wakhan. Alt. 3000”. Sept. 13. 1898. 4. Corrections. By Ove Paulsen. In what follows I give some corrections to names previously published. After the name of the family is given the name of the author who identi- fied the plants, and the place where his work was published. Under each species is first given the correct name and thereafter the name under which it was published. Where not otherwise stated the correc- tions are due to myself. Caryophyllaceae. (H. Winkler in Vidensk. Meddelelser fra d. naturhist. Foren i Koben- havn 1901). ? Arenaria Ledebouriana Fenzel. (det. O. P.) — A. Paulseni H. Winkl. n. sp. Arenaria Meyeri Fzl., O. Fedtschenko fl. du Pamir p. 61. -— A. glauce- scens H. Winkl. n. sp. Cerastium trigynum Vill., O. Fedtschenko fl. du Pamir p. 63. — C. schizopetalum H. Winkl. n. sp. Cerastium trigynum Vill. var. glandulosum Ldb., O. Fedtschenko fl. du Pamir p. 64. — C. argaeum Bois., H. Winkl. Gypsophila cephalotes Schrenk., B. A. Fedtschenko, fl. sap. Tian-Schan p. 208. — G. planifolia H. Winkl. n. sp. G. fastigiata L. var. cephalotes (Schrenk) Ldb., O. Fedtschenko fl. du Pamir p. 57. Gypsophila pseudoverticillata Komarow, Trav. soc. Natural. St.-Pétersb. Seet. de Bot. 26. 1896. p. 123. — Pamir: on the top of a moun- tain near Jashil Kul. Alt. 4100», Aug. 11. 1898 (N. 1101.) Saponaria Griffithiana Bois., O. Fedtschenko fl. du Pamir p. 58. — S. silenoides H. Winkl. n. sp. — u — Chenopodiaceae. (0. Paulsen in: Vidensk. Meddelelser fra. d. naturhist. Foren. i Koben- havn 1903.) Salsola incanescens C. A.M. — Salsola sp. Paulsen. Compositae. (0. Hoffmann in: Vidensk. Meddelelser fra d. naturhist. Foren. i Ksben- havn 1903.) Artemisia rupestris L. var. (det. Ostenfeld.) — A. minor Jacquem., O. Hoffmann. Leontopodium alpinum Cass. — O.Fedtschenko, premier suppl. p. 12. — L. sibiricum Cass., O. Hofmann. Serratula procumbens Rgl. O. Fedtschenko, prem. Suppl. p. 13. — Jurinea Paulsenii O. Hoffm. n. sp. Cruciferae. W. J. Lipsky in: Vidensk. Meddelelser fra 1. naturhist. Foren. i Koben- havn 1903.) Draba fladnizensis Wulf. Mr. Ostenfeld tells me that N. 576 of my collection, taken in the Alai mountains at Olgin Lug, is a typical D. fladnizensis. quite like arctic specimens. Of other specimens of my collection, like this identified by Mr. Lipsky as D. Kizil-Arti (Korsh.), N. 1247 is D. alpina and N. 1247 and N. 1011 are very like D. fladnizensis, different by numerous stellate hairs. The latter are all from the Pamirs. Labiatae. (J. Briquet in: Botanisk Tidsskrift 28.) Mr. Briquets conception of a species seems to be narrower than that ordinary maintained by the florists who have written on the flora of Asia- Media. By the following I only want to show that some of the species created by Mr. Briquet according to the view which has hitherto ruled belong to older species. Dracocephalum discolor Bge. — D. Paulsenii Brig. n. sp. Dracocephalum heterophyllum Benth. — D. pamiricum Brig. n. sp. Dracocephalum stamineum Kar. Kir. — D. pulehellum Brig. n. sp. Elsholtzia densa Bth. (det. W. J. Lipsky). — Paulseniella pamirica Briquet gen. et sp. nov. PT gue Leguminosae. My plants of this family were first determined by the late Mr. Freyn in Prague. They form a part of his work: Plantae ex Asia Media, in Bulletin de l’Herbier Boissier, 2 Sér., VI. Later, the Leguminosae were in St. Petersburg, where Mr. W. J. Lipsky has re-identified them. This was necessary, because Mrs. and Mr. Fedtschenko had published many new species before the edition of Freyns work. The following is a list of all my species. The names given by Lipsky are communi- cated, acompanied by Freyn's, when these are different. Albizzia Julibrissin Bth. — Persia, prov. Gilan in forests at Resht. Sept. 13. 1889 (N. 2145). Ammodendron Conollyi Bge. — A. Karelini F.&M., Freyn. — Trans- caspia: in desert at Karaul-Kuju. June 2. 1899 (N. 1748). Astragalus alatavicus Kar. & Kir. — Pamir: Moist slopes near Jashil Kul. Alt. 40007, July 29. 1898 (N. 984). Astragalus Alitschuri B. Fedtsch. — A. enantiotrichus Freyn n. sp. — Pamir: dry plains at Jashil Kul. Alt. 3800". July 21. 1898. (N. 849). Ibid., moister places. Aug. 13. 1898 (N. 1109). Astragalus Alopecias Pall. — Samarkand: in steppe at Chawast. May 23. 1898 (N. 278). Astragalus alpinus L. — A. (Hemiphragmium) ferghanicus Freyn n. sp. (N. 357). — A (Hemiphragmium) olginensis Freyn n. sp. (N. 440). Ferghana: Issik Bulak near Osh. June 16. 1898. (N. 357). — Alai mountains: in Juniper forest at Olgin Lug. Alt. 2600". June 20. 1898. Astragalus ammotrophus Bge. — Buchara, at Kujumasar. May 13. 1898 (N. 183). Astragalus Beketowi (Krassn.) B. Fedtsch. — A. (Hemiphragmium) polychromus Freyn n. sp. — Pamir: at Muskol. Alt. 4300”. July 2. 1898 (N. 665). Astragalus brachytropis Bge. — Pamir: at Jashil Kul. Alt. 3800», Aug. 5. 1898 (N. 1052); at Bulung Kul. Aug. 25. 1898 (N. 1165); at the Alitshur-river. Alt. 39007, July 16. 1898 (N. 806). Astragalus campylorhynchus F. & M. — Ferghana, at Gultsha. Alt. 1600™. June 17. 1898 (N. 374). Astragalus campylotrichus Bge. — A. kunigudensis Freyn n. sp. — Samarkand: in steppe at Kunigud. May 10. 1898 (N. 148). Astragalus Danieli Kochii Freyn. Alai steppe. June 27. 1898 (N. 589). Astragalus dendroides Kar. & Kir. — Astragalus sp., Freyn. — Ferghana: on a mountain near Ozh. April 10. 1899 (N. 1618). — 161 — Astragalus dolichopodus Freyn. — Pamir: dry plains at Jashil Kul. Alt. 3800”, July 22. 1898 (N. 866). Astragalus filicaulis F. & M. A. rytilobus Bge? sec. Freyn. — Samarkand: in steppe at Kunikud. May 10. 1898 (N. 146). Astragalus lasiopetalus Bge. — Ferghana: in cultivated land at Margelan. May 27. 1898 (N. 285). Astragalus lasiosemius Bois. — Oxytropis aculeata Korsh. Astr. (Aega- cantha) latistylus Freyn n. sp. — Pamir: on dry mountains near Jashil Kul. Alt. 4000™. July 18. 1898 (N. 814); — ibid., on dry plains. July 22. 1898 (N. 865). Astragalus macronyx Bge. — A. (Myobroma) samarkandinus Freyn n. sp. Samarkand: in steppe at Balan Hur. May 6. 1898 (N. 107). Astragalus macrotropis Bge. — A. affinis A. Lorinseriano Freyn sed diversus (sec. Freyn). Ferghana: Near Osh. April 18. 1898 (N. 1648 b.) Astragalus macrotropis Bge. var. robustus Lipsky. — A. (Xiphidium) Lorinserianus Freyn n. sp. — Alai mountains: at Sufi Kurgan. Alt. 2400™. June 18. 1898 (N. 412). Astragalus mucidus Bge. — A. (Myobroma) serafschanicus Freyn n. sp. — Samarkand: in steppe at Balan Hur. May 6. 1898 (N. 111). Astragalus Muschketowi B. Fedtsch. — Pamir: at Sary mullah. Alt. 4100%, July 5. 1998 (N. 681); dry mountains at Shatshan. Alt. 3800”, July 11. 1898 (N. 730). Astragalus myriophyllus Bge. — A. (Myobroma) alaicus Freyn n. sp. Alai mountains: in Juniper forest at Olgin Lug. Alt. 2600”. June 24. 1898 (N. 536). Astragalus nivalis Kar. & Kir. — A. orthanthus Freyn n. sp., non A. Gray. — Pamir: at Kara Su. Alt. 3700, July 12. 1898 (N. 754), on moist slopes near Jashil Kul. Alt. 3800”. Aug. 13. 1898 (N. 1103.) Astragalus oophorus Freyn. Pamir: on dry plains near Jashil Kul. Aug. 4. 1898 (N. 1026.) Astragalus ophiocarpus Bth. — A. (Ophiocarpus) Paulsenii Freyn n. sp. Pamir: dry plains at Shatshan. Alt. 3300". July 11. 1898. (N. 731.) Astragalus orbicularis Ldb. — A. orbiculatus Ldb. sec. Freyn. — Buchara: in cultivated land. May 15. 1898 (N. 208.) Astragalus pamiricus B. Fedtsch. — A. (Myobroma) chargushanus Freyn n. sp. — Pamir: in the Chargush-pass. Alt. 4300”. Sept. 3. 1898. Astragalus pamiro-alaicus Lipsky. — A.tianschanicus Bge v. pamiricus B. Fedtsch., partim. — A. pamiricus B. Fedtsch., partim. — A. mendax Freyn n. sp. — A. andaulgensis B. Fedtsch. — A. chlorodontus Korsch. non Bge., et caet. — Alai mountains: in Juniper forest at Olgin Lug. Alt. 2600”. June 20. 1898 (N. 438.) re Astragalus platyphyllus Kar. & Kir. — A. (Cystium) sykensis Freyn n. sp. — Ferghana: Issik Bulak near Osh. June 16. 1898 (N. 351.) Astragalus Scheremetewianus B. Fedtsch. — A. (Macropodium) Lipsky- anus Freyn n.sp. — Pamir: near Jashil Kul. Alt. 3300". July 28. 1898 (N. 977); ibid. Aug. 8. 1898 (N. 1075.) Astragalus secundus DC. — A. frigidus Bge var. exaltatus Ldb. A. tecti mundi Freyn n. sp. — Pamir: at a river at Kisil Krashim near Pamir Daria. Alt. 3600”. Sept. 5. 1898 (N. 1260.) Astragalus sogdianus Bge. — A. Xanthoxiphidium Freyn & Sint. n. sp. — Samarkand: in steppe at Balan Hur. May 6. 1898 (N. 106.) Astragalus tibetanus Bth. — A. Olufsenii Freyn n. sp. — Pamir: at Bulung Kul. Alt 3800”. Aug. 25. 1898 (N. 1168); at Jashil Kul. Alt. 3800. July 28. 1898 (N. 973). — Alai steppe: Alt. 3300". June 27. 1898 (N. 589b). — Alai mountains: at Sufi Kurgan. Alt. 2100”. June 18. 1898 (N. 421.) Astragalus unifoliatus Bge. — Buchara: in desert at Ustyk. June 19. 1899 (N. 1832.) Caragana jubata Poir. — Alai: Bordo-bä at the Alai-steppe. March 26. 1899. (N. 1607.) Cicer pungens Bois. — Pamir: near Jashil Kul. Alt. 3800", July 24. 1898 (N. 890). Ibid. Alt. 4000”. Aug. 6. 1898 (N. 1057.) Cicer songoricum DC. var. pamiricum Lipsky: Villoso-glandulosissimum ecirrhosum, stipulis triangularibus quam foliola majoribus, foliolis 3—8-jugis breviter dentatis, dentibus triangularibus brevibus, foliolo apicali subtrifido. Calyx corolla 21/2 brevior, laciniis late lanceolatis. — Ab anatolico differt: villosior et glandulosior, foliolis latioribus et obtusius dentatis, calycis laciniis latioribus, stipulis latis quam foliola latioribus triangularibus (W. Lipsky.) — C. songoricum var. imparipinnatum Rgl. & Herd., Freyn. — Pamir: at Jashil Kul. Alt. 3800, Aug. 13. 1898 (N. 1104.) Eremosparton aphyllum F. & Mey. — Transcaspia: in desert at Karaul-kuju. June 2. 1889 (N. 1747.) Gleditschia caspica Desf. — Persia: prov. Gilan, in forests at Resht. Sept. 14. 1899 (N. 2158.) Glycyrrhiza glabra L. var. asperula Rgl. & Herd. — G. hirsuta Pall., Freyn. — At the river Amu Daria. June (N. 1874,1810.) Glycyrrhiza glabra L. var. glandulifera Rgl. & Herd. — G. asperrima L. f. var. desertorum Rgl. & Herd., Freyn. — Pamir: prov. Wakhan, at Langarkisht. Alt. 3000™. Sept. 8. 1898 (N. 1276). Ibid. Sept. 10. 1898 (N. 1349.) — 163 — Colutea persica Bois. var. Buhsei Bois. — C. Paulseni Freyn n. sp. — Pamir: prov. Goran, at Seis. Alt. 2600™. Oct. 5. 1898 (N. 1459.) Goebelia alopecuroides (L.) Bge. — Ferghana, at Margelan. May 27. 1898 (N. 293). — Buchara: insand. May 23. 1899 (N. 1698.) Goebelia pachycarpa (C. A.M.) Bge. — Buchara: in desert at Jakatut. May 13. 1898 (N. 189.) Halimodendron argenteum DC. — Many places in the low land. — Pamir: prov. Goran, at Seis. Alt. 2600™. Oct. 5. 1898 (N. 1460.) Hedysarum cephalotes Franchet subsp. pamiricum B. Fedtsch. — Pamir: dry plains at Sary Mullah. Alt. 4000™. July 5. 1898 (N. 677.) Hedysarum cephalotes Franch. subsp. shugnanicum B. Fedtsch. — Pamir: dry plains at Jashil Kul. Alt. 3800™. July 21. 1898 (N. 841.) Hedysarum pumilum (Ldb.) f. Poncinsii Franch. (det. B. Fedtschenko). — H. Poncinsii Franchet, Freyn. — Pamir: dry plains at Kisil Krashim. Alt. 4000™. June 29. 1898 (N. 629) Hedysarum songoricum Bong. var. montanum B. Fedtsch. (det. B. Fedtschenko). — H. baldschuanicum Fedtsch. sec. Freyn. — Fer- ghana: Issik Bulak near Osh. June 16. 1898 (N. 348.) Kostyczewa trifoliata Korsch. — Ferghana: at Gultsha. Alt. 1600", June 17. 1898 (N. 372.) Lathyrus pratensis L. — Pamir: prov. Goran, at Kuh-i-lal. Alt. 26007. Oct. 14. 1898 (N. 1521.) Medicago lupulina L. — M. Willdenowii Boenn., Freyn. — Pamir, prov. Wakhan, in cultivated land at Sermut. Alt. 2800”. Sept. 23. 1898 (N. 1417). — Ferghana: at Gultsha. Alt. 1600™. June 17. 1898 (N. 371.) Melilotus officinalis Desv. — Pamir: prov. Wakhan, in cultivated land at Langarkisht. Alt. 3000™. Sept. 8. 1898 (N. 1298.) Onobrychis pulchella Schrenk. — Ferghana: Agh Jer prope Osh. June 16. 1898 (N. 368.) Oxytropis bella B.Fedtsch. — O. trichosphaera Freyn n. sp. — Pamir: dry plains near Jashil Kul. Alt. 3800", Aug. 21. 1898 (N. 845.) Oxytropis glabra DC. — Khiva: in sand. July 2. 1899 (N. 1916). — Pamir: at Bulung Kul. Alt. 3800™. Aug. 25. 1898 (N. 1167). The latter is according to Freyn: O. lapponica Gaud. Oxytropis glabra DC. var. pamirica B. Fedtsch. — Pamir: at Jashil Kul. Alt. 3800™. July 23.1898 (N. 881); at Kara Kul. Alt. 4000™. July 1. 1898 (N. 649). These have been identified by Freyn: N. 881 as O. hirsutiuscula Freyn n.sp., N. 649 as O. lapponica Gaud. f. minuta. — 164 — Oxytropis humifusa Kar. & Kir. — Alai mountains: in Juniper forest at Olgin Lug. Alt. 2600™. June 20. 1898 (N. 430). — Pamir: dry plains at Sary Mullah. Alt. 4100», July 5. 1898 (N. 676). These have been identified by Freyn: N. 430 as O. lapponica Gaud. var. cana Freyn, N. 676 as O. merkensis Bge. Oxytropis immersa (Bak.) Bge. in hb. — O. incanescens Freyn n. sp. (vel potius subsp.). — Pamir: dry mountains near Jashil Kul. Alt. 3800”, July 18. 1898 (N. 819). Ibid. (moister places) Aug. 1. 1898 (N. 1009.) Oxytropis Poncinsii Franch. ©. introflexa Freyn n. sp. — Pamir: at Rabat I. Alt. 4300™. July 3. 1898 (N. 670); dry plains at Jashil Kul. Alt. 3800", Aug. 4. and 17. 1898 (N. 1027 and 1119); Tshatir Tash. Alt. 4000™. July 14. 1898 (N. 778.) Oxytropis tibetica Bge. O. chiliophylla Royle in O. Fedtschenko fl. du Pamir. O. polyadenia Freyn n. sp. — Valde affinis O. microphyllae Pall. — Pamir: dry mountains at Kara Kul. Alt. 4000™. July 1. 1898 (N. 653); dry plains at Sary Mullah. Alt. 4100™. July 5. 1898 (N. 678.) Oxytropis vermicularis Vreyn. — Pamir: dry plains at ,Kisil Kul‘. Alt. 4000™. June 29. 1898 (N. 631.) Prosopis Stephaniana Spr. At Merw. June 3. 1899. Smirnowia turkestana Bge. -- Transcaspia: in desert at Repetek. June 2. 1899 (N. 1750). Spaerophysa salsula DC. — Ferghana: at Andidshan. May 28. 1898 (N. 311). — Buchara: at Chok-i-Mullamir. May 25. 1899 (N. 1706). — Chiwa: at Kunja Urgentsh. July 30. 1899. Trifolium fragiferum LL. — At Chiwa and Merw. 1899. Trifolium pratense L. — Pamir: prov. Ishkashim, in cultivated land at Nut. Alt. 2700, Oct. 3. 1898 (N. 1457.) Trifolium repens L. — Chiwa. 1899. Trifolium resupinatum L. var. majus Bois. — Chiwa. July 1899. Trigonella Emodi Bth. — Pamir: at Kara-su. Alt. 3700”, June 12. . 1898 (N. 748); dry plains at Jashil Kul. Alt. 3500%. June 21. 1898 (N. 846.) Trigonella grandiflora Bge. — Samarkand: in steppe at Kunikud. May 10. 1898 (N. 149). — Ferghana: near Osh. June 10. 1899 (N. 1627). (N. 149: T. eremophila Freyn n. sp.) Trigonella monantha C. A.M. — Transcaspia: in steppe at Bami. April 24. 1898 (N. 50.) Vicia hyrcanica F. & M. ‘Tashkent, at Tshinas. May 10. 1898. Vicia sativa L. Tashkent, at Tshinas. May 10. 1898 (N. 140.) — 165 — Vicia subvillosa (Ldb.) Bois. — V. iranica Bois.? Freyn. — Ferghana: on a mountain near Osh. April. 1899 (N. 1648 A.) Vicia tenuifolia Roth. -— V. branchitropis Kar. & Kir.? sec. Freyn. — Ferghana: at Gultsha. Alt. 1600”. June 17. 1898 (N. 392.) Primulaceae. (O. Paulsen in: Botanisk Tidsskrift 27.) Primula nivalis Pall. var. macrocarpa (Watt.) Pax, ın Kunth & Pax: Primulaceae (Das Pflanzenreich) p. 104. — P. Stuartii Wall., Paulsen. Primula nivalis Pall. var. macrophylla (Don) Pax, ibid. p. 103. — P. nivalis Pall., Paulsen. — Mr. Ostenfeld has shown me that, according to the work of Kunth and Pax, my Pamir-Primulae are to be named as above. Ranunculaceae. (C. H. Ostenfeld in: Vidensk. Meddelelser fra d. naturhist. Foren. i København 1901.) Ranunculus flexicaulis Komarow. Trav. soc. nat. St. Pb. 26. 1896. p. 55. — R. alaiensis Ostenfeld n. sp. — Alai steppe. June 27. 1898 (N. 596.) Scrophulariaceae. (O. Paulsen in: Botanisk Tidsskrift 27.) The following corrections I owe to Mr. J. Stadlmann of Vienna, who has been kind enough to revise my Pedicularis. Pedicularis dubia B. Fedtsch..— P. achilleaefolia Steph., Paulsen. Pedicularis pycnantha Bois. (an sp. nov.) — P. interrupa Steph., Paulsen. Tamaricaceae. (O. Paulsen in: Botanisk Tidsskrift 27.) Reaumuria fruticosa Bge. (det. Litwinow, Florae turk. fragm. II, trav. Mus. Ac. III, 1906, p. 23). — Salsola foetida (Mog.) Del., Paulsen. KBll. BIANCO LUNO Br FR ER SER en HÆRE 2077 ASSET 0 Un fr TRA “FORTE IR | LA NT i , > walter! + ied Arbejder fra den Botaniske Have i København. Nr. 49. The Structure and Biology of Arctic Flowering Plants. I. Reprinted from ,MEDDELELSER OM GRÖNLAND“ Vol. XXXVI. Copenhagen. Printed by Bianco Luno. 1909. EN ee gate Hoi HET 4 An dred ns à: 3. Empetraceae. Empetrum nigrum L. By A. Mentz. 1909. The greater part of the material upon which the following description has been based was brought home by different collectors from West and East Greenland, but some of it came from Iceland, the Ferées and Finmark; it is the property of the Botanical Museum in Copenhagen. On the basis of this material, I have tried to show the peculiarities which characterize Empetrum nigrum in Arctic regions. As this is best done by comparison with the features this plant presents when growing in a cold temperate climate, e. g. in Denmark, I have, during these investigations, utilized also the material which I had previously collected in Danish localities. The following literature has been consulted: — 1. ÅBROMEIT, J., 1899: Botanische Ergebnisse der... unter Leitung Dr. v. Drygalski ausgesandten Grenlandsexpidition. B. Samenpflanzen. Bibl. bot. 42. 2. ANDERSSON, G. and HESSELMAN H., 1900: Bidr. till kännedomen om Spits- bergens och Beeren Eilands kärlväxtflora. Bih. t. K. Sv. V. A. Handl. 26. Afd. II. No. 1. BÖRGESEN, F., 1895: Bidrag til Kundskaben om arktiske Planters Blad- bygning. Botanisk Tidsskrift. 17. 4. CLEVE, Asrrip, 1901: Zum Pflanzenleben in Nordschwedischen Hochge- birgen. Bih. t. K. Sy. V. A. Handl. 26. Afd. Ill. No. 15. 5. Dusty, P., 1901: Zur Kenntniss der Gefasspflanzen Ost-Gronlands. Ibid. 27. Afd. III. 6. Hacuunv, E., 1905: Ur de högnordiska vedväxternas ekologi. Uppsala. 7. Hartz, N. E. K., 1894: Botanisk Rejseberetning fra Vest-Grenland 1889 og 1890. Medd. om Grønland. XV. 8. —, 1895: Ost-Grenlands Vegetationsforhold. Ibid. XVIII. 9. JUNGNER, 1894: Klima und Blatt in der Regio alpina. Flora. ‚10. Kintman, A. O., 1890: Pflanzenbiol. Stud. aus Russ. Lappland. Acta co soc. pro fauna et flora fenn. VI. No. 3. co 11. KoLpEerup RosENVINGE, L., 1896: Det sydligste Grønlands Vegetation. 5 Medd. om Grenland. XV. ~ 12. Linnman, C. A. M., 1887: Bidrag till kännedomen om skandinaviska fjällväxternas blomning och befruktning. Bih. t. K. Sv. V. A. Handl. 12. Afd. III. No. 6. 158 13. SCHROETER, C., 1904—1908: Das Pfianzenleben der Alpen. 14. SEGERSTEDT, P., 1894: Stud. öfver buskartede stammars skyddsvafnader. Bih. t. K. Sv. V. A. Handl. 19. Afd. II. No. 4. 15. Simmons, H. G., 1906: The vascular plants in the flora of Eilesmereland Report of the second Norwegian arctic expedition in the «Fram». 1898 — 1902. No. 2. 16. SKOTTSBERG, C., 1900: Einige blütenbiologische Beobachtungen in arkt. Teile vom Schwedisch Lappland. Medd. fran Stockholms högskola. No. 210. 17. SYLYÉN, N., 1906: Om de svenska Dikotyledonernas första forstarknings- stadium. 1. 18. WAGNER, A., 1892: Zur Kenntniss des Blattbaues der Alpenpflanzen und deren biolog. Bedentung. Sitzungsber. d. kaiserl. Akad. d. Wissenschaften in Wien. Mat.-naturw. Cl. C. I. Abth. I. 19. WARMING, E. 1878: Smaa biologiske og morfologiske Bidrag. Botanisk Tidsskrift. 10. 20. —, 1886—1887: Om Grønlands Vegetation. Medd. om Grønland. XII. 21. —, 1888: Biologiske Optegnelser om Grønlands Planter. 2. Botanisk Tidsskrift. 16. The primary root-system consists of a comparatively strong primary root, sometimes striking deep and branching less abundantly, sometimes striking less deep and freely putting out horizontally-growing roots. Afterwards short, abundantly- branching, adventitious roots proceed from the ereeping shoot- systems, but these roots are comparatively few in number. Root-hairs are absent. Mycorhizas appear to be rare. Only in a few instances, e. g. in material from Iceland, did I find mycorhizas—short, club-shaped, and with numerons mycelium-threads projecting from the surface. In the first period of growth the primary shoot attains only a slight length and remains unbranched; in seedlings collected by C. H. Ostexrerv at Øfjord in Iceland, on July 30, 1886, the epicotyl measured about 7 mm., while the hypocotyl and primary root together measured about 2°5 cm. It is pro- bable that the primary shoot does not branch until the second or third year. The lateral shoots of the young plant are transversely 159 geotropic in somewhat varying degrees; they lie indifferently upon the surface of the ground; and thus arises the mode of growth characteristic of Empetrum. Wherever circumstances are favourable, its long, creeping shoot-systems will spread out on all sides; the growth becomes decidedly espalier-like.! But unfavourable circumstances of locality, caused by the substratum or by competing plant-growth; or disadvantageous circumstances of light and wind; or possibly yet other factors, very often interfere with the regular development of the espalier-like growth. Besides the long, creeping shoots, short, erect ones also occur; sometimes on the more central portions of the single individuals, where upward growth of the new shoots is com- pulsory on account of circumstances pertaining to locality; sometimes where, in many habitats, the external conditions are such that the formation of short and erect shoots is in excess of that of the long and creeping shoots. We may reasonably assume that the yearly addition to the growth of the shoots is much less in an Arctic climate than in southern regions. Naturally, in all places, it is the creeping shoots which elongate the most; their internodes are longer and their leaf-whorls more numerous than are those of the short, erect shoots. But while the length-increment on Danish heaths often amounts to about 10 em., and sometimes even 14 or 15 cm., in Arctic regions the length of the long shoots is but 3—4 cm. at most, and often only 1—2 cm. Only in a single specimen (from Disko) did I find the increase to have been either 5 or 7 cm. These few cases, in which the length-incre- ment was greater, are doubtless due to special conditions of the habitat—especially damp and shady soil—and also favourable conditions regarding shelter. Unfortunately it is only rarely that travellers give any information regarding this point; but N. Harrz (in the Arctic Herbarium of the Botanical Garden) ! Warming's term for prostrate, outspread growth. 160 has given a few notes regarding some individuals from East Greenland, and writes: “very long year’s-shoots; damp and shady soil.” In that place the greatest length-increment proved to be 4 cm., with an average of about 2 cm. The yearly growth-increment of the short, erect shoot- systems is naturally always much less than that of the prostrate shoots, both in the regions of the far North and in cold temperate zones; and the difference of growth in the two regions is much slighter than is that of the long shoots. In Arctic regions the growth is less than one cm. Hacıuno (6,! p- 31), — who does not distinguish between the two kinds of vegetative shoots, but states that the vegetative shoots are “Jong shoots,’ — mentions that the growth of the year's- shoots on the heath at Vassijaure averaged one cm. in 1903, and that in the lowlands it was often 5—10 cm. This state- ment is, however, worthless, as the two kinds of shoots are not distinguished from each other. Kısıman (10, p. 226) reports the length of the year’s-shoots to be generally 1—2 cm., rarely 3 cm. When the connection between a branch-system and its mother-axis is severed, a kind of vegetative propagation may take place, but, as far as can be gathered from the literature which deals with the subject this mode of reproduction does not appear to be of great importance in the Arctic regions. Hasrunp alone mentions that on stony flats at Vassijaure it plays an important part, as the fruit often does not ripen there. While the year’s-shoot is quite young the epidermis is covered with numerous glandular hairs, which afterwards, and indeed fairly soon, fall off. Meanwhile, the outer walls of the epidermis thicken to a varying extent, and on the fully grown shoot, where these walls are very thick, more than one-half of them is formed by a cuticularized layer which also extends 7 The numerals refer throughout to the papers named in the list of literature. 161 into the lateral walls. Beneath the epidermis a hypoderm of 1—2 layers of cells occurs, the walls of which are somewhat thickened; the inner-walls may also be cuticularized. The primary bark consists principally of large, transparent cells, which are very thin-walled and devoid of chlorophyll, but contain numerous crystals. The bark, on the whole, has no important assimilatory tissue; its function is rather to retain water. The bark is limited internally by a distinct endodermis. Even during the first year, in the lowermost part of the shoot, cork-formation may begin from the pericycle. With age, the thin-walled bark-tissue curls up and is shed together with the hypoderm and the epidermis. The formation of the cork has been described by Sesersteor (14, p. 64). In the wood, the limits of the different annual rings can be distinctly seen. The vessels are very narrow, even narrower than those of the first year. The major portion of the wood consists of tracheids (see O. G. Petersen, Vedanatomi, p. 47). In relation to their age, the stems attain only a slight thickness in the Arctic regions; the width of the annual rings is naturally inconsiderable. Kırıman (10, p. 226) has examined some stems which were, on an average, 7—8 mm. in diameter, a few even 10—12mm., the average width of the annual rings at the point of their maximum growth-radius was 0°09 mm. Scuroerer (13, p. 178) cites some other measurements. Two instances from Greenland should be mentioned here. A stem from East Green- land, gathered by N. Hartz in 1900 (Liverpool coast, about 71° N. lat.), had a maximum radius of 4 mm., of which about half, the inner half, was darker coloured. The stem was about 55 years old, and the average width of the annual rings was 0°08 mm. From Ilona in South Greenland Mrs. Lusp#orm has sent stems of which the largest, a strongly twisted stem, had a maximum radius of about 8 mm.; the average width of the annual rings was 0°18 mm. The age of this stem was 35 years and more; but it cannot be given exactly, as the innermost XXXVI. 11 162 and lower parts were on the verge of decay. The cork-layer on these old stems is always thin and smooth. The peculiar, ericoid leaves of Empetrum occur sometimes very closely together, as on the short, erect shoots, and some- times at a distance (as much as 0°5 cm.) from each other, as on the longer, creeping shoots. The leaves are functional for about three years, but may persist for a longer time in a decaying and shrivelled-up condition. When the Empetrum-tufts or mats, even at a great age, present an abundance of leaves, this is due to the excessive and dense branching which always occurs under favourable conditions as regards shelter, etc. But in habitats where it is exposed to the influence of a constant and strong wind it assumes a very different appearance. Korperup Rosenvince (11, p. 188) describes such wind-affected individuals from bleak heaths in South Greenland. He writes that old plants present “a green border which surrounds an inner part consisting only of the old, crooked branches.” “The green borders are not developed all round, but only one side, in the form of a somewhat irregular, almost semi-circular curve.’ All the curves turn away from the direction of the prevailing wind. See photograph from the Kitsigsut-islands (p. 189, Fig. 9). After- wards Rosenvince describes and figures such wind-affected tufts of Empetrum (see p. 255 and Fig. 11) the leaves of which are very considerably reduced in number, and in which the for- mation of adventitious shoots is undoubtedly impossible on account of the influence of the wind. The leaves on the shoot of the current year are obliquely erect; on the shoot of the preceding year they are more spreading and stand out somewhat at right-angles, and on still older shoots they are usually twisted somewhat backwards. They are orientated by the torsions of the extremely short stalks so that they turn their surfaces upwards towards the light. Hacionp (6, p. 31) mentions, that the leaves are consider- 163 ably smaller on the stony flats at Vassijaure than in the lowlands, often only half as large, but comparatively broader. A somewhat similar effect may be observed in other Arctic regions, but it should be remembered that the development of the leaves is, to a very great extent, dependent upon the nature of the habitat, and that small, poorly developed leaves can as well occur on Danish heaths as on those in Arctic regions; or vice-versa, the leaves may be as well developed on Disko, for example, as in Denmark. Towards the apex of the shoots the leaves are very close-set. There is no other protection for the young leaf-rudiments than this dense crowding of the leaves.! As is well-known, the leaves expand long after the flowering of the plant; in Denmark, in April or early in May, but in the Arctic regions naturally much later still; thus as regards Greenland the leaves do not expand until some time in July (this statement is based on the material to hand; I have in vain searched in the literature upon the subject for information regarding the leaf-expansion). As a result, the shoots have only a very short time in which to grow, for during September, without doubt, all growth is stopped. It will easily be under- stood that, as mentioned above, the growth-increment can on the whole be but small. In connection with the fact that the leaves are evergreen, is their xerophylic nature; their peculiar structure is described by several authors, as GiBELLı, Gruser, Warning, Borcesen (3), Wasser (18), etc. The notes by Warne (20) and Börszser (3) on this subject are particularly interesting, because their investigations were carried out upon Arctic material; otherwise, 7 ENGLER (Die natürl. Planzenfam. Ill, 5, p. 127) says: — ‘‘Knospen- schuppen lang bewimpert.” But we cannot be justified in talking of budscales proper, although it is true that the leaves, when quite young, are furnished with long hairs, which are matted together very densely in the space above the shoot-apex; this may easily be ascertained by a median section through the apex of the shoot. 117 164 1 do not find any essential differences in the structure of leaves from Arctic and from non-Arctic regions (Fig. 1). As regards the upper surface and the flanks, the outer walls of the epidermis are thick and strongly cuticularized; and the cuticle is striped longitudinally; the lateral walls are wavy. The inner walls are characterized by a thick mucilagi- nous layer which is noticeable along the whole of the upper surface of the leaf and round the flanks, but ceases at the entrance to the well-known ‘‘cavily” of the underside, formed by the edges of the leaf closely approaching each other, being Fig. 1. Empetrum nigrum. Transverse section of a leaf; magnified. The parallel lines indicate the palisade-tissue, and the tinted part the spongy parenchyma with its lacune, indicated by white. K, Glandular hairs. Sp, Stomata. Disko. (A. M.) separated only by a narrow groove. This groove is closed with long hairs, densely matted together, whereby is formed, as has often been mentioned, ‘‘a calm space, free from wind.” Only in the cavity, which has thin outer-walls to its epidermal cells, do stomata occur; their number is great; they lie trans- versely to the length of the leaf and protrude slightly. Large glandular hairs occur in the cavity. The chlorophyll-tissue consists of 2—4 layers of very short palisade-cells and a rather lacunose spongy parenchyma. It is transversed by a large median vein and several lateral veins. As is well-known, the flowers of Empetrum are exceedingly 165 insignificant. They occur on small drawf-shoots in the axils of the leaves, usually singly, but sometimes 2—3 together. Only when a large number occur, clustered near the apex of the vegetative shoots (they are found both upon the creeping and the erect shoots), are they conspicuous, especially on account of their purple anthers. While in North and Central Europe it is a fact that bisexual flowers are met with only quite by chance, and also that the staminate flowers appear to be more numerous than the pistillate, yet, judging from the material to hand and the information contained in the literature dealing with the subject, ' it must be assumed that the flowers in Arctic regions are more frequently hermaphrodite than unisexual. As might be expected, flowering commences considerably later in the Arctic regions than in the cold temperate zones. While, in Denmark, it takes place during March or April, — the time differing somewhat according to the weather, and especially according to the amount of exposure, — we find it occurs later, the further northwards we proceed. In the Ferées, flowering is from April to the middle of May; in Iceland, at the end of May or the beginning of June; and in Greenland, at earliest and in the southern part, at the end of May, although no doubt usually during June; for, as might be expected, the time of flowering varies in the different districts of so large an area. There are some notes in the literature dealing with the subject, upon the time of flowering, especially in Greenland ; and the above observations are based upon these notes as well as upon the material to hand, viz. spirit-collections and herbarium specimens. There are notes from other Arctic regions on the times of flowering which illustrate this retardation, al- though otherwise they differ fairly widely as regards the time; 1 See especially SKOTTSBERG (16, p. 12). In addition to the authors given by SKOTTSBERG, may further be mentioned the following : — ABROMEIT (1), ANDERSSON and HESSELMAN (2), DuSEN (5). 166 for instance from Spitzbergen, late in July (19th and 23rd; Anpersson and Hesserman). On the whole, the nature of the habitat plays an exceedingly prominent part with regard to the late or early flowering in any particular district; but with respect to phenological statements which have not been care- fully illustrated and verified we cannot be too cautious; see Kırıman's remarks (10, pp. 54 and 55). The flowers are protandrous. Pollination undoubtedly takes place almost exclusively by the aid of the wind. E. Warmine (19, p. 116) was the first to give the reasons for this, and later Sxkorrspere has defined them more precisely; the reasons are: — the long filaments (according to my measurements normally 7—9 mm.), which are exceedingly thin (about 0°25 mm.), and have comparatively large anthers; the perfectly smooth pollen; the large, somewhat sticky stigmas, and several other features. SKOTTSBERG protests, with good reason, against LiypMan’s supposition (12, p. 35) that the flowers are sometimes entomophilous. The formation of the flowers for the next period of growth takes place very early; in material collected Sept. 5th (Kong Oskarsham) the flower-rudiments were one millemetre long, the length of the flower-rudiments in the spring in Arctic regions. Fruit seems to be borne abundantly by Empetrum in many Arctic regions, but it must develop more quickly than in the southern zones, if it is to become ripe. Warminc found young fruits “even in the beginning of July” (about 2 months later than in Denmark). He writes later: “In the beginning of August 1884 the fruit was almost ripe at Holstensborg” (21, p. 38). There is doubtless good reason to believe, that when circumstances are favourable for the development of the fruit, it ripens in August, attaining the same size as in Denmark (about 7 mm. in length and 8 mm. in breadth), and producing the same number of seeds capable of germination. 167 The further one proceeds northwards in the Arctic regions, he more imperfect is the development of the fruit, as might be expected; Warminc (20, p. 52) cites Vast, according to whom the fruit of Empetrum sometimes does not ripen in the distriet of Upernivik. Also other notes on the rudimentary development of the fruits are to be found in the literature dealing with the subject. In connection with this may be mentioned the very important information given by ÅNDERSSON and Hesserman (2, p. 31) when they write that the fruit of Empetrum was never observed in Spitzbergen and that, pre- sumably, it is sterile (?) there. Haczund (6, p. 31) says that on the stony flats at Vassijaure the fruit often does not ripen. Now, the variety (var. purpureum (Rafin.) DC.) described by Rarinesave, is it not just such a form, with imperfectly developed fruit? In addition to which it has been found only in Labrador, New Foundland, and in N. W. Greenland (see Simmons 15, pp. 42 —43). The fruit of Empetrum often persists through the winter and sometimes preserves an entire skin, and is juicy, etc.; it belongs to the ‘‘vinterständare.”! There is no doubt that the fruits are largely dispersed by the help of animals; both mammals (foxes, lemmings, and doubtless bears) and birds eat them in great quantities. Sem Bercer (Svensk botanisk Tidskrift, 1907) mentions that ptarmigans and black grouse especially play a prominent part in transporting the seeds of Empetrum. The old and, in itself, reasonable conjecture of Bucuenav that the seeds, in order to be able to germinate properly, must pass through an alimentary canal (B. says that of a bird), has not yet been verified by experiment. 1 SERNANDER'S term for plants, upon which the fruits remain throughout the winter (Den skandinav. vegetationens spridningsbiologi, p. 353). 20.—2.—1909. BR EN ag de à AL YTAN PEN MAUVE ne Ve whe ; “gr . v > à i ” f > * « RER UNI IN 3 5185 00274 6525 a à i i i SSS SSS nn Dm Hat SE : FREE RSR na Meere BEE 35 ee EN = == = Soe SS SS se Se = nae oes